sw2 gt1000 R e

R
Version 2
Screen Design Manual
1/2
(For GOT1000 Series)
GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual
Version 2
1/2
MODEL
SW2-GT1000-R-E
MODEL
CODE
1D7M25
SH(NA)-080530ENG-B(0503)MEE
HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in Japan on recycled paper.
1/2
SW2D5C-GTWK2-E
SW2D5C-GTD2-E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully
and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that failure to observe the

CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]

DANGER
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device
value, a current or set timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the
relevant manual to fully understand the operating procedures. When testing, never change the data
of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
A-1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

1. Required PC memory
The processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows on a personal computer of which main
memory capacity is less than 64M bytes. Make sure to secure the capacity of 64 M bytes or more.
2. Free capacity of hard disk (virtual memory)
At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software.
The processing may be terminated by Windows , if 100M bytes or more of free space cannot be secured
within hard disk while running GT Designer2.
Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software.
When enough free capacity cannot be secured, make sure to save projects frequently.
3. Error messages displayed while starting and editing
"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to
secure at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.
4. GT Designer2 and GOT display
(a) Cautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line, for example) in bold.
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer. However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does
not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon are displayed differently between
GT Designer2 and GOT.
On GT Designer2
On GOT
(c) Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different
between GT Designer2 and GOT.
(d) Drawing of different type lines
The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
The display position of the memory data display in graph function is different between GT
Designer2 and GOT.
Even if the display-start-line of a comment has been set, the comment will be displayed from the
first line on GT Designer2.
A-2
(f)
Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the
filled-paint may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200%
Position of Paint mark may be shifted and the

filled-paint may exceed the outline of the figure.
5. Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system environment (256
colors
2 colors)
The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a [red] rectangle-figure is changed to the 2 colors (B/W), the [red] color will
remain.
The colors of the image data (BMP format file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is
closed and that image data is double-clicked.
6. Object function and device type
The object (bit lamp or word lamp),for which bit device setting and word device setting are separated,
cannot be converted between bit device and word device.
7. When device type is changed
Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device.
The device flag may be represented as "??", depending on the settings .
Example: D0. b0
D0 D0.b5
??
8. OS setting
Set the font size as "Small Font" when setting OS (Windows ) screen.
The GT designer2 dialog box cannot be displayed correctly if the font size is set as "Large font".
9. When the toolbar icon appears in smaller size after startup of GT Desinger2
The toolbar icon may appear in smaller size right after GT Designer2 is started up.
To correctly display the icon, initialize it as instructed below.
(Click on [Project]
[References] from the menu, and select the toolbar tab. Click on Reset All button in
that tab.)
10. When using GT Designer2 in the PC in which the OS other than applicable language version
The text may not be displayed correctly depending on the OS versions; some version include the fonts
incompatible with GT Designer2 or GOT.
A-3
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date
Manual Number
Revision
Oct., 2004
SH(NA)-080530ENG-A
First Printing
Mar., 2005
SH(NA)-080530ENG-B
Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.09K.

Partical additions
Partical corrections
How to Use This Manual, Chapter 1, Section 3.1, 3.8, 4.1.3, 5.1, 7.3.5, 8.2.2,
8.2.5, 8.3.5, 8.6.5, 8.8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 15.7.2
Partical additions
Function Quick Reference, Section 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.2, 2.4, 2.5.3, 2.8.1,2.8.2, 3.3.1,
3.6, 3.6.1, 3.7, 4.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.3, 5.1.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 8.2.5 , 8.3.2,
8.4.7, 8.6, 8.6.6, 8.8, 8.8.4, 8.8.6, 9.1.1, 10.1.4
Additions
Section 3.10, 4.3, 9.1.2, 9.2.1, 9.2.2, Chapter 12, Section 13.2, 14.2, 14.3,
14.4, 14.5, 14.6, Appendix 4
Section 4.3 to 4.4
Section 9.1.2 to 9.1.6
Section 11.2
Section 12.2
Section 11.3
Section 11.2
Chapter 12 to 14
Apr., 2005
SH(NA)-080530ENG-C
Section 4.4 to 4.5
Chapter 13 to 15
Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.11M.

Partical additions
Section 3.2, 12.1, 12.2.3
A-4
Print Date
Manual Number
Oct., 2005
SH(NA)-080530ENG-D
Revision
Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.18U
Partial corrections
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL, Chapter 1, Section
2.7.3, Section 3.1, 3.2.2, 3.4, Section 5.2, Section 6.2.6, 6.2.10, Section 8.2.2,
8.2.6, 8.7.5, Section 12.3.5, Section 13.1.3, 13.1.
Partial additions
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.1, 2.3.2,
2.4, 2.5, 2.5.1, 2.5.3, Section 2.6.1, Section 2.7.1, 2.7.2, Section 2.8.1, 2.8.2,
Section 3.1.1 to 3.1.3, 3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.4.3, 3.5, 3.5.2, 3.6, 3.6.1, 3.6.4, 3.7.2,
3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.9, Section 4.1.1 to 4.1.12, 4.3, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, 4.5.5, Section 5.1.2,
5.1.3, 5.3.1, 5.3.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.3 to 6.2.5, 6.2.9, Section 7.1.3 to
7.1.5, 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 7.4.3, 7.5.3, 7.5.4, Section 8.2.5, 8.3.6, 8.8.4, Section
9.1.4, 9.1.5, 9.1.7, 9.2.5 to 9.2.7, Section 10.1.4, 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.3.4, 10.4.4,
10.5.4, 10.6.4, 10.7.4, Section 12.2.3, 12.3.4, Appendix1, Appendix5
Additions
Section 2.8, 2.11, Section 3.11, Section 7.3.5, Section 10.8, Section 11.3,
Section 14.4, 14.5, 14.6, 14.7, 14.8, 14.9, Appendix4
Section 2.8 to 2.9
Section 2.9 to 2.10
Section 7.3.5
Section 7.3.6
Section 14.1
14.2
Section 14.3
Section 14.2
Section 14.4
Section 14.1
Section 14.5
Section 14.3
Section 14.6
Section 15.3
Section 15.1 to 15.2
Chapter 15
Chapter16
Appendix4
Appendix5
Japanese Manual Version SH-080509-F

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of
using the contents noted in this manual.
2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................A - 2
REVISIONS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 4
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................A - 6
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................................................................A - 6
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE ..................................................................................................................A - 16
MANUALS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 27
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS....................................................................................................A - 28
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL........................................................................................................................A - 31
Screen Design Manual 1/2

1. OVERVIEW
1.1
1 - 1 to 1 - 2
Overview
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
Type/Number of Creatable Screens

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Figures and Data Capacity
2.3
Specifications of Applicable Characters
2-1
2-9
2 - 15
Fonts................................................................................................................................... 2 - 16
KANJI regions..................................................................................................................... 2 - 21
2.4
Specifications of Available Object Functions
2 - 24
2.5
Clock Function
2 - 40
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU ..................................................... 2 - 43

Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)............................................................ 2 - 47
PLC CPU equipped with clock............................................................................................ 2 - 49
Superimposition Settings
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
A-6
2 - 1 to 2 - 218
Base screen specifications ................................................................................................... 2 - 1

Window screen specifications............................................................................................... 2 - 2
Whole screen specifications ................................................................................................. 2 - 6
Data size of screen and project ............................................................................................ 2 - 8
2.2
2.3.1
2.3.2
1-1
2 - 52
Superimposition using layers.............................................................................................. 2 - 53

Superimposition using no layer........................................................................................... 2 - 61
Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input ....................... 2 - 65
2.7
Controller that can be monitored and the accessible range

2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
2.9
Controller that allows monitoring ........................................................................................ 2 - 69

Access range for monitoring ............................................................................................... 2 - 77
How to monitor QCPU redundant system .......................................................................... 2 - 94
Multi-channel Function
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
2 - 120
About multi-channel function ............................................................................................ 2 - 120

General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 2 - 122
Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 2 - 123
Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) ................................................ 2 - 125
Installing communication units on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) .. 2 - 132
Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 2 - 138
Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 2 - 140
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 2 - 142
Multi-channel function check sheet .................................................................................. 2 - 143
Supported Devices
2.9.1
2.9.2
2 - 69
2 - 145
GOT internal devices ........................................................................................................ 2 - 145

Device range available for GOT1000 series..................................................................... 2 - 175
2.10 Cautions for Object Setting
2 - 217
2.11 Precautions for Using Unicode text file
2 - 218
3. COMMON SETTING
3.1
GOT/PLC Type Setting

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3 - 26
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 27
Password setting items....................................................................................................... 3 - 28
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 33
System Information Setting

3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3 - 21
Setting ................................................................................................................................ 3 - 22
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 24
Password Setting
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3 - 13
Methods of switching station No. ........................................................................................ 3 - 13

Relevant settings ................................................................................................................ 3 - 16
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 17
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 18
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 20
Setting Language Switching Device

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3-6
Settings................................................................................................................................. 3 - 9
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 10
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 12
Switching Station No. Device Setting

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3-1
Settings................................................................................................................................. 3 - 1
Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Precautions........................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
Switching Screen Device Setting

3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3 - 1 to 3 - 96
3 - 34
List of relevant object items ................................................................................................ 3 - 42

Setting methods.................................................................................................................. 3 - 50
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 50
A-7
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.7
Communication Interface Setting

(Communication Settings)
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
3 - 59
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 59
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 60
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 84
Setting of GOT Display and Operations

(GOT Setup)
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.9
Application example............................................................................................................ 3 - 51
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 58
3 - 86
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 86
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 87
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 89
Setting GOT Clock Data (Clock Setting)
3.10 Setting the GOT Startup Logo
3 - 90
3 - 91
3.10.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 93
3.10.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 94
3.10.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 95
3.11 Handy GOT Setting
4. PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR OBJECT SETUP

4.1
Comment Registration
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.2
4.3
4.4
A-8
4 - 41
4 - 53
Before using BMP/JPEG file parts...................................................................................... 4 - 55

Storing a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card.............................................................. 4 - 56
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 57
Auxiliary Settings
4.4.1
4-1
Required knowledge for parts registration .......................................................................... 4 - 41

Basic operation for parts registration .................................................................................. 4 - 43
Registering parts................................................................................................................. 4 - 45
Copying the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 48
Deleting the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 49
Changing the registered parts settings ............................................................................... 4 - 50
Changing property of the registered parts .......................................................................... 4 - 51
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 52
Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4 - 1 to 4 - 97
Required knowledge for comment registration ..................................................................... 4 - 1

Displaying comment list dialog box....................................................................................... 4 - 4
Basic operations for comment registration ........................................................................... 4 - 7
Comment registration ......................................................................................................... 4 - 17
Registering comment group columns ................................................................................. 4 - 20
Copying or cutting a comment registered ........................................................................... 4 - 21
Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered ............................................................ 4 - 25
Deleting columns in comment group .................................................................................. 4 - 27
Changing registered comment settings .............................................................................. 4 - 28
Saving/Reading comments as file ...................................................................................... 4 - 30
Editing comment saved as Text/CSV file............................................................................ 4 - 34
Cautions for comment registration...................................................................................... 4 - 39
Parts Registration
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
3 - 96
4 - 58
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.5
Settings............................................................................................................................... 4 - 68
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 69
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 76
Key Window
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4 - 78
Key window type................................................................................................................. 4 - 78

Keys on default key window and display items .................................................................. 4 - 84
How to operate key window................................................................................................ 4 - 85
How to create user-created key window............................................................................. 4 - 87
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 97

5. COMMON SETTINGS FOR OBJECTS
5.1
Device Setting
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5 - 1 to 5 - 73
5-1
Device setting ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 1

Settings................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.2
Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
5 - 29
5.3
Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
5 - 30
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4
State Setting
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.5
5.7
5.8
Lamp Display
6.1.1
5 - 65
Security function setting ..................................................................................................... 5 - 72

Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 73
6. LAMP, SWITCH
6.1
5 - 61
Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 63

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 63
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 63
Security Function
5.8.1
5.8.2
5 - 55

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 59
Offset Function
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5 - 45

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 52
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
Data Operation Function

5.6.1
5.6.2
5 - 38
Display priority .................................................................................................................... 5 - 39

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 40
Example of state setting operation ..................................................................................... 5 - 43
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 44
Trigger Setting
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
Object arrangement ............................................................................................................ 5 - 30

Object shape setting ........................................................................................................... 5 - 32
Object size change ............................................................................................................. 5 - 35
6 - 1 to 6 - 87
6-1
Relevant settings .................................................................................................................. 6 - 2

A-9
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
Arrangement and settings..................................................................................................... 6 - 3

Setting items of bit lamp ....................................................................................................... 6 - 4
Setting items of word lamp ................................................................................................... 6 - 9
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 17
Touch Switch
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10

Arrangement and settings................................................................................................... 6 - 23
Setting items of bit switch ................................................................................................... 6 - 24
Setting items of data set switch .......................................................................................... 6 - 44
Setting items of special function switch .............................................................................. 6 - 48
Setting items of go to screen switch ................................................................................... 6 - 56
Setting items of change station No. switch ......................................................................... 6 - 67
Setting items of key code switch......................................................................................... 6 - 73
Setting items of multi action switch..................................................................................... 6 - 77
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 83
7. NUMERICAL/CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.1
Numerical Display/Numerical Input

7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
A - 10
7 - 56
7 - 75

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 78
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 81
Comment Display
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7 - 39

Before setting ASCII display/ASCII input............................................................................ 7 - 62
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 64
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 73
Clock Display
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7-1

Required knowledge for data list setting............................................................................. 7 - 41
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 44
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 55
ASCII Display/ASCII Input

7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7 - 1 to 7 - 105

Setting items of numerical display ...................................................................................... 7 - 11
Setting items of numerical input.......................................................................................... 7 - 21
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 35
Data List
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
6 - 18
7 - 82

Setting items of bit comment .............................................................................................. 7 - 85
Setting items of word comment .......................................................................................... 7 - 94
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 7 - 105
8. ALARM
8.1
Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8 - 170
Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 8 - 171

Before setting user alarm ................................................................................................. 8 - 172
Placement and settings .................................................................................................... 8 - 179
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 181
Touch switch for displaying user alarm ............................................................................ 8 - 187
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 8 - 190
System Alarm Display

8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.7.5
8 - 135

Before setting ................................................................................................................... 8 - 137
Useful information............................................................................................................. 8 - 141
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 152
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 164
User Alarm Display

8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
8 - 89

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 92
Useful information............................................................................................................... 8 - 96
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 105
Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display .............................................. 8 - 125
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 129
Advanced Alarm Popup Display

8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8 - 63

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 67
Placement and settings ...................................................................................................... 8 - 79
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 80
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 85
Advanced Alarm Display

(Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm)
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8 - 25

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 28
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 47
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 59
Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8-3
Alarm function..................................................................................................................... 8 - 15
Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................... 8 - 19
Advanced Alarm Observation

(Advanced User Alarm)
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.3
8 - 1 to 8 - 235
8 - 192
Related settings ................................................................................................................ 8 - 193

Before setting system alarm ............................................................................................. 8 - 194
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 197
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 199
A - 11
8.8
Alarm History Display

8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.8.4
8.8.5
8.8.6

Before setting alarm history display.................................................................................. 8 - 203
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 211
Description on touch switches for alarm history display ................................................... 8 - 230
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 8 - 234
9. PARTS
9.1
9.2
9 - 1 to 9 - 73
Parts Display
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
Panelmeter
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.2
10.3
10.4
A - 12

Required knowledge for level setting................................................................................ 10 - 17
Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 19
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 21
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 29
10 - 32

Required knowledge for trend graph setting..................................................................... 10 - 33
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 37
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 48
Line Graph
10.4.1
10.4.2
10 - 1
10 - 15
Trend Graph
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10 - 1 to 10 - 142

Required knowledge for panelmeter setting ....................................................................... 10 - 2
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 14
Level
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
9 - 35

Moving and displaying parts ............................................................................................... 9 - 37
Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen) .......................................... 9 - 45
Arrangement and setting .................................................................................................... 9 - 47
Setting items of bit parts movement ................................................................................... 9 - 48
Setting items of word parts movement ............................................................................... 9 - 55
Setting items of fixed parts movement................................................................................ 9 - 67
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 73
10. GRAPH, METER

10.1
9-1

Parts displaying method ....................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Setting items of bit parts display ......................................................................................... 9 - 10
Setting items of word parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 16
Setting items of fixed parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 27
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 32
Parts Movement
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
8 - 200
10 - 49

Required knowledge for line graph setting ....................................................................... 10 - 50
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.5
Bar Graph
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.4
10.5.5
10.6
10.8
Status Observation Function

11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.2
11.3
11 - 1 to 11 - 54
11 - 1

Settings............................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 11 - 4
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
Time Action Function

11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
10 - 118
Relevant settings ............................................................................................................ 10 - 119

Required knowledge for historical trend graph setting ................................................... 10 - 120
Arrangement and settings .............................................................................................. 10 - 124
Setting items ................................................................................................................... 10 - 125
Touch switches for historical trend graph operation ....................................................... 10 - 139
Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 141
11. TRIGGER ACTIONS

11.1
10 - 93

Required knowledge for scatter graph setting .................................................................. 10 - 95
Setting items ................................................................................................................... 10 - 102
Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 117
Historical Trend Graph

10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
10.8.6
10 - 80

Required knowledge for statistics graph setting ............................................................... 10 - 82
Arrangement and settings ................................................................................................ 10 - 83
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 84
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 92
Scatter Graph
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
10.7.5
10 - 66

Required knowledge for bar graph setting........................................................................ 10 - 67
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 70
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 79
Statistics Graph
10.6.1
10.6.2
10.6.3
10.6.4
10.6.5
10.7

Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 53
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 65
11 - 11
Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 11
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 12
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 15
Logging Function
11 - 17
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5

Before setting logging ....................................................................................................... 11 - 19
Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 36
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 37
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 50
12. RECIPE
12 - 1 to 12 - 74
12.1
Differences Between the Recipe Function and the Advanced Recipe Function
12 - 4
A - 13
12.2
Recipe Function
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.3

Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 15
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 16
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 25
Advanced Recipe Function

12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
12.3.4
12.3.5
Hard Copy
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.2
12 - 26
Before setting.................................................................................................................... 12 - 27
Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 59
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 60
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 68
13. EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT

13.1
12 - 12
13 - 1 to 13 - 17
13 - 1

Settings............................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 13 - 4
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 13 - 7
Bar Code Function
13 - 8
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5

Required knowledge for setting ........................................................................................ 13 - 10
Settings............................................................................................................................. 13 - 13
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 14
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 13 - 15
14. DEBUG
14 - 1 to 14 - 26
14.1
System Monitoring Function
14 - 1
14.2
Ladder Monitoring Function
14 - 2
14.3
List Editor for A
14 - 3
14.4
List Editor for FX
14 - 4
14.5
Intelligent Module Monitor Function
14 - 5
14.6
Network Monitor Function
14 - 6
14.7
Q Motion Monitor Function
14 - 7
14.8
Servo Amplifier Monitor Function
14 - 8
14.9
CNC Monitor Function
14 - 9
15. OTHERS
15.1
Set Overlay Screen Function

15.1.1
15.1.2
15.1.3
15.2
15 - 1

Check of the settings .......................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Test Function
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
A - 14
15 - 1 to 15 - 12
15 - 9

Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 15 - 10
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 15 - 11
15.3
Gateway Function
15 - 12
16. SCRIPT FUNCTION
16 - 1 to 16 - 102
16.1
Overview
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.2
16 - 1
Features ............................................................................................................................. 16 - 1
Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 16 - 6
Project Script, Screen Script

16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.2.4
16.2.5
16.2.6
16.2.7
16.2.8
16.2.9
16.3
16 - 10
Before setting ................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

Control structure ............................................................................................................... 16 - 13
Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 16 - 18
Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 16 - 28
Settings............................................................................................................................. 16 - 29
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 30
Program examples ........................................................................................................... 16 - 38
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 16 - 43
Precautions for using BMOV ............................................................................................ 16 - 44
Object Script
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
16.3.5
16.3.6
16.3.7
16.3.8
16.4
16 - 47
Before setting ................................................................................................................... 16 - 47

Settings............................................................................................................................. 16 - 70
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 70
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 16 - 85
Troubleshooting
16.4.1
16.4.2
16.4.3
16 - 88
Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger ............................................ 16 - 88

Message displayed during syntax check .......................................................................... 16 - 92
Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................... 16 - 95
APPENDICES
App- 1 to App - 13
Appendix1
Key Code List
App- 1
Appendix2
Drawing Sheet
App- 5
Appendix3
Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
App- 7
Appendix4
List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)
App- 8
INDEX
Index - 1 to Index - 6
A - 15
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE

Edit Operation (GT Designer2 Version
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual)
Image
Function
Page
Preview
Shows the preview of screen image of GOT.
Page 7-48
Aligns objects or images
Page 11-21
Align
Property sheet
Sets same attributes to objects or images in the

same screen
Page 12-1
Replace colors
Base 2
Base 2
Base 3
Base 3
Changes the color(s) of the objects and figures

arranged on plural screens at the same time
Page 12-12
Base 1
Base 1
Replace shapes
Base 2
Base 2
Base 3
Base 3
Changes the switch/lamp figures at the same

time
Base 1
Page 12-12
Base 1
Replace devices
M11
M10
M12
M100
M101
M102
Changes the preset devices at the same time
Page 12-12
Changes channel numbers at the same time.
Page 12-12
Overlapping images or objects
Page 12-16
Display the set device in list
Page 12-17
Replace CH No.
@1M10 @1M11 @1M12
@3M10 @3M11 @3M12
Data View
Select
Device list
Base 2
Base 3
D100 Numerical display
D200 ASCII display
D300 Panel meter display
Base 1
Multiple language input
Input characters or comments in other

Man.
Auto
English
A - 16
language.
Chinese
Page 12-24
Image
Function
Page
Import BMP/JPEG/DXF file

BMP file
Import
Imports BMP/JPEG/DXF files
Page 11-11
Utilizes other project data
Page 12-34
JPEG file
DXF file
Import Project
Import
Object Functions (GT Designer2 Version
Screen Design Manual)
1 Lamp/Switch
Image
Function
Page
Lamp display
Red
Blue
RUN
STOP
Displays device value via lamp color

changing
Page 6-1
Bit switch
Data set switch
MO:ON
OFF
D100:
200
350
Touch it to switch device ON/OFF
Page 6-24
Touch it to change bit device value
Page 6-44
Special function switch
Touch it to switch the screen to such as the

Utility screen.
Page 6-48
Go to screen switch
Operation
Touch it to switch between the base and
Stop
window screen
Page 6-56
Base 2
Base 1
Change station No. switch
Touch it to switch the monitored controller

Change monitor
destination
station No.
Page 6-67
Key code switch

A
A B C D
E F G H
Used as the key for inputting numerical

value/ASCII
Page 6-73
A - 17
2 Digit/font display
Image
Function
Page
Numerical display
334
D100
D100:334
Displays device value in numerical value
Page 7-1
Write value on device
Page 7-1
Display multipledevice value in list
Page 7-39
Displays device value in text
Page 7-56
Inputs text code device
Page 7-56
Displays hour/minutes, year/month/date
Page 7-75
Displays command
Page 7-82
Numerical input
45
D100
Data list
D100:45
D100: 55
D101:122
D102: 34
D100
55
D101
D102
122
34
ASCII display
D10:4241H(BA)
D11:4443H(DC)
ABCD
ASCII input
D10:4241H(BA)
D11:4443H(DC)
ABCD
Clock display
02/03/18
15:27
Comment display
RUN
A - 18
STOP
3 Alarm
Image
Function
Advanced alarm display

Time message
Time message
13:25 RUN A STOP
Time message
13:05 Hight limit over
13:25 RUN
A STOP
13:03
Motor trip
13:03 Motor trip
Advanced alarm popup display
Displays a history of GOT errors,

communication errors or user-created
messages at alarm occurrence.
13:25 RUN A STOP

13:03 Motor trip
Page
Page 8-89
Also displays alarms hierarchically.
307 No monitor device setting

Pops up a GOT error, communication error

or user-created message at alarm
occurrence. Also displays alarms
Page 8-135
hierarchically.
User alarm display
Displays a user-created message at alarm

02/04/18 13:25:40
RUN A STOP
occurrence.
Page 8-170
System alarm display
Displays a GOT error or communication error

at alarm occurrence.
Page 8-192
Alarm history display
Displays a history of user-created messages
Time message
13:25 RUN A STOP
13:03 Motor trip
Page 8-200
4 Parts
Image
Function
Page
Parts display
Part1
Display entered device
Page 9-1
Displays moving parts
Page 9-35
Part2
Parts movement display
A - 19
5 Graph/Meter
Image
Function
Page
Panel meter display
Displays device data on panel meter
Page 10-1
Displays device data in proportional level
Page 10-15
Displays device data in trend graph
Page 10-32
Displays device data in line graph
Page 10-49
Displays device data in bar graph
Page 10-66
Displays device data in statistics graph
Page 10-80
Displays device data in scatter graph
Page 10-93
Level display
Trend graph display
Line graph display
Bar graph display
Statistics graph display

Circle graph
Bar graph
Scatter graph display
Historical trend graph display
Displays the past data having been collected

by the logging function in trend graph,
Page 10-118
starting from the present.
6 Trigger
action
Image
Function
Status observation function
Monitors status of device and write value to

Write
A - 20
Page
D100: 0
150
device or operates GOT when condition

meets
Page 11-1
Image
Function
Page
Time action function
Outputs the device writing and sound at

specified time.
Page 11-11
Logging function
Collects and stores the device values.
Page 11-17
7 Recipe
Image
Function
Recipe function
Read
/Write
D100: 150
D101: 300
D102: 208
Page
Monitors status of device and read/write

device data when condition meets.
Page 12-12
One value can be set to a device.

Advanced recipe function

Read
/Write
D100: 150 250

D101: 300 500
D102: 208 235

Multiple values can be set to a device.
Page 12-26
The device value can be read/written by the

utility.
8 External input/output
Image
Function
Page
Hardcopy
Outputs the GOT monitor screen to printer or

PC card
Page 13-1
Bar code
Writes data read by bar code reader to

1350
device
Page 13-8
A - 21
9 Others
Image
Set overlay screen
Function
Page
Menu
Base 1
Menu
Set overlay screen from other screens
Base 3
Page 15-1
Menu
Base 2
Test function
Changes device values on a test window

while displaying a monitor screen.
Page 15-9
System monitoring function

M10 ON
M20 OFF
D100 255
Displays the operation status of a sequence

program.
Page 14-1
Ladder monitoring function
Monitors the status of ACPU devices.
Page 14-2
List editor for A
Reads a sequence program from ACPU and

display in list to change instructions.
Page 14-3
List editor for FX
Reads a sequence program from FXCPU

and displays in list to change instructions.
Intelligent module monitor
Page 14-4
Monitors the buffer memory of the intelligent

function module on the dedicated screen to
Page 14-5
change the data.
Network monitor
Monitors the network status of MELSECNET/

H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) and
Page 14-6
MELSECNET/B.
Motion monitor
Performs servo monitoring and parameter

setting for motion controller CPU (Q series).
A - 22
Page 14-7
Image
Function
Page
Servo amplifier monitor
Performs various monitoring functions,

parameter changes and test run for the servo
Page 14-8
amplifier where a GOT is connected.
CNC monitor
Performs position display monitor for the

MELDAS connected to a GOT at the
equivalent level of monitoring that uses a
Page 14-9
MELDAS dedicated display.

Gateway function
Performs remote monitoring and remote

Ethernet
Mitsubishi electric PLC
D100
250
maintenance of production site from the
Page 15-12
office.
OMRON PLC
TIM50
330
A - 23
10 Script function
Image
Script
Function
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=1;}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=2;}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=3;}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=4;}
Controls GOT display by scripts
Page
Page 16-1
11 Object setting
Image
Function
Page
Data operation
D100 : 45
D100
180
enables objects using the operated value
180
Offset
Operates device values by expression and
Page 5-55
Numerical value input: D100

200
Write to D110
10
Accumulates the offset device value in

monitor device address and monitor.
Page 5-61
Offset device: D200

Security
*****
Other Functions (GT Designer2 Version

Image
Restricts the password users
Page 5-65

Function
Page
Font
Displays a text in various fonts.
Page 2-15
Superimposes figures and objects.
Page 2-52
Monitors multiple controllers.
Page 2-120
Superimposition
Multi-channel function
A - 24
Image
Language switching
lish C
Eng
hines
e
Japanese
Function
Switches between multiple languages.
Page
Page 3-21
Communication settings
Makes the communication settings of the

controller.
Page 3-59
GOT Setup
Makes the settings relevant to GOT display

and operation.
Page 3-86
Clock setting
Sets the clock used by the GOT.
Page 3-90
Startup logo
Sets the screen (BMP file) to be displayed at

GOT startup.
Data Transmission (GT Designer2 Version
Page 3-91
Image
Function
Page
Install
OS
Transfers OS from PC to the GOT.
Page 8-43
Download
Transimits monitor screen data from PC to

GOT
Page 8-48
Upload
Transmits monitor screen data from GOT to

PC
Verify
Check if the
project data
corresponds
to each other.
Page 8-60
Check the project data displayed on the GT

Designer2 against the project data stored in
Page 8-55
the GOT.
A - 25
Print (GT Designer2 Version
Image
Function
Page
Print
Prints the project information (screen image,

title list, etc.).
A - 26
Page 9-1
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.
You can order it as necessary.
Related Manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Type code)
GT15 User's Manual
Describes the GT15 hardware-relevant content such as part names, external dimensions, mounting, power
SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option devices.
(Sold separately)
GT11 User's Manual
JY997D17501A
(09R815)
(Sold separately)
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
Describes methods of the GOT1000 series installation operation, basic operation for drawing and transmit-
SH-080529ENG
(1D7M24)
ting data to GOT1000 series
(Sold separately)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/2, 2/2)
Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable
SH-080532ENG
(1D7M26)
creation
(Sold separately)
GOT1000 Series Extended / Option Functions Manual
SH-080544ENG
Describes extended functions and option functions applicable to GOT series.
(Sold separately)
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual
Describes specifications, system configurations and setting methods of the gateway functions.
(Sold separately)
(1D7M32)
SH-080545ENG
(1D7M33)
A - 27
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:
GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
Description
GT1595
GT1595-X
Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA
GT1585
GT1585-S
Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575-S
GT1575-V
Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VN
Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VN
GT1565-V
GT1562-VN
GT157
GOT1000 Series
GT156
GT15
, GT15
Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156
GT1155-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBD
Handy
GT1155HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
GOT
GT1150HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT11
, GT11
Abbreviation of GT1155-Q, GT1150-Q, GT11 Handy GOT
GOT900 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
Communication unit
Bus connection unit
Serial communication
unit
RS-422 conversion unit
Communication
Ethernet communication
unit
unit
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
CC-Link communication
unit
Interface converter unit
A - 28
Description
GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2,
GT15-ABUS,
GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL,
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P,
GT15-RS4-9S,
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P,
GT15-RS2T4-25P
GT15-J71E71-100
GT15-75J71LP23-Z,
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-75IF900
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
Option
Backlight
Option function board

Multi-color display board
Protective Sheet
Description
GT15-90XLTT,
GT15-80SLTT,
GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTN,
GT15-60VLTT,
GT15-60VLTN
GT15-70VLTT,
GT15-FNB,
GT15-QFNB,
GT15-QFNB16M,
GT15-QFNB32M,
GT15-QFNB48M,
GT11-50FNB
GT15-XHNB,
GT15-VHNB
GT15-90PSCB,
GT15-90PSGB,
GT15-90PSCW,
GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB,
GT15-80PSGB,
GT15-80PSCW,
GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB,
GT15-70PSGB,
GT15-70PSCW,
GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB,
GT15-60PSGB,
GT15-60PSCW,
GT15-60PSGW,
GT11-50PSCB,
GT11-50PSGB,
GT11-50PSCW,
GT11-50PSGW,
A9GT-50STAND
GT11H-50PSC
USB environmental protection cover
Stand
Memory card
CF card
GT15-UCOV,
GT11-50UCOV
GT15-90STAND,
GT15-80STAND,
GT15-70STAND,
GT05-MEM-16MC,
GT05-MEM-32MC,
GT05-MEM-64MC,
GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC
Memory card adaptor
GT05-MEM-ADPC
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-97,
GT15-60ATT-96
Battery
GT15-BAT,
GT11-50BAT
Software
Description
GT Works2 Version
SW D5C-GTWK2-E,
SW D5C-GTWK2-EV
GT Designer2 Version
SW D5C-GTD2-E,
SW D5C-GTD2-EV
GT Designer2
Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Converter2
Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Simulator2
Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 / GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2
Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2
GX Developer
Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX Simulator
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
License (for GT SoftGOT2)

Description
License
A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)
License FD
SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)
A - 29
Others
Description
Omron PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE
Sharp PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation
Toshiba PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION
HITACHI PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
Matsushita PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd
Yaskawa PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation
Yokogawa PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Allen-Bradley PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Allen-Bradley
SIEMENS PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SIEMENS
OMRON temperature controller
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON
YAMATAKE temperature controller
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by YAMATAKE
RKC temperature controller
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC
GOT (server)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Windows
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows
font
Intelligent function module
A - 30
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are
mounted to the base unit.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

1 Functions
This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version2.18U.
For the added functions by the product version upgrade, refer to the list of functions added by GT
Desiger2 version upgrade in Appendices.
2 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual
Shows functions applicable to GT15, GT11.

" ", Applicable
" ", N / A
Indicates the operation steps.
Brackets used for the menu and items differ.

[
] : Refers to menu in menu bar.

: Refers to dialog box item or
GOT utility menu.
: Refers to dialog box buttons or
PC keyboard.
Show the items including detailed explanation

(manual and the chapter, section, item).
Refers to information required

for operation.
Refers to information useful
for operation.
Remark
Refers to supplementary
explanations.
* The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
A - 31
The setting item or function specific

to GT15
The setting item or function
specific to the specified
type of GOT
(For GT1595-X)

to GT11
specific to GT11 handy GOT
handy GOT
A - 32
1
OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
This manual explains the GT Designer2 common setting, object function specifications, object setting/
arrangement.
When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to examine the applicability
and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.
1 GT Designer2-relevant manuals
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Overview
3
COMMON SETTING
The following manuals are relevant to the GOT1000 series.

Refer to the corresponding manual according to needs.
(1) Installing software
Drawing
Data transfer
For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT,
refer to the following manuals.
Detailed
Creating projects
Detailed
Creating screens
Detailed
Drawing figures
Detailed
Screen Design Manual*1
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Installing product on PC
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual*1
Making common settings
Detailed
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Purpose
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Overview
Placing/setting objects
Detailed
Overview
8
Transferring data to GOT
*1
Detailed
Stored in the GT Works2/GT Designer2 in PDF format.
1.1 Overview
1-1
ALARM
1.
(2) Installing a GOT Connecting with a controller

For the operations from installing a GOT to communicating with a controller, refer to the following
manuals.
(Included)
Purpose
GT15 General Description

GT11 General Description
GT15 Users Manual

GT11 Users Manual
GOT1000 Series
Connection Manual*1
Confirming part names and

specifications of the GOT
Detailed
Overview
Confirming the GOT installation

Detailed
method
Overview
Confirming the mounting method for

communication units or option
Detailed
devices
Overview
Confirming the controller connection

Detailed
method
Confirming the utility operation
Detailed
method
Confirming error codes (system
alarm) displayed on the GOT
*1
Detailed
Stored in the GT Works2/GT Designer2 in PDF format.
(3) Other manuals

The following manuals are also available.
The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2/GT Designer2 in PDF format.
(a) GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual
Describes functions for more efficient debugging as the ladder monitor function, system
monitor function and MELSEC-A list editor function.
(b) GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual
Describes how to use the gateway function.
(c) GT Simulator2 Version Operating Manual
Describes how to simulate the created project data with the GT Simulator2.
(d) GT Converter2 Version Operating Manual
Describes how to use the GT Converter2.
1-2
1.1 Overview
SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW
2.
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
Base screen (
SPECIFICATIONS
This section explains the type and number of screens that can be created for the GOT.
Section 2.1.1 Base screen specifications)
The basic screen for screen display on GOT.
Production status screen 1

A 1254 B 348
Production status screen 1
Window screen (
A 1254 B 348
Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications)
Overlap window
A pop-up window that appears over the base screen.
This type of window can be moved and closed manually.
Up to two windows can be displayed simultaneously.
Superimposed window
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
A window composited on the base screen.

If superimposed window is switched, the
corresponding part of the base screen will be changed.
Up to two windows can be displayed simultaneously.
Key window
A pop-up window displayed over the base screen when
inputting (e.g. Numerical input). There are two types of
key window: default key window and user-created key
window.
LAMP, SWITCH
Base screen specifications
The following table describes the base screen specifications.
(W
H dots)
GT1595-X
1024
768
GT1585-S/GT1575-S
800
600
640
480
320
240
GT1575-V/GT1575-VN/
GT1572-VN/GT1565-V/
Number of screens can be set
4096
Number of screens can be
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GOT type
Screen size
registered
1 to 32767
GT1562-VN
GT1155-Q/GT1150-Q

2.1.1 Base screen specifications
2-1
ALARM
2.1.1
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
A screen displayed over the base screen.

The created window screen can be displayed using either of the following
methods.
COMMON SETTING
2.1.2
Window screen specifications
The following table describes the window screen specifications.

Screen size
(W
GOT type
Maximum
GT1595-X
GT1585-S/GT1575-S
GT1572-VN/GT1565-V/
GT1562-VN
768
751"
800
600
"798
583"
640
480
"638
463"
320
screens can be
set
Minimum
94
GT1575-V/GT1575-VN/
GT1155-Q/GT1150-Q
1024
"1022
Number of
H dots)
81
1024
240
"318
223"
can be registered
Initial value
(W
H dots)
318
176
190
126
1 to 32767
The values in " " (quotation marks) in the above table indicates the screen sizes when a close key and a
movement bar are displayed on the overlap window.
The screen size (height and width) is indicated by the arrows.

Close key and move bar provided
2-2
Number of screens
Close key and move bar not provided

2.1.2 Window screen specifications
1
1 Methods of displaying window screen
OVERVIEW
(1) Methods of displaying window screens and superimpose screens

The created window screens will be displayed when the corresponding window screen No. is
stored in the screen switching device for the window screen (overlap window, superimposed
window).
Created window screen

Window screen 2
Display window screen

1 as an overlap window
A 1254 B 348
D100
Production status window 1
COMMON SETTING
Window screen 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: Relation between created window screen and device for switching window screen.
Screen switching device for overlap window 1
: D100
Screen switching device for superimposed window : D200
A 1254 B 348
As 1 has been stored in the device for superimpose window switching,

the window screen 1 is displayed as an overlap window .
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

2 as a superimpose window
A 1254 B 348
D200
As 2 has been stored in the device for switching superimpose window,

the window screen 2 is displayed as a superimpose window.
When erasing a window screen, store 0 to the device for screen switching. An overlap window can
be erased by touching the close key, if it is displayed there.(0 will be stored to the device for screen
switching.)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
(2) Methods of displaying key window

A key window is displayed by touching the numerical/ASCII input function objects.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 4.5 Key Window

2-3
ALARM
2 Display position of window screen

Set the display position using GT Designer2.
A window screen is displayed in the center of a base screen if its display position has not been set.
1 Select [Object]
[Window Position]
[Overlap Window 1]/[Overlap Window 2]/[Superimposed
window]/[Key Window] from the menu.
2 Click the display position of each window.
Window screen
Set the position to the

upper left of the screen.
Display position of overlap window

The display position of an overlap window can be controlled using device.
When a window screen has been set to be out of the base screen
The window screen size will not be checked when setting its display position.Make
sure to set the display position of a window screen while considering its screen size.
Overlap window
When the window screen is
out of the base screen, GOT
will automatically move the
window screen to inside of the
base screen.
Base screen
Window screen
Superimpose window
Base screen
Operation switch
Window screen
2-4

Opera
The part outside the base screen

will not be displayed.
The object will not be displayed.
1
3 Methods of moving window screen
OVERVIEW
The window screens that can be moved are window 1, 2 and key windows only.
Move the window screen as explained below.
Touch the Move key at top of the window to replace
the window.
During the Move key is highlighted, the GOT is the
window move mode with beeping the buzzer.
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch the replaced position within three seconds.

The GOT leaves the move mode (Highlighted Move
key) without touching for three or more seconds.
The touched objects is not operated within three
seconds.
COMMON SETTING
The window will move to the specified position.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Buzzer volume settings

Make the settings for the buzzer sound, which is produced when a window is
moved, within the GOT utilities or in [Buzzer Volume] and [Window Move Buzzer]
settings of GT Desginer2.
[Operations setting] GOT utility
[GOT Setup] of GT Designer2
Section 3.8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations (GOT Setup)
Closing the window after movement.

If a window has been moved and then closed, it will appear at the new position when
opened again.

2-5
ALARM
Remark
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
[System Environment]
LAMP, SWITCH
GT15 User's Manual (Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

SETTINGS (GOT SET UP))
GT11 User's Manual (Chapter 10 DISPLAY AND OPERATION
SETTINGS (GOT SET UP))
[Common]
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2.1.3
Whole screen specifications
1 Screen laying
The screens are layered by type and displayed as shown below.
n status
Productio
A 1254
screen 1
B 348
Base screen
n status
Productio
A 1254
screen 1
superimposed window 1,2
B 348
Back
n status
Productio
A 1254
screen 1
B 348
Overlap window 1, 2
Key window
Front
(1) Base screen

Located at the back.
(2) Superimposed window
Superimposed window overlaid in front of the base screen is displayed as a base screen.
The superimposed window including the figures and objects are arranged in the free area of the
base screen.
When two superimposed windows are displayed, the window displayed later will be brought to the
front.
Section 2.6.3 Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input
(3) Overlap window 1, 2
The overlap window including the figures and objects can be displayed in front of the base screen
and superimposed window. The later appeared Overlap window is displayed in the front. The
objects of the base screen arranged in the rear of the overlap window are not displayed. To confirm
or operate the rear objects, close or move the overlap window.
Touch the rear overlap window to display it in the front.
The window at the back

will appear in the front.
2-6

2.1.3 Whole screen specifications
If overlap windows 1 and 2 overlap and the one placed at the back of the other one is
switched using the screen switching device, it will not brought to the front and will
remain at the back.
(4) Key window
Located in the front.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Overlap-display of figures and objects
3 Input object operation

(1) In the case of super imposed window
The input objects at the back of the superimposed window can be used.
If the input objects of the superimposed window and base window overlap, both switches can be
used.
(If the touch time is not long enough, only the input objects of the superimposed window may
operate.)
3
COMMON SETTING
Overlapping figures and objects are displayed according to the order of layer.
On the base screen and superimposed window, the object being changed is brought to the front.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Section 3.2.2 Setting items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
(2) In case of overlap window
The input object placed on the base screen on which an overlap window is superimposed does not
operate, when the area of the object that overlaps with the overlap window is touched.
In addition, the input object invalid area comes up around the superimposed overlap window: the
area depends on the overlap window size.
It is recommended to use an overlap window that is multiples of 16 dots in size and does not
display the close key and movement bar, in order to eliminate the invalid area.
Overlap window 1
: Input object valid area
: Input object invalid area
Overlap windows 2
If an overlap window other than recommended above is displayed, the part of input object inside
16-dot area around the overlap window is invalid and do not operate.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(a) When close key and movement bar are displayed
LAMP, SWITCH
: Current input object invalid area
Overlap window 1

2.1.3 Whole screen specifications
2-7
ALARM
Overlap windows 2
(b) When neither close key nor movement bar is displayed

Overlap window 1
Overlap windows 2
Layer
Each screen consists of a front layer and back layer on which objects can be set.
For details of layers, refer to:
Section 2.6.1 Superimposition using layers
4 Overlapping the quota objects

Make sure to set in order that more than two system alarms (alarm list display) in one screen by using
overlap window or superimposed window.
* In one screen, only one of this type object can be set.
2.1.4
Data size of screen and project
Data size of screen and project differs by the set objects.

It is recommended to confirm the sizes before downloading a project to the GOT.
The following provides how to confirm the sizes on GT Designer2.
1 Select [Tools]
[Data Size]
[Screen] or [Project] from the menu.
2 The used data size can be confirmed on the displayed screen.
Refer to the following sections for the used memory size of each object.
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
Section 2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Section 2.4 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2-8

2.1.4 Data size of screen and project
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity

Attributes
Data capacity (byte)
Line
24
Style,
Width,
Color
Line Freeform
20
4 number of vertexes
Rectangle
Style,
Width,
Color,
Pattern,
Pattern color,
Background
20 + 4
number of vertexes
(Start point and end point

counted as one vertex)
Sector
Paint
28
Style,
Width,
36
Color
Style,
Width,
Color,
Pattern,
Foreground,
Background
Boundary,
Pattern
Foreground
Background
Import Bitmap
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Circle
Arc
28
5
40
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Polygon
SPECIFICATIONS
Drawing examples
COMMON SETTING
Figure
OVERVIEW
The following table shows figures, text type, attributes and data capacity.
20
24 + data capacity of bit map file
Varies according to the contents

of an image.
Import DXF
LAMP, SWITCH
Import JPEG
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2-9
ALARM
Figure
Text
Drawing examples
ABC
ABC
A
B
C
ABC
"Japan"
Attributes
ABC
"China(GB) -Mincho"
Text Style,
Effects,
Text color,
Script,
Text Solid color, Size,

Interval,
Direction,
Alignment,
KANJI Region
Data capacity (byte)

Standard font
28 + {4 (2 NR-1)} +
{2 (NT + 1)} =Y
HQ font
128 NT
TrueType font
Y + 24 (8 NR) + (NT NS K)
NR:
Number of lines
NT:
Number of characters
NS:
Character size
K:
Single byte character:2,
Double byte character:4
Windows
font
Varies according to the font or
font size used.
Confirming the data capacity
before downloading the project to
GOT is recommended.
Scale
Remark
2 - 10
Scale points,
Direction,
Center line,
Style,
Width,
Color
28
(1) GOT-compatible text

Text supported by the GT Designer2 is also supported by GOT.
However, those texts that would be changed into [?] or its size would be changed
on the drawing screen after being input and defined, will not be displayed in GOT.
1
1 Selectable attributes
Full line
one dot chain line,
Line style
1 Dot
4 Dot
Line width
Line color, text
color, text solid
color
, broken line
, dotted line
, two dots chain line
, 2 Dot
, 5 Dot
, 3 Dot
, 7 Dot
OVERVIEW
Drawing examples
SPECIFICATIONS
Attribute
Maximum 256 colors (Displayed colors are reduced to the colors supported by the used GOT.)
The text solid color can be set to [Solid] or [Carve] text style.
Screen pattern
3
Maximum 256 colors (Displayed colors are reduced to the colors supported by the used GOT.)
boundary color
Standard, Thick, Solid, Carve
Section 2.3.1
Horizontal
Direction
Text style)
A
ABC , Vertical B
C
When TrueType font or Windows
Alignment
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
font is specified, the display direction is [Horizontal] only.
Left ABC ,
Center ABC ,
Right
ABC,
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Text style
Can be specified to [Horizontal] only.

Select a font.
6 x 8dot font
Font
16-dot standard font

16-dot high quality Mincho
16-dot high quality Gothic
TrueType Gothic
Windows
TrueType Mincho
font
For details of each fonts and text size, refer to the following:
(
Section 2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)

LAMP, SWITCH
Text size
12-dot high quality Mincho 12-dot high quality Gothic
Italicizes, underlines or applies the both to characters.

Effects
Enabled only when selecting Windows
font for [Font].
Select a character set from those available for the font specified.
Depending on the characters input, the OS of the PC may select the alternative font automatically to display the
character or the character may not be displayed correctly (
Script
or is displayed.).
In such a case, the character can be displayed correctly by selecting the character set that is compatible with the
input character. *1
The available character sets vary depending on the font.
Enabled only when selecting Windows
font for [Font].
Refer to the next page for details of *1.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
background color,
2 - 11
ALARM
pattern
COMMON SETTING
Pattern color,
Attribute
Drawing examples
Between lines
0 to 16 dots
KANJI Region
Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

Japan
: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.

China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.
Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"
Japan
China (GB) -Mincho
This setting is available when any of the following fonts is selected.

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
Scale points
2 to 255 points
Center line
None
*1
, With
The Windows 98 and Windows Millennium Edition do not support the multiple language input function.
Thus, the characters in another language other than that used for the OS in use cannot be displayed.
2 - 12
1
The BMP/JPEG/DXF file described below can be displayed.
If any color non-displayable for the GOT are used for a BMP/JPEG file, the color will be subtracted
when displayed.
(1) BMP file
The BMP data specified below can be used.
OVERVIEW
2 Figures in BMP/JPEG/DXF file format
2
Description
BMP data
65536 colors *1, 256 colors, 16 colors or monochrome
Resolution
2048
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
1536 or less
*1 For the display of 65536 colors, a multi-color display board must be installed.
For details of a multi-color display board, refer to the following.
3
COMMON SETTING
GT15 User's Manual (Section 8.4 Multi-color Display Board)
(2) JPEG file

The JPEG data specified below can be used.
4
Description
JFIF, EXIF
Data format
Base line, progressive
Number of colors
Full-color, gray-scale
Resolution
2048
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
1536 or less
(3) DXF file

The DXF data described below can be used.
Item
Description
DXF data
Release 12, Release 13, Release 14
Resolution
2048
6
LAMP, SWITCH
1536 or less
(1) The image quality when using JPEG files

The image quality of JPEG files may be deteriorated than that of BMP files.
To avoid the image quality deterioration, use BMP files.
(2) Difference between data available for BMP/JPEG file parts and registered parts
The BMP/JPEG file that can be stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
differs with the BMP/JPEG file that can be used in the GT Designer2 (registered
parts).
The data used as a registered part may not be used as a BMP/JPEG file part.
For the BMP/JPEG file that can be used as BMP/JPEG file parts, refer to the
following.
The BMP/JPEG files that can be displayed
2 - 13
ALARM
Section 4.3.1
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
File format
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
Remark
The BMP/JPEG/DXF format files

Refer to the following manual for how to read the BMP/JPEG/DXF format files to
the GT Designer2 or precautions for use.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
(Section 11.1.4 Pasting figure data of BMP/DXF file)
2 - 14
2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters
OVERVIEW
It is possible to select a font and KANJI region can in the GOT.

(1) Font
Available fonts are as shown below.
However, some fonts are inapplicable to some objects.
For the compatibility between fonts and objects, refer to the setting items of each object.
SPECIFICATIONS
Font specifications
Font image
Classification
Type
6
8 dots (Gothic)
12 dot Standard (Gothic)
COMMON SETTING
Standard font
16 dot Standard (Mincho/Gothic)
12 dot HQ Mincho
12 dot HQ Gothic
HQ font
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
16 dot HQ Mincho
16 dot HQ Gothic
TrueType Mincho
TrueType font
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
TrueType Gothic
font
displayable on the personal

computer (other than vertical font)
(2) KANJI region

Some Chinese characters look different depending on the region where Chinese characters are
used, i.e., Japanese, China (GB) or China (Big5).
The GOT displays the Chinese characters according to the selected region.
Selectable KANJI regions are shown below.
KANJI region
Font image
6
LAMP, SWITCH
TrueType font and OpenType font

Windows
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Japanese
China (GB) - Mincho
2 - 15
ALARM
China (Big5) -Gothic
2.3.1
Fonts
The specifications of fonts applicable to the GOT are provided below.

The following table describes the major specifications of each font.
For details, refer to items
to
.
: Availabe
Character size
Font type
Character pitch
HS
FS
DS
Character
Text
color
style
Effects
: Not available
Storage area*3
8 dots
System area

12 dot HQ Mincho
Fixed
12 dot HQ Gothic
16 dot HQ Mincho
16 dot HQ Gothic
User area
TrueType Mincho*1
Proportional*2
TrueType Gothic*1
Depend on the
Windows
font*1
Windows
fonts
selected
*1
Horizontal writing only.
*2
Different depending on characters.
*3
The font data of China (GB) and China (Big5) are stored in the user area.
The number of the characters in a line varies according the arranged characters.
(1) When opening a project which uses Windows
fonts on other personal computer
The Windows fonts used in the project have to be installed in the personal
computer.
If operations other than character shifting and character color change are
performed when Windows fonts are not installed, fonts will be changed to the
ones installed in the personal computer.
(2) When Windows
fonts were installed during GT Designer2 was starting
Start GT Designer2 to use Windows

starting.
2 - 16

2.3.1 Fonts
fonts installed during GT Designer2 was
1
1 Font magnification and character size
OVERVIEW
The applicable magnification varies depending on the fonts used.

The following table shows font magnification and size.
(1) Standard font, HQ font
Set character sizes by setting the ratio of horizontal size and vertical size.
2
Character size magnification
Width magnification (times)*1
8 dots
Height magnification (times)*1
0.5
1 to 8
1 to 8
0.5, 1 to 8
0.5, 1 to 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Font
12 dot HQ Mincho
12 dot HQ Gothic
2, 4, 6, 8
COMMON SETTING
2, 4, 6, 8
16 dot HQ Mincho
16 dot HQ Gothic
*1
Horizontal size and vertical size can be set up by selecting "Other" for size.
(2) TrueType font, Windows font

Set character sizes by setting font sizes (dot).
4
Size (dot)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Font
TrueType Mincho
24 to 128, in 4-dots unit
TrueType Gothic
Windows
8 to 128, in 1-dots unit.
font
5
Full-size character
16 dots
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example: Displaying five double-size characters in the 16-dot Standard (Gothic) font.
Half-size character
5 = 80 dots
8 dots
16 dots
5 = 40 dots
16 dots
When fonts were changed

When the set fonts are changed, the display size of characters may be changed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.3.1 Fonts
2 - 17
ALARM
Remark
LAMP, SWITCH
2 Text color
Only one can be specified from maximum of 256 colors. (The GOT will select the nearest color match
when an incompatible color is specified.)
3 Text style
The following text styles are available.
Text style
Standard
Bold
Solid
Raised
Image
displayed
Rotate
4 Effects
The following character effects can be set.
Character
None
effects
Italic
Underline
Both
Image
displayed
To display the font on GOT

(1) Font data
(a) Standard font, HQ font, TrueType font
Each font can be displayed by installing the corresponding font data in the GOT.
For installation of font data, refer to the following manual.
(Chapter 8. TRANSFERRING DATA)

(b) Windows
fonts
For Windows fonts, TrueType fonts and OpenType fonts installed on the personal computer
can be displayed. (other than vertical fonts)
It is not necessary to install font data in the GOT.
2 - 18

2.3.1 Fonts
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Font data size

Font data are stored in the system area or user area within the built-in memory.
(Data size varies depending on the font.)
It is recommended to confirm the capacity (data size) needed for installation on the Communicate
with GOT dialog box in advance.
Display the Communicate with GOT dialog box by referring to the following manual.
The confirmation method of data size is explained on the next page. (The corresponding tab varies
depending on fonts. The data size includes the followings: OS, font data, and screen data sizes.)
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.3.1 Fonts
2 - 19
ALARM
OS Install
GOT tab
Install the font data of the standard font.
Select basic functions. (Checking

one will automatically select all the
functions.)
For the 16-dot Standard font, select
either Gothic or Mincho.
(The selected font type will be
applied to all the 16-dot Standard
fonts used in the project.)
Confirm the transfer size.
Project Download
GOT tab
Install the font data of the high quality font.
Select high quality fonts for

installation. (Checking one will
automatically select all the fonts.
These fonts are displayed only
when the project data includes
them.)
Install the font data of the TrueType font, Windows
font.
Select a screen to be downloaded

to install the font.
(As the font data are included in the
screen data, the screen for
selecting TrueType fonts and
Windows fonts does not appear.)
2 - 20

2.3.1 Fonts
2.3.2
KANJI regions
fonts
On the object which Windows fonts can be specified, characters in the region
corresponds to the selected Windows fonts can be displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
font in this section)
To use the characters of China (GB) and/or China (Big5), install the corresponding font data in GOT at
the time of OS installaion.
It is recommended to confirm transfer size on GT Designer2.
Install the data and confirm the data size by referring to the following explanations.
(1) Font data display
Each font can be displayed by installing font data in GOT.
For the installation method of font data, refer to the following manual.

(2) Font data size
The font data of China (GB) and China (Big5) are stored in the user area within the built-in memory.
(Data capacity varies depending on each font.)
It is recommended to confirm the capacity (data size) needed for installation on the Communicate
with GOT dialog box in advance.
Data size can be checked by commnunicate with GOT dialog box.
Display the Communicate with GOT dialog box by referring to the following manual.
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Installing font data
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Windows
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(a) OS Install
GOT tab
Install the font data of China(GB) and/or China (Big5).
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Select and install Standard
Font(China:GB) and/or Standard
Font(China:Big5). (This will
automatically select the 12-dot and
16-dot options.) And install the font.
Failure to do so will display the
Japanese-Chinese characters on
the GOT.

2.3.2 KANJI regions
2 - 21
ALARM
Displaying Kanji in Windows
OVERVIEW
It is possible to display texts in Chinese characters which can be set in the Kanji region.
2 Equipment Needed for Displaying characters of China(GB) and/or China (Big5)

Attach the option function board to GOT.
For the attaching method of the option function board, refer to the following:
GT15 User's Manual (Section 8.3 Option Function Board)
If the option function board has not been attached and any kanji region other than Japanese is
specified, Japanese-Chinese characters will be displayed.
3 Character strings that can be displayed

(1) China (GB) characters
(a) Kanji characters, other than GB2312 code, are displayed as shown below.
Item
Description
Kanji characters mapped in Unicode 2.1 are displayed.
Kanji characters mapped in Unicode2.1
(For Kanji characters for which the same codes are used by Japanese Kanji
characters, Japanese Kanji characters are displayed.)
Kanji characters not mapped in Unicode 2.1
Not displayed.
(b) Characters shown below, which are not mapped in Unicode 2.1, are not displayed.
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
082
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
The fonts of various countries are mixed depending on the character string.
As the font of China(GB) is Mincho, characters are displayed in Mincho even if Gothic has been
selected for the font.
2 - 22

2.3.2 KANJI regions
19
(2) China (Big5) characters
Item
Description
Kanji characters mapped in Unicode 2.1 are displayed.
Kanji characters mapped in Unicode2.1
(For Kanji characters for which the same codes are used by Japanese Kanji
Kanji characters not mapped in Unicode 2.1
Not displayed.
characters, Japanese Kanji characters are displayed.)
OVERVIEW
(a) Kanji characters other than Big5 code, are displayed as shown below.
SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Characters shown below, which are not mapped in Unicode 2.1, are not displayed.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The fonts of various countries may be mixed depending on character string.

As the font of China (Big5) is Gothic, characters are displayed in Gothic even if Mincho has been
selected for the font.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
4 TrueType font
The kanji region settings are inapplicable.
To specify a kanji region item, use a font other than TrueType.
5 Windows fonts
fonts item, characters in the region corresponding to the selected fonts can
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.3.2 KANJI regions
2 - 23
ALARM
When spcifying Windows

be displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
The kanji region settings are inapplicable. (setting is not necessary)
2.4 Specifications of Available Object Functions

1 Object specifications
This section explains the main object specifications in table.
Refer to the explanation (reference section) of the corresponding object function for details since the
specifications and cautions may differ by the used GOT.
Note that max. number of setting objects and memory capacity in the table are based on default value
settings.
When the memory capacity is increased by data operation, display methods and other settings, the
number of objects may be reduced.
(1) Max number of objects can be set.
Up to 1024 objects can be set in one screen.
Up to 1024 input objects can be displayed, however, 1001th object or later will not
operate.
1025th object or later is invalid. (The object will not operate.)
(2) Max number of objects in which [Trigger] has been set to [Sampling].
Up to 100 objects can be set in one screen.
101st object or later is invalid. (The object will not operate.)
(3) Object functions specific to GT15 (Not described in the table on the next page)
The following object functions can be set only for GT15.
Function
Advanced alarm,
Historical trend graph,
Logging function,
Advanced recipe function,
Hard copy,
Ladder monitor function,
Intelligent module monitor function,
Network monitor function,
Q motion monitor function,
Servo amplifier monitor function,
CNC monitor function,
Gateway function,
Script function (object script only)
2 - 24
Numeric value, character display
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
1000
ASCII Input
48
Clock Display
44
1000
Comment
Display
Comment
Bit 64
Color
Blink
Reverse
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 7.1
Section 7.1
4
-
Section 7.2
Section 7.3
Section 7.3
Section 7.4
Section 7.5
Ruled LIne
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Plate Color
Color
Blink
Reverse
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Plate Color
Color
Blink
Reverse
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Plate
Color
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Display Size
Blink
Font
Layer
32767*1
Style
Text
Refer to (2) below
32767*2
Comment
Refer to (3) below
Solid Color
Reverse
Blink
HQ Font
Section 4.1
Section 4.1
Text
Solid Color
Reverse
Blink
HQ Font
KANJI Region
Style
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Frame
Plate Color
hardware
limitations
Word 56
Group
Basic
Figure
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
44
Layer
Reference
LAMP, SWITCH
ASCII Display
Font
and
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1000
Reverse
equipment
*1
Maximum of 32767 comments can be registered in each comment group.
*2
Maximum of 32767 comments can be registered in one project.
2 - 25
ALARM
Refer to (1) below
Color
Blink
Object script
Data List
Frame
Plate Color
Data Operation
Figure
Security
Input
Layer
Switching Station No
52
Font
Offset specification
Numerical
Reverse
Word device
1000
Color
Blink
Bit device
48
Display
Frame
Plate Color
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Numerical
Figure
Bit Trigger
1000
ON/OFF
object (byte)
Rise/Fall
applicable for one
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
COMMON SETTING
objects in one
OVERVIEW
Max. No. of setting
(1) Memory capacity for data list display function

60 + (NR + 1) 8 + ANC 6 + RTN 2
NR : Number of columns
ANC : Number of all lines
RTN : Number of title characters per line
(2) Memory capacity for comment group
46 + (2 NT) + (4 NC) + (8 NR) + {NC NR (6 + 2 NS)}
NT: Number of characters
NC: Number of lines
NR: Number of columns
NS: Number of average characters of a comment
(3) Memory capacity for basic comment
24 + (14 RC) + (2 AT)
(The value within () will be converted into multiple of 4)
RC: Number of registered comments
AT: Number of whole characters
2 - 26
Alarm
Max. No. of setting
Trigger
Device
Others
OVERVIEW
objects in one
screen
and
Reference
hardware
limitations
Section 8.7
Section 8.6
Alarm Display
Refer to (2) below
*2
Figure
Frame
Plate Color
Title
Section 8.8
Ruled Line
Figure
Frame
Plate Color
Ruled Line
Font
Cursor
Layer
KANJI Region
Text
Style
5
-
Section 8.4
Alarm Display
Refer to (2) below
Frame
Plate Color
Ruled Line
Font
Cursor
Layer
KANJI Region
Section 8.4
Text
Style
Section 8.5
Section 8.5
Display Size Solid Color

1
(1 object for each
project)
Display Size
DIsplay Background
Font
Style
Refer to (3) below
(System Alarm)
1
(1 object for each
Advanced
project)
Alarm Popup
Display
Display Size
DIsplay Background
Font
Refer to (3) below
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm Popup
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Advanced
Figure
COMMON SETTING
Display Size
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Frame
Plate Color
Display Size Solid Color
Display
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Refer to (1) below
Advanced
Advanced
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Object script
44
(User Alarm)
Figure
Layer
(System Alarm)
Data Operation
Alarm List
Alarm History
Security
24 *1
(User Alarm)
Display Size
equipment
Layer
40
(System Alarm)
Frame
Plate Color
Alarm List
Figure
Word device
object (byte)
Bit device
applicable for one
Bit Trigger
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
Style
Solid Color
*1
Up to 16 objects with [Store Memory] setting can be set.
*2
Objects with [Store Memory] setting is unusable.
2 - 27
ALARM
(User Alarm)
(1) Memory capacity for alarm history display

62 + N1 + N2 + N3 + N4
N1: (Number of the following title characters)
Occurred
Message
Checks
Cum.Time
2 *1
Restored
Occur Freq
N2: (Number of the following characters) 2 *1

Occurrence date/time Restoration date/time Check date/time
N3: "4" should be added for each of the following setting items
Text Sprite
Draw Ruled Line
Restored Time
Confirm Time
One Touch
N4: "16" should be added for each of the following setting items
Figure frame
(2) Memory capacity of advanced alarms (system alarms/user alarms)
96 + (DAN 8) + (TN 2) + (DN / NT 8)
DAN: Number of display attributes
TN : Number of title characters
DN : Date
NT : Time
(3) Memory capacity of advanced alarm popup display (system alarms/user alarms)
56 + (CPN 8) + (DN / NT 8)
CPN: Specified number of comments
DN : Date
NT : Specified number of times
*1 Notes for calculation of N1 and N2
(1) Calculated value
Round the calculated value to a multiple of "4."
Example: If the calculated value is "10," use "12" for calculation.
(2) Calculation procedure
Calculate each item.
Example: Occurrence time field: four characters
[Occurrence time field]
4 2=8
[Message field]
5 2 = 10
Therefore N1 = 8 + 12 = 20
2 - 28
Message field: five characters

12 (Round to a multiple of "4.")
Animation
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
Level
52
24 *1
Trend graph
Refer to (1) below
32 *2
Line graph
Refer to (2) below
1000
Bar graph
Refer to (3) below
Reference
SPECIFICATIONS
limitations
Display Mode Positioning

Point
Part Color
Blink
Section 9.1
Movement Type
Display Mode
Positioning Point
Part Color
Blink
Section 9.2
Figure
Frame
Plate Color Needle Color
Meter Panel Color
Text
Display Size
Text Color
Font
Layer
Scale Display
Scale Points
Boundary Color
Level Color Pattern
Background Graph Color
Pattern
Layer
Section
10.2
Figure
Plate Color
Scale Points
Style
Font
Frame
Scale Display
Graph Color
Width
Layer
Section
10.3
Figure
Plate color
Scale Points
Style
Font
Frame
Scale Display
Graph Color
Width
Layer
Section
10.4
Figure
Plate color
Pattern
Font
Frame
Graph color
Background
Layer
Section
10.5
Section 6.1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Figure
Frame
Lamp
Back Ground
Pattern
Blink
Text
Style
Text Color
Solid Color
Font
Display Size
Effects
Script
KANJI Region
Layer
Section
10.1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*3
*4
*3
*4
LAMP, SWITCH
1000
and
hardware
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
96
equipment
(Continued to next page)

2 - 29
ALARM
Panel meter
Object script
1000
Data Operation
Bit 68
Word 56
Security
Lamp
1000
Bit 60
Word 56
Fixed 56
Word device
Part Movement
Bit device
1000
Parts Display
Bit 48
Word 44
Fixed 52
Bit Trigger
1000
ON/OFF
object (byte)
Rise/Fall
applicable for one
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
COMMON SETTING
objects in one
OVERVIEW
Max. No. of setting
Max. No. of setting

objects in one
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Figure
32
Word device
object (byte)
Bit device
applicable for one
Bit Trigger
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
equipment
and
Reference
hardware
limitations
Frame
Plate Color
Division Number
Direction
Statistics Graph
Scale Display
Scale Points
Refer to (4) below
Section
10.6
Graph Color Pattern

BackGround
24 *1
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Plate Color
Display mode
Graph frame display

Scatter Graph
Refer to (5) below
32
Font
Layer
Figure
Frame
Plate color
Display mode
*3
Refer to (5) below
*1
Section
10.7
*3
Scale display
Historical Trend
Graph
Graph display format
Scale points
Option
Section
function board
10.8
Layer
Up to 16 objects with [Store Memory] settings can be set.
*2
Only one object with [Locus mode] settings can be set to one project.
*3
Objects with [Store Memory] settings is unusable.
*4
Objects with [Locus] settings is unusable.
(1) Memory capacity for trend graph

124 + {4 (LN + MN)}
(2) Memory capacity for line graph
124 + (4 LN) + (8 MN)
(3) Memory capacity for bar graph
120 + {4 (LN + MN)}
(4) Memory capacity for statistics graph
100 + {4 (LN + MN)}
(5) Memory capacity for scatter graph
108 + 4 PN 2
SN : Number of stored graphs MN: Number of monitored points
PN: Number of points
(6) Memory capacity for historical trend graph

300 + (20 MN) + (8 AL) + (8 EN) + (24 LN) + (12 + {8 LN) MN
MN : Number of monitored points
AL: Number of auxiliary lines
EN : Set number of external outputs LN: Number of stored graphs
2 - 30
Touch switch
objects in one
Trigger
Device
OVERVIEW
Max. No. of setting

Others
screen
equipment
and
Reference
limitations
1000 *1*2
132
80
Go to screen
124
Change station No.
Pattern
BackGround Style
Text Color
Solid Color
Text
Display Size
Font
Effects
Script
Layer
Section 6.2
124
Key code
124
Multi action
120
Up to 10 touch switches with its max. number of times for operation set can be set in one screen.
*2
Up to 100 touch switches with "ON/OFF delay" settings can be set.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*1
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Touch switch
Frame
Switch
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Special function
Figure
2 - 31
ALARM
124
COMMON SETTING
Bit
Data set
hardware
SPECIFICATIONS
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Word device
Bit device
Bit Trigger
ON/OFF
object (byte)
Rise/Fall
applicable for one
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
Trigger
Action
Max. No. of setting
objects in one
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Word device
Bit device
object (byte)
Bit Trigger
applicable for one
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
equipment
and
Reference
hardware
limitations
512
(512 objects for
each project)
Status
Observation
function
Section
11.1
Refer to (1) below

32
(32 objects for each
project)
Time action
Section
11.2
1592
256
Logging
Option
board
Refer to (3) below
Section
11.3
(1) Memory capacity for status observation

28 + WN 8 + IN 8 + FN 4
WN : Number of write points
IN : Number of function points
FN : Fixed
(2) Memory capacity for time action
26 + {BA 8 + {WA 16 (+ 8 bytes, shared by time action)
BA : Bit action
WA : Word action
(3) Memory capacity for logging
Capacity for logging to be stored in user area (C drive + expansion memory): Displayed at
[Buffering Area Size] of logging setting
Refer to Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic Tab
When stored on a memory card: Refer to

in this section.
2 - 32
"Data capacity available for storage on memory card"
Recipe
Others
equipment
and
Reference
Section
hardware
SPECIFICATIONS
limitations
256
Option
-
function
board
Recipe
12.2
Refer to (1) below

2048
(2048 objects for
each project)
Advanced
recipe
Option
-
function
board
Section
12.3
Refer to (2) below
(1) Memory capacity for recipe function

Stored in built-in memory
: 48 + Nrnm 2 (Nfom Nfam) 2 (+ 8 bytes, shared by recipe)
Nrnm
: Number of characters of [Recipe Name]
Nfom
: Number of characters of folder name
Nfam
: Number of characters of file name
When stored on a memory card: Refer to
Data capacity available for storage on memory card
in this section.
(2) Memory capacity for advanced recipe function
Advanced recipe setting capacity to be stored in the built-in flash memory
: 96 + N1 + N2 + N3 + N4 + N5
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
: 2 x (Nrnm + Nfnm)
: 12 x (Nir+Niw)
: (8 + 2 x Ndcmt) x Ndev (When setting device comment.)
: 4 x Ndev (When not setting device comment.)
: 28 x Nblk + 76 x Nrec
: (2 x (Nbdev + Nwdev) + 4 x Ndwdev) x Nrecv
Nrnm
Nfnm
Nir
Niw
Ndcmt
: Number of characters of [Recipe Name]

: Number of characters of [File Name]
: Points of [Read Trigger]
: Points of [Write Trigger]
: Number of characters of [Device Comment]
(Average number of characters of device comment set in each device)
Nrecv : Number of record (only for the record whose attribute has recipe device value)
Ndev
: Points of device (Nbdev + Nwdev + Ndwdev)
Nbdev : Points of bit device
Nwdev : Points of word device (16-bit)
Ndwdev : Points of word device (32-bit)
Nblk
: Number of block
Nrec
: Number of record
When stored on a memory card:
Data capacity available for storage on memory card in
this section.
2 - 33
ALARM
each project)
COMMON SETTING
(256 objects for
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Word device
Bit device
Bit Trigger
ON/OFF
object (byte)
Rise/Fall
applicable for one
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger
screen
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
objects in one
OVERVIEW
Max. No. of setting
Auxiliary
Max. No. of setting
objects in one
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Word device
Bit device
Bit Trigger
object (byte)
ON/OFF
applicable for one
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
equipment
and
Reference
hardware
limitations
GT15:2047
GT11:5
Set overlay
screen
function
(+ 8 bytes, shared
Section
15.1
by set overlay
screen)
-
Test
Section
15.2
Sysetem
monitor
Section
14.1
Ladder
monitor
Option
board
List editor for
Option
-
board
FX list editor
Option
-
module
monitor
Option
-
Option
-
monitor
Option
-
monitor
-
2 - 34
function
board
Q motion
function
board
Network
function
board
Intelligent
function
function
board
Section
14.2
Section
14.3
Section
14.4
Section
14.5
Section
14.6
Section
14.7
Max. No. of setting

objects in one
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
limitations
board
Option
-
function
board
Section
14.8
3
Section
14.9
Server, client
function: one object
(1 object for each
project)
-
function
board
15.3
project)
256
(256 objects for

each project)
Chapter 16
Script
Refer to (1) below
Depends on objects.
function
Chapter 16
board
6
LAMP, SWITCH
function
Option
Refer to (2) below
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Object script
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
one object
(1 object for each
2 - 35
ALARM
Gateway
Section
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Option
Mail send function:
SPECIFICATIONS
function
Reference
OVERVIEW
and
hardware
COMMON SETTING
Object script
Data Operation
equipment
Option
-
CNC monitor
Security
monitor
amplifier
Servo
Word device
object (byte)
Bit device
applicable for one
Bit Trigger
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
(1) Memory capacity for script function (The memory capacity for script function set in each window will
be 0 if the window screen is not displayed.)
48 (Number of RPN expressions*1 8) + (WDN 8) + 28 + FPN + SCN + FDS
WDN : Number of write devices
FPN : Number of file path characters
SCN : Number of script comment characters
FDS : File data size
*1
The method to express an operator (+, -, *, /, etc.) after an operand (numeric or variable) (in
usual expression: 1 + 2, in RPN expression: 1 2 +)
(2) Memory capacity for object script function
448 x (Number of RPN expressions*1 x 8) + (WDN 8) + STS
WDN : Number of write devices
STS : Script text size
*1
The method to express an operator (+, -, *, /, etc.) after an operand (numeric or variable) (in
usual expression: 1 + 2, in RPN expression: 1 2 +)
2 - 36
External input and output
Trigger
Device
Others
screen
equipment
and
Reference
Section
hardware
limitations
SPECIFICATIONS
Object script
Data Operation
Security
Word device
Bit device
Bit Trigger
object (byte)
ON/OFF
applicable for one
Rise/Fall
Range
Memory capacity
Sampling
Display attribute
Ordinary
Function
Necessary
1
(1 object for each
project)
Hard copy
13.1
Refer to (1) below
1
(1 object for each
peoject)
Bar code
Section
13.2
COMMON SETTING
objects in one
OVERVIEW
Max. No. of setting
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Memory capacity for hard copy function

26 + (Nfom + Nfam) 2
Nfom : Number of characters of folder name
Nfam : Number of characters of file name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2 - 37
ALARM
2 Data capacity available for storage on memory card

(1) Data capacity available for storage on memory card
Some objects have a function that allows storing data into a memory card.
The data capacity available for a memory card is shown as follows.
Object name
Data capacity
When saving 3072 alarm historical data
Alarm history function
Cumulation mode
(when saved in CSV format)
: Approx. 97 K bytes
(Approx. 400K bytes)
History mode
(when saved in CSV format)
: Approx. 72 K bytes
(Approx. 360K bytes)
Data capacity per screen (The following are reference values.)
Number of screens to be stored

Data capacity per screen (KB)
Model
BMP format
GT1595-X
: 768
: 1406
256 color
: 470
65536 color
: 900
256 color
: 300
GT1575-VN
256 color
: 300
GT1572-VN, GT1562-VN
16 color
: 300
GT1575-V, GT1565-V
Recipe function (byte)
: 2304
256 color
65536 color
GT1585-S, GT1575-S
Hard copy function
(149
65536 color
F) + (9
16) + (14
2)
RF : Number of recipe files

R16: Total number of 16-bit devices in each recipe file
R32: R16: Total number of 32-bit devices in each recipe file
G1P file size: 128 + N1 + N2 + N3
N1
: (8 + 2 x Ndcmt) x Ndev
N2
: Nblk x 12
N3
: (80 + Ndev x 2) x Nrec
Ndcmt
: Number of characters of [Device Comment]
Ndev
: Points of device (Nbdev + Nwdev + Ndwdev)
Nbdev
: Points of bit device
Nwdev : Points of word device (16-bit)

Ndwdev : Points of word device (32-bit)
Nblk
: Number of block
Nrec
: Number of recordCSV file size : 164 + N1 + N2 + N3
CSV file size: 164 + N1 + N2 + N3

Advanced recipe
function (byte)
N1
:Nrnm
N2
:(Nbit + Nwrd + Ndwrd)
N3
:Nrec
(25
Nbit
(18 + Ndcmt)
2 + Nwrd
7 + Ndwrd
Unicode text file size: above CSV file size 2
Nrnm
:Number of characters*1 of [Recipe Name]
Ndcmt :Number of characters*1 of [Device Comment]

Ndev
:Device Points
Nblk
:Block Number
Nrec
:Record Number
Nbit
:Number of bit device points
Nwrd
:Number of 16-bit device points
Ndwrd :Number of 32-bit device points
2 - 38
2)
JPEG format
Depending on the screen
Object name
Data capacity
Memory capacity for G1L file: 182 + N1 + N2 + N3
16
N3
(Ndb
2 + Ndw
2)
2 + Ndd
Memory capacity for CSV file: 99 + N1 + N2

N1
(Navbedc + 11)
N2
(20 + (Ndspl + 1)
N3
Nalgf
4)
(17/16)
N3
Nd
Nd)
Memory capacity for Unicode text file: 198 + N1 + N2

N1
(Navbedc + 11)
N2
(20 + (Ndspl + 1)
N3
Nalgf
Navedc
: Average number of device comment characters
Nd)
: Number of bit devices
Ndw
: Number of 16-bit (word) devices
Ndd
: Number of 32-bit (double-word) devices
Nb
: Number of device blocks
Ndspl
: Number of display digits
Nalgf
: Number of stored events in a log file
Nd
: Number of logging devices (Total number of devices set to a device block)
3
COMMON SETTING
Ndb
Single/double byte characters are not distinguished.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
*1
Nd
N3
2*1
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Logging function
OVERVIEW
(4 + Navedc
Nb
SPECIFICATIONS
Nb
N2
2 - 39
ALARM
N1
2.5 Clock Function
1 Clock Function
The clock function is a function that manages the clock data of the GOT.
The objects below use the clock data of the GOT.
Date Display function
Time Display function
Advanced Alarm observation (Advanced User Alarm)
Advanced Alarm observation (Advanced System Alarm)
Advanced Alarm Display function (Advanced User Alarm)
Advanced Alarm Display function (Advanced System Alarm)
Advanced Alarm Display function (Advanced Alarm Popup Display)
Alarm History function
Alarm List function (User Alarm)
Alarm List function (System Alarm)
Time Action function
Logging function
2 Determining base clock between GOT and PLC CPU

The clock used as a base must be determined so that the time is matched between the GOT and the
PLC CPU connected.
The method for adjusting time between the GOT and PLC CPU is different depending on the base
clock.
(3) Adjust/Broadcast
(2) Broadcast
(1) Adjust
(1)
Setting the clock time of the GOT by the PLC CPU clock time data (Adjust)
(a) The time of the GOT clock data is adjusted to that of the PLC CPU clock data when the GOT is
turned on.
(b) No battery is required because the time is adjusted to that of the PLC CPU's clock data when
the GOT is powered up.
(c) To set the clock data of the PLC CPU, refer to the manual of the PLC CPU being used.
2 - 40
2.5 Clock Function
(2) Setting the clock data of the PLC CPU by the GOT clock data (Broadcast)
(d) It is possible to make the clock data of multiple PLC CPUs matched with the clock data of GOT
by using the multi-channel function. (GT15 only)
For details of the multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Section 2.8 Multi-channel Function
(3) Setting the clock data of the GOT and other PLC CPUs to the clock data of the PLC CPU taken as
the reference (Adjust/Broadcast)
(a) Using both adjust and broadcast functions.
(b) It is possible to make the clock data of the GOT and PLC CPUs matched with the clock data of
one PLC CPU by using the multi-channel function.
(c) By setting different triggers for adjusting and broadcasting, it is possible to activate the adjust
and broadcast function independently meeting the situations.
For the procedure to match the clock data between the GOT and PLC CPU, refer to the following.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(c) To set the time of the GOT's clock data, use the GOT's utility.
3
COMMON SETTING
(b) Because the GOT's clock data are used as base clock time data, a battery must be installed so
that the clock is usable even if the GOT is powered down.
OVERVIEW
(a) The time of the PLC CPU clock data is adjusted to that of the GOT at the timing of triggering.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 2.5.1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU
A battery can be installed to a GOT to backup the clock data while the GOT is
powered OFF.
With a battery installed, a GOT continues the clock operation even under the powerOFF status.
After purchasing the GOT, install a battery and set the clock time by the utility.
To operate the utility, install the OS.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The battery installed to a GOT
3 Changing clock data
1 Correct the clock data of the PLC CPU used as the reference of time.
For the procedure for correcting the clock data, refer to the manual of the PLC CPU being used.
2 Make the clock data of the GOT matched with the clock data of the PLC CPU using the adjust
function.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(1) Making the clock data of the GOT matched with that of the PLC CPU (Adjust)
LAMP, SWITCH
Change the clock data of the PLC CPU or GOT by the methods given below.
2.5 Clock Function
2 - 41
ALARM
(2) Making the clock data of the PLC CPU matched with the clock data of the GOT (Broadcast)
1 Correct the clock data of the GOT.
The clock data of the GOT can be corrected using the clock setting of utility or GOT special
register (GS).
For details of correction, refer to the following.
Section 2.5.2 Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)
GT15 User's Manual (Section 12 The Clock Setting and Status Display of Battery)
GT11 User's Manual (Section 11 The Clock Setting and Status Display of Battery)
2 Make the clock data of the PLC CPU matched with the clock data of the GOT by using the
broadcast function.
*1 Broadcasting of clock data to multiple PLC CPUs is possible only when the multi-channel function is used at
GT15.
(3) Making the clock data of the GOT and other PLC CPUs matched with the clock data of the PLC
CPU taken as the reference (Adjust/Broadcast) (only when the multi-channel function is used at
GT15)
1 Correct the clock data of the PLC CPU used as the reference of time.
For the procedure for correcting the clock data, refer to the manual of the PLC CPU being used.
2 Using the adjust function, make the clock data of the GOT matched with the clock data of the
PLC CPU.
3 Using the broadcast function, make the clock data of the PLC CPUs other than the PLC CPU
described in
matched with the clock data of the GOT.
*1 Only when the multi-channel function is used at GT15.
2 - 42
2.5 Clock Function
(2) Broadcast (GOT's clock data to PLC CPU's clock data)

The clock data of GOT are written to the clock of the connected PLC CPU for time adjustment.
The timing for the writing can be selected from the cycle and rise/fall of the bit device.
For the PLC CPU supporting the adjust/broadcast features and connection methods, refer to following:
Section 2.5.3 PLC CPU equipped with clock
2 Setup
After selecting either of the adjust or broadcast options in GOT setup of system environment, specify
the trigger of the selected method in clock setting of system environment.
If no trigger is specified for the method selected on GOT setup of clock setting, or if the method for the
trigger specified in clock setting is not selected on the GOT setup screen, the method is not executed.
In such cases, the clock of the GOT operates separately from the PLC CPU's clock.
GOT Setup
Clock Setting
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Adjust (PLC CPU's clock data to GOT's clock data)

Read out the clock data of the connected PLC CPU, and adjust the GOT's clock data to it.
The timing for the reading can be selected from the GOT's power-up or reset, cycle, and rise/fall of
the bit device.
3
COMMON SETTING
The following two methods are usable for synchronizing the clock time data of the GOT and PLC CPU.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1 Method for clock time synchronization
OVERVIEW
Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
If the settings are inconsistent,
the GOT does not execute time
adjustment with the clock data of
the PLC CPU.
LAMP, SWITCH
Adjust
04/06/1 12:00:00 2 (Tue.)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The clock of GOT operates independently.
2.5 Clock Function

2.5.1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU
2 - 43
ALARM
2.5.1
(1) Select a clock setting method

(a) Select [Common] - [System Environment].
(b) The system environment setup dialog box is displayed. Double-click [GOT Setup].
(c) The dialog box for GOT Setup is displayed.
Remark
Setup in Project Workspace

Double-clicking [System Environment] displays the system environment setup
dialog box.
Double-click [GOT Setup].
Double-click
(d) Set the clock setting method for the GOT.
Item
Description
Check this when using opening screen time, save screen time, screen save backlight, clock setting, buzzer
volume, window move buzzer and utility call key.
Use GOT Setup
For details, refer to the following:

Specify the method to match the clock data between the GOT and the PLC CPU from among [None],
Clock Setting
[Adjust], [Broadcast] and [Adjust/Broadcast].

When [Adjust/Broadcast] is specified, both adjust and broadcast are executed.
2 - 44
2.5 Clock Function

(2) Specify the trigger for adjust or broadcast

(a) Select [Common]
[System Environment].
OVERVIEW
(b) The system environment setup dialog box is displayed. Double-click [Clock Setting].
(c) The setup dialog box for clock setting is displayed.
Remark
Setup in project workspace
SPECIFICATIONS
Double-clicking [System Environment] displays the system environment setup

dialog box.
Double-click [Clock Setting].
COMMON SETTING
3
Double-click
(d) Specify the trigger for adjust or broadcast in the clock setting.
If [Adjust/Broadcast] is specified, specify the trigger for both Adjust and Broadcast.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2.5 Clock Function

2 - 45
ALARM
Item
Clock data GOT is matched to
clock data External (Adjust)
Description
Check when adjust is selected.
Adjust CH No.
Select the channel No. to which the PLC CPU taken as the reference for clock data matching is connected.
(Setting of only one channel No. is allowed.)
Trigger type
Rise, Fall or Sampling (1-1440 Min.) can be specified.
Trigger Device
When rise or fall is specified, a bit device can be specified as a trigger device.
Clock data External is matched

to clock data GOT (Broadcast)
Check when broadcast is selected.
Broadcast CH No.
Select the channel Nos. to which the PLC CPUs, the target of broadcasting, are connected. (Setting of
multiple channel Nos. is possible.)
2 - 46
Trigger type
Rise, Fall or Sampling (1-1440 Min.) can be specified.
Trigger Device
When rise or fall is specified, a bit device can be specified as a trigger device.
2.5 Clock Function

Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)
The following are example steps for changing clock data using numerical display and numerical input.
Display the present time stored in the GOT special register (GS650 to GS653) by numerical display.
Enter a changed time into the GOT special register (GS513 to GS516) by numerical input.
Turn on the time change signal of the GOT special register (GS512.b0) a touch switch.
The change of the clock time data is completed.
Confirm the completion of the time change, and then turn off the GOT special register (GS512.b0).
Day/time
0112H
Minute/second
Day of week
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
0406H
(1)
Clock data
monitoring
GS650
0406H
GS651
0112H
0000H
GS652
0000H
0002H
GS653
0002H
Clock data
reading
(constantly)
Clock data
04/06/01
12:00:00
TUE
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Year/month
GOT special register:

Current time
(GS650 to GS653)
Numerical display

Change time
(GS513 to GS516)
0406H
Day/time
0116H
Minute/second
Day of week
(2)
Clock data
input
GS513
0406H
GS514
0116H
3000H
GS515
3000H
0002H
GS516
0002H
Clock data
04/06/01
12:00:00
TUE
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Year/month
LAMP, SWITCH
Numerical input
3
COMMON SETTING
The GOT constantly writes clock data into the GOT special register (GS).
The clock data of the GOT can be changed from an object such as Numerical Input by the Clock data stored
in the GOT special register (GS513 to 516) and the rise of the time change signal (GS512.b0).
2.5 Clock Function

2.5.2 Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)
2 - 47
ALARM
2.5.2
2
SPECIFICATIONS
The method for time synchronization between the GOT's clock and the PLC CPU's clock can be set up
by the utility as well.
When downloading the system environment setting to the GOT after setting it by the utility, the
system environment setting becomes effective.
When downloading the system environment setting to the GOT and then changing it by the utility, the
utility function becomes effective.
When screen data are uploaded from GOT, data changed by the utility are uploaded.
OVERVIEW
3 Priority in setting when using utility

Change time
(GS513 to GS516)
Year/month
0406H
GS513
0406H
Day/time
0116H
GS514
0116H
Minute/second
3000H
GS515
3000H
Day of week
0002H
GS516
Touch switch
(4)
Completion of
clock data
change
Clock data
04/06/01
16:30:00
TUE
0002H
(3)
Time change signal
is turned ON.
GS512 1
(Bit 0)
(Operation: Bit ALT)

Current time
(GS650 to GS653)
Numerical display
Year/month
0406H
Day/time
0116H
Minute/second
Day of week
Clock data
monitoring
GS650
0406H
GS651
0116H
3000H
GS652
3000H
0002H
GS653
Touch switch
Clock data
reading
(constantly)
Clock data
04/06/01
16:30:00
TUE
0002H
(5)
Time change signal
is turned OFF.
GS512 0
(Bit 0)
(Operation: Bit ALT)
1 GOT special register (GS)

(1) Write device
Device
Description
GS512 (bit 0)
Time change signal (writing data to the clock at the rise of this signal)
GS513
Change time (upper 8 bits: lower 2 digits of the year, lower 8 bits: month), data format: BCD
GS514
Change time (upper 8 bits: day, lower 8 bits: hour), data format: BCD
GS515
Change time (upper 8 bits: minute, lower 8 bits: second), data format: BCD
Change time (upper 8 bits: not used, lower 8 bits: day of week), data format: BCD
GS516
Day of week (0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)
(2) Read device

Device
2 - 48
Description
GS650
Current time (upper 8 bits: lower 2 digits of the year, lower 8 bits: month), data format: BCD
GS651
Current time (upper 8 bits: day, lower 8 bits: hour), data format: BCD
GS652
Current time (upper 8 bits: minute, lower 8 bits: second), data format: BCD
GS653
Current time (upper 8 bits: note used, lower 8 bits: day of week), data format: BCD
2.5 Clock Function

2.5.2 Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)
2.5.3
PLC CPU equipped with clock
OVERVIEW
The following lists PLC CPUs equipped with clocks and their connection methods.
1 PLC CPU equipped with clock

(1) Mitsubishi PLCs
QnACPU type
QnACPU
QnASCPU type
AnUCPU
AnACPU
AnCPU
Q01CPU,
Q02CPU,
Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU,
Q12PHCPU,
Q25PHCPU,
Q12PRHCPU,
Q25PRHCPU
Q02CPU-A,
Q02HCPU-A,
Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU,
Q2ACPU-S1,
Q3ACPU,
Q4ACPU,
Q2ASCPU,
Q2ASCPU-S1,
Q2ASHCPU,
Q2ASHCPU-S1
A2UCPU,
A2UCPU-S1,
A3UCPU,
A4UCPU
A2ACPU,
A2ACPUP21,
A2ACPUR21,
A2ACPU-S1
A2ACPUP21-S1,
A2ACPUR21-S1,
A3ACPU,
A3ACPUP21,
A1NCPU,
A1NCPUP21,
A1NCPUR21,
A2NCPU,
A2NCPUP21,
A2NCPUR21,
A2NCPU-S1,
A2NCPUP21-S1,
A2NCPUR21-S1,
A3NCPU,
A3NCPUP21,
A3NCPUR21
Q4ARCPU
A3ACPUR21
type
AnNCPU
ACPU
AnUS(H)CPU
AnSCPU
type
AnS(H)CPU
A1SJ(H)CPU
A1FXCPU
A2USCPU,
A2USCPU-S1,
A2USHCPU-S1
A1SCPU,
A1SCPUC24-R2,
A2SCPU,
A1SHCPU,
A2SHCPU,
A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJCPU,
A1SJCPU-S3,
A1SJHCPU
A2CCPU,
A2CCPUP21,
A2CCPU-R21,
A2CCPUC24-PRF,
A2CJCPU-S3
A2SCPU-S1,
A1FXCPU
A2CCPUC24,
FX1N series,
FX1NC series,
FX1S series,
FX2 series *1,
FX2C series *1,
FX2N series,
FX2NC series *1,
FX3UC series,
FX3u series
Motion Controller CPU
Q172CPU,
Q173CPU,
Q172CPUN,
Q173CPUN,
(Q series)
Q172HCPU,
Q173HCPU
A273UHCPU,
FXCPU
COMMON SETTING
QCPU (A mode)
Q00CPU,
Q02HCPU,
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
QCPU
Q00JCPU,
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
QCPU (Q mode)
Model
SPECIFICATIONS
Abbreviation/generic term
A373UCPU,
A373UCPU-S3,
A273UCPU,
A273UHCPU-S3,
A171SCPU,
A171SCPU-S3,
A171SCPU-S3N,
(A series)
A171SHCPU,
A171SHCPUN,
A172SHCPU,
A172SHCPUN,
A173UHCPU,
A173UHCPU-S1
*1
A clock function is usable when the real time clock function board or E2PROM memory with real time clock
function is mounted.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
CPU
2.5 Clock Function

2.5.3 PLC CPU equipped with clock
2 - 49
ALARM
Controller
LAMP, SWITCH
Motion
(2) Other manufacturers' PLCs

Abbreviation/generic term
Model
CPM2A,
CJ1,
OMRON PLCs
KEYENCE PLCs
SHARP PLCs
CQM1*3,
CQM1H*3 *10,
C200HS,
C200H*1,
C200H
CV2000,
CS1,
CV500,
CV1000,
CVM1-CPU01,
CVM1-CPU11,
CVM1-CPU21
KV-700,
KV-1000
JW-22CU,
JW-32CUH,
JW-33CUH,
JW-100CUH*6
JW-100CU
Z-512J
TOSHIBA
PROSEC T series
T2(PU224),
PLCs*5
PROSEC V series
model3000(S3)
T2E,
T2N,
T3,
*2,
JW-70CUH*6,
T3H
model2000(S2)
H-302(CPU2-03H),
H-702(CPU2-07H),
H-2002(CPU2-20H),
H-4010(CPU3-40H),
H-200 to 252
H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H),
H-250(CPU21-02H),
series
H-252B(CPU22-02HB),
H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
Large-size H series
HITACHI PLCs
CPM2C*9,
H-1002(CPU2-10H),
H-252(CPU22-02H),
(HIDIC
H series)
H series
board type
EH-150 series
MATSUSITA PLCs
YASKAWA PLCs*4
YOKOGAWA PLCs*5
Allen-Bradley
PLCs*5
SIEMENS PLCs
H-20DR,
H-28DR,
H-40DR,
H-64DR,
H-20DT,
H-28DT,
H-40DT,
H-64DT,
HL-40DR,
HL-64DR,
EH-CPU208,
EH-CPU308,
EH-CPU316
FP1-C24C,
FP1-C40C,
FP2*7,
FP2SH,
FP3*8,
FP5,
FP10(S),
FP10SH,
FP-M(C20TC),
FP-M(C32TC)
EP-
GL120,
GL130
FA500,
F3SP05,
F3SP08,
F3SP20,
F3SP30,
F3FP36,
F3SP21,
F3SP25,
F3SP35,
F3SP28,
F3SP38,
F3SP53,
F3SP58,
F3SP59
SLC5/03,
SLC5/04,
SLC5/05
SIMATIC S7-300 series,
F3SP10,
SIMATIC S7-400 series
*1
To use the C200H-CPU21/CPU22/CPU23, the memory cassette equipped with a clock is required.
*2
The clock function is not usable for C200HE-CPU11.
*3
The memory cassette equipped with a clock is required.
*4
Use default values (409988 to 409995) for the clock data devices.
The C200H-CPU01/CPU02/CPU03 does not support the clock function.
*5
Day-of-the-week data is not available.
*6
The clock function is not usable when the link unit (ZW-10CM) is used with the JW-70CUH/100CUH.
*7
Any of the extension memory unit FP2-EM1, FP2-EM2, or FP2-EM3 is required.
*8
The clock function is available for the AFP3210C-F, APF3211C-F or APF3220C-F only.
*9
Some models do not support the clock function.
*10 The EM device of the CQM-CPU61 cannot be monitored.
2 - 50
2.5 Clock Function

1
2 Connection methods
Target of clock data read/write
OVERVIEW
Connection method
Bus connection
CPU direct connection
Connected PLC CPU*1
Computer link connection
(PLC to PLC network)
PLC CPU of the control station

SPECIFICATIONS
MELSECNET/10 connection
Mitsubishi PLC
CC-link connection
(intelligent device station)
PLC CPU of the master station
CC-link connection (via G4)
PLC CPU which is set as host station by GT Designer2
Microcomputer connection *2
Connected microcomputer
Connection to other manufacturer's PLC
Connected PLC CPU
Servo amplifier connection, inverter connection, temperature
COMMON SETTING
Ethernet connection
controller connection, CNC connection
*1:
When GOT is connected to the remote I/O station, the master station has to be set to the MELSECNET/H
*2:
In the microcomputer connection, the GOT makes its clock time synchronized with the microcomputer board in
network system and power has to be on.
the virtual devices for microcomputer connection (D4 to D10) using the clock data read command (TR) and the
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
clock data setting command (TS).

For the respective commands and virtual devices, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Chapter 19 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2.5 Clock Function

2 - 51
ALARM
2.6 Superimposition Settings

Objects or shapes can be superimposed in the following methods
1 Superimposition using layers (
Section 2.6.1 Superimposition using layers)
By setting on two layers (front layer and back layer), up to two objects can be superimposed.
Front layer
Back layer
Actual view
2 Superimposition using no layers (
Section 2.6.2 Superimposition using no layer)
Some types of objects can be superimposed.

For the combination of an object and a shape, the object is superimposed on the shape.
(1) Touch switch and other object
+
(2) Level + numerical display/
comment display
50
(3) Parts display + parts display
+
(4) Shape + object
The object is superimposed

on the shape.
3 Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input

(
Section 2.6.3 Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and
ASCII input)
It is possible to superimpose up to eight objects (touch switch, numerical input and ASII input): overlay
the base screens and superimpose windows on which objects are set by using the set overlay screen
function.
Set overlay screen

(Base screen, window screen)
Superimpose window1
Superimpose window2
2 - 52
2.6.1
Superimposition using layers
OVERVIEW
1 Layer
A single screen can consist of two types of sheets (layers).
Set each of objects on either of the two layers (front layer or back layer).
Then, overlay the two layers to superimpose the set objects.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Front layer
A kind of transparent sheet.
The back layer can be seen through the transparent area other
than the objects set on the sheet.
The parts of the objects, which are drawn in the color specified
as transparent, are also displayed as transparent.
For Transparent, refer to the following.
3
COMMON SETTING
Transparent color in this section
Actual view
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Back layer
Placed behind the front layer.
Example: Superimposing a line graph on a bar graph

Line graph
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
The object on the front layer is
always placed over the object
on the back layer.
Front layer
Bar graph
Actual view
6
Back layer
LAMP, SWITCH
Setting Example: Line graph settings (Basic tab)

Set the layer (front or back layer) for each object.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.6.1 Superimposition using layers
2 - 53
ALARM
Confirming the layer image when creating a screen

On GT Designer2, the screen view can be switched between the following patterns,
front layer only, back layer only, and front layer + back layer.
Screen view is switched by the toolbar (view).
Toolbar (view)
Layer: front and back
Layer: front
Layer: back
View of front layer only
Remark
View of back layer only
View of front layer + back layer
Superimposition using no layers

In this method, superimpose two objects such as level and numerical display by
setting them on the same layer.
Section 2.6.2 Superimposition using no layer
2 - 54

1
2 Objects and figures that can set on front/back layer
: Can be set on either front layer or back layer.
: Set on back layer automatically.
Cannot be set on front layer
OVERVIEW
Object
Shape (including text)
3 Screen that cannot consist of layers
2
SPECIFICATIONS
In some cases, superimposition of layers may be disabled depending on the screen type.
If disabled, the screen appears as shown below.
When layer superimposition is enabled
A 125
Objects on the front layer are
always brought to front.
Front layer
COMMON SETTING
3
When layer superimposition is disabled
Overlapped objects are brought
A 125 to front/back alternatively
regardless of the front/back layer
settings, and cannot be displayed
correctly.
Back layer
For details, refer to the following table.

Composite
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Screen type
display
Numerical display (front layer)

Bar graph (back layer)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Base screen
Base screen

Superimpose window 1, 2
6
Called screens of base screen (base

screen, window screen)
Called
screen

Bar graph
(back layer)
Called screens of superimpose window 1, 2

(base screen, window screen)
Superimpose
window 1, 2
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Called screen
(window screen 1)
8
Called screen
(window screen 1)
(Continued to the next page)

2 - 55
ALARM
Enabled
LAMP, SWITCH
Composite
Screen type
display

Overlap window 1, 2
Overlap window 1, 2
Disabled
Called
Called screens of superimpose window 1, 2
screen
(base screen, window screen)
Bar graph
(back layer)
Overlap
window 1, 2
2 - 56

Called screen
(window screen 1)
Example: Displaying the bar graph on the back layer through the numerical display.
Numerical display
(blue inside the frame)
Transparent color
: blue
Blue
1245
Change the
transparent
color to blue
Blue
1245
Back layer
Bar graph
The area inside the frame of

numerical display does not turn
transparent because the color
different from the area is set to
be transparent.
The area inside the frame of

numerical display turns
transparent because the
same color as the area is set
to be transparent.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Setting Example: Screen property settings (Basic tab)

Set the transparent color on the property screen of the base screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 57
ALARM
Actual
view
COMMON SETTING
Transparent color
: black
Front layer
(Transparent
: black)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
The transparent color settings are specific to the front layer.

The parts of objects, which are drawn in the color specified as transparent, are displayed as
transparent.
To display some parts of objects as transparent, change the color specified as transparent according to
the target parts.
(Transparent color is set to black by default.)
OVERVIEW
4 Transparent color
(1) Default transparent color

Transparent color is set to black by default.
In the default settings, the parts of objects drawn in black will be transparent. To make the parts
visible, change the parts color or the transparent color.
Example: When a lamp is set.
When a lamp is set on front layer
Lamp
(Lamp color: black)
Shape
The shape on the back layer

is shown through the lamp.
Set a lamp.
When a lamp is set on back layer
The lamp appears in black.
Caution when inverting an object (display mode: XOR)

When inverting parts display, touch switch, numerical display, and comment display,
set the display mode to XOR, paying full attention to the following.
(1) When setting an object on the front layer
If there is no objects or shapes below the target object, the object will be inverted
to the transparent color of the front layer.
Example: Inverting parts display (display mode: XOR).
Actual screen
Front layer (transparent color: blue)

Parts display
(white)
Back layer
(screen background color: black)
Displayed in white
(Inverted to the screen background color (black))
Displayed in yellow
(inverted to the transparent (Blue))
(2) When inverting an object to a shape

Set the object on the back layer.
2 - 58

(1) Layer settings

Front layers and back layers of screens will be integrated into a single front layer and back layer,
respectively, when the screens are overlaid.
Arrange and place objects on each layer so that they will not be overlapped between the integrated
front layers or between the integrated back layers.
Overlapped objects may not be displayed or operate correctly.
Objects are overlapped and
not displayed correctly.
Front layer
COMMON SETTING
Window screen 1 is
displayed on
superimpose window.
Actual view
The object that can be superimposed with another on the same layer
Some of the composite objects set on a single layer can be displayed and operate
correctly.
For the object that can be superimposed with another on a single layer, refer to the
following.
Section 2.6.2 Superimposition using no layer
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Window screen 1
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 59
ALARM
Base screen 1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Back layer
Remark
2
SPECIFICATIONS
When superimposing multiple screens using the superimpose windows and set overlay screen function,
design the screen while paying full attention to the following.
OVERVIEW
5 Superimposition using superimpose window, set overlay screen function and layers
Making the settings so that the objects on the base screen and those on the
superimpose window will not be overlapped
(1) Check whether the objects are overlapped or not.
Check whether the objects on the base screen and those on the superimpose
window are not overlapped each other by previewing the superimpose window.
Preview screen can be displayed by selecting the [View]
[Custom] menus.
[Window Preview]
(2) Rearrange the superimpose window

If objects are overlapped, rearrange the superimpose window by selecting the
[Object]
[Window Position]
[Superimpose 1]/[Superimpose 2] menus.
Check whether objects on the

base screen and those on the
superimpose window are
overlapped each other or not.
Base Screen
(2) Transparent color settings

The transparent color of called screen is invalid, but that of the basic screen is valid.
The transparent color is based on the corresponding settings of a base screen, as window screen
(superimpose window) does not include the settings.
Therefore, set the object colors on the front layer of the called screen considering the transparent
color set on the basic screen.
When adjusted according to the
transparent color set on the basic screen
(The lamp color is changed from red to blue)
Not
transparent
Lamp: red
Front layer
The lamp is displayed as the original
image of the called screen.
Back layer
Call base screen

100 to base screen 1.
Actual view
2 - 60
Base screen 1
(basic screen)
Base screen 100

(called screen)
Transparent: red
Transparent: black

When displayed without adjusting

(the lamp remains in red)
The lamp turns
transparent.
As the transparent (red) set on the

basic screen is valid, the unintended area
turns transparent.
2.6.2
Superimposition using no layer
The combinations of objects that can be superimposed are as follows:

OVERVIEW
Touch switch and other objects (except for numerical input and ASCII input)
Level and numerical display
Level and comment display
Parts display and parts display
Objects other than above can be superimposed by using layers.
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Superimposition with touch switch

The touch switch with no shape and text set can be superimposed with other objects.
3
COMMON SETTING
Touch switch
"No shape"
The touch switch operates when

touched, although it is invisible.
Lamp display
Level
*1
Alarm history
*1
Trend graph
Cannot be superimposed with a touch switch If one touch is enabled for alarm list (user alarm) or alarm history.
Touch switch and numerical input/ASCII input cannot be superimposed on each other.
To superimpose them, use layers.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm list*1
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Historical trend graph
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Objects that can be superimposed with touch switch

Numerical display
Scatter graph
Data list
Parts display
ASCII display
Parts transfer
Clock display
Lamp display
Comment display
Panel meter
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.6.2 Superimposition using no layer
2 - 61
ALARM
(2) Settings needed for superimposing the touch switch

(a) Touch switch settings (Basic tab)
Set [Shape] to [None]
(b) Touch switch settings (Text/Lamp tab)

Do not set [Text.]
2 - 62

1
2 Superimposition with level
OVERVIEW
(1) Objects that can be superimposed with level

Numerical display
Comment display
(2) Condition for superimposing with level
One numerical display or comment display can be superimposed with a single level.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Setting example

Example 1:When display mode is set to "Transparent"
The numeric value or text will be displayed in the original color.
Suitable for the color-display GOT.
20
48
98
FULL
FULL
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example 2:When display mode is set to "XOR"

Differently from the case of "Transparent," the area overlapped with the filled color of
level will be inverted.
Suitable for the monochrome-display GOT.
COMMON SETTING
FULL
When superimposing the level and numerical display/comment display, make sure to read the cautions
on level before making the settings.
Section 10.2 Level
Inverting the superimposed objects (display mode: XOR)
50
When placed on the different layers
Numerical display
(back layer)
50
Level
(back layer)
Level
(back layer)
The numerical display
is inverted.
Numerical Display
(back layer)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When placed on the same layer
LAMP, SWITCH
Place and overlay the objects on the same layer, and then, make the inverse
settings for them.
Example: Inverting the composite of a numerical display and level
The numerical display

is not inverted.

2 - 63
ALARM
Remark
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 Superimposition with parts display

(1) Objects that can be superimposed with parts display
The parts display (fixed) can be superimposed with parts display (fixed).
Example: Displaying the composite of three parts display objects (display mode: over write)
Parts display A
(Parts No.1 is displayed at the
rise of M10)
M10=OFF
ON
Parts display B
rise of M20)
Parts display C
Parts display A is
displayed.
rise of M30)
Overlay three
parts display objects.
2 - 64

M20=OFF
ON
Parts display B is
displayed.
M30=OFF
ON
Parts display C is
displayed.
Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII

input
When multiple objects such as touch switch, ASCII input, and numerical input are overlapped by superimpose windows or set overlay screen function, up to 8 of them can operate.
1 Method of special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Superimposition by Superimpose Windows

The superimpose windows are placed in the front of the base screen as a single screen.
For the details of Superimpose Window, refer to the following.
1
OVERVIEW
2.6.3
Section 2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
COMMON SETTING
Superimpose
window 1
Superimpose
window 2
Section 15.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(2) Superimposition by set overlay screen

The set overlay screen function brings other base screens and window screens onto a basic
screen (base screen or superimpose window), and superimpose and displays them as a single
(composite) screen.
For the details of set overlay screen function, refer to the following.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Base screen
LAMP, SWITCH
6
Called screen
Basic screen
(Base screen)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.6.3 Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input
2 - 65
ALARM
(1) Setting multiple operations to a single Touch Switch

The settings can be easily made, so that a single touch switch will operate as
several touch switches that are superimposed using superimpose windows or set
overlay screen function
For the details of touch switch, refer to the following.
Section 6.2 Touch Switch
Example: Execute three operations by touching once
When setting three operations to a
touch switch:
When superimposing three touch switches

by set overlay screen:
Touch switch 3)
(M10: ON)
Touch switch 2)
(M50: OFF)
Touch switch 1)
(Write "100" in D10)
Basic screen
(Base screen No. 1)
Called screen
(Base screen No. 100)
1) M10: ON
2) M50: OFF
3) Write "100" in D10
Called screen
(Base screen No. 110)
(2) Caution when multiple touch switches are superimposed

(a) The superimposed touch switches operate in priority order (from high to low).
Therefore, the touch switch may not operate if touched too short.
To confirm the operations of the touch switches, set a lamp, which will turn on
when the touch switch with the lowest priority operates.
For the operation priority order, refer to the following.
Operations of superimposed touch switch, numerical input, and
ASCII input in this section
Example:
Lamp for operation check (lit when M10: ON)
Operation settings of the touch

switch with the lowest priority
1) D10
The lamp will turn on when

the touch switch operates.
1) D10 100
2) M50
2) M50
3) M10
3) M10
Add the operation of turning on

the bit for operation check (M10).
(b) If the simultaneous pressing prohibition key is overlapped with other key, the
key does not operate even when touched.
(c) On GOT, the touch switch that operated or changed the status last is always
brought to the front. (Different from the drawn image.)
2 - 66

1
(1) Number of operative objects
Up to 6 of the objects (the touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input are superimposed)
superimposed by the set overlay screen function can operate. When superimpose windows1, 2 are
additionally used, up to 8 objects can operate.
Object
operation
priority orders
7)
Superimpose
window 1, 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Inoperative*2
OVERVIEW
2 Operations of superimposed touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input
6)
5)
4)
Called screen
(Base screen)
3)
2)
COMMON SETTING
1)
Number of the
operative objects (6)*1
Base screen
*1
Up to 8 objects can operate according to the combination of the composite screens. For details, refer to the
When "When touch input is detected, open key window at the same time" is checked in auxiliary settings, if
multiple objects of numerical input or ASCII input are overlapped, the first one to be touched and valid will call the
key window, and other objects will turn inoperative.
(2) Priority order based on the combination of composite screens

The following shows the priority order in which the touch switch, numerical input and ASCII input
can operate, based on the combination of composite screens.
Touch
Basic screen
Called screen (1 to 99)*1, 2
Front layer
Superimpose
window 1
Back layer
Front layer
Base screen
Basic screen
Basic screen
Basic screen
Back layer
Basic screen
The touch switches can operate in the order in which the screens are displayed by the set overlay screen
function.
For the order in which screens are called by the set overlay screen function, refer to the following.
(
*2
Section 15.1 Set Overlay Screen Function)
The superimposed touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input operate on up to 99 called screens.
If 100 or more screens are called, the touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input objects set on the called
screen of No.100 or higher do not operate.

2 - 67
ALARM
*1
LAMP, SWITCH
Inoperative objects
Back layer
Basic screen
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Superimpose
window 2
Object operation order
Front layer
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(3) Application example in this section

*2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
following.
(3) Application example

The following shows the operation range of the touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input
objects set on multiple screens.
Screen type
Touch
Touch
8)
8)
Touch
Touch
Touch
Touch
Layer
Called screen 99
Called screen 5
Front
Called screen 4
Called screen 3
Called screen 2
Superimpose
window 2
Called screen 1
7)
7)
Basic screen
6)
6)
Called screen 99
Called screen 5
Back
Called screen 4
Called screen 3
5)
Called screen 2
4)
Called screen 1
3)
5)
Basic screen
7)
2)
8)
1)
7)
Called screen 99
Called screen 5
Front
Called screen 4
Called screen 2
6)
Called screen 1
Superimpose
window 1
4)
Basic screen
5)
6)
4)
5)
Called screen 99
-
Operation order
Called screen 3
Called screen 5
Back
Called screen 4
Called screen 3
4)
Called screen 2
3)
3)
Called screen 1
2)
2)
1)
1)
Basic screen
3)
7)
Called screen 99
Called screen 5
Front
Called screen 4
Called screen 3
6)
Called screen 2
Called screen 1
Basic screen
Base screen
2)
6)
5)
5)
4)
Called screen 99
Called screen 5
Back
Called screen 4
4)
Called screen 3
Called screen 2
3)
3)
Called screen 1
2)
2)
1)
1)
1)
Basic screen
Inoperative object
1) to 8): Order in which the object can operate
Operative object
*1
The No. 1 to 99 shown in the figure above indicate the order of calling the screens to the base/window screen (in
the calling order set on GT Designer2).
2 - 68

2.7.1
OVERVIEW
2.7 Controller that can be monitored and the

accessible range
Controller that allows monitoring
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Controller list
The controllers that can be monitored by the GOT are indicated below.
(1) MELSEC PLC
Q01CPU*1,
Q06HCPU,
Q12PRHCPU,
QCPU (A mode)
Q02CPU-A,
Q02HCPU-A,
Q06HCPU-A
Remote I/O station
Network module for MELSECNET/H network system remote I/O station

QJ72LP25-25,
QJ72LP25G,
QJ72LP25GE,
QJ72BR15
QnACPU Type
Q2ACPU,
Q2ACPU-S1,
Q3ACPU,
Q4ACPU,
QnASCPU Type
Q2ASCPU,
Q2ASCPU-S1,
Q2ASHCPU,
Q2ASHCPU-S1
AnUCPU
A2UCPU,
A2UCPU-S1,
A3UCPU,
A4UCPU
AnACPU
A2ACPU,
A2ACPUR21-S1,
A2ACPUP21,
A3ACPU,
A2ACPUR21,
A3ACPUP21,
A2ACPU-S1,
A3ACPUR21
A2ACPUP21-S1,
AnNCPU
A1NCPU,
A2NCPUR21,
A3NCPUP21,
A1NCPUP21,
A2NCPU-S1,
A3NCPUR21
A1NCPUR21,
A2NCPUP21-S1,
A2NCPU,
A2NCPUR21-S1,
A2NCPUP21,
A3NCPU,
AnUS(H)CPU
A2USCPU,
A2USCPU-S1,
A2USHCPU-S1
AnS(H)CPU
A1SCPU,
A2SHCPU-S1,
A1SHCPU,
A1SCPUC24-R2
A2SCPU,
A2SCPU-S1,
A2SHCPU,
A1SJ(H)CPU
A1SJCPU,
A1SJCPU-S3,
A1SJHCPU
A0J2HCPU,
A2CCPUC24,
A2CJCPU-S3
A0J2HCPU-DC24V,
A2CCPUC24-PRF,
A0J2HCPUP21,
A2CCPUP21,
A0J2HCPUR21,
A2CCPUR21,
FX0 Series,
FX1 Series,
FX2 Series,
FX3UC Series,
FX0S Series,
FX1S Series,
FX2C Series,
FX3U Series
FX0N Series,
FX1N Series,
FX2N Series,
FX1NC Series,
FX2NC Series,
Q172CPU,
Q173HCPU
Q173CPU,
Q172CPUN,
Q173CPUN,
A373UCPU,
A171SCPU,
A172SHCPU,
A373UCPU-S3,
A171SCPU-S3,
A172SHCPUN,
A273UCPU
A171SCPU-S3N,
A173UHCPU,
A273UHCPU,
A273UHCPU-S3,
A171SHCPU,
A171SHCPUN,
A173UHCPU-S1
ACPU
AnSCPU
Type
A1FXCPU
FXCPU
Motion
Series*2*3
controller
CPU
A Series
*1
*2
*3
COMMON SETTING
Q4ARCPU
A1FXCPU
A2CCPU,
A2CJCPU,
Q172HCPU,
As recommended for use in direct connection of the Q series basic model, the GOT does not support the serial
communication function.
When Q172CPU and Q173 CPU are used, use a motion controller CPU having a production No. indicated below.
For bus connection and CPU direct connection
Q172CPU: production No. K *******or later
Q173CPU: production No. J *******or later
For connections other than bus connection and CPU direct connection
Q172CPU: production No. N *******or later
Q173CPU: production No. M *******or later
When using SV13/SV22/V43 with Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN, use a motion controller
CPU on which the following OS version is installed.
SW6RN-SV13Q
: 00H or later (00E or later when connected with Q172CPU and Q173CPU using bus
connection and direct CPU connection)
SW6RN-SV22Q
: 00H or later (00E or later when connected with Q172CPU and Q173CPU using bus
connection and direct CPU connection)
: 00B or later
SW6RN-SV43Q
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Type
Q25HCPU,
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
AnCPU
Q12HCPU,
Q25PRHCPU
2.7 Controller that can be monitored and the accessible range

2.7.1 Controller that allows monitoring
2 - 69
LAMP, SWITCH
QnACPU
QCPU (Q mode)
Q00CPU*1,
Q02HCPU,
Q25PHCPU,
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
QCPU
Type
Q00JCPU,
Q02CPU,
Q12PHCPU,
ALARM
Item
(2)
Other PLC
Item
Type
Omron PLCs
CPM1,
CQM1H,
CS1,
CV2000,
CPM1A,
CJ1,
C1000H,
CVM1-CPU01,
CPM2A,
C200HS,
C2000H,
CVM1-CPU11,
CPM2C,
C200H,
CV500,
CVM1-CPU21
CQM1,
C200H ,
CV1000,
KEYENCE PLCs
KV-700,
KV-1000
SHARP PLCs
JW-21CU,
JW-50CUH,
JW-22CU,
JW-70CUH,
JW-31CUH,
JW-100CUH,
JW-32CUH,
JW-100CU,
JW-33CUH,
Z-512J
T2N,
T3,
T3H
TOSHIBA
PROSEC T series
T2(PU224),
T2E,
PLCs
PROSEC V series
model2000(S2),
model3000(S3)
Large-size H series
H-302(CPU2-03H),
H-2002(CPU2-20H),
H-700(CPU-07Ha),
H-702(CPU2-07H),
H-4010(CPU3-40H),
H-2000(CPU-20Ha)
H-1002(CPU2-10H),
H-300(CPU-03Ha),
H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H),
H-252B(CPU22-02HB),
H-250(CPU21-02H),
H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
H-252(CPU22-02H),
board type
H-20DR,
H-28DT,
H-40DR,
H-64DT,
H-64DR,
HL-40DR,
H-20DT,
HL-64DR
EH-150 series
EH-CPU104,
EH-CPU208,
EH-CPU308,
EH-CPU316
MATSUSITA PLCs
FP0-C16CT,
FP2SH,
FP-M(C20TC),
FP0-C32CT,
FP3,
FP-M(C32TC),
FP1-C24C,
FP5,
FP-
FP1-C40C,
FP10(S),
FP2,
FP10SH,
Yaskawa PLCs
GL60S,
CP-9200SH,
CP-9200(H),
GL60H,
CP-9300MS,
PROGIC-8
GL70H,
MP-920,
GL120,
MP-930,
GL130,
MP-940,
Yokogawa PLCs
FA500,
F3SP30,
F3SP28,
F3SP05,
F3FP36,
F3SP38,
F3SP08,
F3SP21,
F3SP53,
F3SP10,
F3SP25,
F3SP58,
F3SP20,
F3SP35,
F3SP59
SLC500-20,
SLC5/01,
SLC500-30,
SLC5/02,
SLC500-40,
SLC5/03,
SLC5/04,
SLC5/05
1761-L10BWA,
1761-L16AWA,
1761-L32AWA,
1761-L10BWB,
1761-L16BWA,
1761-L32BWA,
1761-L16BWB,
1761-L32BWB,
1761-L16BBB,
1761-L32BBB,
HITACHI
PLCs
H-200 to 252
(HIDIC
series
H series)
H series
SLC500 Series
*1
MicroLogix1000
Series*1
Allen-
H-28DR,
H-40DT,
1761-L20AWA-5A*2,
Bradley PLCs
1761-L32AAA,
1761-L20BWA-5A*2,
1761-L20BWB-5A*2
SIMATIC S7-300 Series,
SIMATIC S7-200 Series
MicroLogix1200
1762-L24BWA
Series*1
MicroLogix1500
1764-LSP
Series*1
SIEMENS PLCs
SIMATIC S7-400 Series,
*1
Can be connected to the DH485 network via an adapter (1770-KF3).
*2
DH485 connection is applicable for C series or later CPUs.

One-on-one connection is applicable for D series or later CPUs.
(3) Temperature controller

Item
Type
Thermac NEO
electronic
temperature
OMRON
E5AN,
E5EN,
E5CN,
E5GN
SDC20/21,
SDC25/26,
controllers
temperature
controllers
In-panel NEO
electronic
temperature
E5ZN
controllers
YAMATAKE temperature controllers
DMC10,
SDC35/36,
SDC15,
SDC40A/40B/40G
RKC temperature controllers
H-PCP-J,
H-PCP-A
2 - 70

SDC30/31,
(4) Inverter
Type
FREQROL-S500series,
FREQROL-A500series,
FREQROL-F500series,
(5) Servo amplifier
2
Type
MELSERVO-J2-Super series
MR-J2S- A,
MR-J2S- CP
MELSERVO-J2M series
MR-J2M-P8A,
MR-J2M- DU
MELSERVO-J3 series
MR-J3- A
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
(6) CNC
3
FCA C64
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
FCA C6,
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
MELDAS C6/C64
Type
COMMON SETTING
Item

2 - 71
ALARM
FREQROL
FREQROL-E500series,
FREQROL-A700series,
FREQROL-F700
OVERVIEW
Item
2 Monitorable controllers
The controller that can be monitored from GOT varies according to the system (connection method) up
to the controller.
The controllers that can be monitored by the GOT are indicated below per connection form.
The GT15 can monitor other stations in the same network (MELSECNET/10) as the controller
connected. For the accessible range via the network, refer to:
Section 2.7.2 Access range for monitoring
(1) GT15
: Applicable
: Partly vestricted
MELSECNET
PLC CPU Monitored
Bus
CPU
Computer
Connection
Direct
Link
*18
Connection Connection
Connection
CC-Link Connection
Ethernet
Connection MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-
Intelligent
NET/10
device
*19
station
Other than
redundant
QCPU
*2
*2
*2*8
*4
*5
*3
system
(Q mode)
Redundant
system
*6
*3*6
QCPU (A mode)
QnACPU
*7
Other than
ACPU
A1FXCPU
*9
*8
*10
*11*12
*16
*12
*17
A1FXCPU
FXCPU
*14
(Q series)
*15
(A series)*1
MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O
MELSEC-
station
NET/10
MELSECNET/B,
Omron PLC
KEYENCE PLC
SHARP PLC
TOSHIBA PLC
HITACHI PLC
MATSUSITA PLC
YASKAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA PLC
Allen-Bradley PLC
SIEMENS PLC
2 - 72
: Inapplicable

*13
via G4
MELSECNET
CPU
Computer
Connection
Direct
Link
*18
Connection Connection
CC-Link Connection
Connection
Ethernet
Connection MELSECNET/H
MELSEC-
Intelligent
NET/10
device
*19
station
via G4
Microcomputer
OVERVIEW
PLC CPU Monitored
Bus
OMRON temperature
controller
SPECIFICATIONS
YAMATAKE temperature
controller
Inverter
Servo amplifier
*20
*20
*20
*20
*1
The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station, regardless of the connection
*2
Do not set the device to be monitored to N/W No.: 0 and PLC station No.: 0 (station that does not exist actually).
method.
If the setting is as described above, the GOT will monitor the master station.
The device ranges that can be monitored are the ranges for monitoring the ACPU (A3ACPU equivalent).
*3
To monitor the QCPU when connected with MELSECNET/10, use PLC CPU whose function version is version B
COMMON SETTING
CNC
When the CPU is directly connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT
automatically follows system switching.
Note that the GOT will not automatically follow system switching when the GOT is directly connected to the
redundant system PLC CPU. In such a case, monitor one GOT by changing a cable to the control system PLC
CPU or monitor two GOTs by connecting to each PLC CPU of A system and B system.
*5
Computer link connection can be made for only the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
*6
The GOT does not automatically follow the QCPU redundant system switching.
Use a script function to make the GOT to follow system switching.
(Section 2.7.3
Creation of the monitor screen that will change the monitoring target to the control system
using the script function)

*7
In case of the Q4ARCPU redundant system, connect to redundant expansion base unit A68RB (version B or
*8
If the A series computer link is applied to the QCPU/QnACPU, the GT 15 can monitor the devices as the same as
later) at the last stage via the bus type connection.

the case of AnACPU.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
or later and MELSECNET/H network unit.
However, the following devices are not monitored.
whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.)

File register (R)
Local device
The A2CCPU, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CCPUP21, and A2CCPUR21do not allow bus connection
If an expansion base unit is connected in A1SJCPU/A1SJHCPU, bus types connection may not be applicable.
*10 When monitoring AnNCPU (S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, the following or later software version is
used to write to the CPU. The earlier software version is unusable.
AnNCPU(S1):
Version L or later for the one with link, version H or later for the one without link
A2SCPU:
Version H or later
A0J2HCPU:
Version E or later
A2CCPU:
Version H or later
*11 The A2CCPU, A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21 , A2CJCPU, and A2CJCPU-S3 do not allow computer link
connection.

2 - 73
ALARM
*9
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)

(In case of QCPU/QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However,
LAMP, SWITCH
Devices added to QCPU/QnACPU
*12 For computer link connection of the A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A0J2HCPU, A171SHCPU and
A172SHCPU, use the computer link module whose software version is version U or later.
In addition, the A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used.
*13 The A2CCPU, A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CJCPU, A2CJCPU-S3 do not allow CC-Link connection
(intelligent device station).
*14 For the Q172HCPU and Q173HCPU, the interface on the unit is USB only.
When accessing the Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU, access it via the RS-232 of the QCPU on the multiple CPU
system.
*15 When connecting an expansion base unit to A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPUN or A173CPUHCPU (S1), use the
A168B expansion base unit.
*16 Can monitor the A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1.
*17 Can monitor the A273UCPU, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3, A373UCPU, A373UCPU-S3, A173UHCPU,
A173UHCPU-S1.
*18 When multiple GOTs are connected via the bus type connection, the GOT1000 series cannot be used together
with GOT-A900 series, GOT800 series or A77GOT.
*19 Includes a case when MELSECNET/H is used in MELSECNET/10 mode.
Can not be connected to the remote I/O network
*20 Concerning MELDAS C6/C64, use the system software version indicated below.
For direct CPU connection, Ethernet connection, CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
NC system software version D0 or later
For MELSECNET/10 connection
NC system software version E0 or later
2 - 74

(2) GT11
: Partly vestricted
MELSECNET Connection
PLC CPU
Bus
CPU Direct
Monitored
Connection
Connection
Computer
Link
Connection
Ethernet
Connection
MELSEC-
MELSEC-
NET/H
NET/10
: Inapplicable
CC-Link Connection
Intelligent
device
via G4
station
Other than
redundant
*3
*3*5
system
SPECIFICATIONS
QCPU
(Q mode)
Redundant
*3*4
system
QCPU (A mode)
*5
QnACPU
Other than
*6
*7*8
A1FXCPU
COMMON SETTING
ACPU
OVERVIEW
: Applicable
A1FXCPU
FXCPU
Motion controller CPU
(Q series)
Motion controller CPU
*8
MELSEC-
*9
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(A series)
*9
NET/H
Remote I/O
MELSEC-
station
NET/10
MELSEC-
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NET/B, II
Omron PLC
KEYENCE PLC
SHARP PLC
TOSHIBA PLC
HITACHI PLC
MATSUSHITA PLC
LAMP, SWITCH
YASKAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA PLC
Allen-Bradley PLC
SIEMENS PLC
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Microcomputer
OMRON temperature
controller
YAMATAKE temperature
controller
Inverter
Servo amplifier
*10

2 - 75
ALARM
CNC
*1
Only the motion controller CPU in which peripheral software package SV13/SV22 is installed can be connected.
*2
Connection to a remote I/O station cannot be made independently of the connection form.
*3
The GOT can monitor only the station connected.
*4
When the CPU is directly connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT
can automatically follow system switching.
Note that the GOT will not automatically follow system switching when the GOT is directly connected to the
redundant system PLC CPU. In such a case, monitor one GOT by changing a cable to the control system PLC
CPU or monitor two GOTs by connecting to each PLC CPU of A system and B system.
*5
If the A series computer link is applied to the QCPU/QnACPU, the GT 15 can monitor the devices as the same as
the case of AnACPU.
However, the following devices are not monitored.
Devices added to QCPU/QnACPU
Latch relays (L) and step relays (S)
(In case of QCPU/QnACPU, the latch relay (L) and step relay (S) are different from the internal relay. However,
whichever is specified, an access is made to the internal relay.)
File register (R)
Local device
*6
When monitoring the AnNCPU(S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, data cannot be written to the CPU earlier
than the following software version.
AnNCPU(S1):
Version L or later for the one with link, version H or later for the one without link
A2SCPU:
Version H or later
A0J2HCPU:
Version E or later
A2CCPU:
Version H or later
*7
The A2CCPU, A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CJCPU and A2CJCPU-S3 do not allow computer link connection.
*8
For computer link connection of the A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A0J2HCPU, A171SHCPU and
A172SHCPU, use the computer link module whose software version is version U or later.
In addition, the A0J2-C214-S1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) cannot be used.
*9
Can not access the master station.

Can access the host station (remote I/O station) only.
*10 Concerning MELDAS C6/C64, use the system software version indicated below.
NC system software version D0 or later
2 - 76

1
OVERVIEW
Access range for monitoring
Monitoring the remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H,/10,/B,(II)

Note that the GOT can not monitor the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/10
network system or MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system by connecting to it.
Connect the GOT to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network
system to monitor.
1 Data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II)) access range for monitoring
2
SPECIFICATIONS
2.7.2
(1) Bus connection/CPU direct connection/Computer link connection
(c) If connected to the master station on the third layer

The master station on the second layer and local stations on
the third layer can be monitored. If the PLC CPU of the local
station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are
allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.
L3
L2
M
L1
L3
L2
GOT
M
L3
L1
L2
m
GOT
3
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
L1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If connected to local station

The master station can be monitored. If the PLC CPU of the
local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are
Other local stations cannot be monitored.
GOT
(2) Monitoring devices of other stations

If other devices on the data link system are monitored, display speed will be significantly reduced.
Therefore monitor link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.7.2 Access range for monitoring
2 - 77
ALARM
(b)
LAMP, SWITCH
(a) If connected to master station

Local stations can be monitored. If the PLC CPU of the local
station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are
COMMON SETTING
(3) Setting method of monitor device

Describes the network No. for setting monitor devices and method of setting station numbers with
an example shown below.
M
L3
L1
L2
m
GOT
(a) When monitoring the station connected (host station) and B and W allocated by the link
parameter, specify the host station.
(b) When monitoring devices of other stations :
Network No. : 0, Station number : Refer to the following table.
Station number setting
Station to be
accessed
L2
L1
Host
Other 1
Other 2
Other 3
L1
Other 0
Host
Other 0
Host
Other 1
Other 2
Other 0
Host
Other 0
Host
Other 0
Host
3(GOT)
Other 0
Station
L3
connected to GOT
L2
m
L3
Monitoring link device B or W

For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, make
sure to use the host device number if designating devices allocated to other
station. If not, display speed will be reduced.
2 - 78

Bus connection
If connected to multi-PLC system
SPECIFICATIONS
Control station
GOT
Normal
station
The control station on the other network and

all normal stations can be monitored.
(To monitor the other network, be sure to
designate the routing parameter.)
Contorl station
Contorl
station
GOT
Normal
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
When the monitor target is the multi-PLC

system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
Normal
station
Normal
station
Contorl station
Contorl
station
GOT
Normal
station
Normal
station
COMMON SETTING
Normal
station
Normal
station
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Normal
station
Normal
station
Normal station
Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network
parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
Examples 1 to 4.in this section (7)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The control station on the network and all

normal stations can be monitored.
The motion controller CPU (Q Series) at other stations cannot be monitored.

LAMP, SWITCH
(a)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(1)
OVERVIEW
Network system (MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H) access range for monitoring

2 - 79
ALARM
(b) If connected to QCPU(Q Mode)/QnACPU/AnUCPU

The control station on the network and all
normal stations can be monitored.
Control
station
GOT
Normal
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
The control station on the other network and

all normal stations can be monitored.
(To monitor the other network, be sure to
designate the routing parameter.)
Control
station
GOT
Normal
station
Control
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
If connected to an intermediate station and the

data link system is included, the master station
and local stations can be monitored.
If connected to an intermediate station, it is not
necessary to designate the data link
parameter "Effective unit number for
accessing other stations" for the PLC CPU of
the connected station. (If designated, the
parameter will be ignored.)
Normal
station
Normal
station
GOT
Control
station
Control
station
Normal
station
M station
Normal
station
L station
Normal
station
L station
Devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network
parameter) may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU.
Examples 1 to 4.in this section (7)
(c) If connected to AnACPU/AnNCPU
Control stations on the network can be
monitored.
If the PLC CPU of the local station is QCPU (Q
Mode)/QnACPU, devices other than B and W
that are allocated by the network parameter
cannot be monitored.
Normal stations on the network cannot be
monitored.
Control
station
Normal
station
GOT
Normal
station
Stations on the other network cannot be

monitored.
Control
station
GOT
Normal
station
Normal
station
2 - 80

Normal
station
Control
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
(2) CPU direct connection/computer link connection
OVERVIEW
If connected to multi-PLC system

Access range is as described in (1) (a).
(b) If connected to QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU

Access range is as described in (1) (b).
If connected to QCPU (A Mode)/AnUCPU
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal
station
Normal
station
Normal
station
COMMON SETTING
3
GOT
Control
station
Normal
station
Control
station
Normal
station
M station
L station
Normal
station
L station
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
If connected to an intermediate station, use

data link parameter "Effective unit number to
access other stations" to designate the unit
number that is connected to the network to be
monitored.
Control
station
GOT
(d) If connected to AnACPU/AnNCPU

Access range is as described in (1) (c).
(3) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)/CC-Link connection (via G4)
Only the station conncted to the GOT can be monitored.
When the connected station is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
Other stations cannot be monitored.
(7) (Example 6) When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)/CC-Link
connection (via G4) in this section)
(4) When using MELSECNET/10 connection
The GOT is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations
on the network.
If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, the control CPU of the
network module can be monitored.
The other network cannot be monitored.
If devices of other stations (other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network
parameter) are monitored, monitoring may not be available depending on the PLC CPU of the
network system to be monitored.
(7) (Example 5) When using MELSECNET/10 connection in this section).
(5) Monitoring devices of other stations on network
If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored, display speed will be significantly
reduced. Therefore monitor link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the network
parameter.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Control station on the network and all normal

stations can be monitored.
When devices of other stations (other than
devices B and W that are allocated by the
network parameter) are monitored, monitoring
is not available if the PLC CPU to be
monitored is QCPU (Q Mode)/QnACPU.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(c)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(a)

2 - 81
ALARM
(6) Monitoring devices of the other network

Be sure to designate the routing parameter to the PLC CPU of the connected station.
If the other network is monitored, display speed of object etc. will be significantly reduced.
(7) Monitor access range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices
Example 1: When using bus connection
Control station
Control station
AnU
(1-1)
QnA
(1-2)
QnA
(2-1)
AnU
(1-4)
(2-2)
Network No.1
Network No.2
AnA
(1-3)
AnU
(2-4)
AnN
(2-3)
Monitoring/Accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks

Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the table below.
(a) To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter,
specify the host station.
(b) To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network
No. and station No.).
Station to be
Network No.1
Network No.2
accessed
station
AnU (1-1)
QnA (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnU (1-4)
QnA (2-1)
AnU (2-2)
AnN (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
Host
Other (1-3)
Other (1-4)
Other (2-2)
Other (2-4)
Other (1-1)
Host
Other (1-4)
Other (2-1)
Other (2-2)
Other (2-4)
Other (0-0)
Host
Other (1-1)
Host
Host
Other (2-4)
Other (1-1)
Other (1-2)
Other (1-4)
Host
Other (2-2)
Other (2-3)
Other (2-4)
Host
Other (1-1)
Other (1-4)
Other (2-2)
Host
connected to GOT
AnU (1-1)
QnA (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnU
(1-4)
(2-2)
QnA (2-1)
AnN (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
How to read the table
Upper line : Accessibility
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Lower line : Network settings
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)

sure to use the host device number if designating devices allocated to other
2 - 82

Example 2: When using bus connection

Control station
Control station
AnU
(2-1)
AnA
(1-2)
AnU
(2-4)
Network No.2
QnA
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M)
AnU
(2-3)
SPECIFICATIONS
Network No.1
OVERVIEW
QnA
(1-1)
Data link
system
QnA
(L1)
AnA
(L2)
Network No.1
Network No.2
Data link system
accessed
station con-
QnA (1-1)
AnA (1-2)
QnA (1-3)
AnU (2-1)
QnA (2-2)
AnU (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
QnA (M)
QnA (L1)
AnA (L2)
nected to GOT
Other (1-3)
QnA (1-1)
Host
Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
or
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
-
Host
Other (1-1)
Host
Other (2-1)
Host
Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
Host
Host
Other(2-3) Other (2-4)
Other (2-1)
Host
Other (2-4)
Other (2-1)
Other (2-3)
Host
Host
Host
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
(M)
Other
(0-2)*1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Station to be
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

COMMON SETTING
QnA (L1)
AnA (L2)
*1
When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Host

2 - 83
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
AnU (2-4)
ALARM
AnU (2-3)
LAMP, SWITCH
AnU (2-1)

sure to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other
Example 3: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection
Control station
Control station
AnU
(1-1)
Q(Q mode)
(1-2)
QnA
(2-1)
AnU
(1-4)
(2-2)
Network No.1
Network No.2
AnA
(1-3)
AnU
(2-4)
AnN
(2-3)

Station to be
Network No.1
accessed
station
AnU (1-1)
connected to GOT
Q(Q mode)
(1-2)
Network No.2
AnA (1-3)
AnU (1-4)
QnA (2-1)
AnU (2-2)
AnN (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
AnU (1-1)
Host
Other (1-3)
Other (1-4)
Other (2-2)
Other (1-1)
Host
Other (1-4)
Other (2-1)
Other (2-2)
Other (2-4)
Other (0-0)
Host
Other (1-1)
Host
Host
Other (1-1)
Other (1-2)
Other (1-4)
Host
Other (2-2)
Other (2-3)
Other (2-4)
Host
Other(2-2)
Host
Q(Q mode) (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnU
(1-4)
(2-2)
QnA (2-1)
AnN (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Host
2 - 84

1
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 85
ALARM
Example 4: When using CPU direct connection or computer link connection

Control station
Control station
Q(Q mode)
(1-1)
AnU
(2-1)
Network No.1
AnA
(1-2)
QnA
(1-3)
(2-2)
(M)
AnU
(2-4)
Network No.2
AnU
(2-3)
Data link
system
QnA
(L1)
AnA
(L2)

Station to be
accessed
station con-
Network No.1
Q(Q mode)
(1-1)
nected to GOT
AnA (1-2)
Network No.2
QnA (1-3)
AnU (2-1)
QnA (2-2)
Data link system
AnU (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
QnA (M)
QnA (L1)
AnA (L2)
Other (1-3)
Q(Q mode) (1-1)

Host
Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
or
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2)
-
Host
Other(1-1)
Host
Other (2-1)
Host
Host
Host
Other (2-1)
Host
Other (2-4)
Other (2-1)
Other (2-3)
Host
Host
Host
(1-3)
QnA (2-2)
(M)
Other
(0-2)*1
AnU (2-1)
AnU (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
QnA (L1)
AnA (L2)
*1
When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Host
2 - 86

1
Example 5: When using MELSECNET/10 connection
SPECIFICATIONS
QnA
(1-1)
AnU
(1-4)
COMMON SETTING
When using MELSECNET/10 connection,

the other network cannot be monitored.
(1-3)
Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)
QnA
Q(Q Mode)
GOT
AnU
(1-1)
(1-2)
(1-3)
(1-4)
GOT(1-3)
: Accessible
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Station to be accessed
Station connected to GOT
Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device
1) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter
NW No.: 1, Station number: Host
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, make sure
to use the local device number if designating devices allocated to other station.
If not, display speed will be reduced.
2) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)
QnA
Q(Q Mode)
GOT
AnU
(1-1)
(1-2)
(1-3)
(1-4)
How to read the table 1, Other (2)

NW No.Station number
1, Other (1)
1, Other (2)
1, Other (4)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GOT (1-3)

2 - 87
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GOT
LAMP, SWITCH
Q(Q Mode)
(1-2)
OVERVIEW
Example 6: When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

/CC-Link connection (via G4)
Image of CC-Link Conection
GOT
Network module
CC-Link Master
module (0 station) (1-2)
Q(Q mode)
(1-2)
CC-Link System
GOT
AnA
(1-3)
QnA
(1-1)
GOT
AnN
(1-4)
Network
System
GOT
QnA
Q(Q Mode)
AnA
AnN
(1-1)
(1-2)
(1-3)
(1-4)
QnA (1-1)
AnU (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
: Accessible
AnN (1-4)
: Not accessible
3 CC-Link system access range for monitoring

(1) When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection
Only connected stations can be monitored.
(2) When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
(a) Access range

Master station/local station can be monitored.
Note that monitoring of the local station of the CC-Link Ver.2 is restricted as below.
The cyclic device allocated to the CC-Link Ver.2 local station can not be monitored.
: Can be monitored,
Monitor target
Monitoring by cyclic transmission
: Cannot be monitord
Monitoring by transient
transmission
Master station (Remote network Ver.2 mode)

Local station Station No.1 (Ver.1 compatible)
Local station Station No.6 (Ver.2 compatible)
By setting CC-Link parameter, all devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the
master station can be monitored.
When the monitor target is the multi-PLC system, CPU No. 1 to No. 4 can be monitored.
The device range of RX, RY, RWw, RWr to be allocated to the GOT differs according to the
setting of the number of CC-Link communication units (one station/four station) loaded.
Refer to the following manual for details of the number of CC-Link stations occupying.
User's manual of CC-Link master unit to be connected
2 - 88

2) When monitoring PLC CPU devices of other station

NW No. 0, PLC station number: Other (Station number: n)
(n: Station number of other station you want to monitor (0: Master station, 1-64: Local
station))
(c) Setting device name and device number

1) Monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by setting CC-Link
parameter
Use the following device names.
For devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr, designate the addresses allocated by station
number setting.
Remote input
RX
X0 to X7FF
Remote output
RY
Y0 to Y7FF
Remote register (writing area)
RWw
Ww
Ww0 to WwFF
Remote register (reading area)
RWr
Wr
Wr0 to WrFF
2) Monitoring PLC CPU devices of other stations

Set the device name and device No.
Section 2.9 Supported Devices
(3) When using CC-Link connection (via G4) (Q series only)
LAMP, SWITCH
(a) Access range

Master station/local station can be monitored.
(b) Setting NW No. and station number
1) When monitoring master station
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Host/other (station number: 0)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2) Monitoring local station

NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Other (station number: 1 to 64)
(c) Setting device name and device number
Set the device name and device No.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device setting range
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Designer2
2 - 89
ALARM
Device name to be set by GT
Device to be monitored
3
COMMON SETTING
For monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated by setting CC-Link
parameter, make sure to use the local device number if designating devices
allocated to other station.
If not, display speed will be reduced.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1) When monitoring devices RX, RY, RWw and RWr that are allocated to the master
station by setting CC-Link parameter
NW No.: 0, PLC station number: Local
OVERVIEW
(b) Setting NW No. and station number
(4) Monitoring overview

There are following two monitoring methods by the GOT with CC-Link communication unit.
Monitoring method
Monitoring by transient transmission*2
Monitoring by cyclic transmission*2
Devices of the PLC CPU on the CC-Link system Master/
Contents
local station are specified and monitored.
Remote inputs/outputs and remote registers assigned to

the Master station by CC-Link parameter setting are
specified and monitored.
CC-Link parameter setting sequence program is

required but GOT communication sequence program is
Advantage
not needed. (For more information, refer to Chapter
Data communication processing speed is high.
5.)*1
Write from the GOT (read command from the master
station) can be performed to only the remote outputs
Data communication processing speed is lower than that
Disadvantage
of cyclic transmission.
and remote registers of the master station assigned to

the GOT and to the GOT's internal registers.
GOT communication sequence program is
necessary.*1
*1
This program is not needed if the CC-Link parameter setting sequence program and GOT communication
sequence program satisfy the following conditions.
As the PLC CPU of the master station, use the QCPU (Q mode) or QnACPU whose number given in the DATE
field of the rating plate is "9707B" or later.
Use GX Developer or SW2 -GPPW and make CC-Link parameter setting and batch refresh device setting in the
CC-Link setting on the package.
Refer to the following manual for details of connection method.
*2
Refer to the following for whether data can be sent/received to/from the CC-Link Ver. 2 compatible station by
transient transmission and cyclic transmission.
(2) When using CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
In transient transmission, connection of several (five or more as a guideline)

intelligent device stations (GOTs and intelligent device units) reduces data
communication speed.
To raise data communication speed, increase the CC-Link system, for example, and
do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a single CC-Link system.
2 - 90

1
OVERVIEW
4 Access range for monitoring when using Ethernet connection
(1) Access range

The Ethernet unit specified in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 can be monitored.
Communication via MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) or MELSECNET/B cannot be made.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GOT
Hub etc.
COMMON SETTING
Gateway
(Router etc.)
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
MELSECNET/10 etc.
While the GOT is handled as a host in MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the

station (Ethernet module) set as a host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 is
handled as a host in Ethernet connection.
(2) Various settings
Refer to the following manual for Ethernet setting by GT Designer2.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual
LAMP, SWITCH
5 Access range for monitoring when using MELSEC-FXCPU, other PLC and
microcomputer connections
6 Access range for monitoring when a temperature controller, inverter or servo amplifier
is connected
The access range that can be monitored is target and other stations.
GOT
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Only the connected CPU can be monitored. Other stations cannot be monitored.
8
RS-422

2 - 91
ALARM
(Example: When a servo amplifier is connected)
7 Access range for monitoring when a CNC is connected

The access range that can be monitored is the same as the access range when QnACPU is connected.
Refer to the information related to QnA in the items below.
This section
monitoring
Network system (MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET/H) access range for
This section
CC-Link system access range for monitoring
This section
Access range for monitoring when using Ethernet connection
8 Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system

When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GOT can monitor
the PLC CPU of the master station.
When connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.
(1) Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10

The GOT can not be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B,
(II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GOT to
the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.
Network No.1
Station No.0
(master station)
Monitor
target
Empty
Empty
QJ71LP21-25
PLC CPU
Power supply
module
Q33B
MELSECNET/H remort I/O Network
Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
(1)CPU direct
connection
Power supply
module
Network No.1
Station No.1
(remote I/O station)
Q33B
GOT
(2)Computer link
connection
GOT
(2) Connection to GT11 and remote I/O station on MELSECNET/H

GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET/H network system.
GT11 can access only the connected host station (remote I/O station).
2 - 92

(a) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72LP25GE, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O
station are handled as PLC CPU.
Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit.
Refer to the following manual for the cable necessary for the connection with the network
module and other details.
OVERVIEW
(1) CPU direct connection
(b) For the GOT, specify [MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*] for the controller type of GT Designer2,
and specify "Network. 1 (network number of remote I/O network), Station No. 0 (master
station)" in the network setting of the device setting dialog box as monitoring target. (GT15
only)
In this case, the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H
network system. Hence, object display will be provided later than when the PLC CPU is
monitored directly.
To provide object display earlier, perform cyclic transmission that will monitor the link devices
B, W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
Refer to the following manual for the settings necessary for the PLC CPU.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
(3) Restrictions on connection to remote I/O station
The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility
function. The master station clock will not change even if clock setting is made.
Use GX Developer or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock of the master station.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(a) Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CMO) mounted on the
remote I/O station.
Refer to the following manual for the cable necessary for the connection with the serial
communication module or modem interface module and other details.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Computer link connection
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(b) For the GOT, specify [MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*] for the controller type of GT Designer2,
and specify "Network. 1 (network number of remote I/O network), Station No. 0 (master
station)" in the network setting of the device setting dialog box as monitoring target. (GT15
only)
network system. Hence, object display will be provided later than when the PLC CPU is
monitored directly.
SPECIFICATIONS

2 - 93
ALARM
2.7.3
How to monitor QCPU redundant system
This section explains the connection methods, restrictions on the connection methods, and other information
applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GOT.
Monitor
target
Station No. 0
(Multiplexed remote master station)
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
Tracking cable
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control
system
(System A)
Station No. 1
(Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Standby
system
(System B)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network

Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module
Station No. 2
The GOT monitors

the control system
PLC CPU.
GOT
CPU direct
connection
When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.
Monitor target
Station No. 0
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Control
system
(System B)

Empty
CPU direct
connection
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module
Station No. 2
2 - 94
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
Tracking cable
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Standby
system
(System A)
Station No. 1
GOT

2.7.3 How to monitor QCPU redundant system
The GOT monitors the PLC CPU

of the new control system after
system switching.
There are the following different connection methods to the QCPU redundant system.
OVERVIEW
(1) CPU direct connection (remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) (
CPU
direct connection (remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) in this section)
(2) Computer link connection (serial communication module mounted on remote I/O station of
MELSECNET/H network system) (
Computer link connection (serial communication
module mounted on remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) in this section)
CPU direct connection in this section)
(4) CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) (

station) in this section)
(5) CC-Link connection (via G4) (
CC-Link connection (intelligent device
CC-Link connection (via G4) in this section in this section)
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) CPU direct connection (
3
Ethernet connection in this section)
Refer to the following for details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GOT.
Section 2.7.1
Monitorable controllers)
Connection method
Before system switching
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The following table indicates the features of each connection method.

After system switching
(1) CPU direct

connection
(remote I/O
station of
MELSECNET/H
network
Control
system
Standby system
Multiplexed remote
master station
Multiplexed remote
sub master station
Multiplexed remote
master station
connection
(serial
communication
GOT1
Remote I/O
station
CPU direct
connection
Serial
communication
module
Computer link
connection
Multiplexed remote
sub master station
system)
(2) Computer link
Control
system
Standby system
GOT2
GOT1
Remote I/O
station
Serial
communication
module
GOT2
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the

control system PLC CPU.
LAMP, SWITCH
unit mounted on
the remote I/O
station on
MELSECNET/H
network
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
system)

2 - 95
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(7) Ethernet connection (
MELSECNET/10 connection (network

COMMON SETTING
(6) MELSECNET/10 connection (network system) (

system) in this section)
Connection method
(3) CPU direct

connection
GOT
GOT
Control
system
Standby system
Multiplexed remote
master station
Multiplexed remote
sub-master station
Standby system
Control
system
Multiplexed remote
master station
Multiplexed remote
sub-master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O net
Remote I/O
station
Remote I/O
station
Change a cable to the PLC CPU of the control system.
GOT1
Control
system
Multiplexed remote
master station
GOT1
GOT2
GOT2
Standby system
Standby system
Control
system
Multiplexed remote
sub-master station
Multiplexed remote
master station
Multiplexed remote
sub-master station
Remote I/O
station
Remote I/O
station
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT1.
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GOT2.
(4) CC-Link
connection
(intelligent
Intelligent device station

GOT3
GOT3
AJ65BT-G4-S3
device station)
CC-Link
(5) CC-Link
CC-Link
GOT4
Master station
connection
(via G4)
Master station
Control
system
Standby master station

Standby
system
Standby
system
Stadby master station
Control
system
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the

2 - 96
GOT4

Connection method
(6) MELSECNET/
Standby
system
OVERVIEW
2
GOT6
Station No.3
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network

(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Station No.1
(control station)
Station No.2
(sub control station)
Control
system
Standby
system
Using the script, the monioring target is changed to the

(7) Ethernet
GOT7
Station No. 3
Ethernet
Station No. 1
Control
system
Station No. 2
Standby
system
Script
if([b:SM1515]==OFF){
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{
[w:GD100]=1;
}
}
GOT7
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
connection
Station No. 3
Ethernet
Station
No. 1
Standby
system
Station
No. 2
Control
system
Using the script, the monitoring target is changed to the

Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system

When system switching occurs in the redundunt system, the system alarm "402: Communication
timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules." may be detected.
However, even if the error occurs, the GOT automatically resumes monitoring and there are no
problems in monitoring operation.
The GOT cannot monitor specifying either control system or standby system in the redundant
system.
GOT functions that can be monitored when the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station.
When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT can monitor only the following GOT
functions.
Monitoring function
SPECIFICATIONS
Control
system
Station No.2
(normal station)
COMMON SETTING
Station No.1
(control station)
When connected to the remote I/O station, the GOT does not allow the PLC CPU clock of the
master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility.
The master station clock will not change even if clock setting is made.
Use GX Developer or similar software to set the PLC CPU clock on the master station.

2 - 97
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

(MELSECNET/10 mode)
system)
Script
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{
[w:GD100]=1;
}
}
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(network
Station No.3
(normal station)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GOT6
ALARM
10 connection
1 CPU direct connection (remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system)

This section explains the CPU direct connection that connects the GOT to the remote I/O station of the
MELSECNET/H network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT to the remote I/O station of the
Network No. 1, Station No. 0
Monitor target
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control system
(System A)

Standby system
(System B)

Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module

(Remote I/O station)

GOT
(1) Connection method

Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G,
QJ72LP25GE, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Refer to the following manual.
(2) GT Designer2 setting
Set GT Designer2 as described below.
Setting item
Controller type
Device setting
Settings
MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*
Host station
Host station
Remote master
Other station (Network No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
station
station No. 0 (master station))
(Network setting)
network system. Hence, object display will be provided later than when the PLC CPU is monitored
directly.
To provide object display earlier, perform cyclic transmission that will monitor the link devices B, W
of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in redundant system
When system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control
system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, it automatically changes the monitoring target to the
PLC CPU that is operating as the master.
2 - 98

1
This section explains the computer link connection that connects the GOT to the serial communication
module mounted on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT to the serial communication module mounted
on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
Monitor target
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Control system
(System A)
Standby system
(System B)
3
Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power
supply module
COMMON SETTING

(Remote I/O station)

SPECIFICATIONS

OVERVIEW
2 Computer link connection (serial communication module mounted on remote I/O

station of MELSECNET/H network system)

Setting item
Settings
Controller type
Device setting

Host station
Host station
Remote master
Other station (Network No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
station
station No. 0 (master station))
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Connect the GOT to the serial communication module (QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4) or modem interface module (QJ71CM0) mounted on the remote I/
O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GOT
When system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control
system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, it automatically changes the monitoring target to the
PLC CPU that is operating as the master.
2 - 99
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ALARM
network system. Hence, object display will be provided later than when the PLC CPU is monitored
directly.
To provide object display earlier, perform cyclic transmission that will monitor the link devices B, W
of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
Refer to the following manual for details.
LAMP, SWITCH
(Network setting)
3 CPU direct connection

This section describes the CPU direct connection by which a GOT is connected to a CPU module in the
redundant system.
There are two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one GOT or two GOTs.
The examples for these two methods are shown below.
(1) When using one GOT (Re-connect the connection cable to respond to system switching.)
GOT

Monitor target
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Control system
(System A)

Standby system
(System B)

Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power
supply module

(a) Connection method

Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the control system CPU module (Q12PRHCPU,
Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.
Refer to the following manual for details
(b) GT Designer2 setting
Set the GT Designer2 as described below.
Setting item
Controller type
Device setting
(Network setting)
Settings
Host station
Host station
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in the redundant system
When system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in
response to the system switching since the GOT has monitored the CPU module (host station)
that is directly connected to the GOT.
For the countermeasures, re-connect the cable to the switched CPU module after the system
switching and perform monitoring.
To change the monitor target on a system switching in the CPU direct connection,
connect the GOT to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
CPU direct connection (remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network
system)
2 - 100

(2) When using two GOTs (Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to system switching.)
GOT2
GOT1
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
SPECIFICATIONS

Q25PRHCPU
Standby system
(System B)
COMMON SETTING
Empty
(a) Connection method

Connect two GOTs to the RS-232 interfaces of the control system and standby system CPU
modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.
Set the GT Designer2 as described below.
Controller type
Device setting
(Network setting)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting item
Settings
Host station
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module

Host station
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in the redundant system
When system switching occurs, the GOT cannot change the monitor target automatically in
response to the system switching.
The GOT that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching
continues the monitoring.
Different from the case using one GOT, a cable reconnection is not required.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control system
(System A)

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 101
ALARM
Monitor
target
OVERVIEW
(3) Precautions when connecting a GOT directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system
(a) As the GOT monitors a PLC CPU exclusively that is directly connected to the GOT, the GOT
cannot change the monitor target in response to the system switching of the redundant
system.
To change the target monitor in response to system switching, re-connect the connection cable
of the GOT to the other PLC CPU on a system switching or configure the system using two
GOTs connected to each PLC CPU.
(b) When a GOT is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system, the monitored device is
only the PLC CPU that is directly connected to the GOT.
(c) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, writing of the GOT to a device in the
connected PLC CPU is not reflected. Design the monitor screen that disables writing to the
standby system.
In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to
standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system
PLC CPU will be overwritten by the device value transferred from control system to standby
system even if the GOT writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input,
Script, Recipe, or others).
GOT1
GOT2
2) Tracks D100=5 from control

system to standby system.
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control system
(System A)
1) Numerically input D100=100

from the GOT.
Standby system
(System B)
1) D100=100

Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module
2) D100=5
For the countermeasures to the above, perform the following.

Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is standby system"
on a GOT when connecting the GOT to the standby system PLC CPU.
To display the monitor screen above when connecting a GOT to the standby system PLC
CPU, use the special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU.
(When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is standby system.)
Each object should be controlled by the SM1515 which is set for the operation trigger.
For the screen switching device, use a GOT internal device.
If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be
disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will be overwritten by the transferred device
value with the redundant system tracking function.
An example of screen setting using SM1515 is shown on the next page.
2 - 102

<System configuration example: when using one GOT>

GOT
QJ72
BR15
OVERVIEW
QJ71 Station
BR11 No. 1
Station
No. 2
2) When connected to standby system
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1) When connected to control system
3
COMMON SETTING
Create a monitor screen on the Base Screen1 that performs the following operation each for
when connecting a GOT to control system and standby system.
1) When connected to control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch
switch operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen.
2) When connected to standby system, the monitor screen displays a message that calls
reconnecting the connection cable.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standby
Q25PRH
Q25PRH QJ71 Station system
CPU
BR11 No. 0
(System B) CPU

2 - 103
ALARM
Control
system
(System A)
1 Set the screen switching device of the base screen.

Choose [Common] [System Environment] [Screen Switching], and set the internal
device GD100 as the base screen switching device.
(If a device of the PLC CPU is used for the screen switching device, the Status
Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC
CPU will be overwritten by the transferred device value with the redundant system
tracking function.
2 Set the Status Observation.

Make setting so that the base screen 1 will be displayed when the connected PLC CPU
is standby system (SM1515 is OFF.) in the project specified by choosing [Common]
[Status Observation].
Condition 1 :SM1515 (while OFF)
Operation
:GD100=1
When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected

PLC CPU is standby system.
The screen switches to the base screen 1.
Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.
2 - 104

: SM1515
: None
: Basic Comment
: The operation status is control system.
Touch the screen to display the next screen.
Direct Comment (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.
Re-connect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.
COMMON SETTING
2) Comment tab screen (ON status)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 105
ALARM
1) Basic tab screen
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic tab
Device
Shape
Comment tab
Direct Comment (ON)
OVERVIEW
1
3 Set the Comment Display on the base screen 1.
Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status
(ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU.
Choose [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).
4 Set the touch switches on the base screen 1.

By using the Go To Screen Switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to
the next screen with a screen touch when the connected PLC CPU is control system
(SM1515 is ON).
Choose [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching
function.
Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any
place of the screen enables the switch operation.
Basic tab
Screen Type
Go To Screen
Display Style
Trigger tab
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
1) Basic tab screen
: Base
: Fixed 2
: None (Shape)
: ON
: SM1515
2) Trigger tab screen
The created base screen 1 is shown below.
2 - 106


(Standby master station)
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
Network No. 0,
Station No. 2
(Intelligent device station)
Standby system
(System B)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power
supply module

5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Setting item
Settings
Controller type
(Network setting)
Master station
Other station (Network No. 0, station No. 0 (master station))
Section 2.7.2
LAMP, SWITCH
As the monitoring method, "monitoring by transient transmission" and "monitoring by cyclic

transmission" are available. Each monitor method has advantages and disadvantages.
(4) Monitoring overview
When system switching occurs, CC-Link changes Station No. between Station No. 0 of the master
station and Station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the
new control system after system switching continues control as the master station.
Since the GOT monitors the master station, it monitors the PLC CPU on the master station.

2 - 107
ALARM
Device setting
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power
supply module
Control
system
(System A)
GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
COMMON SETTING
CC-Link connection
(Master station)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
This section explains the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) that connects the GOT set as
the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the
CC-Link network.
OVERVIEW
4 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
5 CC-Link connection (via G4)

This section explains the CC-Link connection (via G4) that connects the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of
the CC-Link network.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link
network.
(AJ65BT-G4-S3)
(Master station)

(Standby master station)
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control
system
(System A)
GOT
CC-Link
Monitor target
Standby system
(System B)

Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module

Connect the AJ65BT-G4-S3 of the CC-Link network and GOT.
Setting item
Controller type
Device setting
Settings
Master station
Host station
Local station
Other station (Local station in other than redundant system)
(Network setting)
When system switching occurs, CC-Link changes Station No. between Station No. 0 of the master
station and Station No. 1 of the standby master station on the network. The CC-Link module of the
new control system after system switching continues control as the master station (Station No. 0).
Since the GOT monitors the master station, it monitors the PLC CPU on the master station.
2 - 108

Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)

GOT
(MELSECNET/10 mode)

(Normal station)
Monitor target
Standby
system
(System B)
COMMON SETTING
Empty
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empty
QJ61BT11N
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Empty
Empty
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module

Connect the MELSECNET/H network system and GOT.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Setting item
Settings
Controller type
Other station (Network No. 1 (network No. of PLC to PLC network),
Device setting
(Network setting)
Other station
station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system.
Station No. 1 in the above example))
In the MELSECNET/H network parameter of GX Developer, set the network type to

the "MELSECNET/10 mode".
When system switching occurs, the network module Station No. 2 changes from the normal station
to the sub control station and continues the control of MELSECNET/H.
Since the GOT monitors the station with the station number specified, it cannot monitor Station No.
2 in response to the system switching.
As a measure, using the script function, create a screen that changes the station numbers between
System A and System B to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system.
LAMP, SWITCH
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
This section
Creation of the monitor screen that will change the monitoring target to
the control system using the script function
2 - 109
ALARM
Power supply
module
Control
system
(System A)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

(Control station)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
This section explains the MELSECNET/10 connection (network system) that connects the GOT to the
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/
H network system.
OVERVIEW
6 MELSECNET/10 connection (network system)
7 Ethernet connection
This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system.
The following provides an example of connecting the GOT to the Ethernet network.
GOT
Network No. 1,
Station No. 2

Ethernet
Monitor target
Empt y
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Empt y
QJ61BT11N
QJ71E71-100
QJ71BR11
QJ71LP21-25
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply
module
Control
system
(System A)
Standby
system
(System B)

Empt y
Empt y
QJ71C24N
QJ72LP25-25
Power supply
module

Connect the Ethernet network system and GOT.
Setting item
Controller type
Settings
Other station (Network No. 1 (network No. of Ethernet), station No. ** (**
Device setting
(Network setting)
Other station
indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1 in the
above example))
When system switching occurs, the system with Station No. 2 Ethernet module acts as a control
system.
Since the GOT monitors the station with the station number specified, it cannot monitor Station No.
2 in response to the system switching.
As a measure, using the script function, create a screen that changes the station numbers between
System A and System B to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system.
This section
Creation of the monitor screen that will change the monitoring target to
the control system using the script function
2 - 110

1
OVERVIEW
8 Creation of the monitor screen that will change the monitoring target to the control
system using the script function
Advantage
Disadvantage
The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control
Station number
changing function
Some objects do not allow the station
system) and Station No. 2 (standby system)
Screen changing
All objects can be used to create a monitor
function
screen for each station number.
number to be changed.
can be created on one screen.
Monitor screens must be created separately

for Station No. 1 (control system) and
Station No. 2 (standby system).
The following explains how to use each function.
(b) To achieve this, the script of the GOT watches the special relay SM1515 (Control system
judgment flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into
the station number changing device.
(c) Restrictions
Some objects do not allow the station number to be changed.
Section 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(d) The setting method will be explained based on examples.

<System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/10 connection>
MELSECNET/H
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network No. 1
Q25PRH
CPU
QJ71
BR11
Station No. 1
Connected module
Q25PRH QJ71
CPU
BR11
Standby system
(System B)
Station No. 2
Network No.
Station No.
MELSECNET/H network module of control system

MELSECNET/H network module of standby system
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Station
GOT
No. 3
Control system
(System A)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(a) This function features that a monitor screen for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No.
2 (standby system) can be created on one screen.
If system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control system
PLC CPU on the same monitor screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Method using the station number changing function
1
1
GOT connected to the MELSECNET/10 network

2 - 111
ALARM
(1)
COMMON SETTING
Function
2
SPECIFICATIONS
In the case of MELSECNET/10 connection (network system) or Ethernet connection, create a script to
automatically change the monitoring target (station number) when system switching occurs.
The script executes the station number changing function or screen changing function.
The following describes the advantages and disadvantages of the station number changing function
and screen changing function.
<System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection>

Station No. 3 GOT
Ethernet
Network No. 1
Control system Q25PRH

(System A)
CPU
QJ71
E71
Q25PRH
CPU
Station No. 1
Connected module
QJ71 Standby system

(System B)
E71
Station No. 2
Network No.

Station No.
1
GOT connected to the Ethernet network
2
3
1 Set the station number changing device.

Choose [Common] [System Environment] [Switching Station No.] - "All", and
set the internal device GD100 as the station number changing device.
Do not use a device of PLC CPU as screen switching device. Since device
information will be transferred by the tracking transfer tunction of the redundant
system, status observation may not function effectively.
2 Set the status observation.

For MELSECNET/10 connection:
Make setting so that the station number will be changed when the abnormal
station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified
by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1: SW70.b0 (while ON)
Operation : GD100=2
When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.

Station No. is changed to 2.

Operation : GD100=1

2 - 112

Condition 1: GS231.b0 (while ON)

Operation : GD100=0102H


Operation : GD100=0101H

OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
For Ethernet connection:

Make setting so that the station number will be changed when the abnormal
station information (GS231) based on the station watch specified by choosing
[Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
For Ethernet connection, set the number to GD100 in BCD.
(For Network No. 1, Station No. 2, set "0102H".)
COMMON SETTING
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 Create a monitor screen.

For MELSECNET/10 connection, for Ethernet connection: (Common)
In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station
No. 1 of the control system.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 113
ALARM
4 On Screen 1, set the switch for writing Station No. 1 to the station number changing
device. (For Ethernet connection only)
After the GOT has started up, the station number changing device value of the GOT
is "0".
For Ethernet connection, the monitor becomes abnormal when the station number
changing device value is "0".
Hence, set the switch for writing the station number to the station number changing
device and the switch for shifting to the monitor screen on Screen 1.
To make this setting, choose [Object] [Switch] [Multi Action Switch].
The following shows an example of setting GD100=257 (0101H: Network No. 1,
Station No. 1) and Base screen=2 to one switch. (Base screen 2 is the actually
monitoring screen.)
5 Validate the station number changing function.

On the sub setting screen specified by choosing [Screen] [Properties], check
"Carry out station no. change" to validate the station number changing function.
Make this setting for each monitor screen.
For Ethernet connection, however, do not make this setting on Screen 1 created in
above Step
.
Check here.
2 - 114

OVERVIEW
1
6 Change the station number changing device value in the script.
By choosing [Common] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that will
check the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby
system), change the station number changing device value.
Set the trigger type of the script as "Ordinary" or "Sampling (about 3s)".
Screen script for MELSECNET/10 connection:
SPECIFICATIONS
// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is changed
to that of the other station.
if([w:GD100]==1){
[w:GD100]=2;
}else{
[w:GD100]=1;
}
}
COMMON SETTING
Set the created script on the Screen tab for each screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 115
ALARM
Screen script for Ethernet connection:

// If the host station is not a control station, the station number is changed to that of the
other station.
if([w:GD100]==0 0101){
// Station No. 1 to 2
[w:GD100]=0x0102;
}else{
// Station No. 2 to 1
[w:GD100]=0x0101;
}
}
For Ethernet connection, create a script so that the network No. and station number are set
to the station changing device.
For Network No. 1, Station No. 2, create "[w:GD100]=0x0102".
Set the created script on the Screen tab for each screen.
Remark
2 - 116
When the GOT in MELSECNET/10 connection executes monitor with only the
redundant system connected to the MELSECNET/H network, SW56 (current control
station) can be set as the station number changing device. In this case, even if system
switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.

(a) This function features that a monitor screen is created for each station number.
When system switching occurs, the GOT can change the monitoring target to the control
system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen.
(b) To achieve this, the script of the GOT watches the special relay SM1515 (Control system
judgment flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the station
number of the latest control system into the screen changing devices.
COMMON SETTING
(d) The setting method will be explained based on examples.

<System configuration example 1: MELSECNET/10 connection>
MELSECNET/H
(MELSECNET/10 mode)
Network No. 1
Station No. 1
Connected module
Q25PRH
CPU
QJ71
BR11
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Control system Q25PRH QJ71

CPU
BR11
(System A)
4
Standby system
(System B)
Station No. 2
Network No.

Station No.
1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Station No. 3 GOT
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(c) Precautions
There are the following four different screen changing devices. Set the screen changing
devices for all screens used.
Base screen changing device
Overlap window 1 changing device
Overlap window 2 changing device
Superimpose window 1 changing device
Superimpose window 2 changing device
OVERVIEW
(2) Method using the screen changing function
GOT connected to the MELSECNET/10 network
<System configuration example 2: Ethernet connection>
Ethernet
Network No. 1
QJ71
E71
Control system Q25PRH

CPU
(System A)
Station No. 1
Q25PRH QJ71
E71
CPU
LAMP, SWITCH
Station No. 3 GOT

Standby system
(System B)
Station No. 2
7
Network No.
Station No.

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Connected module
1
1
GOT connected to the Ethernet network
2
3

2 - 117
ALARM
1 Set the screen changing device of the base screen.

Choose [Common] [System Environment] [Screen Switching], and set the
internal device GD100 as the base screen changing device.
2 Set the status observation.
For MELSECNET/10 connection:
Set the status observation so that the station number will be changed when the
abnormal station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project
specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
Operation : GD100=2

Screen No. is changed to 2.

Operation : GD100=1

For Ethernet connection:

Set the status observation so that the station number will be changed when the
abnormal station information (GS231) based on the station watch specified by
choosing [Common] [Status Observation] turns ON.
2 - 118

Operation : GD100=2


Operation : GD100=1


4 Change the station number changing device value in the script.

By choosing [Common] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that will
check the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby
system), change the station number changing device value.
Set the trigger type of the script as "Ordinary" or "Sampling (about 3s)".
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
// Script of Screen No. 2

// If Station 2 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 1.
if([1-2:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]==1;
}
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
// Script of Screen No. 1

// If Station 1 is not a control station, the screen is changed to that of Station 2.
if([1-1:b:SM1515]==OFF){
[w:GD100]==2;
}
COMMON SETTING
Screen scripts for MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet connection:

The same script can be used for MELSECNET/10 connection and Ethernet
connection.
Script screen of Screen No. 1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3 Create monitor screens.

For MELSECNET/10 connection, for Ethernet connection: (Common)
Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1
on Screen No. 1 (1-1).
Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2
on Screen No. 2 (1-2).
OVERVIEW
Script screen of Screen No. 2
LAMP, SWITCH
When the GOT in MELSECNET/10 connection executes monitor with only the
redundant system connected to the MELSECNET/H network, SW56 (current control
station) can be set as the station number changing device. In this case, if system
switching occurs, the GOT always monitors the station number that is currently the
control station.

2 - 119
ALARM
Remark
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2.8 Multi-channel Function
2.8.1
About multi-channel function
The multi-channel function is used to monitor multiple controllers (PLC CPU, temperature controller, inverter,
etc.) by installing multiple communication drivers to a GOT. Monitoring of up to 4 controllers (4 channels) is
possible.
CH No. 1
Bus connection
Monitors the devices of

the connected controllers
by installing multiple
communication drivers.
CH No. 2
OMRON PLC
connection
CH No. 3
Temperature
controller
connection
CH No. 4
Servo amplifier
connection
Required knowledge for using the multi-channel function

This manual explains the procedure used for selecting the system up to the step to
start drawing.
For the procedure after drawing, i.e., the procedure from installation of OS to startup of GOT, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Section 27 Multi-channel
Function)
2 - 120

2.8.1 About multi-channel function
1
(1) With a single unit of GOT, the system consisting of PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo
amplifier and other controllers can be configured.
The system including different kinds of controllers can be easily configured since one unit of GOT
can monitor PLC CPU, temperature controller, servo amplifier, and other controllers.
In addition, centralized management of the information is possible because each system can be
monitored at the GOT screen.
Servo amplifier system
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) Controlling FXCPU / third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/10, etc.)
It is possible to control FXCPU / third party PLC, etc. through the network (MELSECNET/10, etc.).
For example, it is possible to execute read/write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is
satisfied, using the device of the PLC CPU on the network (MELSECNET/10, etc.) as the trigger for
action.
COMMON SETTING
Can monitor
different kinds
of controllers on
the same screen.
Temperature controller system
Condition is satisfied
FXCPU
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Writing to a device
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.8.1 About multi-channel function
2 - 121
ALARM
PLC
Temperatur
controller
Servo amplifier
2
SPECIFICATIONS
PLC system
OVERVIEW
1 Features of the multi-channel function
2.8.2
General flow from system selection to drawing
System selection for using the multi-channel function is explained below.

Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below.
System selection
Section 2.8.3
Determine the connection type and the channel
Determining the connection type and channel No.
No. to be used.
(System selection)
Interface selection
Determine the GOT side interface and
communication units to be used for the multichannel function.
Determining the GOT side interface (Interface

selection)
Checking the unit installation position
Section 2.8.5
Determine the communication unit installation
Installing communication units on another unit
position.
(Checking the unit installation position)
Make settings for Communication Settings.
Confirm items to know before starting drawing.
2 - 122
Section 2.8.4

2.8.2 General flow from system selection to drawing
Section 2.8.6
Setting for communication settings
Section 2.8.7
Items to be checked before starting drawing
2.8.3
Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)
OVERVIEW
1 Determining the connection type
With the multi-channel function, combinations as shown below are possible.

(1) Bus/network connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (1 to 3 channels)
Bus connection
Direct CPU connection
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
CC-Link connection (via G4)
Third party PLC connection
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
Microcomputer connection
Temperature controller connection
Ethernet connection
Inverter connection
Servo amplifier connection
CNC connection (MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to
CNC connection (RS-232/RS-422
PLC network), CC-Link connection (intelligent device
connection)
station), Ethernet connection)
The number of channels and the functions that can be used differ depending on the connection type.
The table below shows the allowable combinations of connection types, the number of channels and
restricted functions.
: Allowed,
: Not allowed,
: Restricted
Functions restricted according to the connection type

Item
Allowable combination of connection types
Bar code
function
Transparent function
Ethernet
download
RS-232
USB
*2
Gateway
function *2
Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels
*1
Total: Up to 4 channels
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network): 1
channel
Serial connection: 1 channel
(1)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Bus connection: 1 channel
3
COMMON SETTING
Serial connection
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bus / network connection
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Serial connection only (1 to 4 channels)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station): 1 channel

LAMP, SWITCH
Serial connection: 1 channel
Ethernet connection: 1 channel
*1
Serial connection: 4 channels
*1
(2)
*1
When the bar code function is used, the transparent function through RS-232 cannot be used.
*2
In bus connection, Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and gateway function can
be used.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Serial connection: 1 to 3 channels

2.8.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System
2 - 123
ALARM
2 Determining the channel No.

After determining the connection type to be used in
, determine the channel Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH
No. 4) to be used for the respective connection types.
There are no special cautions to be attended to for determining channel Nos.
Set the channel No. by selecting [Common]
[System Settings] from the
menu.
Section 3.1 GOT/PLC Type Setting
Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check sheet.
Selection of connection type
Enter the name of connection type to be used.
Write Check
Sheet
Section 2.8.9
check sheet
2 - 124

2.8.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System
Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
Increase the interfaces at the GOT in the manner as shown below when the multi-channel function is used.
Installing communication units on an extend interface.
Using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface together with communication units installed on an extend
interface.
OVERVIEW
2.8.4
Extend interface 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Extend interface 2
Extension interface allows the installation
of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage,
respectively.
A communication unit installed at the 4th
or higher stage cannot be used.
3rd stage
2nd stage
COMMON SETTING
1st stage
Standard interface
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
Depending on the type of a communication unit, installation on another unit may be impossible.
Select the interface and communication units to be used for the multi-channel function by referring to the following pages.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Allows the connection of controller in serial

communication.
For RS-232 communications, connect RS-232 cable.
For RS-422 communications, attach an RS-422
conversion unit and connect RS-422 cable to it.
When the MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) or CC-Link connection (intelligent
device station) is selected
When the Ethernet connection is selected
When only the serial connection is selected
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When the bus connection is selected
Units to be used
Ethernet communication unit
GT15-QBUS(2)
GT15-ABUS(2)
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
or
GT15-75QBUS(2)L
GT15-75ABUS(2)L
To use the Ethernet

download or
gateway function
GT15-J71E71-100
The usable bus connection unit differs depending on the number of serial connection channels.

2.8.4 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection)
2 - 125
ALARM
Bus connection unit
As needed
Serial communication unit
LAMP, SWITCH
1 When the bus connection is selected
(1) About bus connection units to be used

GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used independent of the number of
serial connection channels.
When using the multi-channel function for the first time, it is recommended to use
GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2).
(2) When using Ethernet download or the gateway function
When using Ethernet download or the gateway function, always use GT15QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) independent of the number of serial connection
channels.
With GT15-75QBUS(2)L or GT15-75ABUS(2)L, Ethernet download or the
gateway function cannot be used.
(1) When using 1 channel for the serial connection
The bus connection unit that can be used varies depending on the device to be connected to the
GOT built-in RS-232 interface.
(a) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for the multi-channel function
GT15-QBUS(2)
GT15-ABUS(2)
GT15-75QBUS(2)L
GT15-75ABUS(2)L
There are no restrictions on the bus connection unit to be used.

Example: 1 channel of bus connection and 1 channel of RS-232 connection
Bus connection unit
RS-232 cable
Bar code reader, etc.
RS-232 interface
built in a GOT
* To use the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for RS-422 connection, an RS-422 conversion unit is necessary.
(b) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for other than the multi-channel function (bar
code function, etc.)
GT15-QBUS(2)
GT15-ABUS(2)
A serial communication unit is required.

For a bus connection unit, GT15-QBUS(2)/GT15-ABUS(2) is required to allow the installation
of a communication unit on it.
Example: 1 channel of bus connection and 1 channel of RS-232 connection
Bus connection unit
RS-232 interface built in a GO

2 - 126

1
OVERVIEW
(2) When using 2 channels or more for the serial connection

At least one serial communication unit is required.
For a bus connection unit, GT15-QBUS(2)/GT15-ABUS(2) that is allowed to install a
communication unit on it is required.
The number of serial communication units to be used varies depending on the device to be
connected to the GOT built-in RS-232 interface.
(a) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for the multi-channel function
For the channel that uses the RS-232 interface, a serial communication unit is not necessary.
Example: 1 channel of bus connection and 2 channels of RS-232 connection
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GT15-QBUS(2)
GT15-ABUS(2)
3
COMMON SETTING
Bus connection unit

RS-232 cable
RS-232 interface built in a GOT

5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(b) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for other than the multi-channel function (bar
code function, etc.)
All of the channels used for the serial connection require a serial communication unit (one unit
for each channel).
Example: 1 channel of bus connection and 2 channels of RS-232 connection
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bus connection unit
6
LAMP, SWITCH

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 127
ALARM
2 When the MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) or CC-Link connection

(intelligent device station) is selected
Units to be used
MELSECNET/10 communication unit

CC-Link communication unit
As needed
GT15-75J71LP23-Z
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-RS2T4-9P
For the serial connection, the GOT built-in RS-232 interface is used.
For an MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a CC-Link communication unit, a serial
communication unit cannot be used since they have no connector to allow the installation of a serial
communication unit on them.
Example: 1 channel of MELSECNET/10 connection and 1 channel of RS-232 connection
MELSECNET/10 communication unit
RS-232 cable

2 - 128

1
3 When the Ethernet connection is selected
OVERVIEW
As needed
GT15-J71E71-100
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P
The number of serial communication units to be used varies depending on the device to be connected
to the GOT built-in RS-232 interface.
When using Ethernet download or the gateway function
For using Ethernet download and the gateway function, only one Ethernet
communication unit is required.
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for the multi-channel function
COMMON SETTING
Units to be used
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

RS-232 cable

(2) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for other than the multi-channel function (bar code
function, etc.)
All of the channels used for the serial connection require a serial communication unit (one unit for
each channel).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 129
ALARM
4 When only the serial connection is selected

Units to be used
As needed
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2-9P
GT15-RS4-9S
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P
At least one serial communication unit is required.

The number of serial communication units to be used varies depending on the device to be connected
to the GOT built-in RS-232 interface.
(1) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for the multi-channel function
Example: 3 channels of RS-232 connection
RS-232 cable

2 - 130

1
OVERVIEW
(2) When using the GOT built-in RS-232 interface for other than the multi-channel function (bar code
function, etc.)
All of the channels used for the serial connection require a serial communication unit (one unit for
each channel).
Example: 3 channels of RS-232 connection
2
SPECIFICATIONS

COMMON SETTING
Selection of interface (communication unit)
Write Check
Sheet
Section 2.8.9
Enter the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be
used for each of the connection type.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
check sheet
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
* For the entry of the communication unit model name, refer to
Units to be used .
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 131
ALARM
2.8.5
Installing communication units on another unit (Checking the unit

installation position)
Precautions for installing units on another unit are described below.

For the installation method of a unit, refer to the manual below.
GT15 User's Manual
1 Bus connection unit

Bus unit connection installation position varies depending on the model to be used.
(1) Wide bus unit (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2)
Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extend interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2

The installed stage number of communications units installed on GT15-QBUS2 or
GT15-ABUS2 recognized by the GOT varies depending on the extend interface
position.
For communication units installed at the extend interface 2 side, physical position
and the position recognized by the GOT differ from each other. Even if a
communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT
recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
Recognized as the
3rd stage of extend
interface 1
Recognized as the 2nd stage

of extend interface 2
Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend
interface 1
Recognized as the 1st stage

Recognized as the 1st stage

GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2
Relay connector
2 - 132

2.8.5 Installing communication units on another unit (Checking the unit
Bus connection unit
Bus connection unit
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)

A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extend interface.
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units
2 When using an MELSECNET/10 communication unit or CC-Link communication unit

Install an MELSECNET/10 communication unit or CC-Link communication unit at the 1st stage of the
extend interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
Example: Installing an Ethernet communication unit and serial communication units
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
COMMON SETTING
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 133
ALARM
3 When using an Ethernet communication unit

An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extend
interface.
Example: Installing an Ethernet communication unit and serial communication units
Ethernet
communication unit
Ethernet
communication unit
4 When using a serial communication unit

A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extend interface.
Serial
communication
unit
2 - 134

Serial
communication
unit
check sheet
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
*
When GT15-QBUS2/ABUS2 is used, although GT15-RS2-9P is

installed physically at the 2nd stage of extend interface 2, the
GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage. Therefore, in the
check sheet, the position should be entered as 1st stage.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1 Enter the name of communication unit to be used for each of the

connection type.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 135
ALARM
Section 2.8.9
OVERVIEW
Installing a communication unit

Write Check
Sheet
(From previous page)

2 After entering the names of communication units, enter CH No.
to be assigned to respective units based on the entry in
Check Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface).
2 - 136

2
SPECIFICATIONS
3 After entering CH No., enter the communication driver name for

each connection type. Concerning the communication drivers
used for the respective connection types, refer to the manual
below.
OVERVIEW
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 137
ALARM
2.8.6
Setting for communication settings
Make communication settings based on the interface and the installation position of the respective communication units.
Extend interface 1
Extend interface 2
3rd stage
2nd stage
1st stage
RS-232 interface
built in a GOT
Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer2 referring to

the check sheet where the necessary information has been entered.
The position where the setting should be made on Communication
Check
Section 2.8.9
Settings is specified on the check sheet by numbers (1) to (7).
check sheet
This completes the setting for Communication Settings. Create a screen

with GT Designer2.
2 - 138

2.8.6 Setting for communication settings
Example: Setting example for "Bus connection (1 channel) + Serial connection (3 channels) + Bar code
reader"
OMRON temperature controller connection
2 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)

FXCPU direction CPU connection
Bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS2)
Serial communication unit (GT15-RS4-9S)

Inverter connection
Bar code reader
COMMON SETTING
3
5
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3
4
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
SPECIFICATIONS
QCPU bus connection

2.8.6 Setting for communication settings
2 - 139
ALARM
OVERVIEW
3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P)
2.8.7
Items to be checked before starting drawing
The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be
set beforehand when using the multi-channel function.
1 Device setting
It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No.
Section 5.1.1 Device setting
Click the device setting button.
Remark
Click the controller to be set.
Set the device.
Using the existing project data

If the project data created by GT Designer2, which is not compatible with the multichannel function, the settings having been made are all allocated to CH No. 1
automatically.
When using the existing data at CH No. 1, it is not necessary to set the channel
number.
2 Accessible range for monitoring

The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi-channel function is used.
Section 2.7 Controller that can be monitored and the accessible range
FXCPU
Accessible range
is not changed.
FXCPU
2 - 140

2.8.7 Items to be checked before starting drawing
1
3 Clock function
OVERVIEW
Set the controller for which adjust/broadcast should be executed by the CH No.
Section 2.5 Clock Function
10:10
10:10
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
MITSUBISHI
SPECIFICATIONS
CH No. 2
Servo amplifier
C
H
ARGE
10:10
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
Broadcast is
executed for
CH No. 1 and
CH No. 3.
CH No. 4
Temperature controller
COMMON SETTING
4 FA transparent function
Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No.
The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility.
To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
MITSUBISHI
C
H
ARGE
CH No. 2
Servo amplifier
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
CH No. 4
FA transparent function is
executed for CH No. 1.
5 Station No. switching function
Set the controller for which the station No. switching function should be executed by the CH No.
LAMP, SWITCH
CH No. 1
Mitsubishi PLC
MITSUBISH I
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
CH No. 3
OMRON PLC
Station No. switching is

executed for CH No. 1.
CH No. 4

2.8.7 Items to be checked before starting drawing
2 - 141
ALARM
CHA RGE
CH No. 2
Servo amplifier
2.8.8
Precautions
1 Precautions for hardware

When using the multi-channel function, install the option function board to the GOT.
Use one of the option function boards indicated below. (Note the GT15-NFB cannot be used.)
GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M.
2 Precautions for use

When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in
different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm.
Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system
alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT.
2 - 142

2.8.8 Precautions
Write Check
Sheet
Enter the name of connection type to be used.
Section 2.8.9
Shows items and contents to be

written on the check sheet.
Also describes an example of
the check sheet.
check sheet
2
SPECIFICATIONS
In Sections 2.8.3 to 2.8.6, the items to be attended to in the respective sections are indicated in the manner
as below.
Enter the appropriate data in the check sheet shown in the next page following the explanation given in the
previous sections, and the setting for Communication Settings can be completed for the multi-channel function by simply referring to the data in the check sheet.
3
COMMON SETTING
This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used.
OVERVIEW
Multi-channel function check sheet
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Indicates parts where items and details are to be written.

Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet.
Indicates parts where written details are to be checked.

Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The following symbols are used for each purpose.
Write Check
Sheet
Check
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2.8.9 Multi-channel function check sheet
2 - 143
ALARM
2.8.9
1 Check sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface)

CH
No.
Selection of interface (communication unit)
Section 2.8.3)
Section 2.8.4)
Connection name
Connection name
Connection name
Connection name
2 Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface)

Installing a communication unit
(
Extend interface 1
Section 2.8.5)
Extend interface 2
3rd stage
Com. unit name
CH No.
Driver name
3rd stage
Com. unit name
(1)
CH No.
Driver name
CH No.
Driver name
CH No.
Driver name
(4)
2nd stage
Com. unit name
CH No.
Driver name
2nd stage
Com. unit name
(2)
(5)
1st stage
Com. unit name
CH No.
Driver name
1st stage
Com. unit name
(3)
(6)
Standard interface 1
(only one connection)
Connecting a controller
Com. unit name
(7)
CH No.
Driver name
(7)
Connecting a bar code reader
(3)
(2)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(4)
2 - 144
Barcode
Connecting a personal computer

2.8.9 Multi-channel function check sheet
Host (PC)
2.9 Supported Devices
OVERVIEW
GOT internal devices
They are devices kept in the internal of GOT.

The internal devices of GOT are classified into the following types.
device
GT15
: GB64
to
GB65535
GT11
: GB64
to
GB2047
GT15
: GD0
to
GD65535
GT11
: GD0
to
GD2047
GOT special register
GT15
: GS0
to
GS1023
(GS)
GT11
: GS0
to
GS1023
GOT bit register (GB)
GOT data register (GD)

Word
device
number
Decimal
Decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
Value in GOT internal device

When the GOT is powered off or reset, "0" is stored in the GOT internal device.
When project data is downloaded, the value is held.
Application of GB and GD
GB and GD are useful for processing in the areas where the devices do not have to
be used in the controller.
Device for screen switching
Work area for the script function
Storage area for bar code read values
etc
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit
Notation for device
Valid setting range
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
3
COMMON SETTING
The usage of GB, GD, and GS has no relation with GOT connection types. (However, they cannot be controlled in sequence programs of the controller.)
Valid setting ranges of the devices are as follows.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
:Bit register located inside the GOT and used as bit devices.
:Data register located inside the GOT and used as word devices.
:Special register located inside the GOT, which stores internal information,
communication statuses, error information, etc.
By monitoring GS with the object function, various information of the GOT
can be checked.
LAMP, SWITCH
GOT bit register (GB)

GOT special register (GS)

2.9.1 GOT internal devices
2 - 145
ALARM
2.9.1
1 GOT bit register (GB)

GB devices are listed as follows.
Device
Function
GB0 to GB39
Must not be used
GB40
Always ON
GB41
Always OFF
GB42
On when screen switching occurs
GB43 to GB63
Must not be used
GB64 to GB2047 (GT11)

User area
GB64 to GB65535 (GT15)
(a) Always ON (GB40)

Always ON.
(b) Always OFF (GB41)
Always OFF.
(c) On when screen switching occurs (GB42)
Turns on when switching of the following screens occurs.
Base screen
Overlap window 1, 2
When an overlap window is closed by opening a test window, etc. during the overlap window
is displayed.
Turn off this signal at user side.
Remark
Actons of always ON (GB40) and always OFF (GB41)

Always ON (GB40) and always OFF (GB41) in common information 1 (GS0) are
always ON (GB40) and always OFF (GB41), respectively.
2 GOT data register (GD)

GD devices are listed as follows.
2 - 146
Device
Function
GD0 to GD2047
User area (GT11)
GD0 to GD65535
User area (GT15)

1
OVERVIEW
(1) Designation of station No. using GD (only in the case of temperature controller connection, inverter
connection and servo amplifier connection)
If 100 to 115 is set for station No. in the setting of device, a station No. can be designated by the
value of GD10 to GD25.
The monitor target station No. can be changed by simply changing a device value.
For the device setting, refer to the following.
(b) When objects that monitor different channel Nos. are arranged on the same screen
To monitor different station Nos. by individual objects, use GD10 to GD25. If switching station
No. devices are used, the monitor target station No. can change for an unintended object.
(Especially when multiple switching target channel Nos. are set.)
Example: When monitor target channel Nos. of switching station No. device are 1 and 2.
Station No. 1
Station No. 2
150
100
Channel No. 1
3
COMMON SETTING
(a) When GD is used together with a switching station No. device (GT15 only)
The switching station No. device has priority.
SPECIFICATIONS
Channel No. 2
Station No. 2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Station No. 1
250
200
100
object 2
100
Monitoring
station No. 1 of
channel No. 2
Switching station
No. device:
2
object 1
150
object 2
250
When an attempt is made
to switch the monitor
target to station No. 2
only for object 1
All objects monitor station No. 2.
Monitoring
station No. 2 of
channel No. 1
Monitoring
station No. 2 of
channel No. 2
6
LAMP, SWITCH
object 1
Monitoring
station No. 1 of
channel No. 1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(When switching station No. device is used)
(When GD (GD10 to GD25) is used)

object 1 GD10: 2
100
object 2
200
Monitoring
station No. 1 of
channel No. 2
object 1 GD11: 1
object 1
150
Monitoring
station No. 2 of
channel No. 1
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
object 1
Monitoring
station No. 1 of
channel No. 1
Monitoring
object 2
200
station No. 1 of
When an attempt is made
channel No. 2
to switch the monitor
target to station No. 2
only for object 1
Only object 1 monitors station No. 2
8
The timing at which station No. changes

2 - 147
ALARM
The station No. of monitor target changes when a value of GD10 to GD25 is
changed.
3 GOT special register (GS)

The following list objects relevant to GOT special registers.
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
CH No. 4 communication
cycle signal
Base screen information (GS1)

b0
b1
b2
b8
b9
b10
Base screen CH No. 1

communication cycle signal
Base screen switching
complete signal
Base screen initial scan
complete signal
CH No.1 CC-Link G4 station No.

(GS6)
1 second binary counter (GS7)
Scan time of monitor (GS8)
Scan counter of monitor (GS10)
2 - 148

Parts movement
cycle signal
Parts display
b10
cycle signal
b9
User alarm display
b8
Parts
Advanced alarm popup
Always OFF signal
display (System alarm)
b5
Always ON signal
display (User alarm)
b4
signal
(System alarm)
Initial screen displaying
complete signal
Alarm
(User alarm)
Screen initial scan
Comment display
signal
Clock display
b3
Screen switching complete
ASCII input
b2
cycle signal
ASCII display
b1
Data List display
b0
Numerical input
Common information1 (GS0)
Numerical display
Description
No.
Touch switch
Bit
Lamp display
Items
Numerical, Character display
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Station No. switching
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Set overlay screen function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
Common information1 (GS0)
b3
Screen switching complete

signal
Screen initial scan
complete signal
signal
Always ON signal
b5
Always OFF signal
b9
b10
Initial screen displaying
b4
b8
COMMON SETTING
b2
cycle signal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b1
cycle signal
cycle signal
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b0
cycle signal
Base screen information (GS1)
b2
b8
b9
b10

complete signal
LAMP, SWITCH
b1

complete signal

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b0
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,


(GS6)
1 second binary counter (GS7)
Scan time of monitor (GS8)

2 - 149
ALARM
Scan counter of monitor (GS10)
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
b7
b8
Object script error

occurrence signal
Object script BCD error
occurrence signal
Object script zero division
error occurrence signal
Object script
b12
communication error
occurrence signal
Object script error pointer (GS81)

Object script error data (GS82 to
GS113)
Object script error execute pointer
(GS114)
Object script error execute ID
(GS115 to GS145)
Gateway common information
(GS200)
2 - 150

Parts movement
b0
Parts display
(GS80)
Object script common information
Script execute No. (GS49 to 79)
User alarm display
Script execute pointer (GS48)
Parts
Script error data (GS16 to 47)
Script error pointer (GS15)
occurrence signal
Script communication error
occurrence signal
(System alarm)
Script zero division error
occurrence signal
Alarm
(User alarm)
b12
Script BCD error
Comment display
b8
signal
Clock display
b7
Script error occurrence
ASCII input
b0
ASCII display
(GS14)
Data List display
Script common information
Numerical input
Numerical display
Description
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
Items
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
b8
b12
signal
Script BCD error
occurrence signal
Script zero division error
occurrence signal
Script communication error
occurrence signal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b7
Script error occurrence
Script error pointer (GS15)

Script error data (GS16 to 47)
Script execute pointer (GS48)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Script execute No. (GS49 to 79)

(GS80)
b7
b8
Object script error

occurrence signal
Object script BCD error
occurrence signal
Object script zero division
error occurrence signal
LAMP, SWITCH
b0
Object script
b12
communication error
occurrence signal
Object script error pointer (GS81)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Object script error data (GS82 to

GS113)
(GS114)
(GS115 to GS145)

(GS200)

2 - 151
ALARM
b0
COMMON SETTING
(GS14)
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
Mail send function send source

(GS206)
Server function error counter
(GS210)
Server function error code (GS211)
Server function error occurrence
date and time (GS212 to 214)
Server function error client
(GS215 to 216)
(GS220)
Client function error code (GS221)
Client function error occurrence
Client function error server
(GS225 to 226)
No. of faulty stations (GS230)
2 - 152

Parts movement
Mail send function error occurrence

Parts display
Mail send function error code

(GS202)
Mail send function error counter

(GS201)
Client function error

occurrence signal
User alarm display
b15
Parts
Server function error

occurrence signal
b14
Mail send function error

occurrence signal
b11
Client function ready signal
(System alarm)
b4
Server function ready

signal
Alarm
(User alarm)
b3
Comment display
FTP server function log-in

signal
Clock display
b2
ASCII input
FTP server function ready

signal
ASCII display
b1
Data list display
Mail send function ready

signal
Numerical input
b0
Numerical display
Description
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
Items
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Client function error

occurrence signal
b15
Debug
Server function error

occurrence signal
Bar code function
b14
Hardcopy

occurrence signal
b11
Recipe function
Client function ready signal
Logging function
b4
Server function ready

signal
Status observation
b3
FTP server function log-in

signal
Scatter graph
b2
Statistics graph
FTP server function ready

signal
Bar graph
b1
Line graph
Mail send function ready

signal
Trend graph
b0
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Mail send function error counter

(GS201)
Mail send function error code
(GS202)
Mail send function error occurrence
Mail send function send source

(GS206)
LAMP, SWITCH
Server function error counter (GS210)

Server function error code (GS211)
Server function error occurrence
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Server function error client

(GS215 to 216)
(GS220)
Client function error code (GS221)
Client function error occurrence
Client function error server

(GS225 to 226)

2 - 153
ALARM
No. of faulty stations (GS230)
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
Screen script initial operation

(GS386)
Object script common control
(GS387)
Object script monitoring time
(GS388)
Object script initial operation
(GS389)
Gateway common control
(GS400)
b2
2 - 154
Forced FTP server function

logout signal

Parts movement
Script monitoring time (GS385)
Parts display
Script retry signal
b1
Script error clear signal
User alarm display
b0
Parts
Script common control (GS384)
CH No. 4 CC-Link G4 station No.

(GS363)

(GS362)

(GS361)

(GS360)
(System alarm)
Integer
Real number
conversion error code (GS261)
Integer
Real number
conversion complete signal
Alarm
(User alarm)
b15
Comment display
Integer
Real number
conversion error
occurrence signal
Clock display
b14
ASCII input
Integer
Real number
conversion status (GS260)
ASCII display
Error detection common

information (GS252)
Data list display
Faulty station information (GS231

to 238)
Numerical input
Numerical display
Description
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
Items
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Status observation
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
Faulty station information (GS231
COMMON SETTING
to 238)
information (GS252)
Integer
Real number
conversion status (GS260)

Integer
b14
Real number
conversion error
occurrence signal
Integer
Real number
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b15
conversion complete signal
Integer
Real number
conversion error code (GS261)

(GS360)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

(GS361)
(GS362)
(GS363)
b0
Script error clear signal
b1
Script retry signal
LAMP, SWITCH
Script common control (GS384)
Script monitoring time (GS385)

(GS386)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

(GS387)
(GS388)
(GS389)

(GS400)
Forced FTP server function
logout signal

2 - 155
ALARM
b2
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
Memory card image file

display setting signal
Touch switch operation
b12
timing (Screen/station no.

switch) setting signal
Screen switch memory
b13
card save function setting

signal
Touch switch upper
b14
hierarchy operation mode

setting signal
Auto screen save time (GS451)

Error detection common control
(GS452)
Conversion start indication
(GS460)
b0
to
b7
b15
2 - 156
Integer
Real number
conversion method
Integer
Real number
conversion start signal

Parts movement
authorization certification
Parts display
Kana-kanji conversion
information clear setting
Cursor deleted system
User alarm display
information output setting
Parts
b8
Ascii input system
b4
setting signal
b3
Numeric input range check
b2
complete signal
b1
(System alarm)
b0
device) (GS450)
Alarm
(User alarm)
Monitor common control (Write
Comment display
Client function error clear

signal
Clock display
b15
ASCII input
Server function error clear

signal
ASCII display
b14
Data list display

clear signal
Numerical input
b11
Numerical display
Description
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
Items
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Set overlay screen
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
3
COMMON SETTING
Recipe function
Logging function
Client function error clear

signal
Scatter graph
b15
Statistics graph
Server function error clear

signal
Bar graph
b14
Line graph

clear signal
Trend graph
b11
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
Monitor common control (Write

device) (GS450)
b2
b3
b4
b8
complete signal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b1
Numeric input range check

setting signal
Ascii input system
information output setting
Cursor deleted system

information clear setting
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b0
Kana-kanji conversion
authorization certification
Memory card image file
display setting signal
b12
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
timing (Screen/station no.

switch) setting signal
Screen switch memory
LAMP, SWITCH
card save function setting

signal
Touch switch upper
b14
hierarchy operation mode

setting signal
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Auto screen save time (GS451)

(GS452)
(GS460)
b0
to
b7
b15
Integer
Real number
conversion method
Integer
Real number
conversion start signal

2 - 157
ALARM
b13
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
b6
b3,
b7
notification cancel signal

Touch key mainte-nance
time notification cancel
signal
Build-in flash memory
maintenance time
GOT reset control (GS639)

Present time (GS650 to 653)
Maintenance time notification
information (GS680)
b0,
Backlight maintenance time
notification signal
b1,
5
Display section
maintenance time
notification signal
b2,
Touch key maintenance
time notification signal
b3,
7
2 - 158
Built-in flash memory

maintenance time
notification signal

Parts movement
b2,
maintenance time
Parts display
b5
Display section
b1,
User alarm display
b4
Parts
b0,
cancel control (GS638)
(GS520)
Buffering and file access control
(System alarm)
Changed time (GS513 to 516)
Time change information (GS512)
Alarm
(User alarm)
Store error value (GS464)
Comment display
device No. (GS463)
Clock display
Conversion destination head
ASCII input
No. (GS462)
ASCII display
Conversion source head device
Data list display
Conversion devices (GS461)
Numerical input
Numerical display
Description
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
Items
: Irrelevant
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Set overlay screen
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
Conversion devices (GS461)
COMMON SETTING
Conversion source head device

No. (GS462)
Conversion destination head
device No. (GS463)
Store error value (GS464)
Time change information (GS512)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Changed time (GS513 to 516)

(GS520)
cancel control (GS638)
Display section
maintenance time
b2,
b6
Touch key mainte-nance

time notification cancel
signal
b3,
b7
Build-in flash memory

maintenance time
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b1,
b5
6
LAMP, SWITCH

GOT reset control (GS639)

Present time (GS650 to 653)
information (GS680)
notification signal
b1,
5
Display section
maintenance time
notification signal
b2,
6
Touch key maintenance

time notification signal
b3,
7
Built-in flash memory

maintenance time
notification signal
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b0,
4

2 - 159
ALARM
b0,
b4
Parts movement
Parts display
User alarm display
(GS860, 861)
(System alarm)
No.0 (GS700, 701) to No.79
Touch key pushing addition times
(User alarm)
(GS685, 686)
Comment display
Built-in flash memory writing times
Clock display
time (GS683, 684)
ASCII input
Display section power ON addition
ASCII display
(GS681, 682)
Data list display
Backlight power ON addition time
Numerical input
Numerical display

2 - 160
Touch switch
Bit
Description
No.
Lamp display
Items
Parts
Alarm
Lamp,

Switch
: Irrelevant
: Relevant,
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Items
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Level display
Description
Panel meter display
Bit
No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
: Relevant,
COMMON SETTING
(GS681, 682)
Display section power ON addition
time (GS683, 684)
(GS685, 686)
Touch key pushing addition times
No.0 (GS700, 701) to No.79
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(GS860, 861)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 161
ALARM
The GS list and device functions are as follows.

(1) Read device
Device
Function
Reference
GS0
Common information 1
See (a) below
GS1
Base screen information
See (b) below
GS2 to GS5
Must not be used
GS6
See (c) below
GS7
1 second binary counter
See (d) below
GS8
Scan time of monitor
See (e) below
GS9
Must not be used
GS10
Scan counter of monitor
See (f) below
GS11 to GS13
Must not be used
GS14
GS15
Script error pointer
GS16
Script No.
GS17
Error code
GS46
Script No.
GS47
Error code
GS48
Script execute pointer
GS49 to 79
Script execute No.
GS80
GS81
Object script error point
GS82
Object script user ID
GS83
Error code
GS112
Object script user ID
Section 16.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for

script execution on GOT
GS113
Error code
GS114
GS115 to 145
GS146 to 199
Must not be used
GS200 to 229
See (g) below

GS230
No. of faulty stations
See (h) below

GS231 to 238
Faulty station information
2 - 162

Function
Reference
GS239 to 251
Must not be used
GS252
Error detection common information
See (i) below
GS253 to 259
Must not be used
Integer
GS260
Real number conversion

status
Integer
GS261
1
OVERVIEW
Device
Real number conversion error
Section 16.2.3
Integer Real number
conversion function
GS262 to 359
Must not be used
GS360
GS361
GS362
GS363
GS364 to 383
Must not be used
GS384 to 639
Write device
GS640 to 649
Must not be used
GS650 to 653
Present time
GS654 to 679
Must not be used
SPECIFICATIONS
code
-
See (c) below
3
COMMON SETTING
This section (2) Write device

Maintenance time notification information
See (k) below
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GS681 to 682 *1
See (l) below

GS683 to 684 *1
Display section power ON addition time
GS685 to 686 *1
GS687 to 699
Must not be used
See (n) below
*1
GS862 to 1023
*1
Touch key pushing addition times No. 0
GS860 to 861
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GS700 to 701
*1
LAMP, SWITCH
See (m) below
Touch key pushing addition times No. 79

Must not be used
To use this function, a battery must be set in the GOT.

2 - 163
ALARM
GS680 *1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
See (j) below
(a) Common information1 (GS0(16bit))

b15 to b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
:Repeats turning ON and OFF for every communication cycle*1. (For channel
No. 1)
:Turns ON when the base/window screen is switched and remains ON until a
cycle of the on-screen setting processing is complete.(This applies to station
No. switching, security level change or language switching.)
It is used to check (debug) the screen switch settings.
cycle of the on-screen object processing of the status observation is
complete.(This applies to station No. switching, security level change or
language switching.)
It is used to activate the status observation for once when switching the screen.
:Turns ON while the initial screen is displayed at power-on.
It turns off when the base screen is switched over.
:Always ON.
:Always OFF.
:Must not be used
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6 to b7
b8
No. 2)
b9
No. 3)
b10
No. 4)
:Must not be used
b11 to b15
*1
A cycle is the elapsed time for GOT to read the objects on the current screen display and the data set in the
common settings.
Remark
Actions of b4 and b5 in common information 1 (GS0)

b4 and b5 in common information 1 (GS0) are always ON (GB40) and always OFF
(GB41), respectively.
2 - 164

(b) Base screen information (GS1(16bit))
:Repeats turning ON and OFF for every communication cycle*1 while the base
screen is displayed. (For channel No. 2)
b9
b10
:Must not be used
b11 to b15
(c) CH No. 1 CC-Link G4 station No. (GS6(16bit))

Stores AJ65BT-G4-S3's station No. when the GOT is connected to the CC-Link network via
AJ65BT-G4-S3 and the GOT is powered ON.
When the multi-channel function is used, the station No. of channel No. 1 is stored. Station
Nos. of channel Nos. 2 to 4 are stored to GS361 to GS363.
(d) 1 second binary counter (GS7(16bit))
Starts counting every second immediately after the power is switched on.
Any given value can be written to this counter to start the count from the written value.
The obtained data are stored as binary data.
This is used to check how long the time has elapsed from specific timing (operation, etc.).
(e) Scan time of monitor (GS8(16bit))
Stores the time (ms) of a complete processing cycle set on the display screen as binary data.
Data will be updated when all of the processing set on the display screen is complete.
An error of 10 ms may be produced depending on the processing settings. Also, this does not
apply to the objects that have not been processed by the security function.
It is useful for load checking (debugging) of the monitor processing.
(f)
Scan time counter of monitor (GS10(16bit))

Counts up the number of cycles every time the processing cycle set on the display screen is
complete.
Used to check (debug) the number of scan of monitor.
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
b8
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b3 to b7
cycle of the on-screen setting processing is complete. (This applies to station
No. switching, security level change or language switching.)
It is used to check (debug) the screen switch settings
cycle of the on-screen object processing of the status observation is complete.
(It functions in the same way for the station No. switching and security level
switching.)
It is used to activate the status observation for once when the screen is
switched over.
:Must not be used.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b2
b0
6
LAMP, SWITCH
b1
b1

2 - 165
ALARM
b0
b2
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b15 to b3
(g) No. of faulty stations detection (GS230 (16 bit))
The number of stations where CPU error was detected is stored.

The station where error occurs can be checked with GS231 to GS238.(
information below)
b15 to b8
(h) Faulty station
b7 to b0
b0 to b7 : Stores the number of faulty stations.

b8 to b15 : Must not be used
Monitoring GS230 by numerical display
When monitoring GS230 by numerical display, etc., perform mask processing using
data operation function as below.(
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function)
<Setting example of numerical display (data operation tab)>
Make setting for mask processing of the upper

8 bits (b15 to b8) of GS230 in Numerical Display.
2 - 166

1
OVERVIEW
(h) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238 (16 bits))
The bit of the faulty station which corresponds to the Ethernet setting No. turns on.
0 : No alarm
1 : Alarm
When an alarm occurred has restored, the bit turns off.
SPECIFICATIONS
bit 0 of GS231
bit 1 of GS231
bit 2 of GS231
bit 3 of GS231
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
GS231
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
GS232
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
GS233
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
.33
GS234
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
GS235
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
GS236
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
GS237
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
GS238
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
b15 to b1
6
LAMP, SWITCH
:Turns ON if an error is detected in the alarm information file to be stored when

executing memory card storage function by alarm history display.
The alarm information file is not stored into a memory card while this bit is ON.
Turns OFF when the error detection common control (GS452.b0) is turned ON.
Useful for error detection during file storage.
:Must not be used.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b1 to b15
b0
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Error detection common information (GS252(16bit))
b0

2 - 167
ALARM
(i)
b15
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Ethernet Setting No
Device
COMMON SETTING
(j)
Maintenance time notification information (GS680 (16 bits))
b15 to b8
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8 tob15
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
The cumulative power-on time of the backlight is stored in binary data.

Unit: hours
Display power on addition time (GS683 (32 bits))
The cumulative power-on time of the display section is stored in binary data.
Unit: hours
2 - 168
b1
b0
:Turns on as a first-stage notification if the backlight power on addition time

(GS681 (32 bits)) reaches 80% or above of the maintenance notification time
setting specified with a utility function.
:Turns on as a first-stage notification if display power on addition time (GS683
(32 bits)) reaches 80% or above of the display section maintenance notification
time setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on as a first-stage notification if any of the touch key pushing addition
times (GS700 to 861) reaches 80% or above of the touch key maintenance
notification count setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on as a first stage notification if the build in flash memory writing times
(GS685 (32b bits)) reaches 80% or above of the built-in flash memory
maintenance notification count setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on as a second-stage notification if the backlight power on addition time
(GS681 (32 bits)) reaches 100% or above of the backlight maintenance
notification time setting specified with a utility function.
:Turns on as a second-stage notification if display power on addition time
(GS683 (32 bits)) reaches 100% or above of the display section maintenance
notification time setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on as a second-stage notification if any of the touch key pushing addition
times (GS700 to 979) reaches 100% or above of the touch key maintenance
notification count setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on as a second-stage notification if the built-in flash memory writing times
(GS685 (32 bits)) reaches the built-in flash memory maintenance notification
count setting specified with a utility.
:Must not be used.
(k) Backlight power on addition time (GS681 (32 bits))
(l)
b2

1
OVERVIEW
(m) Build in flash memory writing times (GS685 (32 bits))
The cumulative writing times of the built-in flash memory is stored in binary data.
(n) Touch key pushing addition times No. 0 (GS700 (32 bits)).
Touch key pushing addition times No. 1 (GS702 (32 bits)) to No. 79 (GS860 (32 bits))
SPECIFICATIONS
The cumulative pushing times of the touch key is stored in binary data.
The count is taken in each of areas, divided into the size shown below.
Area
GT1595-X
96 x 96 dots
GT1585-S,
GT1575-S,
GT1575-V,
GT1572-VN,
GT1565-V,
GT1562-VN
GT1575-VN,
80 x 80 dots
Each area includes 25 touch keys.

Example: Arrangement of the special registers of GOT of the 640 x 480 dot screen size
COMMON SETTING
Model name
640 dot
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GS700 GS712 GS724 GS736 GS748 GS760 GS772 GS784


COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
480 dot
80 dot
80 dot

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Touch key input
If multiple touch keys are

pushed simultaneously in
an area, only one count is
added.
Further, if multiple areas are touched, the pushing frequency is counted in each area.
GS700 GS716
GS701 GS717
If four areas are touched,

the pushing frequency is
counted at each area.
GS702 GS718
GS703 GS719

2 - 169
ALARM
Touch key input
LAMP, SWITCH

When the GOT type is changed by GT Designer2

When the GOT type is changed to the one having different resolution, the
arrangement of special registers of GOT changes. After changing the GOT type,
check the GOT special registers.
Example: Differences in GOT special register arrangement between 640x480 dot
screen and 800x600 dot screen
(800x600 dot screen)
80 dots
GS700 GS712
GS701 GS713
GS700 GS716
GS701 GS717
GS702 GS714
GS703 GS715
GS702 GS718
GS703 GS719
GS704 GS716
GS705 GS717
GS704 GS720
GS705 GS721
GS706 GS718
GS707 GS719
GS706 GS722
GS707 GS723
GS708 GS720
GS709 GS721
GS710 GS722
GS711 GS723
600 dots
480 dots
80 dots
(640x480 dot screen)
GS708 GS724
GS709 GS725
GS710 GS726
GS711 GS727
GS712 GS728
GS713 GS729
GS714 GS730
GS715 GS731
:Area where arrangement
differs from 640x480 dot screen
2 - 170

(2) Write device

Function
GS384
Script common control
GS385
Script monitoring time
GS386
GS387
GS388
GS389
GS390 to 399
Must not be used
Reference
OVERVIEW
Device
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GS401 to 449
Must not be used
GS450
Monitor common control
See (a) below
GS451
Auto screen save time
See (b) below
GS452
See (c) below
GS453 to 459
Must not be used
GS460
GS461
Conversion devices
GS462
Conversion source head device No.
GS463
Conversion destination head device No.
GS464
Store error value
GS465 to 511
Must not be used
Section 16.2.3
Integer Real number
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
conversion function
GS512
Time change information
GS513 to 516
Changed time
GS517 to 519
Must not be used
GS520
See (d) below
GS521 to 637
Must not be used
GOT reset control
See (f) below
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GS639

2 - 171
ALARM
Maintenance time notification control
LAMP, SWITCH
See (e) below

GS638
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GS400
3
COMMON SETTING
(a) Monitor common control (GS450(16bit))

b15
b14
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5 to b7
b8
b13
b11 to b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
:When it is on, displays a confirm message after numerical/ASCII data are input.
:Controls the displaying methods of the message displayed when an numerical
value exceeding the valid range is input.
Turning on displays a message during input of the numerical value.
Turning off displays a message after the numerical value is entered.
:Turns on to activate "Numeric Value Input Number", "Cursor Position's Numeric
Value Input" and "Numeric Value Input Signal" of the system information
function during ASCII input as well.
:Turns on to store "0" in the following devices set by system information function,
"Cursor Position's Numeric Value Input", "Current Cursor Position" and
"Previous Cursor Position" when a cursor is erased.
:Activates the Kana-kanji conversion function for ASCII input when turned on.
:Must not be used.
:When it is on, BMP/JPEG file in the memory card can be used as parts by Parts
Display/Parts Movement.
Turning off displays parts registered by GTDesigner2.
For the project data whose [The image file in a memory card is used for the
Parts Image of Parts Display/Movement] for Auxiliary Setting is checkedmarked, a BMP/JPEG file in the memory card is used as a part even if this
signal is turned on/off.
(
b9 to b11
b12
b12
Section 9.1.2 Parts displaying method)
:Must not be used.

:Controls the timing when the screen/station No. changes by touch switch
operation.
This applies when multiple actions including either of the bit Set/Reset/Alternate
and either of screen switching/station No. switching have been set for a touch
switch.
For details, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.10 Precautions
b13
b14
b15
:Storing historical information of the previous touch switch to memory card is

enabled when it is turned on.
:Set the action of the previous touch switch as history mode when it is turned on.
:Disabled
(b) Auto screen save time (GS451(16bit))

Store the time before close (OFF) the monitor screen in screen save function.
Store the value by 1 to 60 (Min).
(To store value higher than 60, store it as 60)
The changed value is validated after canceling screen save when changing value in screen
save.
Relationship between GS451 and GOT utility (screen save time)
If value other than 0 is stored in GS451, the screen save time set in GOT utility will
be invalidated.
To validate the screen save time of utility, store 0 in GS451.
2 - 172

(c) Error detection common control (GS452(16bit))
:Turns ON to turn the error detection common information (GS252.b0) OFF.

:Must not be used.
OVERVIEW
b0
b1 to b15
b0
(d) Buffering and file access control (GS520 (16 bits))

b15 to b1
b0
b1 to b15
b0
:Turns on to store the whole data in the buffering area in the destination drive at
the timing of the rising edge.
:Must not be used
(e) Maintenance time notification cancel control (GS638 (16 bits))
2
SPECIFICATIONS
b15 to b1
b3
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
:Turns on to turn off the first-stage backlight maintenance time notification signal
(BS680.b0).
While this bit is on, the first-stage backlight maintenance time notification signal
(GS680.b0) remains off even if the backlight power on addition time (GS681 (32
bits)) exceeds the backlight maintenance notification time setting specified with
a utility.
:Turns on to turn off the first-stage display section maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b1).
While this bit is on, the first-stage display section maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b1) remains off even if the display section power ON addition
time (GS683 (32 bits)) exceeds the display section maintenance notification
time setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on to turn off the first-stage touch key maintenance time notification signal
(GS680.b2).
While this bit is on, the first-stage touch key maintenance time notification signal
(GS680.b2) remains off even if any of the touch key pushing addition times
(GS700 to 861) exceeds the touch key maintenance notification count setting
specified with a utility.
:Turns on to turn off the first-stage built-in flash memory maintenance time
notification signal (GS680.b3).
While this bit is on, the first-stage built-in flash memory maintenance timing
notification signal (GS680.b3) remains off even if the build in flash memory
writing times (GS685 (32 bits)) exceeds the built-in flash memory maintenance
notification count setting specified with a utilities.
:Turns on to turn off the second-stage backlight maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b4).
While this bit is on, the second-stage backlight maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b4) remains off even if backlight power ON addition time (GS681
(32 bits)) exceeds the backlight maintenance notification time setting specified
with a utility.

2 - 173
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b4
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b2
b5
6
LAMP, SWITCH
b1
b6
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b0
b7
ALARM
b15 to b8
COMMON SETTING
b5
b6
b7
b8 to b15
:Turns on to turn off the second-stage display section maintenance time

While this bit is on, the second-stage display section maintenance time
notification signal (GS680.b5) remains off even if the backlight power ON
addition time (GS683 (32 bits)) exceeds the display section maintenance
notification time setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on to turn off the second-stage touch key maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b6).
While this bit is on, the second-stage touch key maintenance time notification
signal (GS680.b6) remains off even if any of the touch key pushing addition
times (GS700 to 873) exceeds the touch key maintenance notification count
setting specified with a utility.
:Turns on to turn off the second-stage built-in flash memory maintenance time
While this bit is on, the second-stage built-in flash memory maintenance time
notification signal (GS680.b7) remains off even if the built-in flash memory
writing times (GS685 (32 bits)) exceeds the built-in flash memory maintenance
time notification count setting specified with a utility.
:Must not be used
Action of maintenance time notification cancel signal upon power-off of GOT

The maintenance time notification cancel signal is reset when the GOT is powered
off.
Therefore the maintenance time notification signal deactivated during operation of
the maintenance timing notification cancel signal is turned on again when the GOT
is powered on.
To keep the maintenance time notification signal off even when the GOT is powered
off and then on again, use the state monitoring function or the like to turn on the
maintenance time notification cancel signal again.
(f)
GOT reset control (GS639 (16 bits))

b15
b0 to b14
b15
2 - 174
b14 to b0
:Must not be used

:Turn on to software-reset the GOT at the rising edge timing.

Device range available for GOT1000 series
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer2.
Since the device specifications may be different depending on the models even though they belongs to the
same series of the controller.
Please make setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or device No. outside the range is specified, other objects may not be monitored.
OVERVIEW
2.9.2
2
SPECIFICATIONS
For the device setting methods, see the following section.

Section 5.1 Device Setting
1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC, CNC (Including motion controllers)
Input (X)
X0
to
X1FFF
Output (Y)
Y0
to
Y1FFF
Internal relay (M)
M0
to
M32767
Latch relay (L)
L0
to
L32767
Annunciator (F)
F0
to
F32767
Link relay (B)
B0
to
B7FFF
Bit device
Hexadecimal
Contact (TT)
TT0
to
TT32767
Coil (TC)
TC0
to
TC32767
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Timer
Contact (CT)
CT0
to
CT32767
Coil (CC)
CC0
to
CC32767
SM0
to
SM2047
Counter
Decimal
Special relay (SM)
Contact (SS)
SS0
to
SS32767
Coil (SC)
SC0
to
SC32767
Step relay (S)
S0
to
S32767
Link special relay (SB)
SB0
to
SB7FF
Retentive timer
Specified bit of the following word devices

(Except Index register and Buffer memory)
Word device bit

Data register (D)
D0
to
Hexadecimal
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device No.
Notation
Representation
Setting range
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
COMMON SETTING
(1) MELSEC-QnA, Q, MELDAS C6/C64
D32767
to
W0
to
W7FFF
Timer (current value) (TN)
TN0
to
TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN)
CN0
to
CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
SN0
to
SN32767
Link special register (SW)
SW0
to
SW7FF
R0
to
R32767
File register (R)
*1*2
SD2047
Block
to
255
Device
R0
to
R32767
Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4
ZR0
to
ZR1042431
Index register (Z)
Z0
to
Z15
(Intelligent function module) (BM)*5
BM0
to
BM32767
Ww
Ww0
to
WwFF
Wr
Wr0
to
WrFF
Extension fill register (ER)*1
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
LAMP, SWITCH
SD0
Link register (W)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Special data register (SD)
Buffer memory
8
Hexadecimal
Bit device word*6
Converting the above bit devices to words

2.9.2 Device range available for GOT1000 series
2 - 175
ALARM
Word device
Decimal
*1
Do not set a file register by GT Designer2 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file register set at
"Use the same file name as the program" by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. (With exceptions of MELSECQnA)
Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
*2
Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction.
*3
Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction.
*4
GOT treats them in units of 32k (32767 points).

Make the setting not to break up the 32k-unit block when specifying the extension file register (ZR) in the object
settings.
In the case of incorrect setting, the error message "Dedicated device is out of range. Confirm device range." will
be displayed in the system alarm.
There is no range limit for the read/write by specifying the file register name with the recipe function.
[Setting Example]: When specifying devices consecutively (line graph, etc): allocate 10 points
Correct: Head device: ZR32768

ZR0
Wrong: Head device: ZR32767

ZR0
Block0
Block0
ZR32767
ZR32768
ZR32767
ZR32768
Block1
Register ten points starting

fromZR32767 across 2 blocks.
Block1
*5
Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.
*6
The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
*7
When monitoring MELDAS C6/64, if a word device outside the range is set, the value will be indefinite. If a bit
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the intelligent function module.
device outside the range is set, the object may not be displayed or the set function may fail to operate.
Check the set device using the device list of GT Designer2.
*8
2 - 176
Devices used by the MELDAS C6/64 system cannot be used.

(2) MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
Input (X)
X0
to
X1FFF
Output (Y)
Y0
to
Y1FFF
Internal relay (M)
M0
to
M32767
Latch relay (L)
L0
to
L32767
Annunciator (F)
F0
to
F32767
Link relay (B)
B0
to
B7FFF
Contact (TT)
TT0
to
TT32767
Coil (TC)
TC0
to
TC32767
Contact (CT)
CT0
to
CT32767
Coil (CC)
CC0
to
CC32767
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Bit device
Timer
OVERVIEW
Device No.
notation
Setting range
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Device name
Counter
SS0
to
SS32767
Coil (SC)
SC0
to
SC32767
Step relay (S)
S0
to
S32767
SB0
to
SB7FF

Word device bit

Data register (D)*8*9
D0
to
D32767
Special data register (SD)
SD0
to
SD2047
Link register (W)
W0
to
W7FFF
TN0
to
TN32767
CN0
to
CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
SN0
to
SN32767
SW0
to
SW7FF
File register (R)*1*2
R0
to
R32767
Block
to
255
Device
R0
to
R32767
Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4
ZR0
to
ZR1042431
Index register (Z)
Z0
to
Z15
Buffer memory (Intelligent function module) (BM)*5
BM0
to
BM32767
Ww
Ww0
to
WwFF
Wr
Wr0
to
WrFF
#0
to
#8191
Hexadecimal
Word device
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Extension file register (ER)

Decimal
Hexadecimal
Motion device (#)*10
*5
Converting the above bit devices into words
Bit device word
Decimal
*1 to *6(1) MELSEC-QnA, Q, MELDAS C6/C64

(Q Motion)
*7
When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM for the device name and set the value subtracted
*8
The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the special data register.
*9
D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid setting range.
9000 for the device number (0 to 255).
*10 Monitoring is not available with GT SoftGOT2.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Contact (SS)
Retentive timer
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
SM2047
LAMP, SWITCH
to
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
SM0
2 - 177
ALARM
Special relay (SM)*7
COMMON SETTING
Decimal
(3) MELSEC-A
Device name
Device No.
representation
Setting range
Input (X)
X0
to
X1FFF
Output (Y)
Y0
to
Y1FFF
Internal relay/Special internal relay (M)
M0
to
M32767
Latch relay (L)
L0
to
L32767
Annunciator (F)
F0
to
F32767
Link relay (B)
B0
to
B7FFF
Contact (TT)
TT0
to
TT32767
Coil (TC)
TC0
to
TC32767
Contact (CT)
CT0
to
CT32767
Coil (CC)
CC0
to
CC32767
SB0
to
SB7FF
Bit device
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Timer
Decimal
Counter
Hexadecimal

Word device bit
Data register/Special data register (D)
D0
to
D32767
Decimal
Link register (W)
W0
to
W7FFF
Hexadecimal
TN0
to
TN32767
CN0
to
CN32767
SW0
to
SW7FF
File register (R)
R0
to
R32767
Word device
Decimal
Extension file register
Block
to
255
(ER)*1
Device
R0
to
R32767
(Z)
Z0
to
Z15
(V)
V0
to
V6
A0
to
A1
BM0
to
BM32767
Ww
Ww0
to
WwFF
Wr
Wr0
to
WrFF
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Index register *2
Announciator (A)
Buffer memory (Intelligent function module)
(BM))*3
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Bit device word *4*5
*1

(Except Timer and Counter)
In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the
extension file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, A4UCPU is not available.
When the bit specification writing of the word device is required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.
*2
In the computer link connection, writing to the index register (e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input
*3
Only the intelligent function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.
*4
*5
If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in
function) is not available.

Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the intelligent function module.
multiples of 16.
Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
2 - 178

(4) MELSEC-FX
Input (X)
X0
to
X377
Output (Y)
Y0
to
Y377
Auxiliary relay (M)
M0
to
M7679
Special auxiliary relay (M)
M8000
to
M8511
State (S)
S0
to
S4095
OVERVIEW
Device No. notation
T0
to
T511
Counter contact (C)
C0
to
C255

(Except Timer (set value) and Counter (set value))
Data register (D)
D0
to
D0999
RAM file register (D)
D1000
to
D7999
Special data register (D)
D8000
to
D8511
Timer (set value) (T)
T0
to
T511
Counter (set value) (C)
C0
to
C255
Timer (set value) (TS) *3 *5
TS0
to
TS511
Counter (set value) (CS) *4 *5
CS0
to
CS255
Extension register (R)
R0
to
R32767
Index register (V)
V0
to
V7
Index register (Z)
Z0
to
Z7
Decimal

(Except Timer contact and Counter contact)
Bit device word *2
*1
When executing the touch switch function that has been set during the bit specification of the word device, do not
*2
*3
Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed.
*4
For CS0 to CS199, only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed.
*5
Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode.
write any data to the word device through the sequence program.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
For CS200 to CS255, only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Word device bit *1
SPECIFICATIONS
Timer contact (T)
2
Decimal

2 - 179
ALARM
Bit device
Octal
COMMON SETTING
Setting range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device name
2 OMRON PLC (OMRON SYSMAC)
Bit device
Device name
Setting range
I/O relay/internal auxiliary relay
..000000
to
..614315
Data link relay (LR)
LR00000
to
LR19915
Auxiliary memory relay (AR)
AR00000
to
AR95915
Holding relay (HR)
HR00000
to
HR51115
Internal holding relay (WR)
WR00000
to
WR51115
*1*2
TIM0000
to
TIM4095
(CNT)*1*2
CNT0000
to
CNT4095
Timer contact (TIM)
Device No. notation
Decimal +
hexadecimal
Decimal
Counter contact

(except data link relay, auxiliary memory relay, holding relay
and internal holding relay.)
Word device
Word device bit
I/O relay / internal auxiliary relay
..0000
to
..6143
Data link relay (LR)
LR000
to
LR199
Auxiliary memory relay (AR)
AR000
to
AR959
Holding relay (HR)
HR000
to
HR511
Internal holding relay (WR)
WR000
to
WR511
Data memory (DM)
DM00000
to
DM32767
Timer (current value) (TIM)*5
TIM0000
to
TIM4095
CNT0000
to
CNT4095
EM00000
to
EM32767
E000000
to
E032767
EC00000
to
EC32767
Counter (current value) (CNT)*5

*3
Extension data memory (EM current bank)
Extension data memory (E0 to EC: 13 banks)*3*4
Decimal
*1
Writing is not allowed when using CV1000, CS1, and CJ1.
*2
When executing the touch switch function that has been set during the bit specification of the word device, do not
*3
Writing or reading the extension data memory using multiple banks is not allowed.
write to word device through the sequence program.

*4
The range from E0 to 2 is available when CJ1 is used.
*5
Timer (current value) and counter (current value) are valid within the rage of 0 to 999.
*6
COM1H-CPU61 cannot read from or write to this device.
(This applies to the 16 bit/32 bit device data.)
2 - 180

1
3 KEYENCE PLC (KEYENCE KV-700/1000)
Setting range
Relay (...)
..00000
to
..59915
Internal auxiliary relay (MR)
MR00000
to
MR99915
Latch relay (LR)
LR00000
to
LR99915
Control relay (CR)
CR0000
to
CR3915
Timer (contact) (T) *1 *2
T0000
to
T3999
Counter (contact) (C) *1 *2
C0000
to
C3999
High-speed counter comparator (contact) (CTC) *2
CTC0
to
CTC3
Device No. notation

OVERVIEW
Device name
2
SPECIFICATIONS
*3
Timer (current value) (TC) *2 *4
TC0000
to
TC3999
Timer (set value) (TS) *2 *4
TS0000
to
TS3999
CC0000
to
CC3999
Counter (set value) (CS) *2 *4
CS0000
to
CS3999
High-speed counter (current value) (CTH) *2 *4
CTH0
to
CTH1
CTC0
to
CTC3
Data memory (DM)
DM00000
to
DM65534
Extension data memory (EM)
EM00000
to
EM65534
Counter (current value) (CC)
*2 *4
High-speed counter comparator (set value) (CTC)
Decimal
FM00000
to
FM32766
Control memory (CM)
CM00000
to
CM11998
Temporary data memory (TM)
TM000
to
TM511
Index register (Z)
Z1
to
Z12
TRM0
to
TRM7
Digital trimmer (TRM)
*4 *5
Bit device word
Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode.
*2
Monitoring by GOT is possible only when a device is used in the sequence program.
*3
In writing, only resetting of a contact is possible.
*4
Only 32-bit (2-word) designation is possible.
*5
Only reading is possible.
LAMP, SWITCH
*1
Converting the above bit devices to words (except timer

(contact), counter (contact) and high-speed counter
comparator (contact))
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extension data memory 2 (FM)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
*2 *4
COMMON SETTING
Word device bit
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Specified bit of the following word devices (except timer

(current value), timer (set value), counter (current value),
counter (set value), high-speed counter (current value), highspeed counter comparator (set value), control memory,
temporary data memory, index register and digital trimmer)

2 - 181
ALARM
Bit device
Decimal
4 Sharp PLC (Sharp JW)
Word device
Bit device
Device name
I/O relay
..00000
..20000
to
to
..15777
..75777
Timer (Contact) (T)
T0000
to
T1777
Counter (Contact) (C)
C0000
to
C1777
Word device bit
Specified bit of the following word devices.
Timer (Current value) (T)
T0000
to
T1777
Counter (Current value) (C)
C0000
to
C1777
09000
to
09776
19000
to
19776
29000
to
29776
39000
to
39776
49000
to
49776
59000
to
59776
69000
to
69776
79000
to
79776
89000
to
89776
99000
to
99776
E0000
to
E0776
E1000
to
E1776
E2000
to
E2776
E3000
to
E3776
E4000
to
E4776
E5000
to
E5776
E6000
to
E6776
Device No. notation
Octal
Register (09 to E7)
File register (1 to 7)
2 - 182
Setting range
E7000
to
E7776
1000000
2000000
3000000
4000000
5000000
6000000
7000000
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
1177776
2177776
3177776
4177776
5177776
6177776
7177776

Octal
1
5 Toshiba PLC (Toshiba PROSEC T/V series)
X0000
to
X511F
External output (Y)
Y0000
to
Y511F
Internal relay (R)*1
R0000
to
R4095F
Special relay (S)*6
S0000
to
S511F
OVERVIEW
External input (X)
Device No. notation
Link register relay (Z)
Z0000
to
Z999F
Link relay (L)
L0000
to
L255F
Timer (Contact) (T)*1
T0
to
T999
Counter (Contact) (C)*1
C0
to
C511
Decimal
XW0
to
XW511
External output (YW)
YW0
to
YW511
Internal relay (RW)*5*7
RW0
to
RW4095
Special relay (SW)*7
SW0
to
SW511
Link relay (LW)
LW0
to
LW255
Timer (Current value) (T)*1
T0
to
T999
Counter (Current value) (C)*1
C0
to
C511
Data register (D)*3*5*7
D0
to
D8191
W0
to
W2047
F0
to
F32767
Link register (W)
File register (F)*6
COMMON SETTING
External input (XW)
4
Decimal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

(except external input, external output, internal relay, special
relay, link relay, timer and counter)
PROSEC T series
*1
Write of the timer (contact)/(current value), counter (contact)/(current value) is executed after having been read
*2
The bit specification of word device is executed after having been read by GOT. Therefore, please do not change
*3
When the mode switch on the CPU module has been set to "P-RUN", writing to D0000 through D4095 is
*4
Extension file register is not supported.
by GOT. Therefore, do not edit it in the sequence program during this period.
it in the sequence program during this period.
disabled.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Word device bit*2*6

2 - 183
ALARM
Bit device
Hexadecimal
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting range
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
PROSEC V series
*2
The bit specification of word device is executed after having been read by GOT. Therefore, do not change it in the
*5
RW0000 and D0000 indicate the same data register in the same region although they are shown in different
*6
For bit data, the conversion from Toshiba's address notation to address notation of GOT is shown as follows.
sequence program during this period.

notations.
Toshiba's address notation
*8
16=Word address (Quotient)...Bit address (Remainder)
Address notation used by GOT
Conversion
S8191
S511 F
(Decimal) (Hexadecimal)
8191
R65535
R4095 F
(Decimal) (Hexadecimal)
65535
16 = 511...15
16 = 4095...15
For word data, the conversion from Toshiba's address notation to address notation of GOT is shown as follows.
Data format
Address notation of GOT
16 bit data
DW10
D10
(Integer)
DD10
(Calculate the device No. in 32-bit unit)
D20
(Real number)
DF10
(Calculate the device No. in 32-bit unit)
D20
32 bit data
2 - 184

1
6 HITACHI PLC (HITACHI HIDIC H series)
Y05A95
Remote external input (X)
X10000
to
X49995
Remote external output (Y)
Y10000
to
Y49995
1st CPU link (L)
L0000
to
L3FFF
2nd CPU link (L1)
L10000
to
L13FFF
Data area (M)
M0000
to
M3FFF
On-delay timer (TD)*1
TD0
to
TD255
Single-shot timer (SS)*1
SS0
to
SS255
Watchdog timer (WDT)*1
WDT0
to
WDT255
Monostable timer (MS)*1
MS0
to
MS255
Retentive timer (TMR)*1
TMR0
to
TMR255
Up counter (CU)*1
CU0
to
CU511
Ring counter (RCU)*1
RCU0
to
RCU511
Up/Down counter (CT)*1
CT0
to
CT511
R0
to
R7BF
DIF0
to
DIF511
DFN0
to
DFN511
Hexadecimal +
Decimal
Hexadecimal
3
Decimal
Bit internal output (R)

Rising edge detection (DIF)
*1
4
Hexadecimal
Decimal
Falling edge detection
(DIF)*1

(except external input, external output,
remote external input, remote external output,
first CPU link, second CPU link and data area)
Word device bit
External input (WX)
WX0000
to
WX05A7
External output (WY)
WY0000
to
WY05A7
5
Hexadecimal +
Decimal
Remote external input (WX)
WX1000
to
WX4997
Remote external output (WY)
WY1000
to
WY4997
First CPU link (WL)
WL000
to
WL3FF
Second CPU link (WL1)
WL1000
to
WL13FF
WM000
to
WM3FF
TC0
to
TC511
Decimal
WR000
to
WR3FF
Hexadecimal
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value)
(TC)*1
Word internal output (WR)
*1
The same number cannot be used repeatedly.
*2
Do not set device outside the range.
Hexadecimal
If the set device is outside the range, the object set by the device within the range cannot be displayed.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Decimal
Data area (WM)

2 - 185
ALARM
Bit device
Decimal
OVERVIEW
X05A95
to
SPECIFICATIONS
to
Y00000
COMMON SETTING
X00000
External output (Y)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
External input (X)
Device No. notation
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting range
LAMP, SWITCH
Device name
7 Matsushita PLC (Matsushita MEWNET-FP series)*1

Device name
X0000
to
X511F
Output relay (Y)*3
Y0000
to
Y511F
Internal relay (R)
R0000
to
R886F
Special relay (R)*2
R9000
to
R910F
Link relay (L)*5
L0000
to
L639F
T0
to
T3071
C0
to
C3071
Input relay (X)
Bit device
Setting range
*2,*3
Timer contact (T)*2,*4
Device No. notation
Hexadecimal +
Decimal
Decimal
*2,*4
Counter contact (C)

(except input relay, output relay, internal relay,
special relay and link relay)
Word device
Bit device word
Input relay (WX)*2
WX000
to
WX511
Output relay (WY)
WY000
to
WY511
Internal replay (WR)
WR000
to
WR886
Special relay (WR)
WR900
to
WR910
WL000
to
WL639
EV0
to
EV3071
Timer/Counter (Set value) (SV)*4
SV0
to
SV3071
Data register (DT)
DT0
to
DT10233
Special data register (DT)
DT0
DT90000
to
to
DT32764
DT90511
Link register (LD)*5
LD0
to
LD8447
File register (FL)*5*6
FL0
to
FL32764
Link relay (WL)

Timer/Counter (Elapsed value)
(EV)*4
Decimal
*1
The above device range is for the case where FP10SH is used.
*2
Writing to device is not allowed.
For Fp0, FP1, FP2, FP3, FP5, FP-10(S), or FP-M, device ranges are different in individual CPUs.
*3
Only those devices that have been assigned to I/O contacts by peripheral software can be used.
*4
The device points of the timer and counter differs depending on the head numbers of the counter set by the value
*5
This device does not exist in FP0, FP1, and FP-M.
*6
When FP2SH is used, one bank of "32765
of the system register (No. 5).
2 - 186
3 banks" can be monitored.

1
8 Yaskawa PLC
Setting range
O63424
Input relay (I)
I1
to
I63424
D1
to
D2048
D10001
D20001
to
to
D12048
D22048
Link coil (D)
Word device bit

Input register
Decimal
(Z)*1
Z1
to
Z31840
W1
to
W28291
SW1
to
SW28291
R1
to
R2048
R10001
R20001
to
to
R12048
R22048
SR1
to
SR2048
SR10001
SR20001
to
to
SR12048
SR22048
K1
to
K4096
3
Decimal
*4
Link register (R, SR)
Converting the above bit devices to word devices

(Except Coil and Input relay)
*1
Change the input register "30001 to 30512" to "Z1 to Z512" for setting. (When set in default)
*2
Change the holding register "40001 to 49999" to "W1 to W9999" for setting. (When set in default)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit device word
*3
Change the constant register "31001 to 35096" to "K1 to K4096" for setting. (When set in default)
*4
SR and SW indicate registers (virtual register) compatible to the data format where internal data of PLC is
displayed using R or W.
The following shows the difference between the display values of SR, SW and those of R, W corresponding to
the values of PLC internal data.
*5
SR, SW
R,W
9999
9999
9999
1001
1001
1001
1000
1000
1000
999
999
999
-1
-1
32769
-999
-999
33767
-1000
-1000
33768
-1001
-1001
33769
-9999
-9999
42767
6
LAMP, SWITCH
PLC internal data (16 bit)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Holding register (W)*2*4
Constant register (K)*3
2
SPECIFICATIONS
to
COMMON SETTING
O1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Coil (0)*1
Device No. notation
The internal coil N1 to N1536 can be set as O513 to O2048.

However, setting must not exceed O1 to O512 and O513 to O2048.

2 - 187
ALARM
Bit device
Device name
OVERVIEW
(1) Yaskawa GL/PROG1C8
(2) Yaskawa CP-9200SH/MP-900 series
Bit device
Device name
Device No. notation
Coil (MB)*1
MB000000
to
MB32767F
Decimal +
hexadecimal
Input relay (IB)
IB0000
to
IBFFFF
Hexadecimal
Specified bit of the following bit device

(except coil and input relay)
Bit of word device
Word device
Setting range
Input register (IW)
IW0000
to
IW7FFF
Holding register (MW)
MW0
to
MW32767
Decimal
Coid (MB)
MB0
to
MB32767
Decimal
IB000
to
IBFFF
Input relay (IB)
*1
Hexadecimal
Hexadecimal
MB40960 to MB32767F is available for MP-940 only.
(3) Yaskawa CP-9200 (H)
Bit device
Device name
Available setting range
Coil (OB)*3
OB000
to
OB7FF
Input relay (IB)*3
IB000
to
IB7FF
Word device bit
Input register (IW)
IW00
to
IW7F
Output register (OW)
OW00
to
OW7F
DW0
to
DW2047
ZD0
to
ZD2047
MW0
to
MW7694
Device No. notation
Hexadecimal
Word device
Hexadecimal
Data register (DW, ZD)*1

Common register
(MW)*2
Bit device word
Decimal
*1
Setting is available only when CP-9200 is used.
*2
To use data registers of CPU #1 during operation of CP-9200, copy them to MW0 to 7694.
*3
During operation of CP-9200H, specify the reference No. and quantities so that they do not cover both OB*** and
IB***.
(4) Yaskawa CP-9300MS (MC compatible)
Bit device
Device name
Available setting range
Coil (OB)
OB0
to
OB1023
Input relay (IB)
IB0
to
IB1023
Word device bit
Input register (IW)
W0
to
IW7F
Output register (OW)
OW0
to
OW7F
DW0
to
DW2047
ZD0
to
ZD2047
MW0
to
MW7694
Device No. notation
Hexadecimal
Word device
Hexadecimal
Data register (DW, ZD)

Common register (MW)
Bit device word
2 - 188

Decimal
1
9 Yokogawa PLC (FA500, FA-M3 Series)
to
X71664
Y00201
to
Y71664
Intermal relay (I)
I1
to
I65535
Link relay (L)
L1
to
L71024
Common relay (E)
E1
to
E4096
*1
Special relay (M)
M1
to
M9984
Timer (TU)*1
TU1
to
TU3072
Counter (CU)*1
CU1
to
CU3072
OVERVIEW
X00201
Output relay (Y)
Device No. notation
2
Decimal
TP3072
Timer (TS)*2
TS1
to
TS3072
Counter (CP)
CP1
to
CP3072
Counter (CS)*2
CS1
to
CS3072
File register (B)
B1
to
B262144
Data register (DT)
D1
to
D8192
Common register (R)
R1
to
R4096
Index register (R)
V1
to
V256
W1
to
W71024
Z1
to
Z512
Special register (Z)

Bit device word
*1 *2
4
Decimal

(Except Timers, Counter)
*1
Monitoring cannot be done in the continuous device designation mode.
*2
Writing cannot be done in the continuous device designation mode.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(W)*2
COMMON SETTING
to
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
TP1
Link register
Specified bit of the following word device

(Except Timers, Counter)
Timer (TP)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input relay (X)
Word device bit
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Setting range

2 - 189
ALARM
Bit device
Device name
10 Allen-Bradley PLC
(1) AB SLC500 series
Word device
Bit device
Device name
Setting range
Bit (B)
B3:0/0
B10:0/0
to
to
B3:255/15
B255:255/15
Timer (Timing bit) (T)*3
T4:0/14(TT)
T10:0/14(TT)
to
to
T4:255/14(TT)
T255:255/14(TT)
Timer (Completion bit) (T)*3
T4:0/13(DN)
T10:0/13(DN)
to
to
T4:255/13(DN)
T255:255/13(DN)
Counter (Up counter) (C)*3
C5:0/15(CU)
C10:0/15(CU)
to
to
C5:255/15(CU)
C255:255/15(CU)
Counter (Down counter) (C)*3
C5:0/14(CD)
C10:0/14(CD)
to
to
C5:255/14(CD)
C255:255/14(CD)
Counter (Completion bit) (C)
C5:0/13(DN)
C10:0/13(DN)
to
to
C5:255/13(DN)
C255:255/13(DN)
Integer (N)
N7:0
N10:0
to
to
N7:255
N255:255
Bit (B)
B3:0
B10:0
to
to
B3:255
B255:255
Timer (Set value) (T)*1 *3
T4:0.1(PRE)
T10:0.1(PRE)
to
to
T4:255.1(PRE)
T255:255.1(PRE)
Timer (Current value) (T)*1 *3
T4:0.2(ACC)
T10:0.2(ACC)
to
to
T4:255.2(ACC)
T255:255.2(ACC)
Counter (Set value) (C)*1 *3
C5:0.1(PRE)
C10:0.1(PRE)
to
to
C5:255.1(PRE)
C255:255.1(PRE)
Counter (Current value) (C)*1 *3
C5:0.2(ACC)
C10:0.2(ACC)
to
to
C5:255.2(ACC)
C255:255.2(ACC)
Integer (N)*1
N7:0
N10:0
to
to
N7:255
N255:255
Device No. notation
Decimal
Decimal
*1
Writing on the device is not allowed for 32-bit data.
*2
Do not set the device outside the range.
*3
Monitoring or writing cannot be done in the continuous device designation mode.
2 - 190

(2) AB Micrologix1000/1200/1500 series
Timer (Timing bit) (T)
T3:0/14(TT)
to
T255:255/14(TT)
Timer (Completion bit) (T)*3
T3:0/13(DN)
to
T255:255/13(DN)
Counter (Up counter) (C)*3
C3:0/15(CU)
to
C255:255/15(CU)
Counter (Down counter) (C)*3
C3:0/14(CD)
to
C255:255/14(CD)
*3
C3:0/13(DN)
to
C255:255/13(DN)
N3:0/0
to
N255:255/15
B3:0
to
B255:255
T3:0.1(PRE)
to
T255:255.1(PRE)
T3:0.2(ACC)
to
T255:255.2(ACC)
Counter (Set value) (C)*1 *3
C3:0.1(PRE)
to
C255:255.1(PRE)
Counter (Current value) (C)*1 *3
C3:0.2(ACC)
to
C255:255.2(ACC)
Integer (N)*1
N3:0
to
N255:255
32bit integer(L)*2
L3:0
L255:0
to
to
N3:255
N255:255
Integer (N)
Bit (B)
Timer (Current value)
(T)*1 *3
*1
Writing on the device is not allowed for 32 bit data.
*2
Writing on the device is not allowed for 16 bit data.
*3
Do not set device outside the range.
*4
3
Decimal
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Word device
Timer (Set value)
(T)*1 *3
Decimal
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit device
Counter (Completion bit) (C)
OVERVIEW
B255:255/15
SPECIFICATIONS
to
COMMON SETTING
B3:0/0
*3
Device No. notation

2 - 191
ALARM
Bit (B)
Setting range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device name
11 SIEMENS PLC
(1) SIEMENS S7-300/400 series
Setting range
Device No. notation
Input relay (I)
I0000
to
I5117
Output relay (Q)
Q0000
to
Q5117
Bit memory (M)
M00000
to
M20477
Word device bit

(except input relay, output relay,
bit memory, timer and counter)
Input relay (IW)
IW000
to
IW510
Output relay (QW)
QW000
to
QW510
Bit memory (MW)
MW0000
to
MW2046
Timer (Current value) (T)*1
T0
to
T511
Counter (Current value) (C)
C0
to
C511
D000100000
to
D000165534
D000200000
to
D000265534
D000300000
to
D000365534
Word device
Bit device
Device name
Decimal
Data register (D)
*1
Decimal
D409400000
to
D409465534
D409500000
to
D409565534
(2) SIEMENS S7-200 series

Device name
Bit device
Word device
Device No. notation
variable memory(V)
V0
to
V51197
Input relay(I)
I0
to
I77
Q0
to
Q77
Output relay(Q)
*3
Bit Memory(M)
M0
to
M317
special memory(SM)
SM0
to
SM1947
Timer(T)
T0
to
T255
Counter(C)
C0
to
C255
Decimal
sequence control relay(S)
S0
to
S317
variable memory(VW)
VW0
to
VW5118
Input relay(IW)
IW0
to
IW6
Output relay(QW)
QW0
to
QW6
analog input(AIW)
AIW0
to
AIW30
analog output(AQW)
AQW0
to
AQW30
Bit memory(MW)
MW0
to
MW30
special memory(SMW)
SMW0
to
SMW192
Timer(T)*4
T0
to
T255
C0
to
C255
HC0
to
HC2
SW
to
SW30
Counter(CW)*4
High-speed
counter(HC)*2
sequence control relay(SW)
2 - 192
Setting range

Decimal
Intermal relay (I)
M0
to
M2047
Special relay (SM)
SM0
to
SM63
Latch relay (L)
L0
to
L2047
Specified bit of the following word device
Data register (D)
D0
to
D4095
Link special registe (SD)
SD0
to
SD15
File register (R)
R0
to
R4095
Bit device word
Decimal
The host is not allowed to write to/read from the GB and GD
13 OMRON temperature controller (OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO)

Setting range
Device No. notation
Status (S) *1
S0000
S0100
To
To
S0031
S0131
Decimal
Operation command (A) *2
A0000
To
A000C
Hexadecimal
Variable area 0 (C0) *1 *3
C00000
C00100
To
To
C00006
C00106
Variable area 1 (C1) *3
C10000
C10100
To
To
C1001C
C1011C
Variable area 3 (C3) *3
C30000
C30100
To
To
C3003E
C3013E
*2
Only writing is possible.
*3
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*1
Decimal +
Hexadecimal
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Bit device
Device name
COMMON SETTING
*1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Word device bit

Word device
Device No. notation
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting range

2 - 193
ALARM
Bit device
Device name
OVERVIEW
12 Microcomputer connection
Setting range
Device No. notation
Bit device
Word device bit
Word device
14 YAMATAKE temperature controller (YAMATAKE SDC/DMC series)

Device name
Data (..) *1
..273
*1
To
..31243
Decimal
Device No. notation
Bit device
Device name
2 - 194
Setting range
Word device bit
Word device
15 RKC temperature controller (RKC SR Mini HG)
Data (..)
..0000

To
..1DEE
Hexadecimal
1
Inverter data
For details of parameters, etc., refer to the following manual.
Manual of the inverter being used
Word device
Setting range
Inverter status monitor (RS) *3
RS0:0
RS0:100
To
To
RS7:31
RS7:115
Run command (WS) *4
WS0:0
WS0:0
To
To
WS7:31
WS7:115
Alarm definition (A) *2 *3
A0:0
A0:100
To
To
A7:31
A7:115
Parameter (Pr) *1 *2
Pr0:0
Pr0:100
To
To
Pr993:31
Pr993:115
Programmed operation (PG) *1 *2
PG0:0
PG0:100
To
To
PG89:31
PG89:115
Special parameter (SP) *2
SP108:0
SP108:100
To
To
SP127:31
SP127:115
Device No. notation
Decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
Bit device
Device name
3
Decimal
*1
When creating the screen, designate only either of programmed operation (PG) device or parameter (Pr) device.
*2
COMMON SETTING
Remark
OVERVIEW
16 Inverter (FREQROL 500/700 series)
*4
Only writing is possible.
The following shows correspondences between virtual inverter devices used in the GOT and data of the
inverter.
Description
RS0
Inverter running (RUN)
RS1
Forward rotation (STF)
RS2
Reverse rotation (STR)
RS3
Up to frequency (SU)
RS4
Overload (OL)
RS5
Instantaneous power failure (IPF) *1
RS6
Frequency detection (FU)
RS7
Alarm occurrence
Can be used only for FREQROL-A500/A700/F700 series.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*1
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Device name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Inverter status monitor

2 - 195
ALARM
*3
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Do no designate both PG (PG0 to PG89) and Pr (Pr900 to Pr905) devices.
(2) Run command

Device name
Description
*2
WS0
Current input selection (AU)
WS1
Forward rotation (STF)
WS2
Reverse rotation (STR)
WS3
Low speed operation (RL) *1

(Current input selection (AU) for FREQROL-F500 series)
WS4
Middle speed operation (RM) *1
WS5
High speed operation (RH) *1
WS6
Second function selection (RT) *2
WS7
Output stop (MRS) *2
*1
Cannot be used for FREQROL-A500/E500 series.
*2
Can be used only for FREQROL-A700/F700 series.
(3) Alarm definition

Device name
Description
A0
Second alarm in past
A1
Latest alarm
A2
Fourth alarm in past
A3
Third alarm in past
A4
Sixth alarm in past
A5
Fifth alarm in past
A6
Eighth alarm in past
A7
Seventh alarm in past
*1
Only reading is possible for A0 to A7.

These devices cannot be used for a write object (numerical input etc.).
2 - 196

(1) Monitoring Pr.37

GOT cannot monitor the parameter (Pr.37) of FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J.
(2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr)
"8888" and "9999" designate special function.
To set these numbers from GOT, designate a number as shown below.
Value to be set at GOT
8888
65520
9999
65535
Description
H00
Offset / gain
H01
Analog
H02
Analog value at terminal
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(3) Precautions for setting calibration parameter (Pr900 to Pr905)

When setting a calibration parameter (Pr900 to Pr905), it is necessary to set the
value below for extension second parameter (SP108), depending on the device
number to be used and the inverter model.
Value to be set to extension second parameter (SP108)
COMMON SETTING
Setting at inverter
OVERVIEW
Manual of the inverter being used
SPECIFICATIONS
(4) Parameters
The numbers of virtual devices for inverter (parameter (Pr)), used by GOT, correspond to the
inverter parameter numbers.
For the inverter parameters, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 197
ALARM
(5) Program operation

The devices below correspond to the parameters (Pr.201 to Pr.230) of FREQROL-A500 series.
Device name
Description
PG0
To
PG9
Program set 1 (running frequency)
PG10
To
PG19*1
Program set 1 (time)
PG20
To
PG29
Program set 1 (rotation direction)
PG30
To
PG39
PG40
To
PG49
PG50
To
PG59
PG60
To
PG69
PG70
PG80
*1
To
PG79
To
PG89

*1

*1

To set the start time (PG10 to PG19, PG40 to PG49, PG70 to PG79), set hour or minute in the upper 8 bits, and
minute or second in the lower 8 bits.
Example) To set 13 hour 35 minute
Time to be set
13 H
35 M
Convert "hour" and "minute" into hexadecimal.
H0D
H23
Combine upper and lower 8-bit values.
Input H0D23 or 3363.
Remark
HEX
-
(6) Special parameters

Command code
Device name
Description
Read
Write
Second parameter changing
6CH
ECH
Set frequency (RAM)
6DH
EDH
Set frequency (RAM, E2PROM)
6EH
EEH
SP111*1
Output frequency
6FH
SP112
Output current
70H
SP113
Output voltage
71H
SP114
Special monitor
72H
SP115
Special monitor selection No.
73H
F3H
F4H
SP108
SP109
*1
SP110*1
Alarm definition all clear

SP116
Latest alarm, second alarm in past
74H
Third alarm in past, fourth alarm in past
75H
SP118
Fifth alarm in past, sixth alarm in past
76H
SP119
Seventh alarm in past, eights alarm in past
77H
79H
F9H
7AH
FAH
SP117
Inverter status monitor (extended)

SP121
Run command (extend)
Inverter status monitor
SP122
Run command
SP123
Communication mode
SP124
All parameter clear
SP125
Inverter reset
SP127
Link parameter extended setting
7BH
FBH
FCH
FDH
7FH
FFH
*1 GOT cannot monitor SP109 to SP111 if the conditions below are satisfied at the same time.
(Only FREQROL-E500/F500J/S500(E) series)
Pr37 = 0
SP127 = 1
2 - 198

Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully understand
the operating procedures before monitoring.
Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause
some machines to perform unexpected operation.
The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be
insatiable.
(2) Parameters with * in front of it's abbreviated name
When the 16-bit data is handled as 32-bit data, the upper 16 bits are
displayed as 0.
When the 32-bit data is handled as 16-bit data, the lower 16 bits only are
displayed as 0.
(b) Writing
The GOT writes within the range of data length set. Note that the servo
amplifier responds correctly while the written data is invalid in the servo
amplifier side when the written data is outside the range of values which can
be set by the servo amplifier.
(4) Memory area for writing parameters
Parameters are written to RAM area of servo amplifier.
Remember that written parameters are cleared when turning off the power supply
to the servo amplifier.
Data of servo amplifier
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
If the above data length was not set, data would not be set to the servo amplifier
correctly or the GOT can not monitor normally.
(a) Monitoring
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Set the following data length for setting devices.

PRM, ST, AL : 16 bits or 32 bits (depends on the data of servo amplifier)
DI, DO
: 32 bits
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(3) Data length for setting virtual devices for servo amplifier
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Refer to the following manual for parameters.

Manual of the servo amplifier used

2 - 199
ALARM
Remark
3
COMMON SETTING
For the parameter with * in front of it's abbreviated name, powering off the servo
amplifier after setting then on makes the parameter valid.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Monitoring servo amplifier
OVERVIEW
17 Servo amplifier
(1) MELSERVO-J2M-P8A
Word device
Bit device
Device name
Setting range available
Servo amplifier request(SP)
SP1
to
Basic parameter/expansion parameter(PRM)
PRM0
to
PRM29
Status display (ST)
ST0
to
ST2
Alarm(AL)
AL0
AL11
AL200
AL210
AL230
to
to
to
to
AL13
AL205
AL215
AL235
External input(DI)
DI0
to
DI2
External output(DO)
DO0
to
DO1
Device No. notation
SP2
Decimal
The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the servo
amplifier used with the GOT.
(a) Servo amplifier request
Device name
Item
Symbol
SP1
Current alarm clear
SP2
Alarm history clear
(b) Basic parameter/expansion parameter

Device name
Item
Symbol
Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear
*BPS
PRM1
Regenerative brake option selection
*REG
PRM2
Function selection 1
*OP1
PRM3
Analog monitor 1 output
MD1
PRM4
MD2
PRM5
MD3
PRM6
Analog monitor 1 offset
MO1
PRM7
MO2
PRM8
MO3
PRM9
*OP2
PRM10
Interface unit serial communication number selection
*ISN
PRM11
1slot serial communication station number selection
*DSN1
PRM12
*DSM2
PRM13
*DSM3
PRM14
*DSN4
PRM15
*DSN5
PRM16
*DSN6
PRM17
*DSN7
PRM18
*DSN8
PRM19
Parameter write inhibit
PRM20
Serial communication time-out selection
PRM21 to PRM29
For manufacturer setting
PRM0
2 - 200

*BLK
SIC
-
(c) Status display

Item
Symbol
Regenerative load ratio
ST1
Bus voltage
ST2
Peak bus voltage
OVERVIEW
Device name
ST0
Symbol
Current alarm number
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load factor
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage
AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs peak bus voltage
AL200
Alarm number from alarm history most recent alarm
AL201
Alarm number from alarm history first alarm in past
AL202
Alarm number from alarm history second alarm in past
AL203
Alarm number from alarm history third alarm in past
AL204
Alarm number from alarm history fourth alarm in past
AL205
Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past
AL210
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm
AL211
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past
AL212
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past
AL213
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past
AL214
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past
AL215
Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past
AL230
Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm
AL231
Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past
AL232
Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past
AL233
Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past
AL234
Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past
AL235
Detailed alarm from alarm history fifth alarm in past
3
COMMON SETTING
AL0
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
SPECIFICATIONS
(d) Alarm
6
Symbol
DI0
External input pin statuses CN1A/CN1B
DI1
External input pin statuses CN5
DI2
External input pin statuses CN4A/CN4B
DO0
External output pin statuses CN1A/CN1B
DO1
External output pin statuses CN4A/CN4B
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Item

2 - 201
ALARM
Device name
LAMP, SWITCH
(e) External I/O signal
(2)
MELSERVO-J2M- * DU
Word device
Bit device
Device name
Setting range
Servo amplifier request (SP)
SP0
to
SP6
Basic parameter/expansion parameter (PRM)
PRM0
to
PRM84
Status display (ST)
ST0
to
ST10
Alarm (AL)
AL0
AL11
AL200
AL210
AL230
to
to
to
to
AL21
AL205
AL215
AL235
Device No. notation
Decimal
The following shows correspondences between virtual devices for servo amplifier and data of the
servo amplifier used with the GOT.
Device name
Item
Symbol
SP0
Status display data clear
SP1
Current alarm clear
SP2
Alarm history clear
SP3
External input signal prohibited
SP4
External output signal prohibited
SP5
External input signal resumed
SP6
External output signal resumed

Device name
Item
Symbol
PRM0
PRM1
*OP1
PRM2
Auto tuning
ATU
PRM3
CMX Electronic gear numerator (Command pulse multiplying

factor numerator)
CMX
PRM4
Electronic gear denominator (Command pulse multiplying

factor denominator)
CDV
PRM5
In-position range
INP
PRM6
Position loop gain 1
PG1
PRM7
Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant

(position smoothing)
PST
PRM8 to PRM15
PRM16
Alarm history clear
*BPS
PRM17 to PRM18
PRM19
DRU parameter block
*BLK
PRM20
*OP2
PRM21
Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection)
*OP3
PRM22
*OP4
PRM23
Feed forward gain
FFC
PRM24
Zero speed
ZSP
PRM25 to PRM26
(Continued next page)

2 - 202

*ENR
Internal torque limit 1
PRM29 to PRM32
TL1
PRM33
Electromagnetic brake sequence output
MBR
PRM34
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
GD2
PRM35
PG2
PRM36
Speed loop gain 1
VG1
PRM37
Speed loop gain 2
VG2
PRM38
Speed integral compensation
VIC
PRM39
Speed differential compensation
VDC
PRM40 to PRM41
PRM42
Input signal selection 1
PRM43 to PRM50
PRM51
PRM52 to PRM53
PRM54
*OP9
PRM55
Function selection A
*OPA
PRM56 to PRM57
PRM58
Machine resonance suppression filter 1
NH1
PRM59
NH2
PRM60
Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control
LPF
OVERVIEW
PRM28
SPECIFICATIONS
*OP6
-
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2
GD2B
PRM62
Position control gain 2 changing ratio
PG2B
PRM63
Speed control gain 2 changing ratio
VG2B
PRM64
Speed integral compensation changing ratio
VICB
PRM65
Gain changing selection
*CDP
PRM66
Gain changing condition
CDS
PRM67
Gain changing time constant
CDT
PRM68
PRM69
Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2
CMX2
PRM70
CMX3
PRM71
CMX4
PRM72 to PRM75
6
LAMP, SWITCH
PRM77 to PRM84
COMMON SETTING
*DI1
PRM61
PRM76
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Encoder output pulses
Symbol
TL2
-
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

2 - 203
ALARM
PRM27
Item
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
(c) Status display

Device name
Item
Symbol
ST0
Cumulative feedback pulses
ST1
Servo motor speed
ST2
Droop pulses
ST3
Cumulative command pulses
ST4
Command pulse frequency
ST5
Effective load ratio
ST6
Peak load ratio
ST7
Instantaneous torque
ST8
Within one-revolution position
ST9
ABS counter
ST10
Load inertia moment ratio
(d) Alarm
Device name
2 - 204
Item
Symbol
AL0
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs servo motor speed
AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses
AL14
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses
AL15
Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency
AL16
Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio
AL17
Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio
AL18
Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque
AL19
Servo status when alarm occurs within one-revolution position
AL20
Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter
AL21
Servo status when alarm occurs load inertia moment ratio
AL200
AL201
AL202
AL203
AL204
AL205
AL210
AL211
AL212
AL213
AL214
AL215
AL230
AL231
AL232
AL233
AL234
AL235

(3) MELSERVO-J2S- * A
SP0
to
SP6
PRM0
to
PRM84
Status display (ST)
ST0
to
ST14
Alarm (AL)
AL0
AL11
AL200
AL210
AL230
to
to
to
to
to
AL1
AL25
AL205
AL215
AL235
External input (DI)
DI0
External output (DO)
DO0
2
Decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
Device No. notation

OVERVIEW
Setting range

Same as the servo amplifier request of MELSERVO-J2M-*DU.(
amplifier request in this section)
(2)(a) Servo
Symbol
PRM0
Control mode, regenerative brake option selection
*STY
PRM1
*OP1
PRM2
Auto tuning
ATU
PRM3
Electronic gear numerator
CMX
PRM4
Electronic gear denominator
CDV
PRM5
In-position range
INP
PRM6
PG1
PRM7
PST
PRM8
Internal speed command1/limit1
SC1
PRM9
SC2
PRM10
SC3
PRM11
Acceleration time constant
STA
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
PRM12
Deceleration time constant
STB
PRM13
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant
STC
PRM14
Torque command time constant
TQC
PRM15
*SNO
PRM16
*BPS
PRM17
Analog monitor output
MOD
PRM18
Status display selection
*DMD
PRM19
Parameter block
*BLK
PRM20
*OP2
PRM21
Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection)
*OP3
PRM22
*OP4
PRM23
Feed forward gain
FFC
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Item
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Device name
COMMON SETTING

2 - 205
ALARM
Word device
Bit device
Device name
Device name
Item
Symbol
PRM24
Zero speed
ZSP
PRM25
Analog speed command maximum speed/limit maximum

speed
VCM
PRM26
Analog torque command maximum output
TLC
PRM27
PRM28
TL1
PRM29
Analog speed command offset/limit offset
VCO
PRM30
Analog torque command offset/limit offset
TLO
PRM31
MO1
PRM32
MO2
PRM33
MBR
PRM34
GD2
PRM35
PG2
PRM36
Speed loop gain 1
VG1
PRM37
Speed loop gain 2
VG2
PRM38
VIC
PRM39
VDC
PRM40
PRM41
Input signal automatic ON selection
*DIA
PRM42
Input signal selection 1
*DI1
PRM43
Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5)
*DI2
PRM44
*DI3
PRM45
Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8)
*DI4
PRM46
*DI5
PRM47
*DI6
PRM48
*DI7
PRM49
Output signal selection 1
*DO1
PRM50
PRM51
PRM52
PRM53
*OP8
PRM54
*OP9
PRM55
*OPA
PRM56
PRM57
PRM58
NH1
PRM59
NH2
PRM60
Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control
LPF
PRM61
GD2B
PRM62
PG2B
PRM63
VG2B
PRM64
VICB
PRM65
*CDP
PRM66
CDS
PRM67
CDT
*ENR
*OP6
-
SIC
-

2 - 206

Item
Symbol
PRM68
PRM69
CMX2
PRM70
CMX3
PRM71
CMX4
PRM72
SC4
PRM73
SC5
PRM74
SC6
PRM75
SC7
PRM76
TL2
PRM77 to PRM84
OVERVIEW
Device name
SPECIFICATIONS
(c) Status display
ST0
ST1
Servo motor speed
ST2
Droop pulses
ST3
Cumulative command pulses
ST4
Command pulse frequency
ST5
Analog speed command voltage/limit voltage
ST6
Analog torque command voltage/limit voltage
ST7
ST8
ST9
Peak load ratio
ST10
ST11
ST12
ABS counter
ST13
ST14
Bus voltage
COMMON SETTING
Symbol
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
(d) Alarm
6
Symbol
AL0
AL1
Detailed data of current alarms
AL11
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs servo monitor speed
AL13
AL14
Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses
AL15
Servo status when alarm occurs command pulse frequency
AL16
Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command

voltage/limit voltage
AL17
Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command

voltage/limit voltage
AL18
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio
AL19
AL20
LAMP, SWITCH
Item
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name

2 - 207
ALARM
Device name
Item
Symbol
AL21
AL22
Servo status when alarm occurs within one-revolution

position
AL23
Load inertia moment ratio ABS counter
AL24
AL25
AL200
AL201
AL202
AL203
AL204
AL205
AL210
AL211
AL212
AL213
AL214
AL215
AL230
AL231
AL232
AL233
AL234
AL235

Device name
2 - 208
Item
Symbol
DI0
External input pin statuses
DO0
External output pin statuses

MELSERVO-J2S- * CP
PRM0
to
PRM90
Status display (ST)
ST0
to
ST16
Alarm (AL)
AL0
AL11
AL200
AL210
AL230
to
to
to
to
to
AL1
AL27
AL205
AL215
AL235
External input (DI)
DI0
to
DI2
DO0
to
DO1
2
Decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
SP6
Same as the servo amplifier request of MELSERVO-J2M-*DU. (
amplifier request)
(2)(a) Servo

Device name
COMMON SETTING
to
Item
Symbol
PRM0
Command system/regenerative brake option selection
*STY
PRM1
Feeding function selection
*FTY
PRM2
*OP1
PRM3
Auto tuning
ATU
PRM4
Electronic gear numerator
CMX
PRM5
Electronic gear denominator
CDV
PRM6
In-position range
INP
PRM7
PG1
PRM8
Home position return type
*ZTY
PRM9
Home position return speed
ZRF
PRM10
Creep speed
CRF
PRM11
Home position shift distance
ZST
PRM12
Rough match output range
CRP
PRM13
Jog speed
JOG
PRM14
*STC
PRM15
*SNO
PRM16
*BPS
PRM17
Analog monitor output
MOD
PRM18
*DMD
PRM19
Parameter block
*BLK
PRM20
*OP2
PRM21
PRM22
PRM23
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
SP0
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*OP4
LAMP, SWITCH
Device No. notation

OVERVIEW
Setting range
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device
Bit device
Device name
SIC

2 - 209
ALARM
(4)
Device name
PRM24
Item
Symbol
Feed forward gain
FFC
PRM25
Override offset
VCO
PRM26
Torque limit offset
TLO
PRM27
*ENR
PRM28
PRM29
PRM30
Backlash compensation
*BKC
PRM31
MO1
PRM32
MO2
PRM33
MBR
PRM34
Ration of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
GD2
PRM35
Position control gain 2
PG2
PRM36
Speed control gain 1
VG1
PRM37
Speed control gain 2
VG2
PRM38
VIC
PRM39
VDC
PRM40 to PRM41
TL1
TL2
PRM42
Home position return position data
*ZPS
PRM43
Moving distance after proximity dog
DCT
PRM44
Stopper type home position return stopper time
ZTM
PRM45
Stopper type home position return torque limit value
ZTT
PRM46
Software limit +
*LMP
Software limit -
*LMN
Position range output address +
*LPP
Position range output address -
*LNP
PRM47
PRM48
PRM49
PRM50
PRM51
PRM52
PRM53
PRM54
PRM55
PRM56
PRM57
PRM58
*OP9
PRM59
*OPA
PRM60
PRM61
NH1
PRM62
NH2
PRM63
Low-pass filter/adaptive vibration suppression control
LPF
PRM64
GD2B
PRM65
PG2B
PRM66
VG2B
PRM67
VICB
PRM68
*CDP
PRM69
CDS
*OP6
*OP8

2 - 210

Device name
Item
PRM70
PRM71 to PRM90
Symbol
CDT
OVERVIEW
(c) Status display
ST0
Current position
ST1
Command position
ST2
Command remaining distance
ST3
Point table No.
ST4
ST5
Servo motor speed
ST6
Droop pulses
ST7
Override
ST8
Torque limit voltage
ST9
ST10
ST11
Peak load ratio
ST12
ST13
ST14
ABS counter
ST15
ST16
Bus voltage
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Device name
3
COMMON SETTING
Item
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device name
(d) Alarm
Symbol
-
AL1
Detailed data of current alarms
AL11
Servo status when alarm occurs current position
AL12
Servo status when alarm occurs command position
AL13
Servo status when alarm occurs command remaining distance
AL14
Servo status when alarm occurs point table No.
AL15
AL16
Servo status when alarm occurs servo motor speed
AL17
AL18
Servo status when alarm occurs override
AL19
Servo status when alarm occurs torque limit voltage
AL20
Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio
AL21
AL22
AL23
AL24
Servo status when alarm occurs within one-revolution position
AL25
Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter
AL26
AL27
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Item
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name
AL0
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

2 - 211
ALARM
Device name
Item
Symbol
AL200
AL201
AL202
AL203
AL204
AL205
AL210
AL211
AL212
AL213
AL214
AL215
AL230
AL231
AL232
AL233
AL234
AL235

Device name
2 - 212
Item
Symbol
DI0
Input device statuses
DI1
DI2
Statuses of input devices switched on through

communication
DO0
Output device statuses
DO1

(5) MELSERVO-J3-*A
SP6
Basic setting parameter (PA)
PA1
to
PA19
Gain filter parameter (PB)
PB1
to
PB45
Extension setting parameter (PC)
PC1
to
PC50
I/O setting parameter (PD)
PD1
to
PD30
Status display (ST)
ST0
to
ST14
Alarm (AL)
AL0
AL11
AL200
AL210
AL230
to
to
to
to
to
AL1
AL25
AL205
AL215
AL235
External input (DI)
DI0
to
DI2
DO0
to
DO1
Decimal
Decimal
Same as the servo amplifier request of MELSERVO-J2M-*DU. (
Servo amplifier request)
This section
(2)(a)
(b) Basic setting parameter

Item
Symbol
PA1
Control mode
*STY
PA2
Regenerative brake option
*REG
PA3
Absolute position detection system
*ABS
PA4
Function selection A-1
PA5
Number of command input pulses per revolution
*FBP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device name
OVERVIEW
to
SPECIFICATIONS
SP0
Device No. notation
COMMON SETTING
Word device
Setting range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit device
Device name
PA6
Electronic gear numerator (command pulse multiplying factor

numerator)
CMX
PA7
Electronic gear denominator (command pulse multiplying

factor denominator)
CDV
PA8
Auto tuning mode
ATU
PA9
Auto tuning response
RSP
PA10
In-position range
INP
PA11
Forward torque limit
TLP
PA12
Reverses torque limit
PA13
Command pulse input form
*PLSS
PA14
Rotation direction selection
*POL
PA15
*ENR
PA16 to PA18
PA19
Parameter block
LAMP, SWITCH
TLN
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*BLK
2 - 213
ALARM

*AOP1
(c) Gain filter parameter

Device name
2 - 214
Item
Symbol
PB1
Adaptive tuning mode (Adaptive filter II)
PA2
Vibration suppression control filter tuning mode (Advanced

vibration suppression control)
FILT
VRFT
PB3

(position smoothing)
PST
PB4
Feed forward gain
FFC
PB5
PB6
GD2
PB7
Model control gain
PG1
PB8
Position loop gain
PG2
PB9
Speed loop gain
VG2
PB10
VIC
PB11
VDC
PB12
PB13
PB14
Notch form selection 1
PB15
PB16
Notch form selection 2
NH1
NHQ1
NH2
NHQ2
PB17
PB18
Low-pass filter setting
PB19
Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting
VRF1
PB20
Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting
VRF2
LPF
PB21 to PB22
PB23
Low-pass filter selection
VFBF
PB24
Slight vibration suppression control selection
*MVS
PB25
Function selection B-1
*BOP1
PB26
*CDP
PB27
CDL
PB28
CDT
PB29

at changing gain
GD2B
PB30
Position loop gain at changing gain
PG2B
PB31
Speed loop gain at changing gain
VG2B
PB32
Speed integral compensation at changing gain
VICB
PB33
Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting for

changing gain
VRF1B
PB34
Vibration suppression control vibration resonance setting for

changing gain
VRF2B
PB35 to PB45

(d) Extension setting parameter

Symbol
PC2
Deceleration time constant
STB
PC3
STC
PC4
Torque command time constant
TQC
PC5
Internal speed command 1 / limit 1
SC1
PC6
SC2
PC7
SC3
PC8
SC4
PC9
SC5
PC10
SC6
PC11
SC7
PC12
Analog speed command maximum speed / limit maximum

speed
VCM
PC13
Analog torque command maximum output
TLC
PC14
MOD1
PC15
MOD2
PC16
MBR
PC17
Zero speed
ZSP
OVERVIEW
STA
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PC18
Alarm history clear
PC19
Encoder output pulse selection
*BPS
PC20
Station number. setting
*SNO
PC21
Communication function selection
*SOP
PC22
Function selection C-1
*COP1
PC23
*COP2
PC24
*COP3
PC25
PC26
PC27 to PC29
PC30
Acceleration time constant 2
STA2
PC31
Deceleration time constant 2
STB2
PC32
CMX2
PC33
CMX3
PC34
CMX4
PC35
PC36
*DMD
PC37
Analog speed command offset / limit offset
VCO
PC38
Analog torque command offset / limit offset
TPO
PC39
MO1
PC40
MO2
PC41 to PC50
*ENRS
*COP5
-
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
TL2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
Acceleration time constant
LAMP, SWITCH
Device name
PC1

2 - 215
ALARM
(e) I/O setting parameter

Device name
Item
Symbol
PD1
Input signal automatic ON selection 1
PD2
PD3
Input signal device selection 1 (CN1-15)
*DI1
PD4
*DI2
PD5
*DI3
PD6
*DI4
PD7
*DI5
PD8
*DI6
PD9
PD10
*DI8
PD11
*DI9
PD12
*DI10
PD13
Output signal device selection 1 (CN1-22)
*DO1
PD14
*DO2
PD15
*DO3
PD16
*DO4
PD17
PD18
*DO6
PD19
Response level setting
*DIF
PD20
Function selection D-1
*DOP1
PD21
PD22
PD23
PD24
PD25 to PD30
(f)
*DIA1
-
*DOP3
*DOP5
-
Status display
Same as the status display of MELSERVO-J2S-*A. (
display)
This section
(2)(c) Status
(g) Alarm
Same as the alarm of MELSERVO-J2S-*A. (
This section
(2)(d) Alarm)
(h) External input

Device name
Item
DI0
Input device statuses
DI1
DI2
Statuses of input devices switched on through

communication
(i)
External output
Device name
2 - 216
Symbol
Item
Symbol
DO0
Output device statuses
DO1

OVERVIEW
Do not write from multiple objects to one device with the same trigger.
GOT and controller may execute the operation that is unnecessary for users.
Example: Status monitor function
Condition
Action
Screen tab
X0 in ON status (object base screen1)
Data SET D100 300
Project tab
X0 in ON status
Data SET D100 200
Other than
base screen1
3
COMMON SETTING
(1) The trigger is enabled when monitoring the screen other than base screen1 (X0 OFF ON) <no
problem>
Write 200 to D100 of PLC CPU.
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
D100 200
The status monitor of project unit (save 200 to D100)
D100 300
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D100 200
The status monitor of screen unit (save 300 to D100)
The status monitor of project unit (save 200 to D100)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2 - 217
ALARM
Base screen1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) The trigger is enabled when monitoring base screen1 (X0 OFF ON) <with problem>
Write 300 and 200 to D100 of PLC CPU.
(When displaying numeric value on GOT, display 200 and 300 in turn.)

The following describes precautions to be attended to when using the Unicode text file that has been
imported/exported by GT Designer2.
(1) Applicable OS
Import/export of Unicode text file is possible with the OS shown below.
Microsoft
Windows
2000 Professional
Microsoft
Windows
XP Home Edition
Microsoft
Windows
XP Professional
(2) Storing Unicode text file

To store the exported and edited Unicode text file, store it in the Unicode text file format (*.txt).
(3) Applicable character code of Unicode text file
The character code applicable to Unicode text file is Unicode (file format: UTF16 LittleEndian).
(4) Displaying Unicode text file
To display Unicode text file on a personal computer, etc. use the application compatible to the
Unicode.
If the application used to display the Unicode text file is not compatible to the Unicode, the file may
not be displayed correctly.
(5) Editing a Unicode text file by Microsoft Excel
To open a Unicode text file that contains a comment of multiple lines by the Microsoft Excel, drag
the Unicode text file to the Microsoft Excel.
If the Unicode text file is opened in other methods, it may not be displayed in the Microsoft Excel
correctly.
Drag.
2 - 218
COMMON SETTING
OVERVIEW
3.
This section explains how to set devices commonly used in all projects.
3.1 GOT/PLC Type Setting
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In [System Settings] within the dialog box, set the GOT type that uses the project to be created and the controller type connected to that GOT.
These settings can be changed after the project is created.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Settings
1 Follow (1) or (2) below:
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Changing the GOT and controller settings during project setting
Select [Common]
[System Environment] from the menu.
(2) When making settings at a creation of a new project:
The wizard is displayed when making a new project.
Follow the steps below after finishing the wizard.
2 After the "System Environments" dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3.1.1
(Example:The screen for setting the GT11)

3.1.1 Settings
3-1
ALARM
3.1.2
Setting items
This section explains the setting items for GOT type and controller type.

Item
GOT Type

Description
Select the GOT type to be used.
Format
Select the display format (Horizontal/Vertical) on GOT.
Controller Type/Controller
Type CH 1
Select the controller type to be connected to GOT while considering the available device range, as the
device setting will be made within the device range of the selected controller.
When accessing multiple controllers, select the controller type of the largest device range.
CH 2 to CH 4
Setting is necessary when the multi-channel function is used.
Project Folder*1
This is indispensable for creating a project. Specify it without fail.

Input allowable characters: ASCII characters (*2), within 1 to 32 characters.
Select the color setting for the screen displayed in GOT
Color Settings
Select the color setting in accordance with the GOT display color.
The color setting applicable for GT Designer2 will be set.
65536 colors are used to

display the image data
Check this item when importing BMP/JPEG format figure data in 65536 colors.
(When the GOT to be used is not compatible with 65536 colors, image data is displayed on the applicable
colors of the GOT.)
If not check, figure data is imported in the number of colors specified in the Color Settings.*3
16dot Standard Font
3-2
Select the font installed in the GOT.(*4)

3.1.2 Setting items
*1
When project data is transferred from GT Designer2 to a memory card, or uploaded from the GOT to a memory
card, the folder set in "Project Folder" is created within the memory card. Do not change the directory path of the
folder.
If the directory path is changed as shown above, the folder named "abc/XYZ" will remain within the GOT when
the project data is downloaded to C drive and an attempt is made to delete the folder using the GOT utility.
The BootOS must be installed again to delete the above folder.
*2
Among ASCII characters, the following characters can be used. The following folder names may not be used.
Allowable ASCII characters: #, $, %, &, , (, ), +, -, ., 0 to 9, =, @, A to Z, [, ], ^, _, a to z, {, }, , space.
OVERVIEW
(Example: Changing the path to "abc/XYZ/Project1".)
con, NUL, nul, PRN, prn, CLOCK$, clock$, name starting with "G1" , "g1" or
"." (period), name ending with "." (period), name consisting of "." (one period)
or ".." (two periods)
*4
If select a font not installed in the GOT, the installed font is selected to display.
If the multi-color display board is not installed, the BMP/JPEG format figure data is displayed in 256 colors.
(1) When Multiple CPU system is used

To monitor the multiple CPU system of other station by GOT, select [MELSECQ(Multi)/Q-Motion]. The PLC CPU type of host station (QCPU, QnACPU or
ACPU) is not relevant.
PLC No. setting is disabled if other controller type has been selected.
(2) When connecting GOT to remote I/O station
When connecting GOT to a remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system,
set "MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*" as controller type.
COMMON SETTING
To display 65536 colors in the GOT, install the multi-color display board in the GOT.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
*3
SPECIFICATIONS
However, commas (",") may not be used.

Folder names that may not be used: COM1 to COM9, com1 to com9, LPT1 to LPT9, Ipt1 to Ipt9, AUX, aux, CON,
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.1.2 Setting items
3-3
ALARM
3.1.3
Precautions
There are no precautions for setting the GOT and controller type.
However, there are the following cautions for changing the GOT and controller type.
(1) When changing the GOT type
GOT1000 series has the settings related to the communication interface and
communication driver in the Communication Settings of GT Designer2 and
download the settings to the GOT.
If the GOT type is changed from the GOT-A900 series to the GOT1000 series,
make sure to set Communication Settings. (Without the settings, the monitoring
by the GOT is not possible.)
Section 3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings)
(2) When changing the GOT type and controller type
When changing the GOT type and controller type, the set contents will not be
deleted by mistake.
It is recommended to copy the existing project file before changing
1 Precautions for changing the GOT type

If GOT type is changed, this may change or delete the some function settings or affect the figure/frame
settings.
Therefore, change GOT type while paying full attention to followings. (Also, make sure to check other
settings.)
(1) After GOT type is changed, some settings, figures and objects may be deleted, if they are not
supported by the GOT currently set.
Even if GOT type is changed to the previous one, the deleted settings will not be restored.
(2) "Undo", "Redo" settings will be reset when GOT type is changed.
(3) Some setting items must be set after GOT type change is completed, as they are not included in
the previous GOT type. Note that default values are set for these setting items.
(4) Object shape settings after GOT type change
(a) If an object shape has been set to "None", this setting will be changed to "None".
(b) A basic figure will be changed to the same figure, if it is included in the currently set GOT.
However, it will be changed to the first basic figure, i.e., figure set at the top of the combo box,
if not included.
(c) A library will be changed to the first basic figure, i.e., figure set at the top of the combo box.
Example: Circular basic figure
Changed to the figure set at the

top of the combo box.
(5) The applicable device range/type differs with the GOT type. GT Designer2 displays the device out
of the range as "??". In this case, make device settings again.
Some device types (BCD, real number) may be deleted, as they are not supported by the GOT.
3-4

3.1.3 Precautions
(7) If changed to the GOT of which screen size is smaller, the preset objects and figures may extend
off the display range.
In this case, modify the layout.
(9) If GOT-F900 series was selected before changing, direct changing to GOT1000 series is not
supported.
To change GOT-F900 series to GOT1000 series, follow the two steps described below.
1) Change GOT-F900 Series to GOT-A900 Series.
2) Change GOT-A900 Series to GOT1000 Series.
(2) If the changed controller type does not correspond to the network, the network will be set to host
station.
(3) If the controller type is changed to [None]
The GT Designer2 displays device of the changed channel No. as "??". When "??" is displayed,
set the device again.
Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be re-used in other channel No. by using the
Replace Devices, Replace CH No. or Device List.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.1 Edit
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.1.3 Precautions
3-5
ALARM
Function)
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) If the controller type is changed, the device will also be changed.
When the controller type is changed, GT Designer2 displays the device cannot be converted (no
corresponding device type, or setting available range is exceeded) as "??". In this case, set the
device again.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2 Cautions for changing the controller type
COMMON SETTING
(10) The setting cannot be changed from GOT1000 series to GOT-A900 Series or GOT-F900 Series.
To create a project of GOT-A900 or GOT-F900 Series, specify the GOT-A900 or GOT-F900 Series
as a GOT type from the first step.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(8) If changed to the GOT of which screen size is different, the size of the logo image may be changed.
When the size of the logo image is changed, set the logo image again.
1
OVERVIEW
(6) User defined libraries will not be changed.

The data within user defined libraries are usable even after GOT type is changed. However, if they
include figures or objects that are not supported by the GOT, the libraries cannot be used.
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
For GOT, set the device for screen switching in order to switch base screens and display window screen.
Device types for screen switching are as follows:
Device for base screen switching
Device for overlap window1 switching
Device for overlap window2 switching
Device for superimpose window1 switching
Device for superimpose window2 switching
1 Switching base screens

Switch base screens by setting a base screen No. to the device for base screen switching.
There are the following two methods for specifying the base screen No. At using these methods, the
screen No. is stored into the switching screen device.
The screen No. is stored into the set device.
The screen is switched by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
Example: In the case of device for base screen switching: D100
Base screen 10
Base screen 20
Device value
changed
D100
Remark
10
D100
Base screen whose

No.is same with
screen swith device
value appears
20
The value of the device for base screen switching when GOT is powered on
When the value of device for base screen switching is 0 or the screen No. that has
not been downloaded is stored, GOT will display the base screen with the lowest
screen among those screens already downloaded. Errors will not be displayed
(system alarm).
Downloaded
screen
Base screen 2
to
Base screen 19
Base screen 2
Base screen 2 displayed
3-6
Base screen
switch device
D100 "0"
1
The device for window screen switching stores the window screen No. to switch window screens; and
stores 0 to erase the window screens.
There are the following two methods for specifying the window screen No. At using these methods, the
screen No. is stored into the switching screen device.
The screen No. is stored into the set device.
The screen is switched by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
Base screen
Windows screen
13451
No.2
COMMON SETTING
No.1
<Example of GOT Display>

Device for overlap window 1 switching: D120
Windows screen No.1 displayed
Windows screen No.2 displayed
2
SPECIFICATIONS
<Downloaded window screen>
OVERVIEW
2 Displaying or erasing window screen
Overlap windows 1 erased
D120
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
D120
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3-7
ALARM
D120
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
13451
Remark
(1) Methods of erasing window screen by touch operation

When close key is displayed on an overlap window, touch it to erase the window.
Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications
(2) Position of window screen display
Set the position of window screen display using GT Designer2.
Specify the display position based on the device value.
Switching screen device setting

Switching screen device is set as the following.
(1) GOT internal device
It is recommended to use this device only for switching the screen by the touch
switch (go to screen switch).
Screen switching cannot be controlled by the controller.
However, screen switching of only base screens can be controlled by the
controller with the script function.
(Script example)
[w:GD10]=[w:D10]; //D10 value is stored into GD10.
(2) Controller device
It is recommended to use this device to control screen switching from the
controller.
Screen switching can also be performed by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
3-8
Settings
[System Environments] from the menu.
OVERVIEW
1 Select [Common]
2 Double-click on [Screen Switching] in [System Environments] .
When setting in project workspace

Double-click on [System Environments] and "System Environment" dialog box
appears, then double-click on [Screen Switching].
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Double click
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation:

3.2.1 Settings
3-9
ALARM
3.2.1
3.2.2
Setting items
Set a screen switching device for each screen type (base screen, overlap window1, overlap window2 superimpose window1 and superimpose window2).
Items
Description
Select the data format to process screen switching device value.
Data Type
Base Screen
BIN
: Processes the screen switching device value as binary value.
BCD
: Processes the screen switching device value as BCD value.
The range of the screen (screen No.) can be switched will depend on the set data format.
BIN
: 1 to 32767
BCD
: 1 to 9999
Set the screen switching device for base screen. (
Section 5.1 Device Setting)
3 - 10

3.2.2 Setting items
Item
Description
Check this item to display Overlap Window 1 or Overlap Window 2
Overlap Window 2
Then set the switching screen device for each window.

(
OVERVIEW
Overlap Window 1
The overlap windows will not be displayed without setting the switching screen devices.
Check this item to specify the display position of the window based on the device value.
The devices that store display positions will be set consecutively starting from the device set in [Screens Switching] .
Specify the X and Y coordinates of the overlap window in a multiple of 16.

a larger number is rounded up. If the result of rounding is the same coordinate as the original one, re-drawing is not
made.
Example: In the case that switching screen device is set to D100.
Display position
X: D101
Y: D102
SPECIFICATIONS
When a coordinate that is not divided with 16 is designated, the remainder 7 or a smaller number is rounded off and 8 or
The window screen will be displayed as follows:
COMMON SETTING
D101
Display
Position is
D102
specified
with the
device.
4
If the device value exceeding the range for display in GOT is stored as the device value that stores display position, the
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GOT will automatically adjust the display position and then display the window screen.
The device value will not be updated with the above adjustment.
Display position after

adjustment
Position specified by
device value
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Adjust
Check this item to display the overlap window without window bar.
[Window bar]
[Window bar none]
6
Close key
Users can move and close

this window.
LAMP, SWITCH
Movement
key
None
Users cannot move the window

To close it, please set the screen
switching device value as "0".
Superimpose
Check this item to display superimpose window.
Window 1
Then set the switching screen device for the superimpose window
Superimpose
Window 2
The superimpose windows will not be displayed without setting the switching screen devices.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Window bar
Select the action when Back is selected for the switching target screen in touch switch (Go To Screen Switch).
Previous : Action in previous mode (upper previous switch mode)
Operation Mode
History
: Action in history mode (back switch mode)
For details of the touch switch (Go To Screen Switch), refer to:
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of go to screen switch
Preservation
Check this item when store the history data in the memory card when history is selected as an operation mode.

3.2.2 Setting items
3 - 11
ALARM
History
3.2.3
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for setting the switching screen device.
1 Precautions for drawing

(1) Switching screen device for screen switching
Use the switching screen device only when switching GOT screens.
(2) Switching base screen device
The default value of switching base screen device is set to "GD100".
Change the switching base screen device when "GD100" is used in other objects.
(3) Display restrictions of used set objects
If the line graph with locus display on the base screen has been set, the overlap window2 cannot
be displayed.

(1) If the value that cannot be displayed is stored into the switching screen device during GOT
monitoring.
If the screen No. that is not downloaded is saved as the value of the switching screen device, the
screen currently displayed will be kept.
This action is common in all types of screens (base screen, overlap window1, overlap window2,
and superimpose window).
Example: In case of base screen
Downloaded
screen
Base screen1
to
Base screen33
base screen

As no corresponding base screen is
device D100"9999"
provided, the current display will be kept.
3 - 12

3.2.3 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
Section 2.7.2 Access range for monitoring
Methods of switching station No.
COMMON SETTING
3.3.1
The device dedicated to switching station No. is used to switch the station No.
The screen object is redrawn after changing the value stored in the station No. switching device
Line B
Station No.1
Prod.
vol.
D20 00FF
(hex.)
Station No.0
(Host)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Monitor
D100
Station No.
switching
device
Station No.2
40
Line A
Monitoring host station
Station No.1
Prod. vol.
D100 100
Station No.0
(Host)
Station No.2
100
LAMP, SWITCH
Prod.
vol
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Line B
Monitoring
D100
Station No.
switching
device
D20 0101
(hex.)
Prod. vol.
D100 40
Change the device value

of switching station No.
and change the monitor
target of station No. 1.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Station No. switching is a function to switch the monitored station No. of the object.
In a system with the same controlled multiple machines to a network, for example, the multiple machines can
be monitored on the same monitor screen by using station No. switching.
As the number of object to be set can be reduced, the built-in memory of GOT can be saved.
Switching station No. can be carried out for the station No. that can be monitored by GOT.
For more information on station No. that can be monitored by GOT (accessible range),Refer to the following.
Line A
Change the monitor target to station No.1
Monitor different station Nos. on base screen and window
Use Touch switch to change monitor target.
screen.
Set on "Station No. switching device" dialog box
Set using the Touch switch
Station No.1
D10
100
100
Station1
Station1
Station2
Station2
30
Base screen
: monitors station No.1
Window screen : monitors station No.2
Station No.2
30
Station No.1
Station No.1

3.3.1 Methods of switching station No.
3 - 13
ALARM
D10
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Application example
1 Methods of switching station No.

Station No. switching is executed by switching the station No. stored to the station No. switching device.
The station No. can be specified in either of the following methods. The station No. is stored into the
station No. switching device by the methods.
Store the station No. on the set device
Use the touch switch (Switching Station No. Switch) to change the station number.
(1) Store a value in the device for switching station No.
Station No. can be switched if a value is stored in the device for switching station No. as follows:.
When GOT has been incorporated into the data link system (MELSECNET) or CC-Link system
GOT
Switching target
Storage value (hexadecimal)
Master station
0000H
Local station (1 to 64)
0001H to 0040H
Station No. set for each object

(The same monitor target is set if "Switching station No." has
00FEH
not been set.)

Host (connection target) monitor
00FFH
When the GOT is included in a network system (MELSECNET/10) or Ethernet system*1
GOT
Switching target
Storage value (hexadecimal)

Relation between change target and storage value is as
Network No. (1 to 255)
follows:
When monitoring PLC station No: 18,

network No.: 1
0112H
PLC station No. (1 to 64)
PLC station No.

Network No.
Station No. set for each object

(The same monitor target is set if "Switching station No." has
00FEH
not been set.)

Host station (connection target) monitor
*1
For Ethernet connection, Ethernet setting is required on GT Designer2.

Refer to the following manual for details of the setting method.
3 - 14

00FFH
(2) Use touch switch to switch station No.

Touch the touch switch dedicated to switching station No. to switch the station No.
OVERVIEW
Module connected to station No.0 of network No.0 is monitored until setting the
value of switching station No. device (GD) after turning on GOT.
Therefore, system alarm "Communication time out. Confirm communication
pathway or modules." is occurred.
To not occur the system alarm, create the initial displaying screen and set the value
to switching station No. device in the screen.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
When using GOT data register (GD) for switching station No. device
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3 - 15
ALARM
3.3.2
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For station No. change, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
Make the settings by referring to the following description, if necessary.
(1) Functions relevant to station No. change only
Relevant to numerical display/numerical input only.
1 Auxiliary settings (
Section 4.4 Auxiliary Settings)
(1) Functions relevant to station No. change only

Station No. change execution/in execution
Station No. change can be set to be executed or not for each screen.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Set station
No. change
Setting items
[Carry out station No. change]
3 - 16
Base
screen 1
Base
screen 2
Base
screen 3
Change station
No. to be
executed
Change station
No. not to be
executed
Change station
No. to be
executed

3.3.2 Relevant settings
2 As "System Environment" dialog box appears, double-click on [Switching Station No]. in the dialog box.
Before setting switching station No.

When switching station No., set the function available or unavailable for each of
base screen and window screen.
To use the function, make it available in the [Auxiliary Setting] for each screen.
Section 4.4 Auxiliary Settings
When making the settings in project workspace

Click on [System Environment] to display "System Environment" dialog box, and
then double click on [Switching Station No.] there.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Double click
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
COMMON SETTING
1 Select [Common]
OVERVIEW
Settings

3.3.3 Settings
3 - 17
ALARM
3.3.3
3.3.4
Setting items
Set a switching station No. device.

Use the device common to all screens or the different device for each screen.
Items
Switching Station No.
Description
Check this item to use "Switching station No.".
Check this item to make "Switching station No." available for all screens.
All
Then set the switching station No. device.

Check this item to specify the target station No. by screen type.
Screen Type
Then check the screen type to carry out "Switching station No."
Base
Check the screen type(s) that will perform "Switching station No.".
Then set the switching station No. device for each screen type.
"Switching station No." will not be performed without this setting.
Overlap Window1
Example:
Base screen
Overlap Window2
Overlap window1
Monitors host
station
Monitors host
station
Monitors other
station (Station 1)
Monitors other
station (Station 3)
Superimpose
Window1
Switching station No. device (hexadecimal)

: 00FFH
Base screen
Overlap window1
: 00FFH
Superimpose
: 0101H
: 0103H
Window2
Include Touchkey Action/
Status Observation(Screen)/
Script (Screen)
Check this item to make touch switch action/status observation/script object functions the targets for
switching station No.
Select the channel No. taken as the target for the switching of the station No. when using the multi-channel
CH No. for Switching Station

No.
3 - 18
function.
(
Section 2.8 Multi-channel Function)

3.3.4 Setting items
1
When using the device of which station No. has been switched to perform all actions
of switch function, status observation function, and script function, check [Include
Touchkey action/Status Observation(Screen)/Script(Screen)].
If it is not checked, each object operates as shown below:
OVERVIEW
Action of touch switch/status observation/script function
2
Function
Monitor/Action object
ON/OFF figure to display status

Device of which station No. has been switched.
Touch switch function
Device for indirect comment

Action at touch
Device of which station No. set in the object
Status observation
Trigger device
function (screen)
Action when condition success
SPECIFICATIONS
Object

Script function monitor device
Script function write device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.3.4 Setting items
3 - 19
ALARM
Script function
COMMON SETTING
Screen script, object script
3.3.5
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for switching station No.
1 Controller compatible with "Switching station No.".

"Station No. switching" is available only when a controller shown below is monitored.
MELSEC-Q
MELSEC-QnA
MELSEC-A
Inverter
Servo amplifier
CNC connection
2 Function incompatible with "Switching station No."

The devices of the following functions are not compatible with "Switching station No."
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in each function.
Note that if the object compatible with "Switching station No." has been set in the same screen, GOT
will monitor the different station No. depending on the object when carrying out "Switching station No."
Screen switching function

Switching station No. function
Clock function
System information function
Advanced alarm observation
User alarm display*1
Trend graph*1
Line graph*2
Scatter graph*1
Status observation function*3
Logging function
Recipe function
Hard copy function
Script function*4
Gateway function
*1
Only when the [memory storage] has been set, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the object.
*2
Only when the [Locus] has been set, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the object.
*3
Only when the settings have been made for each project, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the [memory storage] is not set.
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the [Locus] is not set.
object.
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the settings have been made for
each screen.
*4
The screen script and object script monitor the device of the station No. after switching.
The project script monitors the device of the station No. set at the object.
3 Re-drawing the screen after switching station

The screen objects are re-drawn immediately after switching the station No. Thus, the object displaying
speed may decrease temporarily.
4 Switching station No. during input operation

When inputting a numeric value or ASCII, finish the input operation before switching the station No.
If station No. is switched during inputting operation, the correct data may not be written in the monitored
device.
To write a station No. from the controller to a switching station No. device, use key window output signal
(system signal 2-1. b11) to interlock.
The key window output signal is turned on while the key window is displayed.
3 - 20

3.3.5 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
3.4 Setting Language Switching Device
For the comment registration, refer to the following.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
The comment displayed on the objects can be switched by writing a column No. of comment group in the
language switching device set up by GT Designer2.
If registering messages of Japanese, English, Chinese and other language in each column of comment
group, the language of the comment displayed can be switched.
For the comment registration, refer to the following.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
COMMON SETTING
Example: When switching language by Comment display (Word):
Comment display (word)

(specifies a comment No.)
D100
D100
D100
Language switching device

(specifies a column No.)
D200
D200
D200
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
By registering comments of the same language in several columns of a comment

group, the comment group can be used as not language switching but comment
switching.
For example, if outlines (English) are registered in column No.1 and details (English)
in column No.2, the appropriate comments can be displayed according to the user's
application.
Hydraulic pressure of
finishing machine E is low.
Stopped finishing machine E.
Outline display
Detail display
3 - 21
ALARM
Line B error.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Languages to be displayed
LAMP, SWITCH
3.4.1
Setting
1 Select [Common]
[System Environment] on the menu bar.
2 Double-click the "Language Switching" of System Environment.

3 The setting dialog box is displayed. Set the items with reference to the following description.
Remark
When setting in the workspace (project):

If double-clicking "System Environment," the System Environment setting dialog box
is displayed. Then, double-click "Language Switching."
Double click
3 - 22

3.4.1 Setting
3.4.2
Setting items
OVERVIEW
Set the language switching device.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Check when using more than one column in comment group.
Do not check if using only one column.
Set the language switching device.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The comments in the specified column No. are displayed on the screen of GT Designer2.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Preview Column No.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Language Switching Device

3.4.2 Setting items
3 - 23
ALARM
Use Language Switching
Description
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
3.4.3
Precautions
The following shows the precautions for setting the language switching device.

(1) Device setting
The language switching device can be set for each project.
It cannot be set up for each screen.
(2) When the language switching device is not set
In this case, register comments in the column No.1 of comment group.
Even if comments are registered in the column No.2-10 of comment group, they cannot be
displayed.
(3) When switching to a kanji type other than Japanese
In this case, the option function board is required to be installed in GOT to install the corresponding
system font.
China (GB)
China (Big5)
If the option function board is not installed in GOT or the system font is not installed, characters are
displayed in Japanese kanji.
Item
China (GB), China (Big5)
Kanji other than China (GB) and

China (Big5)
Required
Not required
Installation of system font in GOT
Required
Not required
For the installation method of the option function board, refer to the manual below.
For the installation method of system font, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 8.2.6 Installing the
OS)
(4) Applicable object functions
The language switching function is available only for objects that are supported by comment group.
For the objects supported by comment group, refer to the following.
Section 4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration
Precautions for use

(1) Value of the language switching device at GOT power on
When the value set on the language switching device is "0" or a column No. of an unregistered
comment group is stored, "No message" is displayed.
Store the value of the column No. registered in the comment group in the language setting device.
3 - 24

3.4.3 Precautions
Object
Description
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Influence on objects when language switching is performed

When language switching is performed during GOT monitoring, the currently displayed screen is
displayed again, so that the display of objects may be influenced.
Be careful if the following objects are arranged on the screen being monitored when switching
language.
Trend Graph
If store memory is not set, the occurrence time of alarm is changed to the time of language
Alarm List (User Alarm)
switching.
If display is being scrolled, data are displayed from the top.
Alarm History
SPECIFICATIONS
If store memory is not set, the historical information is erased.

Scatter Graph
If display is being scrolled, data are displayed from the top.
If the display mode is set to Locus, the locus is erased.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.4.3 Precautions
3 - 25
ALARM
Parts Movement
COMMON SETTING
Data List
3.5 Password Setting
Passwords can be set to object, screen display/operation, upload operation, and utility operation.
The setting of each password restricts the operable user.
1 Restricting the object and screen display/operation

The screen display can be changed according to the user's security level by setting the security level (0
to 15) for each object and screen.
The security level can be changed by entering the password corresponding to each security level has.
Section 5.8 Security Function
Security level: 2
Security level: 10
Line No.1
Line No.1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Cancel
Input password and change to

high security level.
Display objects according to the

changed security level.
2 Restricting the upload operation

By the preset password, the screen data upload operation can be restricted.
For details of data transmission operation, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Chapter8
TRANSFERRING DATA)
Restricted by
password
3 - 26
1
3 Restricting the utility operation
OVERVIEW
When starting utility, enter the preset password to prevent the unnecessary utility operation.
For details of utility operation, refer to the following manual.
GT15 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
SPECIFICATIONS
Exit
Display utility if the input

password is correct
4 Parameter setting screen

When displaying the parameter setting screen of the Q motion monitor function or the servo amplifier
monitor function, the input of a preset password is requested so that inadvertent changing of the
parameter settings in the targeted motion controller CPU (Q series)/servo amplifier can be avoided.
For details of the servo amplifier monitor function and the Q motion monitor function, refer to the
following manual.
COMMON SETTING
Input password
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Switch to utility screen
Jn
Switching to the parameter

setting screen
Inputting the password
The parameter setting screen is displayed

only when the correct password is input.
1 Select [Common]
LAMP, SWITCH
Settings
2 Double click on [Password] in "System Environment" dialog box.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 As the "Password" dialog box appears, select the tab for setting the password.

3.5.1 Settings
3 - 27
ALARM
3.5.1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3.5.2
Password setting items
1 Security tab
Set the password according to each security level.
3 - 28

3.5.2 Password setting items
Security
System
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Check this item to use security function.

Then, set the device (level device) that stores the security level value of GOT display screen.
The password can be set for security level from 0 to 15.
: Security function is not set
Security level 1
: Low
Security level 15
: High
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Security level 0
If the level device is not controlled by controller, set GOT internal device (GD) .
The security level can be changed by changing the level device value from the controller.
Example: Level device: D10
Level Device
Base screen 1
Base screen 1
D10: 3
D10: 8
Set to security level 3
Set to security level 8
COMMON SETTING
When using numerical input function to change the device value set in the level device, the key window
(where the value is entered) is erased after the input value is updated. Therefore, the operation settings
Passwords for changing the security level are listed.

Select the security level No. (0 to 15) for which the password to be registered from the password list.
This setting is available for setting a new password or changing the preset password.
Specify different passwords for each security level. The same password may not be specified.
Edit*1*2
To use the same password, click on the
Cancel
button.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
To use in GT15 or GT11, change the password.

Deletes the registered password.
Delete*3
Check
At clicking, error message is displayed when some passwords are overlapped.
For details of *1, *2, and *3, refer to the next page.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3 - 29
ALARM
Password list
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(auxiliary setting of project) made for the key window are irrelevant.
*1 Registering new password

Enter numeric characters in 1 to 8 digits as new password and then click on OK button.
*2 Changing password
Before changing password, enter the current password and then verify the password.
1 In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
2 As "Password" dialog box appears, enter numerical characters in 1 to 8 digits as new password, and
then click on OK button.
*3 Deleting password
In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
3 - 30

1
2 Password (System) tab
OVERVIEW
Set the password to restrict screen data upload, utility start from the GOT .
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
System
Data
Description
Edit*1*2
Registers or changes the password that restricts GOT screen data upload and utility screen display.
Utility
Delete*3
Motion/Servo
Edit*1*2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
Transmission/
Delete*3
servo amplifier monitor function.

For details of *1, *2, and *3, refer to the next page.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Parameter
Registers or changes the password used for displaying the parameter setting screen for the motion monitor/
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Amplifier

3 - 31
ALARM
Security
*1 Registering new password

In "Password" dialog box, enter alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to F) in 1 to 8 digits as new password
and then click on OK button.
*2 Changing password
Before changing password, enter the current password and then verify the password.
1 In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
2 As "Password" dialog box appears, enter alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to F) as new password,

and then click on OK button.
*3 Deleting password
In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
3 - 32

3.5.3
Precautions
The already registered password cannot be checked later. Therefore, always make a note of the
password.
If the password is forgotten, a security level change or security level password change/deletion cannot
be made, and the project data must be recreated. (Re-setting of only the password cannot be done.)
To prevent the password from being forgotten, it is recommended to fill out the following list.
Tear-off line
3
COMMON SETTING
Password list
Manager:
Installation name (No.):

1. Keep this memo safe from loss.
2. Do not reveal the password.
The GOT display may change depending on the security level.
3. As the security level No. is greater, the security level is highe
Security level
Manager of worksite (John Mitsubishi)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1 to 8 digits)
Remarks
change
8
2004.6.1
Example
Do not set the security function.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Low:
entry or
(operator or department)
8
4
Date of
Password
User
Level
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Making a note of the password
OVERVIEW
This section provides precautions for using password setting.
2
3
4
5
6
LAMP, SWITCH
8
9
10
11
12
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
13
14
15

3.5.3 Precautions
3 - 33
ALARM
High:
3.6 System Information Setting
According to the data written to device, GOT operations (screen erasing, invalidating key input, etc) will be
controlled via controller and GOT status will be notified to controller.
The following two types of devices are provided for setting the system information.
Read device: controls GOT operation via controller
Write device: notifies controller of GOT operation status
1 Controlling GOT operation (read device)

Controller writes the value to the read device specified for GOT operation and controls GOT operation.
Example: Turning the GOT to screen save mode forcibly by controller.
Read
D10
device
b2 b1 b0
Forced screen saver enable

signal (Erases the screen)
D10.b1=OFF
D10.b1=ON
Checks the change of read
device and erases the display.
Turns the forced screen

saver enable signal ON
2 Writing GOT status (write device)

GOT writes action status to write device to notify controller.
Example: Write the base screen No. currently displayed to the device.
Write device: D20
(stores the screen No. currently displayed)
125
Base screen 1
Base screen 5 Writes GOT

operation status
to write device.
D20
Monitoring system information data/update timing

The following explains monitoring the read device set in the system information and
deciding the timing to update the write device.
Read device :monitored at intervals of GOT monitor period.
The read device value needs to be longer compared to the interval
of GOT monitor period.
The monitor period value is stored in the GOT internal device
(GS8).
Section 2.9.1 GOT internal devices
Write device :updated when the GOT operation status has changed.
3 - 34
1
3 Function overview
OVERVIEW
The following operations can be confirmed and controlled in the system information.
System information setting screen
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Read device
b0
Signal name
----
Automatic Screen
ON
:Disables screen saver function (that turns monitor screen display OFF).
Saver Disable
OFF
:Enables screen saver function.
Signal
Section 3.6.4
ON
:Forcibly turns the GOT into screen saver mode.
OFF
: Common status (Displays screen again)
Section 3.6.4
ON
:Disables screen saver when the screen is touched even during forced screen saving.
Forced Screen
b1
Saver Enable
Signal
Forced Screen
b2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Bit No.
Control of Screen Display)
(During ON, the Forced Screen Saver Touch-cancel Signal (System Signal 1-1. b1)
Saver Touchcancel Signal
operates at the rising.

OFF
:Keeps the screen saving status even if the screen is touched during forced screen saving.
(During OFF, the Forced Screen Saver Touch-cancel Signal operates as during ON.)
b3
Key Code Read
ON
:Turns [Key input signal (System signal 2-1. b3)] OFF
OFF
:Does not clear the above signal.
Section 3.6.4
Complete Signal
Confirm the input key code by input key)
LAMP, SWITCH
Signal 1-1
3 - 35
ALARM
System
Description
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Name
Name
System
Signal 1-1
Bit No.
Description
Signal name
---ON
:Turns [Numeric value input signal (System signal 2-1, b4)] OFF.
OFF
:Does not turn the above signal OFF
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
Numeric Value
b4
Input Read
Complete Signal
* Checking the box for "Ascii input is targeted in the system information output" in Auxiliary Setting
or turning on the GOTs internal device, GS450.b2 enables operations by the Ascii input
function.
b5
b6
Barcode Input
ON
:Disables bar code function.
Disable Signal
OFF
:Enables bar code function.
Barcode Input
ON
:Turns [Barcode input signal (System signal 2-1. b6)] OFF.
Read Complete
OFF
:Does not turn the above signal OFF.
Signal
Section 13.2 Bar Code Function)
ON
:Turns OFF the backlight during screen saving.
OFF
:The backlight is ON during screen saving.
The backlight behaviors differently depending on the [Screen save backlight] setting of the utility.
When [Screen save backlight] is OFF (The backlight will be turned OFF.)
The setting of the utility is preceded.

The backlight will not be turned ON even if this signal is turned OFF.
Screen saving
Screen save
Backlight OFF
Output Signal
b7
Backlight OFF
Output Signal
OFF
ON
Backlight
OFF
When [Screen save backlight] is ON (The backlight will not be turned OFF.)
The setting of this signal is preceded.
The backlight will be turned OFF when this signal is turned ON.
Screen saving
Screen save
ON
Backlight OFF
Output Signal
OFF
ON
Backlight
Buzzer Threeb8
shot Output
Signal
b9
OFF
ON
:Outputs buzzer 3 times.
OFF
:Does not output buzzer.
The buzzer length is the same with the [Buzzer volume] setting ([SHORT], [LONG]) of the GOT
setup (utility). (When [OFF], the buzzer volume is the same as the [LONG] setting.)
Key-In Disable
ON
:Disables all key-input.
Signal
OFF
:Enables key-input.
b10
to
Must not be used
----
b12
3 - 36
Name
---:Processes the following signals.

Stores "0" to [GOT error code storage area (Write Device)]
b13
b14
Turns [GOT error detection signal (System signal 2-1, b13)] OFF.
GOT Error Reset
Clears system alarm messages.
Signal
OFF
:Does not process the above signals.
Section 3.6.4
Confirm the error occurred in GOT)
ON
:Keeps buzzer.
Buzzer Output
OFF
Signal
Even if [Buzzer Volume] of GOT utility screen (Setup) is set as [None] , buzzer volume will be
output when the bit is ON.
ON
:Outputs buzzer once.
Buzzer One-shot
OFF
Output Signal
The length of buzzer volume is same with the settings (Long, Short) made in [Buzzer Volume] of
b0
Operation switch
Turns ON/OFF the operation switch LED (L1 to L6) of GT11 handy GOT.
to
LED control
ON
:Turns on the operation switch LED.
b5
signal
OFF
:Turns off the operation switch LED.
b15
GOT utility. (When set as [None], buzzer volume is same as the setting of [Long].)
I/O
Output
Information
This signal is valid only when it is set at "Depend on Bit Device condition" in the handy GOT
Function
b6
Grip switch LED

control signal
setting.
The signal must not be used if it is set at "Always OFF" in the handy GOT setting.
ON
:Turns on the grip switch LED.
OFF
:Turns off the grip switch LED.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
External
GT11
Handy
GOT Only
b7
to
Must not be used
----
b15
b0
File Access Error

Reset Signal
System
ON
:Batch-resets the File Access Error Signal (System Signal 2-2.b7, b9) of the drive A and
OFF
:Does not reset the File Access Error Signal (System Signal 2-2.b7, b9) of the drive A and
drive D.
drive D.
When set to ON, the next File Access Error Signal will not be turned on.
Signal 1-2
b1
to
Must not be used
SPECIFICATIONS
ON
OVERVIEW
Signal name
COMMON SETTING
Bit No.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Signal 1-1
----
6
LAMP, SWITCH
15
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 - 37
ALARM
System
Description
(2) Write device

Name
System
Signal 2-1
Bit No.
b0
b1
Description
Signal name
----
Screen saving
ON
:GOT is in screen saver mode.
signal
OFF
:GOT is not in screen saver mode.
ON
:GOT status normal at power-on
GOT Ready
OFF
:GOT status abnormal at power-on
Signal
If the signal will not be ON by resetting the GOT again, its possible cause is hardware error of
GOT. Consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative.
b2
b3
b4
Must not be used
Key Input Signal
Numeric Value
Input Signal
---ON
:Key input done
OFF
:No key input
Section 3.6.4
ON
:The value input by value input function has been updated.
OFF
:The value input by value input function has not been updated.
Checking the box for "Ascii input is targeted in the system information output" in Auxiliary Setting
or turning on the GOTs internal device, GS450.b2 enables operations by the Ascii input function.
This signal is not changed when a numerical value is input to the numeric input object whose user
ID is outside the allowable range (1 to 65535).
Human Sensor
ON
:The human sensor has detected human motion.
Detection Signal
OFF
:The human sensor has detected no human motion.

(When it has not detected within the period specified in the GOTs utility.)
b5
(
Section 3.6.4
This signal turns ON for approx. 60 seconds after GOT startup due to the sensors characteristic.
b6
b7 to b9
b10
b11
Barcode Input
ON
:The data read by bar code reader has been stored into the specified device.
OFF
:No data has been read by bar code reader.
Section 13.2 Bar Code Function)
Signal
Must not be used
Recipe
---ON
:Recipe being processed (Write/Read operation)
OFF
:Recipe process completed, or interrupted.
Processing Signal
(
Section 12.2 Recipe Function)
Key window
ON
:Key window being displayed
Output Signal
OFF
:Key window not displayed
ON
:The number of files (file No.) for screen data stored in memory card by hard copy function
OFF
:The number of files (file No.) of screen data stored in memory card by hard copy function
exceeds 9900
b12
Hardcopy Subsignal
is less than 9900

(
b13
GOT Error
Section 13.1 Hard Copy)
ON
:GOT error has occurred.
OFF
:Normal
Section 3.6.4
ON
:The value exceeding the input range has been stored into the write target device of
OFF
:The value within the input range has been stored into the write target device of numeric
Detection Signal
numeric value input function (Check this item on screen switching)

Numeric Value
b14
Error Detection
value input function.
Signal
(
When no input range formula is preset to the numeric input object, detection is not performed.
b15
Must not be used
----

3 - 38
Name
Description
The details of the error occurred on the GOT are stored.
GOT Error Code

Section 3.6.4

OVERVIEW
The base screen being displayed is stored.

The stored screen number is as follows.
Data format of the screen switching device
Screen displayed
BIN
When displaying other than user-
Stores the number of the
created screens (utility, RGB and
-1
SPECIFICATIONS
On-screen Base Screen Number
BCD
user-created base screen
others)
previously displayed
During screen switching
Base screen being displayed
1 to 32767
1 to 9999
3
The number of the window screen (Overlap window 1) being displayed is stored.
COMMON SETTING
The stored screen number is as follows.

Screen displayed
BIN
Not displayed or during screen
switching
The number of overlap window 1
1 to 32767
being displayed
1 to 9999
Confirm the window screen status of the superimpose window 1 and 2 by the screen switching
device. (
Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting)
The user ID number of the numerical input function is stored when the input value is determined.
(
When the input value is determined, the numerical input No. is stored and the Numeric Value Input
Signal (System Signal 2-1.b4) is turned on.
Operates with the ASCII input function if check [Ascii input is targeted in the system information
output] of the Auxiliary Setting or turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b2.
The object ID No. of the object on which the cursor is currently displayed is stored.
Current Cursor Display Object ID
Section 3.6.4
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Numeric Value Input Number
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
On-screen Window 1 Screen Number
BCD
Confirmation of the numeric value input determination timing)
"0" is stored when delete the cursor if check [When the cursor deleted, system information is
cleared] or turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b3.
Section 3.6.4
When inputting values with the input key (Numerical input, ASCII input or touch switch), the
specified key code is stored.

(
Section 3.6.4
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Key Code Input

When a key code is stored, the Key Input Signal (System Signal 2-1.b3) is turned on.
The previous value (32 bits) before changing with the numerical input function is stored.
Previous Numeric Value Input (32bit)
Effective only for the numerical input object to which the user ID is set.
The input value (32 bits) determined with the numerical input function is stored.
Current Numeric Value Input (32bit)
Effective only for the numerical input object to which the user ID is set.

3 - 39
ALARM
Previous Cursor Display Object ID
LAMP, SWITCH
The object ID No. of the object on which the cursor is previously displayed is stored.
Name
Description
The user ID No. of the object on which the cursor is currently displayed is stored.
(
Current Cursor Display User ID
Section 3.6.4
The user ID No. of the object on which the cursor is previously displayed is stored.
(
Previous Cursor Display User ID
Section 3.6.4
Confirm cursor's display position)
System
Signal 2-2
Bit No.
b0
b1
b2
Signal name
----
Drive A File
ON
:File accessing in the drive A
Accessing Signal
OFF
:Not file accessing in the drive A
Must not be used
----
Drive C File
ON
:File accessing in the drive C
Accessing Signal
OFF
:Not file accessing in the drive C
ON
:File accessing in the drive D
OFF
:Not file accessing in the drive D
Drive A Full
ON
:The empty capacity of the drive A is less than 1K byte.
Signal
OFF
:The empty capacity of the drive A is 1K bytes or more.
Drive D File
Accessing Signal
b3
b4
b5
Must not be used
----
Drive D Full
Signal
b6
Drive A File
b7
Access Error
Signal
b8
Access Error
Signal
b10
b11
b12
:The empty capacity of the drive D is less than 1K byte.
OFF
:The empty capacity of the drive D is 1K bytes or more.
ON
:Drive A file access error
OFF
:Drive A file access is normal.
Must not be used

Drive D File
b9
ON
---ON
:Drive D file access error
OFF
:Drive D file access is normal.
Must not be used
----
Cursor Displaying
ON
Signal
OFF
:Displaying the numerical input/ASCII input cursor

:Not displaying the numerical input/ASCII input cursor
ON
:A voltage drop of the GOT built-in battery is detected.
OFF
:The voltage of the GOT built-in battery is normal.
Built-in Battery
The battery backup data is guaranteed within the data backup time after this signal switches ON,
Voltage Drop
however, replace the battery immediately.
Signal
For the data backup time, refer to the following manual.

GT15 User's Manual (Section 8.7.4 Battery Life)
GT11 User's Manual (Section 16.4 Battery Voltage Low Detectionand Battery Replacement)

3 - 40
System
Signal 2-2
Bit No.
Signal name
----
b13
Must not be used
----
b14
b15
Description
Backlight Shutoff
ON
:A blown backlight bulb of GOT is detected.
Detection Signal
OFF
:The backlight of GOT is normal.
Must not be used
OVERVIEW
Name
---Check this item when store the window screen (overlap window 2) being displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
The screen number to be stored is as follows.

Screen displayed
BIN
0
switching
The screen number of overlap
window 2 being displayed.
1 to 32767
3
1 to 9999
Confirm the window screen status of the superimpose window 1 and 2 by the screen switching
device. (
(32bit)
Drive C empty capacity information
(32bit)
Check this item when store the empty capacity (32 bits) of the drive A. (Unit, byte)
Check this item when store the empty capacity (32 bits) of the drive C. (Unit, byte)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Drive A empty capacity information
Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting)
Drive D empty capacity information

(32bit)
Stores the empty capacity (32 bits) of the drive D. (Unit, byte)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 - 41
ALARM
On-screen Window 2 screen number
BCD
COMMON SETTING
Not displayed or during screen
3.6.1
List of relevant object items
A list of object items related to System Information is shown below.

: Relevant, ---- : Irrelevant
Lamp,
Switch
Alarm
Parts
System Information 1-1

User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
Signal
Numeric Value Input Read
Complete Signal
Bar code input invalid
signal
Bar code input read
complete signal
Backlight OFF Output
Signal
Buzzer Three-shot Output
Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b9
Key-In Disable Signal
---
b13
GOT Error Reset Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b14
Buzzer Output Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b15
3 - 42
Buzzer One-shot Output

Signal
---
Key Code Read Complete
Touch-cancel Signal
Forced Screen Saver
Enable Signal
Forced Screen Saver
(System alarm)
Disable Signal
Automatic Screen Saver
(User alarm)
b8
Comment display
b7
Clock display
b6
ASCII input
b5
ASCII display
b4
Data List
b3
Numerical input
b2
Numerical display
b1
---
Description
No.
b0
Touch switch
Bit
Lamp display
(Read device)

3.6.1 List of relevant object items
---
---

Trigger
Graph/Meter
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
OVERVIEW
2
Key windows
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b13
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b14
Buzzer Output Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Buzzer One-shot Output

Signal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b15
LAMP, SWITCH
b9
COMMON SETTING

3 - 43
ALARM
Signal
Buzzer Three-shot Output
Script function
Signal
Gateway function
Backlight OFF Output
Test function
complete signal
Bar code input read
Debug
signal
Bar code function
Bar code input invalid
Hardcopy
Complete Signal
Numeric Value Input Read
Recipe function
b8
Signal
Logging function
b7
Key Code Read Complete
b6
Touch-cancel Signal
b5
Forced Screen Saver
b4
Enable Signal
Scatter graph
b3
Forced Screen Saver
Statistics graph
b2
Disable Signal
Bar graph
b1
Automatic Screen Saver
Line graph
b0
Trend graph
Description
Level display
Bit
No.
Panel meter display
(Read device)
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch switch
Numerical display
Numerical input
Data list
ASCII display
ASCII input
Clock display
Comment display
User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---

User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement

(System alarm)
Touch switch
Numerical display
Numerical input
Data list
ASCII display
ASCII input
Clock display
Comment display
(User alarm)
Lamp display
---
-----
-----
(System alarm)
-----
-----
(User alarm)
-----------
-----
Parts
Alarm
Lamp,

Switch
Lamp display
---
b6

3 - 44
---
b5
Signal
---
to
Fail Access Error Reset
b0
---
Bit
--Bit
--b0
Description
No.
--Description
No.
--(Read device)
---
signal
---
Grip switch LED control
---
control signal
---
Operation switch LED
--output information
--External input and output function/
---
(Read device)
Parts
Alarm
Lamp,

Switch
System Information
1
Trigger
Graph/Meter
Recipe
action
External
I/O
OVERVIEW
Other
System Information
Logging function
Recipe function
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Debug
Test function
Gateway function
Script function
Key windows
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
signal
Grip switch LED control
b6
control signal
Scatter graph
to
b5
Operation switch LED
Statistics graph
b0
Bar graph
output information
Line graph
External input and output function/
Trend graph
Description
Level display
Bit
No.
Panel meter display
(Read device)
4
Trigger
Graph/Meter
Recipe
action
External
I/O
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Other

Scatter graph
Logging function
Recipe function
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Debug
Test function
Gateway function
Script function
Key windows
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Statistics graph
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3 - 45
ALARM
Signal
Bar graph
Fail Access Error Reset
Line graph
b0
Trend graph
Description
Level display
Bit
No.
Panel meter display
(Read device)

Lamp,
Switch
Alarm
Parts
System signal 2-1

Comment display
User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
Clock display
ASCII input
ASCII display
Data list
Numerical input
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b1
GOT Ready Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b3
Key Input Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b4
Numeric Value Input Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b5
Human Sensor Detection

Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b6
Barcode Input Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b10
Recipe Processing Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b11
Key Window Output Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b12
Hardcopy Sub-signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b13
GOT Error Detection Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b14
Numeric Value Error

Detection Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
(System alarm)
Numerical display
---
Description
Touch switch
Screen Saving Signal
Bit
No.
(User alarm)
Lamp display
b0
(Write device)

Lamp,
Switch
Alarm
Parts
Parts display
Parts movement
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
On-screen Window1 Screen No.
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Key Code Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Previous Numeric Value Input (32 bit)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Current Numeric Value Input (32 bit)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
User alarm display
Comment display
Clock display
ASCII input
ASCII display
Data list
Numerical input
---

(System alarm)
Numerical display
---
3 - 46
Touch switch
---
(Write device)
(User alarm)
Lamp display
GOT Error Code
System Information
---

External
I/O
OVERVIEW
Other
System signal 2-1

Panel meter display
Level display
Trend graph
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Logging function
Recipe function
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Debug
Test function
Gateway function
Script function
Key windows
b0
Screen Saving Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b1
GOT Ready Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b3
Key Input Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b4
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b5
Human Sensor Detection Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b6
Barcode Input Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b10
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b11
Key Window Output Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b12
Hardcopy Sub-signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b13
GOT Error Detection Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b14
Numeric Value Error

Detection Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Description
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit
No.

Trigger
Graph/Meter
Recipe
action
External
I/O
Other
Panel meter display
Level display
Trend graph
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Logging function
Recipe function
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Debug
Test function
Gateway function
Script function
Key windows
GOT Error Code
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
On-screen Window1 Screen No.
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Key Code Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
System Information
(Write device)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---

5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(Write device)
LAMP, SWITCH
action
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Recipe
3 - 47
ALARM
Trigger
Graph/Meter

Lamp,
Switch
Alarm
Parts
System signal 2-2

User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
Signal
Drive D File Accessing
Comment display
Signal
Clock display
Drive C File Accessing
ASCII input
Signal
(System alarm)
ASCII display
Drive A File Accessing
Data list
(User alarm)
Numerical input
b3
Numerical display
b2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Description
No.
b0
Touch switch
Bit
Lamp display
(Write device)
b4
Drive A Full Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b6
Drive D Full Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b7
b9
b11
b12
b14
Drive A File Access Error

Signal
Drive D File Access Error
Signal
Cursor Displaying Signal
Built-in Battery Voltage
Drop Signal
Backlight Shutoff Detection
Signal

Lamp,
Switch
Alarm
Parts
System Information
User alarm display
Parts display
Parts movement
Comment display
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---

Clock display
Drive D empty capacity informa-
ASCII input
tion (32bit)
ASCII display
Drive C empty capacity informa-
(System alarm)
Data list
tion (32bit)
Numerical input
Drive A empty capacity informa-
(User alarm)
Numerical display
ber
3 - 48
---
Description
On-screen Window 2 screen num-
tion (32bit)
Touch switch
Bit
No.
Lamp display
(Write device)
Logging function
Recipe function
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Debug
Test function
Gateway function
Script function
Key windows
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b4
Drive A Full Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b6
Drive D Full Signal
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
b11
b12
b14
Signal
Drive D File Access Error
Signal
Built-in Battery Voltage
Drop Signal
Backlight Shutoff Detection
Signal
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b9
Drive A File Access Error
action
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Key windows
Script function
Test function
Gateway function
Debug
Hardcopy
Bar code function
Recipe function
Logging function
tion (32bit)
Other
Drive D empty capacity informa-
tion (32bit)
Scatter graph
Drive C empty capacity informa-
Statistics graph
tion (32bit)
Bar graph
Drive A empty capacity informa-
Line graph
ber
Trend graph
On-screen Window 2 screen num-
Level display
(Write device)
Panel meter display
System Information
External
I/O
LAMP, SWITCH
Recipe

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Trigger
Graph/Meter
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b7
3 - 49
ALARM
Signal
Drive D File Accessing
Scatter graph
Signal
Statistics graph
Drive C File Accessing
Bar graph
b3
Signal
Line graph
b2
Drive A File Accessing
Trend graph
b0
Level display
(Write device)
Panel meter display
System signal 2-2
Other
OVERVIEW
action
External
I/O
SPECIFICATIONS
Recipe
COMMON SETTING
Trigger
Graph/Meter
3.6.2
Setting methods
1 Select [Common]
2 Double click on [System Information] in "System Environment" dialog box.

3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings according to the following explanation.
Remark
When making the settings in project work space

Double click on [System Environment] to display "System Environment" dialog box,
and then double click on [System Information] there.
Double click
3.6.3
Setting items
Set devices and functions to be used in the system information.
Example: Setting screen for GT15
3 - 50

3.6.2 Setting methods
Item
Description
Set this item to control GOT operations with the device of controller.*1
If a device No. is assigned to the system signal 1-1, the devices of the following Nos. will be consecutively
Read Device
OVERVIEW
assigned to the items following to the system signal 1-1 automatically.

Check only the items to be used. (The unchecked items will not be set.)
Set this item to write GOT operations to controller.*1
If the device No. is assigned to the system signal 2-1 or the base screen currently displayed is set, the
Write Device
devices of the following Nos. will be consecutively assigned to the items following to the system signal 2-1.
Select All/Unselect
Selects/Deselects all the items selected in [Write Device].
Delete
Deletes the set read and write devices.
The GOT internal device (GD) can also be used.

When not communicate with the controller, specify the internal device.
3
COMMON SETTING
Application example
1 Confirm the error occurred in GOT

The code of the error occurred in GOT can be confirmed.
The error codes within the range of error code 300 to 499 are displayed.
For the details of error code, refer to the following manuals.
User's Manual
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GT
Error occurs
Normal (cause of error removed) *2
GOT status
GOT error detection signal
(System Signal 2-1. b13)
OFF
"0"
Error code storage *1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GOT error code

(Write device)
ON
"0" is stored.
ON
OFF *3
GOT error reset signal

(System Signal 1-1. b13)
*1.
When multiple errors occur simultaneously, the latest error code will be stored.
*2.
The "GOT Error Code" is not cleared automatically even if removing the error source.
Clear the error code by using the GOT error reset signal.
Switch the "GOT Error Reset Signal" off after confirming the "GOT Error Detection Signal" is switched off.
If the "GOT Error Rest Signal" is ON, the "GOT Error Code" will be reset when an error occurs the next.
LAMP, SWITCH
*3.
Error Reset Method

An error can be reset by using GOT as explained below.
When the cause of error is removed, error can be reset by touching the touch
switch.
Example:Create the touch switch that keeps GOT error reset signal ON only while
being touched.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3.6.4
8
ON
GOT error reset signal
(System signal1-1 "b13")
OFF

3.6.4 Application example
3 - 51
ALARM
*1
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Confirm the input key code by input key

The input key code can be confirmed by input key (Numeric value input, ASCII input, touch switch).
Key input
Numeric value input,
ASCII input, touch switch input
11
12
13
ON
Input key signal

(System Signal 2-1 "b3")
ON
OFF
11
Input key code

(Write device)
12
13
ON *1
Input key read complete signal

(System Signal 1-1 "b3")
OFF *2
*1.
When key input is completed, the stored key code is held.
*2.
Switch the "Key Code Read Complete Signal" OFF after confirming the "Input Key Signal" is switched off.
When [Input key read complete signal] turns ON, the input key code signal will be cleared.
If the "Key Code Read Complete Signal" is ON, the stored key code will be reset at the next key input.
3 Confirmation of the numeric value input determination timing

The timing of which the input value was determined can be confirmed with the user ID written in the
numerical input No.
Key input of
the numeric
value input
Determine
ON
OFF
Numeric Value
Input Signal
(System Signal 2-1.b4)
Numeric Value
Input Number
(Write device)
Numeric Value
Input Read
Complete Signal
(System Signal 1-1.b4)
Stores "0"
Stores the user ID No.

ON
*1
OFF*2
*1
After the numeric value input determination, the stored user ID No. is held.
*2
Switch the "Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal" OFF after confirming the "Numeric Value Input Signal" is
The Numeric Value Input Signal is cleared by the "Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal" ON.
switched off.
If the "Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal" is ON, the user ID will not be stored or the Numeric Value
Input Signal cannot be switched ON.
3 - 52

1
The cursor's display position can be confirmed by writing the data of the object (numeric value input
function, ASCII input function) in which cursor is located into the device.
The object information to be written are classified into the following types:
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: Operation example of cursor display

50
1200
User ID No.
Object ID No.
: None
: 10001
50
50
50
1200
1200
1200
1) Display cursor
2) Erase cursor
3) Display cursor
3) Displayed
1) Displayed
Cursor status
3
COMMON SETTING
: 15
: 10000
2) Erased *2
Stored user ID
Current Cursor Display

User ID (Write device)
"15"
"0"
"0" *3
Current Cursor Display

Object ID (Write device)
"10000"
"0"
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Stored object ID
"10001"
Stored object ID
Previous Cursor Display
Object ID (Write device)
"10000"
"0"
When switching screen *1

*1
If a cursor is not displayed when switching screens, "0" will be stored.
*2
The stored user ID and object ID can be held even if a cursor is erased.
*3
If a cursor is displayed at the object (numeric input function, ASCII input function) with a user ID unset, the cursor
*4
The Current or Previous Cursor Display User ID operates with the ASCII input function if the GOT internal device
position numeric value input will be "0".

GS450.b2 is switched ON.
Deleting the stored user ID and object ID when a cursor is deleted.

Turn ON the GOT internal device (monitor common control: (GS450.b3) to store "0"
when a cursor is deleted.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
User ID No.
Object ID No.
LAMP, SWITCH
Object ID
: Can be set to any object.

Set user ID on setting dialog box of each object.
: Automatically set when setting an object with GT Desiger2.

3 - 53
ALARM
User ID
OVERVIEW
4 Confirm cursor's display position
Remark
Object ID
Object ID will be set automatically when object is set.
The object ID cannot be changed by user.
(1) Method of confirming object ID
Object ID can be confirmed on the GT Designer2 screen.
To display object ID, select [View]
[Options] menu to display the Preferences
dialog box, on which check the [Object ID] check box on the View tab.
Object ID not displayed
Object ID displayed
For details of the above operation, refer to the following manual.

Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Chapter
5 Screen Configuration of GT Designer2)

(2) Methods of changing object ID
If the arranged object is deleted, the object ID will change automatically.
Object ID changes from

10002 to 10001
Deleted
3 - 54

1
(1) Disable screen saver function
The screen saver function, which is set within the GOT utility, is designed to turn off the screen
display if the GOT is not touched within a specified time. This function prevents the screen
performance from deteriorating over its operable life.
By turning [Automatic screen saver disable signal] ON in the system information, the function that
is set within the GOT utility (Setup) is disabled
D1 10
D2 20
Example 2: Disables screen saver function to start even after the specified period has passed.
D1 10
D2 20
Set screen saver

period to 30 minutes
Switches
System
Signal
1-1.b0 ON
No. 25
D1 10
D2 20
Screen does not goes to screen

saver mode after 30 minutes have passed
(The set time is made invalid to keep the
monitor screen displayed)
(2) Erase screen

By turning [Forced screen saver enable signal] ON, the displayed monitor screen can be erased.
While the bit is ON, monitor screen will not appear even when the GOT screen is touched.
No. 25
D1 10
D2 20
Switches
System
Signal
1-1.b1 ON
Screen disappeared
In addition, the monitor screen can be displayed by switching the "Forced Screen Saver Touchcancel Signal" ON and touching the screen to cancel the forced screen saver function started with
the "Forced Screen Saver Enabled Signal".
Example: Displaying the monitor screen that is forcibly erased
D1 10
D2 20
Switches System
Signal 1-1.b2 ON
Switches System
Signal 1-1.b1 ON
The screen is erased.
No. 25
D1 10
D2 20
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
No. 25
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example: Erase displayed monitor screen
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
No. 25
COMMON SETTING
Screen appears
Screen disappeared
LAMP, SWITCH
No. 25
The screen is displayed

by touching the screen.

3 - 55
ALARM
Switches
System
Signal
1-1.b0 ON
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Example 1: Display the monitor screen erased by automatic screen saver function
OVERVIEW
5 Control of Screen Display
(3) Display control by human sensor (Specific to GT1595-X and T1585-S)

The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the
necessity to touch the GOT.
This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer
to the GOT.
Approach
Go away Approach
Go away
Operator motion
"Sensor detect"
ON
OFF
Human Sensor
Detection Signal
"System Signal 2-1.b5"
"Sensor
OFF delay"
"Sensor
OFF delay"
Screen saving mode released

Screen saving
mode active
Screen saving
"Screen save time"

When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as "Sensor OFF delay", the "Human Sensor Detection Signal"
turns OFF.
When the time set as the "Screen save time" elapses after the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" turns OFF, the GOT enters
the screen saving mode.
Make the human sensor settings (such as "Sensor detect" and "Sensor OFF delay") using the GOT
utility.
Refer to the following manual for the GOT utility.
GT15 User's Manual (Chapter 11 Display and Operation Setting (GOT Setup))
It is possible to make the settings so that the GOT will be released from the screen
saving mode only when human movement is detected; the screen saving mode will not
be released by touch or externally.
Approach
Go away Approach
Go away
Operator motion
"Sensor detect"
ON
OFF
Human Sensor
Detection Signal
"Sensor
OFF delay"
"Sensor
OFF delay"
ON
OFF
Forced Screen Saver

Enable Signal
Screen saving mode released
Screen saving
Screen saving
mode active
Associate the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" with "Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal" in the
sequence program to control the screen saving mode.
With this setting, the GOT enters the screen saving mode after the Sensor OFF
delay time elapses, regardless of the screen saving time.
3 - 56

1
Remark
GOT Screen Control
Priority
Low
OVERVIEW
The following shows the priority among functions that control the screen status
(Displayed/ Not displayed):
High
D1 10
Forced Screen Saver

Touch-cancel Signal
No. 25
D2 20
With screen saver function
D2 20
No. 25
D1 10
D2 20
ON
Screen save function of
utility is disabled.
ON
Forces the screen to go
into the screen saver
mode. The screen saver
settings, the status of
screen saver disable signal
and human sensor are
irrelevant.
ON
Forcibly cancels the screen
saver mode by touching.
The status of forced screen
saver enable signal is
irrelevant.
Without screen saver

function
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
D1 10
D2 20
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
No. 25
D1 10
SPECIFICATIONS
No. 25
Forced Screen Saver

Enable Signal
COMMON SETTING
Screen Saver Disable

Signal

3 - 57
ALARM
Display Screen
Screen Saver Function

(Utility)
DANGER
Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank,
while the input of the touch switch (s) still remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the display is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT display from this mode by touching the display screen, which may cause a touch switch
to operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
The monitor screen disappears even when the screensaver mode is not set.
The monitor screen will not come back on by touching the display, even if the GOT is in screensaver
mode.
The screensaver operation status can be confirmed by the display status of the POWER LED.
Lit in green:Power is correctly supplied
Lit in orange:Screen saving and backlight off
Blinks in orange/green:Blown back light bulb
Not lit:Power is not supplied
(4) Relation between screen saving functions and Key-In Disable Signal
The relation between screen saving functions and Key-In Disable Signal is as follows.
Forced Screen Saver Enable
Screen saving function
Status of screen
ON
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Forced screen saving
OFF
ON
ON
Key input prohibited
OFF
OFF
ON
Key input prohibited
OFF
ON
OFF
Screen saving
OFF
OFF
OFF
Normal display
Signal
3.6.5
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using system information

Do not use a special register as a read device or write device, as it is an internal device of which
specifications are defined within PLC CPU, and cannot be used as a normal internal device for system
information.
If a special registered is used as described above, GOT may not operate correctly.
2 Precautions for using system information

Do not write to the device set as a read device directly from controller.
The write device information saved in the internal of the GOT wil be overwritten.
3 - 58

3.6.5 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
3.7 Communication Interface Setting

SPECIFICATIONS
Setting channel No. and driver of communication interfaces

When using the GOT for the first time, be sure to set the channel No. and driver for
the communication interfaces referring to this section and download the settings into
the GOT.
When downloading a project data without making this setting, set the channel No.,
driver and other items on [Communication Setting] of the utility.
GT
4
2 The system environment dialog box is displayed. Double-click [Communication Settings].
3 The setting dialog box is displayed. Refer to the description below to continue the setting.
When setting from project workspace

Double-clicking [System Environment] displays the system environment setting
dialog box. Double-click [Communication Settings].
LAMP, SWITCH
Double click
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
1 Select [Common]
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Settings
3.7 Communication Interface Setting (Communication Settings)

3.7.1 Settings
3 - 59
ALARM
3.7.1
User's Manual
3
COMMON SETTING
Set up communications between the GOT and the controller.
3.7.2
Setting items
Make settings for communications between the GOT and controller.

Specify the same driver as the one installed in GOT for each interface.
(Example 1: The screen for setting the GT15)
(Example 2: The screen for setting the GT11)
Item
Use Communication Settings
Description
Be sure to check this to perform communication settings.
Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.
Standard I/F Settings
GT15
: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11
: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3
Set the channel No. from among the numbers shown below.
CH No.
: Not attached or not used even if attached
1 to 4
: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 (with GT11, only "1" can be
: Used for connecting a bar code reader
: Used for connecting Host(PC)
set)

3 - 60

3.7.2 Setting items
Item
Description
I/F
The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.
None
Standard I/F
Host(PC)
OVERVIEW
Set the driver for the device connected.
Driver
The driver for a connected device
Make detail settings such as a drives transmission speed and data length.
Settings
Clicking the Detail Setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each driver.
Detail Setting
Set the items required for each driver.

This section
Communication Detail Settings dialog box)

SPECIFICATIONS
(
Extend I/F
Set a channel No. and driver of the interface of the extension unit attached to the GOT.
Setting
Set the channel No. from among the numbers shown below.
: Not attached or not used even if attached
1 to 4
: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 (with GT11, only "1" can be set)
: For the gateway function and Ethernet download
COMMON SETTING
CH No.
Set the driver for the device connected.

Driver
Not used
The driver for a connected device
Set the details of the driver, such as stage No. and slot No.
Clicking the Detail Setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each driver.
Detail Setting
(1) Setting of channel. No. 2 to 4

Set channel No. 2 to No. 4 when using the multi-channel function.
For the communication setting when using the multi-channel function, refer to the
following.
(2) Drivers
The drivers displayed vary depending on the setting of the controller type and [CH
No.] of the project.
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm the controller type and [CH
No.] settings.
Standard I/F and Extended I/F
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Standard I/F and extend I/F in the communication settings indicate the parts shown
in the figures below.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
This section
LAMP, SWITCH
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Set the items required for each driver.
Standard I/F2
Extend I/F1
Standard I/F1
Extend I/F2
Standard I/F
GT11

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 61
ALARM
GT15
1 Communication Detail Settings dialog box

The following table shows the list of connection type and the communication detail settings that are
displayed.
Item
Displayed communication detail settings

(communication driver name)
Bus (Q)
Reference
This Section (1)
Bus connection
Bus (A/QnA)
A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS
This Section (2)

C6*
This Section (3)
MELSEC-FX
This Section (4)
A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS C6*
This Section (3)
AJ71QC24
This Section (5)
AJ71C24/UC24
This Section (6)
MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)
MELSECNET/10
This Section (7)
CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)
CC-Link(ID)
This Section (8)
CC-Link connection (via G4)
CC-Link(G4)
This Section (9)
Ethernet connection
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
This Section (10)
OMRON PLC connection
OMRON SYSMAC
This Section (11)
KEYENCE PLC connection
KEYENCE KV-700/1000
This Section (12)
SHARP PLC connection
SHARP JW
This Section (13)
TOSHIBA PLC connection
TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
This Section (14)
HITACHI HIDIC H
This Section (15)
HITACHI HIDIC (Protocol 2)
This Section (16)
MATSUSHITA PLC connection
MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP
This Section (17)
YASKAWA PLC connection
YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
This Section (18)
YOKOGAWA PLC connection
YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3
This Section (19)
AB SLC500, AB 1:N
This Section (20)
AB MicroLogix
This Section (21)
SIEMENS S7-300/400
This Section (22)
SIEMENS S7-200
This Section (23)
Microcomputer connection
Computer
This Section (24)
OMRON temperature controller connection
OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO
This Section (25)
YAMATAKE temperature controller connection
YAMATAKE SDC/DMC
This Section (26)
RKC temperature controller connection
RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS)
This Section (27)
Inverter connection
FREQROL 500/700
This Section (28)
Servo amplifier connection
MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M
This Section (29)
Barcode reader connection
Barcode
This Section (30)
A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS C6*
This Section (3)
MELSECNET/10
This Section (7)
CC-Link(ID)
This Section (8)
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
This Section (10)
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71/Gateway
This Section (31)
Gateway
This Section (32)
Ethernet download
This Section (33)
HITACHI PLC connection
Allen-Bradley PLC connection
SIEMENS PLC connection
CNC connection
Gateway function
Ethernet download
3 - 62

3.7.2 Setting items
(1) Bus (Q)
Stage No.
Slot No.
Description
Setting range
Specifies the number of stages to be
1 to 7
extended.
<Default : 1>
Specifies the slot number.
OVERVIEW
Item
0 to 9
<Default : 0>
SPECIFICATIONS
2
(2) Bus (A/QnA)
Item
Slot No.
Setting range
Specifies the number of stages to be
1 to 7
extended.
<Default : 1>
Specifies the slot number.
0 to 7
<Default : 0>
COMMON SETTING
Stage No.
Description
(3) A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24,MELDAS C6

Item
Description
Setting range
Sets when changing the transmission

communication devices.
Transmission
Speed
When the transmission speed exceeds
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
the maximum transmission speed to
115200 (BPS)
which the communication device
<Default : 115200bps>
supports, the transmission speed will be
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
speed of the communication with
the maximum transmission speed of the
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
communication device.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 63
ALARM
(4) MELSEC-FX
Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
115200 (BPS)
< Default : 38400bps>
(5) AJ71QC24
Item
Transmission
Speed
3 - 64
Description
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 / 115200 (BPS)

3.7.2 Setting items
(6) AJ71C24/UC24
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 (BPS)
OVERVIEW
Item
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
(7) MELSECNET/10
Item
Description
Setting range
performed when a communication error

Retry
occurs.
When receiving no response after
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Sets the number of retries to be

0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 3 Times>
retries, the communication times out.

Set time required for communication
3 to 90 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Timeout Time
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 65
ALARM
(8) CC-LINK(ID)
Item
Description
Setting range
Set the number of retries to be

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 3 Times>

Timeout Time
Set time required for communication
3 to 90 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>
(9) CC-Link(G4)
Item
Transmission
Speed
3 - 66
Description

3.7.2 Setting items
Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps >
(10) QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
Description
Setting range
GOT NET No.
Sets the network No. of GOT
GOT PLC No.
Sets the station No. of GOT
GOT IP
Address
Sets the IP address of GOT.
1 to 239
<Default : 1>
OVERVIEW
Item
1 to 64
<Default : 1>
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 192.168.0.18>
Label
QJ71E71 /
Sets the port No. used by GOT to
1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
AJ71(Q)E71
connect with Ethernet module.
<Default : 5001>
Ethernet
1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
Download
connect with Ethernet download.
<Default : 5014>
Gateway
The IP address registration of the GOT)
Sets the router address of default

gateway to which GOT is connected.
(Via router only)
Sets when using subnetwork. (Via router
Subnet Mask
only) Operates with the default value

when not using subnetwork.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
COMMON SETTING
Default
This section
<Default : 0.0.0.0>
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 255.255.255.0>

Retry
occurs. When receiving no response

after retries, the communication times
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 3 Times>
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
out.
startup until GOT starts the

communication with the PLC CPU.
Timeout Time
Delay Time
3 to 255 (Sec.)
<Default : 3 Sec.>
Sets time required for communication
3 to 90 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>
Sets the delay time to lower the load of
0 to 10000 (
the network/PLC connected.
<Default : 0 ms>
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Specifies the time period from the GOT

Startup Time
SPECIFICATIONS
Select from IP
10ms)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 67
ALARM
(11) OMRON SYSMAC

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 / 115200 (BPS)
Specifies the host address (station No.

Host Address
Setting range
of the PLC connected to GOT) in the

network of GOT.
0 to 31
<Default : 0>
* In [Detail setting] of the utility, the delay time to lower the load of the network/PLC connected
can be set.
(12) KEYENCE KV-700/1000

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
115200 (BPS)
<Default: 9600 bps>
Sets this item when changing the data

Data Bit
length used for communication with

Stop Bit
7bit/8bit
<Default: 8bit>
Specifies the stop bit length during
1bit/2bit
communication.
<Default: 1bit>
Specifies whether parity is checked or

Parity
Setting range
not. If parity is checked, specifies the

format for parity check.
None/Even/Odd
<Default: Even>

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (times)
<Default: 0 time>

Timeout Time
3 to 30 (sec.)
timeout.
<Default: 3 sec>

Host Address
of the adapter to which GOT is

connected) in the connected network.
Delay Time
0 to 9
<Default: 0>
0 to 30 ( 10 ms)
<Default: 0ms>
Specifies whether to use station No.

Station No.
during communication.
Yes/No
Selection
When specifying with [Yes], the station
<Default: No>
No. is fixed to [0].
3 - 68

3.7.2 Setting items
(13) SHARP JW
speed

Startup Time

Delay Time
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 (BPS)
OVERVIEW
Transmission
Description
3 to 30 (Sec.)
<Default : 3 Sec.>
Sets for adjusting the communication
0 to 30 (
demanding timing of the GOT.
<Default : 0 ms>
10ms)
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
COMMON SETTING
(14) TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
4800 / 9600 / 19200 (BPS)

<Default : 9600bps>
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 69
ALARM
(15) HITACHI HIDIC H

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400
(BPS)

Station No.
Yes / No
Selection
When specifying with "Yes", the station
<Default : Yes>
No. is fixed to "0".
(16) HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol 2)

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400
(BPS)

Station No.
Yes / No
Selection
<Default : Yes>
3 - 70

3.7.2 Setting items
(17) MATSUSHITA MEWNET-FP

Item
Speed
57600 / 115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400/

OVERVIEW
Transmission
Description
7bit / 8bit
<Default : 8bit>

Retry
occurs.
SPECIFICATIONS

0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>

Host Address
<Default : 1>
COMMON SETTING
network of GOT.
1 to 31
(18) YASKAWA GL/CP9200(SH/H)/CP9300MS
Speed
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 (BPS)

Startup Time

Host Address

network of GOT.
Delay Time
Setting range
3 to 30 (Sec.)
<Default : 3 Sec.>
1 to 31
<Default : 1>
0 to 30 (
demanding timing of the GOT.
<Default : 0ms>*1 *2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Transmission
4
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
10ms)
*1 Set a value 30 ms or larger when CP9200 (H) is used.

*2 When CP9300MS (MC compatible) is used, the value to be set should be as indicated below.
If port 0 is used: 10 ms or larger

LAMP, SWITCH
If port 1 is used: 30 ms or larger
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 71
ALARM
(19) YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 / 115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
<Default : 8bit>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 1bit>

Sum Check
7bit / 8bit

Parity
Setting range
None / Even / Odd

<Default : None>
Specifies whether to execute sum check
Done / None
or not during communication.
<Default : Done>

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>

Timeout Time
Delay Time
3 to 30 (Second)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Second>
0 to 30 (
demanding time of the GOT.
<Default : 0 ms>
10ms)
(20) AB SLC500, AB 1:N

Item
Transmission
Speed
Adapter
Address
Description
Specifies the adapter address (station
No. of PLC to be monitored by GOT) in
the connected network.
Host Address

3 - 72

3.7.2 Setting items
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 (BPS)
0 to 31
<Default : 0>
1 to 31
<Default : 1>
(21) AB MicroLogix
Speed
Sum Check
Type
(BPS)

Adapter
Address

Host Address
Setting range
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400

OVERVIEW
Transmission
Description
BCC / CRC16
<Default : BCC>
0 to 31
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
<Default : 0>
1 to 31
<Default : 1>
COMMON SETTING
(22) SIEMENS S7-300/400
Speed
Adapter
Address

Host Address

Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 (BPS)
1 to 31
<Default : 1>
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Transmission
Description
1 to 31
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
<Default : 2>
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 73
ALARM
(23) SIEMENS S7-200

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
9600/19200/38400/57600/
115200 (BPS)
<Default: 19200 bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
Address
1bit/2bit
<Default: 1bit>

Host Address
<Default: 8bit>
communication.

Adapter
7bit/8bit

Parity
Setting range

None/Even/Odd
<Default: Even>
0 to 31
<Default: 0>
1 to 31
<Default: 2>
(24) Computer
Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 / 115200 (BPS)

Data Bit

Stop Bit
1bit / 2bit
<Default : 1bit>

of the GOT to which a controller is
3 - 74
<Default : 7bit>
communication.
Host Address
7bit / 8bit

Parity
Setting range
None / Even / Odd

<Default : Even>
0 to 31
<Default : 0>
1 to 15
Format
Selects communication format.
Interrupt Data
Specifies the number of the interrupt
1 / 2 / 4 (Byte)
Byte
data bytes.
<Default : 1byte>

3.7.2 Setting items
<Default : 1>
(25) OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL

Item
115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
7bit / 8bit
<Default : 7bit>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 2bit>

Parity

OVERVIEW
Speed
Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission
Description
None / Even / Odd

<Default : Even>

occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>
COMMON SETTING

Retry

3 to 30 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>

Delay Time
the network/temperature control unit

connected.
Format
0 to 30
<Default : 2ms>*1
1 to 2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Timeout Time
<Default : 1>
*1 Set a value 5 ms or larger when E5ZN is used.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 75
ALARM
(26) YAMATAKE SDC/DMC

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
7bit / 8bit
<Default : 8bit>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 1bit>

Parity
Setting range

None / Even / Odd

<Default : Even>

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>

Timeout Time
3 to 30 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>

Delay Time

connected.
Format
*1 For Delay Time, set a value 10 ms or larger.

Communication may be disabled if 0 ms is set.
3 - 76

3.7.2 Setting items
0 to 30 ( 10 ms)
<Default : 10ms>*1
1 to 2
<Default : 1>
(27) RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS)
115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
7bit / 8bit
<Default : 8bit>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 1bit>

Parity

OVERVIEW
Speed
Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission
Description
None / Even / Odd

<Default : Even>

occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>
COMMON SETTING

Retry

Timeout Time
3 to 30 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>

Delay Time

connected.
0 to 30
<Default : 0>
(28) FREQROL 500/700

Item
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 1bit>
None / Even / Odd

Data Bit

Stop Bit

Parity
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Speed
Setting range

7bit / 8bit
<Default : 7bit>
<Default : Odd>
LAMP, SWITCH
Transmission
Description

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 0 Times>

3 to 30 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>

Delay Time

connected.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Timeout Time
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
3 to 30
<Default : 0>

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 77
ALARM
(29) MELSERVO-J3, J2S/M

Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
Setting range
9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 /
115200 (BPS)

Station No.
Yes / No
Selection
<Default : Yes>
(30) Barcode
Item
Transmission
Speed
Description
4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 /
57600 / 115200 (BPS)
<Default : 9600bps>

Data Bit

Stop Bit
<Default : 8bit>
1bit / 2bit
communication.
<Default : 1bit>

3 - 78
7bit / 8bit

Parity
Setting range

3.7.2 Setting items
None / Even / Odd

<Default : Even>
(31) QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71/Gateway
Description
Setting range
GOT NET No.
GOT PLC No.
GOT IP
Address
1 to 239
<Default : 1>
OVERVIEW
Item
1 to 64
<Default : 1>
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 192.168.0.18>
Label
QJ71E71 /
1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
AJ71(Q)E71
<Default : 5001>
Download
Default
Gateway

(Via router only)
(Via router only)
1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
<Default : 5014>
COMMON SETTING
Ethernet
This section
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 0.0.0.0>
Sets when using sub network. (Via

Subnet Mask
SPECIFICATIONS
Select from IP
router only)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Operates with the default value when
<Default : 255.255.255.0>
not using sub network.

Retry
occurs.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 3 Times>

Timeout Time
Delay Time
3 to 255 (Sec)
<Default : 3 Sec>
3 to 90 (Sec)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec>
0 to 10000 (
<Default : 0 ms>
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Srartup Time
10ms)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 79
ALARM
(32) Gateway
Item
Description
Setting range
GOT NET No.
GOT PLC No.
GOT IP
Address
1 to 239
<Default : 1>
1 to 64
<Default : 1>
0.0.0.0. to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 192.168.0.18>
Select from IP
Label
Ethernet
1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
Download
<Default : 5014>
Default
Gateway
This section

(Via router only)
0.0.0.0. to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 0.0.0.0>

Subnet Mask
router only)
0.0.0.0. to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 255.255.255.0>

Retry
occurs.
0 to 5 (Times)
<Default : 3 Times>

Srartup Time

Timeout Time
Delay Time
3 - 80
3 to 255 (Sec)
<Default : 3 Sec>
3 to 90 (Sec.)
timeout.
<Default : 3 Sec.>
0 to 10000 (
<Default : 0 ms>

3.7.2 Setting items
10ms)
(33) Ethernet Download
Address
Select from IP
Label
Description
Setting range
This section
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 192.168.0.18>
The IP
OVERVIEW
Item
GOT IP
----
address registration of the GOT)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534
Download
<Default : 5014>
Default
Gateway

(Via router only)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 0.0.0.0>

Subnet Mask
router only)
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
<Default : 255.255.255.0>
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Ethernet
3
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 81
ALARM
2 The IP address registration of the GOT

The IP address used by the GOT is assigned to a unique name.
If selecting a IP label from [Select from IP Label], the IP address corresponding to the IP label will be set
to [GOT IP Address] automatically.
The maximum of 255 IP labels can be set.
(1) Settings
1 Click the List... button on the Communication Detail Settings dialog box.
2 The IP Label List dialog box is displayed.
Input [IP Label] and [IP Address].
3 After adding [IP Label] and [IP Address], click the Close button to close the IP Label List dialog
box.
4 Select the IP label registered by
Settings dialog box.
from [Select from IP Label] on the Communication Detail
5 The IP address corresponding to the selected IP label is set to [GOT IP Address].

(2) Setting items
Item
3 - 82
Description
Add
Adds a new IP label. Up to 255 IP labels can be added.
Delete
Deletes the IP label being selected.
Delete All
Deletes all IP labels.
Close
Closes the IP Label List dialog box.

3.7.2 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
(3) Applications
The registered IP labels can be used for the following.
When setting a GOT IP address on the Communication Detail Settings.
(
This section
When setting a GOT IP address in the case of the GOT communication with the Ethernet
(Ethernet download)
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Chapter 8
Using the registered IP label and IP address on another PC
3
COMMON SETTING
The registered IP label and IP address are not saved in the project. (saved in the
PC)
To use the project in another PC, set the IP label and IP address again.
SPECIFICATIONS
(
TRANSFERRING DATA))
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.2 Setting items
3 - 83
ALARM
3.7.3
Precautions
1 Priority used when settings are done by utility

Only the detail settings of the communication settings can be also set by the GOT's utility.
(Note that IP labels and IP addresses can be set only by the GT Designer2.)
If the settings done according to this section are downloaded to the GOT after setting by the utility on
the GOT, the communication settings explained here become effective.
If the communication settings are downloaded to the GOT and then changed by the utility, the
changes made by the utility become effective.
When screen data are uploaded from the GOT, data changed by the utility are uploaded.
2 Precautions for setting Extend I/F

When using the following communication unit, set CH No. and Driver for the corresponding Extend I/F.
The GOT will not communicate with the controller if CH No. or Driver is set to the un-corresponding
Extend I/F.
: Communication enabled
: Communication disabled
Extend I/F to be set
The communication unit used

Extend I/F 1-1
Extend I/F 1-2
Bus connection unit

(GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL,
GT15-75ABUS2L)
MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z)
CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
3 Drivers and functions for the Ethernet communication

When the Ethernet communication unit is mounted to the GT15, the Ethernet connection, gateway
function and Ethernet download are enabled.
The functions enabled differ according to the driver set in the Communication Settings.
: Enabled
: Disabled
Function
CH No.
Driver name
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71/Gateway
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
Gateway
Ethernet download
*1
Ethernet connection*1
Gateway function*2
When using the Ethernet connection, the Ethernet setting has to be made.
For details, refer to the following manual.
*2
When using the gateway function, the setting for the gateway function has to be made.
3 - 84

3.7.3 Precautions
Enternet download
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Select a driver compatible with the function to be used.

When using the gateway function, for example, mount the option function board and
install Option OS (Gateway) to the GOT.
If setting the driver of [QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71/Gateway] or [Gateway] without the
operations above, an error occurs.
OVERVIEW
Selecting a driver
4 The bar code function setting of the GT Designer2

When connecting a bar code reader, the bar code function setting has to be made.
Be sure to install Extended function OS (Barcode) to the GOT when using the bar code function.
3
COMMON SETTING
Section 13.2 Bar Code Function
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.7.3 Precautions
3 - 85
ALARM
3.8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations

(GOT Setup)
Sets screen save time, whether to set clock setting and the buzzer sound length long/short.
These settings can also be set by the utility.
3.8.1
Settings
1 Select [Common]
[System Environment] menu.
2 The system environment setting dialog box is displayed. Double-click "GOT Setup".
3 The setting dialog box is displayed. Refer to the following description to perform the setting.
Remark
Performing the setting in project workspace

The system environment setting dialog box is displayed by double-clicking "System
Environment". Double-click "GOT Setup."
Double click
3 - 86
3.8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations (GOT Setup)

3.8.1 Settings
3.8.2
Setting items
OVERVIEW
Set the display and operations of GOT.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Time
Set the opening screen time (0 to 60s, default: 5s) when the GOT main unit is started up.
Save Screen
Set the time to turn off the display of the monitor screen by the screen saving function (0 to 60min, default:
Time
0). If set to "0", the screen is displayed constantly.

Specify if turn off the backlight by the screen saving function at the same time as the display of the monitoring
screen is turned off.
Screen Save
Backlight
ON
: The backlight is not turned off.
OFF
: The backlight is turned on (default).
The Screen Save Backlight behaviors differently depending on the setting of the Backlight OFF output signal
(System Signal 1-1.b7).

For details, refer to the Backlight OFF output signal (System Signal 1-1.b7) of the following manual.
Section 3.6 System Information Setting
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display
LAMP, SWITCH
Opening Screen
Check when performing setup.

3.8.2 Setting items
3 - 87
ALARM
Use GOT Setup
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
Description
Specify not using the function for matching time with the controller or the method of using the function.
None
Adjust (default)
Clock Setting
Broadcast
Adjust/Broadcast
For the details of the function for matching time, refer to the following.
Buzzer Volume
Windows Move
Buzzer
Operation
Specify the length of buzzer sounded at touch key input (SHORT/LONG) or not using buzzer (default: Short).
Specify whether to sound buzzer or not when move a window.
ON
: Sound buzzer (default)
OFF
: Not sound buzzer
Specify the key position for calling the utility from the monitoring screen.
Utility Call Key
One or two points out of four corners can be specified freely. At least a point must be specified.*1*2
When the key position is set at one point, the utility screen is displayed by pressing the key position for
pressing time.
Pressing
Time
When the key position is set at one point, set the time to keep pressing the key position to display the utility
screen.
(0 to 5 sec, default: 0)
MELSEC-Q/QnA
Select the device where the ladder data of Q/QnA ladder monitor is stored. (C: Built-in flash memory / A:
Ladder Monitor
Standard CF card / None, Default: C: Built-in flash memory)

When using the multi-channel function, specify the channel No the controller for which the FA transparent
Transparent
function is executed.
(Default: CH1)
3 - 88

3.8.2 Setting items
*1 Setting the utility call key positions

(a black circle enclosed with a square) indicates that the area is the utility call key. By clicking the
To cancel the utility call key, click the
area to change it to a square
OVERVIEW
areas at the four corners of the screen, the areas change to
When
is displayed at two corners, if specifying utility call key on another square area, follow the
procedure below.
SPECIFICATIONS
Click the utility call key to cancel.
COMMON SETTING
The corner clicked is changed to a square

. Click the square
to set for a new
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
utility call key.
, and
specified to a utility call key.
*2 Applicable setting positions of utility call key

With GT1595-X, only one point of utility call key can be set.
When the GOT type is changed to "GT15**-X (1024x768)" while setting two points of utility call key, the
setting of utility call key is changed to one point.
After changing the GOT type to "GT15**-X (1024x768)", set the setting of the utility call key again.
1 Priority with utility setting

The setting described in this section can also be set by the utility of GOT.
If the setting described in this section is performed by the utility and then downloaded to GOT, the
setting becomes effective.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Precautions
If the setting is downloaded to GOT and then changed by the utility, the setting changed by the utility
becomes effective.
If screen data are uploaded from GOT, the content changed by the utility is reflected onto the data.
3.8.3 Precautions
3 - 89
ALARM
3.8.3
LAMP, SWITCH
The corner clicked is changed to
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3.9 Setting GOT Clock Data (Clock Setting)
Set the method for matching clock data between the GOT and the external device.
There following three methods:
Item
Description
Adjust
Make the clock data of the GOT matched with those of the external device.
Broadcast
Make the clock data of the external device matched with those of the GOT.
Make the clock data of the GOT and multiple controllers matched with those of
Adjust/Broadcast
one controller.
The adjust and broadcast functions are used independently meeting the
situation.
Refer to the following for the clock data matching methods and decide which method to apply.
3 - 90
3.9 Setting GOT Clock Data (Clock Setting)
1
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Make settings for displaying a BMP screen at the GOT startup.

The logo displayed at the GOT startup can be changed.
The BMP screen specified is

displayed at the GOT startup.
COMMON SETTING
1 The startup logo setting procedure

Set the startup logo in the following procedure.
Section 3.10.1 Settings)
2 Specify a BMP file to be used for the startup logo. (
Section 3.10.2 Setting items)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1 Open the setting dialog box. (
3 Download the startup logo to the GOT.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Check.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Click the Download

button.
4 The specified BMP screen is displayed as the startup logo at the GOT startup.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 - 91
ALARM
2 The startup logo deleting procedure

Delete the startup logo in the following procedure.
(1) Deleting the startup logo at the project data downloading
1 Open the setting dialog box.(
Section 3.10.1 Settings)
2 Uncheck [Select Startup Logo] on the setting dialog box.

(
3 Download the project of the changed setting to the GOT.
4 Check [Delete all old data in Project folder] at the downloading.
Check.
(2) Deleting the startup logo on the Drive information

The startup logo can be deleted at [Drive information].
Check.
Click the
Delete button.
3 - 92
3.10.1 Settings
OVERVIEW
2 As the System Environment setting dialog box appears, double-click on [Startup Logo].
When making the settings in the project workspace

Double-click on [System Environment] and the System Environment setting dialog
box appears, then double-click on [Startup Logo].
COMMON SETTING
Double click
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS

3.10.1 Settings
3 - 93
ALARM
1 Select [Common]
3.10.2 Setting items

Set the screen to be displayed at the GOT startup.
Item
Description
Check this item when displaying a BMP file on the GOT.
Select Startup Logo
After checking, select a BMP file to be displayed on the GOT with [Select Image].Without selecting
any BMP file with [Select Image], the startup logo will not be displayed.
When this item is not checked, the default screen (the GOT1000 series logo) will be displayed.
Select Image
Clicking this button displays the screen for selecting a file.

Select a BMP file stored in the PC.
Setting the startup logo displaying time

The startup logo displaying time can be changed with [Opening Screen Time] of the
GOT Setup. (
3 - 94

3.10.3 Precautions
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions on drawing
(1) The BMP file size
Use the BMP file smaller than the GOT screen size.
If using the BMP file larger than the GOT screen size, only the portion fitted in the screen is
displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) The number of colors for the startup logo

The startup logo is displayed in 256 colors even when the BMP file uses 256 colors or more.
The color that is not supported by the GOT in use will be subtracted.
The startup logo can be previewed by the GT Designer2.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

3.10.3 Precautions
3 - 95
ALARM
ON/OFF operations of the grip switch LEDs must be set.
3 - 96
PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR

OBJECT SETUP
OVERVIEW
4.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Comment Registration
Comments are character strings registered by users using GT Designer2.

Comments can be displayed with multiple object functions by registering them as a basic comment or a
comment group in advance.
(
This section
Basic comments and comment groups)
(1) Displaying basic comments by the comment display function (

Section 7.5 Comment Display)
The comments registered as basic comments are displayed.
The comment No. corresponding to the monitored device value is displayed.
Basic comment
D100 = 2
D100 = 5
Production line
status
Production line
status
Production line
status
Operating
Convey
stopped
Completed
Operating
Convey stopped
Inspecting
Emergency stopped
Completed
Display comment No. 1 Display comment No. 2 Display comment No. 5
(2) Displaying comments registered in comment group by the comment display function
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(
Section 7.5 Comment Display)
The comments registered in comment group are displayed.
The comment No. corresponding to the monitored device value is displayed.
The column of the comment displayed can be switched by the language switching device.
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device)
Comment group No.1
D100=1
D200=1
D100=2
D200=1
D100=2
D200=2
Operating
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Convey stopped
Inspecting
Emergency stopped
Complete
Column No.1
Column No.2
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Convey stopped
Displays comment
No.1 of column No.1
Displays comment
No.2 of column No.1
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
D100 = 1
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1 Comments
COMMON SETTING
Required knowledge for comment registration
Displays comment
No.2 of column No.2
Specify a column No. by the

language switching device

4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration
4-1
ALARM
4.1.1
2 Basic comments and comment groups

Basic comments and comment groups represent the groups of the comments to be displayed with each
object function.
Because the objects available for display are different between the basic comment and comment group,
check the following list and register comments to the applicable type.
The differences between basic comment and comment group are shown below.
Item
Basic comment
Applicable GOT
GT15,
Comment group
GT11
Max. No. of groups
Up to 255
Max. No. of comments
Up to 32767
Up to 3276 for each comment group
No. of comment columns
10 for each comment group
Title
Change not allowed (Fixed as Basic Comment)
Can be changed (Up to 32 characters regardless of

1byte or 2byte characters)
KANJI region specification

None (Japan only)
Comment edit dialog
Applicable object*2
Japan, China (GB) - Mincho, China (Big5) - Gothic
Up to 10 of basic comments and comment groups can be displayed simultaneously*1

Comment display,Touch switch,
Comment display,
Data list,Alarm history,
Advanced alarm display (user alarm),
User alarm display
16dot (Standard/HQ Mincho)
Comment
up to 512 characters for each comment regardless of 1byte or 2byte characters
Type of importable or
Test file,
exportable file
Unicode text
CSV file,
file*3
16dot (Standard/HQ Mincho/HQ Gothic)
CSV file,
Unicode text file*3
*1
This number varies depending on the performance of the PC used.
*2
Comments available for each object are shown in the caution of each object.
*3
When Microsoft
Windows
2000 Professional, Windows
is used, file import or export is possible.
4-2
12dot (Standard/HQ Mincho/HQ Gothic)
Font

XP Professional, or Windows
XP Home Edition
1
OVERVIEW
Outline of basic comment and comment group
Up to 32767
comments can be
registered.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic Comment
Up to 255 groups
can be registered.
COMMON SETTING
3
Up to 32767
comments can be
registered.
Up to 10 columns can be set

Comment Group
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Comment registration screens

Comments are edited from the following two screens.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
"Comment list dialog box"
Set up the comments and attributes of basic
comment and each comment group.
"Project workspace"
This is useful for managing comment groups,
for example, adding/deleting comment
groups or changing their names.
Double-clicking basic comment or any of the comment
groups displays the corresponding comment list dialog box.
4-3
ALARM

4.1.2
Displaying comment list dialog box
1 Basic Comment
1 Perform one of the following operations.
Click
(Comment).
Select [Common]
[Comment]
[Comment].
2 The open comment group dialog box is displayed.

Select [Basic Comment] and click the Open button, or double-click [Basic Comment].
Double-click
3 The Basic Comment List dialog box appears.

Refer to Section 4.1.3
for the setup.
Remark
Displaying the dialog box from project workspace

The comment list dialog box can be also displayed by double-clicking
Comment) in project workspace.
Double-click
4-4

4.1.2 Displaying comment list dialog box
(Basic
1
2 Comment group
OVERVIEW
(1) Creating a new comment group

1 Create a comment group by either of the following operations.
Click
(New Comment Group).
Select [Common]
[Comment]
[New Comment Group].
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The comment group property dialog box is displayed.

Set up group No., title, kanji region and so on, and click the OK button.
Section 4.1.3 Basic operations for comment registration
3 The comment list dialog box is displayed.

Refer to section Section 4.1.3
for the setup.
COMMON SETTING
(2) Displaying a existing comment group

1 Perform either of the following operations.
Click
(Comment).
Select [Common]
[Comment]
[Comment].
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 The open comment group dialog box is displayed.

Select any of the comment groups and click the Open button, or double-click it.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Double-click
LAMP, SWITCH
3 The comment list dialog box is displayed.

Refer to section Section 4.1.3
for the setup.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4-5
ALARM
Remark
Displaying the dialog box from project workspace

The comment list dialog box can be also displayed by double-clicking
(Comment Group) in project workspace.
Double-click the comment

group you want to open.
4-6

Basic operations for comment registration
OVERVIEW
1 Basic operations of toolbar (Comment list setting)

This section explains how to operate the toolbar used for basic comment and comment groups.
Item
New Comment
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Adds a new comment.
New Comment Group
Clicking this displays the comment group property dialog box. *1
Comment Group Property
Displays the comment group property dialog box of the comment group being displayed. *1
Insert Row
Adds a comment between other comments.
Insert Column
Adds a comment column is just before the selected comment column.
Import
Imports a text file or CSV file as comments.
Export
Exports comments as a text file or CSV file.
Attribute
Displays the attribute setup dialog box of the selected comment. *2
COMMON SETTING
Creates a new comment group.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Displays the search dialog box.

Entering the characters to be searched, selecting a search direction (upwards or downwards),
Search
and then clicking the Search Next button searches the entered characters.
Jump
Jumps to the specified comment No.
Attribute Display/Non-Display
Enables the setting of whether to display the comment attribute or not.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
For the details of *1 and *2, refer to the next page and later.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.1.3 Basic operations for comment registration
4-7
ALARM
4.1.3
*1 Comment group property dialog box

Set the group No., title, column No., and kanji region of the comment group.
(Example:Setting screen for GT15)

Item
Description
Group No.
Set a group No. of the comment group.
Title
Set a title of the comment group (up to 32 characters).
Column No.
Check the column No. of the column you want to set when setting more than one comment column.
Select the kanji region used for each comment.
(
KANJI Region

Japan
: Japanese kanji characters are displayed.
China (GB) -Mincho
: Chinese characters (simplified) are displayed.
China (Big5) - Gothic
: Displays traditional Chinese characters.
Example: Differences between Japanese and Chinese-Mincho
Japan
China(GB)-Mincho
Kanji region setting

This setting is necessary when using kanji for each comment column.
However, because this is not the language setting, you do not have to change the
setting from the default (Japan) if using a language irrelevant to kanji (e.g. English).
English can be entered and displayed even if the kanji region is set to Japan.
4-8

*2 Attribute setting dialog box
OVERVIEW
Set comment attributes (e.g. style, text color).
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Attribute Setting dialog box
for Comment Group
Item
Description
Select a style (font) of the comment.
Text
Select a color of the comment.
Blink
Specify how comments are to be blinked when displayed (No/Low/Medium/High).
Solid
Select a color of the shadow when solid or raised is selected in style.
Rev
Check this when highlighting the comment.
High Quality Font
Check this when displaying the comment using the highquality font.
12dot HQ Gothic
Check this when displaying 12dot HQ Gothic in the comment group.
12dot HQ Mincho
Check this when displaying 12dot HQ Mincho in the comment group.
16dot HQ Gothic
Check this when displaying 16dot HQ Gothic in the comment group.
16dot HQ Mincho
Check this when displaying 16dot HQ Mincho in the comment group.
Set as Default
Click this when setting the changed attribute as a default value.
Clear Default
Click this when clearing the changed attribute to the default value.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Solid Raised
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Regular Bold
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Style
COMMON SETTING
Attribute Setting dialog box

for Basic Comment
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4-9
ALARM
2 Basic operations in project workspace

Select a target item, and right-click it to select a setting option.
The menu options displayed vary depending on the selected target.
Right-click on [Comment]
Right-click on [Basic Comment] or

[Comment Group]
Item
Description
New Comment
Adds a new comment to the selected basic comment or comment group.

Select this when creating a new comment group.
New Comment Group
When selected, the comment group property dialog box*1 is displayed.

Set the group No., title, and kanji region of the comment group.
Open
Displays the comment list dialog box of the selected comment group.
Close
Close the selected comment list dialog box.
Close All
Close all of the comment list dialog boxes being displayed.
Cut
Cuts off the selected comment group.
Copy
Copies the selected comment group.
Paste
Pastes the copied or cut comment group.
Delete
Deletes the selected comment group.
Save As File
Saves the selected basic comment or comment group as a text/CSV file.
Rename
Changes the name of the comment group.
Property
When selected, the comment group property dialog box *1 is displayed, and the group No., title, and kanji
region of the comment group can be changed.
For the details of *1, refer to the following.

The explanation of *1 in
4 - 10
Basic operations of toolbar (Comment list setting) of this section.

1
This dialog box is displayed by operations from the project workspace or "Open comment group" dialog
box.
Add new comments with the toolbar or the menu displayed by right-clicking the mouse.
(1) Comment List dialog box for Basic Comment
OVERVIEW
3 Basic operations in comment list dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Setting items for Basic Comment List
Comment No.
Displays the comment number .
Comment
Enter a comment.
Text
Select a display color of the comment.
Rev
Check this when making the comment highlighted.
Blink
Specify how the comment is to be blinked (No/Low/Medium/High).
HQ
Check this when displaying the comment in a HQ font.
Style
Select a style (font) to display the comment.
COMMON SETTING
Description
4
Regular Bold
Select a shadow color when solid or raised is selected in Style.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 11
ALARM
Solid
Solid Raised
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Item
(b) Menu displayed by right clicking
Item
Description
New
Adds a new comment row.
Cut *1
Cuts a comment selected.
Copy
Copies a comment selected.
Paste
Pastes a comment copied or cut.
Insert
Delete
Inserts a row to the row selected.

*1
Deletes a comment selected.

Clears a comment of the row or column selected. *3
Clear Text
Copies a comment selected to Excel.

Copy a comment in row or column unit. *3
Copy to Excel
After copying, paste the comment on Excel.

Paste From Excel
Pastes a comment selected from Excel.

Copy or cut a comment on Excel and paste it on the Basic Comment List dialog box.
Select All
Selects all comments in Basic Comment List.
Property
Displays the Attribute Setting dialog box of the comment selected. *2
*1
Disabled for an entire column.
*2
For the Attribute Setting dialog box, refer to the following.

This section
*3
4 - 12
When selecting a column, select the Comment column.

1
OVERVIEW
(1) How to select more than one comment

If there is more than one comment, all the comments can be selected by the
operations below.
Click the top left cell ([Comment No.] area) by the mouse.
Click [Select All] in the menu displayed by right-clicking the mouse.
(2) Reusing comments between different projects
Comments can be pasted to the different project comment.
(
This section
(1) (b) Menu displayed by right clicking)
(3) Batch setting of Text, Rev, Blink, HQ, Style or Solid
You can apply the same setting to all comments simultaneously by selecting a
column before making a setting.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Select a column.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Make a setting with

the column selected.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 All comments are

batch set to the
same.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 13
ALARM
(1)
Comment List dialog box for comment group
(a) Setting items for Comment List

Item
Comment No.
Description
Set a comment No.
Column No.
Set a comment column No.
Text
Select a color of the comment.
Rev
Check this when making the comment highlighted.
Blink
Specify how the comment is to be blinked (No/Low/Medium/High).

12dot Gothic
Check this when displaying the comment in 12-dot HQ Gothic.
High Quality
12dot Mincho
Check this when displaying the comment in 12-dot HQ Mincho.
*1
16dot Gothic
Check when displaying the comment in 16-dot HQ Gothic.
16dot Mincho
Check when displaying the comment in 16-dot HQ Mincho.
Font
Style
Select a style (font) to display the comment.
Regular Bold
Solid
Solid
Raised
Select a shadow color when solid or raised is selected in style.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Using HQ fonts
When a HQ font is set for each object, if the HQ font specified for the object is not checked in comment
registration, characters are not displayed in the HQ font.
Example: When comments are registered, if 16dot HQ Gothic and 16dot HQ Mincho are checked:
LINE A is stopped.
LINE A is stopped
4 - 14
When the font is specified to 16dot HQ Gothic.

The comment is displayed in 16dot HQ Gothic.
When the font is specified to 12dot HQ Gothic.
The comment is displayed in 12dot regular
because 12dot HQ Gothic was not checked in comment registration.

1
OVERVIEW
(b) Menu displayed by right clicking
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Cut *1
Cuts a comment selected.
Copy
Copies a comment selected.
Paste
Pastes a comment copied or cut.
Insert
Inserts a row to the row selected.

*1
Deletes a comment selected.
Clear Text
Clears a comment of the row or column selected. *3
Insert Column
Inserts a column.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Delete
Copies selected comments to Excel.

Copy comments in a row or column unit. *3
Copy to Excel
After copying, paste the comments on Excel.

Pastes selected comments from Excel.
Select All
Selects all comments in Basic Comment List.
Property
Displays the Attribute Setting dialog box of the comment selected. *2
*1
Disabled for an entire column.
*2
For the Attribute Setting dialog box, refer to the following.

This section
6
LAMP, SWITCH
When selecting a column, select the Comment column.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*3
Copy or cut comments on Excel and paste them on the Basic Comment List dialog box.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Paste From Excel

4 - 15
ALARM
Adds a new comment row.
COMMON SETTING
Item
New
(1) How to select more than one comment

If more than one comment exist, all the comments can be selected by the
operation below.
Click the top left cell (the "Comment No." area) by the mouse.
Click [Select All] in the menu displayed by right-clicking the mouse.
(2) Reusing comments between different projects
Comments can be pasted to the different project comment.
This section
(1) (b) Menu displayed by right clicking
(3) Batch setting of Text, Rev, Blink, High Quality Font, Style or Solid
You can apply the same setting to all comments simultaneously by selecting a
column before making a setting.
1 Select a column.
2 Make a setting with

the column selected.
3 All comments are

batch set to the
same.
4 - 16

4.1.4
Comment registration
OVERVIEW
Register comments displayed by the object functions.
1 Registering comments as basic comment

1 Click the comment field of the comment No. to which the comment is to be registered.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Enter a comment in the comment text box.
COMMON SETTING
3 Set the display attributes of the comment.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Select "a shadow color" when Style is
set to Solid or Raised.
Format for displaying the text
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised)
Display or not display each HQ font
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Blinking of the comment

(No/Low/Medium/High)
Highlight or not highlight the text
Text color
(New Comment) button.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
4 After registering the comment, click the

The next comment column is displayed.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
button at the upper right corner of the

4.1.4 Comment registration
4 - 17
ALARM
5 When all the comment registration is completed, click the

Comment List window to close the window.
2 Registering comments as comment group

1 Click the comment field of the comment No. to which the comment is to be registered.
2 Enter the comment in the comment text box.
3 Set the display attributes of the comment.
Select "a shadow color"

when Style is set to Solid or Raised.
Blinking of the text
Text color
4 After registering the comment, click the

The next comment column is displayed.
(New Comment) button.
5 When all the comment registration is completed, click the

Comment List window to close the window.
4 - 18

button at the upper right corner of the
1
(1) Creating a multi-line comment
OVERVIEW
(a) To begin a new line, press Alt + Enter keys at the end of the current line.
Press Alt + Enter keys
Present line 1 is in operation.
(b) A comment composed of multiple lines is displayed on the GOT as follows.

In operation
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Y70 is ON.
In operation
Display range
(2) Creating comments by keyboard

Because the cursor in the Comment List dialog box moves when the keys shown
below are pressed, comments can be entered without using the mouse.
key: Move to the right cell.
key: Move to the left cell.
key: Move to the upper cell.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(Comment numbers are added by Alt + N keys.)

(a) When a cell is selected
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Y70 is ON.
key: Move to the comment cell in the same line.
key: Move to the comment cell in the same line.
key: Move to the comment cell in the upper line.
key: Move to the comment cell in the lower line.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
LAMP, SWITCH
key: Move to the lower cell.

(b) When a line is selected

4 - 19
ALARM
Remark
4.1.5
Registering comment group columns
Register columns for a comment group.

1 Display the comment list dialog box of the comment group.
2 Click
(Comment Group Property).
The comment group property dialog box is displayed. Check the Column No. to be added.
For GT15, set the Kanji region.
After the setting, click the OK button.
For GT15, set the Kanji Region.

Check the Column No.
3 The column is registered.
Registering columns by insert column

Columns can be added by clicking
(Insert Column) as well.
However, there are the following restrictions:

(1) KANJI Region setting
When a column is added by insert column, the Kanji region is set to "Japan".
The setting for the Kanji region can be changed in the comment group property
dialog box.
(2) Column No. setting
Because the column No. setting is not available when using insert column, the
column No. that have already been registered may be changed.
Be careful about this if the language switching device has been set.
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device
4 - 20

4.1.5 Registering comment group columns
4.1.6
Copying or cutting a comment registered
OVERVIEW
Copy a comment registered.
1 Copying or cutting a comment for another comment No.

1 Select a comment row to be copied or cut.
SPECIFICATIONS
[Copy] or
[Cut] button and then click the
[Paste] button.
COMMON SETTING
2 Click the
3 The Paste Comment dialog box is displayed.

Specify a copy destination No. and click the OK button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4 The selected comment is pasted.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.1.6 Copying or cutting a comment registered
4 - 21
ALARM
2 Copying or cutting a comment for another column

1 Select a comment column to be copied or cut and click the
2 Select a column to which the comment is pasted, and click the
3 The comment is pasted.
4 - 22

[Copy] or
[Cut] button.
[Paste] button.
1
3 Copying/pasting a comment to/from Excel
OVERVIEW
(1) Copying to Excel

1 Select a comment row or column to be copied and right-click on the row/column.
Select [Copy To Excel] from the displayed menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
3
2 Perform the paste operation on the Excel, and the comments are pasted.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) Pasting from Excel

1 Perform a copy operation on the Excel.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
2 Select a comment row/column to which the row/column of the Excel is pasted and right-click on
the row/column.
Select [Paste From Excel] from the displayed menu.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 3The comment is pasted.

4 - 23
ALARM
(1) Copying in project workspace

By operations in project workspace, the basic comment or comment groups can
be copied.
1 Right-click the mouse and select [Copy].

2 Right-click the mouse again to select [Paste].
3 Enter a comment group No. and title in the comment group property dialog
box, and click the OK button.
(2) Copying comments between comment groups
Comments can be copied from the basic comment to a comment group or from
comment group No.1 to No.2.
1 Select a comment to be copied.
2 Click the
(Copy) button.
3 Open the comment list dialog box of Basic Comment/Comment Group, and
click the
(Paste) button.
4 When copying an entire row, the Paste Comment dialog box is displayed.
Set the destination No. and click the OK button.
5 The selected comment is copied.
(3) Cutting columns
Columns can be cut only when there are two or more columns in the comment
group.
For Basic Comment, any column cannot be cut.
(4) Copying/cutting columns of comment groups
The setting of KANJI Region is also copied/cut.
(5) In the case that pasting an entire row is disabled
Pasting may be disabled according to the comments of the pasting destination
when copying/cutting and paste an entire row.
In such a case, copy/cut the relevant cells one by one or directly input the
comment to the pasting destination.
4 - 24

Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
OVERVIEW
1 Deleting comments
Delete a registered comment.
This section explains how to delete a comment in a row unit.
When deleting a comment in a column unit, follow the method below.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Select a comment to be deleted.
2 Select [Edit]
COMMON SETTING
3
[Delete] from the menu bar.
3 The delete comment dialog box is displayed.

Click the Yes button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4 The selected comment is deleted.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Deletion in project workspace

Comment groups can be deleted in project workspace.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1 Right-click the mouse to select [Delete].

2 The delete comment dialog box is displayed.
(2) Deleting a comment in a column unit
Deleting a comment in a column unit is enabled only for a comment group with
two or more columns.
4.1.7 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
4 - 25
ALARM
4.1.7
2 Clear Text
The comment texts are cleared in a row or column unit.
1 Select a comment row or column and right-click on it.
Select [Clear Text] from the displayed menu.
2 The texts are cleared.
4 - 26

4.1.7 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
4.1.8
Deleting columns in comment group
OVERVIEW
Delete a column of the registered comment group.

1 Display the comment list dialog box of a comment group.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Click
(Comment Group Property).
The comment group property dialog box is displayed.
Remove the check mark of the column No. to be deleted, and click the OK button.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Uncheck the column No. to delete the column.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 The column is deleted.
Columns of a comment group can also be deleted with the comment list dialog box.
Section 4.1.7 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.1.8 Deleting columns in comment group
4 - 27
ALARM
Remark
LAMP, SWITCH
4.1.9
Changing registered comment settings
Change the text, comment No. and display attributes of a registered comment.
1 Select the target comment.
2 Change the setting items of the comment.

(1) Basic comment

Text color
Comment text
Comment No.
(2) Comment group

Text color
3 After changing the comment settings, click the

window to close the window.
4 - 28

4.1.9 Changing registered comment settings
button at the upper right corner of the comment list
1
Changing settings in project workspace
OVERVIEW
The settings of a comment group can be changed in project workspace.
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Right-click the mouse to select [Property].
3
COMMON SETTING
2 The comment group property dialog box is displayed.

Change the settings of the comment group, and then click the OK button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.1.9 Changing registered comment settings
4 - 29
ALARM
4.1.10 Saving/Reading comments as file

Registered comments can be saved as a text file (*.TXT), Unicode text file (*.TXT), or CSV file (*.CSV).
In addition, the file created by a commercial word-processor or spreadsheet software (text/CVS file) can be
read as comments.
Save
(Export)
Read
(Import)
GT Designer2
Commercial word-processor/spreadsheet software
(1) Operations for adding/overwriting comments when importing them from a file
The comment Nos. in the file to be imported are compared with those that have
already registered, and the data are handled as follows:
If the comment No. is different each other, the comment in the file is added.
If the comment No. is the same, the comment in the file is overwritten.
Overwrite
Add
Add
Import
Add
CSV file
GT Designer2
GT Designer2
Comments can be created efficiently by predetermining each comment No. and

sharing the creation by multiple persons.
(2) Cautions for exporting comments from GT Designer2
If comments are exported from GT Designer2, all the registered comments are
reflected onto the file.
If the file is overwritten during export, all the comments saved in the past are lost.
Remark
(1) Unicode text file

The Unicode text file is used when importing/exporting comments by the multilanguage input function.
For the multi-language input function, refer to the following manual.
(2) How to save/read comments in a row or column unit in/from the Excel
Refer to the following for details.
Section 4.1.6
4 - 30

Copying/pasting a comment to/from Excel
1
1 Saving comments as file (Export)
1 Click the
OVERVIEW
Save registered comments as a text file, Unicode text file, or CSV file.
"Export" button.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The save as dialog box is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Select a file type in the Save as type field (txt: text file or Unicode text file, csv: CSV file).
Enter a file name, select a place to save the file, and click the Save button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
button at the upper right corner of the Comment
When China (GB, Big5) comments are registered

The comment group including China (GB, Big5) comments will not be saved
correctly in a CSV file.
Save the comment group in a Unicode text file.
Reading text file, unicode text file, or CSV file (Import)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 31
ALARM
This section
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 When the comments writing is completed, click the

List dialog box.
Remark
Saving comments in project workspace

To save comments as a file in project workspace, perform the following operations.
1 Right-click the mouse to select [Save As FiIe...].
2 The Save As dialog box is displayed.

Give a file name, select a place to save the file, and click the Save button.
4 - 32

1
2 Reading text file, unicode text file, or CSV file (Import)
1 Click the
OVERVIEW
Read a text file, Unicode text file, or CSV file as comments.

"Import" button.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The open dialog box is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Select a file type in the Save as type field (txt: text file or Unicode text file, csv: CSV file).
Specify a file to read, and click the Open button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 If the comments have already been registered, a dialog box to confirm overwriting is displayed.
4 When the comment reading is completed, click the

list dialog box.
button at the upper right corner of the comment
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 33
ALARM
4.1.11 Editing comment saved as Text/CSV file

This section explains how to edit the comments saved in a Text/CSV file.
1 Text file (Basic Comment only)

Edit the comment saved/read as a text file by a text editor as follows.
"In operation now"
Comment No.
Comment text
166,0,2,1,3,0,
Display attributes
//1
1 Before entering a comment, enter /

Enter key.
/ and a comment No. in one-byte characters, and then press the
//1
2 Enter the comment.

Enclose the comment with the one-byte double-quotation symbols
symbol
"
, and then enter the comma
Press the Enter key at the last.

Create a comment text within 1 to 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte
or two-byte.
//1
"In operation now"
3 Set the comment attributes.

//1
"In operation now"
166,0,2,1,3,0,
Enter all as one-byte characters.

,
,
Solid (Set a color using No. of text color.)
Style (0: Regular 1: Bold 2: Solid 3: Raised)
Use a HQ font (0: No, 1: Yes)
Blink (0: No 1: Low 2: Middle 3: High)
Reverse (0: No, 1: Yes)
No. of text color

255: white 109: dark white
224: red
160: dark red
31: aqua
22: dark aqua
0: black 182: gray

3: blue
2: dark blue
227: purple 162: dark purple 28: green 20: dark green
252: yellow 180: dark yellow
For the other color numbers, select "More Colors..." in "Text Color"
in the comment list dialog box, and confirm the color in the text color list.
4 - 34

mark ( ) as a comment text because data will not be imported correctly.

If such a case is identified, correct the comment on the text file, and then import it
again.
Writing a multiple-line comment
When writing a multiple-line comment, press the Enter key at the end of a line.
When providing a line of space, press the Enter key at the line.
3
COMMON SETTING
//1
"In operation now
Y70 is ON"
//1
"In operation now
1 and the Enter key are processed as comment 1.
4
Processed as comment No.1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The entry of /
Comment No.
Y70 is ON"
X30 is ON
250, 0, 0, 1, 1,
//2
//3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
"In stop now"

150, 1, 3, 1, 1,
"Operation start",
101, 0, 1, 0, 1,
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 35
ALARM
Remark
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Cautions for saving a file

The edited file must be saved in the text file (*.txt) format.
(2) Cautions for entering a comment
Do not enter only a sequence of a double-quotation ("), a comma (,) and a return
OVERVIEW
2 CSV format file

When saving or reading comments as a CSV format file, edit them as explained below.
(1) When editing comments by spreadsheet software
Create each setting item as follows on the spreadsheet.
(The following is an example when Microsoft
Excel is used.)
(a) Basic comment

Use a HQ font (0: No, 1: Yes)
Name or No. of text color (white, dark white, gray, dark blue,
red, dark red, purple, dark purple, green, dark green, aqua,
dark aqua, yellow, dark yellow) For the other color numbers,
select "More Colors..." in "Text Color" in the comment list
dialog box, and confirm the color in the text color list.
Comment text
Comment No.
(b) Comment group

Comment Group No.

Column
No

Use 16dot HQ Mincho (No/Yes)
Use 16dot HQ Gothic (No/Yes)
Use 12dot HQ Mincho (No/Yes)
Use 12dot HQ Gothic (No/Yes)
Name or No. of text color (white, dark white,
gray, dark blue, red, dark red, purple, dark
purple, green, dark green, aqua, dark aqua,
yellow, dark yellow)
For the other color numbers, select "More
Colors..." in "Text Color" in the comment list
dialog box, and confirm the color in the text
color list.
Comment text
Comment No.
4 - 36

(2) When editing comments by text editor

The comment data saved in a CSV file is configured as follows on the text.
OVERVIEW
(a) Basic comment

A character string is enclosed with double-quotation marks (" ").
, , Color, Rev, Blink, HQ Font, Style, Solid
1,"During preparation", Blue, No, No, No, Regular
2,"Line A, supply stop", Red, No, No, No, Solid, Red
Added if the style is
"Solid" or "Raised."
SPECIFICATIONS
7 fields delimited by 6 commas (,).

Commas in a string are recognized
as characters.
Comment
Line A, supply stop
(b) Comment group
COMMON SETTING
Comment group No.

1, 1, 1,,,,,,,,
,1, 2, Text, Rev, Blink, 12dot HQ Gothic, , Style, Solid
1, "
", "(Operating)", Blue, No, No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Regular,
2, "
", "(Inspecting)", Green, No, No, Yes, Yes, Yes, Yes, Regular,
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment column No.
Precaution for saving a file

The edited file must be saved in the CSV file (*.csv) format.
When the display attributes of the comment are not read
3 Unicode text file
6
LAMP, SWITCH
When saving the comments as a Unicode text file or reading them into GT Designer2, edit the
comments as explained below.
A character string is enclosed with double-quotation marks (" ").
Color Rev Blink HQ Font Style Solid
"Under preparation" Blue No No No Regular
"Line A, supply stopped" Red No No No Solid
7 fields deliminated by 6 tabs ( ).
Tabs cannot be inserted into any string.
Red
Added if the style is

"Solid" or "Raised."
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1
2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If the number of commas and their positions in the CSV file are not correct, the
display attributes will not be read.
Before reading them, confirm the number of commas and their positions.

4 - 37
ALARM
Remark
(1) Displayed language

Comment strings are displayed in any of multiple languages entered by the user.
Attributes (color, reverse, blink and so on) are displayed in English.
(2) Caution for saving the file
The edited file must be saved in the Unicode text file (*.txt) format.
(3) Precautions for using Unicode text file
Refer to the following for the precautions when using a Unicode text file.
Section 2.11 Precautions for Using Unicode text file
4 - 38

4.1.12 Cautions for comment registration
OVERVIEW
1 Maximum number of registerable comments
(2) Comment group

Up to 255 comment groups can be registered, and each group can include comments of up to
32767 lines x 10 columns.
2 Maximum number of characters registerable in a comment

A comment can be created with 1 to 512 characters regardless whether they are one- or two-byte
characters.
One line feed equals to two characters.
COMMON SETTING
Line feed
Y70 is ON.
Specify the character size for the displayed comments in the dialog box provided for each object setting.
4 Display attributes of comments

Some display attributes set to comments are not available depending on the object function.
For the restriction on the comment display for each object function, refer to the relevant section of each
object function.
List of attributes set in comment registration and for each object
Item
Text Color
Reverse
Blink
HQ Font
Style
Solid
Comment Display
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Character size for displayed comments
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Line 1 is on operation.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Basic comment

Up to 32767 comments can be registered.
Data List Display
Alarm List Display

LAMP, SWITCH
Touch Switch
Advanced Alarm Display (List/History)
Advanced Alarm Display (Popup)
: Displayed according to the attributes registered with the comment. They can be changed at each object setting.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
: The attributes registered by the comment are not displayed. They are set at each object setting.
: Displayed according to the attributes registered with the comment.
They can not be changed at each object setting.
: Not used.

4 - 39
ALARM
5 HQ font of Chinese (GB, Big5)
(1) Chinese (GB) characters

The Chinese (GB) characters will not be displayed in 12dot HQ Gothic or 16dot HQ Gothic setting.
If 12dot HQ Gothic or 16dot HQ Gothic is checked in comment registration, the characters are
displayed as 12dot HQ Mincho or 16dot HQ Mincho.
(2) Chinese (Big 5) characters
The China (Big 5) characters will not be displayed in 12dot HQ Mincho or 16dot HQ Mincho setting.
If 12dot HQ Mincho or 16dot HQ Mincho is checked in comment registration, the characters are
displayed as 12dot HQ Gothic or 16dot HQ Gothic.
4 - 40

1
OVERVIEW
4.2 Parts Registration
2
SPECIFICATIONS
There are two types for the parts displayed.

Parts registered in the GT Designer2
Parts of BMP/JPEG files saved in the memory card
This section describes how to register parts in the GT Designer2.
For how to display a BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card as parts, refer to the following.
How to store a BMP/JPEG file in the memory card
3
COMMON SETTING
Section 4.3 Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card
How to display a BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card
Section 9.1.3 Arrangement and settings
Required knowledge for parts registration
1 Parts
User-created figures are registered as parts.
The registered figures can be displayed as parts by the part display function and the parts movement
function.
D10
D10
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Use the parts display function (

Section 9.1 Parts Display)
The several kinds of figures can be displayed by changing a monitor device value.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Entered parts
6
Displays part No.1
LAMP, SWITCH
Part No.1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3
Displays part No.3
(2) Use the parts movement display (

Section 9.2 Parts Movement)
By changing a monitor device value, several kinds of figures can be displayed changing each
position.
2
D10
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
D10
Entered parts
Part No.1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3
8
Displays part No.2
Displays part No.3 at specified position

4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration
4 - 41
ALARM
4.2.1
2 Screens for registering and editing parts

Register/edit parts on three screens.
Drag to register
the parts.
Click on
to
register parts.
Double-click to
edit parts.
4 - 42
[Project Workspace]
[Parts Image Display]
[Parts Editor]
Drag to register figures as parts.
Click on
as parts.
Double-click to display
"Parts Image Display" or
"Parts Editor".
Parts editing can be done on

"Parts Editor" with confirming
a parts image .
Registered parts can

be edited easily on the
dedicated editor.
to register figures

4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration
4.2.2
Basic operation for parts registration
OVERVIEW
1 Basic operation of project workspace

Select an operation execution object and right click it to select setting items.
Owing to the difference of selected objects, the displayed items will be different.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Description
New
Register a new part.
Edit
The selected parts can be edited/corrected on [Parts Editor] screen.
Cut
Cut the selected parts.
Copy
Copy selected parts.
Paste
Paste the copied or cut parts.
Delete
Delete the selected parts.
Property
Change [No.] and [Parts Name] of the selected parts.
Open Image View
Display the parts image in Parts image display dialog box.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items
Right click when select parts name
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration
4 - 43
ALARM
Right click when select [Parts]
2 Basic operation of parts image display dialog box

Select [Common]
[Parts] from the menu for displaying.
Parts image
Parts name
Items
4 - 44
Description
[Register]
Register selected figure to parts.
[New Parts]
Register a new part.
[Edit]
Correct the contents of registered parts.
[Name]
Switch display/not display parts name.
[Cut]
Cut the selected parts.
[Copy]
Copy the selected parts.
[Paste]
Paste the copied or cut parts.
[Delete]
Delete the selected parts.
[Property]
Change [No.] and [Name] of the selected parts.

4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration
4.2.3
Registering parts
OVERVIEW
Register the parts displayed by parts display function and parts movement display function.
1 Select the figure to be registered.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Drag the figure to be registered to the parts in project workspace.
COMMON SETTING
Drag
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Display parts property dialog box.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Input No. and the name of the parts to be registered, and click on OK button.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
4 The registration is completed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.2.3 Registering parts
4 - 45
ALARM
Project workspace
Remark
(1) When registering parts on the [Parts Editor] screen

The figure registered as parts can be created on the [Parts Editor] screen.
1 Right click to select [New...] from the menu.
2 The parts property dialog box is displayed.

Input No. and the name of the parts to be registered, and click on OK button.
3 When the Parts Editor screen is displayed, draw the figure to be set as parts.
After drawing the figure, close the Parts Editor screen.
(2) When registering parts in parts image dialog box

When registering parts in parts image dialog box, select the figure to be registered
and operate as follows.
1 Click on
[Register].
2 When the parts property dialog box is displayed, input No. and the names of
the parts to be registered, and click on OK button.
4 - 46

(3) Paste the figure registered in parts to the screen

Select the parts to be read, and drag it to drawing screen.
OVERVIEW
Paste from the project workspace
SPECIFICATIONS
Drag
COMMON SETTING
Paste from the parts image display dialog box
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Drag
The BMP file or JPEG file *1 data imported as a figure can also be registered by the
same procedure as figures.
*1 Only GT15 can register JPEG files.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(Section11.1.4 Pasting figure data of BMP/JPEG/DXF file)

4 - 47
ALARM
LAMP, SWITCH
The figure that can be registered as parts
4.2.4
Copying the registered parts
Copy the registered parts to other part No.

1 Select the parts to be copied.
2 Click on
[Copy], then click on
[Paste].
3 Parts property dialog box is displayed.

Set the destination [No.] and [Name], and click on OK button.
4 Copy the selected parts.
Remark
When operating in the project workspace

When copying in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as
follows.
1 Right click, and select [Copy] from the menu.

2 Right click again, and select [Paste] from the menu.
3 Input the destination No. and names.
4 - 48

4.2.4 Copying the registered parts
4.2.5
Deleting the registered parts
OVERVIEW
Delete the registered parts.

1 Select the parts to be deleted.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
[Delete].
COMMON SETTING
2 Click on
3 When the parts delete confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on Yes button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
4 Delete the selected parts.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
When deleting parts in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as
follows.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1 Right click, and select [Delete] from the menu.
2 When the parts delete confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on Yes
button.

4.2.5 Deleting the registered parts
4 - 49
ALARM
Remark
4.2.6
Changing the registered parts settings
Edit the registered parts.

1 Select the parts to be edited.
2 Click on
[Edit]. (The parts can be double-clicked too.)
3 When the [Parts Editor] screen is displayed, edit the parts.
4 When parts edit is completed, close the screen.

(Click on
button at the top-right of screen.)
Remark

When editing parts in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as
follows.
1 Right click, and select [Edit] from the menu. (It can be double-clicked too.)
2 When the [Parts Editor] screen is displayed, edit the parts.
4 - 50

4.2.6 Changing the registered parts settings
4.2.7
Changing property of the registered parts
OVERVIEW
Change the No. and name of registered parts.

1 Select the parts whose property is to be changed.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
2 Right click the mouse, and select [Property] menu.

3 The parts property dialog box is displayed.
Input the [No.] and [Name] to be changed, and click on OK button.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4 Change the property of selected parts.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

When changing parts property in the project workspace, select the parts and operate
them as follows.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1 Right click to select [Property] from the menu.

2 In the parts property dialog box, set the [No.] and [Name] to be changed.

4.2.7 Changing property of the registered parts
4 - 51
ALARM
Remark
LAMP, SWITCH
4.2.8
Precautions
1 Maximum number of Parts that can be registered

Up to 32767 parts can be registered.
2 Memory capacity required for parts

It is same with memory capacity for drawing figure.
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
3 Precautions when registering figure as parts

(1) Line width of figure outline frame
For a figure to be registered as parts, its frame must be drawn in 1-dot line.
If drawn in 2-dot or wider line, it may not appear in actual width on GOT.
However, the frame of 2-dot or wider line can be displayed by following the steps below.
(a) When display with changing the color of figure (figure displayed as mark)
Example: Combine three figures drawn in 1-dot line to make one figure with 3-dot-wide
frame. drawn.
Figure A
Figure B
Figure C
(Length X Width (Length X Width (Length X Width
2 X 2 dot)
4 X 4 dot)
6 X 6 dot)
Total frame width

frame of figure A,B
and C is 3 dot
(b) Set a figure drawn in 2-dot or wider line on an unused base screen and display the base
screen as parts using parts display function.
1)
Base screen 1 is displayed as parts.

(The square area based on vertex 1)
and 2) will be displayed as parts.)
2)
Drawn in 2-dot-width line

Base screen 1
Base screen 15
(2) Changing the color of a figure on the screen (figure marked as a mark)
The white area of a part displayed as a mark by Parts Display/Parts Movement, can be changed to
another color.
white
blue
red
Change the area color from white to other colors.
Register the part displayed as a mark as below.

Draw the color changing area of the figure in white.
Do not use any figure read from the BMP/JPEG format file.
The above figures will not change in color even if displayed as a mask.
4 - 52

4.2.8 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
4.3 Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the

Memory Card
The parts of the BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (herein after referred to as BMP/JPEG file parts)
can be displayed as parts in Parts Display/Parts Movement.
By registering parts in the memory card as BMP/JPEG file parts, the size of the project data stored in the
GOT can be reduced.
This section explains how to store a BMP/JPEG file in the memory card.
For how to display a BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card, refer to the following.
3
COMMON SETTING
For Parts Display: Section 9.1.2 Parts displaying method

For Parts Movement: Section 9.2.2 Moving and displaying parts
SPECIFICATIONS
When displaying a BMP/JPEG file part
4
Memory card
Install to GOT
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Store a BMP/JPEG file
The BMP/JPEG file

part in the memory
card is displayed.
When displaying registered part
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
Download the registered parts to GOT from the GT Designer2
The registered parts are displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4.3 Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card
4 - 53
ALARM
Remark
Time taken to display a BMP/JPEG file part (reference)

The length of time necessary for a BMP/JPEG file part to be displayed on the GOT
screen is indicated below for each GOT type.
Depending on the project data to be used, the time may differ from the time shown
below.
Data range of BMP file
Time taken to display a part
to be displayed
(Reference, sec.)
GOT Type
GT1595-X
GT1585-S/GT1575-S
GT1575-V/GT1565-V
GT1575-VN
GT1572-VN/GT1562-VN
Resolution
Number of colors
(dots)
(colors)
1024
800
640
640
640
3.2
1.54
256
1.68
1.55
Monochrome
0.62
1.52
24-bit full color
1.16
2.0
256
0.69
1.86
Monochrome
0.3 or less
1.95
24-bit full color
1.22
0.80
256
0.82
0.72
Monochrome
0.3 or less
0.77
256
0.78
0.55
Monochrome
0.3 or less
0.57
16
0.78
0.55
Monochrome
0.3 or less
0.57
600
480
480
*1 Values measured using a JPEG file part, by converting the BMP format into JPEG format.
4 - 54
part *1
24-bit full color

768
480
JPEG file
BMP file part
1 The BMP/JPEG files that can be displayed

The following describes the data format of the BMP/JPEG file that can be used as BMP/JPEG file parts.
(1) BMP file
The BMP data specified below can be used.
2
Description
Data format
The BMP data *1 of 24-bit, 8-bit, 4-bit or 1-bit
Number of colors *2
65536 colors *3, 256 colors, 16 colors or monochrome
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Max.: GT1595-X: 1024 768
GT1595-S and GT1575-S: 800 600
Resolution *4
OVERVIEW
Before using BMP/JPEG file parts
GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN, GT1565-V and GT1562-VN: 640 480

Min.: 1 1 dot
*1
The BMP data compressed by compression software cannot be used.
*2
For the BMP files stored in the memory card, the number of colors will be reduced to the number supported by
*3
For the display of 65536 colors, a multi-color display board must be installed.
If used, the system alarm of "536 Image file error or invalid file format." occurs.
the GOT in use.
COMMON SETTING
4.3.1
For GOT types that can install a multi-color display board, refer to the following.
When specifying an image file larger than the display size of the GOT in use, the system alarm of "536 Image file
error or invalid file format." occurs.
(2) JPEG file

The JPEG data specified below can be used.
Description
File format
JFIF
Data format
Base line
Number of colors *1*2
Full-color, gray-scale
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
Max.: GT1595-X: 1024 768

GT1595-S and GT1575-S: 800 600
Resolution *3
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

*4
GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN, GT1565-V and GT1562-VN: 640 480
Min.: 1 1 dot
For the JPEG files stored in the memory card, the number of colors will be reduced to the number supported by
*2
For the display of 65536 colors, a multi-color display board must be installed.
LAMP, SWITCH
*1
the GOT in use.

For GOT types that can install a multi-color display board, refer to the following.
error or invalid file format." occurs.
Difference between data available to BMP/JPEG file parts and registered parts
The BMP/JPEG file that can be stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
differs with the BMP/JPEG file that can be used in the GT Designer2 (registered parts).
The data used as a registered part may not be used as a BMP/JPEG file part.
For the BMP/JPEG file that can be used as registered parts, refer to the following.
Section 2.2
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When specifying an image file larger than the display size of the GOT in use, the system alarm of "536 Image file
Figures in BMP/JPEG/DXF file format

4.3.1 Before using BMP/JPEG file parts
4 - 55
ALARM
*3
4.3.2
Storing a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
1 Create a folder named "IMAGE" for storing BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card.
If storing BMP/JPEG file parts in other than "IMAGE" folder, the BMP/JPEG file parts will not be
displayed in Parts Display/Parts Movement.
Newly create.
2 Store a BMP/JPEG file part in the "IMAGE" folder in the memory card by naming it with "IMG****.BMP"
or "IMG****.JPG". (Assign "****" with a number from 0001 to 0999.)
3 The lower 3 digits of "****" corresponds to those of part numbers.
Example: Naming the BMP file to be displayed as a part of the part number 9123.
How to name a file

Part number 9123
IMG0123.BMP
Same value
The structure in the memory card (for BMP files)
4 - 56
IMG0001.BMP
BMP file for part number 9001
IMG0002.BMP
IMG0998.BMP
IMG0999.BMP

4.3.2 Storing a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card
(1) When storing a BMP file and JPEG file of the same file name
The JPEG file part is preceded.
(2) Previewing a BMP/JPEG file part to be registered
The BMP/JPEG file parts to be stored in the memory card can be previewed by
Precautions
When the BMP/JPEG file part is the same size or smaller than the GOT display size
Store
Install to GOT
Memory card
BMP/JPEG file parts
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Displayed in the same

size as the BMP/JPEG
file part stored in the
memory card.
When the BMP/JPEG file part is larger than the GOT display size
Store
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) The size of the BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card
The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed on the GOT in the same size as the BMP/JPEG file part
stored in the memory card.
Any BMP/JPEG file part larger than the GOT display size cannot be displayed.
Be sure to use BMP/JPEG file parts smaller than the display size of the GOT you use for the BMP/
JPEG file parts to be stored in the memory card.
COMMON SETTING
1 Precautions on drawings
Install to GOT
The BMP/JPEG file part

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
BMP/JPEG file parts
LAMP, SWITCH
Memory card

4.3.3 Precautions
4 - 57
ALARM
4.3.3
2
SPECIFICATIONS
the GT Designer2. (
Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
If the display of a BMP/JPEG file becomes unclear due to the color reduction or
other reasons, adjust the BMP/JPEG file.
OVERVIEW
4.4 Auxiliary Settings
Operation of cursor, key window or other can be set for each screen or project.
The auxiliary settings are explained as follows:
1 Action of cursor and key window when condition success/

switching screen/condition fail
When condition success/switching screen, cursor and key window are
displayed.
When condition fail, cursor and key window are erased.
100
0
100
0
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Action when condition
success]
[Switching screen option]
100
0
100
Cursor displayed
Key window erased
[Action when condition

fail]
100
0
[Cursor position]
When condition
success
When condition fail

Cursor and key
window displayed
Object erased
Setting for
each project
2 Methods of displaying cursor input area
Setting for
each screen
For numeric input and ASCII input, cursor display method is selectable.
4567
7
4567
Only one character blinks
Setting items
[Cursor input area]
4567
All characters are reversed
with only one character
blinking
Setting for
each project
3 Methods of displaying/erasing key window
Setting for
each screen
Key window can be displayed as soon as touch input is detected; can be

erased when the RET key is pressed.
100
100
0
100
0
100
0
Setting items
[Close cursor and key
window when RET key is
Display key window with input touch
Press RET key (input definition),

key window is erased.
pressed.]
[When touch input is
detected, open key
window at the same time]
4 - 58
Setting for
each project
4 Displaying/Hiding the cursor key
Setting for
each screen
100
100
OVERVIEW
The cursor key can be hidden when the RET key or an arrow key is
pressed.
Setting items
[Do not display the cursor
when RET key is
The cursor is hidden.
Press the RET key
Setting for
each project
5 Input range check during numerical value input
Setting for
each screen
The input range can be checked when a numerical value is input.
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
When numerical/ASCII characters are input, the input confirmation dialog

can be displayed by pressing the RTN key.
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[When numerical/ASCII
Change to the
following value
input is detected, display
3000
input confirmation dialog]

Cancel
Setting for
each project
7 Check for overlapping objects

If objects overlap when screen calling function and superimpose window
are used, message will appear on GOT. As GOT may not the display
overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen data.
Setting for
each screen
6
Setting items
[Carry out check for
overlapping objects within
GOT]
LAMP, SWITCH
6 Displaying/Hiding the input check dialog box during numerical/

ASCII input
Setting for
each project
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
numerical value]
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
[Check the input range
COMMON SETTING
Setting items
while inputting the
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4 - 59
ALARM
OK
SPECIFICATIONS
pressed]
8 Displaying input range for numeric value Input
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When a numeric value out of input range is input, a message appears

showing the input range.
Setting items
[Display the input range
when inputs the out of
range in numerical input]
9 Outputting ASCII input to the system information
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When ASCII characters are input, the input signal/No. can be output to the
system information.
ASCII code key-in
Determined
ON
Setting items
[Ascii input is targeted in
the system information
Numeric input signal

System signal 2-1.b4
output]
Numerical input No.
The user ID is stored.
10 Clearing the system information when the cursor is deleted
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When the cursor is deleted, the system information such as cursor display
object ID and cursor display user ID can be cleared.
100
100
Setting items
[When the cursor deleted,
The cursor is deleted.

The current cursor
display user ID
500
11 Inverting the grouped parts (XOR display)
system information is
cleared]
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When the drawing mode of parts display is set to XOR, the grouped parts
can be inverted (XOR display) at once.
Setting items
[While display mode of
part display is XOR,
Inverting the grouped
figures (XOR display)
at once
4 - 60
Inverting each of the

grouped figures (XOR
display)
(The figures are inverted
one by one in the
overlapping order.)
grouped figures are

displayed by XOR]
100
100
Input definition
Setting items
[Defined key action]
[Position to specify area]
The cursor is moved

to the next input area.
Setting for
each project
13 Station No. change execution/inexecution
1
OVERVIEW
If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input
order can be set.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area
automatically.
Setting for
each screen
Setting for
each screen
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting for
each project
12 Action of cursor key
Set station
No. change
COMMON SETTING
Station No. change can be set to be executed or not for each screen.
Setting items
[Carry out station no.
change]
Station No.
change is
not executed.
Station No.
change is
executed.
Setting for
each project
14 Enabling/Disabling advanced alarm popup display

The advanced alarm popup display is enabled or disabled for each screen.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and
bottom row.
04/10/10 10:30 Emergency stop
A1254 B 348
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Carry out display of
A1254 B 348
advanced alarm pop up]
The corresponding comment pops up at the top row of the screen when an alarm occurs
Setting for
each project
15 Moving/Not moving key window
Setting for
each screen
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
100
Setting items
Key window is displayed
in fixed position.
Moving or Not moving of a key window can be set for each screen.
100
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Base screen 3
LAMP, SWITCH
Station No.
change is
executed.
Base screen 2
[Move key window]
4 - 61
ALARM
Base screen 1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
16 Using/Not using the image files in the memory card
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Whether to use the image files stored in the memory card for the objects of
Parts Display/Parts Movement can be specified.
<Not checked.>
<Checked.>
Setting items
[The image file in a
memory card is used for
the Parts Image of Parts
Display/Movement]
Displays the parts

registered in the GOT.
4 - 62
Displays the BMP/

JPEG file parts in the
memory card.
4.4.1
List of relevant object items
OVERVIEW
A list of object items related to auxiliary settings is shown below.

(1) Auxiliary setting screen for each project
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4 - 63
ALARM
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
13) Ascii input is targeted in

output
14) When the cursor deleted,
cleared
15) While display mode of part
display is XOR, grouped
figures are displayed by
XOR
16) The image file in a
Display/Movement
4 - 64

Level display
12) Display the input range

range in Numerical Input
Graph/
Meter
Panel meter display
11) Carry out check for

GOT
Parts movement
10) When numerical/ ascii

input confirmation dialog
Parts display
9) Check the input range

while inputting the
numerical value
8) Do not display the cursor

when RET key or allow
key is pressed
7) When touch input is

detected, open key
window at the same time
Parts
User alarm display
6) Close cursor and key

pressed
Advanced alarm
popup display
(System alarm)
Advanced alarm
popup display
(User alarm)
5) Cursor input area

(System alarm)
4) Action when condition fail
Alarm

(User alarm)
3) Cursor position
Comment display
2) Action when switching

screens
Clock display
1) Action when condition

success
ASCII input
ASCII display
Data list
Numerical input
Numerical display
Touch switch
Lamp display
Auxiliary setting items
Numerical, Character Display
: Irrelevant
: Relevant,
action
Other
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function

success
screens
3
COMMON SETTING
3) Cursor position
6) Close cursor and key
pressed
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

detected, open key
window at the same time
8) Do not display the cursor
when RET key or allow
key is pressed
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
9) Check the input range

while inputting the
numerical value
10) When numerical/ ascii
input confirmation dialog
11) Carry out check for
GOT
6
LAMP, SWITCH
12) Display the input range

range in Numerical Input
13) Ascii input is targeted in
output
14) When the cursor deleted,
cleared
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
15) While display mode of part

figures are displayed by
XOR
16) The image file in a
Display/Movement

4 - 65
ALARM
Logging function
Historical Trend graph
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
Exter-nal
I/O
OVERVIEW
Recipe
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
(2) Auxiliary setting items for each screen
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
: Relevant,
Lamp,
Switch
14) Move key window
4 - 66

Level display
13) Carry out display of

advanced alarm pop up
Graph/
Meter
Panel meter display
12) Carry out station no. change
Parts movement
11) Position to specify area
Parts display
10) Defined key action
9) When numerical/ascii input is

detected display input
confirmation dialog
8) Check the input range while

inputting the numerical value
Parts
User alarm display

detected, open key window
at the same time
Advanced alarm
popup display
(System alarm)
Advanced alarm
popup display
(User alarm)

(System alarm)
Alarm

(User alarm)
4) Cursor position
Comment display

screens
Clock display

success
ASCII input
1) Screen setting has the

priority over project setting
ASCII display
Data list
Numerical input
Numerical display
Touch switch
Lamp display
Numerical, Character Display
: Irrelevant
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
: Relevant,
action
Other
Key windows
Script function
Gateway function
Test function
Debug
Bar code function
Hardcopy
Recipe function
Logging function
Scatter graph
Statistics graph
Bar graph
Line graph
Trend graph
External
I/O
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Recipe
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Trigger
Graph/Meter
: Irrelevant
COMMON SETTING
1) Screen setting has the

priority over project setting
success

screens
LAMP, SWITCH
4) Cursor position
detected, open key window
at the same time
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8) Check the input range while

9) When numerical/ascii input is
detected display input
confirmation dialog
10) Defined key action
11) Position to specify area
12) Carry out station no. change

13) Carry out display of
advanced alarm pop up

4 - 67
ALARM
14) Move key window
4.4.2
Settings
1 When setting for each project

1 Select [Common]
2 As "System Environment" dialog box appears, double click on [Auxiliary Settings] there.
3 As "Auxiliary Settings" dialog box appears, make the setting with reference to the following explanation
(
Section 4.4.3
).
Remark

Double click on System Environment and "System Environment" dialog box
appears, then double click on Auxiliary Settings
Double click
2 When setting for each screen

1 Select a screen, and then select [Screen]
[Properties] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box appears, click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog box, and then make the setting with
reference to the following explanation (
Section 4.4.3
).
Remark

Select a screen and right-click on the screen with a mouse, and then select
[Property]. As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog
box.
Right click
4 - 68

4.4.2 Settings
4.4.3
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Setting dialog box for each project

Make the auxiliary settings for each project.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING

Items
Description
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function and ASCII input function
when the condition is satisfied/switching screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Cursor and key window are not displayed:

Action when condition success
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor or key window is not displayed.
In the case of key input, touch the input area.
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
Only cursor is displayed:

When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor is displayed automatically.
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
LAMP, SWITCH
If there is key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
Action when switching screens

Both the cursor and key window are displayed:
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor and key window are displayed.
Even if there is no key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
Set the cursor position when switching screen.

Left top
:When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on input area in upper left part of
the screen.
User ID minimum
:When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in which
minimum user ID has been set.

4.4.3 Setting items
4 - 69
ALARM
Cursor position
Items
Description
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function, ASCII input function and
switch touch function when the condition is not satisfied.
They will be erased only when the trigger has been set to [ON] or [OFF].
Shape of numeric value/ ASCII input (frame) is displayed as it is.
Action when condition fail
Cursor, key window and input object are not erased:

When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is displayed as it is.
Cursor and key window are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window is erased.
Cursor, key window and input object are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is erased.
Set the display method of input area in input area.
1 character blink
:One character blinks within input area.
4567
Cursor input area
All reverse + 1 character blink :The characters are reversed within input area, and only one character
blinks
4567
Close cursor and key window
Check this item to automatically close the key window and input cursor when numeric value or ASCII
when RET key is pressed.
characters are input and then input definition key is pressed on the key window.
Check this item to automatically display the key window when the input area for numeric value/ASCII input is
touched.(In the case of ASCII input, ASCII key screen No. must have been set in the key windows screen
When touch input is detected,

open key window at the same
time
Do not display the cursor when

RET key or allow key is
pressed
Check the input range while
When numerical/ascii input is
detected, display input
confirmation dialog
Carry out check for
GOT
Display the input range when
inputs the out of range in
Numerical Input
No. setting.)
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
Check this item when not display the cursor even when the OK or arrow key is touched. If touch the cursor
displaying object directly, the cursor can be displayed.
Check this item when perform an input range check during numerical input.
* The range check can be performed even if the GOT internal device GS450.b1 is turned on.
To perform a range check when determining the input data, uncheck this item and turn off GS450.b1.
Check this item when display a confirmation dialog box during numerical/ASCII input.
* The input confirmation dialog box is also displayed when the GOT internal device GS450.b0 is turned on.
Check this item to make the GOT to display a message when objects are overlapped due to screen calling
function and superimpose window.
Check this item to display a message showing the input range if the value out of range is input on a key
window while numerical input function is used.
Check this item when output the numeric value input read complete signal (system signal 1-1.b4), numeric
Ascii input is targeted in the

system information output
value input signal (system signal 2-1.b4), numeric value input number, current cursor display user ID and
previous cursor display user ID of the system information function during ASCII input.
* The system information output at ASCII input can be performed even if the GOT internal device GS450.b2
is turned on.
Check this time when store "0" in the current cursor display object ID, previous cursor display object ID,
When the cursor deleted,
current cursor display user ID and previous cursor display user ID when the cursor is erased.
system information is cleared
* System information clear at cursor erase can be performed even if the GOT internal device GS450.b3 is
turned on.
4 - 70

4.4.3 Setting items
Items
Description
Check this item when perform the XOR display of grouped figures at a time when XOR display is specified in
OVERVIEW
the display mode of the parts display function.

Example: When performing XOR display of grouped figures shown below
(2)
(1)
(1)
Overlay figure (2)
on figure (1).
Overlay figure (3) on

figures (1) and (2)
and group all of them.
When performing XOR display of grouped figures at a time

figures are displayed by XOR
(2)
(3)
COMMON SETTING
(1)
When not performing XOR display of grouped figures
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
Perform XOR display

of figures (1) and
(2).
(3)
Perform XOR display of

figure (3) over the XOR
display of figures (1) and (2).
The image file in a memory

card is used for the Parts
Check this item when display the BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card as parts of Parts Display/
Image of Parts Display/
Parts Movement. (
Section 9.1.3 Arrangement and settings)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Movement
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
While display mode of part
(3)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.4.3 Setting items
4 - 71
ALARM
(1)
SPECIFICATIONS
(2)
2 Setting dialog box for each screen

Make the auxiliary settings for each screen.
Example 1: The screen for setting the GT15
Basic
Auxiliary
Key Window
Items
Screen setting has the priority
over project setting
Description
Check this item to give screen settings priority over project setting.
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function and ASCII input function
when the condition is satisfied/switching screen.
Cursor and key window are not displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor or key window is not displayed.
In the case of key input, touch the input area.
Action when condition

success
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
Only cursor is displayed:

When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor is displayed automatically.
If there is a key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
Action when switching

screens
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
Both cursor and key window are displayed:

When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor and key window are displayed.
Even if there is no key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120

4 - 72

4.4.3 Setting items
1
Key Window
Left top
:When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on input area in upper left part of
User ID minimum
:When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in which
User ID order
:When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in which the set
the screen.
minimum user ID has been set.

user ID order has been set.
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function, ASCII input function and
switch touch function when the condition is not satisfied.
They will be erased only when the trigger has been set to [ON] or [OFF].
Shape of numeric value/ ASCII input (frame) is displayed as it is.
Action when condition fail
Cursor, key window and input object are not erased:

When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window/ object is displayed as it is.
COMMON SETTING

When condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window is erased.
Cursor, key window and input object are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window/ object is erased.
Set the display method of input area in input area.
1 character blink
:One character blinks within input area.
4567
Cursor input area
All reverse + 1 character blink:The characters are reversed within input area, and only one character
blinks
4567
Check this item to automatically display the key window when the input area for numeric value/ASCII input is
touched.(In the case of ASCII input, ASCII screen No. must have been set in the key windows screen No.
time
Check the input range while

When numerical/ascii input is
confirmation dialog
D100
D100
D110
D110
D120
D120
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
setting.)
Check this item to check the input rage during numerical value input.
* Input range check can be conducted by turning on the GOT internal device GS450.b1.
To check the input range when the input is determined, uncheck this item and turn off the GS450.b1.
Check this item to display the input confirmation dialog box when the input definition key is pressed.
* The dialog can be displayed by turning ON the GOT internal device GS450.b0.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When touch input is detected,
SPECIFICATIONS
Cursor position
OVERVIEW
Description
Set the cursor position when switching screen.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Items
LAMP, SWITCH
Auxiliary

4.4.3 Setting items
4 - 73
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Auxiliary
Key Window
Items
Description
Select the position to display the input cursor after defined key for numeric value input/ASCII input function is
input.
As a right arrow key:
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input area at the right of the position set in [Position
to Specify Area].
As a down arrow key:
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input area at the bottom of the position set in
Defined key action *1
[Position to Specify Area].

No movement:
After defined key input, the cursor does not move from the written input area.
User ID order:
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input areas in user ID order.
(This setting is valid when the settings of move destination ID have been made on "Numeric input/
ASCII input function" option tab dialog box.)
After defined key input, cursor and key window are erased.
Select a position within input area as a base point to move the input cursor.
Position to specify area *1
Bottom-right
:Move the cursor based on the position at the lower-right of input area.
Top-left
:Move the cursor based on the position at the upper-left of input area.
Carry out station no. change

Check this item to use station No. change function.
Carry out display of advanced

Select the position to display the occurring alarm on the screen.
alarm pop up
Top
:Display at the top of the screen.
Center
:Display in the center of the screen.
Bottom
:Display at the bottom of the screen.
Select a method of displaying key window.

Move key window
Don't move
:Key window is displayed at the set fixed position.
Automatic move
:Key window is displayed at the position that is not overlapping with input area.
For details of * 1, refer to the next page.
4 - 74

4.4.3 Setting items
(1) When the cursor is not moved as designed

The following diagram shows the example of which the cursor is moved to the opposite position
with the cursor direction of the touched arrow key.
When changing the setting of [Position to specify area] from [Top-Left] to [Bottom-Right], the cursor
is enabled to move the same cursor direction as the direction of the touched arrow key.
3)
3)
2)
2)
1)
1)
Actual specified Touched button

direction of cursor
2)
1).
As the top-left parts of three objects are not on the

same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved to the
closest object on the left when operating to move
the cursor to top direction.
The cursor is moved in the order, 1)
2)
3).
As the bottom-right parts of three objects are on

the same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved to the
same direction as the arrow key when changing
[Position to specify area] from [Top-Left] to
[Bottom-Right].
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Actual specified Touched button

direction of cursor
(2) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if changing the setting of above (1)
Readjust the arrangement of the objects as follows.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

3)
2)
2)
1)
3)
2).
As the [Position to specify area] is not on the

same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved in the
order, 1)
3)
2).
Touched button
2)
3).
Arrange the objects so that the [Position to

specify area] may be on the same x-coordinate.
(When moving the cursor from side to side,
arrange the objects so that the [Position to
specify area] may be on the same y-coordinate.)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Touched button
LAMP, SWITCH
3)
1)
(After setting change)
(Before setting change)
COMMON SETTING
SPECIFICATIONS
(After setting change)
(3) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if readjust the arrangement of the objects
Directly touch the object to input.

4.4.3 Setting items
4 - 75
ALARM
(Before setting change)
OVERVIEW
*1 Relation between [Position to specify area] and specified area of cursor (for GOT-A900 series only)
4.4.4
Precautions
1 Precautions when making the auxiliary settings for each screen

(1) RET key operation setting
Make sure to uncheck [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] in the project
setting when [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] and [User ID order] are
used for defined key action setting,
If checked, action of [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] will be executed with
priority.
(2) "Action when condition success", "Switching Screen Option" setting
It is recommended to make the same settings for the base screen and overlap window. Otherwise,
the screens may not operate correctly as described below.
For "Action when condition success", "Switching Screen Option" setting, the settings for the screen
activated most recently remain active.
If the settings of an overlap window are active (the overlap window is displayed after the base
window is switched) as described in 3) below, and then the overlap window is closed as described
in 4), its settings will remain active (a cursor is displayed).
Ex)
When condition success

Base screen 1
Base screen 2
Window screen 1
Base screen switching device D100
Window screen switching device D200
Only a cursor is displayed.

A cursor and key window are not displayed.
Only a cursor is displayed.
<Operaion when condition success>

1)
2)
3)
Base Window 1
Base Window 2
4)
Window 1
D100
D200
1
0
D100
D200
2
0
Base Window 2
D100
D200
2
1
D100
D200
2
0
Activating base screen settings

Make the settings in order that a superimpose window set as a dummy on a base
screen will be switched when closing an overlap window.
(The script function is used to observe the overlap window switching device, and
change the superimpose window switching device when the device value is 0.)
4 - 76

4.4.4 Precautions
1
Setting priority when base screen, overlap window 1, 2 are simultaneously switched.
Lower
Overlap window 1
Overlap window 2
When switching the station No. (common to all projects) or security level, GOT
recognizes that screens are switched, and activates the settings of base screen
according to the above priority.
(Also when station No. is switched simultaneously for each screen type, GOT
operates as described above.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Base screen
(Superimpose window)
Priority
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

4.4.4 Precautions
4 - 77
ALARM
Higher
OVERVIEW
Setting priority of the screens is as follows:
4.5 Key Window
This section explains how to operate key window for numeric value input function and ASCII input function
as well as how to create user-key-window.
4.5.1
Key window type
Key window can be classified into two types: GOT original key window (Default key window) and key window
created by user (User-created key window).
Default key window is used for numerical input.
The key window for ASCII input must be created by user.
1 Default key window

Default key window will display the key window according to the data type (hexadecimal, decimal, octal
or binary) of input area automatically.
When the data type of input area is hexadecimal, decimal, octal or binary, the key window for
hexadecimal input will be displayed.
(1) Key window for decimal input
(2) Key window for hexadecimal input
2 User-created key window

User's original key window can be created by registering a user-created window as key window.
To use ASCII input function, create a key window with a user-created key window.
(1) User-created key window
(Created for ASCII input)
4 - 78
4.5 Key Window

4.5.1 Key window type
(2) User-created key window

(Created for numeric input (hexadecimal))
1
A key window to be displayed can be set in project unit or screen unit.
A suitable key window for each screen can be displayed from multiple key windows
created beforehand.
Section 4.5.5 How to create user-created key window
User-created key
window 1
User-created key
window 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Base screen 4
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Default key window
Base screen 3
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Base screen 2
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base screen 1
OVERVIEW
Key window to be displayed
4.5 Key Window

4.5.1 Key window type
4 - 79
ALARM
Remark
4.5.2
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For key window, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to key window only
Relevant to key window only.
(2) Functions relevant to key window and others
Confirm the relevant functions, when making settings.
For those functions, refer to the corresponding sections.

Displaying input range for numeric value Input
When a numeric value out of input range is input, a message appears showing the input
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
range.
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
Setting items
[Display the input range when
inputs the out of range in numerical input]
Input range check during numerical value input

Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Check the input range while
inputting the numerical value]
4 - 80
4.5 Key Window

Action of cursor and key window when condition success/switching screen/condition fail
When condition success/switching screen, cursor and key window are displayed.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When condition fail
Setting items
100
[Action when condition success]

SPECIFICATIONS
100
Cursor displayed
100
Key window erased
[Action when condition fail]

[Cursor position]
100
Object erased
Cursor and key

window displayed
Methods of displaying/erasing key window
Key window can be displayed as soon as touch input is detected; can be erased when the
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
RET key is pressed.
COMMON SETTING
When condition
success
OVERVIEW
4
100
100
100
Setting items
[Close cursor and key window
when RET key is pressed.]
[When touch input is detected,
Press the RET key (input definition),


time]
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
100
If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input order can be
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
set.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area automatically.
Setting items
100
Input definition
The cursor is moved


LAMP, SWITCH
100
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
Action of cursor key
The key window movement is enabled or disabled for each screen.
100
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Move key window]
The key window appears

at a fixed position.
4.5 Key Window

4 - 81
ALARM
100
Setting for
each project
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Enabling/Disabling the key window movement
Displaying/Hiding the cursor key
Setting for
each project
The cursor key can be hidden when the RET key or an arrow key is pressed.
100
100
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Do not display the cursor when
RET key is pressed]
The cursor is hidden
Press the RET key
Displaying/Hiding the input check dialog box during numerical/ASCII input

When numerical/ASCII characters are input, the input confirmation dialog can be displayed
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
by pressing the RTN key.
Setting items
[When numerical/ASCII input is
Change to the
following value
3000
OK
2 System information (
confirmation dialog]
Cancel
Section 3.6 System Information Setting)

(Write device)
(Write device)
Notifies the value before changed by the numeric value input
Notifies the value determined by the numeric value input
function (32 bits).
function (32 bits).
D100 2256
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
D100 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
348
The value before changed is notified
The changed value is notified

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b4)
(Write device)
The determined numerical value input can be notified.
Notifies the user ID of the determined numeric value input.
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
D100
A 1254 A 1254
B
The numerical value

input is determined
4 - 82
4.5 Key Window

348 B
348
Numeric value input (user ID: 2) determined
Key Code Input

(Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key when a
value is entered by the ASCII input or touch switch.
Disables all key inputs.
OVERVIEW
(Write device)
Input disabled
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
A B C
348 B
348
Key Input Signal
Notifies that the key window is on the screen.
Notifies the key input.
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
348 B
348
348 B
COMMON SETTING
Key window Output Signal
SPECIFICATIONS
The key code is notified
348
Key window on the screen
4
Section 2.9.1 GOT internal devices)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 GOT internal devices (

Numerical/ASCII Value Input Confirmation Dialog Setting
Signal
(Write device: GS450.b0)
Displays the dialog for confirming input data when the RTN
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
key is pressed. (Specific to numeric value input or ASCII

input)
Change to the
following value
3000
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Cancel

Numeric Input Range Check Setting Signal
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Checks the input range during numerical value input.
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
4.5 Key Window

4 - 83
ALARM
OK
4.5.3
Keys on default key window and display items
Keys displayed on default key window and the display items will be explained as follows.
(Example: Key window for hexadecimal)

Items
Description
*1
Displays the input value.
*1*2
Displays the numerical input range.

The key to input numeric value and decimal point .
INPUT
:Indicates the input value.
< (>)
:The value at the left (right) term is smaller than the value at the right (left)
==
:The value at the left (right) term is the same as the value at the right (left)
<= (>=)
:The value at the left (right) term is equal to or smaller than the value at the
!=
:The value at the left (right) term is different from the value at the right (left)
term.
term.
right (left) term.
term.
Changes the sign (+ or -) of the input value.
The key to move the input cursor.
*3
Moves the cursor in the object being input.

The key to delete the least significant digit of the numeric value being input and shift the whole
numeric value to right by one digit.
The key to erase whole input numeric value.
The key to write the input numeric value to a device. (Confirmation key)
The key to close key window.
*1
Input value and input range can be set to not be displayed.

Section 4.5.5
Setting to display key window
*2
When state is set by numerical input, the input range of the state with minimum No. will be displayed.
*3
If move the cursor while range check is performed during a numeric value input, the range check is performed not
Section 5.4 State Setting

during inputting but after determining the input value.
To perform a range check while inputting a value, hide the cursor (cancel inputting of the numeric value) and reinput the numeric value.
4 - 84
4.5 Key Window

4.5.3 Keys on default key window and display items
4.5.4
How to operate key window
Basic operation method of key window is explained as follows.

In the following case, numerical input function is used to explain key window operation as an example.
The operation is the same as when ASCII input function is used.
1 Touch the numerical input function to be input.
D100 100
D200 100
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Basic operation method
OVERVIEW
This section explains the methods of displaying a key window.
COMMON SETTING
3
2 As a key window appears, input the numeric
value.
Then, touch the RET key.
By default, a key windows is displayed at the
lower-right.
The user can set key window position.
3 The input value is updated, and key window is

closed.
D100 200
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D200 100
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D100 200
D200 100
(1) Key window position

Key window position can be set as follows.
[Window Position]
[Key Window] menu.

LAMP, SWITCH
1 Select [Object]
2 Click on the position to display a key window with a mouse.

Click
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4.5 Key Window

4.5.4 How to operate key window
4 - 85
ALARM
Remark
2 Method of moving key window

This section explains how to move a key window.
1 If touch the upper part of key window, the bar is
highlighted.
The highlighted bar indicates the key window is in
movable mode.
2 Touch the position to move the key window to

within three seconds.
If not touched in more than three seconds, the
movement mode of the key window will be
released. Even if the position in which the object
has been set is touched within less than three
seconds, the object wil not operate.
3 The key window moves to the specified position.
Buzzer volume setting

The buzzer that is sounded when moving a window can be set by [Buzzer Volume]
or [Windows Move Buzzer] of the GOT utility or GT Designer2. If [Buzzer Volume] is
set to "None", the buzzer will not be output.
"Operations setting" of the GOT utility
GT15 User's Manual (Chapter11 Display And Operation Settings (GOT
SET UP))
GT11 User's Manual (Chapter10 Display And Operation Settings (GOT
SET UP))
"GOT setup" of [Common]
[System Environment] of GT Designer2.
4 - 86
4.5 Key Window

4.5.4 How to operate key window
2
SPECIFICATIONS
A user-created key window is created in order to input numeric value on the original key window or display
key window by ASCII input function.
To use a user-created key window, arrange touch switches on a window screen and set the screen as key
window.
The user-created key window can be displayed instead of default key window, and can control as default key
window.
OVERVIEW
How to create user-created key window
(1)To create key window quickly

Keys for numeric input/ASCII input have been registered in the library.
A user-created key window can be created quickly by utilizing those keys.
3
COMMON SETTING
Example:The key registered in the library

(Keys other than following types have been registered.)
Keys for numerical input
Keys for ASCII input
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
For details of library, refer to the following manual.

(Chapter 10 Using Library)

(2) To input full-sized characters efficiently
If set two or more key codes at the touch switch key code setting, the touch switch
for inputting a character string by one touch can be created.
Section 6.2.8 Setting items of key code switch)
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
4.5 Key Window

4.5.5 How to create user-created key window
4 - 87
ALARM
4.5.5
1 Outline procedure
The outline procedure of creating a user-created key window is as follows.
Start
Create a window screen.
Create a new window screen.

Basic
Operation/Data Transfer Manual

(Section7.5 Creating a New
Screen)
Right click in workspace
Create a new window screen
Set touch switches assigned with key code on the window screen.
Set the touch switch assigned with key

code on window screen.
Set touch switches on

the window screen.
Library is available.

By utilizing the key for numeric
input/ASCII input in the library, it
can be easily set.
Make the settings in order that the created window screen will be
displayed as a key window.
Set the screen to be used commonly for

a whole project or used for each base
screen.
Setting to display key window
Select a key window

to be used as a key window
for ASCII input.
Make the required settings to display input value and input range.
Set the view format and position of input

value and input range.
Set input value position

and number of digits.
Input value area/Input range

area setting
Preview on GT Designer2.
Confirm the display image on GT

Designer2.
Basic
Operation/Data Transfer Manual

(Section7.12 Viewing Created
Screen Image)
4 - 88
4.5 Key Window

100
0
When condition success, cursor

and key window are displayed
automatically.
cursor action.
Cursor and key

window are displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Completed
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4.5 Key Window

4 - 89
ALARM
100
Set the key window display method and

OVERVIEW
Set the cursor action and key window action as necessary.
2 Setting to display key window

Set a key window to be used for a whole project or for each screen.
(1) Settings
(a) When setting a key window used for a whole project
1 Select [Common]
2 As [System Environment] dialog box appears, double click on [Key Window].

3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation ((2)(a)).
Remark

If double-click the [System Environment], the System Environment setting dialog
box will appear. Then, double-click the [Key Window].
Double click
(b) When setting a key window used for each screen

1 Select a screen, and then select [Screen] [Property] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Key window" tab dialog box, and make
the settings with reference to the following explanation ((2) (b)).
Remark

Select a screen and right-click on the screen with a mouse, and then select
[Property]. As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog
box.
Right click
4 - 90
4.5 Key Window

(2) Setting items
OVERVIEW
(a) When setting a key window for a whole project
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Description
Select the type of the key window to be used.
Use default key window
Select this item to use a default key window.
Select this item to use a user-created key window

Set a window screen to be used as a key window for numerical input (Decimal/Hexadecimal) and
Select key window sheet No.
ASCII input.
The screen can be confirmed by clicking on [Browse] button.
DEC/HEX key sheet No.
:When set to 0, a default key window will be displayed.
ASCII key sheet No.
:When set to 0, a key window will not be displayed.
Check this item to change the key window display in synchronization with the value of language
switching device (
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Key window setting (Project)
3.4 Setting Language Switching Device).
After checking, select the language at [Select Language] (value stored in language switching
device: 1 to 10) and set the window screen to be corresponded to the selected language.
An asterisk (*) is affixed to the language that has been set.
LAMP, SWITCH
Synchronize with Language

Switching*2
Key window type (Project)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7
Select the items displayed in the key window.
Display value during input*1
Check this item to display the value being input on a key window.
Display input function

Check this item to display the data input range on a key window.
range*1
To display the inputting value or input enabled range in the user-created key window, set input value area and
input range area in the key window.
(
*2
This section
Input value area/Input range area setting)
For details of *2, refer to the next page.
4.5 Key Window

4 - 91
ALARM
*1
*2 Relationship between [Select Language] and the key widow to be displayed

The key window, set for [Select Language], is displayed in synchronization with the language switching
device value.
(Setting example of GT Designer2)
Select
language
DEC key sheet No.
*1
10
*2
22
*10
47
Description
Window screen 10 is displayed for the key window when the language switching device value is
"1".
"2".
The standard key window is displayed when the language switching device value is "3".
:
"10".
(Example of language switching on GOT)
Language switching
device value:
Window screen No.: 10
4 - 92
Language switching
device value:
4.5 Key Window

Language switching
device value:
10
1
OVERVIEW
(b) When setting a key window for each screen
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Key Window
Description
Select the type of the key window to be used.
Screen setting has priority over

project setting
After setting, select the type of key window to be used.
Use default key window
Select this item to use a default key window.
Select key window sheet
Select this item to use a user-created key window

Set a window screen to be used as a key window for numerical input (Decimal/Hexadecimal) and
ASCII input.
The screen can be confirmed by clicking on [Browse] button.
DEC/HEX key sheet No.
:When set to 0, a default key window will be displayed.
ASCII key sheet No.
:When set to 0, a key window will not be displayed.
Check this item to change the key window display in synchronization with the value of language
Synchronize with Language
switching device (
3.4 Setting Language Switching Device).
After checking, select the language at [Select Language] (value stored in language switching
device: 1 to 10) and set the window screen to be corresponded to the selected language.
An asterisk (*) is affixed to the language that has been set.
Display value during
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select the items displayed in the key window.
Screen setting has priority over

project setting
input*1
Display input function range*1
Switching*2
Key window type (Screen)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items
Key window setting (Screen)
LAMP, SWITCH
Auxiliary
After setting, select the display of key window to be used.
Check this item to display the value being input on a key window.
Check this item to display the data input range on a key window.
4.5 Key Window

4 - 93
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
*1
To display the inputting value or input enabled range in the user-created key window, set input value area and
input range area in the key window.
(
*2
This section
Input value area/Input range area setting)
*2 Relationship between Select Language and the key widow to be displayed

The key window, set for Select Language, is displayed in synchronization with the language switching
device value.
(Setting example of GT Designer2)
Select
language
DEC key sheet No.
*1
10
*2
22
*10
47
Description
"1".
"2".
:
"10".
(Example of language switching on GOT)
Language switching
device value:
4 - 94
Language switching
device value:
4.5 Key Window

Language switching
device value:
10
1
3 Input value area/Input range area setting
Input maximum value area
Input minimum value area
: Displays the value being input.

: Displays the allowable range of input.
(Display example:
)
: Displays only the maximum value that can be input.
(Display example:
)
: Displays only the minimum value that can be input.
(Display example:
)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Input value area

Input range area
OVERVIEW
Set the area to display the value being input and the input range on user-created key window.
1 Select the menu as shown below:

[Object]
[Key Window Settings]
COMMON SETTING
3
[Input Value Area]
[Input Range Area]
[Input Maximum Value Area]
[Input Minimum Value Area]
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Click on the position to display input value/input range.
The input value/input

range area is displayed
on which a mouse is
clicked.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 Double click on the assigned input value area/input range area to set the attribute.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4.5 Key Window

4 - 95
ALARM
Items
Description
Select the view format of the input value to be displayed.
DEC
Type
Details
Size
:Select this item when a decimal key window has been created.
HEX
:Select this item when a hexadecimal key window has been created.
ASCII
:Select this item when a key window for ASCII input has been created.
Select character size of the input value to be displayed.

When setting Input Value Area
Set the number of digits for displaying input value.
DEC
:1 to 32 digits
HEX
:1 to 8 digits
ASCII
:1 to 100 digits
When setting Input Range Area
Digits*1
Set the number of digits for displaying input range

DEC/HEX
: 15 to 78 digits
When setting Input Maximum Value and Input Minimum Value Areas
Set in the number of digits of the maximum and minimum values.
DEC
: 1 to 32 digits
HEX
: 1 to 8 digits
Text
Select the color of text to be displayed.
Background
Select the background color of text.
*1 To specify an input range area in the user-created key window

If a device is specified in a range equation and the device value exceeds the preset number of digits, "?"
may be displayed.
Specify the input range in consideration of the potential device value with reference to the following
example.
Example 1: If D100 <= INPUT <= D200
D10 0 < = INPUT < = D20 0

Required number
of digits
Device value 1
( -32767 to
32767 ) *
1 Device value
( -32767 to
32767 ) *
Input range
6 digits
13 digits
6 digits
Requires 25 digits.
*1 In case of signed 16 bits decimal
Example 2: If D100 < INPUT
D10 0 < INPUT

Required number
of digits
Device value 1 1 1
( -32767 to
32767) *
Input range
6 digits
8 digits
Requires 13 digits.
*1 In case of signed 16 bits decimal
4 - 96
4.5 Key Window

4.5.6
Precautions
A key window cannot be displayed when details of alarm is displayed on a comment window by using
alarm list display function and alarm history display function.
2 Precautions for creating user-created key window

(1) Object that can be set on user-created key window
Make sure to set only touch switches in which key codes for numerical input/ASCII input has been
set on a user-created key window.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Precautions for using default key window and user-created key window.
OVERVIEW
This section provides the precautions for using key window are as follows.
3
(a) If the actions of key code, bit SET and word SET are set together in the action setting, only key
code action will be available.
(b) Even if ON/OFF shape is set, touch switch will be displayed in OFF shape.
COMMON SETTING
(2) Action of the touch switch set on a user-created key window
When creating a key window with a key that includes the above functions, use a
normal window screen as a key window without making the settings for displaying
the key window.
Example: Normal overlap window used as key window
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
To create a key that includes function (1) and (2)
Turn ON the other device (bit SET)

simultaneously with RETURN (0000H).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Set the objects except

Numerical input and
ASCII input.
(3) Size of user-created key window

The key window size is same with the size of set window screen.
It can be changed by changing the size of window screen.
For changing the size of the window screen, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (
Section 7.5
The applicable size of window screen is different according to the status of close key and move
key, i.e., whether they are displayed or not.
(4) Input value area/Input range area
(a) Multiple input value areas/input range areas cannot be set on one window screen.
4.5 Key Window

4.5.6 Precautions
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Creating a New Screen)
4 - 97
ALARM
LAMP, SWITCH
5.
COMMON SETTINGS FOR OBJECTS
This chapter is described the items to be set commonly after Chapter 6.
5.1 Device Setting
This chapter explains the setting method of the device applicable for monitoring or writing using object functions.
5.1.1
Device setting
1 Device that can be set by GT Designer2

For details on the device type and setting range, please refer to the following.
2 Device usable for controller monitoring

The device range available for setting by GT Designer2 depends on the controller type selected when
the GT Designer2 project is created. (
Section 3.1 GOT/PLC Type Setting)
As the following table shows, the device range set by GT Designer2 may be different with the usable
range in controller.
Example: Device setting range of difference between SIEMENS PLC and GT Designer2
SIEMENS PLC:
MATSUSHITA PLC:
SIMATIC S7-300 Series (Input relay)
MEWNET-FP Series (Index register)
PLC
10000 to 11277
IX0 to IX13, IY0 to IY13
GT Designer2
10000 to 15117
Setting not allowed
Device setting range
GT Designer2 does not check whether the device settings (device name, device No.) are actually
available for the target controller.
For the availability, check it as follows:
(1) Check the following when drawing
Device type and setting range available for setting by GT Designer2.
Device type and setting range available for controller monitoring
User's Manual of the connected controller
(2) Check when monitoring
Check the device name and range with the system alarm.
If try to monitor the device name or device range that cannot be used by a controller, "322
Dedicated device is out of range." occurs.
5-1
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.1 Device setting
5.1.2
Settings
OVERVIEW
Set a device using the setting dialog box provided for each object function.
Example: Setting a device to be monitored by "Lamp"
1 Click the Dev button, and the setting dialog box is displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Direct input of a device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
It is possible to input a device from the keyboard.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
2 When set two or more channels, the [Select CH No.] dialog box is displayed.
Displays the presently set device.
@ 1: 1 - 2
x 0003
Device No.
Device name
6
LAMP, SWITCH
PLC station No.

NW No.
Channel No.
Displays the channel No. and type name of the controller.
Display in the Select CH No. dialog box can be changed using [Preferences] of GT Designer2. For
[Preferences] of GT Designer2, refer to the following.
Click the Dev button in the setting dialog box of object function while pressing the
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 5.3.1
Shift key of the personal computer, and the Select CH No. dialog box is displayed
Displaying the Select CH No. dialog box
independently of the [Preferences] setting.

5.1 Device Setting

5.1.2 Settings
5-2
ALARM
Section 5.3.1
3 Click the controller type, and the device setting dialog box is displayed.
Displays the channel No. and type name
of the controller, which are set presently.
Device setting dialog box
(1) Changing the communication settings

After setting a device, do not change the channel setting to [None] in
communication settings.
If changed, it must be set the device again for the channel for which [None] is set.
3.7.2 Setting items
(2) Specifying a bit device to the device of word format (16/32bits).
For a device number, set a multiple of 16.
Setting of frequently-used device.
Once a device is set, it can be selected from the displayed list for setting from the
next time.
Maximum 10 device names can be added to the list. If more than 10 devices are
kept, the device name will be deleted from the oldest one.
5-3
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.2 Settings
5.1.3
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC, CNC
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Items
Description
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or by direct input).

When setting BM (buffer memory), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device number.
Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device comment/device
name is available during device setting.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Select the device name to be set.

Device
Device Comment
(
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.2 Referring to Device Comment When Setting
Kind of Device
Displays the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range
Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Bit position
Extended
Block
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Devices)
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.

(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
Set the block number of the extended file register.
(It can be set when "ER" is selected as the device name.)

Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module.
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.

(It can be set when "BM" is selected as the device name.)
Network*1
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.

Host
Select this when monitoring the host controller.
Select this when monitoring other controller.

Then, set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored.
NW No.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Other*2
: Set the network No.
Station No . : Set the station No.
Refer to the next page for the details of *1 and *2.
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5-4
ALARM
Unit top I/O
*1 When monitoring multi-CPU system

Set the CPU No. (1 to 4) in the network setting when monitoring a multiple CPU system.
When the CPU No. is set to "0", set the CPU No. (1 to 4) in the network setting.
Connection method
Monitor device
Connected PLC CPU
Bus connection
Ethernet connection
CC-Link connection
MELSECNET connection
Control CPU
If monitoring a single CPU system, set CPU No. to 0.
*2 When monitoring B and W assigned in link parameter and network parameter.

Set device B and W running cyclic communication as [Host].
If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic transmission will be changed to the transient transmission irrespective of the network type, resulting in delay of the object display.
Setting device by inputting directly from keyboard

When setting it by inputting directly from the keyboard, set the items as follows:
Bit condition
Device number
Device name
CPU No.
PLC station number
N / W No.
Channel No.
5-5
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
2 Omron PLC
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
Device
Kind of Device
Range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit position
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5-6
ALARM
Extended
3 KEYENCE PLC
Items
Description
Device
Kind of Device
Range
Extended
Bit position

For details of *1, refer to the following
*1 Device settings of KEYENCE PLC

Make the device setting for KEYENCE PLC as follows.
(1) Setting relays, internal auxiliary relays, latch relays and control relays
Make settings for these devices by a channel number and a bit position.
Bit position
Channel No.
5-7
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
4 SHARP PLC
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
Description
Kind of Device
Range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit position
Refer to the following for details of *1.
*1 Device settings of SHARP PLC

Make the device setting for Sharp PLC as follows:
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Set a register as a bit device.

(a) Registers
Set the type (first 2 digits) and the address.
Number
Address
Address
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
File number
LAMP, SWITCH
(b) File register

Set the file number and the address.
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5-8
ALARM
Device*1
Extended
COMMON SETTING
Remark
Monitoring the timer and the counter:

(a) Address setting
Be sure not to set the same address range for the timer and the counter.
Even if these addresses are overlapped, GOT will display no error.
GOT monitors them according to the address instead of the device name.
Therefore, if the device invalid for the Sharp PLC side parameter is set using
GT Designer2, GOT will monitor other device (the device corresponding to
the set device address range).
Example:
Content in Sharp PLC parameter setting
T0000 to T1000
C1001 to C1777
Content in GT Designer parameter setting
Even if GT Designer2 is set to

"C0000", GOT will also monitor
"T0000".
(b) Contact writing into timer and counter

Writing the contact for the timer and counter can only be done while the CPU
is in RUN (while the timer and counter is in operation).
(2) Set a register and memory as a word device

(a) I/O relay
Set a combination of the device address (multiple of 16)+bit address format (fixed to 0).
Even number
The next line must be set

to 0,for it is bit address.
(b) Registers and file register

Set the device address (multiple of 16).
Type
5-9
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Even number
1
OVERVIEW
5 TOSHIBA PLC
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Description
Kind of Device
Range
Bit position

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
*1 Device settings for Toshiba PLC

Make the device setting for Toshiba PLC as follows:
Device name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Set a relay as a bit device

Set the device using the format of word address (DEC)+bit address (HEX)
Device number
Bit address (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
Remark
Device number
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name
(adding "W")
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Set a relay as a word device

Set the word address (DEC).
For device name setting, enter "W" after the bit device name.
Notation of device address (when using PROSEC V series)

The notation of device address setting is different between the Toshiba PLC
peripheral software and GOT. Refer to the following for details.
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 10
ALARM
Device*1
Extended
COMMON SETTING
Items
6 HITACHI PLC
Items
Description
Device*1
Kind of Device
Range
Extended
Bit position

*1 Device setting for Hitachi PLC

Make the device setting for Hitachi PLC as follows:
(1) When specifying an external I/O device
(a) When setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of module No.+ slot No.+ module bit No.
Device name
Device number
Module internal bit No. (00-95):DEC
Slot No. (0-A) HEX
Module No. (0-5) DEC
(b) When setting a word device

Set the device using the format of module No.+ slot No.+ module bit No.
For the device name setting, enter "w" before the bit device name.
Device name
5 - 11
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Device number
Module internal bit No. (00-95):DEC
Slot No. (0-A) HEX
Module No. (0-5) DEC
(a) Setting a bit device

Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. +
module bit No.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Device number
Module bit No. (00-95): DEC
Slot No. (0-9) : DEC
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
Device number
Module bit No. (0-9): DEC
Slot No. (0-9) : DEC
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name
3
COMMON SETTING
(b) When setting a word device.

Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. +
module bit No.
For device name setting, enter "W" before the bit device name.
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 12
ALARM
Device name
OVERVIEW
(2) When specifying a remote external I/O device
7 MATSUSHITA Electric Works PLC
Items
Description
Device*1
Kind of Device
Range
Extended
Bit position

*1 Device setting for Matsushita Electric Works PLC

Make the device setting for Matsushita Electric Works PLC as follows.
(1) Set a contact as a bit device
Set the device using the format of word address (DEC)+ bit address (HEX).
Device name
Device number
Bit address (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
(2) Set a contact as a word device

Set the device number.
Enter "W" before the device name, not including the bit address.
Device name
("W" added)
5 - 13
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Device number
1
OVERVIEW
8 Yaskawa PLC
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Description
Kind of Device
Range
Bit position

(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting).
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
*1 Device settings for Yaskawa PLC (For CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920, MP-930)
Set the coil device (MB) as follows:
Device name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Set the link and coil as a bit device

Set it in the format of word address (DEC)+bit position (HEX).
Device No.
Bit position (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
Device No.
Word address (DEC)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Set a register as a word device

Set it with a word address (DEC).
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 14
ALARM
Device*1
Extended
COMMON SETTING
Items
9 Yokogawa PLC
Items
Description
Device
Kind of Device
Range
Extended
5 - 15
Bit position

(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting).
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
10 Allen-Bradley PLC
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Description
COMMON SETTING
Items
Then, set the file numbers/element number by 0 to 9 buttons (or by direct input).
Kind of Device
Range
Network
Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified device.
Other
Select this when monitoring the host PLC.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Host
Select this when monitoring the other PLC.

Then, set the station number of the PLC to be monitored.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 16
ALARM
Device*1
*1 Device settings for Allen-Bradley PLC

The Allen-Bradley PLC device addressing consists of a file and element.
Make setting as follows using GT Designer2.
(1) Set a bit address as a bit device
B 3
64
15
File type
File No.
Element delimiter
Bit No.
Bit delimiter
Element No.
Setting by GT Designer2
File type
Bit No.
File No.
Element No.
T 4
TT
File type
File No.
Element delimiter
Bit No.
Bit delimiter
Element No.
File type
Bit No.
File No.
Element No.
(2) Set an element address as a word device
N 7
15
File type
File No.
Element delimiter
Element No.
File type
Element No.
File No.
T 4
File type
File No.
Element delimiter
ACC
Word
Word delimiter
Element No.
File type
File No.
5 - 17
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Word
Element No.
1
11 SIEMENS PLC
OVERVIEW
(1) S7-300/400 series
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Items
Description
Device*1
Kind of Device
Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range
Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Bit position
Set the monitor target of the set device.

Host
Other
Select this to monitor the PLC specified as the host from the GOT utility (setup).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Network
Set the bit position for the word device to be monitored.
Select this when monitoring the PLC other than the one specified as [Host].
Then, set the PLC MPI address.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 18
ALARM
Extended
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input it).
*1 Device settings of SIEMENS PLC (S7-300/400 series)

Make the device setting for SIEMENS PLC as follows:
(1) Set a bit memory as a bit device
Set the device using the format of byte address (DEC)+bit address (0 to 7)
Device number
Bit address (0 to 7)
Byte address (DEC)
Device name
Remark
Notation of bit memory

The difference in bit memory notation between GOT and PLC is as follows:
Notation of GOT
Notation of PLC
Q0007
Q0.7
(2) Set a bit memory as a word device

Set it with device number.
For the device name setting, enter "W" after the bit memory device name.
Device name
(W added)
Device number
(Setting with even number)
(3) When setting a data register

Set the device using the format of data block (DB) + data word (DW).
Device name
Data word (DW) number

(Setting with even number)
Data block (DB) number
Remark
(1) Before setting data register

(a) It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and
sequence program, before using a data register.
(b) Setting more than one data block cannot be done.
(2) Timer (Current value) (T)
Only one device can be set for the write target of this device.
Therefore, multiple devices, such as, using the recipe function, etc., cannot be
used.
5 - 19
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
(2) S7-200 series
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
Device
Kind of Device
Range
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit position
*1 Device settings of SIEMENS PLC (S7-200 series)

Make the device setting for SIEMENS PLC as follows.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Setting bit devices (excluding timers and counters)

Make settings for bit devices by byte address (decimal) and bit address (0 to 7).
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Bit address (0 to 7)
Byte address (DEC)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 20
ALARM
Extended
12 Microcomputer
Items
Description
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input).
Kind of Device
Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range
Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Extended
5 - 21
Bit position

(It can be set if the word device name selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
13 OMRON temperature controller
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Kind of Device
Range
Network
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Bit position
Select this when writing data to all temperature controllers.
During monitoring, the temperature controller of station No. 0 is monitored.
All
(When writing the data in numerical input, data is written to all connected temperature controllers during
input, and the temperature controller of station No. 0 is monitored during other than input (i.e. display).)
Select this when monitoring the temperature controller of the specified station No.
After selecting "Selection", set the station No. in the range indicated below.
0 to 99
: To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No.
100 to 115 : To specify the station No. of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of
GOT data register (GD).
Station No.
100
GD10
Setting range
101
GD11
102
GD12
0 to 99
(If setting a value out of
the range above, a timeout
113
GD23
error occurs.)
114
GD24
115
GD25
LAMP, SWITCH
Station No.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Extended
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device*1
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 22
ALARM
Items
COMMON SETTING
*1 Device settings of OMRON temperature controller

Make the device settings for OMRON temperature controller as follows.
(1) Setting statues
Make settings for statues by a channel number and a bit position.
Bit position
Channel No.
(2) Setting variable area 0, variable area 1 and variable area 2

Make setting for variable areas by a channel number and address.
Address
Channel No.
5 - 23
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
14 YAMATAKE temperature controller
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Device
Kind of Device
Range
Bit position
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Extended
Monitors the temperature controller of the specified station No.
0 to 127
GD10
Setting range
201
GD11
202
GD12
0 to 127
213
GD23
error occurs.)
214
GD24
215
GD25
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Station No.
200
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Network
Station No.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 24
ALARM
Items
COMMON SETTING
15 RKC temperature controller
Items
Description
Device*1
Kind of Device
Range
Extended
Bit position

Monitors the temperature controller of the specified station No.
0 to 16
Network
Station No.*1
Station No.
100
GD10
101
GD11
102
GD12
0 to 16
113
GD23
error occurs.)
114
GD24
115
GD25
*1 Device settings of RKC temperature controller

Make the station No. settings for OMRON temperature controller as follows.
Set by a value of "unit address + 1".

For unit address 0: Set "1".
For unit address F: Set "16".
5 - 25
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Setting range
1
OVERVIEW
16 Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to 9 buttons (or by direct input).
Monitors the Inverter of the specified station No.

0 to 31
: To monitor the Inverter of the specified station No.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
100 to 115 : To specify the station No. of the Inverter to be monitored by the value of GOT data register
(GD).
100
GD10
Setting range
101
GD11
102
GD12
113
GD23
error occurs.)
114
GD24
115
GD25
Range
LAMP, SWITCH

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit position
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Kind of Device
Extended
0 to 31
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 26
ALARM
Station No.
Station No.
17 Servo amplifier
Items
Description
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to 9 buttons (or direct input it).
Kind of Device
Range
Clicking the Device Definition button displays the dialog box indicating the correspondence between the
Device Definition*1
GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of servo amplifier.
If select an item on the displayed dialog box, the definition of the servo amplifier is displayed in the text box
below.
Extended
Bit position
Network

(It can be set if the word device name selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
Select this item when writing data to all servo amplifiers connected.
During a monitoring, the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is monitored.
All
When inputting data by Numerical Input, the data is written to all servo amplifiers connected during inputting;
the servo amplifier of Station No. 0 is monitored during other than inputting (displaying).
Select this item when monitoring the servo amplifier of the Station No. specified.
After selecting, set station numbers of servo amplifiers in the following range.
0 to 31
: The servo amplifier of the Station No. specified will be monitored.
100 to 115
: Specify the Station No. of the servo amplifier to be monitored with a GOT data register (GD).
Selection
Station No.
100
GD10
101
GD11
102
GD12
0 to 31
113
GD23
error occurs.)
114
GD24
115
GD25
5 - 27
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
Setting range
*1 Device Definition dialog box
OVERVIEW
When setting a device on the Device dialog box and click the Device Definition button, the
correspondence between the GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier and the definition of the servo
amplifier is displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
The device can be searched with the servo definition or other items on this dialog box to set a device.
Definition
Symbol
: Select this item when searching a device with the virtual device for a servo amplifier used
by the GOT.
: Select this item when searching a device with the definition of a servo amplifier.
: Select this item when searching a device with the symbol of a servo amplifier.
2 Input a device, definition or symbol by which the searching is performed.

.
3 Click the Show button.

4 The items that matches to the specified condition are displayed.
The display contents are as follows.
Device
: The GOT virtual device for a servo amplifier is displayed.
Definition : The definition of the servo amplifier is displayed.
Symbol
: The abbreviated name for the servo amplifier is displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
5 Select a device to be set.

6 Clicking the OK button reflects the device selected by
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Input a device, definition or symbol according to the key item for the searching method specified in
to the Device dialog box.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When selecting [All] in the Network setting

The network No. 0 and Station No. FF are displayed on Device List and when
printing.
(Device List screen)
5.1 Device Setting

5.1.3 Setting items
5 - 28
ALARM
Device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
1 Select a key item for searching.
5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
GOT supports and handles the following 7 types of numeric data.

16- or 32-bit signed binary (binary including a sign)
16- or 32-bit unsigned binary (binary including no sign)
16- or 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
32-bit real number (floating point data)
The range of each numeric data type is shown below.
The data range varies depending on the data length (16 or 32 bits).
Data range
Data type
Data length: 16 bits
Data length: 32 bits
-32768 to 32767
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned BIN
0 to 65535
0 to 4294967295
BCD
0 to 9999
0 to 99999999
Real number
Not used
Signed 13-digit notation (floating point format only) *1
Signed BIN
*1: The real number precision is given from the uppermost digit to the 6th digit. The 7th and later digits are illegal.
If a number having 7th and later digits is displayed on GOT, there are cases the displayed value differs from the
value displayed on GX Developer.
Example: When the value of a real number (floating point data) of the controller is 4.123
Display on GX Developer
: 4.123000
Display on GOT (display of up to 6th digit)
: 4.123000
Display on GOT (display of up to 13th digit)
: 4.1230001449585
For details of real number (floating point data), refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) (Section 3.9.4 Real numbers
(floating decimal point data)
The following shows an example where the data length and data type are set on the Trigger tab in the
Numerical Input.
5 - 29
5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
1
OVERVIEW
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Object arrangement
If the menu/icon for setting object is selected, the cursor will go to arrangement mode (+).
In default setting, clicking on the drawing screen arranges an object. When continuously clicked on the
screen, multiple same type objects will be continuously arranged.
The arrangement mode can be released by right-clicking the mouse or using the ESC key.
COMMON SETTING
Click
Click
Click
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Click
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5.3.1 Object arrangement
5 - 30
ALARM
5.3.1
1 To change the object arrangement method

Object arrangement method can be changed in the Preferences dialog box.
(Select [Project]
[Preferences] from the menu to display the dialog box.)
For details of the Preferences dialog box, refer to the following manual.
Preferences dialog box
Toolbars
Icon
Operation
View
Items
Figure/Object deselect-after
create
Tool de-select after use
Description
Checked
Not checked
: After arranging objects, the selected status (status with handle) is reset.
: With the selected status (status with handle), figures/objects are arranged on the drawing
screen.
Checked
: After setting figures/objects, the tool selected status is reset. It is convenient to arrange
different figures/objects.
: After setting figures/objects, the selected status remains active. It is convenient to
arrange the same figures/objects continuously.
Not checked
Checked
System setting on new
Not checked
Checked
Change object after create
Not checked
Checked
Auto File Save
Not checked
Checked
Show "Select Project" dialog
when you start GT Designer2
Show wizard on new project
Open "Select CH No." dialog
5 - 31
Not checked
Checked
Not checked
: The system settings dialog box (GOT type, controller type, etc.) appears in creation of a
new project.
: The system settings dialog box (GOT type, controller type, etc.) does not appear in
creation of a new project.
: After arranging objects on the drawing screen, the settings dialog box automatically
appears.
: After arranging objects on the drawing screen, the settings dialog box does not
automatically appear.
: File is automatically saved.
Saving interval (5 to 720) is set.
: File is not automatically saved.
: When the GT Designer2 is started, the project selection dialog box (New, Open, etc.)
appears.
: When the GT Designer2 is started, the project selection dialog box (New, Open, etc.)
does not appear.
: When creating a new project, the wizard screen appears.
: When creating a new project, the wizard screen does not appear.
It is possible to set display/hide for the Select CH No. dialog box when setting devices.
Only New Device
: The Select CH No. dialog box is displayed only when setting a new device.
Open
: The Select CH No. dialog box is always displayed.
Not Open (Selected "Device Setting" dialog will be opened)
: When a number ("1" to "4") is set for CH No., the device setting dialog box of the specified
channel No. is displayed. If "Latest" is set for CH No., the device setting dialog box of the
same channel No. as that of the previously displayed device setting dialog box is displayed.

5.3.1 Object arrangement
Object shape setting
Frames, i.e., shapes can be set to objects in order to make distinction between display images and ranges of
objects such as touch switches, lamps and others.
1 Setting procedure
Set the shape in the object setting dialogue box.
The following explains the setting procedure of shape with the example of bit lamp.
OVERVIEW
5.3.2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Five basic shapes can be selected in the Basic tab.

To select other shapes than basic ones, click on the Others button.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Click on the Others button to display the "Image List" dialogue box. Select one shape among them.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(Screen selecting [Library])
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5.3.2 Object shape setting
5 - 32
ALARM
(Screen selecting [Basic Figure])
Basic
Text
Items
Basic Figure Library*1*2

(Only for lamp function and
Description
Select the shape for an object.
Basic figure
: Basic shapes that have been registered for each object
Library
: Shapes that have been registered as library (My favorite, User defined Libraries, System
touch switch function)

Library
Libraries).
Switch the basic shape type or library type.
On/Off
(Only for lamp function and
These buttons are used to switch the shapes displayed at the time of ON/OFF.
touch function)
Image List
Select the shape for an object.

Set the No. of shape to be displayed. Click on the Jump button to switch the shapes.
Click this button to register only the figure of the selected object to My Favorites or User Library.
For details of the Copy to here button, refer to the following manual.
Copy to here
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 10.3 Creating Original
Library)
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the followings.
*1 Use of high quality font

When the high quality font is included in the library used as the figures of the lamp display or touch switch
function, also make the following setting (1) or (2).
Adjust the high quality font type (example: 16dot HQ Mincho), too.
The text is not displayed as the high quality font on the GOT screen without the above setting.
Example: When displaying 16dot HQ Mincho
(1) Register to comment

Register the same texts used the high quality font as a comment of high quality font.
It is not necessary to display the registered comment.
(a) If HQ is specified for the basic comment, the 16dot HQ Mincho font is used.
(b) If HQ font is used for the comment group, a high quality font type can be specified.
5 - 33

1
OVERVIEW
(2) Arrange text on screen

Arrange the same texts used the high quality font on the screen as a text of the high quality font.
It is not necessary to display the registered comment.
It is recommended to create a screen to arrange the high quality font.
When switch/lamp shape is changed, the ON/OFF shapes may not be switched automatically depending
on the shape used as switch/lamp. Make sure to check whether the ON/OFF shape can be automatically
switched before changing the switch/lamp shape, and make the relevant setting as necessary.
Example: Lamp (Bit)
OFF
ON
OFF
If the ON shape is changed, the OFF shape will be changed
automatically.
ON shape is changed
Shape within library
ON
OFF
Shape within library
ON
OFF
Even if the ON shape is changed, the OFF shape will not be
changed automatically.
ON shape is changed
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
ON
Shape as basic figure
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5 - 34
ALARM
Shape as basic figure
3
COMMON SETTING
*2 Cautions for changing switch/lamp shape
SPECIFICATIONS
5.3.3
Object size change
This section explains how to change the size of arranged object.
1 Object size change

(1) Method of changing size
1 Select the object to be changed in size.
2 Position the cursor over the sizing handles, click and drag it to change the object size.
012345
012345
Remark
The size of some objects cannot be changed using the above method.
The size of data list and alarm history is determined according to the text size set on
the corresponding basic tab. Therefore, changing the size using the above method
is not applicable.
To change the object size, open the setting dialogue box and change the text size
within the basic tab.
(2) Text size

The text size changes with the object size.
The changing details are different according to object types.
Change of text size
Object
Details of change
The text size is enlarged 0.5 to 8 times from the original object size.
Numerical display
Numerical input
Changeable
The text size is enlarged 0.5 to 8 times from the original object size.
ASCII display
ASCII input
The text size can be changed by setting text size from the dialog box of each object.
Example: Touch switch
Touch switch
Lamp
Alarm list
Comment display
Data list
Unchangeable
Alarm history
Trend graph
Example: Bar graph
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Panel meter
5 - 35

5.3.3 Object size change
1
2 Change size of object with shape
OVERVIEW
(1) Method of changing size

1 Select the object to be changed in size.
2 Position the cursor over the sizing handles, click and drag it to change the object size.
2
322 Dedicated
SPECIFICATIONS
322 Dedicated device is out

range. Confirm device range.
3
In the case of numeric display
(b) Shape of varying width (when enlarged)

In the case of numeric display
In both cases (a) and (b), the width of shape is narrowed corresponding to the
reduced shape size when the shape is reduced.
(2) Selecting shape
A shape can be selected in the image list dialog box of each object.
Symbol @ is prefixed to the library name for shapes that have the fixed width
(case (a) in (1) above).
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
In the case of a switch
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
In the case of a switch
COMMON SETTING
(1) Shape kinds

Two shape kinds are available as below.
(a) Shape of fixed width (when enlarged)
6
is fixed when the shape size
is enlarged (case (a) in (1)
above).
LAMP, SWITCH
The shape for which the width
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5 - 36
ALARM
(2) Misalignment of object and shape

Some objects, to which shape is set, may cause the following phenomena;
When the whole object size is changed, i.e., enlarged by click and drag, only the shape is enlarged,
but the object remains at the original position, resulting in misalignment between the object and shape.
(a) Center the object in its shape
Right click on the object to realign the shape with the object.
Right-click the mouse and selec

[Centering] in menu.
(b) Move the object to any position within the shape

The position of object and shape can be changed separately as instructed below.
Right-click the mouse and selec
Drag the object to align it
[Enable Two Tracker Mode] in menu.
with the shape.
(c) Change the size of object and shape separately

The size of object and shape can be changed separately as instructed below.
5 - 37
Right-click the mouse and select
Drag the object to change
[Enable Two Tracker Mode] in menu.
its size.

1
OVERVIEW
5.4 State Setting
: N/A
Conditions for display changing

Object type
Display changing device
Word device value being

monitored
Bit device ON/OFF
3
COMMON SETTING
: Applicable
2
SPECIFICATIONS
With this setting, the ON/OFF status of bit device can be changed as well as the color of object shape
according to the word device value.
Word device value being monitored by object function.
Bit device ON/OFF for display change.
Word device value for display change.
The objects compatible with state setting and the conditions for display change are listed in the following
table.
Word device value
Numerical display
Word parts display
Parts movement (word)

Word lamp
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Numerical input
Data list
Word comment
*1
Level
Panel meter
Scatter graph
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*1 The word device value being monitored must be set as the condition for display change.
1 Display changes according to the word device value being monitored.

Example: Level display function
Word device D100 being monitored.
D100=40
D100=60
LAMP, SWITCH
D100=80
Display color changes according to the word device value being monitored.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2 Display changes according to word device ON/OFF.

Example: Numerical display function
30
D500=30
30
D500=30
M10 ON
Display changes due

to an error occurrence.
5.4 State Setting
5 - 38
ALARM
Bit device D500 (temperature)

being monitored
Bit device M10 (ON in error
occurrence) for display changing
3 Display changes according to word device value

Example: Numerical display function
Word device D500
(production output)
being monitored.
Word device D100
(defective products)
for display changing
5.4.1
150
50
D500=50
D500=150
5 D100 9
200
D500=200
10 D100
Display changes when the

number of defective products
exceeds the specified number.
Display priority
Up to 64 (0 to 63) states can be set to one object.

When display change conditions overlap, the state of the smaller No. will be displayed with the priority.
[Display priority]
State No.
Priority
Higher
1
:
:
63
0 (normal case)
Lower The display attribure that must be set to an object.

If conditions for other states (1 to 63) have not
been satisfied, the attribute of state No.0 is displayed.
Example: When conditions for displaying state 1 and 2 occur simultaneously.

Display by state 1.
D100: 80
Display attribute
Display condition
State 1
50
State 2
D100
D100
Not display
5.4.2
Arrangement and settings
State is set for each object function.

For details, refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.
5 - 39
5.4 State Setting

5.4.1 Display priority
5.4.3
Setting items
OVERVIEW
This section explains the setting items for state setting with the example of numerical display.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Extended
Description
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State
Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).

(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
Create a new state.
Delete State
Delete a specified state.
Previous/Next
Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
New State
Changes the priority of the current state.

Example: When changing the priority level of "B" in state 2 with the [Up]/[Down] buttons.
State 1
State 2
State 3
C
Down
State 2
State 3
State 0
Ordinary
State 1
State 2
State 3
6
Priority up
LAMP, SWITCH
Up/Down
Ordinary
Ordinary
State 1
Priority down
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Up
State 0
State 0
Displays the list of preset states.

Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select State
8
Display conditional expression
State

5.4 State Setting
5.4.3 Setting items
5 - 40
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the display change conditions according to state.
Bit
: Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
After selecting "Bit", set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
Device
(
Word
: Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device.
After selecting [Word], set a condition expression for the word device value in [Range].
Set the value of word device range to change the display using a conditional expression.
Select the conditional expression from the following patterns.
Combine device value ($V, $W) and fixed value to set the conditional expression.
Range
Fixed value
Device value($V)
being monitored/input value ($W)
Comparison operator
When setting the operation expression other than the above 3 patterns.*1
User-setting conditional expression.
Click on the [Range] button after selecting [Others].
For user-setting conditional expression, the word device for display change can be set as a condition.
Input the value in decimal.

(Fixed value)
Set the comparison operator of conditional expression.
(Comparison operator)
<
: The left value is smaller than right value.
==
: The left value is equal to the right value.
<=
: The left value is smaller than or equal to the right value.
!=
: The left value is not equal to the right value.
Indicates the device value monitored using the object.

$V ($W)
Indicates the operation value when data operation function is used.

(The input value of numerical input function is expressed as $W.)
*1
Numerical Color
Used to display the range input dialogue box.

Set the color of numeric value when display conditions of the state are satisfied.
Select the plate color when display conditions of the state are satisfied.
Plate Color
Plate
Select the blinking pattern of numerical value when display conditions of state are satisfied.
Blink
Reverse
No
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Middle
: Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High
Check this item to reverse the numerical value when display conditions of state are satisfied.
*1 For details, refer to the next page.
5 - 41
5.4 State Setting

5.4.3 Setting items
*1 Setting the Edit Range Expression dialog box
OVERVIEW
This dialog box is used to set the value range of word device used for state.
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
A B (2 items)
: Display condition range is set using two expressions.
A B C (3 items)
: Display condition range is set using three expressions.
COMMON SETTING
Select the format of the conditional expression.
Example:
$V == 500
10 <= $V($W) <= D50
Value of the word device for dispay change.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Set the comparison operator (<,<=,==,!=)

of the conditional expression.
$V: Indicate the value of the device monitored
using object.
It indicates operation value when data
operation function is used.
$W:Indicate the input value of the data
input function.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Fixed value directly set by user

(hexadecimal system/decimal system/
octal system)
Click the 0 to C button to set the fixed value or variable at [Input Each Term[A-C]].
Set the comparison operator of conditional expression.
<
: The left value is smaller than the right value.
==
: The left value equals the right value.
<=
: The left value is smaller than or equivalent with the right value.
!=
: The left value doesn't equal the right value.
Set the description of condition expression items.

Fixed value
: Set the fixed value.

Then, input the numeric value and click on the Enter button.
$V, $W (Device value)
The data type of numeric value can be selected with the Hex Dec Oct
buttons.
: Specify the word device that is set as monitoring and writing target by using
Other device
: Set the word device for display change.
Input Each Term (A-C)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
the object.
LAMP, SWITCH
Style
5.4 State Setting

5.4.3 Setting items
5 - 42
ALARM
Items
5.4.4
Example of state setting operation
This section explains the state setting operation with the example of numerical display setting.
The monitor word device

D500 (productivity)
The word device for display
changes D100 (the number
of defective goods)
State 0
50
D500=50
State 2
State 1
150
200
D500=150
5 D100 9
D500=200
10 D100
Displaying changes when the

number of defective goods
exceed the specified number.
1 Set state 0
Set state 0 on the basic tab.
The display attribute set on the basic tab is displayed except when the conditions set for state 1,2 are
applied.
(1) Setting the conditions of displaying state 0 is not
required.
(2) Set the display attribute of state 0.
The display attribute set here is changed when the
conditions for each state are satisfied.
5 - 43
5.4 State Setting

5.4.4 Example of state setting operation
Color
: Black
Blink
: None
Reverse
: Unchecked
Plate
: White
2 Set state 1
Set state 1 on the case tab.
OVERVIEW
(1) Create state 1 by clicking [New State].

(2) Set the conditions displaying state1.
Others (10<=D100)
(3) Set the display attribute of state1.
Blink
: No
Reverse
: Unchecked
SPECIFICATIONS
Numerical Color : White
Plate color : Black
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Set state 2.
(1) Click on the [New State] to create State2.
(2) Set the conditions of displaying State2.
Others (5<=D100<=9)
(3) Set the display attribute of State2.
Blink
: No
Reversed
: Unchecked
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Numerical Color: Black
Plate Color :Gray Color
LAMP, SWITCH
Precautions
Do not set the conditional expressions that cannot be satisfied (e.g. "100<$V<10").
GT Designer2 does not check whether the conditional expressions are applicable or not.
If this kind of conditional expression is set, the corresponding state will not be displayed during
monitoring by GOT.
5.4 State Setting
5.4.5 Precautions
5 - 44
ALARM
5.4.5
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.5 Trigger Setting
The following triggers can be set for monitoring and writing operations of each object function.
(1) Trigger (for display)
Set for the object that monitors device.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the object will stop device monitor or disappear.
(2) Trigger (for write)
Set for the object that writes to device.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the object operation will be disabled and/or the display will be
held.
(3) Trigger (for script execution)
Set for the script function.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the script is not executed.
Example 1: Only the numerical display functions that are monitoring the production line are
displayed.
Production start signal (line1: M11, line2: M12, line3: M13)
M11:ON, M12:OFF, M13:ON
M11: OFF, M12: OFF, M13: OFF

Production volume
Production volume
Line1
Line1
Line2
Line2
Line3
Line3
Production volume will not be

displayed if production line stops.
50
0
20
0
Only the production volume of the

line being operated will be displayed.
Example 2: Set an interlock device for a touch switch

Line operation ready signal: M10
M10: OFF
M10: OFF
Line1 control screen

Productive
output
Condition
Operation
0
Stopped
Stop
The line is stopped.
5 - 45
M10: ON
5.5 Trigger Setting
Productive
output
Condition
Operation
During
preparation
Stop
Operation will not be performed

even if the operation switch is
touched.
Productive
output
Condition
Operation
0
During
Stop
Touch the operation switch to start

product line when production
lineoperation is ready.
1
1 About triggers
OVERVIEW
Triggers and actions that can be set are shown below.

(1) Triggers (for display and action)
Execution trigger
Actions when condition is satisfied
<Display condition>
Ordinary
The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of the GOT.
None
<Action condition>
The action set to the object can be executed at the monitor sampling of the GOT.
<Display condition>
ON
ON
When trigger is satisfied
: The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of
When trigger is not satisfied
: Select to check or not "Hold Display" as the display
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger type
the GOT.
OFF
:The previous object display is retained *2.
Checked
Not checked:The object display is erased *3.

OFF
<Action condition>
ON

OFF
: The action set to the object can be executed.

: The previous object display is retained.
COMMON SETTING
condition setting.
To erase the object display, set "Action when
<Display condition>
ON

OFF

To monitor the device and display the object at
ON
Fall
: The device is monitored only once.
screen switching, set "Initial display" in the display
OFF
condition.
<Display condition>

Sampling
Sampling
: The device is monitored at each preset sampling.

Setting range: 0.1 to 3600 seconds (every 100ms),
1 to 3600 seconds (every one second)
<Display condition>
Range
Word device value
: The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of
: The previous object display is retained *2.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Rise
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
condition fail" in the Auxiliary setting.*3
6
LAMP, SWITCH
the GOT.
<Action condition>
: The action set to the object can be executed.
of ON/OFF condition of
: The previous object display is retained *2.
the set multi bit
device*1
To erase the object display, set "Action when
condition fail" in the Auxiliary setting *3.
Cycle
ON Sampling
<Display condition>
The device is monitored at both of the satisfied trigger (the specified device is ON or
ON
OFF) and each preset sampling.
OFF
: The device is monitored at both of the satisfied

trigger (the specified device is ON or OFF) and each
Cycle
OFF Sampling
preset sampling.
Setting range: 0.1 to 3600 seconds (every 100ms),
ON
OFF
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Logical operation result
1 to 3600 seconds (every one second)
For details of *1 to *3, refer to next page.
5.5 Trigger Setting
5 - 46
ALARM
Multi bit trigger*1
*1 Multi bit trigger

As trigger, 2 to 8 bit devices and its ON/OFF statuses.
Operate logical AND or logical OR based on the preset ON/OFF status of the multi bit device.
Example: When M10, M11 and M12 are used as the display condition
Area where trigger is satisfied
: Trigger satisfied
: Trigger not satisfied
Operation result
Display condition
M10 is ON
M11 is OFF
M12 is ON
Logical AND
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Upper: ON/OFF status

Lower: Satisfied/
Not satisfied
5 - 47
5.5 Trigger Setting
Logical OR
*2 Trigger and display on GOT
Condition
Monitor
D100
0
D500 300
D500
OVERVIEW
When the trigger is not satisfied, GOT does not monitor.

If the trigger is satisfied once and then unsatisfied, the previous display is held.
Example: Condition: range (D100: 50 to 100)
Display: D500 is numerically displayed
Condition
Monitor
D100 60
D500 300
SPECIFICATIONS
As the trigger is not satisfied, the GOT does not monitor.
D500 300
As the trigger is satisfied, the GOT monitors.
D100 60
D500 340
COMMON SETTING
Condition
Monitor
D500 340
Condition
Monitor
D100 120
D500 400
D500 340
As the trigger turns unsatisfied, the GOT holds the previous display.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
*3 Object placed into shape
The object shape will remain when the object is erased.
Trigger not enabled
1500
LAMP, SWITCH
The shape remains
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.5 Trigger Setting
5 - 48
ALARM
Trigger enabled
Object
Shape frame
(2) Triggers for script execution

Trigger type
Ordinary
Execution trigger
Actions when trigger is satisfied
Executed always
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Rise
OFF
ON
Fall
OFF
Sampling
Sampling
Sampling
ON sampling
ON
OFF
Sampling
OFF sampling
ON
OFF
View change
When the object display changes.
Synchronized display
The same trigger for display as set for
trigger
object
When the key code below is input.
0088H (the least significant digit is
cleared and entire data is shifted right
by 1 digit.)
Key code input
0088H (the contents being input are

cleared.)
002DH (the code is inverted.)
002EH (".")
ASCII code, shift JIS, Kanji code
At the establishment of
When the input data is written to a device
input
by key code 000DH.
Device writing
5 - 49
When the bit SET / word SET is executed

by a touch switch.
5.5 Trigger Setting
<Trigger for executing script>

When the trigger is satisfied
: The script is executed.
When the trigger is not satisfied
: The script is not executed.
1
2 Objects that support trigger condition
OVERVIEW
The object types that can be set by a trigger are listed below.
The trigger type varies according to object types.
(1) Trigger (for display)
: Applicable
: N/A
Ordinary
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
Range
Multi Bit
ON Sampling/
trigger
OFF Sampling
Numerical display
Data list display*1
ASCII display
SPECIFICATIONS
Trigger type
Object type
Comment display
COMMON SETTING
Alarm (User alarm

display)
Parts display*2
(Default)
Parts movement*3
Level display
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Trend graph
Line graph*4
(Default)
Alarm (User alarm

(Default)
Alarm (Advanced
(Default)
Historical trend
graph
(Default)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
When conditions are not met in the data list, the comment and data are deleted while the frame and title are displayed.
The displaying condition of the fixed parts display is rise/fall only.
When conditions are not met in the parts display, the object is deleted only when the display mode is set to
"replace" (hold display is not specified). In other cases, the fixed parts are displayed.
When conditions are not met in the parts movement display, the object is displayed if either (or both) of the locus
and hold display settings is specified.
[Locus] function has been set.
[Store Memory] function has been set using alarm (user alarm display).
(2) Trigger (for write)

: Applicable
: N/A
Trigger type
Object type
Ordinary
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
Range
Multi bit
ON Sampling/
trigger
OFF Sampling
Touch switch
Numerical input
ASCII input
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
alarm display)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
display)*5
LAMP, SWITCH
Scatter graph
(Default)
Logging function
5.5 Trigger Setting
5 - 50
ALARM
(Default)
(3) Triggers for script execution

: Applicable
: N/A
(a) Project script and screen script

Trigger type
Object type
Ordinary
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
ON sampling/
OFF sampling
View
change
Synchronize
display trigger
Key code
input
Input
fixation
Device
writing
Synchronize
display trigger
Key code
input
Input
fixation
Device
writing
Synchronize
display trigger
Key code
input
Input
fixation
Device
writing
Synchronize
display trigger
Key code
input
Input
fixation
Device
writing
Project script and screen

script
(b) Object script

Input object script
Trigger type
Object type
Ordinary
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
ON sampling/
OFF sampling
View
change
Numerical input
ASCII input
Display object script

Trigger type
Object type
Ordinary
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
ON sampling/
OFF sampling
View
change
Numerical display
Numerical input
ASCII display
ASCII input
Comment display
Parts display
Parts movement
Level display
Trend graph
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Lamp display
Clock display (date
display and time
display)
Panel meter
Switch object script

Trigger type
Object type
Ordinary
Touch switch (multi

action switch)
5 - 51
5.5 Trigger Setting
ON/OFF
Rise/Fall
Sampling
ON sampling/
OFF sampling
View
change
5.5.1
5.5.2
OVERVIEW
Set the trigger for each object function.

Refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.
Setting items
2
SPECIFICATIONS
This section explains the setting items of trigger with the example of numerical display.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extended
Description
Select the trigger for displaying/operating the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the cycle is set in second unit (1 to 3600s).
Trigger Type
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Bit trigger
When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall] or [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], click on the Device button to set
Trigger Device
the bit/word device range for the trigger. (This is only valid when selecting the range for word device.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the type of word device that has been set when [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type].
Data Size
Select the data type of word device.
Word
Trigger
Select the data size (16 bits / 32 bits)
Data Type
Signed BIN
: Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN
: Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(Only when [32bit] is selected for [Data Size].)

Range
*1
Click Range button to set the conditional expression of word device range.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Range
5.5 Trigger Setting

5.5.1 Arrangement and settings
5 - 52
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be set as the trigger when [Bit trigger] has been selected in [Trigger
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number*2
Type].
After selecting, click on the Setting button to set the bit device and execution trigger.
Check this item to monitor and display device even if the initial trigger of screen switch is not satisfied when
[Rise] or [Fall] has been selected in [Trigger Type].
Initial display
Monitor and display
device when trigger
is not satisfied.
Base screen 2
D10
125
Base screen 1
Initial Display
Switch to base
screen 2
No initial display
Not display when
trigger is not satisfied.
Base screen 2
D10
Check this item to hold the object display if the trigger is satisfied and then unsatisfied when [ON] or [OFF] is
selected in [Trigger Type].
With this item unchecked, the object will be cleared when the trigger is not satisfied.
Hold display
D10
125
Hold display state when

the display conditon
is satisfied.
Hold Display
D10
125
Display condition
is not satisfied.
No hold display
Clear it as the display
condition is not satisfied.
D10
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.
*1 Edit range dialog box settings
Items
Button
Description
Click on this button to set the fixed value for each term in [Input Each Term (A-C)]
Set the comparison operator of range expression.
(Comparison operator)
<
: Left value is smaller than right value
==
: Left value is equal to right value
<=
: Left value is smaller than or equal to right value
!=
: Left value is not equal to right value

5 - 53
5.5 Trigger Setting

5.5.2 Setting items
Items
Enter
Updates the input fixed value on the range expression.
Hex/Dec/Oct
Select the data type for the numeric value.
OVERVIEW
Input Each
Term (A-C)
Items
*2 Multi bit trigger dialogue box settings
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
Device
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
The devices preset as multi bit trigger are listed.
This button will be displayed by clicking on the device bar.
Click on the Dev button to set the bit device used as trigger.
Dev
Select whether ON or OFF status of bit device will be set as the trigger condition.
Select the definition for multi bit trigger condition.
AND
: If all triggers that are specified based on the bit device ON/OFF statuses are satisfied, the
OR
: If any of the triggers specified based on the bit device ON/OFF statuses are satisfied, the
multi bit trigger is set.
Trigger
multi bit trigger is set.
Select the method of setting device.

automatically.
Random
5.5.3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Continuous : Set the specified number of devices continuously starting from the set device
Device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
ON/OFF
: Randomly set the specified number of devices.
Precautions
6
LAMP, SWITCH
1 Object of which trigger has been set to sampling

Up to 100 objects can be set on one screen, of which the trigger type was been set to "Sampling".
Therefore, any objects form 101 onwards will not operate on the screen.
When many devices are monitored in line graph form, and the trigger is set to [Ordinary], the object
processing may be delayed.
In this case, change the trigger type to [Sampling] and adjust the sampling cycle to 2 seconds or longer.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2 Setting of trigger for line graph
5.5 Trigger Setting

5.5.3 Precautions
5 - 54
ALARM
5.6 Data Operation Function
If data operation function has been set, each object executes the operations set in [Data operation] the preset word device values, and monitors based on the results.
Example: Data operation is used in numerical display function.
Monitored device: D101
D100 5000 Expected productive output
D101 1000 Completed productive output
Production
complete
rate
20%
Expression operation
D101D100100
Display the complete rate

corresponding to expectation
1 Bit operation
This function executes operation of the word device value in bit unit.
(1) Bit mask
Executes a logical operation of the word device value by the preset pattern value.
(a) Logical AND (AND)
The operation result is "1" when the corresponding bits of both the device value and pattern
value are "1".
The operation result is "0" in other cases.
(b) Logical OR (OR)
The operation result is "0" when the corresponding bits of both device value and pattern value
are "0".
The operation result is "1" in other cases.
(c) Exclusive logic XOR (XOR)
The operation result is "0" when the corresponding bits of device value and pattern value are
equivalent; "1" when not equivalent.
Example: When logical AND (AND) is operated
Monitor
device value
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Pattern value
(Hexadecimal)
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
AND
Operation result
5 - 55
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Bit shift

Shifts the word device value to the right or left in bit unit to execute an operation on the value.
(It becomes arithmetic shift when it comes to the signed monitor format of device.)
Example: Shift right for 4 bits
(a) Signed
Monitor
Device value
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Operation result
SPECIFICATIONS
Shift to right
by 4 bits
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
(b) Unsigned
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
COMMON SETTING
Monitor
Device value
Shift to right
by 4 bits
Operation result
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
4
2 Data operation
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Executes the preset data operation on the word device value.

Select and set the data operation format from the 9 types.
The operation is executed based on the following conditions:
Example:
D10
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Set the operation value to $$, $W

Fixed value : Directly set by user.
Value of maximum 32 digits
Variable
: Minus and decimal point included) can be set.
Word device set by user in data operation function.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Operator
* (Multiplication), / (Division), + (Addition), - (Subtraction), % (Remainder)
$$ : Indicates the device value monitored by the object.
$W : Indicates the input value of numerical input function.
Data operation function is applicable to the following objects.
*1
Numerical input
Parts display
Panel meter
Line graph
Scatter graph
Data list display

Parts movement
Level
Bar graph
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Numerical display
Comment display
Lamp
Trend graph
Statistics graph
*1
If bit mask operation is used for numerical input function, only logical (AND) is applicable. Logical add (OR) and
exclusive logical add (XOR) are not applicable.
5 - 56
ALARM
$$($W)
3 Procedure for operation processing

The operation processing for device monitoring and numerical inputting is shown as follows.
(1) When monitoring device
1 Bit mask
2 Bit shift
3 Data operation processing
(2) When using numerical input function
Write the value after operation processing to word device
Input numeric value
12345
Display the value

after data operation
processing.
*1
Data operation
prooessing
Bit shift
Bit mask
(AND)
*1
Data operation
prooessing
Bit shift
Bit mask
(AND)
Read the value after operation processing from word device
*1: Other data operations can be set for write destination device during monitoring and writing.
5 - 57
<Write the value after operation processing to word device>
OVERVIEW

The input value by the preset operation expression for writing device value is calculated.
2 Bit shift
Shifts the input value in the set direction (right / left)
[Operation data]
(Write value) = {(Input value) AND (Pattern value)} OR {(Current value) AND (Reverse pattern value)}
User-set value
Value created for GOT operation
3
COMMON SETTING
Example: Writing 12H to the lower two digits of the current value ABCDH
Input value (value input by user)
: 0012H
Current value (value before write)
: ABCDH
Pattern value (value set by user)
: 00FFH
Reverse pattern value (value created for GOT operation) : FF00H
SPECIFICATIONS
3 Bit mask
Executes bit mask (logical AND) on the input value by the preset value.
To write the bit and mask the remaining, carry out the following.
4
(Input value) AND (Pattern value)
0012 H
(Input value) AND (Pattern value)
0012 H
AB00 H
}
OR { (Current value)
AND (Reverse pattern value) }
OR
AB00 H
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
ABCD H AND FF00 H
Write value
AB12 H
<Read the word device value after operation processing>
LAMP, SWITCH
4 Bit mask
Executes bit mask (logical (AND) of the device value by the preset pattern value.
5 Bit shift
Shifts the device value in the reverse direction.
Calculates and displays the written device value by the preset operation expression for reading
device value.
5.6.1
Data operation function is set for each arranged object function.

For the details, refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
00FF H
5 - 58
ALARM
0012 H AND
(Current value) AND (Reverse pattern value)
5.6.2
Setting items
This section explains the setting items for data operation function with the example of numerical input function.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
Select the bit mask type and set the mask pattern value in hexadecimal format.
Bit Mask
AND
: Executes logical product.
OR
: Executes logical add.
Bit
XOR
: Executes exclusive logical add.
Opera-
Mask Pattern
: At data length of 16 bits (0 to FFFF), at 32 bits (0 to FFFFFFFF)
tion
Check this item to enable the bit shift operation (for monitoring/writing).
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left
: Shift left
Right
: Shift right
Shift Number
: At data length of 16 bits (1 to 15), at 32 bits (1 to 31)
Set the data operation for writing to device and for monitoring each.
Data Operation
Switch by Monitor and Write buttons.
Select the data operation format from the following 4 patterns.
When not executing operation by data operation, check this item.
Monitor/
Write
*1
When executing operation by monitor device value ($$) and one

type of constant, select this item.After the selection, set the
constant (decimal).
When setting other than above expressions i.e., user-setting
conditional expression.
Select "Others" to set the conditional expression.
After selecting, click on Exp button to display "Edit Data Expression "
dialog box. Set the conditional expression on that dialog box.
5 - 59

5.6.2 Setting items
*1 Edit data expression dialog box
OVERVIEW
Set the expression for data operation.
Items
SPECIFICATIONS
Description
Set the operation expression format.
Style
Fixed value,variable (represented as "$$", "SW" , respectively;

any word device set for operation)
Operator
COMMON SETTING
A B
Select from the following 9 types.

4) (A B) C
7) ((A B) C) (D E)
2) A B
5) A ((B C) D)
8) (A B) ((C D) E)
3) A (B C)
6) A (B (C D))
9) ((A B) (C D)) E
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Click buttons A to E to set fixed value and variable for each item in [Input f Each Term (A-E)].
Select the operator for operation expression.
*: Multiply
-: Subtract
/: Divide
%: Remainder
% (Remainder operator)
The left value is divided by the right value and the remainder the result.
Example: 100 % 3 = 1 (100 / 3 = 33 remainder is 1)

Set each item for data operation.
Fixed value
: Select this item when using fixed value to execute the operation.
After selecting, input the value and click on the Input
button.
Select the data type for the value by Hex , Dec and Oct buttons.
$$, $W (Device value)
Input Each Term (A-E)
: Select this item to execute the operation of the word device value that
has been set as monitor and write destination.
Be sure to set one.
: Select this item to execute the operation of the word device value.
(

LAMP, SWITCH
Data type is the same as the monitor device ($$ and $W).
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Other device
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Operator
+: Add

5.6.2 Setting items
5 - 60
ALARM
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E]
1) A
5.7 Offset Function
This function enables switching and monitoring plural devices by setting a single device in each object
function.
(In the alarm list function, plural comments can be switched and displayed by setting a single device.)
1 Switching and monitoring plural device statuses by a single device

The value set in the device using the offset function (hereinafter referred to as offset device) is added to
the device set in each object function.
Device set in each object function D200, D201, D202
Offset device
value
Offset device
D100
Monitor device
D200
D201
D202
10
D210
D211
D212
11
D211
D212
D213
Sw itch the monitor device according to the value stored in offset device.
This function is available for the following objects.

Numerical display
Numerical input
Data list
ASCII input
ASCII display
Comment display
Parts display
Parts movement
Lamp
Panel meter
Level
Trend graph
Line graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Touch switch*
Script
* The offset device value is added to the device set in the action setting.
Example:
Switch and monitor plural line statuses with a single numerical display function.
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input

Line:
Plan:
Numerical input function

Numerical display function
Result: Numerical display function
Line
Plan
500
Result
326
Plan to monitor D201

(D200+1=D201)
Result is to monitor D211
(D210+1=D211)
5 - 61
5.7 Offset Function
Device
Device
Offset device
Device
Offset device
Write 3 to offset
device (D100) in
numerical input
function
D100
D200
D100
D210
D100
Line
Plan
650
Result
442
Plan to monitor D203.

(D200+3=D203)
Result is to monitor D213.
(D210+3=D213)
D100
D201
D202
D203
500
800
650
D211
D212
D213
326
277
442
1
The offset device value is added to the comment set in the alarm list function.
In a normal alarm list, it needs to set bit devices for the number of displayed comments. However, by
using the offset function, plural comments can be switched and displayed by a single device.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Offset of display setting

The offset device value is added to the number of the comment to be displayed.
:1
: D200
Alarm
Line B has stopped.
Offset device value

changes to 1.
COMMON SETTING
D200
1
Display comment2 in alarm occurrence.
(Head comment No.1 + 1 = 2)
(2) Offset of detailed display setting

The offset device value is added to the numbers of comment (comment window), window screen
and base screen to be displayed as details.
Detailed display
: Comment window
Detailed No. of alarm device : 1
Detailed No. offset
: D200
Alarm
Line A has stopped.

Please check
the power
supply.
Please check
whether there
are products.
Detail
D200 0
Detailed display displays comment1.
(Detailed No.1 + 0 = 1)
Line B has stopped.
Offset device value

changes to 1.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D200 0
Display comment1 in alarm occurrence.
(Head comment No.1 + 0 = 1)
Detail
D200
1
Detailed display displays comment2.
(Detailed No.1 + 1 = 2)
When executing offset of detailed display setting

When executing offset of detailed display setting, the comment for detailed display
will change. The message of alarm list is not relevant.
To relate the message to the comment, adjust comment and the message displayed
by using offset of display setting.
LAMP, SWITCH
Line A has stopped.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm
5.7 Offset Function
5 - 62
ALARM
Head comment No.

Comment No. offset
OVERVIEW
2 Switch and display plural comments by a single device (The alarm list function (user
alarm))
5.7.1
The offset function is to arrange and set each object function.

Refer to the arrangement and setting of the objects.
5.7.2
Setting items
The offset function is set in each object function.

Refer to the setting items of the corresponding objects.
5.7.3
Precautions
Precautions for using the offset function are as follows.

(1) When monitoring the trigger device in sampling by the status observation function
When offsetting the trigger device in a constant sampling, set the offset sampling longer than the
monitor sampling.
Example: Changing cycle (7 s) of offset device value > Status observation function sampling (5 s)
(2) Abnormal operation of the status observation cycle setting (e.g. uncollected data by affecting the
timing shift)
The condition device for the status observation has the delays in monitor screen set an offset
function-specified object. Do not set an offset function-specified object on the monitor screen at
using the status observation.
(3) Device setting

(a) The offset function is not available for the bit device word specification.
(b) For the word device bit specification, the device No. is offset.
Example:
Device that has been set in each object
D200.b2
Offset device
value
Offset device
D100
Monitor device
D200.b2
10
D210.b2
11
D211.b2
Offset the device No.
(c) The data length of offset devices are fixed to 16 bits.
5 - 63
5.7 Offset Function

1
(1) Offset value change
The monitor device will be read as the offset value changes; so do not change the offset value
frequently.
If the offset value is changed frequently, the monitor speed will become low.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) When the offset device No. exceeds the PLC word range trigger
When the offset device No. exceeds the PLC device range, monitoring and writing will not be
executed. Error will be displayed in alarm list (system alarm), if it is set in advance.
When monitoring plural devices with a single graph, the display method is determined by the
setting method of monitored device.
(b) Scatter graph

When setting the device consecutively
When setting the device at random
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
: Holds the previous display.

COMMON SETTING
(a) Trend graph, line graph, bar graph and statistics graph
When setting the device consecutively
When setting the device at random
: Holds the previous display only when the
displaying exceeds word range trigger.
For the display other than the above, the offset
device will be monitored.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.7 Offset Function

5.7.3 Precautions
5 - 64
ALARM
5.8 Security Function
This function determines which screen is displayed depending on the security level.
The security level can be changed by inputting the password corresponding to each level.
The security level (0 to 15) can be set for each screen and object.
The security level can be set to each object function, window screen and base screen.
Security level 0
High
The authority of security level
Low
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Security level is not set.
1 Example
Change the contents that can be operated by each user in the screen for setting plural objects.
Display product volume
(security level: 4)
Display product volume
condition(Window screen 2)
(security level: 4)
150
Line 1 control screen
St.
Production volume
150
St.
Mt.
Switch to Mt. screen

(base screen 10)(security level: 4)
Password
Display passowrd input screen

(security level: 0)
Mt.
Password
Screen example for each security level
Base secreen 1
Screen design example
Used objects and security levels
Mt.screen
Production volume
Production volume
150
Password
Base secreen 1
(Security level: 1)
Base secreen 10
(Security level: 15)
Window secreen 2
(Security level: 8)
: Enabled
User's
User
security
level
Operator
Supervisor
Maintenance
3
Others
5 - 65
staff
15
Production volume
150
St.
Mt.
Password
: Not enabled
Maintenance
screen
(a) Set the security function in the object function.

The following example shows the object display and operation changed from 0 to 4 of the
security level.
Production volume
Production volume
150
Password
Password
Security level: 0
Security level: 4
Security level
Screen
status
SPECIFICATIONS
Mt.
St.
Operation contents
The object function on the screen cannot be used, because
Production volume
the security level is in a low status
Level 0
Base screen 1 (security level 0)
COMMON SETTING
OVERVIEW
(1) Operation example
Each object function (security level 4)
Base screen 1
Display the security

level change screen
When changing the security level, touch the touch switch to
Production volume
display the security level change screen.
Level 0
Change method of the security level in this
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Password
section)
Password
Base screen 1
Input the password
of security level 4
6
Input the password, and change the security level into 4.
Level 4

Production volume
Display the object function corresponding to security level
150
4.
Mt.
Password
Base screen 1
Display touch switch
5 - 66
ALARM
St.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Numerlc value
display
Level 4
LAMP, SWITCH
Level 0
Remark
(1) The security level set in the numerical input, the ASCII input and the touch switch.
2 types of security levels (for input and display) can be set in the numerical input,
the ASCII input and the touch switch.
Example: When the security level is set in the numerical input function.
[Security level 5]
Production
volume
600
Security level
For display: 5 For input:10
Production
volume
600
[Security level 10]

Production
volume
Numeric value can be

displayed only.
Numeric value cannot be input.
600 The input cursor is displayed in

order numeric value can be input.
(2) The movement of the input cursor when setting the security function
The cursor will move to the currently available numerical input box or ASCII input
box, when setting security level respectively in plural numerical input and ASCII
input.
Example: Input numeric value when the base screen security level is "2".
150
Security level: 2 Cursor skips the numerical input

Security level: 8 box with security level set as 8.
200
Security level: 2
1500
(b) Window screen

security level.
Production volume screen
Production volume
me
150
St.
150
Mt.
Password
Security level: 4
5 - 67
St.
Mt.
Password
Security level: 8
Security level
Screen
status
Operation contents
150
ssword
Do not display the window screen.

through operating touch
switch.
SPECIFICATIONS
Base screen 1
Window screen 2 (security level 8)

Production volume
150
Level 4
COMMON SETTING
Mt.
St.
Password
Base screen 1
Display the security

level change screen

Production volume
150
St.
Level 4
When changing the security level, touch the touch switch to
Mt.
display the security level change screen.
Password
Change method of the security level in this
section)
Base screen 1
Input the password

with 8 or higher
security level.
Level 4
Input the password, and change the security level into 8 or
higher.
Level 8
Password screen
screen
150
Level 8
LAMP, SWITCH
Production volume
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Mt.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
St.
Display a window screen.

Mt.
St.
Password
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Window screen 2
5 - 68
ALARM
Level 4
OVERVIEW
Production volume
(c) Switching the base screen

security level.
Maintenance screen
Production volume
150
St.
Mt.
Power
supply
Circuit
Oper
Stop
Password
Password
Security level: 15
Security level: 8
Security level
Screen
status
Operation contents
Production volume
Level 8
150
St.
Mt.
Password
Base screen 1
Switch screen through

operating touch switch
Level 8
Display the security level change screen automatically.
Input the password, and change the security level into 15.
Level 15
3
Password screen
Input the password

of security level 15.
Maintenance screen
Level 15
Power
supply
Circuit
Oper
Stop
Password
Base screen 10
5 - 69
Switch to base screen 10
1
In order to change the security level, the password of each security level needs to be input on the
security level change screen.
Either of the following methods is available to display the security level change screen.
(a) Use the touch switch for switching to the security level change screen. (Extension: Password)
OVERVIEW
2 Change method of the security level
(b) Display the GOT utility, and touch [security level change]
1 Display the security level change screen.
3
COMMON SETTING
2 On the security level change screen, enter the password for the target security level and
touch Enter .
To close the security level change screen, touch
at the top-right of the password display
window.
SPECIFICATIONS
The following indicates how to change the security level.
The level of security is stored in the device storing "security level status" (Level
device) (
Section 3.5 Password Setting)
Current security level can be changed by directly changing the level device value
from the controller.
Vol.
Sta.
Security level "10" in

current situation
Level device
Production
volume D100
"1" Status Change
into D100 "10"
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Line control
Line control
500
Oper.
Sta.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Change the display according to the changed security level.
5 - 70
ALARM
Security level "1" in

current situation
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Changing the security level from the controller
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
To undo temporarily-raised security level

The security level that is increased temporarily for maintenance and inspection
tasks can be restored back to its original state easily.
(a) Inform the users of the normal security level password to restore the security
level through the normal password input operation.
(b) Create the touch switch for restoring the security level to normal level.
Example: When changing the security level to "0" with the touch switch.
Level device: D30
Touch switch: Write "0" into level device D30
Level device
D30 "15"
Control menu
Line 1
All lines
Line 2
Change
Change into
D30 "0"
Write "1" into

level device
Security level: 15
D30
15
Control menu
Line 1
Line 2
Security level: 0
D30 0
Restore to the display of security level 0.
5 - 71
5.8.1
Security function setting
OVERVIEW
The following setting is needed when using the security function.
1 Setting the password for the security function

Set its password and the device (level device) where each security level is to be stored.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 3.5 Password Setting
2 Setting the security level of each screen/object

Set security level in the screen (using security function) and object function.
(1) Object function
Set the security levels in the setting dialogue box for each object function.
(2) Screen
1 In the workspace (the project tab), select the screen whose security function is to be set, and
right click the mouse to select [Property] in the menu.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

5.8.1 Security function setting
5 - 72
ALARM
2 Display the Screen Property dialogue box.

Set the security level (that is set to the screen) in Security of the basic tab.
Set security level
5.8.2
Precautions

When the GOT is started up, a screen always appears regardless of the screen security settings and
security level.
Make sure to design screens so that the screen without security settings will appear at GOT start up
and it will be switched to the screen with security settings by performing screen switching.
2 Making a note of the password

The already registered password cannot be checked later. Therefore, always make a note of the
password.
If the password is forgotten, a security level change or security level password change/deletion on GT
Designer2 cannot be made, and the project data must be recreated. (Re-setting of only the password
cannot be done.)
5 - 73

5.8.2 Precautions
MEMO
INDEX
[A]
Adjust................................................................... 2-43
Advanced alarm display ...................................... 8-89
Advanced alarm function ..................................... 8-19
Advanced alarm observation (Advanced system
alarm)
Before setting ................................................... 8-67
Relevant settings.............................................. 8-64
Advanced alarm observation (Advanced user alarm)
Before setting ................................................... 8-28
Placement and settings.................................... 8-46
Advanced alarm popup display ......................... 8-135
Before setting ................................................. 8-137
Placement and settings.................................. 8-151
Relevant settings............................................ 8-136
Setting items .................................................. 8-152
Basic tab ................................................. 8-152
Text tab ................................................... 8-156
Extended tab........................................... 8-158
External output tab.................................. 8-161
Switching of display position .......................... 8-143
Useful information .......................................... 8-141
Advanced recipe function .................................. 12-26
Before setting ................................................. 12-27
Setting items .................................................. 12-60
Advanced system alarm observation
Setting items .................................................... 8-80
Basic tab ................................................... 8-80
File save tab.............................................. 8-82
Advanced user alarm observation
Setting items .................................................... 8-47
Device tab ................................................. 8-50
File save tab.............................................. 8-56
Basic tab ................................................... 8-48
Alarm classification according to the group ......... 8-42
Alarm classification according to the level ........... 8-42
Alarm function...................................................... 8-15
Alarm history display ................................. 8-17,8-200
Before setting for alarm history display .......... 8-203
Setting items .................................................. 8-211
Basic tab ................................................. 8-211
Frame tab................................................ 8-215
Device (Common) tab ............................. 8-216
Option (Common) tab ............................. 8-224
Extended tab........................................... 8-229
Alarm ID............................................................... 8-28
Alarm list display.................................................. 8-15
Arrangement ........................................................ 5-30
ASCII display ....................................................... 7-56
Arrangement and settings ................................ 7-63
Before setting for ASCII display ....................... 7-62
Index - 1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-73

Setting items .................................................... 7-64
Basic tab ................................................... 7-64
Extended tab ............................................. 7-66
Trigger tab................................................. 7-69
Object script tab ........................................ 7-71
ASCII input........................................................... 7-56
Before setting for ASCII input........................... 7-62
Precautions ...................................................... 7-73
Setting items .................................................... 7-64
Basic tab ................................................... 7-64
Extended tab ............................................. 7-66
Trigger tab................................................. 7-69
Attributes................................................................ 2-9
Automatic screen saver disable signal ........ 3-35,3-55
Auxiliary settings .................................................. 4-58
[B]
Backlight OFF output signal................................. 3-36
Backlight shutoff detection signal ........................ 3-41
Bar code function ................................................. 13-8
Required knowledge for setting...................... 13-10
Setting items .................................................. 13-14
Bar graph ........................................................... 10-66
Arrangement and settings .............................. 10-69
Precautions .................................................... 10-79
Required knowledge for bar graph setting ..... 10-67
Setting items .................................................. 10-70
Basic tab ................................................. 10-70
Device/scale tab...................................... 10-72
Extended tab ........................................... 10-74
Trigger tab............................................... 10-76
Data operation tab................................... 10-77
Base screen ........................................................... 2-1
Basic comment ...................................................... 4-2
Block .................................................................. 12-33
BMP/JPEG file parts ............................................ 4-53
BMP/JPEG/DXF file ............................................. 2-13
Broadcast............................................................. 2-43
Buffering area .............................................. 8-29,8-68
Buffering area size ............................................... 8-45
Buffering size ....................................................... 8-76
Built-in battery voltage drop signal....................... 3-40
Buzzer one-shot output signal ............................. 3-37
Buzzer output signal ............................................ 3-37
Buzzer three-shot output signal ........................... 3-36
[C]
Centering ............................................................. 5-37
Chinese characters .............................................. 2-15
[D]
Data list................................................................ 7-39
Arrangement and settings................................ 7-43
Precautions ...................................................... 7-55
Relevant settings ............................................. 7-40
Required knowledge for data list...................... 7-41
Setting items .................................................... 7-44
Basic tab ................................................... 7-44
List tab ...................................................... 7-46
Extended tab............................................. 7-51
Case tab ................................................... 7-52
Trigger tab ................................................ 7-54
Data operation function ....................................... 5-55
Default key window.............................................. 4-78
Deletion of advanced system alarms................... 8-72
Description on touch switches for alarm
history display.................................................... 8-230
Device.................................................................... 5-1
Device types for screen switching ......................... 3-6
Drive A empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive A file access error signal ............................ 3-40
APPENDICES
Drive A file accessing signal ................................ 3-40

Drive A full signal ................................................. 3-40
Drive C empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive C file accessing signal................................ 3-40
Drive D empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive D file access error signal ............................ 3-40
Drive D file accessing signal................................ 3-40
Drive D full signal................................................. 3-40
DXF file ................................................................ 2-13
[E]
Error codes .......................................................... 8-78
[F]
Figures................................................................... 2-9
File access error reset signal............................... 3-37
Font...................................................................... 2-15
Forced screen saver enable signal...................... 3-35
Forced screen saver touch-cancel signal ............ 3-35
[G]
Gateway function ............................................... 15-12
GB...................................................................... 2-145
GD ..................................................................... 2-145
GOT bit register ................................................. 2-145
GOT data register .............................................. 2-145
GOT error ............................................................ 8-67
GOT error code.................................................... 3-39
GOT error detection signal .................................. 3-38
GOT error reset signal ......................................... 3-37
GOT ready signal................................................. 3-38
GOT setup ........................................................... 3-86
GOT special register.......................................... 2-145
GOT type ............................................................... 3-1
GS...................................................................... 2-145
[H]
Hard copy ............................................................ 13-1
Precautions ...................................................... 13-7
Setting items .................................................... 13-4
Settings ............................................................ 13-3
Hardcopy sub-signal ............................................ 3-38
Hierarchical alarm................................................ 8-39
Historical mode ............................................ 8-31,8-69
Historical trend graph....................................... 10-118
Arrangement and settings ............................ 10-124
Precautions .................................................. 10-141
Relevant settings.......................................... 10-119
Required knowledge for historical trend graph
setting........................................................... 10-120
Setting items ................................................ 10-125
Basic tab ............................................... 10-125
Device tab ............................................. 10-128
Extended tab......................................... 10-135
Scale tab ............................................... 10-133
Touch switches for historical trend graph
operation ...................................................... 10-139
Index - 2
INDEXARTS
Clock display ....................................................... 7-75

Precautions ...................................................... 7-81
Setting items .................................................... 7-78
Basic tab ................................................... 7-78
Extended tab............................................. 7-79
Clock function ...................................................... 2-40
Clock setting ........................................................ 3-90
CNC monitor........................................................ 14-9
Collection mode........................................... 8-29,8-68
Comment display................................................. 7-82
Precautions .................................................... 7-105
Setting items of bit comment............................ 7-85
Basic tab ................................................... 7-85
Comment tab ............................................ 7-88
Extended tab............................................. 7-90
Trigger tab ................................................ 7-92
Setting items of word comment........................ 7-94
Basic tab ................................................... 7-94
Comment tab ............................................ 7-95
Extended tab............................................. 7-97
Case tab ................................................... 7-99
Trigger tab .............................................. 7-102
Data operation tab .................................. 7-103
Object script tab ...................................... 7-104
Comment group..................................................... 4-2
Communication Settings...................................... 3-59
CPU error ............................................................ 8-67
Cumulative mode................................................. 8-31
Current cursor display user ID............................. 3-40
Current numeric display object ID ....................... 3-39
Current numeric value input ................................ 3-39
Cursor displaying signal ...................................... 3-40
HQ font ................................................................ 2-15

Human sensor detection signal ........................... 3-38
[I]
Intelligent module monitor ................................... 14-5
[J]
JPEG file.............................................................. 2-13
[K]
KANJI region ....................................................... 2-15
Key code input ..................................................... 3-39
Key code list ...................................................... App-1
Key code read complete signal ........................... 3-35
Key input signal ................................................... 3-38
Key window ......................................................... 4-78
Key window output signal .................................... 3-38
Key-in disable signal............................................ 3-36
[L]
Ladder monitor .................................................... 14-2
Lamp display ......................................................... 6-1
Arrangement and settings .................................. 6-3
Precautions ...................................................... 6-17
Relevant settings................................................ 6-2
Setting items of bit lamp..................................... 6-4
Basic tab ..................................................... 6-4
Text tab ....................................................... 6-5
Extended tab............................................... 6-7
Setting items of word lamp................................. 6-9
Basic tab ..................................................... 6-9
Text tab ..................................................... 6-12
Extended tab............................................. 6-14
Data operation tab .................................... 6-15
Object script tab .......................................... 6-8
Language switching device ................................. 3-21
Layer.................................................................... 2-53
Level .................................................................. 10-15
Precautions .................................................... 10-29
Required knowledge for level setting ............. 10-17
Setting items .................................................. 10-21
Basic tab ................................................. 10-21
Extended tab........................................... 10-23
Case tab.................................................. 10-24
Trigger tab............................................... 10-26
Level device......................................................... 3-29
Line graph.......................................................... 10-49
Precautions .................................................... 10-65
Required knowledge for line graph setting..... 10-50
Setting items .................................................. 10-53
Basic tab ................................................. 10-53
Index - 3
Device/Scale tab ..................................... 10-55

Extended tab ........................................... 10-58
Trigger tab............................................... 10-61
List editor for A..................................................... 14-3
List editor for FX .................................................. 14-4
List editor for MELSEC-A..................................... 14-3
List editor for MELSEC-FX .................................. 14-4
Logging function ................................................ 11-17
Before setting logging .................................... 11-19
Precautions .................................................... 11-50
Setting items of logging setting ...................... 11-38
Basic tab ................................................. 11-38
Device tab ............................................... 11-40
Extended tab ........................................... 11-49
File save tab............................................ 11-44
Setting items of logging setting (List) ............. 11-37
Settings .......................................................... 11-36
[M]
Monitorable PLC CPUs........................................ 2-72
Multi-channel function ........................................ 2-120
[N]
Network error ....................................................... 8-67
Network monitor................................................... 14-6
No alarm collection ...................................... 8-31,8-69
No. switching device ............................................ 3-13
Numeric value error detection signal ................... 3-38
Numeric value Input number................................ 3-39
Numeric value input read complete signal ........... 3-36
Numeric value input signal................................... 3-38
Numerical display .................................................. 7-1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-35
Setting items of numerical display.................... 7-11
Basic tab ................................................... 7-11
Extended tab ............................................. 7-14
Case tab.................................................... 7-16
Trigger tab................................................. 7-18
Data operation tab..................................... 7-19
Numerical input ...................................................... 7-1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-35
Setting items of numerical input ....................... 7-21
Basic tab ................................................... 7-21
Extended Tab............................................ 7-24
Case tab.................................................... 7-28
Trigger tab................................................. 7-31
[O]
Object script ....................................................... 16-47
[P]
Panelmeter .......................................................... 10-1
Precautions .................................................... 10-14
Required knowledge for panelmeter setting .... 10-2
Setting items .................................................... 10-4
Basic tab ................................................... 10-4
Scale/Text tab ........................................... 10-6
Extended tab............................................. 10-8
Case tab ................................................. 10-10
Parts .................................................................... 4-41
Parts display .......................................................... 9-1
Arrangement and settings.................................. 9-9
Precautions ...................................................... 9-32
Relevant settings ....................................... 9-3,9-36
Setting items of bit parts display ...................... 9-10
Basic tab ................................................... 9-10
Extended tab............................................. 9-13
Trigger tab ................................................ 9-14
Setting items of fixed parts display .................. 9-27
Basic tab ................................................... 9-27
Extended tab............................................. 9-30
Setting items of word parts display .................. 9-16
Basic tab ................................................... 9-16
Extended tab............................................. 9-20
Case tab ................................................... 9-21
Trigger tab ................................................ 9-24
Parts movement .................................................. 9-35
Arrangement and setting.................................. 9-47
Precautions ...................................................... 9-73
Setting items of bit parts movement................. 9-48
Basic tab ................................................... 9-48
Extended tab............................................. 9-52
[Q]
Q motion monitor ................................................. 14-7
[R]
Read device......................................................... 3-34
Recipe function .................................................. 12-12
Precautions .......................................... 12-25,12-68
Setting items .................................................. 12-16
Settings .......................................................... 12-15
Recipe processing signal..................................... 3-38
Record ............................................................... 12-35
[S]
Scatter graph ..................................................... 10-93
Precautions .................................................. 10-117
Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
....................................................................... 10-95
Setting items ................................................ 10-102
Index - 4
APPENDICES
Trigger tab................................................. 9-53

Setting items of fixed parts movement ............. 9-67
Basic tab ................................................... 9-67
Extended tab............................................. 9-71
Trigger tab................................................. 9-71
Setting items of word parts movement............. 9-55
Basic tab ................................................... 9-55
Extended tab............................................. 9-60
Case tab.................................................... 9-61
Trigger tab................................................. 9-64
Setting of parts move route .............................. 9-45
Password ............................................................. 3-26
Previous cursor display user ID ........................... 3-40
Previous numeric display object ID...................... 3-39
Previous numeric value input............................... 3-39
Project folder.......................................................... 3-2
Project script ...................................................... 16-10
Applicable data and representation methods
....................................................................... 16-18
Before setting ................................................. 16-10
Control structure............................................. 16-13
Precautions .................................................... 16-43
Precautions for using BMOV.......................... 16-44
Program example........................................... 16-38
Setting items .................................................. 16-30
Option tab ............................................... 16-35
Project tab ............................................... 16-30
Screen tab............................................... 16-32
Script list ................................................. 16-36
Script symbol tab .................................... 16-33
Settings .......................................................... 16-29
Settings and procedure for execution ............ 16-69
INDEXARTS

....................................................................... 16-65
Before setting................................................. 16-47
Control structure ............................................ 16-52
Precautions .................................................... 16-85
Program examples......................................... 16-80
Setting items .................................................. 16-70
Editing scripts ......................................... 16-75
Object script symbol ............................... 16-78
Settings .......................................................... 16-70
Object shape ....................................................... 5-32
Offset function ..................................................... 5-61
On-screen base screen number .......................... 3-39
On-screen window1 screen number.................... 3-39
Overlap window ..................................................... 2-3
Basic tab ............................................... 10-102

Device/Scale tab ................................... 10-104
Attribute tab........................................... 10-106
Case/Trigger tab ................................... 10-107
Case tab................................................ 10-111
Extended tab......................................... 10-113
Data operation tab ................................ 10-115
Object script tab .................................... 10-116
Screen saving signal ........................................... 3-38
Screen script...................................................... 16-10
Screens ................................................................. 2-1
Security function .................................................. 5-66
Security level ....................................................... 5-66
Servo amplifier monitor........................................ 14-8
Set overlay screen function ................................. 15-1
Check of the settings........................................ 15-3
Precautions ...................................................... 15-4
Standard font ....................................................... 2-15
Startup logo ......................................................... 3-91
State .................................................................... 5-38
Statistics graph .................................................. 10-80
Precautions .................................................... 10-92
Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
....................................................................... 10-82
Setting items .................................................. 10-84
Basic tab ................................................. 10-84
Device/Scale tab ..................................... 10-86
Extended tab........................................... 10-88
Trigger tab............................................... 10-89
Status observation ............................................... 11-1
Precautions .................................................... 11-10
Setting items .................................................... 11-4
Settings ............................................................ 11-3
Superimposed window .......................................... 2-3
Switching device ...................................... 8-101,8-148
Switching of alarm hierarchies................... 8-96,8-144
System alarm......................................................... 8-1
System alarm display ........................................ 8-192
Before setting system alarm........................... 8-194
Related settings ............................................. 8-193
Setting items .................................................. 8-197
Basic tab ................................................. 8-197
Extended tab........................................... 8-198
System information .............................................. 3-34
System monitor.................................... 14-1,14-6,14-7
System signal 1-1 ................................................ 3-35
System signal 1-2 ................................................ 3-37
System signal 2-1 ................................................ 3-38
System signal 2-2 ................................................ 3-40
[T]
Test function ........................................................ 15-9
Index - 5

Setting items .................................................. 15-10
Time action function........................................... 11-11
Precautions .................................................... 11-15
Setting items .................................................. 11-12
Settings .......................................................... 11-11
Touch switch ........................................................ 6-18
Precautions ...................................................... 6-83
Setting items of bit switch................................. 6-24
Basic tab ................................................... 6-24
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-26
Extended tab ............................................. 6-29
Action tab .................................................. 6-33
Trigger tab................................................. 6-43
Setting items of change station No. switch ...... 6-67
Basic tab ................................................... 6-67
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-71
Extended tab ............................................. 6-71
Action tab .................................................. 6-72
Trigger tab................................................. 6-72
Setting items of data set switch........................ 6-44
Basic tab ................................................... 6-44
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-46
Extended tab ............................................. 6-46
Action tab .................................................. 6-47
Trigger tab................................................. 6-47
Setting items of go to screen switch................. 6-56
Basic tab ................................................... 6-56
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-65
Extended tab ............................................. 6-65
Action tab .................................................. 6-66
Trigger tab................................................. 6-66
Setting items of key code switch ...................... 6-73
Basic tab ................................................... 6-73
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-75
Extended tab ............................................. 6-75
Action tab .................................................. 6-76
Trigger tab................................................. 6-76
Setting items of multi action switch .................. 6-77
Basic tab ................................................... 6-77
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-79
Extended tab ............................................. 6-79
Indirect text tab.......................................... 6-80
Trigger tab................................................. 6-81
Setting items of special function switch............ 6-48
Basic tab ................................................... 6-48
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-50
Extended tab ............................................. 6-51
Trigger tab................................................. 6-55
Touch switch for displaying user alarm.............. 8-187
Touch switches for advanced alarm display ...... 8-125
Transparent color................................................. 2-57
Trend graph ....................................................... 10-32
INDEXARTS
APPENDICES
Required knowledge for trend graph setting

....................................................................... 10-33
Setting items .................................................. 10-37
Basic tab ................................................. 10-37
Device/scale tab ..................................... 10-40
Extended tab........................................... 10-42
Trigger tab .............................................. 10-44
Trigger (for display) ............................................. 5-45
Trigger (for write) ................................................. 5-45
TrueType font ...................................................... 2-15
Two tracker mode................................................ 5-37
[U]
User alarm ............................................................. 8-1
User alarm display............................................. 8-170
Before setting user alarm............................... 8-172
Details of display............................................ 8-174
Offset for comment No................................... 8-176
Offset for datailed No. .................................... 8-175
Relevant settings ........................................... 8-171
Setting items .................................................. 8-181
Basic tab ................................................. 8-181
Device tab ............................................... 8-183
Extended tab........................................... 8-185
Trigger tab .............................................. 8-186
Store memory ................................................ 8-177
User-created key window .................................... 4-78
[W]
Window screen ...................................................... 2-2
Windows font ....................................................... 2-15
Write device......................................................... 3-34
Index - 6
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Pentium and celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
VS-FlexGrid ProLEADTOOLS
Copyright 2000 VideoSoft CorporationCopyright (C) 2001 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
Version 2
1/2
Version 2
1/2
MODEL
SW2-GT1000-R-E
MODEL
CODE
1D7M25
SH(NA)-080530ENG-D(0510)MEE

1/2
SW2D5C-GTWK2-E
SW2D5C-GTD2-E
Version 2
2/2
Version 2
2/2
MODEL
SW2-GT1000-R-E
MODEL
CODE
1D7M25
SH(NA)-080531ENG-B(0503)MEE

2/2
SW2D5C-GTWK2-E
SW2D5C-GTD2-E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully
and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
DANGER
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that failure to observe the

CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]

DANGER
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device
value, a current or set timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the
relevant manual to fully understand the operating procedures. When testing, never change the data
of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
A-1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

1. Required PC memory
The processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows on a personal computer of which main
memory capacity is less than 64M bytes. Make sure to secure the capacity of 64 M bytes or more.
2. Free capacity of hard disk (virtual memory)
At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software.
The processing may be terminated by Windows , if 100M bytes or more of free space cannot be secured
within hard disk while running GT Designer2.
Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software.
When enough free capacity cannot be secured, make sure to save projects frequently.
3. Error messages displayed while starting and editing
"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to
secure at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.
4. GT Designer2 and GOT display
(a) Cautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line, for example) in bold.
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer. However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does
not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon are displayed differently between
GT Designer2 and GOT.
On GT Designer2
On GOT
(c) Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different
between GT Designer2 and GOT.
(d) Drawing of different type lines
The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
The display position of the memory data display in graph function is different between GT
Designer2 and GOT.
Even if the display-start-line of a comment has been set, the comment will be displayed from the
first line on GT Designer2.
A-2
(f)
Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the
filled-paint may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Position of Paint mark may be shifted and the

filled-paint may exceed the outline of the figure.
5. Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system environment (256
colors
2 colors)
The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a [red] rectangle-figure is changed to the 2 colors (B/W), the [red] color will
remain.
The colors of the image data (BMP format file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is
closed and that image data is double-clicked.
6. Object function and device type
The object (bit lamp or word lamp),for which bit device setting and word device setting are separated,
cannot be converted between bit device and word device.
7. When device type is changed
Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device.
The device flag may be represented as "??", depending on the settings .
Example: D0. b0
D0 D0.b5
??
8. OS setting
Set the font size as "Small Font" when setting OS (Windows ) screen.
The GT designer2 dialog box cannot be displayed correctly if the font size is set as "Large font".
9. When the toolbar icon appears in smaller size after startup of GT Desinger2
The toolbar icon may appear in smaller size right after GT Designer2 is started up.
To correctly display the icon, initialize it as instructed below.
(Click on [Project]
[References] from the menu, and select the toolbar tab. Click on Reset All button in
that tab.)
10. When using GT Designer2 in the PC in which the OS other than applicable language version
The text may not be displayed correctly depending on the OS versions; some version include the fonts
incompatible with GT Designer2 or GOT.
A-3
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date
Manual Number
Revision
Oct., 2004
SH(NA)-080531ENG-A
First Printing
Mar., 2005
SH(NA)-080531ENG-B
Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.09K.

Partical additions
Partical corrections
How to Use This Manual, Chapter 1, Section 3.1, 3.8, 4.1.3, 5.1, 7.3.5, 8.2.2,
8.2.5, 8.3.5, 8.6.5, 8.8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 15.7.2
Partical additions
Function Quick Reference, Section 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.2, 2.4, 2.5.3, 2.8.1,2.8.2, 3.3.1,
3.6, 3.6.1, 3.7, 4.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.3, 5.1.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 8.2.5 , 8.3.2,
8.4.7, 8.6, 8.6.6, 8.8, 8.8.4, 8.8.6, 9.1.1, 10.1.4
Additions
Section 3.10, 4.3, 9.1.2, 9.2.1, 9.2.2, Chapter 12, Section 13.2, 14.2, 14.3,
14.4, 14.5, 14.6, Appendix 4
Section 4.3 to 4.4
Section 11.2
Section 12.2
Section 11.3
Section 11.2
Chapter 12 to 14
Apr., 2005
SH(NA)-080531ENG-C
Section 4.4 to 4.5
Chapter 13 to 15
Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.11M.

Partical additions
Section 3.2, 12.1, 12.2.3
A-4
Print Date
Manual Number
Oct., 2005
SH(NA)-080531ENG-D
Revision
Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2.18U
Partial corrections
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL, Chapter 1, Section
2.7.3, Section 3.1, 3.2.2, 3.4, Section 5.2, Section 6.2.6, 6.2.10, Section 8.2.2,
8.2.6, 8.7.5, Section 12.3.5, Section 13.1.3, 13.1.
Partial additions
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 2.3.1, 2.3.2,
2.4, 2.5, 2.5.1, 2.5.3, Section 2.6.1, Section 2.7.1, 2.7.2, Section 2.8.1, 2.8.2,
Section 3.1.1 to 3.1.3, 3.3.4, 3.3.5, 3.4.3, 3.5, 3.5.2, 3.6, 3.6.1, 3.6.4, 3.7.2,
3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.9, Section 4.1.1 to 4.1.12, 4.3, 4.3.1, 4.4.1, 4.5.5, Section 5.1.2,
5.1.3, 5.3.1, 5.3.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.3 to 6.2.5, 6.2.9, Section 7.1.3 to
7.1.5, 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 7.4.3, 7.5.3, 7.5.4, Section 8.2.5, 8.3.6, 8.8.4, Section
9.1.4, 9.1.5, 9.1.7, 9.2.5 to 9.2.7, Section 10.1.4, 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.3.4, 10.4.4,
10.5.4, 10.6.4, 10.7.4, Section 12.2.3, 12.3.4, Appendix1, Appendix5
Additions
Section 2.8, 2.11, Section 3.11, Section 7.3.5, Section 10.8, Section 11.3,
Section 14.4, 14.5, 14.6, 14.7, 14.8, 14.9, Appendix4
Section 2.8 to 2.9
Section 2.9 to 2.10
Section 7.3.5
Section 7.3.6
Section 14.1
14.2
Section 14.3
Section 14.2
Section 14.4
Section 14.1
Section 14.5
Section 14.3
Section 14.6
Section 15.3
Section 15.1 to 15.2
Chapter 15
Chapter16
Appendix4
Appendix5
Japanese Manual Version SH-080510-F

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of
using the contents noted in this manual.
2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................A - 2
REVISIONS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 4
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................A - 6
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................................................................A - 6
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE ..................................................................................................................A - 16
MANUALS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 27
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS....................................................................................................A - 28
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL........................................................................................................................A - 31

1. OVERVIEW
1.1
1 - 1 to 1 - 2
Overview
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
Type/Number of Creatable Screens

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Figures and Data Capacity
2.3
Specifications of Applicable Characters
2-1
2-9
2 - 15
Fonts................................................................................................................................... 2 - 16
KANJI regions..................................................................................................................... 2 - 21
2.4
Specifications of Available Object Functions
2 - 24
2.5
Clock Function
2 - 40
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU ..................................................... 2 - 43

Changing clock data by GOT special register (GS)............................................................ 2 - 47
PLC CPU equipped with clock............................................................................................ 2 - 49
Superimposition Settings
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
A-6
2 - 1 to 2 - 218
Base screen specifications ................................................................................................... 2 - 1

Window screen specifications............................................................................................... 2 - 2
Whole screen specifications ................................................................................................. 2 - 6
Data size of screen and project ............................................................................................ 2 - 8
2.2
2.3.1
2.3.2
1-1
2 - 52
Superimposition using layers.............................................................................................. 2 - 53

Superimposition using no layer........................................................................................... 2 - 61
Special superimposition of touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input ....................... 2 - 65
2.7
Controller that can be monitored and the accessible range

2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
2.9
Controller that allows monitoring ........................................................................................ 2 - 69

Access range for monitoring ............................................................................................... 2 - 77
How to monitor QCPU redundant system .......................................................................... 2 - 94
Multi-channel Function
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
2 - 120
About multi-channel function ............................................................................................ 2 - 120

General flow from system selection to drawing ................................................................ 2 - 122
Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection) ............................ 2 - 123
Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) ................................................ 2 - 125
Installing communication units on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) .. 2 - 132
Setting for communication settings................................................................................... 2 - 138
Items to be checked before starting drawing .................................................................... 2 - 140
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 2 - 142
Multi-channel function check sheet .................................................................................. 2 - 143
Supported Devices
2.9.1
2.9.2
2 - 69
2 - 145
GOT internal devices ........................................................................................................ 2 - 145

Device range available for GOT1000 series..................................................................... 2 - 175
2 - 217
2 - 218
3. COMMON SETTING
3.1
GOT/PLC Type Setting

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3 - 26
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 27
Password setting items....................................................................................................... 3 - 28
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 33
System Information Setting

3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3 - 21
Setting ................................................................................................................................ 3 - 22
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 24
Password Setting
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3 - 13
Methods of switching station No. ........................................................................................ 3 - 13

Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 17
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 18
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 20
Setting Language Switching Device

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3-6
Settings................................................................................................................................. 3 - 9
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 10
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 12
Switching Station No. Device Setting

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3-1
Settings................................................................................................................................. 3 - 1
Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
Precautions........................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
Switching Screen Device Setting

3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3 - 1 to 3 - 96
3 - 34

Setting methods.................................................................................................................. 3 - 50
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 50
A-7
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.7
Communication Interface Setting

3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
3 - 59
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 59
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 60
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 84
Setting of GOT Display and Operations

(GOT Setup)
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.9
Application example............................................................................................................ 3 - 51
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 58
3 - 86
Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 86
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 87
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 89
Setting GOT Clock Data (Clock Setting)
3 - 90
3 - 91
3.10.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 93
3.10.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 94
3.10.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 95
4. PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR OBJECT SETUP

4.1
Comment Registration
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.2
4.3
4.4
A-8
4 - 41
4 - 53
Before using BMP/JPEG file parts...................................................................................... 4 - 55

Storing a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card.............................................................. 4 - 56
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 57
Auxiliary Settings
4.4.1
4-1
Required knowledge for parts registration .......................................................................... 4 - 41

Basic operation for parts registration .................................................................................. 4 - 43
Registering parts................................................................................................................. 4 - 45
Copying the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 48
Deleting the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 49
Changing the registered parts settings ............................................................................... 4 - 50
Changing property of the registered parts .......................................................................... 4 - 51
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 52
Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card

4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4 - 1 to 4 - 97
Required knowledge for comment registration ..................................................................... 4 - 1

Displaying comment list dialog box....................................................................................... 4 - 4
Basic operations for comment registration ........................................................................... 4 - 7
Comment registration ......................................................................................................... 4 - 17
Registering comment group columns ................................................................................. 4 - 20
Copying or cutting a comment registered ........................................................................... 4 - 21
Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered ............................................................ 4 - 25
Deleting columns in comment group .................................................................................. 4 - 27
Changing registered comment settings .............................................................................. 4 - 28
Saving/Reading comments as file ...................................................................................... 4 - 30
Editing comment saved as Text/CSV file............................................................................ 4 - 34
Cautions for comment registration...................................................................................... 4 - 39
Parts Registration
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
3 - 96
4 - 58
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.5
Settings............................................................................................................................... 4 - 68
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 69
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 76
Key Window
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4 - 78
Key window type................................................................................................................. 4 - 78

Keys on default key window and display items .................................................................. 4 - 84
How to operate key window................................................................................................ 4 - 85
How to create user-created key window............................................................................. 4 - 87
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 97

5. COMMON SETTINGS FOR OBJECTS
5.1
Device Setting
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5 - 1 to 5 - 73
5-1
Device setting ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 1

Settings................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.2
Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
5 - 29
5.3
5 - 30
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4
State Setting
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.5
5.7
5.8
Lamp Display
6.1.1
5 - 65
Security function setting ..................................................................................................... 5 - 72

Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 73
6. LAMP, SWITCH
6.1
5 - 61

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 63
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 63
Security Function
5.8.1
5.8.2
5 - 55

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 59
Offset Function
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5 - 45

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 52
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
Data Operation Function

5.6.1
5.6.2
5 - 38
Display priority .................................................................................................................... 5 - 39

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 40
Example of state setting operation ..................................................................................... 5 - 43
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 44
Trigger Setting
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
Object arrangement ............................................................................................................ 5 - 30

Object shape setting ........................................................................................................... 5 - 32
Object size change ............................................................................................................. 5 - 35
6 - 1 to 6 - 87
6-1

A-9
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2

Setting items of bit lamp ....................................................................................................... 6 - 4
Setting items of word lamp ................................................................................................... 6 - 9
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 17
Touch Switch
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10

Setting items of bit switch ................................................................................................... 6 - 24
Setting items of data set switch .......................................................................................... 6 - 44
Setting items of special function switch .............................................................................. 6 - 48
Setting items of go to screen switch ................................................................................... 6 - 56
Setting items of change station No. switch ......................................................................... 6 - 67
Setting items of key code switch......................................................................................... 6 - 73
Setting items of multi action switch..................................................................................... 6 - 77
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 83
7. NUMERICAL/CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.1
Numerical Display/Numerical Input

7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
A - 10
7 - 56
7 - 75

Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 78
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 81
Comment Display
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7 - 39

Before setting ASCII display/ASCII input............................................................................ 7 - 62
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 64
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 73
Clock Display
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7-1

Required knowledge for data list setting............................................................................. 7 - 41
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 44
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 55
ASCII Display/ASCII Input

7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7 - 1 to 7 - 105

Setting items of numerical display ...................................................................................... 7 - 11
Setting items of numerical input.......................................................................................... 7 - 21
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 35
Data List
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
6 - 18
7 - 82

Setting items of bit comment .............................................................................................. 7 - 85
Setting items of word comment .......................................................................................... 7 - 94
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 7 - 105
8. ALARM
8.1
Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8 - 170

Before setting user alarm ................................................................................................. 8 - 172
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 181
Touch switch for displaying user alarm ............................................................................ 8 - 187
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 8 - 190
System Alarm Display

8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.7.5
8 - 135

Before setting ................................................................................................................... 8 - 137
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 152
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 164
User Alarm Display

8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
8 - 89

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 92
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 105
Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display .............................................. 8 - 125
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 129

8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8 - 63

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 67
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 80
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 85

8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8 - 25

Before setting ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 28
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 47
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 59
Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8-3
Alarm function..................................................................................................................... 8 - 15
Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................... 8 - 19

8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.3
8 - 1 to 8 - 235
8 - 192
Related settings ................................................................................................................ 8 - 193

Before setting system alarm ............................................................................................. 8 - 194
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 197
Precaution ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 199
A - 11
8.8

8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.8.4
8.8.5
8.8.6

Before setting alarm history display.................................................................................. 8 - 203
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 8 - 211
Description on touch switches for alarm history display ................................................... 8 - 230
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 8 - 234
9. PARTS
9.1
9.2
9 - 1 to 9 - 73
Parts Display
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
Panelmeter
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.2
10.3
10.4
A - 12

Required knowledge for level setting................................................................................ 10 - 17
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 21
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 29
10 - 32

Required knowledge for trend graph setting..................................................................... 10 - 33
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 37
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 48
Line Graph
10.4.1
10.4.2
10 - 1
10 - 15
Trend Graph
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10 - 1 to 10 - 142

Required knowledge for panelmeter setting ....................................................................... 10 - 2
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 14
Level
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
10.2.5
9 - 35

Moving and displaying parts ............................................................................................... 9 - 37
Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen) .......................................... 9 - 45
Arrangement and setting .................................................................................................... 9 - 47
Setting items of bit parts movement ................................................................................... 9 - 48
Setting items of word parts movement ............................................................................... 9 - 55
Setting items of fixed parts movement................................................................................ 9 - 67
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 73
10. GRAPH, METER

10.1
9-1

Parts displaying method ....................................................................................................... 9 - 4
Setting items of bit parts display ......................................................................................... 9 - 10
Setting items of word parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 16
Setting items of fixed parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 27
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 32
Parts Movement
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
8 - 200
10 - 49

Required knowledge for line graph setting ....................................................................... 10 - 50
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.5
Bar Graph
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.4
10.5.5
10.6
10.8

11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.2
11.3
11 - 1 to 11 - 54
11 - 1

Settings............................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 11 - 4
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
Time Action Function

11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
10 - 118
Relevant settings ............................................................................................................ 10 - 119

Required knowledge for historical trend graph setting ................................................... 10 - 120
Setting items ................................................................................................................... 10 - 125
Touch switches for historical trend graph operation ....................................................... 10 - 139
Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 141
11. TRIGGER ACTIONS

11.1
10 - 93

Required knowledge for scatter graph setting .................................................................. 10 - 95
Setting items ................................................................................................................... 10 - 102
Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 117

10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
10.8.6
10 - 80

Required knowledge for statistics graph setting ............................................................... 10 - 82
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 84
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 92
Scatter Graph
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
10.7.5
10 - 66

Required knowledge for bar graph setting........................................................................ 10 - 67
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 70
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 79
Statistics Graph
10.6.1
10.6.2
10.6.3
10.6.4
10.6.5
10.7

Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 53
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 65
11 - 11
Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 11
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 12
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 15
Logging Function
11 - 17
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
11.3.5

Before setting logging ....................................................................................................... 11 - 19
Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 36
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 37
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 50
12. RECIPE
12 - 1 to 12 - 74
12.1
Differences Between the Recipe Function and the Advanced Recipe Function
12 - 4
A - 13
12.2
Recipe Function
12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
12.3

Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 15
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 16
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 25

12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
12.3.4
12.3.5
Hard Copy
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.2
12 - 26
Before setting.................................................................................................................... 12 - 27
Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 59
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 60
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 68

13.1
12 - 12
13 - 1 to 13 - 17
13 - 1

Settings............................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 13 - 4
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 13 - 7
Bar Code Function
13 - 8
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5

Required knowledge for setting ........................................................................................ 13 - 10
Settings............................................................................................................................. 13 - 13
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 14
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 13 - 15
14. DEBUG
14 - 1 to 14 - 26
14.1
System Monitoring Function
14 - 1
14.2
Ladder Monitoring Function
14 - 2
14.3
List Editor for A
14 - 3
14.4
List Editor for FX
14 - 4
14.5
Intelligent Module Monitor Function
14 - 5
14.6
Network Monitor Function
14 - 6
14.7
Q Motion Monitor Function
14 - 7
14.8
Servo Amplifier Monitor Function
14 - 8
14.9
CNC Monitor Function
14 - 9
15. OTHERS
15.1
Set Overlay Screen Function

15.1.1
15.1.2
15.1.3
15.2
15 - 1

Check of the settings .......................................................................................................... 15 - 3
Precautions......................................................................................................................... 15 - 4
Test Function
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
A - 14
15 - 1 to 15 - 12
15 - 9

Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 15 - 10
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 15 - 11
15.3
Gateway Function
15 - 12
16. SCRIPT FUNCTION
16 - 1 to 16 - 102
16.1
Overview
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.2
16 - 1
Features ............................................................................................................................. 16 - 1
Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 16 - 6
Project Script, Screen Script

16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.2.4
16.2.5
16.2.6
16.2.7
16.2.8
16.2.9
16.3
16 - 10
Before setting ................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

Settings............................................................................................................................. 16 - 29
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 30
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 16 - 43
Precautions for using BMOV ............................................................................................ 16 - 44
Object Script
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
16.3.5
16.3.6
16.3.7
16.3.8
16.4
16 - 47
Before setting ................................................................................................................... 16 - 47

Settings............................................................................................................................. 16 - 70
Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 70
Precautions....................................................................................................................... 16 - 85
Troubleshooting
16.4.1
16.4.2
16.4.3
16 - 88
Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger ............................................ 16 - 88

Message displayed during syntax check .......................................................................... 16 - 92
Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................... 16 - 95
APPENDICES
App- 1 to App - 13
Appendix1
Key Code List
App- 1
Appendix2
Drawing Sheet
App- 5
Appendix3
Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
App- 7
Appendix4
List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)
App- 8
INDEX
Index - 1 to Index - 6
A - 15
FUNCTION QUICK REFERENCE

Edit Operation (GT Designer2 Version
Image
Function
Page
Preview
Shows the preview of screen image of GOT.
Page 7-48
Aligns objects or images
Page 11-21
Align
Property sheet
Sets same attributes to objects or images in the

same screen
Page 12-1
Replace colors
Base 2
Base 2
Base 3
Base 3
Changes the color(s) of the objects and figures

arranged on plural screens at the same time
Page 12-12
Base 1
Base 1
Replace shapes
Base 2
Base 2
Base 3
Base 3
Changes the switch/lamp figures at the same

time
Base 1
Page 12-12
Base 1
Replace devices
M11
M10
M12
M100
M101
M102
Changes the preset devices at the same time
Page 12-12
Changes channel numbers at the same time.
Page 12-12
Overlapping images or objects
Page 12-16
Display the set device in list
Page 12-17
Replace CH No.
@1M10 @1M11 @1M12
@3M10 @3M11 @3M12
Data View
Select
Device list
Base 2
Base 3
D100 Numerical display
D200 ASCII display
D300 Panel meter display
Base 1
Multiple language input
Input characters or comments in other

Man.
Auto
English
A - 16
language.
Chinese
Page 12-24
Image
Function
Page
Import BMP/JPEG/DXF file

BMP file
Import
Imports BMP/JPEG/DXF files
Page 11-11
Utilizes other project data
Page 12-34
JPEG file
DXF file
Import Project
Import
Object Functions (GT Designer2 Version
1 Lamp/Switch
Image
Function
Page
Lamp display
Red
Blue
RUN
STOP
Displays device value via lamp color

changing
Page 6-1
Bit switch
Data set switch
MO:ON
OFF
D100:
200
350
Touch it to switch device ON/OFF
Page 6-24
Touch it to change bit device value
Page 6-44
Touch it to switch the screen to such as the

Utility screen.
Page 6-48
Go to screen switch
Operation
Touch it to switch between the base and
Stop
window screen
Page 6-56
Base 2
Base 1
Touch it to switch the monitored controller

Change monitor
destination
station No.
Page 6-67
Key code switch

A
A B C D
E F G H
Used as the key for inputting numerical

value/ASCII
Page 6-73
A - 17
2 Digit/font display
Image
Function
Page
Numerical display
334
D100
D100:334
Displays device value in numerical value
Page 7-1
Write value on device
Page 7-1
Display multipledevice value in list
Page 7-39
Displays device value in text
Page 7-56
Inputs text code device
Page 7-56
Displays hour/minutes, year/month/date
Page 7-75
Displays command
Page 7-82
Numerical input
45
D100
Data list
D100:45
D100: 55
D101:122
D102: 34
D100
55
D101
D102
122
34
ASCII display
D10:4241H(BA)
D11:4443H(DC)
ABCD
ASCII input
D10:4241H(BA)
D11:4443H(DC)
ABCD
Clock display
02/03/18
15:27
Comment display
RUN
A - 18
STOP
3 Alarm
Image
Function

Time message
Time message
13:25 RUN A STOP
Time message
13:25 RUN
A STOP
13:03
Motor trip
13:03 Motor trip
Displays a history of GOT errors,

communication errors or user-created
messages at alarm occurrence.
13:25 RUN A STOP

13:03 Motor trip
Page
Page 8-89
Also displays alarms hierarchically.

Pops up a GOT error, communication error

or user-created message at alarm
occurrence. Also displays alarms
Page 8-135
hierarchically.
User alarm display
Displays a user-created message at alarm

02/04/18 13:25:40
RUN A STOP
occurrence.
Page 8-170
Displays a GOT error or communication error

Page 8-192
Displays a history of user-created messages
Time message
13:25 RUN A STOP
13:03 Motor trip
Page 8-200
4 Parts
Image
Function
Page
Parts display
Part1
Display entered device
Page 9-1
Displays moving parts
Page 9-35
Part2
Parts movement display
A - 19
5 Graph/Meter
Image
Function
Page
Panel meter display
Displays device data on panel meter
Page 10-1
Displays device data in proportional level
Page 10-15
Displays device data in trend graph
Page 10-32
Displays device data in line graph
Page 10-49
Displays device data in bar graph
Page 10-66
Displays device data in statistics graph
Page 10-80
Displays device data in scatter graph
Page 10-93
Level display
Trend graph display
Line graph display
Bar graph display
Statistics graph display

Circle graph
Bar graph
Scatter graph display
Historical trend graph display
Displays the past data having been collected

by the logging function in trend graph,
Page 10-118
starting from the present.
6 Trigger
action
Image
Function
Monitors status of device and write value to

Write
A - 20
Page
D100: 0
150
device or operates GOT when condition

meets
Page 11-1
Image
Function
Page
Outputs the device writing and sound at

specified time.
Page 11-11
Logging function
Collects and stores the device values.
Page 11-17
7 Recipe
Image
Function
Recipe function
Read
/Write
D100: 150
D101: 300
D102: 208
Page

Page 12-12
One value can be set to a device.


Read
/Write
D100: 150 250

D101: 300 500
D102: 208 235

Multiple values can be set to a device.
Page 12-26
The device value can be read/written by the

utility.
8 External input/output
Image
Function
Page
Hardcopy
Outputs the GOT monitor screen to printer or

PC card
Page 13-1
Bar code
Writes data read by bar code reader to

1350
device
Page 13-8
A - 21
9 Others
Image
Set overlay screen
Function
Page
Menu
Base 1
Menu
Set overlay screen from other screens
Base 3
Page 15-1
Menu
Base 2
Test function
Changes device values on a test window

while displaying a monitor screen.
Page 15-9

M10 ON
M20 OFF
D100 255
Displays the operation status of a sequence

program.
Page 14-1
Monitors the status of ACPU devices.
Page 14-2
List editor for A
Reads a sequence program from ACPU and

display in list to change instructions.
Page 14-3
List editor for FX
Reads a sequence program from FXCPU

and displays in list to change instructions.
Intelligent module monitor
Page 14-4
Monitors the buffer memory of the intelligent

function module on the dedicated screen to
Page 14-5
change the data.
Network monitor
Monitors the network status of MELSECNET/

H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) and
Page 14-6
MELSECNET/B.
Motion monitor
Performs servo monitoring and parameter

setting for motion controller CPU (Q series).
A - 22
Page 14-7
Image
Function
Page
Servo amplifier monitor
Performs various monitoring functions,

parameter changes and test run for the servo
Page 14-8
amplifier where a GOT is connected.
CNC monitor
Performs position display monitor for the

MELDAS connected to a GOT at the
equivalent level of monitoring that uses a
Page 14-9
MELDAS dedicated display.

Gateway function
Performs remote monitoring and remote

Ethernet
Mitsubishi electric PLC
D100
250
maintenance of production site from the
Page 15-12
office.
OMRON PLC
TIM50
330
A - 23
10 Script function
Image
Script
Function
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=1;}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=2;}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=3;}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=4;}
Controls GOT display by scripts
Page
Page 16-1
11 Object setting
Image
Function
Page
Data operation
D100 : 45
D100
180
enables objects using the operated value
180
Offset
Operates device values by expression and
Page 5-55
Numerical value input: D100

200
Write to D110
10
Accumulates the offset device value in

monitor device address and monitor.
Page 5-61
Offset device: D200

Security
*****
Other Functions (GT Designer2 Version

Image
Restricts the password users
Page 5-65

Function
Page
Font
Displays a text in various fonts.
Page 2-15
Superimposes figures and objects.
Page 2-52
Monitors multiple controllers.
Page 2-120
Superimposition
A - 24
Image
Language switching
lish C
Eng
hines
e
Japanese
Function
Switches between multiple languages.
Page
Page 3-21
Makes the communication settings of the

controller.
Page 3-59
GOT Setup
Makes the settings relevant to GOT display

and operation.
Page 3-86
Clock setting
Sets the clock used by the GOT.
Page 3-90
Startup logo
Sets the screen (BMP file) to be displayed at

GOT startup.
Data Transmission (GT Designer2 Version
Page 3-91
Image
Function
Page
Install
OS
Transfers OS from PC to the GOT.
Page 8-43
Download
Transimits monitor screen data from PC to

GOT
Page 8-48
Upload
Transmits monitor screen data from GOT to

PC
Verify
Check if the
project data
corresponds
to each other.
Page 8-60
Check the project data displayed on the GT

Designer2 against the project data stored in
Page 8-55
the GOT.
A - 25
Print (GT Designer2 Version
Image
Function
Page
Print
Prints the project information (screen image,

title list, etc.).
A - 26
Page 9-1
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.
You can order it as necessary.
Related Manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Type code)
GT15 User's Manual
SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
(Sold separately)
GT11 User's Manual
JY997D17501A
(09R815)
(Sold separately)
GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
Describes methods of the GOT1000 series installation operation, basic operation for drawing and transmit-
SH-080529ENG
(1D7M24)
ting data to GOT1000 series
(Sold separately)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (1/2, 2/2)
Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable
SH-080532ENG
(1D7M26)
creation
(Sold separately)
SH-080544ENG
Describes extended functions and option functions applicable to GOT series.
(Sold separately)
Describes specifications, system configurations and setting methods of the gateway functions.
(Sold separately)
(1D7M32)
SH-080545ENG
(1D7M33)
A - 27
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:
GOT
Description
GT1595
GT1595-X
Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA
GT1585
GT1585-S
GT1575-S
GT1575-V
GT1575-VN
GT1572-VN
GT1565-V
GT1562-VN
GT157
GOT1000 Series
GT156
GT15
, GT15
Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156
GT1155-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBD
Handy
GT1155HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
GOT
GT1150HS-Q
Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT11
, GT11
Abbreviation of GT1155-Q, GT1150-Q, GT11 Handy GOT
GOT900 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series
Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
Communication unit
Bus connection unit
Serial communication
unit
Communication
Ethernet communication
unit
unit
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
CC-Link communication
unit
Interface converter unit
A - 28
Description
GT15-QBUS,
GT15-QBUS2,
GT15-ABUS,
GT15-ABUS2,
GT15-75QBUSL,
GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL,
GT15-75ABUS2L
GT15-RS2-9P,
GT15-RS4-9S,
GT15-RS4-TE
GT15-RS2T4-9P,
GT15-RS2T4-25P
GT15-J71E71-100
GT15-75J71LP23-Z,
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
GT15-75IF900
GT15-75J71BR13-Z
Option
Backlight

Multi-color display board
Protective Sheet
Description
GT15-90XLTT,
GT15-80SLTT,
GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTN,
GT15-60VLTT,
GT15-60VLTN
GT15-70VLTT,
GT15-FNB,
GT15-QFNB,
GT15-QFNB16M,
GT15-QFNB32M,
GT15-QFNB48M,
GT11-50FNB
GT15-XHNB,
GT15-VHNB
GT15-90PSCB,
GT15-90PSGB,
GT15-90PSCW,
GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB,
GT15-80PSGB,
GT15-80PSCW,
GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB,
GT15-70PSGB,
GT15-70PSCW,
GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB,
GT15-60PSGB,
GT15-60PSCW,
GT15-60PSGW,
GT11-50PSCB,
GT11-50PSGB,
GT11-50PSCW,
GT11-50PSGW,
A9GT-50STAND
GT11H-50PSC
USB environmental protection cover
Stand
Memory card
CF card
GT15-UCOV,
GT11-50UCOV
GT15-90STAND,
GT15-80STAND,
GT15-70STAND,
GT05-MEM-16MC,
GT05-MEM-32MC,
GT05-MEM-64MC,
GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC
Memory card adaptor
GT05-MEM-ADPC
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-97,
GT15-60ATT-96
Battery
GT15-BAT,
GT11-50BAT
Software
Description
GT Works2 Version
SW D5C-GTWK2-E,
SW D5C-GTWK2-EV
SW D5C-GTD2-E,
SW D5C-GTD2-EV
GT Designer2
Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Converter2
Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Simulator2
Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 / GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2
Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2
GX Developer
Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX Simulator
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
License (for GT SoftGOT2)

Description
License
A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (For DOS/V PC)
License FD
SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (For PC CPU module)
A - 29
Others
Description
Omron PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE
Sharp PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation
Toshiba PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION
HITACHI PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
Matsushita PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd
Yaskawa PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation
Yokogawa PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Allen-Bradley PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Allen-Bradley
SIEMENS PLC
Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SIEMENS
OMRON temperature controller
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by YAMATAKE
Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC
GOT (server)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client)
Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Windows
Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows
font
Intelligent function module
A - 30
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are
mounted to the base unit.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

1 Functions
This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version2.18U.
For the added functions by the product version upgrade, refer to the list of functions added by GT
Desiger2 version upgrade in Appendices.
2 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual
Shows functions applicable to GT15, GT11.

" ", Applicable
" ", N / A
Indicates the operation steps.
Brackets used for the menu and items differ.

[
] : Refers to menu in menu bar.

: Refers to dialog box item or
GOT utility menu.
: Refers to dialog box buttons or
PC keyboard.
Show the items including detailed explanation

(manual and the chapter, section, item).
Refers to information required

for operation.
Refers to information useful
for operation.
Remark
Refers to supplementary
explanations.
A - 31

to GT15
specific to the specified
type of GOT
(For GT1595-X)

to GT11
specific to GT11 handy GOT
handy GOT
A - 32
LAMP, SWITCH
OVERVIEW
6.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Lamp Display
3
Section 6.1.3 Setting items of bit lamp)
COMMON SETTING
This function turns ON/OFF the lamp according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device.
X10 = OFF
Run
Stop
ON
OFF
2 Word lamp
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
X10 = ON
Section 6.1.4 Setting items of word lamp)
This function enables changing lamp color according to the word device value.
Stop
Run
Error
OFF
ON
Flicker
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D100 = over 100
6
LAMP, SWITCH
D100 = 1 to 99
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
D100 = 0
6.1 Lamp Display
6-1
ALARM
1 Bit lamp
6.1.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For Lamp display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to Lamp display and others
(1) Functions relevant to Lamp display and others

Check for overlapping objects
If objects are overlapping each other, a message is displayed on the GOT.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
As GOT may not the display overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen data.
Coordinates error
Setting items
[Carry out check for overlapping
objects within GOT]
6-2
6.1 Lamp Display

[Word Lamp]/
[Bit Lamp Area]/
[Screen Lamp]/
[External
[Bit Lamp]/[Word Lamp]/[Bit Lamp Area]/[Screen Lamp]/[External Lamp]
2 Click on the position where the lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.
For the screen lamp and external lamp, the arrangement is not required.)
3 Double click on the arranged lamp to display the setting dialog box.
Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
(For the screen lamp and external lamp, the dialog box is not displayed.)
COMMON SETTING
Easy setting method

The direct setting of object can be made on property sheet.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Click on
[Bit Lamp]/
Lamp].
Select [Object]
[Lamp]
from the menu.
OVERVIEW
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(Section 12.1.1 Batch setting of multiple objects/figures on the same

screen (Property sheet))
4
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.1 Lamp Display

6-3
ALARM
6.1.2
6.1.3
Setting items of bit lamp
1 Basic tab
Set the device to be monitored and the lamp figure (shape/color) to be displayed when the device is
ON/OFF.
Basic
Text
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Set a device to be monitored.
Device
(
ON
OFF
Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Set a Lamp Figure.
Shape
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be selected.
(
Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Select the color of the lamp shape.
Lamp
Select the color of the lamp figure.
BackGround
Display
Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.

The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
Style
Pattern + Lamp
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Lamp
Background
Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp.

Blink
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.1.2 Batch setting and
managing objects/figures for each purpose (Category workspace))

When setting an object without superimposing it, set the object by default (Back).
Layer
When setting an object with superimposing it, the object has to be set to Front or Back place.
(
6-4
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings)
6.1 Lamp Display

6.1.3 Setting items of bit lamp
1
2 Text tab
OVERVIEW
Set the text to be displayed at the center or on the top, bottom, right or left of the lamp.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
ON
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns ON.
OFF
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns OFF.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Text
Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF
Copy ON
ON /
OFF
Copy OFF
ON
: The "OFF" attribute is copied to the "ON" attribute.
Copy ON
OFF
: The "ON" attribute is copied to the "OFF" attribute.
Text
All Settings
Copies all texts attributes.
Text Only
Copies only texts.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The contents to be copied differ depending on the selected item.
Select a color for the characters displayed.

Select a format to display characters (Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Style
(
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select a color of the shadow when the "Style" item is set to "Solid" or "Raised".
Select a font.
Font
8dot font
TrueType Gothic
Windows
Size
TrueType Mincho
font
(
Select an effect (Italic/Underline/Both).

Effects
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Solid
Standard Italic Under- Both

line
Select a character set available for the specified font.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Basic
Script
Section 2.2
Selectable attributes)

6.1 Lamp Display
6-5
ALARM
Basic
Text
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
T
Select Position to Edit Text
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the object.

(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
Horizontal Alignment
Select the horizontal position of the text.
Vertical Alignment
Select the vertical position of the text.

Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)
Text Input Area
Press the Enter key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Text
Offset to Frame
6-6
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and object
shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
6.1 Lamp Display

Offset to frame
1
3 Extended tab
OVERVIEW
Set the security level and offset value.

Check [Extended] at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
If not using the function, set it to 0.
(
Section 5.8 Security Function)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Text

(

Japan

KANJI Region
Japan
LAMP, SWITCH
China (GB) -Mincho

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot standard
(
Offset
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
Section 5.7 Offset Function)
After checking, set the offset device.

(
6.1 Lamp Display

6-7
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4 Object script tab

For details of settings made on the object script tab, refer to the following
Secton16.3.6
(2) Object Script tab of display object scripts
(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object
property and the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
-
: Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name
Setting item
Security
Option
*1
Object property
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
security
4)
1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
Secton16.3.2
6-8
(2)(a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
6.1 Lamp Display

Setting items of word lamp
1 Basic tab
Set the lamp figure (shape/color) corresponding to the device to be monitored or monitor device value.
OVERVIEW
6.1.4
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Text
Extended
Data Operation
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Object Script
Items
Description

Device
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
New State
Creates a new state.
Delete State
Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next
Up/Down

LAMP, SWITCH
Select State

Set the condition by which the display attribute is changed.
When a word device value is taken as a condition, click on Exp. to enter the conditional expression in the
Exp
dialog box for editing the display range.

(
Display Style
Section 5.4 State Setting)
Set the display attribute for the lamp.

Set a lamp figure.
Shape
(
Frame
Select the frame color of the lamp figure.
Lamp
Select the color of the lamp figure.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
State *1
8
6.1 Lamp Display

6.1.4 Setting items of word lamp
6-9
ALARM
Basic
Text
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Background
Description
Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.
The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Lamp
Example:
Pattern
State *1
Background :
Pattern
Lamp
Background
Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp.

Blink
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High

Category

Layer
(
6 - 10
6.1 Lamp Display

*1 State
For details of states, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW

(1) When conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device
: D100
Data view format
: Signed decimal, 16-bit signed decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
The operation
Display range
Lamp
Display text
Blink
M10 ON
Red
Stop
No
60<=$V<=80
Yellow
Caution
No
81<=$V
Red
Alarm
Low
Blue
Normal operation
Normal case
(State 0)
* $V is the monitor device value.
When M10 is ON, the lamp

will be red and the
displayed text will be "Stop".
Stop
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
State 1
When the device value is

between 60 and 80
State 2
(60
$V
80), the lamp
will be yellow and the
Caution
displayed text will be
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
"Caution".
When the monitor device
value is 81 or more
$V), the display (lamp
Blink
color and displayed text) on
every
(81
State 3
Alarm
state 3 and the lamp color
second.
on state 0 will blink
alternately. The text set on

state 0 is not displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
Low
When condition is other

Normal case
(State 0)
than state 1, 2 and 3, the

lamp will be blue and the
displayed text will be
Normal operation
"Normal operation".
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
High
COMMON SETTING
State No.
overlap conditions
6.1 Lamp Display

6 - 11
ALARM
priority for setting
2 Text tab
Set the text to be displayed at the center or on the top, bottom, left or right of the lamp.
Basic
Text
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Previous/Next
When changing the lamp text setting of the preset state, select the state No. and then change the setting.
Select State
Text

Style
(
Solid
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select a font.
6
Font
8dot font

TrueType Gothic
Windows
Size

TrueType Mincho
font
(

Effects

line

Script
(
Section 2.2
Figures and Data Capacity)
6 - 12
6.1 Lamp Display

Extended
Data Operation
1
Object Script
Items
Description
OVERVIEW
Text

Vertical Alignment
2
SPECIFICATIONS

Text Input Area
Text
Offset to frame
Copy
Copy the set text attribute.
Paste
Clicking on the Paste button in other state completes the copy of the text attribute.
COMMON SETTING
Offset to Frame
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.1 Lamp Display

6 - 13
ALARM
Basic
3 Extended tab
Set the data type, security level and offset value of the monitor device.
Check [Extended] at the bottom of this dialog box to display this tab.
(Example: Setting screen for GT15)
Basic
Text
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Data Type
Signed BIN16
: Lamp display is executed by a signed 16-bit binary value of a word device.
Unsigned BIN16
: Lamp display is executed by an unsigned 16-bit binary value of a word device.
BCD16
: Lamp display is executed by a 16-bit BCD (Binary-Coded Decimal) value of a

word device.
Security
(

(

Japan

KANJI Region
Japan
China (GB) -Mincho

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot standard
Offset
(
(
6 - 14

6.1 Lamp Display

1
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding "Extended Function" at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
4 Data Operation tab
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Text
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in
[Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
Bit
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
Operation
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.
LAMP, SWITCH
Bit Mask
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Data Operation
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
Select an operational expression format for data operation.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit Shift
6.1 Lamp Display

6 - 15
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5 Object script tab

Secton16.3.6

-
Setting dialog box
Tab name
Setting item
Security
Option
*1
Object property
Property name
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
security
4)

Secton16.3.2
6 - 16
6.1 Lamp Display

6.1.5
Precautions
OVERVIEW
The following is the precautions for using the lamp function.

(1) Maximum number of objects settable on one screen
Up to 1000 lamp objects can be placed (set).
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.1 Lamp Display

6.1.5 Precautions
6 - 17
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch
1 Bit switch
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch)
Turns bit device ON/OFF.
Oper.
Stop
2 Data set switch
Section 6.2.4 Setting items of data set switch)
Changes word.
Target
value
380
380
3 Special function switch

switch)
Section 6.2.5 Setting items of special function
Switches to special function screen such as Utility, Clock setting, etc.

Test
window
P0
187
M999
K
1
K
2
MO V
-
K
1234
MO V
D100
MO V
MO V
List edit
4 Go to screen switch
D2
SET M 9028
K
K
DUTY 35 0 400 M 9020
D1
Ladder
monitor
D1
RST V
K
90 D162
K
110 D167
K
100 D172
MO V
D2
1
V
2
D162
47
D167
90
D172
110
100
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of go to screen switch)
Switches base screen/window screen.

Base screen 1
6 - 18
6.2 Touch Switch
Base screen 2
1
(
Section 6.2.7 Setting items of change station

OVERVIEW
5 Change station No. switch

No. switch)
Switches the object device being monitored to the same device of other station No.
Station1
Station1
130
Station1
Station2
Monitor station No.1
Station2
50
Station2
SPECIFICATIONS
50
130
Switches the monitor target to station No.2
3
COMMON SETTING
Operates as preset key code.

1
A B C D E F G DEL
H I J K - ESC
A B C D E F G DEL
H I J K - ESC
7 Multi action switch

Multiple actions of
touch operation.
ABC
(
to
Section 6.2.9 Setting items of multi action switch)
(GT15: Max. 126 actions, GT11: Max. 121 actions) are performed with
Switch type
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Touch switch extended function

Description
Turns ON the specified bit device. (SET)
Turns OFF the specified bit device. (RESET)
Bit Switch
Reverses (ON
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
6 Key code switch
OFF) the current status of specified bit device. (ALT)
Turns ON the specified bit device. (Momentary)
Writes the set value to specified word device. (Fixed)

Data Set Switch
Writes the set word device value to specified word device. (Indirect)
Switches to the screen of which base screen No. that was displayed previously.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified according to specified bit device ON/OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison expression,
Special Function Switch

Change Station No. Switch
Switches to the screen of extended functions as ladder monitor or test windows.

Switches to the station No. specified as monitor target.
Switches to the specified station No. when the bit device (of which monitor target is specified) turns ON/
OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison expression,
switches to the specified station No.
Key Code Switch
Controls numerical input, key input of ASCII input, alarm list, data list and alarm history.
Multi Action Switch
The above operation can be set to this switch.
6.2 Touch Switch
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
switches to the specified station No.
6 - 19
ALARM
Go to Screen Switch
LAMP, SWITCH
Writes the set word device value + fixed value to specified word device. (Fixed + indirect)
Application Example
Comment display changes with each touch
Change the switching screen according to device

status
Section 6.2.4 Setting items of data set switch
1 will be added to D10 with each touch.
Base screen 10
Base screen 1
ON
Line 1 checked
Line 2 checked
M10
Operate
D10 : 1
(Device for comment display)
D10 : 2
Return to the previously displayed screen

OFF
Changes the switching screen
according to the status of M10
Operate
starts
Base screen 20
Stop
with error
Switches different station No. among different screen

types
Section 6.2.7 Setting items of change station No.
switch
Station 1
Graph 1
Graph 1
Graph 2
Back
The screen displayed previously appears
6 - 20
6.2 Touch Switch
D10
100
D10
30
Base screen : Station 1 monitored Station 2

Window screen: Station 2 monitored
100
30
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For Touch switch, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
OVERVIEW
6.2.1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to Touch switch only

Relevant to Touch switch only.
(2) Functions relevant to Touch switch and others
3
(1) Functions relevant to Touch switch and others
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
100
Setting items
Cursor displayed
Key window erased

100
Cursor and key

window displayed
[Cursor position]
Object erased
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
LAMP, SWITCH
100
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
100
When condition fail
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When condition
success
COMMON SETTING
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 21
ALARM
(1) Function relevant to Touch switch and others.

Key Code Input
(Write device)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key
when a value is entered by the ASCII input or touch

switch.
D100 0043
Input disabled
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
A B C
B 348 B 348
The key code is notified.
Key Input Signal

A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
(1) Function relevant to Touch switch only.

Touch Switch Operation Timing (Screen/Station No.
Switch) Setting Signal (GS450.b12)
Screen Switch Memory Card Save Function Setting Signal (GS450.b13)
Controls the switching timing when bits SET/RST/ALT

and screen/station No. switching are set on the touch
switch.
Saves the history of screen transition in the memory card

when screen switching to the previous screen of the
touch switch is performed in the historical mode.
Base screen 2
Base screen 50
A1254 A1254
B 348 B 348
Touch Switch Upper Hierarchy Operation Mode Setting

Signal (GS450.b14)
Changes the operation of switching to the previous
screen of the touch switch to the historical mode.
Historical mode
A1254 A1254
B 348 B 348
6 - 22
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.2
OVERVIEW

Click on each touch switch iron.
Go to screen switch
Data set switch
Key code switch
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Bit switch
Multi action switch

Select a touch switch from the menu.
[Switch]
[Bit Switch]
[Data Set Switch]
[Special Function Switch]
[Go to Screen Switch]
[Change Station No. Switch]
[Key Code Switch]
[Multi Action Switch]
3
COMMON SETTING
[Object]
2 Click on the position where the touch switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged touch switch to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Easy setting method

6
LAMP, SWITCH

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 23
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6.2.3
Setting items of bit switch
1 Basic tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Set bit device as write destination.
Device
Select the function corresponding to the bit device as write destination.
Switch
Action
Action
Set
: Turns ON bit when touched.
Alternate
: Switches bit ON/OFF with each touch.
Reset
: Turns OFF bit when touched.
Momentary : Turns on bit only when being touched.

ON
OFF
Select the shape for touch switch.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape
Display
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library figures can be selected.
Style
Reverse Switch
Check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch area in which shape is not set, according to the background
Area
color.
Frame
Select the frame color of the touch switch.
Switch
Select the touch switch color.
6 - 24
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
OVERVIEW
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Style
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
2
Background

Category

COMMON SETTING
Layer
Touch switch operation when bit momentary is set

(1) If the following cases occur while the touch switch with bit momentary setting is
being touched, bit device may remain ON even when the operator's finger is
released off the switch.
GOT hardware error
GOT power-off
Communication error with a controller
Set timeout time of consecutive ON time to the relevant device as appropriate and
turn the bit device off forcibly by controller at the occurrence of timeout.
(2) When base screen switching request is performed while the touch switch is
touched, the screen switches to a window screen after the operator's finger is
released off the switch.
When touching the touch switch while the targeted bit device is ON, the OFF
timing of the device depends on whether the execution condition is satisfied or
not.
(a) When the execution condition is satisfied

LAMP, SWITCH
Bit device turns off when the finger is released.

(b) When the execution condition is not satisfied.
Bit device turns off when the finger is touched.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(3)
SPECIFICATIONS
Display
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Background
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 25
ALARM
Basic
2 Text/Lamp tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed, positioning point and display position when the device turns
ON
ON.
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed, positioning point and display position when the device turns
OFF
OFF.
Copy ON
OFF
Copy OFF
ON
Copy OFF
ON
Copy ON
OFF
Text
All Settings
Copies all text attributes.
Text Only
Copies only text.

Style
(
Text
Solid
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select a font.
6 x 8dot font
Font
TrueType Gothic
Windows
TrueType Mincho
font
TrueType Mincho and TrueType Gothic are usable only when directly inputting text on the "Text/Lamp" tab.
Size
The text size is fixed to 16-dot when "Indirect Text" is set on the "Action" tab.
(

Effects

line

6 - 26
6.2 Touch Switch

Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
OVERVIEW

Script
(
Section 2.2

T
Select Position to
Edit Text

Text
Offset to Frame
Lamp
Text
Offset to frame
Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape).
Key
ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.

OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, OFF shape will be switched to ON shape.
Bit
After selecting, set the device (
Section 5.1 Device Setting).
When the range of specified word device is set to [Range] in [Device], OFF shape will be switched to ON
shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:

: Sets the word device. (

COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device
Data size
16 bit/32 bit
: Selects data size for word device.
Data type
Signed BIN
: Treats the word device value as signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN
: Treats the word device value as unsigned binary value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as floating point type real.

Display range
Range
: After setting the specified word device, click on Range button to set the switch
range for ON/OFF shape.
(
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word
COMMON SETTING
Vertical Alignment
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Text
LAMP, SWITCH
Alignment
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 27
ALARM
Horizontal
SPECIFICATIONS
Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(1) When [Key] is selected
Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched.
With the setting, OFF shape appears when the touch switch is released,
regardless of the device status. Therefore, select "Bit" or "Word" to show the
device status.
M100
ON
Run
M100
ON
Run
ON shape appears when the touch switch is

touched.
OFF shape appears when the touch switch is

released regardless of the device status.
(2) When [Bit] or [Word] is selected

Select this item to switch the image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the basic tab, the device status can be shown by
touch switch (lamp function).
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100
ON
Run
ON shape appears when M100 is ON
6 - 28
6.2 Touch Switch

M100
OFF
Stop
OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.
1
OVERVIEW
3 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Action
Trigger
Security Display/
Security Input
Description
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Items
(
The number for security input must be larger than that for security display.
Check this item to disable simultaneous press of touch switch.

Then, select the touch switch operation when the simultaneous press is disabled (On Preference/OFF
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Simultaneous Press *1
Preference).
(

Japan
Japan
LAMP, SWITCH
KANJI Region
China (GB) -Mincho

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
Set the time from the instance the touch switch is touched to start the operation, i.e., delay time in 1-second
unit. (Minimum: 1 second, Maximum: 5 seconds.)
None
ON
Delay
OFF
Press Twice
: No delay time will occur.

: Select this item to carry out ON operation by pressing the touch switch during the set
time. Set the delay time. This setting can prevent an incorrect operation from occurring.
: Select this item to carry out OFF operation in the set time after the touch switch is
turned OFF. Touch switch is ON during the set time. After selecting, set the delay time.
: Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is touched once and
then touched for the second time within the set time.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 29
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Set the display attribute for the touch switch after touched once when [Press Twice] is set in [Delay].
Shape

By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library figures can be selected.
(
Frame
Switch
Pattern
The seleted pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Background
*2
Text
Pattern
Switch
Background
When displaying text on the touch switch, click on Text button, set the text to be displayed and positioning
point and display position.
Attribute
for middle
of two
Background :

Style
(
presses
Regular Bold
Color
Solid
Solid Raised
Select a font.
Font
6 x 8dot font

Size
Windows

TrueType Mincho TrueType Gothic
font
(

Effects
Script

line

(
Section 2.2
Select the time the buzzer is on when the touch switch is touched.
Buzzer
Always Set
: The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Set Only Fill Requirement
: The sound is on only when the touch switch is touched and the trigger
Always Not Set
: The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is touched.
has been satisfied.
One Shot
During Push
Check this item to output volume at the moment the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set in
[Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.
Check this item to keep buzzer beeping while the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set in [Buzzer
Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.
(
Offset

(
For the details of *1 to *2, refer to the following.
6 - 30
6.2 Touch Switch

*1 Simultaneous Press (Prohibition)

The actions of the touch switch when Simultaneous Press is set are shown in the list below.
OVERVIEW
Touch switch action

Off Preference
Press the effective touch key area of the touch switch.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
Slide the finger to the invalid touch key area of the touch switch.
At operation
: Turns ON.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
Release the touch switch.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
On Preference
Press the effective touch key area of the touch switch.
At operation
: Turns ON.
At operation
: Turns ON.
Slide to the invalid touch key area of the touch switch.
At operation
: Remains ON.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
Release the GOT screen.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
COMMON SETTING
At operation
: Turns ON.
At operation
: Turns ON.
Press an are where no object is located.
At operation
: Remains ON.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
Release the touch switch.
At operation
: Remains ON.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
Release the area where no object is located.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
Press touch switch A where Simultaneous Press is set.
<Action of A>
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Press the touch switch.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
<Action A>
At operation
: Turns ON.
At operation
: Turns ON.
At operation
: Remains ON.
At operation
: Turns OFF.
<Action of B>
Arrange touch switch A (simultaneous press prohibition is set) on

the front layer and arrange touch switch B (simultaneous press
<Action B>
At operation
: Remains OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
At operation
: Remains OFF.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
<Action of A>
At operation
: Remains OFF.
prohibition is not set) on the back layer.

And press the part where the touch switches overlap each other.
<Action of B>
At operation
: Turns ON.
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 31
ALARM
LAMP, SWITCH
Press touch switch B where Simultaneous Press is not set.
*2 Set the text to be displayed on touch switch

When text is displayed on the touch switch when [Attribute for middle of two presses] is set, the settings
must be made as follows.
Items
Description
T
Position
C
B
Vertical Alignment

Text

Offset to Frame
6 - 32
6.2 Touch Switch

1
OVERVIEW
4 Action tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Action
User ID for a key input
The set actions will be displayed in list format.

*1
Specify the ID (0 to 65535) for designating an object for which the key code is input.
Bit *2
Click on this item to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for touch switch.
Word *3
Click on this item to set the word device value change for touch switch.
Base *4
Click on this item to make the settings in order the base screen will be switched by using touch switch.
Window *5
Click on this item to make the settings in order the window screen will be switched by using touch switch.
Station No. *6
Click on this item to make the settings in order the station No. will be switched by using touch switch.
Key Code *7
Set the key code of the key for object input.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Edit
When intending to edit a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Edit button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, edit the action on that dialog box.
Delete
When intending to delete a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Delete button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, delete the action on that dialog box.
Change Order *8
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extended
Click to change the order of the action.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 33
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Change Text by
Device Value
Description
Check this item to change the text display of touch switch according to a device value.
After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
(
Device 1
The comment having the same number as the value stored in the set device is displayed.
"Text" on the "Text/Lamp" tab becomes invalid with check.
Check this item to add the value of other device to "Device 1".
Indirect
Text
*9
Device 2
(
Check this item to add the other value to "Device 1" according to the display status (ON/OFF display) of
Fixed
touch switch.
After checking, set the added value at ON/OFF of touch switch.
Preview No.
Set the comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen by the comment No.
For the details of *1 to *9, refer to the following.
*1 User ID for a key input

This user ID specifies the object to be operated when operating advanced alarm, historical trend graph or
others with the key code.
Specify the same value for the "User ID for a key input" of the touch switch and the "User ID" of each
object.
Example: Setting of touch switch and advanced alarm
Set the same value.

Touch switch setting dialog box
6 - 34
6.2 Touch Switch

Advanced alarm setting dialog box
*2 Bit
The followings can be set as the touch switch actions taken when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
OVERVIEW
Setting of [Action (Bit)] dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Description
COMMON SETTING
Items
Click on Device button to set the bit device of write destination.

Device
(
Select the corresponding function to the bit device as write destination when touched.
Set
: Turns ON bit when touched.
Alternate
: Switches bit ON/OFF when touched.
Reset
: Turns OFF bit when touched.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Momentary : Turns ON bit when touched only.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 35
ALARM
Action
*3 Word
When changing the word device value with touch switch, set as show below.
Setting of [Action (Word)] dialog box
Items
Description
Set the device of write destination.
Device
Data Size

Select the data type of the value to be set in [Type] and [Initial Value Condition].
Data Type
Signed BIN
: Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN
: Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Real
: Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
BCD
: Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Fixed
: Check this item to write a fixed value into the word device set as write destination,
Indirect
: Check this item to write the specified value into a word device, and then set the
and then set the value.

word device.
Type
When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both checked, the value (fixed value + indirect value) will be written into the
word device.
If the value becomes the condition value when [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both set in [Type], the reset value will
be written into the specified word device.
Initial Value Condition
Condition Value
: Set the value as condition for writing the reset value into the specified word
Reset Value
: Set the value written into the word device when the condition value is satisfied
device.
6 - 36
6.2 Touch Switch

*4 Base
OVERVIEW
When switching base screen with touch switch, set as shown below.
For the details of the base screen switching function, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of go to screen switch (Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Base Switching)] dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
Items
Description
Select the action of switching screen.
Back
(Previous/History)
Select this item to switch to the base screen of the specified No.
Set the base screen No. as switching destination.

Select this item to switch to the base screen of which screen No. was displayed previously.
Select this item to switch to the base screen specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or current
value of the specified device.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit
: Switches base screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Signed (BIN16)
: Switches base screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16
: Switches base screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary decimal value.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
After setting the device, click on Details button.

As the corresponding dialog box will appear, set the action on that dialog box.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Fixed
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 37
ALARM
Next Screen
COMMON SETTING
*5 Window
Make the settings in order that window screen will be displayed or switched by using the touch switch, as
shown below.
For the details of the window screen switching function, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of go to screen switch (Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Window)] dialog box
Items
Next Screen
Description
Fixed
Select this item to switch to the window screen of the specified No.
Set the window screen No. as switching destination.
Select this item to switch to the window screen specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or current
value of the specified device.
Bit
Device
: Switches window screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Signed (BIN16)
: Switches window screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16
: Switches window screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary decimal
value.

Select the window screen type to be displayed or switched to when the touch switch is touched.
Overlap Window1:
The specified window screen will be displayed/switched on the position that is set as overlap
window 1 display position on base screen.
Overlap Window2:
The specified window screen will be displayed/switched on the position that is set as overlap
Type
window 2 display position on base screen.

Superimpose Window1:
The specified window screen will be displayed/switched on the position that is set as superimpose
window screen display position on base screen.
Superimpose Window2:
The specified window screen will be displayed/switched on the position that is set as superimpose
window screen display position on base screen.
6 - 38
6.2 Touch Switch

*6 Station No.
OVERVIEW
When setting the station No. switching function with the touch switch, set the following actions.
For the details of the station No. switching function, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.7 Setting items of change station No. switch (Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Station No.)] dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Next Station
Description
Select the action of switching station No.
Host
Other
Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.

Set the network No. and station No. that will be switched to in decimal.
Select this item to switch to the station, specified by the No., based on the ON/OFF status of current value of
the specified device.
Device
Bit
: Switches base screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Signed (BIN16)
: Switches base screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16
: Switches base screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary decimal value.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
All
: Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.
Screen Type
: Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 39
ALARM
Mode
LAMP, SWITCH
*7 Key Code
When setting key code to touch switch, specify the following action.
Items
Description
Specify the key code.
Key Code
Appendix1 Key Code List)
Specify the key code type.
KeyCode Type
Numerical/Ascii Input
: Select to input the key code for numeric value/ASCII input.
Alarm/Data List Control
: Select to input the key code for data list, alarm list, alarm history or advanced
: Select to input a key code to the historical trend graph.
alarm.
For a single touch switch, only one of the key codes above can be set.
Check this item to input the numeric value or character using key code.After checking this item, input the
ASCII
numeric value/character and press Conversion to convert automatically into the key code.
Check this item to set an action by a key code.
Action
After checking the item, select and set the action. (
(1) Specifying multiple key codes

Multiple key codes can be registered to each touch switch.
By register multiple key codes, the touch switch for inputting a character string at
a time can be created.
004D : M
0049 : I
0054 : T
0053 : S
0055 : U
0042 : B
0049 : I
0053 : S
0048 : H
0049 : I
0000 : (Settle)
MITSUBISHI
Input "MITSUBISHI" at a time.
If arrange a touch switch to which multiple key codes are registered on a usercreated key window, only the first key code can be executed.
When input key code in advanced alarm, only the first key code can be executed.
(2) Character code reading/writing order
The reading/writing order of the character code set to the touch switch can be
selected according to the specification of the controller to be monitored.
Section 7.3.2 Before setting ASCII display/ASCII input
6 - 40
6.2 Touch Switch

*8 Change Order
OVERVIEW
To change the order of action, specify as shown below.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Description
Executes in the order from the action displayed at the top first.
Order of Action
Since the key code is executed first, the order of action may not be changed.
The second and later actions can be changed by the user.
Click to change the order of the selected action to one upper.
Down
Click to change the order of the selected action to one lower.
Set as Default
Click when set the order created by Up / Down operation as the new default.
Clear Default
Click when clear the order created by Up / Down operation to the initial default.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Up
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 41
ALARM
Items
*9 Indirect Text
Set Indirect Text to change the text displayed on the touch switch according to the value of device.
(1) When set "Device 1" only
The comment (Basic Comment) having the same
Device 1
10
Touch switch ON display
Touch switch OFF display
number as "Device1" is displayed without

regarding ON/OFF of touch switch.
Line A operation
Line A operation
Comment No. 10 is displayed.
(2) When set "Device 1" and "Device 2"

The comment (Basic Comment) having the same
number as the total of "Device 1" + "Device 2"
Device 1
10
Device 2
values is displayed without regarding ON/OFF of

touch switch.
Line E operation
Line E operation
Comment No. 14 is displayed.
(3) When set "Device 1" and "Fixed"

During touch switch is ON, the comment (Basic
Comment) having the same number as the total of
Device 1
10
Fixed ON
10
Device 1
Fixed OFF
"Device 1" + "Fixed ON" values is displayed.

During touch switch is OFF, the comment (Basic
Line B operation
Comment) having the same number as the total of

"Device 1" + "Fixed OFF" values is displayed.
(4) If "Device1," "Device2" and "Fixed" are specified
Line A operation
Comment No. 11 is displayed. Comment No. 10 is displayed.
Device 1
10
Device 1
10
When the touch switch is turned on, the comment
Device 2
Device 2
(basic comment) corresponding to the same
Fixed ON
Fixed OFF
number as the sum of "Device1" + "Device2" +
"Fixed ON" is displayed.

When the touch switch is turned off, the comment
(basic comment) corresponding to the same
number as the sum of "Device1" + "Device2" +
"Fixed OFF" is displayed.
6 - 42
6.2 Touch Switch

Line G operation
Line F operation
Comment number 16 is displayed. Comment number 15 is displayed.
1
OVERVIEW
5 Trigger tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Action
Trigger
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Extended
Description
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
(
Trigger Type

Ordinary
Range
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
When [ON], [OFF] or [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], click on Device button to set bit device and word
Trigger Device
device (only when [Range] is selected).

(
Word Range Trigger

Data Size
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items for the word device set as trigger.
Signed BIN
: Treats the word device value as signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN
: Treats the word device value as unsigned binary value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as floating point type real number.
LAMP, SWITCH
Select the data type of word device.

Data Type

Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Range
(
Trigger
Bit Number
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When selecting [Bit Trigger] in [Trigger Type], set the set bit device number (2 to 8) as multi bit trigger.
Multi Bit
After the setting, click on Setting button to set bit device and trigger conditions.
(
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 43
ALARM
Basic
6.2.4
Setting items of data set switch
1 Basic tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Set the device of write destination.
Device
Data Size

Select the data type of the value to be set in [Set Value].
Data Type
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.

Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Switch
Action
Fixed
: Check this item to write a fixed value into the word device set as write destination, and
Indirect
: Check this item to write the specified value into a word device, and then set the word
then set the value.

device.
Set Value
When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both checked, the value (fixed value + indirect value) will be written into the
word device.
ON
OFF
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Display
Shape
Style
(
Reverse Switch
When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area according to
Area
the background color.
Frame

6 - 44
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.4 Setting items of data set switch
1
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Switch
Background
Description
OVERVIEW
Text/Lamp
Display
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Style
Background

Category
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Layer
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 45
ALARM
Basic
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of text/lamp tab are the same with those of bit switch.
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
3 Extended tab
The setting items of extended tab are the same with those of bit switch.
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab)
6 - 46
6.2 Touch Switch

1
4 Action tab
OVERVIEW
The setting items of action tab are the same with those of bit switch.
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5 Trigger tab
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The setting items of action tab are the same with those of bit switch.
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 47
ALARM
6.2.5
Setting items of special function switch
1 Basic tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Trigger
Items
Switch Action
Description
Utility
: Displays the utility.
: Displays communication settings screen
Key window
: Displays the key window for numerical/ASCII input function.
Hard copy start *
: Starts hard copy function. (Starts to collect screen data)
Setup
: Displays setup screen
Change brightness
: Displays the change brightness screen.
Password
: Displays password screen.
Clock setting
: Displays clock setting screen.
Data maintenance
: Displays data maintenance screen
Advanced recipe *
: Displays the advanced recipe Information screen.
Logging *
: Displays the logging information.
Preservation function
: Displays the debug screen.
System monitor
: Displays the screen of system monitor function.
Network monitor *
: Displays the network monitor screen.
Ladder monitor *
: Displays the screen of ladder monitor function.
Intelligent unit monitor *
: Displays the intelligent unit monitor screen.
Servo amplifier monitor *
: Displays the servo amplifier monitor screen.
Q motion monitor *
: Displays the Q motion monitor screen.
CNC monitor *
: Displays the CNC monitor screen.
A list editor
: Displays the screen of A list editor function.
FX list editor
: Displays the screen of FX list editor function.
Test window
: Displays the window for test function.
Self check
: Displays self check screen.
Maintenance report *
: Displays maintenance report screen.
Screen clear
: Displays the screen for screen clear.

(
Section 15.2 Test Function)
* Specific to GT15

6 - 48
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.5 Setting items of special function switch
1
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
ON
OFF
OVERVIEW
Text/Lamp

(
Reverse Switch
Display
Style
Area
Frame
Switch
Background
COMMON SETTING
Shape
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background

5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Layer
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 49
ALARM
Category
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of text/lamp tab are the same with those of bit switch.
6 - 50
6.2 Touch Switch

1
OVERVIEW
3 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Extended
Trigger
Items
Security Input
The number of security input must be larger than that for security display.
(
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Security Display/
Description
Check this item to disable simultaneous press of touch switch.

Simultaneous Press *1
Then, select the touch switch operation when the simultaneous press is disabled (On Preference/OFF
Preference).
(

Japan

LAMP, SWITCH

KANJI Region
Japan
7
China (GB) -Mincho

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 51
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Set the time from the instance the touch switch is touched to start the operation, i.e., delay time in 1-second
unit.
(Minimum: 1 second, Maximum: 5 seconds.)
None
ON
: No delay time will occur.

: Select this item to carry out ON operation by pressing the touch switch during the
set time. Set the delay time.
This setting can prevent an incorrect operation from occurring.
: Select this item to carry out OFF operation in the set time after touch switch is
turned OFF.
Touch switch is ON during the set time.
After selecting, set the delay time.
: Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is touched once
and then touched for the second time within the set time.
Delay
OFF
Press Twice
Attribute for middle of two
presses
Set the display attribute for the touch switch after touched once when [Press Twice] is set in [Delay].
Shape
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library sahpes can be selected.
(
Frame
Switch
Pattern

Pattern + Switch
Example:
Background
Text *2
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background
When displaying text on the touch switch, click on Text button, set the text to be displayed and positioning
point and display position.
Style
Regular Bold
Color
Solid
Solid Raised
Select a font.
6 x 8dot font
Font

TrueType Gothic
Windows
Size

TrueType Mincho
font
(

Effects

line

Script
(
Section 2.2

6 - 52
6.2 Touch Switch

Extended
1
Trigger
Items
Description
Select the time the buzzer sound is on when the touch switch is touched.
Buzzer
Always Set
: The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Set Only Fill Requirement
: The buzzer sound is on only when the touch switch is touched and the
Always Not Set
: The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is touched.
trigger has been satisfied.
[Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.

Check this item to keep buzzer beeping while the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set in [Buzzer
During Push
Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement ] is set.

(
Offset
SPECIFICATIONS
Check this item to output volume at the moment the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set in
One Shot
Device Value
(
Check this item to add the value of other device to "Device 1".
Indirect
Device2
(
Fixed
touch switch.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Preview No.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Change Text by
Device1
COMMON SETTING

(
Set the No. of comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen.
For details of *1, refer to *9 in Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab).
For the details of *2, refer to the next page.
For details of *3, refer to *9 in Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab).
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Text *3
OVERVIEW
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 53
ALARM
Basic
*2 Setting text displayed on switch

Make the following settings when displaying text on the switch based on the attribute for middle two
presses.
Items
Description
T
Position
C
B
Vertical Alignment

Text

Offset to Frame
6 - 54
6.2 Touch Switch

1
4 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
Action setting is available when [Key window] is set in [Action] on the basic tab.
The setting items of trigger tab are the same with those of bit switch.
Refer to the following for details of the set data.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 55
ALARM
6.2.6
Setting items of go to screen switch
1 Basic tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Select the screen type of switching destination.
Screen Type
Go To Screen
Base
: Switches to base screen.
Overlap Window1
: Switches to or display overlap window1 screen.
Overlap Window2
: Switches to or display overlap window2 screen.
Superimpose Window 1
: Switches to or display superimpose window 1.
Superimpose Window 2
: Switches to or display superimpose window 2.

Select this item to switch to the base screen/window screen specified by the screen No..
After selecting, set the base/window screen of switching destination.
Fixed
Click on Browse button to display the screen image dialog box.
Make the settings while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
Back
(Previous/History)
*1
Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen No. that was displayed previously.
This item is available only when switching base screen.
As GOT can store the displayed screen No. including the current base screen, up to 10 base screens can be
switched based on the history.
6 - 56
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.6 Setting items of go to screen switch
Extended
Action
Trigger
Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by screen No., according to ON/OFF status/
current value of the specified device.
Before setting device, select data type of monitor device.
Go To
Screen
Device *2
Bit
: Switch screens according to ON/OFF status of bit device.
Word (BIN16)
: Switch screens according to 16-bit binary value of word device.
Word (BCD16)
: Switch screens according to 16-bit BCD (binary coded decimal)value to switch
2
SPECIFICATIONS
screen.
After setting device, click on Details button to set action.
ON
OFF

(
Reverse Switch
Display
Style
Area
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch
Switch
Background
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Shape
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background

Category

LAMP, SWITCH
Refer to the next page for the details of *1 to *2.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Layer
OVERVIEW
Description
COMMON SETTING
Items
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Text/Lamp
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 57
ALARM
Basic
*1 Previous
Select the hierarchy mode or history mode using the specific touching switch.
Hierarchy mode (Upper tier switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch display, i.e., switches to the base screen set as the upper tier.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1)
Base 1
2)
Base 12
Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1)

2)
3), and then the touch switch on the
base screen 12 is pressed, the base screen1, that is set as the upper tier, will be displayed.
History mode (Previous screen switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch returns to the base screen that was previously displayed.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1)
Base 1
2)
Base 12
Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1)

2)
3), and then the touch switch on the
base screen12 is pressed, the base screen23, that was previously displayed, will be displayed
again.
(After this, whenever the touch switch is pressed, the screen will return to base screen12
base
screen1.)
Hierarchy/history mode information
If GOT is powered off, the hierarchy/history information become invalid.
Therefore, once GOT is powered off, and then on again, the screen will not be
switched based on the previous hierarchy/history.
(The history information can be stored in a Memory card as instructed in (2).)
(1) Method of switching between the hierarchy mode and history mode
The hierarchy mode is set as default.
When using the "Previous" touch switch as history mode, carry out either of the following
operations.
(a) Set the history mode on GT Designer2.
Select [System Environment] from [Common] on the menu bar.
Click [Screen Switching] on the System Environment dialog box.
Set [Operation mode] to [History].
(b) Switching to history mode using the GOT internal device (GS450.b14)
Turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b14.
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application example, refer to (2) (c).
6 - 58
6.2 Touch Switch

(a) How to store the history information

Enabling the history information to be stored in a memory card on GT Designer
Select [System Environment] from [Common] on the menu bar.
Click [Screen Switching] on the System Environment dialog box.
3
COMMON SETTING
Set [Operation mode] to [History], and check [History Preservation].

Enabling the history information to be stored in a memory card using the GOT internal
device (GS450.b13)
When the history mode is set (GS450.b14 is ON), turn on the GOT internal device
GS450.b13 to enable the history information to be stored in a memory card.
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application example, refer to (2) (c).
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(b) Operation overview

Store the history information into a memory card when switching screen.
After powering on GOT, read the historical information stored in the memory card when
switching the initial screen.
150
Pow.
Run
Stop
Lad.
Password
Screen switching
action
History mode action
1)
GOT powered OFF
Run
GOT powered ON
Line ctrl status
Line A status
No.1
Pro. target vol.
150
No.2
300
Pow.
Run
Stop
1) After switching the screen,

turn power OFF.
2) After turning power ON, touch
the Previous switch of history
mode to return to the screen
before power-OFF.
3) After turning power ON, screen
can be switched to the 10th
screen before power-OFF.
Lad.
Password
3)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
2)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Pro. target vol.

300
LAMP, SWITCH
Line ctrl status
Line A status
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 59
ALARM
Run
2
SPECIFICATIONS
When history mode is used, up to 10 screens of history information can be stored into a Memory
card.
(Mount a Memory card to GOT in advance.)
By using the stored history information can return to the screen before GOT is powered off.
OVERVIEW
(2) Storing the history information in a Memory card
(c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device
Set the history mode at the first line of status observation function.
(After GOT is powered ON, it switches to the history mode instantly.)
When switching from the hierarchy mode to the history mode during monitoring, if screen
change has been done, the screen information within GOT might be lost.
In this case, it is impossible to return to the previous screens as the history.
When the history mode is used, it is recommended to switch to the history mode instantly after
powering GOT on.
Making the setting in the status
observation function of project
Setting history mode
Setting for storing

history information
in a Memory card
Set the trigger observation

cycle as [Ordinary]
(3) Cautions
(a) If the history information has been stored into a Memory card, do not change the screen
switching device value in controller while GOT is off.
As the history information while GOT is off is not saved, it is impossible to switch back to the
screen as controlled in controller.
(b) Once changed from the hierarchy mode to the history mode, the mode cannot be returned to
the hierarchy mode even by turning GS450.b14 off.
To return to the hierarchy mode, power off the GOT.
This also applies to GS450.b13.
(c) When switch from the Previous mode to the History mode using the GOT internal device
(GS450.b14), set the Previous mode for the GT Designer2.
If the History mode is set for the GT Designer2, the ON/OFF of GS450.b14 is invalid.
6 - 60
6.2 Touch Switch

Set the following actions.

Switch to the base/window screen specified by screen No. according to ON/OFF status of the
specified device.
When the current value of specified device corresponds to the set comparison expressions, switch to
the base/window screen specified by screen No.
(Up to 64 comparison expressions can be set.)
OVERVIEW
*2 Device (Switch base/window screen according to ON/OFF status/current value of specified device.)
After setting bit device, click on Details button, and set the action when switching screen on the
following dialog box.
Setting of "Details of Action" dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) When specifying bit device
COMMON SETTING
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Description
Select this item when switching to base/window screen specified by screen No. when the specified devices
No.
turns ON/OFF.
Select this item when making the settings in order the screen will not be switched when the specified device
turns ON/OFF.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 61
ALARM
Hold
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Set the screen No. of the switching destination screen.
ON/OFF
(2) When specifying word device

After setting word device, click on Details button, and set the action when switching screen on the
Setting of Details of Action dialog box
Items
Description
State

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Range

Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
No.
: Switch to base/window screen specified by screen No. when the specified device value
corresponds to the set condition.
Set the screen No. of the target screen on the Spin box.
Click on Browse button to display the screen image dialog box.
Switching Type
Set the screen, while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
Indirect
: Switch to the screen No. corresponding to specified word device when specified device
Hold
: Do not switch screen when specified device value corresponds to the set conditional
value corresponds to the set conditional expression.

expression.
6 - 62
6.2 Touch Switch

Base Screen No.10
M0
M0VP K10 D100
M0VP K10 D100
No sequence program can be used to switch base/window screen when GOT

internal devices (GB, GD, GS) are used as base/window screen switching device
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 63
ALARM
M0
COMMON SETTING
Base Screen No.1
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Sequence program also can be used to switch screen.

Create the sequence program that writes value of the device for switching each
screen No. by using the value of the screen No. to be switched.
By using this sequence program, the base/window screen can be switched without
touch switch function.
OVERVIEW
Methods of Switching Screen
Remark
(1) Methods of erasing window screen

When erasing window screen, touch the Close button, or set the switching screen
device value to "0" by using touch switch or sequence program. (Fixed: 0)
(2) Timing to switch screen
The base/window screen is switched at the moment when the touch switch is
released.
If the touch switch is kept touched for a long time, this will delay the timing when
the actual screen is displayed, and the screen may not appear as specified with
the device value.
When using status observation function to monitor switching screen device, the
value different from actually displayed screen No. may be stored, depending on
the timing of scanning.
Lift
Touch
Switch to screen
No. 20
Touch switch
Switch screen
Device: GD10
Actual displayed
screen
20
10
Base screen
No.10
10
Monitor screen switching device

(Save the value of screen switching
device GD10 according to the status
observation function)
Base screen
No.10
20
Do not switch
display screen.
Base screen
No.20
20
Switch display screen

to base screen No.20
In this case, set the script function for each screen as shown below, in order that
the screen will be displayed as specified by screen No..
Screen script
Trigger : GB100 (Ordinary ON, Rise)
Script : [w: GD87] = [w: GD10];
Make sure to set GOT special register GS386 (screen script initial action) to
"0" to execute script function after switching screen.
6 - 64
6.2 Touch Switch

1
2 Text/Lamp tab
OVERVIEW
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Extended tab
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The setting items of Extended tab are the same as the bit switch.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 65
ALARM
4 Action tab
The setting items of Action tab are the same as the bit switch.
5 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
6 - 66
6.2 Touch Switch

Setting items of change station No. switch
OVERVIEW
6.2.7
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Basic tab
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Go to Station No.
Host
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
Description
Select the action of switching station No.
Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.
Other
Set the network No. ( in [N/W No.]) and station No. ( in [Station No.])of the PLC CPU as switch destination in
the specified device.

Bit
: Switches station No. when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Signed BIN16
: Switches station No. based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16 (BCD16)
: Switches station No. based on the word device (BCD16) binary decimal value.

Mode
All
: Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.
Screen Type
: Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.7 Setting items of change station No. switch
6 - 67
ALARM
Device *1
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select this item to switch to the station specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or current value of
LAMP, SWITCH
decimal.
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
ON
OFF
Shape
Display
Reverse Switch
Area
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch.
Style
Switch
Background

Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background

Category

Layer
(
Refer to the next page for the details about *1.
The required settings for switching station No.

Enabling/Disabling station No.switching for each screen
Select [Screen]
[Properties] from the menu.
As the corresponding dialog box appears, set whether station No. will be changed
on the screen dialog box (Auxiliary tab).
Setting the station No.switching device
6 - 68
6.2 Touch Switch

Set the following actions.

Switch station No. according to the ON/OFF status of the specified bit device.
Switch to the screen specified by station No. when current value of specified word device corresponds
to the set condition. (Up to 64 conditions can be set.)
1
OVERVIEW
*1 Device (Switch station No. to be monitored according to the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified
device.)
(1) When specifying bit device
SPECIFICATIONS
After setting bit device, click on Details button to set action for switching station No. on the
Setting of "Details Of Action" dialog box
COMMON SETTING
Items
Host
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Description
Select this item to monitor the controller connected with GOT.
Other
Set the network No. (in [N/W No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as switch destination in
decimal.
Select this item when making the settings in order that the screen will not be switched when the specified
device turns ON/OFF.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Hold
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 69
ALARM
ON/OFF
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select this item to switch monitoring destination to other station.
(2) When specifying word device

After setting word device, click on Details button to set action on switching screen according to
device status.
Refer to the following for the details about setting method.
Setting of action (word) dialog box
Items
Description
State

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Range

Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Select the displaying method for switching station No. when the specified word device value corresponds to
the condition set in "Range". (
Section 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting)
Host
: Monitor the controller connected with GOT when the specified device value corresponds
Other
: Switch the monitor destination to other station when the device value corresponds to the
to the set condition.

Switching Type
set condition.Set the network No. (in [N/W No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the
PLC CPU as switch destination in decimal.
Indirect
: Switch to monitoring destination corresponding to the specified device when the specified
Hold
: Do not switch monitoring destination when the specified device value corresponds to the
device value corresponds to the set condition.

set condition.
6 - 70
6.2 Touch Switch

1
2 Text/Lamp tab
OVERVIEW
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Extended tab
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 71
ALARM
4 Action tab
5 Trigger tab
6 - 72
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.8
Setting items of key code switch
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Trigger
Items
Description
Set the key code.
Specify the key code type.

Numerical/Ascii Input
alarm.
: Select to input a key code to the historical trend graph.
For a single touch switch, only one of the key codes above can be set.
Check this item to input the numeric value or character using key code.
After checking this item, input the numeric value/character and press [Conversion] to convert automatically
into the key code.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ASCII
LAMP, SWITCH
KeyCode Type
: Select to input the key code for numeric value/ASCII input.
Alarm/Data List Control : Select to input the key code for data list, alarm list, alarm history or advanced
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.8 Setting items of key code switch
6 - 73
ALARM
Key Code
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Action
Trigger
Items
Description
Check this item to set an action by a key code.
Key Code
Action
After checking the item, select and set the action. (
ON
OFF
Shape
(
Display
Style
Reverse Switch
Area
Frame
Switch
Background
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background

Category

Layer
(
6 - 74
6.2 Touch Switch

1
2 Text/Lamp tab
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Extended tab
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 75
ALARM
4 Action tab
5 Trigger tab
6 - 76
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.9
Setting items of multi action switch
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Text/Lamp
Extended
Indirect Text
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Action
The set actions will be displayed in list format.
User ID for a key input *1
Specify the ID (0 to 65535) for designating an object for which the key code is input.
Click on this item to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for touch switch.
Word *3
Click on this item to set the word device value change for touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the currently displayed screen will be switched to the
SP Function
*4
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the window screen will be switched by using touch switch.
Station No. *6
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the station No. will be switched by using touch switch.
Key Code *7
Set the key code of the key for object input.

When intending to edit a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Edit button.
Edit
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, edit the action on that dialog box
When intending to delete a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Delete button.
Delete
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, delete the action in that dialog box
Change Order
*8
LAMP, SWITCH
Window
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the base screen will be switched by using touch switch.
*5
Click to change the order of the action.
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.9 Setting items of multi action switch
6 - 77
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base
specified extension function screen by using touch switch.
ALARM
Bit
*2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Indirect Text
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
ON
OFF
Shape
Display
Reverse Switch
Area
Frame
Style
Switch
Background
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.The selected pattern in the switch
color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example:
Pattern
Background :
Pattern
Switch
Background

Category

Layer
(
Refer to the following for the details of *1 to *8.

The explanations of *1 to *8 in Section 6.2.3
6 - 78
6.2 Touch Switch

Action tab.
1
2 Text/Lamp tab
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Extended tab
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 79
ALARM
4 Indirect text tab
Basic
Text/Lamp
Extended
Indirect Text
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
Change Text by
Device Value
(
Device1
Check this item to add the value of other device to the value of "Device 1".
Indirect
Text *1
After checking, click on the Device button and set the device where the added value will be stored.
Device2
Fixed
touch switch.
Preview No.
Set the comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen by the comment No.
Refer to the following for the details of *1.

The explanations of *9 in Section 6.2.3
6 - 80
6.2 Touch Switch

Action tab
1
5 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
6.2 Touch Switch

6 - 81
ALARM
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

-
Setting dialog box
Tab name
Setting item
Read
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Security (display)
security
4)
Security (input)
input_security
2)
Delay
delay
2)
beep
2)
Beep, one shot/while a

key is pressed
*1
Property name
active
Option
Object property

Section 16.3.2
6 - 82
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
OVERVIEW
This section provides the precautions for using touch switch.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on one screen.
Up to 1000 touch switch objects can be set.
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Action of touch switch

(a) Multiple functions can be set for one touch switch.
(Multiple functions cannot be set if extension key is set.)
Action sequence for multi setting *1
16
Key code
16
Word Set
20
Word Set
20
Set
20
Set
20
Reset
20
Reset
20
Alternate
20
Alternate
20
Momentary
20
Momentary
20
Overlap Window1
Overlap Window1
Overlap Window2
Overlap Window2
Superimpose1
Superimpose1
Superimpose2
Total
121
Superimpose2
Total
126
High
3
COMMON SETTING
Key code
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GT11
Low
*1 The action sequence (except key code) can be changed on the "Action"tab.
(3) Size of touch switch

Minimum 16 dots (Y) 16 dots (X)
(4) Valid range of touch switch

The setting unit of Touch switch shape is 1 dot. The setting unit of valid range is 16 dots.
By right-clicking the mouse on an object and setting "Enable Two Tracker Mode", the valid area of
the Touch switch shape and touch switch can be set individually.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
GT15
Screen 1
LAMP, SWITCH
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
Touch switch shape

Valid area of touch switch
(a) For the touch switch, comments created by basic comment are used.
Any comment created by comment group can not be used.
(b) Only one line of comment can be displayed as touch switch text.
When text size is larger than touch switch shape size, the comment part outside of the shape
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
6 - 83
ALARM
(5) Precautions for using comment
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(6) Precautions when setting multiple key codes

The following key codes must be set last, as the other key codes will not be executed, if set after
them.
Key Code
Description
Key Code Type
000DH
Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move the cursor
Numerical/ Ascii Input
001BH
Delete cursor
0080H
Move cursor to the right
0081H
Move cursor to the left
0082H
Move cursor upward
0083H
Move cursor downward
FFB8H
Display detail/ Move to the lower hierarchy
Alarm/ Data List Control
FFB9H
Reset the selected alarm data
FFBBH
Save alarm contents to Memory Card
* For key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.

Appendix1 Key Code List
(7) Precautions when superimposing switches

Make sure that the following switches will not overlap with other ones.
If "Simultaneous Press" is not set, the simultaneous press (On Preference) settings are applied to
them.
Therefore, they will not function when superimposed with other switches or objects that can be
touched.
Key Code
Description
FFB0H
Show cursor
FFB1H
Hide cursor
FFB2H
Move cursor upward
FFB3H
FFB4H
Display date/ time of selected data (Check)
FFB5H
Display date/ time of all data (Check all)
FFB6H
Clear the selected alarm data (Delete)
FFB8H
Display detail/ Move to the lower hierarchy
FFB9H
FFBBH
FFC2H
Move to the upper hierarchy
----
Special Function Switch
* For key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.

6 - 84
Key Code Type
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
----
1
(2) When setting delay for the touch switch

If operate the monitor screen while the touch switch is set to [Attribute for middle of two presses]
when two presses is set to touch switch, the two press does not operate normally.
(3) When two actions (either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and either of screen switching/station No.
switching) are set for a touch switch
When two actions (either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and either of screen switching/station No.
switching) are set for a touch switch, the screen or station No. is switched according to touch switch
operation and the ON/OFF of GS450.b12, as shown below.
Make sure to set GS450.b12 before first operation of the touch switch.
This can change the device status after screen switching.
GS450.b12
Reset
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
Alternate
Momentary
Word
SPECIFICATIONS
OFF
When the touch switch is released
When the touch switch is touched
6
LAMP, SWITCH
ON
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Set
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
6 - 85
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting item
COMMON SETTING
(b) GT1585-S, GT1575-S, GT1575-V, GT1575-VN, GT1572-VN, GT1565-V and GT1562-VN

Simultaneous touch of touch switches is allowed at up to two points.
This feature can be used, for example, to press two points on the GOT screen by both hands
to ensure safe operation.
If three points are touched simultaneously, touching of the third switch is disregarded.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(a) GT1595-X
With GT1595-X, do not touch the GOT screen at two or more points simultaneously.
Simultaneous touch of two or more points may cause a point that is not touched to respond.
OVERVIEW
(1) Simultaneously press is disabled.
The following example shows how to make the settings so that the status observation function will
work to automatically turn GS450.b12 ON after the GOT is powered ON.
<Example of setting the status observation function>
Make the following settings in the Status Observation screen.
The GOT internal device (device that is always ON: GS0.b4) functions as a trigger.
GS450.b12 turns ON when the trigger is ON.
With this settings, the status observation function works and GS450.b12 turns ON after the GOT is
powered ON.
For details of observation function, refer to the following.
Section 11.1 Status Observation Function
Make the settings in the
Project tab within the Status
Observation screen
Put the settings in the first line
(GS450.b12 turns ON righit
after the GOT is powerd ON)
Set [Observe Cycle] to
"Ordinary"
6 - 86
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
M100
The screen changes when
the touch switch is released.
Base screen 2
Base screen 1
M100
M100 turns OFF when the
touch switch is touched again.
M100
The screen changes when
the touch switch is released.
(b) Action when GS450.b12 is OFF.

The screen or station No. changes simultaneously when the specified bit device has turned
ON/OFF/ON OFF.
The GOT operates based on the value before the bit Set/Reset/Alternate is executed.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Base screen 2
M100
M100
M100 turns OFF and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100:
ON) before the bit Alternate is executed.)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
M100
M100
M100 turns ON and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100:
OFF) before the bit Alternate is executed.)
Base screen 1
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Base screen 1
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base screen 50
3
COMMON SETTING
M100
M100 turns ON when
the touch switch is touched.
Base screen 2
6.2 Touch Switch

6.2.10 Precautions
6 - 87
ALARM
Base screen 50
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Action when GS450.b12 is ON.

The screen or station No. changes simultaneously when the specified bit device has turned
ON/OFF/ON OFF.
The GOT operates based on the value after the bit Set/Reset/Alternate is executed.
OVERVIEW
Example: When multiple actions including followings are set for a touch switch.
Bit Alternate
: M100
Screen switching
: Screen changes to base screen 2 when M100 turns ON.
Screen switching
: Screen changes to base screen 1 when M100 turns OFF.
7.
NUMERICAL/CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
1 Numerical display
Section 7.1.3 Setting items of numerical display)
This function allows the data saved in PLC CPU devices to be displayed as numeric values on GOT.
D100
D100
349
D100=349
722
D100=722
2 Numerical input
Section 7.1.4 Setting items of numerical input)
This function enables writing any value from GOT to controller device.
Use input keys provided in the default key window or touch switches assigned with key codes.
Using touch switches on screen to input value
1234
123
1 2 3 4 5 C AC
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C
1 2 3 4 5 C AC
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C
Using a key window to input value

123
1234
*1 For key window types and operation, refer to the following.

7-1
Example
Displays numeric values in various patterns
Displays/Inputs numeric value with decimal points

Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Basic tab
125
24.4
Changes display /background color depending on the
Uses numerical display/numerical input in combination
value
with the lever display function

Setting on Case tab
98
COMMON SETTING
25
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
125
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
58
Present temperature
7-2
ALARM
Present temperature
Section 10.2 Level
SPECIFICATIONS
321
7.1.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
For numerical display/numerical input, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in
this section.
(1) Functions relevant to numerical display/numerical input only
Relevant to numerical display/numerical input only.
(2) Functions relevant to numerical display/numerical input and others

Input range check during numerical value input
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
[Check the input range while
inputting the numerical value]
Displaying input range for numeric value Input

When a numeric value out of input range is input, a message appears showing the input
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
range.
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
Setting items
[Display the input range when
inputs the out of range in
numerical input]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen

100
When condition fail

100
Setting items
100
Cursor displayed
Key window erased

100
Cursor and key

window displayed
7-3

[Cursor position]
Object erased
Methods of displaying cursor input area
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
1
OVERVIEW
4567
Setting items
4567
[Cursor input area]
All characters (except one)

are reversed, and only one
character blinks.

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
SPECIFICATIONS
4567
RET key is pressed.
3
100
Setting items


time]

Setting for
each project
4
Setting for
each screen
100
100
Setting items
Press the RET key

RET key is pressed]

Setting for
each project
COMMON SETTING
100
Setting for
each screen
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
100
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
100
6
Change to the
following value
Setting items

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Cancel
7-4
ALARM
OK
LAMP, SWITCH
3000
Clearing the system information when the cursor is deleted

When the cursor is deleted, the system information such as cursor display object ID and
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
cursor display user ID can be cleared.

100
100
Setting items

The current cursor
display user ID.

system information is cleared]
500

If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input order can be set.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
100
100
Setting items
Input definition
The cursor is moved


100
Setting for
each screen
100

7-5
Setting for
each project

Setting items
[Move key window]
1
OVERVIEW

(Write device)
Notifies the value before changed by the numeric value
Notifies the value determined by the numeric value input
input function (32 bits).
function (32 bits).
D100 1254
D100 2256
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
348 B
348
The changed value is notified.
The value before changed is notified.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(Write device)
3
COMMON SETTING
Numeric Value Error Detection Signal

Notifies that the value out of range is stored.
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The value out of range is input.

(Write device)
Notifies the user ID of the determined numeric value
348 B
348
D100
A 1254 A 1254
B
The numerical value

input is determined.
The object ID on which the cursor was positioned
348 B
348
Numeric value input (user ID: 2) determined
The user ID on which the cursor was positioned
at the previous time
(Write device)
(Write device)
Notifies the object ID of the object on which the cursor
Notifies the user ID of the object on which the cursor was
was positioned at the previous time.
positioned at the previous time.
A 1254
B 34 8
Object ID on which the cursor was positioned

D100
7
A 1254
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
D100 10021
6
LAMP, SWITCH
A 1254 A 1254
B
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
input.
B 34 8
User ID on which the cursor was positioned


7-6
ALARM
Key Code Input
(Write device)

switch.
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
A B C
The key code

is notified
Key Code Read Complete Signal
Key window
on the screen
Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal
Turns off the key input signal.
Turns off the numeric value input signal can be turned

off.
A 1254
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254
B 348
Key input signal OFF
Numeric input signal OFF
The object ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
The user ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
(Write device)
(Write device)
The ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned
Notifies the user ID of the object on which the cursor is
currently can be notified.
positioned currently.
D100
D100 10021
A 1254
A 125 4
B 34 8
Object ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
Notifies that the cursor is being displayed by the
Input disabled
100
A 1254 A 1254
B
The cursor is on the screen
Key Input Signal

A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B

348
B 348
User ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
numeric/ASCII value input.
7-7
A 1254
B 348
348 B
348
1

OVERVIEW

Numeric Input Range Check Setting Signal
Checks the input range during numerical value input.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Input data error,

out of range
-32768 <= $W <= 32767
3
Cursor Deleted System Information Clear Setting
Signal

Displays the dialog for confirming input data when the
When the cursor disappears, "0" is stored at the "Current
RTN key is pressed. (Specific to numeric value input or
cursor position" of the system information even during
ASCII input)
ASCII input.
D100
Change to the
following value
A ABCD A BBAD
B 348 B 348
3000
OK
Cancel
4 Key window (
Section 4.5 Key Window)

Display value during input
Check this option when displaying the value being input on the key window.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When the cursor disappears

during ASCII input, "0" is stored.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTING
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
6
LAMP, SWITCH
100
100
100
The value being input is displayed during key input.
Display input function range

Check this option when displaying the applicable data input range on the key window.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
-32768<=INPUT<=32767
100
100
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7-8
ALARM
The value of the appicable data input range is

displayed during key input.

Using User-created Window
Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and ASCII input.
100
100
The user-created key window is displayed during key input.
7-9

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
[Numerical Display]/
Select [Object]
[Numerical Input]
[Numerical Display]/[Numerical Input] from the menu.
2 Clicking at a desired position completes the numerical display/numerical input setting.

(After the arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double-clicking on the setting area of the numerical display/numerical input displays the setting dialog
box. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Click on
OVERVIEW
Easy setting method

The adjusting method when shape is set for object.

Adjust the display position of object and the shape in
[Enable Two Tracker Mode].
D10
Object outline frame

Shape
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

COMMON SETTING

7 - 10
ALARM
7.1.2
7.1.3
Setting items of numerical display
1 Basic tab
Specify the device, view format and frame format.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Type
Description
Select the function to be used (Numerical display/Numerical input).
Device
Device
Data Size

Select the displayed data format of a monitored device.
View
Format
Format
Signed (Unsigned) decimal
: The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal
:The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Octal
:The value is displayed in octal.
Binary
:The value is displayed in binary.
Real
:The value is displayed in real number.
Example:GOT display examples

Signed decimal
: -12623
Binary
: 0011000101001111
Unsigned decimal
: 12623
Octal
: 30517
Real
: 1262.3
Hexadecimal
: 314F
The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format (unsigned decimal,
BCD, real), change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab.
Color
Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
7 - 11

7.1.3 Setting items of numerical display
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
OVERVIEW
Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.

Available number of digits is different depending on the [Format] setting.
: 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Octal
: 1 to 6 digits
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
2
SPECIFICATIONS

Digits
When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits after the decimal points (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
At the setting "0", the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Example: Device value: 6.57

Number of digits after decimal point: 1
Rounded off
Decimal Point
6.6
COMMON SETTING
6.57
6.57
4
Select a font for the numerical value.
Size
Format
8dot
12-dot high quality Standard
12-dot standard
16-dot standard
TrueType Gothic
(
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity)
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/figure frame

Blink
Reverse
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No
Check this item when reversing the numeric character.

Check this item to display the device value of integer (data format other than real number) as a value with
decimal point.
The device value is displayed at the number of digits set in "Decimal Point".
Adjust Decimal
0.20
LAMP, SWITCH
Number of digits after

decimal point: 3
controller device
value: 20
0.02
Point Range
0.20 is displayed on GOT.
The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:

Display range
: $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the specified device
Data operation
: $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value
value
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Example: Number of digits after

decimal point: 2
controller device
value: 20

7 - 12
ALARM
View
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Font
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set a shape for the object.
When [None] is selected, no shape will be displayed.
Shape
By clicking on the Others button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Select the frame color/plate color
Frame
Plate
Plate

(
Category
Layer
(
7 - 13

1
2 Extended tab
OVERVIEW
Specify the data type, alignment, security, offset, blink scope and display mode.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Object Script
Items
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats the word device value as a BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as a real number.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select the data type of the device to be displayed.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)

Select the position to display the numeric value.
Left
Center
Right
Alignment
150
150
When [Right] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value is needed, check
this item.
Example (In the case of five digits)

Zero suppressed
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Zero not suppressed

Fill with Zeros
0005
(

7 - 14
ALARM
Security
LAMP, SWITCH
150
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
(
Offset

(
Select a blink area.

Blink Scope
Data only
: Makes the numerical area blink.
Data and Plate
: Makes the numerical area and plate blink.
Select a desired display mode when displaying a numeric value with the level display overlapped.
Transparent :Displays the numeric value on the level display.
XOR
:In order to identify the level and numeric easily, the

numeric character is displayed in color different
Display Mode
98
from the level color based on XOR. This is valid

when GOT is Monochrome type.
(
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available
for XOR)
7 - 15
[Transparent]

[XOR]
20
50
1
3 Case tab
OVERVIEW
The attribute can be changed on this setting tab depending on the device status.
Place a check mark in "Extended Functions" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
LAMP, SWITCH
New State

Select a condition for display change depending on the state.

Bit
: Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.Then, set the bit
device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Device
(
Word
: Select this to change the display based on a word device value.Then, set a conditional
expression for the word device value in [Range].
Range
Numerical Color
Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Plate Color
Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Extended

7 - 16
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value.
State*1
Blink
Reverse
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Check this item to reverse numeric display.
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
Example: Monitor device
: D100
Data view format
: Signed decimal with 16-bit data size
Priority level for
State No.
overlapped setting
High
Range
Color
M10 ON
Red (Blink)
200<=$V<=300
Blue
1000<=$V
Yellow (Reverse)
Normal case
Low
Green
(State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value.

When M10 is ON, the numeric value will be displayed in red
(Blink).
150
State 1
When the device value is within a range of 200 to 300

(200<=$V<= 300), the numeric value will be displayed in blue.
State 2
200
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$V), the

numeric value will be displayed in yellow (Reverse).
State 3
3000
When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the

numeric value will be displayed in green.
Normal Case
(State 0)
7 - 17

150
1
Set conditions for displaying the object.
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
4 Trigger tab
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select trigger by which the object is displayed.
Trigger Device
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 s) in 1-second unit.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Specify the device used for the trigger.

LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Type
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.

Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range

Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of the word device.
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Click on the Exp. button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for the
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
trigger.
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
Initial Display
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be displayed only at
the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be held even
Hold Display
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Extended
though the conditions are not satisfied.

If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.

7 - 18
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5 Data operation tab

dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
7 - 19
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

1
6 Object script tab
Section 16.3.6
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

:Execution is possible for the object property.
:Execution is not possible for the object property.
- :Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Option
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Blink
blink
5)
Reverse
highlight
5)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
Alignment
arrange
3)
Security
security
4)
Blink Scope
blink
5)
Display Mode
draw_mode
3)

Section 16.3.2

7 - 20
ALARM
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting item
LAMP, SWITCH
Tab name
Object property
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Setting dialog box
7.1.4
Setting items of numerical input
1 Basic tab
Specify the device, view format and frame format.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Type
Description
Select the function to be used (Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
Device
Set a word device to which the value is written. (
Data Size
Device
Select the displayed format of a write device value.
View
Format
Format
: The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal
: The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Octal
: The value is displayed in octal.
Binary
: The value is displayed in binary.
Real
: The value is displayed in real number.
Example:
Example of GOT display

Signed decimal
: -12623
Binary
: 0011000101001111
Unsigned decimal
: 12623
Octal
: 30517
Real
: 1262.3
Hexadecimal
: 314F
The default of a written data format is signed BIN. To write by the other data format (unsigned decimal, BCD,
real), change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab.
Color
Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
7 - 21

7.1.4 Setting items of numerical input
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
OVERVIEW
Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.

Available number of digits is different depending on the Format setting.
Signed/ Unsigned decimal
: 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Octal
: 1 to 6 digits
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Digits
When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits after the decimal points (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
At the setting "0", the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Example: Device value: 6.57

Number of digits after decimal point: 1
3
COMMON SETTING
Rounded off
Decimal Point
6.57
6.6
6.57
Size
8dot
12-dot standard
16-dot standard
TrueType Gothic
(
Format
Select the blink pattern of the numeric value/figure frame
Reverse
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No
Blink
Check this item when reversing the numeric character.

Check this item to display the device value of integer (data format other than real number) as a value with
decimal point.
Example: Number of digits after

decimal point: 2
controller device
value: 20
Number of digits after

decimal point: 3
controller device
value: 20
0.20
Adjust Decimal
LAMP, SWITCH
The device value is displayed at the number of digits set in "Decimal Point".
0.02
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Point Range
The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:

Input range
:$W (Input value), value of the specified device
Data operation
:<Monitor expression>
$$ (Value of monitor device), value of specified

value
<Write operation expression>
$W (Input value)

7 - 22
ALARM
View
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Select a font for the numerical value.

Font
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Frame
Plate
Plate

Category
Layer
(
7 - 23

1
Specify the data type, alignment, security, offset, write, write check, user ID, move destination ID and
blink scope.
OVERVIEW
2 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the data type of the device to be displayed or input.
Data Type

COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real
Select the position to display the numeric value.

Left
Center
Right
Alignment
150
150
150
When [Right] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value is needed, check
this item.
Example (In the case of five digits)
Zero not suppressed
Zero suppressed
Security
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Fill with Zeros
0005
Be sure to set a larger value to "Security (Input)" than "Security (Display)".
(
LAMP, SWITCH
Extended

7 - 24
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
(
Offset

(
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.

Blink Scope
Data only
: Makes the numerical area blink.
Data and Plate
: Makes the numerical area and plate blink.
Check this item when writing the value input in [Numerical Input] to devices.
When the data operation has been set, the data before operation can be saved.
Write
Then, click on the Device button to set the device.

After completion of numerical input, check this item when turning ON a bit device.
After checking, click on the Device button and set the device.
When setting is completed, set the device operation.
ON
Write Check
: When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on.
ON to OFF : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on, and it will be turned off
after a certain period of time has elapsed.
It is very convenient for the case that handshake on the controller side is difficult.
After selecting, set the time for which the bit device is on (0.5 to 3 seconds).
Check this item when setting user ID No. (1 to 65535).
Setting a user ID allows the following functions.
The cursor position at screen switching can be determined.
User ID*1 *2 *3
The numerical input function while the cursor is shown can be checked.
(
When numerical input is completed, check this item to move the cursor for the numerical input of the
specified user ID No.
After checking, set the user ID No. to move the cursor for the next numerical input.
Move Destination
ID *2
In addition to the setting above, set the following items.

Click the Screen Properties button to set [Defined key action] to [User ID order].
Uncheck the [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] on the [Auxiliary Settings]
selected by [Common]
For the details of *1 to *3, refer to the next page.
7 - 25

*1 User ID
refer to the following).
(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)

When a input value is entered using the numerical input function, the user ID is written to "Numeric
Value Input Number" in "System Information" and "Numeric Value Input Signal" turns on.
When clearing the user ID written to "Numeric Value Input Number" or turning off "Numeric Value
Input Signal", turn on "Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal".
(After clearing, turn off the numeric value input read complete signal. If the signal remains ON,
storing the user ID or turning on the bit device cannot be done even if the numerical value has been
input.)
OVERVIEW
Settings) and confirm timing of numerical input to be stored into devices (
Section 4.4 Auxiliary
2
SPECIFICATIONS
The user ID setting allows the cursor position setting for screen switching (
Key input of numeric value
COMMON SETTING
3
Confirm
ON
Numeric value input signal
System signal 2-1. b4
OFF
Numeric value input number
Stores user ID number
Stores "0"
ON
Numeric value input read
complete signal
System signal 2-1.b4 Numeric value input signal
: Turn on when a value is entered using the numerical input

function.
System signal 1-1.b4 Numeric value read complete signal : When this signal turns on, the numeric value input signal
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
OFF
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(System signal 2-1.b4) turns off.

*2 Relationship between user ID and move destination ID
The move destination ID number indicates the user ID number of the numerical input function to which the
cursor moves next.
Example: Cursor movement by move destination ID
1)
User ID: 1
B
2)
User ID
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
10
Numerical input
destination ID
User ID: 2
4)
0
User ID: 3
3)
0
User ID:4

7 - 26
ALARM
Move
6
LAMP, SWITCH
For the setting method of the "System Information", refer to the following.
*3 Setting the user ID

To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully
so that the user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
When the same user ID are set for all
When different user IDs are set for each object
If more than one object having the same user ID
The cursor moves properly with the user ID
are identified on the screen (including the Set
when the Set Overlay Screen function or
Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window), the
superimposed window is used.
cursor may not move correctly with the user ID.
Base screen 1
Base screen 1
Window screen 1
Window screen 1
2
1 to 4 : User ID
7 - 27
128
1 to 2 : User ID

128
1
3 Case tab
OVERVIEW
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
Place a check mark in "Extended Functions" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extended
Check this item when setting the display range and the input range separately.
Set Display Range and Input
Range Separately
*1
After checking, click on the Display or Input button to set each range.
Display
: Set condition and attribute for the numerical display.
Input
: Set input range for the numerical input function.
State*2
New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down

NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select State
LAMP, SWITCH
Select a condition for display change depending on the state.

Bit
: Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.
Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Device
(
Word
: Select this to change the display based on a word device value.

Then, set a conditional expression for the word device value in [Range].
Range
Numerical Color
Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Plate Color

7 - 28
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric display.
Blink
State
Reverse
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Check this item to reverse numeric display.
For the details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.
*1 Set Display Range and Input Range Separately

By setting display range and input range separately, the attribute can be changed depending on the
displayed value and the input exceeding the set range can be restricted.
(1) When displaying

The attributes (Numerical color/Background color/Reverse display/Blink) can be changed
depending on the display value.
125
Range
Numerical color
Plate color
Blink
759
: 0<=$W<=500
: Blue
: White
: None
Range
Numerical color
Plate color
Blink
1250
: 510<=$W<=1000
: Green
: Red
: None
Range
Numerical color
Plate color
Blink
: 1000<=$W
: Green
: Red
: Set
(2) When inputting

When an input exceeds the set range, a message will be displayed and the numerical input will be
restricted.
338
Range : 0<=$W<=1000
Value from 0 to 1000
can be input.
7 - 29

Input of the data exceeding

the range is not available
0 <= $W <= 1000
OK
Input of a value exceeding the

range (0 to 1000) is not available.
Example: Monitor device : D100
Data view format : Signed decimal with 16-bit data size
Range
200<=$W<=300
Blue
1000<=$W
Yellow (Reverse)
$W<=0
Red (Blink)
----
Green
Normal case
(State 0)
SPECIFICATIONS
State No.
High
Low
2
Color

When the device value is 200 to 300 (200<=$W<= 300),
numeric value will be displayed in blue.
State 1
COMMON SETTING
Priority level for

overlapped setting
OVERVIEW
*2 State
200
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$W), the
numeric value will be displayed in yellow (reverse).
State 2
3000
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When the device value is 0 or less ($W<= 0), the numeric

value will be displayed in red (blink).
State 3
-200
When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the
numeric value will be displayed in green.

Normal case
150
LAMP, SWITCH
(State 0)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7 - 30
ALARM
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the trigger type for displaying the object.
Trigger Type*1
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Range
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Bit Trigger

Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of the word device.
Click on the Exp.
button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
trigger.
*1 Cursor display when condition fails in numerical input

For cursor display when the condition fails in numerical input, refer to the following.
7 - 31

1
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
Data Operation
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit Shift
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Bit Mask
Monitor
Click on this and set the operational expression for monitoring device.
Write
Click on this and set the operational expression for writing to device.

7 - 32
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6 Object script tab

(1) Input object script
For details of settings made on the input object script tab, refer to the following
Section 16.3.6
(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Option
*1
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Blink
blink
5)
Reverse
highlight
5)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
Alignment
arrange
3)
Security Display
security
4)
Security Input
input_security
2)
Blink Scope
blink
5)

Section 16.3.2
7 - 33
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name

(2) Display object script

For details of settings made on the display object script tab, refer to the following
OVERVIEW
Section 16.3.6
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Option
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Blink
blink
5)
Reverse
highlight
5)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
Alignment
arrange
3)
Security Display
security
4)
Blink Scope
blink
5)
Section 16.3.2

7 - 34
ALARM
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting item
LAMP, SWITCH
Tab name
Object property
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Setting dialog box
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

7.1.5
Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the numerical display/numerical input function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on 1 screen
Number of numerical display objects: 1000
Number of numerical input objects : 1000
(2) When overlaying numerical display with level display
Arrange the numerical display on the same layer as the level display.
When displaying numerical values with the level display overlapped, refer to the level cautions.
Section 10.2 Level
(3) Numerical input arrange position
Depending on the arranged position of the numerical input, there are cases the input operation is
not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the
numerical input by the data check function of GT Designer2.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.3
Checking Project Data for Errors)

If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1 Change the grid of 16 dots pitch in the scneen of GT Designer2.
2 Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer2
1234
Input operation is not possible
unless the center point of 16-dot grids
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.
7 - 35

7.1.5 Precautions
1234
Arrange an object so that it includes the
center point of 16-dot grids.
1
(1) When numerical input is set on window screen
When the numeric input objects are simultaneously displayed on the base screen and overlap
window, the input cursor that is displayed by other than touch operation (key window display by
special function switch, etc.) will appear on the overlap window.
OVERVIEW
To display the cursor on the numerical input of the base screen, touch the numerical input of the
base screen.
(2) When special function switch (key window) is set

If a key window is displayed using a special function switch when an input cursor is not displayed at
a numerical input, the key window will be displayed as follows;
(a) For default key window
A default key window for hexadecimal input will be displayed.
3
COMMON SETTING
0
0
(b) For user-created key window

The screen set at [DEC key sheet No.] will be displayed.
When [DEC key sheet No.] is not set (or set to "0"), a default key window for hexadecimal input
will be displayed.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D10 150
D10 20 0
D30
D40
SPECIFICATIONS
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(3) When blink is set

The input cursor will stop blinking temporarily when it is displayed.
(4) When [ON and OFF after] is set in write check

(a) Don't turn on twenty-one devices above simultaneously.
Or not, the 22nd device or later cannot be turned off automatically.
Setting example:Set the operation condition to trigger type "OFF" and the device "M10"
At inputting before turning OFF, the write completed device will not turn OFF
at normal timing.
LAMP, SWITCH
(b) At using the same write completed device for multiple numerical inputs, set the numerical input
to not be able to input the value while the write completed device is ON.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7.1.5 Precautions
7 - 36
ALARM
Example: Write completed device: M10 (which turns OFF in 3 seconds after it turned ON)
Numerical input A
Numerical input B
400
100
OFF timing of numerical input B
Write completed
device (M10)
Actual OFF timing
ON
OFF
3 seconds
(c) The write completed device will not turn OFF if screen switching (including switching to the
utility) occurs while the write completed device is ON. It keeps ON for the specified period of
time.
3 When executing the range check during numerical value input

The precautions when executing the range check during numerical value input are provided below.
(
(1) Precautions for screen design

(a) When more than two state types are set, the range check will be disabled during numerical
value input. The check will be executed when the input is determined.
(b) Use any of the following patterns to set the range formula for state.
If the pattern other than below is used to set the range formula, the range check will be
executed when the input is determined.
$W<A, $W<=A
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
A : Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
A<$W<B, A<=$W<B, A<$W<=B, A<=$W<=B
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
A : Fixed value or other device
B : Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
(c) When input range and display range are set separately
Only the input range will be checked.
(2) Precautions for operation

(a) When inputting negative value (-)
Enter the minus sign (-), and then the numerical value.
(b) The lower limit value check
The lower limit value check is executed when the input is determined.
(c) Comparison with device
When the value of the comparison target device cannot be read, a message will appear.
(d) Cursor movement
When cursor is moved within the object during numerical value input, the range check will not
be executed during input.
The range check will be executed when the input is determined.
To enable the range check during input, hide the cursor (after the numerical input mode is
released) and input a numerical value again.
7 - 37

7.1.5 Precautions
Example) GT11
Do you want to change
to the following value?
12345678901234567890123 4567890
The 24th digits or later
are not displayed.
3
COMMON SETTING
Cancel
(2) Message position

The message position will be different depending on the key window type.
(a) When using default key window
The message is displayed on the key window.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(b) When using user-created key window or no key window

The message is displayed on the center of the screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7.1.5 Precautions
7 - 38
ALARM
OK
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Number of digits for numeric value available for message

Depending on GOT types, the numeric value digits available for display is different.
The digits after the following will not be displayed on the message. Make sure that the digits of the
input value are within the following.
For GT15: 35 digits
For GT11: 23 digits
OVERVIEW
4 Precautions for input confirmation message display
7.2 Data List
This section explains the data list function that displays multiple word device values in list form.
With this function, line No. and ruled lines of the list are displayed automatically.
No.
No.
Line
Plan Output Fault
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
Line
Plan Output Fault
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
D10:1000
D11:800
D12: 2
D20: 500
D21:250
D22: 0
D30: 800
D31:600
D32: 1
D40: 900
D41:850
D42: 3
Example:
Sort lines according to the values of the prior setting
item.
Display the list with statistics graph on the same screen
Set on Basic tab

No.
2
3
Line
Plan Output Fault
Line 2
Line 3
500
800
250
600
No.
Line
Plan Output Fault
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
0
1
Line 1
1000
800
Line 4
900
850
The lines will be displayed in ascending order of

"Output" values.
Remark
Section 10.6 Statistics Graph
Device status can be displayed effectively.
Comments displayed by using data list

Comments must be registered in advance for displaying in data list.
7 - 39
7.2 Data List
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For data list, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to data list and others

(1) Functions relevant to Data List and others.

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
COMMON SETTING
Auxiliary
setting
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
Setting items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
objects within GOT]
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Coordinates error
7.2 Data List

7 - 40
ALARM
7.2.1
7.2.2
Required knowledge for data list setting
1 Methods of setting data list

The basic function of data list can be set on the following
to
tab screen in order.
1 Basic tab
Set the number of columns and lines for data list.
Fixed Comment
text
column
Line
No.
Data column
Plan
Output
Fault
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
Label
(Rows)
Comment is
displayed.
Setting item name is displayed.
Number of lines (rows, displayed rows)
Device value is
displayed.
2 List tab
Set devices, comments, label color or similar on each dialog box.
Set devices, comments,
label color to be displayed
in lines.
Set the view format of

comment columns.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Set the view format of data

columns.
Continuous : Set continuous comments and devices.

Set the head comment and device in 1).
Random
: Set comments and continuous devices for each line.
Set comments and the head device in 1) to 4).
7 - 41
7.2 Data List

7.2.2 Required knowledge for data list setting
1
2 Data list function
OVERVIEW
(1) Scroll function

In data list, the number of screen display lines (display rows) can be set separately from the
number of corresponding set lines (rows).
When scroll up/scroll down key is set, data list can be scrolled up and down
Lines displayed on screen

Lines monitored actually
Plan
Output
Line 1
1000
Line 2
500
Fault
No.
800
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
Scroll up
Display
rows: 4 lines
Scroll down
Create scroll keys by setting key code in touch switch.

Scroll up: 00F2H
Scroll down: 00F3H
Line
Plan
Output
Line 5
1000
900
Line 6
1000
950
Line 7
800
300
Line 8
900
700
Scroll up
Plan
Output
Fault
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
Line 5
1000
900
Line 6
1000
950
Line 7
800
300
Line 8
900
700
Rows:
8 lines
Fault
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
No.
Line
SPECIFICATIONS
Line
COMMON SETTING
No.
Scroll down
(2) Sort function

Lines can be sorted based on device status of specified columns (ascending/descending order of
device value).
Example: Sort the lines in descending order of device values of the third column.
Make the settings on basic tab as follows:
Rows
: 8 lines
Sort
: Desending
Display rows : 4 lines
Sort/Attribute column : 3 columns
The lines will be sorted in descending order of "Output" values.
Lines not
displayed
Plan
Output
Fault
No.
Line
Plan
Line 1
1000
800
Line 2
500
250
Line 3
800
600
Line 4
900
850
Line 5
1000
Line 6
1000
Line 7
Line 8
Output
Line 6
1000
950
Line 5
1000
900
Line 4
900
850
Line 1
1000
800
900
Line 8
900
700
950
Line 3
800
600
800
300
Line 7
800
300
900
700
Line 2
500
250
Fault
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display
rows
Line
7.2 Data List

7.2.2 Required knowledge for data list setting
7 - 42
ALARM
No.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Touch scroll up/scroll down key to switch the screen

display by one screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7.2.3

Click on
[Data List]
Select [Object]
[Data List] from the menu.
2 Click on the data list display position to complete the data list arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged data list to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference
to the following explanation.
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape
7 - 43
7.2 Data List

Setting items
1 Basic tab
This tab screen is used to set the device value to be monitored and the list form to display a comment.
OVERVIEW
7.2.4
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Case
Extended
Trigger
Rows
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items
Set the number of lines for monitoring devices using data list (1 to 128).
Set the number of lines to be displayed on screen (1 to 27).
Display Rows
The lines out of the screen can be displayed with scroll up/scroll down key.
(
Columns
Label
Section 7.2.2 Required knowledge for data list setting)
Set the number of columns to be displayed (2 to 6).

Check this item to display a label.
After check, set number of label digits (2 to 6). (one digit for one character)
Set the text (title, comment, numeric value) to be displayed and ruled line space of the list (0 to 32 dots).
Space
No.
List Form
Result
Output
LAMP, SWITCH
List
7
Font
16 dot standard font
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select a font.
12 dot high quality Mincho
Size
Set the method of arranging (sort) lines.

Sort
No. order
: Display in line number column order.
Ascending
: Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending
: Arrange from large value to small value.
Without sort
: Not sort.
8
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 44
ALARM
Basic
Basic
List
Case
Extended
Trigger
Items
List Form
Sort/Attr Column
Description
Set the sort basis column.
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Set the color for each part of the list.
Title
(The color of each title)
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Title
Text
Ruled Line
Reverse
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Output
25
30
32
41
38
Fault
3
3
5
3
0
Text
Plate
Ruled Line
Check this item to reverse text.
Category
Layer
(
7 - 45
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
1
Click on Column button and Row button on this dialog box to display the corresponding setting dialog
box. Then set devices and comments on the dialog box.
For the settings on each setting dialog box, refer to the following explanation (1) to (3).
(1) Edit rows dialog box
Make the settings to be displayed in rows.
(Device, comment, label)
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Edit columns dialog box (comment column)

Set the display attribute of comment column.
3
COMMON SETTING
(3) Edit rows (Data column) dialog box

Set the display attribute of data column.
Title, device and comment can be input directly.
Title
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment No.
OVERVIEW
2 List tab
Device
List
Extended
Case
Trigger
Items
Description
Select a device setting method.
Continuous : Set devices of continuous No. through all rows.

: Set devices of continuous No. in each row.
Device No.
Set initial device

Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4

1
D10
D11
D12
2
D13
D14
D15
3
D16
D17
D18
When "Random" is set

LAMP, SWITCH
Random
Example: When "Continuous" is set
Set initial device in each row

Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4

1
D10
D11
D12
2
D20
D21
D22
3
D30
D31
D32
Comment No.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select a comment setting method.

Continuous : Set comments of continuous No. through all rows.
Random
: Set comments of continuous No. in each row.
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 46
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Edit Rows dialog box

This dialog box is used to set the device to be monitored, comment to be displayed and label
(display attribute).
Items
Description
Device
Comment No.
Set the comment No. to be displayed in the selected line.

Select label pattern/label foreground/label background.
Label Pattern
The pattern is displayed in color of the label foreground on the label background.
Example:
Label Foreground
Label Pattern + Label Foreground
Label Pattern
:
Label Foreground :
Label Background :
Label Background
Label Background
(2) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box

This dialog box is used to set the number of comment characters, the title and title color of the
column.
Items
7 - 47
Description
Digits
Set number of comment characters from 1 to 80 (80 characters).
Title
Input the title of comment column.
Color
Select the title color.
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
(3) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box
OVERVIEW
(a) View format tab

This tab is used to set the number of digits for device value, view format/ data type of the
device to be monitored, title and title color of the column.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Data Operation
Description
Select the view format of the monitor device value.
Unsigned decimal
: Displays the value in unsigned decimal.
Hexadecimal
: Displays value in hexadecimal.
Octal
: Displays value in octal.
Binary
: Displays value in binary.
Real
: Displays the value in floating point type real number.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
: Displays the value in signed decimal.
Select the position based on the width of data column.

Alignment
Fill with Zeros
Left
: Align left.
Center
: Align center.
Right
: Align right.
When [Right Alignment] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value is
needed, check this item.
Set the number of digits for the device value to be displayed in data column.
Available number of digits is different depending on the [Format] setting.
Digits
Decimal Point
: 1 to 13 digits (includes minus (-))
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Octal
: 1 to 6 digits
LAMP, SWITCH
Format
Signed decimal
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (includes minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits (1 to 32) for the decimal part.
(Contenued to next page)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Items
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 48
ALARM
Format
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Format
Data Operation
Items
Description
Select the data type of word device to be monitored.
After selecting, set the data size (16 bit, 32 bit).
Data Type
Signed BIN
: Treats word device value as signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN
: Treats word device value as unsigned binary value.
BCD
Real

7 - 49
Title
Input the title of data column.
Color
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
(b) Data Operation tab

This tab is used to set the expression to operate the device value and display the results.
For details of data operation, refer to the following.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Data Operation
Items
Description
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

LAMP, SWITCH
Data Operation
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Bit Shift
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Bit Mask
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 50
ALARM
Format
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Extended tab
Set the security and offset.
This tab is displayed by checking "Extended" at the bottom of dialog box.
Basic
List
Extended
Case
Trigger
Items
Security
Description
(
(
Offset

(
7 - 51
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
1
This tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the dialog box.
For details of state, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
4 Case tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Extended
Case
Trigger
Items
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
List
State *1

Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State
Range
6
LAMP, SWITCH
New State

Text Color
Select a text color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Plate Color
Reverse
Check this item to revers text.
*1 State
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Basic
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 52
ALARM

(3) State conditions of data list

In data list, $V value of a state condition (monitor device) is the device value set in the 2nd column.
Example:
D10, D20, D30 and D40 are treated as $V value.
Example: Device
: D10, D20, D30, D40
Data view format : Signed decimal, with size of 16 bits
No.
1
2
3
4
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Output
D10
D20
D30
D40
Fault
D11
D21
D31
D41
Action priority
when setting
State No.
Range
Text color
Plate color
High
1
2
Normal case
1000<= $V
900<=$V<=999
White
Yellow
Green
White
Low
(State 0)
Black
White
overlaps
When monitor device value is over

1000 (1000
State 1
$V), the plate color will
be changed to green.
When monitor device value is 900 to

999 (900
State 2
$V
999), the text color
will be changed to yellow.
When monitor device value is out of

the range (below 899), the text color
Normal case
(State 0)
7 - 53
7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
will be black and the plate color will be

white.
No.
1
2
3
4
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Output
1000
1000
950
980
Fault
2
0
1
3
No.
1
2
3
4
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Output
890
880
920
910
Fault
2
0
1
3
No.
1
2
3
4
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Output
890
880
820
810
Fault
2
0
1
3
1
5 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
Set conditions to display an object.

This tab is displayed by checking the extended function at the bottom of dialog box.
For details of trigger, refer to the following.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
Case
Trigger
Items
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extended
Description
Select the trigger type for displaying the object.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Device
Click on button Dev to specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger
When Range is selected in Trigger Type , set the following items.
Date Size
Data Type
Range
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Type

Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of word device.
Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
trigger.
After setting, click the Setting button to set the bit device and operation condition.
Initial Display
Hold Display
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
List

7.2 Data List

7.2.4 Setting items
7 - 54
ALARM
Basic
7.2.5
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using data list function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be arranged (set) for one screen
Up to 1 data list objects can be placed (set).
(2) Applicable screen

Only base screen can be set.
(3) Precautions for using together with other object

(a) The object that cannot be set on the same screen
Alarm history cannot be set on the same screen.
(b) The object restricted on the applicable function
For restrictions when using the alarm list on the same screen, refer to the following.
7 - 55
7.2 Data List

7.2.5 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
7.3 ASCII Display/ASCII Input
1 ASCII display
5851H (XQ)
3420H (4 )
0030H (0)
D12 5851H (XQ)

D13 3420H (4 )
D14 0032H (2)
2 ASCII input
ASCII input is the function that writes the input text into word device in text code (ASCII code).
The keys for input are created by assigning key codes to touch switch.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Input from the touch switches arranged on the screen
ABCD
ABC
A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CC
A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CCCC
Input from the key window
D10 0000H
D11 0000H
LAMP, SWITCH
Input a text
ABCD
Using the Write key (key code: 000DH),

write the input text in text code
D10 4241H (BA)

D11 4443H (DC)
*1 The key window must be created by the user.

Refer to the following section for the creating method, types and operation method of the key window.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ABC
7 - 56
ALARM
D12
D13
D14
QX 42
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
QX 40
3
COMMON SETTING
ASCII display is the function that treats the data stored in word device as text code (ASCII code) to
display the text column.
SPECIFICATIONS
7.3.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
For ASCII display/ASCII input, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to ASCII display/ASCII input only
Relevant to ASCII display/ASCII input only.
(2) Functions relevant to ASCII display/ASCII input and others

Outputting ASCII input to the system information
When ASCII characters are input, the input signal/No. can be output to the system
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
information.
ASCII code key-in
Determined
ON
Setting items
[Ascii input is targeted in the
Numeric input signal

system information output]
Numerical input No.
The user ID is stored.
(2) Functions relevant to ASCII display/ASCII input and other

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
When condition
success
When condition fail

100
100
Setting items
Cursor displayed
100
Key window erased

[Cursor position]
100
Cursor and key

window displayed
Object erased
Methods of displaying cursor input area

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
4567
4567

Setting items
4567
All characters (except one)
are reversed, and only one
character blinks.
7 - 57

[Cursor input area]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
100
Setting items


time]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
100
100
Setting items
Press the RET key

RET key is pressed]

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
3000
OK
Cancel


Setting for
each project
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Change to the
following value
2
SPECIFICATIONS
100
COMMON SETTING
100
Setting for
each screen
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
100
OVERVIEW
RET key is pressed.
6
objects within GOT]
Clearing the system information when the cursor is deleted

When the cursor is deleted, the system information such as cursor display object ID and
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
cursor display user ID can be cleared.

100
Setting items

The current cursor
display user ID
500

system information is cleared]

7 - 58
ALARM
100
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Carry out check for overlapping
LAMP, SWITCH
Setting items
Coordinates error
Setting for
each project
If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input order can be set.
Setting for
each screen
100
100
Setting items
Input definition
The cursor is moved

Setting for
each project

100
100
Setting items

Setting for
each screen
[Move key window]

Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal
Turns off the numeric value input signal can be turned off.
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254
B 348
B 348
Numeric input signal OFF
Key Input Signal
Input disabled
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
348 B
348
The numerical value

input is determined.
7 - 59

348 B
348
Key window on
the screen

(Write device)
Notifies that the cursor is being displayed by the
Notifies the user ID of the determined numeric value
numeric/ASCII value input.
input.
D100
OVERVIEW
A 1254 A 1254
100
(Write device)
348
The cursor is
on the screen.
The object ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
348 B
Numeric value input

(user ID: 2) determined
The object ID on which the cursor was positioned
SPECIFICATIONS
(Write device)
Notifies the object ID of the object on which the cursor
currently can be notified.
was positioned at the previous time.
D100 10021
B 34 8
Object ID on which the cursor is

positioned currently
Key Code Input
A 1254
B 34 8
Object ID on which the cursor was positioned

The user ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
(Write device)
(Write device)
Notifies the user ID of the object on which the cursor is
positioned currently.
switch.
D100
D100 0043
ABC
5
A 125 4
B 348
A B C
The key code is notified.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
A 1254
User ID on which the cursor is positioned currently
The user ID on which the cursor was positioned
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D100 10021
3
COMMON SETTING
The ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned

(Write device)
Notifies the user ID of the object on which the cursor was
A 1254
B 34 8
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
User ID on which the cursor was positioned


7 - 60
ALARM
D100
LAMP, SWITCH
positioned at the previous time.

Setting for the Kana-Kanji conversion function
Kana text input in ASCII input can be converted in Kanji.

Signal
Cursor Deleted System Information Clear Setting


Displays the dialog for confirming input data when the
When the cursor disappears, "0" is stored at the "Current
RTN key is pressed. (Specific to numeric value input or
cursor position" of the system information even during
ASCII input)
ASCII input.
D100
Change to the
following value
A ABCD A BBAD
B 348 B 348
3000
OK
Cancel
When the cursor disappears

during ASCII input, "0" is stored.
4 Key window (
Section 4.5 Key Window)

Using User-created Window
Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and ASCII input.
100
100
The user-created key window is displayed during key input.
7 - 61

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
1 Text code reading/writing order

The text code reading/writing order can be selected according to the specifications of the controller to
be monitored.
(1) Reading/writing in order from lower byte to higher byte
SPECIFICATIONS
Text codes are read/written in reverse order of every 8 bits.

(Default setting)
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII codes "41 (A)", "42 (B)" are displayed)
Set device
ASCII display
41H
AB
42H
COMMON SETTING
D10
(4142H)
(4241H)
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte
(2) Reading/writing in order from higher byte to lower byte
41H
42H
ASCII display
AB
(4142H)
(4142H)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D10
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Text codes are read or written in the order from the higher byte to the lower byte.
(Place a check mark at "Display in the order of High
Low" on the Extended tab.)
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII code "41(A)","42(b)" are displayed)
Device
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte
2 Number of display digits and available devices

One word device is used for ASCII display/ASCII input every two display digits.
: D1
:3
LAMP, SWITCH
Example: Set device (head device)

Number of display digits
OVERVIEW
Before setting ASCII display/ASCII input
Two word devices D1 and D2 are used.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7.3.2 Before setting ASCII display/ASCII input
7 - 62
ALARM
7.3.2
7.3.3

Click on
[ASCII Display]/
Select [Object]
[ASCII Input]
[ASCII Display] / [ASCII Input] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where ASCII Display/ASCII Input to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged ASCII Display/ASCII Input to display the setting dialog box.
Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Easy setting method

Remark

D10

Shape
7 - 63

Setting items
1 Basic tab
This tab is used to select ASCII display or ASCII input, and set the device and view format (font, text
size, digits, display frame, shape)
OVERVIEW
7.3.4
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
In the case of ASCII display function

Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
Description
Type
Select the function to be used (ASCII display/ASCII input).
Device
Set the head bit device where text code is stored

Select a font.
Font
(When [16 dot standard] is selected, [Size] can not be set to [0.5].)
6
8dot font
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the number of digits (1 to 100) for the text to be displayed/input.

Digits
View
The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:

Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit

Color
Select the color of text to be displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Format
Select the blinking pattern of the text/figure frame

No
Blink
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
If blink setting is made, it will not blink while the input cursor is displayed.
Reverse
Check this item to reverse text.

7.3.4 Setting items
7 - 64
ALARM
Size
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Shape
selected as shape.
Frame
Format
Frame
ABCDEFG
Plate
Frame color
Plate color

Category

Layer
(
7 - 65

7.3.4 Setting items
1
This tab is used to set security, offset, blink scope, user ID and move destination ID.
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
(When setting ASCII display function)

Basic
Extended
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
(When setting ASCII input function)
Object Script
Trigger
Items
Description
Security
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(Only when setting ASCII

display function)
Security Display
(Only when setting ASCII input
function)
The number for security input must be larger than that for security display.
(
Security Input

function)

(
Text only
: Makes the text area blink.
Text and Plate
: Makes the text area and plate blink.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

Blink Scope
Check this item when setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535).

By setting the user ID, the following operations are available.
User ID *1
function)
Decides the cursor display position when switching screen.

(
Confirms the ASCII input definition timing using PLC CPU.

(

7.3.4 Setting items
7 - 66
ALARM
(
Offset
LAMP, SWITCH
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Trigger
Items
Description
Check this item when moving the cursor to the ASCII input specified by the user ID No. after an ASCII input
is defined.
Move Destination ID
*1, *2
After checking, set the user ID No. for the ASCII input to which the cursor is moved.
In addition to the setting above, set the following items.
Click the Screen Properties button to set [Defined key action] to [User ID order].
function)
Uncheck the [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] on the [Auxiliary Settings] selected
by [Common]
When setting the ASCII display function:

Display in order of
High
Check this item when display text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.
When setting the ASCII input function:
Low
Check this item when store text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.
For the input of character string, if the number of input characters is less than the number specified for
[Digits] in the Basic tab, it is possible to select the ASCII code that fill the blank area from those indicated
below.
Space (0x20)
: Secures the blank area as space.

Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for "Digits" is "7"
Character string
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
ASCII code
(0x41)
(0x42)
(0x43)
(0x20)
(0x20)
(0x20)
(0x20)
Input Character String

Terminal
NULL (0x00)
: Stores NULL (0x00) at the first digit place following the input character string.
The character string preceding the NULL is taken as valid data and characters that
follow NULL are indefinite and thus disregarded.
Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for "Digits" is "7"
Character string
(NULL)
ASCII code
(0x41)
(0x42)
(0x43)
(0x00)
Kana Kanji Conversion

(only when the ASCII input
function is set)
Check this item to use the Kanji conversion function.

(This function is dedicated to Japanese version.)
*1 Relation between User ID and Move Destination ID

The destination ID No. indicates the user ID No. of ASCII input function to which the cursor will move.
Example: Cursor movement to the destination ID
AB C
1)
User ID: 1
B
2)
GHI
User ID: 3
7 - 67

7.3.4 Setting items
3)
User ID
Destination ID
DEF
User ID: 2
4)
Move
ASCII input
JKL
User ID: 4
Base screen 1
Base screen 1
Window screen 1
2
Window screen 1
1 to 4 : User ID
DEF
AB C
1
1 to 2
DEF
JKM
GHI
JKM
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GHI
COMMON SETTING
: User ID
AB C

7.3.4 Setting items
7 - 68
ALARM
2
SPECIFICATIONS
To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully
so that the user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
When the same user ID are set for all
When different user IDs are set for each object
If more than one object having the same user
The cursor moves properly with the user ID
ID are identified on the screen (including the
when the Set Overlay Screen function or
Set Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window),
superimposed window is used.
the cursor may not move correctly with the user
ID.
OVERVIEW
*2 Setting the user ID
3 Trigger tab
This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding [Extended Function] at the bottom of the
dialog box.
(When setting ASCII display function)

Basic
Extended
Trigger
(When setting ASCII input function)
Object Script
Items
Description
When setting ASCII display function:
Select the trigger by which data is displayed in ASCII.
When [Sampling] is selected, sampling (1 to 3600 s) is set with 1 s as unit.
Trigger Type*1
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
OFF
Range Bit Trigger
When setting ASCII input function

Select the trigger to operate ASCII input
Ordinary
Trigger Device
ON
Specify the device used as trigger.

Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger

Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as trigger.
Bit Number
Initial Display
display function)
7 - 69

7.3.4 Setting items
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
display function)
OVERVIEW
Hold Display
For details about *1, refer to the following.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
*1 The cursor display when trigger is enabled during ASCII input

Refer to the following for the cursor display when trigger is enabled during ASCII input.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7.3.4 Setting items
7 - 70
ALARM
4 Object script tab

(1) Input object script (ASCII input only)
For details of settings made on the input object script tab, refer to the following
Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Option
*1
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Blink
blink
5)
Reverse
highlight
5)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
Security Display
security
4)
Security Input
input_security
2)
Blink Scope
blink
5)

Section 16.3.2
7 - 71
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name

7.3.4 Setting items
(2) Display object script (ASCII display / ASCII input)

For details of settings made on the display object script tab, refer to the following
OVERVIEW
Section 16.3.6
SPECIFICATIONS
(When setting ASCII input)

4)
4)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Blink
blink
5)
Reverse
highlight
5)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
security
4)
blink
5)
Security Display *3
Blink Scope

Section 16.3.2
*2
*3
[Security] is for the ASCII display.

[Security Display] is for the ASCII input.

7.3.4 Setting items
7 - 72
ALARM
*1
Write*1
1)
Security *2,
Option
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting item
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Tab name
Object property
LAMP, SWITCH
Setting dialog box
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(When setting ASCII display)
COMMON SETTING
7.3.5
Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using ASCII display/ASCII input function.

(1) Maximum Number of ASCII display/input objects that can be set in one screen
1000
(2) ASCII input arrange position
Depending on the arranged position of the ASCII input, there are cases the input operation is not
possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the
numerical input by the data check function of GT Designer2.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.3
Checking Project Data for Errors)

If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1 Change the grid of 16 dots pitch in the scneen of GT Designer2.
2 Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer2
ABCD
Input operation is not possible
unless the center point of 16-dot grids
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.
7 - 73

7.3.5 Precautions
ABCD
Arrange an object so that it includes the
center point of 16-dot grids.
1
2 Precautions for OS
OVERVIEW
To use the Kana-kanji conversion function, install the option function OS (KANA KANJI (JPN)) to GOT.

To use the Kana-kanji conversion function, mount the option function board to GOT.
3
COMMON SETTING
(1) When unavailable ASCII codes are stored

If any of the following text codes are included in data for the ASCII display, characters after the text
code are not displayed.
0000H to 001FH
0080H
00F0H to 00FFH
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: If a control code 09H (tab) is included

Control code 09H (Tab)
"40," which is located after the
control code, is not displayed.
(QX 40)
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D10 5851H "X" "Q"

D11 3409H "4" "09H(Tab)"
D12 0030H "0"
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

7.3.5 Precautions
7 - 74
ALARM
7.4 Clock Display
1 Date display
Date display is the function for displaying a date on GOT.
Year display is the function for displaying the last 2 digits of the year.
02/12/25
2 Time display
Time display is the function for displaying the time on GOT.
The hour is displayed in 24-hour display format.
13:48
Displayed clock data

The GOT's clock data are used as the clock time.
For details of the GOT clock, refer to the following.
7 - 75
7.4 Clock Display
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For clock display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to clock display and others

(1) Functions relevant to clock display and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
objects within GOT]
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Coordinates error
COMMON SETTING
Auxiliary
setting
OVERVIEW
Relevant settings
7.4 Clock Display

7 - 76
ALARM
7.4.1
7.4.2

Click on
[Clock Display]
Select [Object]
[Date Display]/[Time Display] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where Clock Display to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged Clock Display to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape
7 - 77
7.4 Clock Display

7.4.3
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Object Script
Description
Select whether to display the date or time
Type
Date: Displays the Year/Month/Day

Time: Displays the time
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select view format of date and time.

View format of date
(Format) (View sample of 2004/07/01)
Date Format/Time
Format
yy/mm/dd
: 04/07/01
dd/mm/yy
: 01/07/04
mm/dd/yy
: 07/01/04
View format of time

View
Format
(Format)
(View sample of 13:48)
Time : Minute
: 13:48
8dot font
LAMP, SWITCH
Select a numeric font.

Font
12 dot high quality Gothic
16 dot high quality Gothic
TrueType Gothic
For details of fonts and text size, refer to the following.

Size
(
Color
Select the color for displaying the date and time.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Extended
7.4 Clock Display

7.4.3 Setting items
7 - 78
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate
Plate
Frame color
(
Category
Layer
2 Extended tab
Make the security setting on this tab.
This tab will be displayed by checking the corresponding "Extended Function" at the bottom of this
dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
(
7 - 79
7.4 Clock Display

7.4.3 Setting items
1
3 Object script tab
Section 16.3.6
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Option
*1
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
Size (X)
text_width
4)
Size (Y)
text_height
4)
Color
text_color
3)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
5)
Security
security
4)
Basic
Property name
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Setting item
Section 16.3.2
7.4 Clock Display

7.4.3 Setting items
7 - 80
ALARM
Tab name
Object property
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Setting dialog box
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7.4.4
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the clock display function.

Two objects can be set for the clock display.

(1) GOT clock
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock used for clock display, refer to the following.
7 - 81
7.4 Clock Display

7.4.4 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
7.5 Comment Display
1 Bit comment
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 7.5.3 Setting items of bit comment)
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
X10=ON
Pro. line con.
Pro. line con.
Conv. st.
During oper.
Comment when bit

device is OFF
Comment when bit

device is ON
COMMON SETTING
X10=OFF
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 7.5.4 Setting items of word comment)
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to word device value.

1
D100
10
D100
100
Pro. line con.
Pro. line con.
Pro. line con.
During oper.
Conv. st.
Completed
Display comment of
comment No.1
Display comment of
comment No.10
Display comment of
comment No. 100
Remark
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D100
Comment displayed by comment display
The comment to be displayed by comment display needs to be registered in

advance.
Switch all the comment on the screen
LAMP, SWITCH
Used with level function
(Comment display (bit/word))
(Comment display (bit/word))
Comment tab setting
Set in Extended tab
Production
Production
Production
Targ. 1 comp.
Targ. 2 comp.
Actual
50
150
Line 1
Line 2
50
150
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display
7 - 82
ALARM
2 Word comment
7.5.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For comment display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to comment display and others
(1) Functions relevant to comment display and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
As GOT may not display the overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen data.
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
7 - 83
7.5 Comment Display

Click on [Bit Comment]/
Select [Object]
OVERVIEW

[Word Comment]
[Comment Display]
[Bit Comment] / [Word Comment] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where Comment Display to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged Comment Display to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
2
SPECIFICATIONS
7.5.2
Easy setting method

D10

Shape

(2) When displaying the comment out of the display range
When the comment is out of the horizontal display range, display the remaining
part in the next line.
Comment
Please check the frame.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Method of adjusting objects in which shape is set

Select [Enable Two Tracker Mode] to adjust the
position of the object and the shape.
Please check
the frame.
Comment display
When the comment is out of the vertical display range, only the part within the
display range is displayed.
Comment
OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
NG: Res. aft. switch. NG
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP


OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
Comment display
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 84
ALARM
COMMON SETTING
7.5.3
Setting items of bit comment
1 Basic tab
Set the view format of device to be monitored and comment (Shape/Size/Alignment).
Basic
Comment
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Device

Frame
Shape
selected as shape.
Format
(
Frame
Font *1
Select the shape color.

Select a font.
12-dot
16-dot
Size
Select the position to display the text value.

Left: AAAA
Alignment
Center: AAAA Right: AAAA
BB
CCCC
BB
CCCC
BB
CCCC

Category

Layer
(
Refer to the next page for details of *1
7 - 85
7.5 Comment Display

7.5.3 Setting items of bit comment
*1 Fonts used for comment display

This section explains the fonts used for comment display and the setting method.
OVERVIEW
(1) In the case of direct comment

The following fonts can be used to display direct comments.
12-dot Standard
16-dot Standard
12-dot HQ Mincho
16-dot HQ Mincho
12-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot HQ Gothic
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) HQ font setting method

1 Select "Font" (12dot or 16dot) in the Basic tab.
2 Set a multiple of 2 (2x2, 4x4, 6x6 or 8x8) in "Size" on the Basic tab.
3
COMMON SETTING
3 Place a check mark at "Use High Quality Font ("Direct Comment Only")" on the Comment
tab.
4 Select "High Quality Font" (Gothic or Mincho) on the Comment tab.
(2) In the case of basic comment

The following fonts can be used to display basic comments.
16-dot Standard
16-dot HQ Mincho
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

1 In the Basic Comment List dialog box, check the boxes in the "HQ" column so that the
checked items will be displayed in the Comment Display.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic Comment List dialog box
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 86
ALARM
(3) In the case of comment group

The following fonts can be used to display comment groups.
12-dot Standard
16-dot Standard
12-dot HQ Mincho
16-dot HQ Mincho
12-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot HQ Gothic
1 Select "Font" (12dot or 16dot) on the Basic tab.
3 Select "High Quality Font (Gothic or Mincho)" on the Comment tab.
4 In the Comment List dialog box, check any boxes for "HQ font (12-dot Gothic, 12-dot
Mincho, 16-dot Gothic or 16-dot Mincho)" for each comment displayed in the Comment
Display.
5 Note that this setting must be consistent with the font type selected in steps
and
.
Example: If "12dot" is selected in "Font" of the Basic tab and "Gothic" is selected in "High
Quality Font" of the Comment tab
Check the "12-dot Gothic" boxes
according to the comment setting.
Comment List dialog box
7 - 87
7.5 Comment Display

1
2 Comment tab
OVERVIEW
Set the device ON/OFF comment and display attributes.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the type of the comment (Basic Comment or Comment Group) used to display the comment.
When selecting Comment Group, select a comment group number.
Basic Comment/
Fixed
:Enter the comment group number directly.
Comment Group
Device
:Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to be set. After
selecting it, set the device.
(
ON
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns ON.
OFF
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns OFF.
Select this item to display the registered comment data.

After selecting , set the comment No. to be displayed .
Comment will not be displayed if its No. (Basic Comment or Comment Group) is set to 0.
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment No.
(Set the comment No. to 0 during OFF if the comment is to be displayed only ON.)
Select this item to directly input the displayed comment.
Direct Comment
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Extended
After selecting, enter comment.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
(Two characters corresponding to the line feed are occupied.)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Comment
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 88
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Comment
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Change Attribute of Comment
Setting
Text
Description
Check this item to display the display attribute which is different from the one set in comment registration.
Select a format to display characters (Regular/Bold/Solid/
Raised).
Style
Section 2.3 Specifications of Applicable
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Characters)
Solid
Select the blinking pattern of the Comment.
Blink
Reverse
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Check this item to reverse comment.

This item can be set at "Regular" in "Style" category.
Use High Quality
Check this item when displaying the comment using the high quality font setting.
Font ("Direct
(Only setting at both of the height and width to 2, 4, 6 or 8 times in "Size" on the Basic tab)
Comment Only")
Only the display comment which is input directly by keyboard can use this font.
High Quality Font
Select a high quality font (Gothic/Mincho).

Select the background color for the inside display area of the comment.
Plate
Plate color

Copy OFF
Copy ON
ON/
OFF
Copy OFF
ON
Copy ON
OFF
7 - 89
All Settings
Copies all comment attributes.
Direct Comment
Copies only direct comment.
Only
Setting is possible only when direct comment is selected for both ON and OFF.
7.5 Comment Display

1
Set the method of displaying security, offset and comment (Display Mode/Line No. of Display Start, etc.)
This tab is displayed when Extended is checked at the bottom of the dialog box.
OVERVIEW
3 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Basic
Comment
Extended
Trigger
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Object Script
Items
Description
When not using the function, set it to "0".

(
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Security

(

Japan
KANJI Region
: Display the characters in Japanese kanji.
China(GB)-Mincho : Display the characters in China(GB) kanji.
China(Big5)-Gothic : Display the characters in China(Big5) kanji.
China (GB) -Mincho
Offset

(
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 90
ALARM
Japan
LAMP, SWITCH
Basic
Comment
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
Transparent
: Displays the comment on the level display.
FULL
XOR
Display Mode
: In order to identify the level and comment, the comment is displayed in color
different from the level color based on XOR.
20%
40%
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)

Blink Scope
Text
: Makes the comment blink.
Text and Plate
: Makes the comment and plate blink.
Check this item to change the line No. of display start when multiple comments have been set.
Fixed
: Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device
: Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set. After selecting, set the device. (
Section 5.1 Device
Setting)
Comment registered in GT Designer2 Display in GOT
Device: D10 1
Insp.1
Line1 Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Start displaying from the
Line2 Conv. insp.
first line of comment.
Line3 Insp.2
Device value
Line4 Proc. prod. insp.
changes from 1 to 3
Line5 Insp.3
Line6 Line insp.
Insp.2
Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
third line of comment.
Line No. of Display Start
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
Fixed
:Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device
:Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
After selecting, set the device. (

Device: D20
2
Insp.1
Line1 Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Display 2 lines of comment.
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line3 Insp.2
Device value
changes from 1 to 4
Line5 Insp.3
Line6 Line insp.
Device: D20
4
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
Number of Lines
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment will not be displayed.
7 - 91
7.5 Comment Display

1
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
4 Trigger tab
2
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Trigger
Items
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Object Script
Description
Select trigger for displaying the object.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range

LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Type

Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
trigger.
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
Initial Display
the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
Hold Display
though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
7.5 Comment Display

7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Extended
7 - 92
ALARM
Basic
5 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

-: Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Basic
Comment
Option
*1
Property name
Read
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame
frame_color
Size (X)
text_width
3)
Size (Y)
text_height
3)
Alignment
arrange
3)
Text
text_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Reverse
highlight
3)
Plate
plate_color
5)
Security
Security
4)
Display Mode
draw_mode
3)
Blink Scope
blink
3)

Section 16.3.2
7 - 93
Write*1
7.5 Comment Display

7.5.4
Setting items of word comment
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set a view format of the device to be monitored and comment (Shape/Size/Alignment).
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Device
(

Shape
selected as shape.
Format
(
Frame
Select the shape color.

Select a font.
12-dot
16-dot
LAMP, SWITCH
Font *1
Size
Select the position to display the text string.

Left :
Alignment
Preview Comment No.
Center :
Right :
Displays the comment with specified comment No. on the GT Designer2 screen.
Category

Layer
(
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Frame
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Comment

Section 7.5.3
Basic tab *1 (2) to (3)
7.5 Comment Display

7.5.4 Setting items of word comment
7 - 94
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Comment tab
Set the comment to be displayed and its attributes.

Basic
Comment
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
Select the type of the comment (Basic Comment or Comment Group) used to display the comment.
When selecting Comment Group, select a comment group number.
Basic Comment/
Fixed
:Enter the comment group number directly.
Device
:Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to
be set. After selecting it, set the device.
Comment Group
(
HQ Font
:Select a font (Gothic or Mincho) for the comment that is registered to comment
group and set with HQ font.
Sets display attribute of comment.

To change the display attribute in this setting, it is necessary to set state in the case tab.
Indirect (Device Value) :Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to monitor device value.
Attribute (Normal case)
Hold
:Check this item to hold currently displayed comment.
Comment No.
:Check this item to display the registered comment data.

After this, set the displayed comment No. The comment is not displayed when
comment No. is set as 0.
7 - 95
7.5 Comment Display

Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Change Attribute of Comment
Setting
Text
Object Script
Description
Check this item to display with the display attribute different from the one set during comment registration.
Raised).
(
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
SPECIFICATIONS
Style
Characters)
Solid
Reverse
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
3
COMMON SETTING
No
Blink
OVERVIEW
Comment

Select the background color for the inside display area of the comment.
Plate
Plate color
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 96
ALARM
Basic
3 Extended tab
Set the data type, security, and offset of monitor device and the method of displaying comment (Display
Mode/Line No. of Display Start).
This tab will be displayed when Extended is checked at the bottom of this dialog box.
Basic
Comment
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Data Type
Word (BIN16)
:Comments will be displayed based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
Word (BCD16)
:Comments will be displayed based on the word device (BCD16) binary coded
decimal value.
Security
When not using the function, set it to "0".

(
(
Offset

(
Data lenght is fixed to 16 bits.
7 - 97
7.5 Comment Display

Basic
Comment
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Transparent
OVERVIEW
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
: Displays the comment on the level display.
FULL
2
XOR
: Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.
40%
Level can be distinguished from the comment.

This is effective when GOT is Monochrome type/EL type.
Appendix 3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Text
:Makes the comment blink.
Text and Plate
:Makes the comment and plate blink.
COMMON SETTING

Blink Scope
Fixed
Device
:Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Device: D10 1
Insp.1
Line1 Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Line2 Conv. insp.
first line of comment.
Line3 Insp.2
Device value
changes from 1 to 3
Line5 Insp.3
Line6 Line insp.
Insp.2
Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
third line of comment.
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
Fixed
Device
:Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
LAMP, SWITCH

Device: D20
2
Insp.1
Line1 Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line3 Insp.2
Device value
changes from 1 to 4
Line5 Insp.3
Line6 Line insp.
Device: D20
4
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment will not be displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Number of Lines
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 98
ALARM
20%
SPECIFICATIONS
Display Mode
4 Case tab
Basic
Comment
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
State
*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Bit
:Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
Device
(
Word
:Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device. After selecting,
set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
Range
Select the method of displaying comment.
Indirect [Device value]
:Display the comment corresponding to the word device value.
Hold
:After it is selected, the comment display is held even if state condition is
Comment No.
:Specify the comment to be displayed.
Attribute
satisfied.
After this, set the parts/screen to be displayed.
Parts/screen will not be displayed when parts No. is set to 0.
7 - 99
7.5 Comment Display

Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Change Attribute of
Comment Setting
Text
Object Script
Description
Check this item to display the display attribute which is different from the one set in comment registration.
Raised).
(
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
SPECIFICATIONS
Style
Characters)
Solid
Reverse
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
3
COMMON SETTING
Blink
OVERVIEW
Comment

Select the plate color when the condition to display state is satisfied.
Plate
Plate color
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 100
ALARM
Basic
*1 State
Example: Monitored device
: 100
Data view format
: Signed decimal, 16bit length
Registered comment : Comment No.1................. The production volume is 1 set
Comment No.100 ............ Over 100 sets
Comment No.101 ............ Production completed
Operation priority
State No.
for repeated setting

High
Display comment
$V<=0
No.0
1<=$V<=100
Indirect
101<=$V<=199
Hold
----
No.101
Ordinary
Low
Display range
(State0)

Comment is not displayed when the monitor
device value is 0 or lower. ($V
0)
State1
Comment corresponding to the monitor device

value is displayed when monitor device value is
State2
between 1 and 100

(1
$V
100).
Production volume
is 1 set.
Over 100 sets
Comment display will not be switched when

monitor device value is between 101 and 199 (101
State3
$V
199).
Over 100 sets
Comment No.101 is displayed when condition is

other than state 1 to 3.
Normal case
Production is
completed.
(State 0)
7 - 101
7.5 Comment Display

1
5 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
The setting items of trigger tab are the same with bit comment.
Section 7.5.3 Setting items of bit comment
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 102
ALARM

dialog box.
Basic
Comment
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
7 - 103
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
7.5 Comment Display

1
7 Object script tab
Section 16.3.6
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Setting item
Basic
Comment
Option
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame
frame_color
Size (X)
text_width
3)
Size (Y)
text_height
3)
Alignment
arrange
3)
Text
text_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Reverse
highlight
3)
Plate
plate_color
5)
Security
Security
4)
Display Mode
draw_mode
3)
Blink Scope
blink
3)

Section 16.3.2
7.5 Comment Display

7 - 104
ALARM
*1
Property name
LAMP, SWITCH
Tab name
Object property
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Setting dialog box
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7.5.5
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using comment display function.

256 objects can be set for the comment display.
(2) Comment to be used
For comment display, the comment that is created by Basic Comment or Comment Group is used.
(3) Object arrangement precautions
When switching language, some comments registered may not be displayed within the comment
display range.
Examine the number of characters of the comments registered before setting the object display
range.
The comment display range can be confirmed on the GT Designer2 screen by changing the
Preview Column No.
(4) Precautions for using cascading level display
When overlapping comment and level on the same layer or overlapping them using Front/Back
Layer, there are the following restrictions, respectively.
(a) Restrictions on overlapping comment and level on the same layer
Only one comment can be cascaded to one level function.
At arranging two or more comments, the second or later comments are not displayed.
Comment cannot be set to blink (flickering display).
Comment cannot be reversed.
A comment extended off the display frame of a level is not XOR-combined.
At setting a frame figure to a comment, the level is displayed only inside the frame figure.
The display is updated only at changing the monitor device value of the level display.
The display is not updated at changing the monitor device value set to the comment display.
When the [Style] of the comment is set to [Text], [Solid] or [Raised], the comment character
may be dropped or the character color may not be displayed normally.
(b) Restrictions on overlapping comment and level by separating them for front of back layer
Comment display will not be XOR-displayed.
(5) Precautions for comment registration
Make sure to follow the basic cautions before registering comments for comment display.
7 - 105
7.5 Comment Display

7.5.5 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
ALARM
This chapter explains the functions that display following alarms.
1 Alarm types
(1) Displaying the user-created comment as an alarm message

It is possible to display the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
This feature is specific to user alarm and advanced user alarm, and suitable for the case in which
the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
ON
ON
M100 Temp. error
M100Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
M101
of theFuse
powererror
Replace the fuse

module with
new one.
Detail
3
COMMON SETTING
M100: OFF
M101: OFF
SPECIFICATIONS
The GOT can detect the alarms as shown below.
Detail
Error
occurance
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30

9
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(2) Displaying an error of GOT, controller or network as an alarm

It is possible to display the error code and error message when an error occurs on the GOT,
controller or network.
This feature is specific to system alarm and advanced system alarm, and suitable for the case in
which the GOT, controller or network error needs to be displayed.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Touch!
AC down error
LAMP, SWITCH
803 Transient error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8-1
ALARM
8.
2 Functions for displaying alarms

The functions for displaying alarms are as shown below.
Alarm function
Section 8.1.1 Alarm function
Advanced alarm function
Section 8.1.2 Advanced alarm function
(1) When using GT11

The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT15 only.
Therefore, use the alarm function instead, when using GT11.
(2) Comment displayed when an alarm occurs
To display the user-created comments as alarm messages, it is necessary to
register the comments in advance.
Comments displayed on the alarm function:
Register them as basic comment
Comments displayed on the advanced alarm function:
Register as comment group
8-2
8.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms
OVERVIEW
This section explains the alarm-relevant functions, and differences between the alarm function and
advanced alarm function.
Select the alarm by referring this section.
to Advanced
Description with Specific
applies to the advanced alarm function only.
Alarm Function
Description without icon is common to the alarm function and advanced alarm function.
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Displaying preset comments at alarm occurrence

Any comment can be registered for displaying as a user alarm.
Display
Temp. error
Fuse error
Detail
Detailed Display
Temp. error
COMMON SETTING
ON
ON
Replace the fuse

of theFuse
powererror
module with
new one.
Detail
Touch!
Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function
(a) Displaying the comments for each hierarchy

The different comments for an alarm can be displayed on the three hierarchies (higher, middle
and general), respectively.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(
Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm))
Therefore, it is possible to provide the alarm information ranging from simple to details, in the
hierarchical order.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
M100 : OFF
M101 : OFF
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8-3
ALARM
Set a comment
Factory
Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1
Line1
Display of higher
hierarchy alarms
Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
The alarms occurred

on the factory lines
are displayed.
Line2
Touch!
Switching from higher hierarchy

to middle hierarchy
Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1
Equipment A
Equipment B
Display of middle
hierarchy alarms
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
The alarms occurred

on line 2 are
displayed.
Touch!
Switching from middle

hierarchy to general hierarchy
Occurred
Power
module
Driving
module
Error
occurrence
8-4
Control
module
Power
module
Driving
module
Error
occurrence
Control
module
Error
occurrence
04/6/1
04/6/1
Display of general
alarm
Comment
Pwr. module error
Control module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
The module on which

the alarm occurred
actually is displayed
with details.
(b) Switching the language

The language of the comment displayed on the screen can be switched by the device value
(language switching device).
Comment group settings
1
OVERVIEW
Alarm Function
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
3
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Japanese
Language Switching Device :
English
Japanese
English
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
Language switching
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8-5
ALARM
Remark
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Settings for displaying the comment on each of three hierarchies.

The comments can be set in a single group or divided into multiple groups.
Therefore, it is possible to classify the comments for each hierarchy by dividing
into multiple comment groups.
Setting the comments of higher, middle and

general hierarchies in a comment group.
Setting and dividing the comments of

higher, middle and general hierarchies
into multiple comment groups.
(2) Hierarchy displayed when an alarm occurs

The hierarchy of the comments displayed at alarm occurrence (initial display
hierarchy) can be set.
Use the touch switch or similar to move to upper or lower hierarchy.
2 Confirming device status by displaying information on alarms occurred (occurrence

time and so on)
The alarm function can display the following items (6 types).
Occurred time
Checked time
Comment
Cumulative time
Restored time
*1
Occurred frequency
The above information help to confirm the device statuses and determine the cause of productivity
deterioration.
Alarm Function
In addition, the following items are available.

Alarm status
Down time*2
Level*3
Group*3
*1
Total alarm occurrence time (including the time when alarms occurred in the past)
*2
Time from alarm occurrence to restoration
*3
It is possible to decide the contents to be displayed for each level and group by setting these items for each
alarm.
8-6
1
3 Alarm display operation
OVERVIEW
(1) Change the display order by the settings

Set the order in which alarms will be displayed.
It can be set in the ascending/descending order of the occurrence date or device.
When displaying alarms in the descending order of occurrence date
The display items can be

changed by the settings.
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
The display order can be set.
Alarm Function
D10 : 1
Occurred
Comment Restore
Occurred
11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 11:50:57
04/6/1
02:30:16
Motor error
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 13:30:14
04/6/1
04:33:12
In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 09:30:18
04/6/1
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 13:30:14
04/6/1
05:22:35
Fuel error
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1
11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 11:50:57
04/6/1
04:33:12
In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49
04/6/1
05:22:35
Fuel error
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1
02:30:16
Motor error
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 09:30:18
04/6/1 19:18:20
04/6/1 19:18:20
Displaying alarms in the order of recovery date
Displaying alarms in the order of occurrence date
The display order can be changed by using the device value as well.
The following section, Section (2) Using the device to operate the alarm display)
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display

(a) Displaying/Hiding an alarm
An alarm can be displayed or hidden using the device.
ON
M100 : ON
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
M100 : OFF
7
OFF
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error
Alarms are displayed.
Alarms are hidden.
8-7
ALARM
Remark
Comment Restore
04/6/1
04/6/1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D10 : 0
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The display content can be sorted in the ascending/descending order of occurred date, comment,
alarm status, restored date, checked date, occurred frequency, cumulative time, down time, level,
or group.
COMMON SETTING
Alarm Function
(b) Refining the display content

It is possible to refine and decide the display content using the device.
(Display content can be refined according to the hierarchy, level, group, display order and the
alarm ID and comment group set in the advanced user alarm.)
When refining to the alarms of group 2
Comment
Group
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Oil error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuel error
Occurred
Example)
Set device A to group 1,
and device B to group 2.
As level or group can be set for alarms, the display content can be refined for each level or
group. (Also, two or more items can be specified as refinement conditions.)
Alarm Function
(3) Setting the display color according to alarm types

The display colors can be set for each alarm status (occurred, checked and restored), level or
group.
Alarms can also be displayed in the character colors set in the comment group (Specific to
advanced alarm popup display).
This feature enables the alarm types and others to be identified visually.
Occurred
8-8
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
Alarm types and so on can

be identified visually!
4 Popping up alarms regardless of display screen

Alarms can be popped up regardless of the presence/absence of alarm display objects (regardless of
the screen displayed). (
Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display)
In addition, a long comment can be displayed completely.
ON
A 1254 A 1254
Alarm Processing Screen
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Comment
Occurred
B 348 B 348
Error
SPECIFICATIONS
X1 : OFF
1
OVERVIEW
Alarm Function
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
Upper hierarchy
Error occurrence
Check
(1) Availability of this function

Only the advanced alarm function (advanced alarm popup display) can display
alarms regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the advanced alarm
function.
(2) Use of this function for GT11
As the advanced alarm function (advanced alarm popup display) is unsupported
by GT11, place the display object on the target screen.
(3) Alarm floating function of the GOT900 series
The alarm floating function, which is supported by the GOT900 series, is
unsupported by the GOT1000 series. Therefore use the advanced alarm popup
display instead.
Alarm Function
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Touch!
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Displaying an alarm regardless of

the screen (scrolled from right to left)
COMMON SETTING
3
Screen Switching/
Stage hierarchy switching is possible.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
5 Scrolling comments on screen

Comments can be scrolled across the screen from right to left, i.e., floating alarm display.
This floating alarm display is suitable when displaying an alarm in small area, as all the parts of the
comment can be scrolled and completely displayed on the screen.
Occurred Comment
Restore
Method of displaying alarm)
Occurred Comment
Restore Check
04/6/1
P/S
04/6/1
Error occurred on
04/6/1
Drive
04/6/1
04/6/1
Control
04/6/1
7
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
P/S module
Error occurred on
04/6/1
drive module
Error occurred on
04/6/1
control module
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 8.4.2
Restore Check
8
Scrolling comments across the screen from left to right.
8-9
ALARM
6 Writing alarm information to device

The total No. of alarms which occurred so far and which are currently occurring can be output to the
device.
D200 : 15
D201 : 3
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Details
Total alarms : 15
Current alarms : 3
Alarm Function
The alarm information can be written to the device by touching the corresponding part.
The following shows the information (15 types) that can be written.
Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Occurred Date
Occurred Time
Restored Date
RestoredTime
Checked Date
Checked Time
Level
Group
Occurred Frequency
Cumulative Time
Down Time
This enables the detailed message on the selected alarm to appear as a comment.
The data, which cannot be displayed due to insufficient screen area, can be written in the device.
Alarm on line 1 being selected

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!
8 - 10
Switching the comment on the screen

according to the value written in the
device (comment display is used.)
1
The alarm monitoring device can be set freely by the user.
In the alarm function, the monitoring device and alarm display can be set on a single setting screen.
(The monitoring device can be set for each object placed.)
Monitoring device settings
OVERVIEW
7 User-Setting of alarm monitoring device
Alarm display settings
M100
M101
SPECIFICATIONS
Display
Temp. error
Fuse error
Alarm Function
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3
Display
Make the settings so that

the alarm will be displayed
as alarm ID1.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
In addition, set the switching

device of alarm ID (advanced
user alarm observation) to
GD0.
Switch
GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.

Number of objects that can be set

Advanced user alarm: up to 255
Advanced system alarm: up to one
Make multiple monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation), and switch the alarms on the screen.
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
Make the settings so that the

alarm will appear as alarm
ID1 (single-line display).
the alarm will appear as
alarm ID1 (multiple-line
display).
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm ID1
LAMP, SWITCH
Display
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The monitoring device (advanced alarm observation) and alarm display (advanced alarm display) are
set on the respective screens.
This enables the following settings to be made.
COMMON SETTING
Single-line display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
8 - 11
ALARM
Multiple-line display
Providing different displays based on the same monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation).
8 Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure) and utilization of stored data
(1) Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure)
By storing alarm data in the memory card as an alarm log file, alarm history can be retained when
GOT is powered off.
The history of user alarms can be stored in the memory card.
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
Alarm data can be stored

in the memory card!
Alarm Function
The advanced alarm function supports the following operations.

Storing system alarm history in a memory card.
Selecting whether to store alarm data or not for each monitoring device setting (advanced alarm
observation).
Setting a folder to store alarm data and the file name for each monitoring device setting
(advanced alarm observation).
Storing alarm data at an arbitrary timing using the device (rise, fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and
OFF Sampling).
Automatically reading alarm data from the memory card that includes an alarm log file when the
GOT is power off and on.
8 - 12
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Output to a CSV file

Alarm data can be output to a CSV file.
The alarm data output to a CSV file can be displayed by on PC and so on.
Comment
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 8.7 Uploading

Resource Data [GOT to PC])
Reading out the CSV file stored in a memory card using a PC.
Alarm Function
Alarm data can be converted into a text file as well.
Outputting a CSV/text file by the advanced alarm function
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Save data as a binary format file (*.G1A) using the advanced alarm function, and
convert the data into a CSV/text file by the GOT's utility.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Store the output data within a PC in either of the following methods.

Uploading resource data by GT Designer2.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8 - 13
ALARM
Alarm Function
(3) Utilization of the alarm data stored in the memory card

The stored alarm data can be displayed in graph form on the GOT.
Historical graph
Total graph
The history of alarm occurrence is displayed in a historical
The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed in a
graph.
total graph.
Alarm history is displayed as the symbols below.

: Occurred time
: Checked time
: Restored time
8 - 14
Alarm function
OVERVIEW
8.1.1
This section explains alarm functions by the type and differences among the functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Alarm function types

The alarm functions are classified as shown below.
Alarm Function
User
System
User
User
Alarm
System
Alarm
User
Alarm
This section
Section (1)
This section
COMMON SETTING
Alarm List Display
Section (2)
Use this function when displaying alarms that are currently occurring.
Use the alarm history display when displaying or storing following information in a memory card:
alarm history, restored time, checked time, cumulative time (time from alarm occurrence to fixing)
and occurred frequency.
Section (2) Alarm history display
ON
ON
M100 Temp. error
M100Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
M101
of theFuse
powererror
Detail
Replace the fuse

module with
new one.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
M100: OFF
M101: OFF
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(a) User alarm display

The function that displays the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm
occurs.
Suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
Detail
Touch!

8.1.1 Alarm function
8 - 15
ALARM
This section
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Alarm list display

The function that displays the alarms created by the user (user alarms) and system errors (system
alarms).
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(b) System alarm display

The function that displays the error code and error message when an error occurs on the
controller, GOT or network.
Use this function when displaying an error on the controller, GOT or network.
Error
occurance
400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
8 - 16

Use the alarm list display when the settings of monitoring target devices need to be separated for
each object.
Up Down Check
M100 : OFF
ON
Message
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
10:45
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.
Replace the fuse of

the power module in
Line1 with new one.
Alarm Detail
Display
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
COMMON SETTING
Alarm
Occurred
Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Up Down Check
Alarm details are displayed on the comment window, base screen or window screen.
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
10:45
12:10
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm
Checked
Time
Alarm checked time is

displayed by the touch switch.
Create the touch switch by setting a key code on it.
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
Restore
Check
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05
Temp. error
Fuse error
11:25
12:45
10:45
12:10
LAMP, SWITCH
System Restoration
The restoration time

is displayed.
M100 : ON
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
After System
Restoration
Section (1) Alarm list display
OFF

8 - 17
ALARM
This section
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Alarm history display

The function that displays the user-created comments, occurred time, restored time, checked time,
cumulative time (time from alarm occurrence to fixing), and occurred frequency, and displays the
alarm history information in list format when a user alarm occurs.
(1) Comments need to be set

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register the comments that will be displayed on the alarm function as basic
comment.
(2) Alarms that can be stored in a memory card
Alarms can be stored by the alarm history display function only.
However, the system alarm history cannot be stored in a memory card, as the
system alarm history settings cannot be made using the alarm history display.
Use the advanced alarm function when storing the system alarm history.
(3) Using alarm list display and alarm history display together
The alarm list display and alarm history display can be used together.
Remark
(1) Details and usage of each function

For the details and usage, refer to the following.
Section 8.6 User Alarm Display
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display
Section 8.8 Alarm History Display
(2) Differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm function
For the differences, refer to the following.
Section 8.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms
8 - 18

Advanced alarm function
OVERVIEW
8.1.2
The advanced alarm functions are more advanced than the alarm functions
SPECIFICATIONS
When using GT11

The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT15 only.
Therefore, use the alarm function instead, when using GT11.
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Advanced alarm function types

Make the settings of the advanced alarm function in the advanced alarm observation.
The set alarms are displayed as the advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup display.
Advanced Alarm Function
Advanced Alarm Settings

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
this section

this section
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
1 Settings in the advanced alarm observation

(Advanced User Alarms) settings
[Advanced Alarm Observation] of GT Designer2.

(Advanced System Alarms) settings
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Make the settings in advance in the [Common]
Alarm ID1
Advanced System Alarm
Alarm ID2
Advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms)

can be set for multiple user IDs (Up to 255 objects).
LAMP, SWITCH
A series of operations from advanced alarm settings to display is shown below.
Only one advanced alarm observation (advanced

system alarm) objects can be set.

8.1.2 Advanced alarm function
8 - 19
ALARM
2 Object Placement
Place objects of the alarms that are set in section
on the previous page.
Perform placement in the [Object]

[Advanced Alarm Display] of GT Designer2.
Set the touch mode, display items, display conditions and so forth on the placed objects.
In addition, to display alarms regardless of the presence/absence of the object (regardless of the display
screen), make the settings in the [Common]
[Advanced Alarm Popup Display] of GT Designer2.
Placement as Advanced Alarm

Placement as Advanced Alarm
Display (Advanced User Alarms) *1 Display (Advanced System Alarms)*2
Base screen 1 (The occurrence date,
comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID1 are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore
Base screen 3 (The system alarms of all

statuses are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore
Setting of Advanced
Alarm Popup Display
Alarms are displayed on the screen
regardless of the presence/absence of the
object for the advanced alarm display.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

alarm ID1 will appear.
Base screen 2 (The occurrence date,

comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID2 are displayed.)
Occurred
Comment Restore

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.
An error has occurred
Window screen 2 (The system alarms that

are currently occurring are displayed.)
Set the method for displaying alarms from

the following.
Display advanced user alarms only
Display advanced system alarms only
Display advanced user alarms or
advanced system alarms
Occurred
Comment Restore

Window screen 1 (The comment, level, and

group of the alarm set as alarm ID1 are
displayed.)
Comment Level
Group

Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display content
can be set for each object.
Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display
content can be set for each object.
To display advanced alarms on the screen

regardless of the presence/absence of
display objects for advanced alarms, make
the settings of advanced alarm popup
display.
*1
Select the advanced alarm display (advanced user alarms) when displaying the alarms set in the advanced alarm
*2
Select the advanced alarm display (advanced system alarms) when displaying the alarms set in the advanced
observation (advanced user alarms).

alarm observation (advanced system alarms).
8 - 20

1
As the multiple sets of alarm settings can be made on the advanced alarm
observation (advanced user alarm), each of the sets should be identified by the
alarm ID.
Specify the alarm ID for each set when placing the object as the advanced alarm
display (advanced user alarm); the alarms will appear based on specified alarm IDs.
OVERVIEW
Alarm ID
Advanced user alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
Advanced alarm observation settings

Advanced system alarms
Alarm ID2
Multiple sets of alarm settings!
Place as advanced alarm display

Occurred

Restore
Occurred

Base screen 1 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID1 are displayed.)
Comment
Comment
Level

Window screen 1 (The comment,

level, and group of the alarm set as
alarm ID1 are displayed.)
Restore

Base screen 2 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID2 are displayed.)
Group
Comment
Occurred
Base screen 3 (The system alarms

of all statuses are displayed.)
Comment
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Restore
Restore

Window screen 2 (The system

alarms that are currently occurring
are displayed.)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Comment
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 21
ALARM
Occurred
COMMON SETTING
Alarm ID1
2 Relation between advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display

(advanced alarm popup display)
Advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display (advanced alarm popup display) can be set
separately.
The following setting patterns are available.
(1) Placing different display contents based on a set of advanced alarm observation settings
Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
Placement as
advanced alarm display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Display on a line according to the

settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)
Alarm ID1
Display on multiple lines according

to the settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)
Temp. error
Single-line display
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Multiple-line display
Different settings can be made for each display
object! (initial display hierarchy, touch mode,
display item, display condition and so on)
(2) Switching the display on the object according to the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation.
Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
Alarm ID1
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)
Placement as
advanced alarm display
Set the switching device
of alarm ID (advanced user
alarm observation) to GD0
Alarm ID2
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)
Occurred Comment
04/6/1
Temp. error
04/6/1
Fuse error
04/6/1
Oil error
Switch

Switching the display on a screen according to
the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation!
8 - 22

(3) Settings for whether to popup or hide advanced alarms

Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation
OVERVIEW
Alarm ID1
Settings of advanced alarm

popup display
(Settings in the advanced
alarm popup display)
B 348 B 348
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 13:20 Advanced a
Only the errors of alarm ID1 and

alarm ID3 are popped up.
Alarm ID3
(Popup)
Whether to popup or hide can be

set for each set of advanced alarm
observation settings!
(1) When only advanced alarm observation settings are made

When only advanced alarm observation settings are made, no alarm is displayed.
However, the device is monitored and saved based on the advanced alarm
observation settings.
To display alarms, select either advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup
display.
Use a set of settings throughout the project
Make the settings for each screen
COMMON SETTING
(Hide)
A 1254 A 1254
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Alarm ID2

Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display)

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 13:20 Power module
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Restore
11:25
Check
Pop up generated alarms

regardless of the screen.
10:45
Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm

the details of the alarms and take measures.
(2) Comments displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object

The comments that will be displayed on the advanced user alarm observation
object must be registered in advance.
(Register the comments as a comment group.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
04/6/1 10:25
04/6/1 8:05
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

8 - 23
ALARM
(Popup)
Settings in the
advanced alarm popup display
Remark
Details and usage of advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display
For details and usage, refer to the following.
Section 8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User Alarm)
Section 8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)
Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced
System Alarm)
Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
8 - 24

1
OVERVIEW
8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation

The advanced alarm observation is the function that saves the alarm occurrence time when the condition of
the device set for alarm detection is met (the bit turns OFF to ON/word device range) and the comments in
the GOT internal memory, and displays these information as alarm history in list format.
Before setting advanced user alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
This section explains the advanced user alarms of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced user alarms.

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User Alarm)
8 - 25
ALARM
8.2.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
For advanced user alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only
Relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) and others
Confirm the relevant functions when making settings.
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Setting items
objects within GOT]
8 - 26

1
Drive A Full Signal*1
(Write device: System signal 2-2. b0)
Notifies of the status of access to the drive.
Notifies that the drive is short of capacty.
2
Drive A
Drive A
Available capacity is
less than 1KB
The file is being accessed
SPECIFICATIONS
Drive A File Accessing Signal*1
OVERVIEW
3
Drive A File Access Error Signal*1*2
COMMON SETTING

Notifies that access to the drive has failed.
Drive A
*1
The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full,
however, operate differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
Secton8.2.6
*2
(8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
The drive A file access error signal is reset by the file access error reset signal (read device: system signals
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
File access error
Secton2.9.1
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
1-2.b0).
GOT special register (GS))
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced user alarms) only
Buffer Flash Forced Saving Signal (GS520.b0)
Saves the data in the buffering area to a memory card.*1
Alarm data are saved only when the "Save Alarm Log File" item is checked on the File Save tab.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 27
ALARM
*1
LAMP, SWITCH
Buffering area
8.2.2
Before setting
This section describes the settings and function needed for using the advanced user alarm display.
1 Alarm detection conditions and range

(1) Detection conditions
Rising (OFF
ON) or falling (ON
Value of the word device
OFF) of the bit device
(2) Collection timing (watch cycle)

Alarms are collected in the GOT buffering area and updated in the cycle set by the user (1 to
3600s), regardless of the screen displayed.
(3) Setting range
(a) Number of device points that can be monitored (alarm (device) points): 32767 max.
(b) Alarm collection pattern (alarm ID)
For advanced user alarms, multiple sets of alarm collection settings are made for each alarm
purpose (255 max.).
Set the alarm condition and collection timing (watch cycle)
/alarm (device) points for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID : 10
(Alarms for maintenance)
D10
D20
Settings
40 "Oil refill"
500 "Fuel refill"
Alarm condition
: Word device value
Watch cycle
: 3600s
Alarm (Device) points : 50
Alarm ID : 50
(Alarms for emergency use)
M10:OFF
M20:OFF
M30:OFF
M40:OFF
ON "Line A error stop"

ON "Line B error stop"
ON "Line C error stop"
ON "Line D error stop"
Settings
Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 2s
Alarm ID : 255 max.

(Alarm ID number can be set in the
range of 1 to 32767.)
Alarm (Device) Points : 32767 max.
(Total number of alarm (device)
points set to alarm IDs)
Alarm ID : 900
M80:OFF
M81:OFF
M82:OFF
M83:OFF
ON "Confirm the battery"

ON "Confirm hydraulic pressure"
ON "Confirm internal pressure"
ON "Confirm the fuse"
Settings
Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 60s
(1) Settings for each alarm ID

The functions set for the advanced user alarm operate for each alarm ID.
When displaying alarms and saving the history simultaneously, set them with an
alarm ID.
(2) Display of advanced user alarms
Display advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm display.
System Alarm)
8 - 28

8.2.2 Before setting
1
(1) Collection flow
Advanced user alarms are collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory) in the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s) regardless of the screen displayed.
The collected user alarm data are temporarily saved in the buffering area, and then displayed as
alarms on the GOT.
User area
(C drive + add-on memory)
Comment
3
COMMON SETTING
Buffering area
The advanced user alarm data

collected in the buffering area
are displayed as alarms.
This section
Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory)
Data to be collected differ depending on the collection mode.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Clearing data in the buffering area

COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark

8 - 29
ALARM
Occurred
04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error

04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm data are collected in the buffering area in

the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s), regardless
of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
OVERVIEW
2 Collection flow and collection mode
(2) Alarm collection modes

The collection mode is selected from three options: historical mode, cumulative mode, and no
alarm collection. (
Secton8.2.5
(1) Basic tab)
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
Example: When displaying data by advanced alarm display
Occurred
Status
Comment
04/06/01 20:00 P/S module error
04/06/01 18:30 Hydraulic pressure error Chk
04/06/01 16:10 Drive moduIe error
Chk
1)
2)
Restore Check OccurFreq DownTime Cum.Time Level Group

2
1
1
2
1
1
18:50
16:30
2
00:20
00:40
2
1
16:20
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Description
Info
displayed
Historical mode
Cumulative mode
1) Occurred
The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Comment
The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
No alarm collection
The status of the alarm on the screen is displayed.

3) Status
4) Restore
Ocr
: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk
: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr
: Alarm has been restored
The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.
Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
(
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display)
5) Check
Comment
Pwr. module error
Restore Check
Comment
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00
Check
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)

The number of alarm occurrence times is
6) Occur Freq
displayed.
Time from alarm occurrence to restoration is
7) Down Time
displayed
Total alarm occurrence time including the past
alarm occurrence time (total down time) is
displayed.
Cumulative Time
8) Cum. Time
A/O
status
(M10) OFF
A/O
(1st)
ON
OFF
D/T A
A/O
(3rd)
ON
A/O
(2nd)
ON
OFF
D/T B
A/O : Alarm occurrence status

D/T : Down time
D/T C
time
The level set to the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified according to the alarm level.
9) Level
Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or alarms at particular level only can be displayed.
(
Secton8.2.3
Hierarchical alarm example)
The group set on the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified into some groups according to the content.
10) Group
Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or alarms in a particular group only can be displayed.
(
8 - 30
Secton8.2.3
Hierarchical alarm example)

(b) Cumulative mode

In this mode, the information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time collected for each alarm type.
1
OVERVIEW
(a) Historical mode

In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the user area (C drive + add-on memory) every
time an alarm occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(c) No alarm collection

In this mode, only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed.
The display disappears when the alarm is restored.
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 31
ALARM
(3) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced alarm display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
ON
ON
OFF
"Temp. error"
(M10 : OFF ON)
OFF
ON
"Fuse error"
(M20 : OFF ON)
11:30
1)
*1
12:00
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user *1
15:30
3)
18:25
4)
19:00
5)
Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.

(
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display )
(a) Historical mode

The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
Not collected in the historical mode.
1) "Temp. error" occurs.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Restore
Check
OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time
"Temp. error" occurs!
Temp. error
Fuse error
2) "Temp. error" is checked.

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Restore
Temp. error
Fuse error
Check
"Temp. error" is
checked.
12:00
Check
3) Restored from "Temp. error"
Occurred
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)
Comment
Restore
Check
Temp. error
Fuse error
15:30
12:00
Restoration date/time
is displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error
10:25 Fuse error
Restore
Check
15:30
12:00
Restore
Check
19:00
15:30
12:00
A new line is added

and displayed.
5) "Temp. error" restored

Occurred
8 - 32
Comment
04/06/01
04/06/01
18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01
10:25 Fuse error

is displayed.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
04/06/01
10:25
Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time
Temp. error
Fuse error
1
1
00:00
00:00
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
SPECIFICATIONS
2) "Temp. error" is checked

Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
1
1
00:00
00:00
"Temp. error" is
checked
Check

04/06/01
04/06/01
11:30
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
15:30 12:00
12:00
1
1
04:00
04:00
00:00
Restoration date/time,
down time, and cumulative
time are displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
18:25
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
04:00
00:00
2
1
The occurrence time when the

alarm occurred again is displayed
on the same line of the alarm.
Frequency is increased by one.

18:25
04/06/01
10:25
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
19:00
2
12:00
00:35
04:35
00:00
Restoration date/time and

down time are displayed.
The time when the alarm occurred
is added to the cumulative time.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
04/06/01
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
11:30
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Comment
04/06/01

8 - 33
ALARM
Occurred
1
OVERVIEW
(b) Cumulative mode

The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
(c) No alarm collection

Only the alarms that are currently occurring are collected.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Alarms are not collected in the no alarm collection.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
11:30
04/06/01
10:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
12:00
"Temp. error" is
checked.
Check

Occurred
04/06/01
Comment
10:25
(Key code: FFB4H)

Fuse error
The restored alarm

is cleared.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurs again.

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
18:25
10:25
The alarm that occurred

again is displayed.
Temp. error
Fuse error

Occurred
04/06/01
Comment
10:25
The restored alarm

is cleared.
Fuse error
Display of advanced user alarms

Advanced user alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
System Alarm)
8 - 34

1
3 Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data
OVERVIEW
Advanced alarm data are saved in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory).
Advanced alarm data are cleared at the following timings.
(1) Power-off or reset of GOT
(2) When the following settings are made within utilities
2
Description
Communication setting
[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]
Display
[Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]
Operation
[Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]
Self check
[I/O check]
GOT setup
Program/data control
Debug & self check
OS installation, project download
Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button

COMMON SETTING
Main menu
(3) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
(4) Setting and operations by the user
The history of restored alarms can be freely cleared by the user.
(a) Clear by device
All restored alarm data are cleared by turning on the "buffer clear."
(1) Basic tab)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Secton8.2.5
(b) Clear by touch switch
10:25
09:10
Drive module error

Restore
15:30
Delete
Occurred
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10
Comment
Restore
Drive module error
(Key code: clear one log FFB6H

clear all logs FFB7H)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
04/06/01
04/06/01
Comment
Hydraulic error
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
One or all restored alarm logs can be cleared. (

switches for advanced alarm display)

8 - 35
ALARM
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
4 Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure

(1) Outline of data retention under power failure
By saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card as alarm log file, the data are retained
even when GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the alarm log file is read
out automatically, and the historical status of the advanced user alarm saved before GOT power-off
is restored.
Memory card
Data
are
stored
The timing of saving data in the memory card can be set freely
(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can be saved by pressing the touch switch as well.
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
DDD EEE FFF
DDD EEE FFF
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
Power off
The status saved

before power-off
Current status
Power on
The status saved before power-off
and the current status are displayed.
Precautions for starting up the GOT

When restoring the advanced user alarm data by reading it out from a memory card,
insert the memory card to the GOT before turning ON for the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned ON, the data by reading out the data from the memory card
can not be restored.
Also when the memory card is inserted after turning ON, the advanced user alarm
data in the memory card is overwritten at saving its data to memory card.
Remark
Advanced alarm data saved in the memory card

Advanced alarm data are created in the memory card for each alarm ID.
Alarm ID
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3
8 - 36
File name (can be changed freely)

AAM00001.G1A
AAM00002.G1A
AAM00003.G1A

(2) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced user alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)

OVERVIEW
monitored using the device.(
writing
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Writing
Write error
COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14
Save
4
File name to be saved and saving timing
A file can be named freely for each alarm ID.
(
Secton8.2.5
(3) File save tab)
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
Save by the store trigger device (
(3) File save tab)
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced
Save by buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0) (

register (GS))
6
Secton2.9.1
GOT special
LAMP, SWITCH
Save by the touch switch (

alarm display)
Secton8.2.5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Method of data retention under power failure

Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the following
methods. The file names and so forth need to be set on the File Save tab in advance.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(4)

8 - 37
ALARM
(3)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Status during writing can be monitored.
(5) Required memory capacity

The following shows the memory capacity required for retention of advanced user alarm data under
power failure.
(a) In the historical mode
198 + (Number of alarm name characters*1
characters 2)) Number of alarms
2) + (91 + (Averaged number of comment
(b) In the cumulative mode

258 + (Number of alarm name characters*1
characters 2)) Number of alarms
2) + (121 + (Averaged number of comment
*1 For the details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Number of alarm name characters

The number of alarm name characters is set on "Observation Alarm Name" on the basic tab.
(
Secton8.2.5
(1) Basic tab)
(1) Information to be saved

The alarm log file content to be saved in the memory card varies depending on
the collection mode. (
Secton8.2.2
Collection flow and collection mode)
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the memory card
The advanced user alarm data saved in the memory card as an alarm log file can
be utilized as follows by the utility.
The occurrence history of advanced user alarms can be displayed as a graph.
In the historical mode
: Displayed as a historical graph
In the cumulative mode
: Displayed as a total graph
The file can be converted into a CSV/text file by the GOT utility so that it can be
displayed on a PC and so on.
Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file
By checking "Auto Backup at Save" on the File Save tab, the alarm log file just
before saved can be saved as a backup file.
Secton8.2.5
8 - 38
(3) File save tab

8.2.3
Useful information
The figure below shows an example of the system in which alarms are hierarchized. The comment
registration required for the system and the application example are explained in this section.
Line1
Higher Alarm
Line2
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A
Middle Alarm
Equipment B
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Hierarchical alarm example
OVERVIEW
This section explains some useful functions when using advanced user alarms.
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
General Alarm
Setting example
Set comments that will be displayed at alarm occurrence for each hierarchy (Higher hierarchy, Middle
hierarchy, and General hierarchy) as shown below.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Settings in the Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box (device tab)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
M10
Higher Comment No.
Middle Comment No.
ON
1 Pwr. module error
1 Equipment A error
1 Line1 error
1 Equipment A error
1 Equipment A error
1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error
2 Equipment B error
2 Equipment B error
1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error
M11
ON
M12
ON
2 Drive module error

3 Control module error
4
5
M13
M14
ON
ON
1 Pwr. module error

2 Drive module error
Detail Type
Reset
Detail No.
Level
Group
Comment Window
1 Hydraulic pressure error
YES
Base Screen
Window Screen
YES
YES
Comment Window
4 Low coolant water pressure YES

YES
5 Refill fuel
0
0
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
Comment Window

8.2.3 Useful information
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
General Comment No.
8 - 39
ALARM
Device Alarm Range
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Alarm location refinement

The alarm information can be displayed ranging from summary to details in the hierarchical order.
Switching from higher hierarchy to middle hierarchy
Switching from middle hierarchy to general
Lower
hierarchy
(FFB8H)
Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Check
Pwr. module error

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Check
(FFC2H)
Switching from general to middle hierarchy
(FFC2H)
Switching from middle hierarchy to higher hierarchy
Display higher hierarchy alarms
(Alarm status in factory
line is displayed.)
(FFB8H)
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle hierarchy alarms

(Alarm status in line 2 is displayed.)
Display general alarms

(The faulty module in system B
and the details are displayed.)
(2) Simultaneous execution of the operations of Check (FFB4H) and Delete (FFB6H) for multiple
alarms
The following operations can be executed simultaneously for multiple alarms included in the lower
hierarchy.
Check : The time when the alarm occurrence was confirmed is recorded.
Delete : The history of restored alarms is cleared.
(a)
When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for higher hierarchy alarms
A batch of alarms of the middle and general hierarchies, located below the higher hierarchy
can be operated.
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Equipment A
Powe
module
Drive
module
Equipment B
Control
module
Line2 error
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Display
general alarms
Delete
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
Restored alarm
Occurred alarm
Display higher
hierarchy alarms
Line2
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Equipment A
Powe
module
Drive
module
Line2 error
Delete
Equipment B error
Equipment B
Control
module
Powe
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Display
general alarms
Drive module error
A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.
8 - 40

Touch Delete
(FFB6H)
1
OVERVIEW
(b) When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for middle hierarchy alarms
A batch of general alarms located below the middle hierarchy can be operated.
Line2
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Touch Delete
Delete
(FFB6H)
Power
module
Drive
module
Control
module
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
COMMON SETTING
Control
module
Restored alarm
Posted alarm
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment B
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display middle
hierarchy alarms
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Control
module
Delete
Display
general alarms
Drive module error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Equipment A
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Line2
A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.
Reset operation
The reset operation of restoring an alarm manually (ON
OFF/reset value) by the
Reset (FFB9H) button is not usable for a batch of alarms.
Perform reset operation when general alarms are displayed.

Comment
Occurred
04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35
Occurred
Comment
Restore Check
04/06/01 12:35
Reset
Restore Check
13:00
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Remark
LAMP, SWITCH
Drive
module
(FFB9H)
Perform the reset operation for each alarm.

8 - 41
ALARM
Power
module
Display
general alarms
SPECIFICATIONS
(3) Alarm Classification according to the level or group

Alarms can be classified according to the level or group.
The contents displayed at alarm occurrence can refined according to the level or type.
Example: Refine the alarms to be displayed by changing the switching device (level switching:
D32, group switching: D33).
Display in order of alarm occurrence
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
12:25
09:40
07:35
Comment
Level
Hydraulic pressure error
1
Low coolant pressure

Oil refill
Little material remaining
Fuel refill
2
1
1
2
Group
1
1
2
2
2
Level
switching device
(D32)
0
Group
switching device
(D33)
0
Display level 1 alarms only

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 12:25
04/06/01 09:40
Comment
Level Group Level
switching device
Hydraulic pressure error
1
1
Oil refill
1
1
2
2
(D32)
Group
switching device
(D33)
0
Display level 2 alarms only

Occurred
04/06/01 12:25
04/06/01
09:40
Comment
Oil refill
Level Group
1
2
Level
switching device
(D32)
1
Group
switching device
(D33)
2
Remark
Switching device
Set the switching device as shown below by the advanced alarm display function.
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab
Example:
Extended tab of Advanced User Alarm Display dialog box
8 - 42

1
2 Display example of general alarms (Detailed display)
OVERVIEW
General alarm's details such as causes or corrective actions can be displayed on another screen
(comment window, base screen or window screen).
Setting example
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Comment window

Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the
comment window.
COMMON SETTING
Example) Advanced alarm display

Oil pressure error.
Base Screen1
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
16:13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01
15:51 Drive module error
04/06/01
10:25 Control module error
Base Screen1
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Comment Window
(2) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

Tank A
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
6
90
40
60
Run Stop
Run Stop
Run Stop
Base Screen1
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
Base Screen5
(3) Window screen

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Feed material from the

feed opening.
Feed opening
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
16:13
15:51
10:25
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Base Screen1
Occurred Date
04/06/01 1 6: 13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error
Base Screen1

Window Screen10
8 - 43
ALARM
Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25
3 Action when buffer is full

If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or
almost reaches the "Stored Number", the status can be notified using a device.
(1) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored
and confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be
confirmed.
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Confirm the historical number

and occurring number
Full
notification:
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49
Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14
Fuse error
(2) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
Issue the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity"
on the Basic tab.)
Select the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in "Action When Buffer is Full" on the
Basic tab.)
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Full
notification:
Full notification
Occurred Comment
Remark
04/6/1 14:46:49
Temp. error
04/6/1 13:30:14
Fuse error
(1) Settings
Secton8.2.5
(1) Basic tab
(2) Buffering area

Secton8.2.2
8 - 44
Collection flow and collection mode

1
OVERVIEW
(3) Buffering size

The buffering size required for advanced user alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the user area (C drive + add-on memory) of the GOT, decreases.
Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the user area.
(a) Settings relevant to buffering area size
Number of device points set for the alarm ("Alarm (Device) Points" of the Device
tab)
Total number of alarms saved (Stored Number)
Cumulative
No alarm collection
Number of device points set for the alarm ("Alarm (Device) Points" of the Device
tab)
(b) Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced user alarms
The buffering area size for the alarm ID being set can be confirmed in the "Buffering Area Size"
on the Basic tab.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Buffering Area Size
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 45
ALARM
Historical
SPECIFICATIONS
Settings relevant to buffering area size
COMMON SETTING
Collection mode
8.2.4
Placement and settings
1 Register comments in advance.

Register alarm messages in a comment group. (
comment group)
Secton4.1.4
Registering comments as

Select the [Common]
Click
[Advanced Alarm Observation]
[Advanced User Alarm] menus.
(Advanced User Alarm Observation)
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings by referring to the description below.
(
Remark
When setting from Workspace(Project)

Right-click
the setting dialog box will appear.
in Workspace(Project) to select "New", and
Make the settings by referring to the description below. (

Advanced user alarm observation dialog box)
8 - 46

8.2.4 Placement and settings
Secton8.2.5
1 Advanced user alarm observation (Alarm ID list) dialog box

Make the settings of advanced user alarms (devices, watch cycle, and collection mode) for each alarm
ID.
Up to 255 alarm IDs can be set.
This screen is displayed only when [Common]
[Advanced User
Alarm] menu is selected.
Note that it is not displayed when setting is attempted from the project workspace.
OVERVIEW
Setting items
2
SPECIFICATIONS
8.2.5
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
Click this button when setting a new alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
(
This section
Click this button to when editing the selected alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
Copy
Paste
This section
Click this button to copy the selected alarm ID.

Click this button when pasting the copied alarm ID to the alarm ID list.
The destination of the alarm ID can be set.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected alarm ID.
Delete All
Click this button to delete all alarm IDs.
Close
Click this button to close the setting dialog box of advanced user alarm observation.
LAMP, SWITCH
Edit
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 47
ALARM
New
2 Advanced user alarm observation dialog box

Set advanced user alarms.
(1) Basic tab
Set the collection mode and buffering for saving the alarm history.
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
Alarm ID
Set the alarm ID No. (1 to 32767) and name of the advanced user alarm.
Observation Alarm Name
Up to 32 characters can be entered for the alarm name.

Select a mode to collect advanced user alarms. (
Secton8.2.2
Collection flow and collection
mode)
Historical
:Data of advanced user alarms are collected as history. Historical data is added
Cumulative
:The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
every time an advanced user alarm occurs.
Collection Mode
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm
type.
No Alarm Collection :Only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed. The history of restored
alarms is not saved.
Check this item when displaying collected advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm popup display
Popup Display
Basic
function.
(
Check this item when storing the total number of advanced user alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of occurrence,
Device for
check, and restoration.
Historical Number
This item is available only when "Collection Mode" is "Historical."

After checking this item, click the Dev...
(
button to set the device for storing that number.
Check this item when storing the number of advanced user alarms that are currently occurring in the word
Device for
Occurring
Number
device.
(
button to set the device for storing that number.
8 - 48

8.2.5 Setting items
Device
File Save
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Set the buffering for saving the history of collected advanced user alarms.
This item is available only when "Historical" or "Cumulative" is selected as the collection mode.
Buffering
Secton8.2.2
Secton8.2.3
Action when buffer is full
This item is available only when the collection mode is "Historical."

Set the number greater than or equal to the "Alarm (Device) Points" on the Device tab.
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation to be performed when the number of the advanced user alarms stored in the buffering
area reaches the "Stored Number"

Action When
Buffer is Full
Delete Old Data
:The oldest one is deleted from the restored advanced user alarms and the data of
Stop New Addition
:The collection of advanced user alarms is interrupted. Even if a new advanced
the new advanced user alarm are added.

user alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Check this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable advanced user
COMMON SETTING
Stored Number
SPECIFICATIONS
Set the number of advanced user alarms to be saved as history (32767 max.).
alarms reaches below the number set in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity."

(
button to set the full alert signal device.
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area has decreased (storable
advanced user alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical" and a check mark is placed for "Full
Notification Signal Device" is checked.
Buffer Full Alert
When the number of storable advanced user alarms is equal to or less than the number set here, the "Full
Capacity
Notification Signal Device" turns on.

Example :Setting "Stored Number" to 1000 and "Buffer Full Alert Capacity" to 10
The full notification signal device turns on when the number of total saved advanced user
alarms is 990 or more.
Check this time to delete the restored advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area by the device.
Buffer Clear

(
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Signal Device
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Full Notification
button to set the Buffer Clear.
Device

(
button to set the buffer clear completed signal device.
This item can be set only when "Buffer Clear" is check-marked.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Completed Signal
LAMP, SWITCH
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Buffer Clear

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 49
ALARM
Basic
(2) Device tab

Set the timing for collecting advanced user alarms and make the settings of advanced user alarms
(device settings for advanced user alarms, comments displayed when advanced user alarms
occur, resetting of advanced user alarms, and the level/group settings).
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
Watch Cycle
Set a cycle to monitor the device (1 to 3600s).
Alarm (Device) Points
Set the number of device points (1 to 32767 points).

The maximum points (32767) are the total alarm (device) points set on all alarm IDs.
Device Type

Bit
:Select this option when monitoring through the ON/OFF of a bit device.
Signed BIN16
:Select this option when monitoring through a 16-bit binary value of the singed
word device.
Unsigned BIN16
:Select this option when monitoring through a 16-bit binary value of the unsigned
word device.
Signed BIN32
:Select this option when monitoring through a 32-bit binary value of the singed
word device.
Unsigned BIN32
:Select this option when monitoring through a 32-bit binary value of the unsigned
word device.
BCD16
:Select this option when monitoring through a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal)
value of the word device.
BCD32
:Select this option when monitoring through a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal)
value of the word device.
Real
:Select this option when monitoring through the device by the data type of floating
real number.
Device No.
Select a method to set the device No.

Continuous
:Devices are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:Devices are numbered at random.
Fixed
:In the word device setting, multiple occurrence ranges are set by the same word
device.
Detail No.*3
Select a method of setting the comment No., base screen and window screen in the comment group to be
displayed with details.
Continuous
:The comments/screens are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:The comments/screens are numbered at random.
General Comment
Middle Comment
Select a method of setting the comments in the comment group to be displayed for general alarms, middle
alarms, and higher alarms.
Continuous
:The comments are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
:The comments are numbered at random.
Higher Comment

8 - 50

8.2.5 Setting items
Device
File Save
Item
Comment Group*1
Alarm setup list
Description
Set a group No. of the comment group displayed with the comments of general alarms, middle alarms,
OVERVIEW
Basic
higher alarms, and detailed display.

Set up a device for the alarm and comments displayed when an alarm occurs.
Device
Set up a device for the alarm. (
Set the device value condition for displaying an alarm.
Alarm Range
ON
: Alarms are displayed by the rising (OFF
ON) of the bit device.
OFF
: Alarms are displayed by the falling (ON
OFF) of the bit device.
SPECIFICATIONS
When [Device Type] is set to [Bit]
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit]

Click the Exp. button to set up the range of the values of the word device to display the alarm.
(
Comment No.*1*2
Middle Comment
No.
*1*2
Higher Comment
Set the comment to be displayed when the alarm occurs by the comment No. of the comment group.
For an alarm, specify the comment Nos. of the comment groups used for the higher alarm, middle alarm, and
general alarm, respectively.
Specify "0" when not displaying the middle or higher alarm.
No. *1*2
COMMON SETTING
General
Select a method of detailed display.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Set the comment No., base screen No., and window screen No. of the comment group displayed in "Detail
:Details are not displayed.
Comment Window*3
:Details are displayed on the window for detail display. Registered
Base Screen
:The base screen is displayed as detail display. The base screen set to the
Window Screen
:The window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed as detail display. The
comments are displayed on the comment window.

detail No. of the device is displayed.
window screen set to the device's detail No. is displayed.
Set the comment No., window screen No., and base screen No. of the comment group displayed in details
when an alarm occurs.
Select whether or not to enable the reset operation of alarm (turn off or reset the device specified for the
alarm by the touch switch for resetting).
(

YES
:The device specified for the alarm will be turned off or set to the reset value.
NO
:The device specified for the alarm will not be turned off or set to the reset value.
If device is a word device, set a reset value after selecting this option.
Set a level (1 to 255) to the alarm.

Level
Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or only the alarms at the particular level
can be displayed.
Group
(Import)*5
(Export)*5
Set a group (1 to 255) on the alarm.

Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or only the alarms of the particular group can be displayed.
Reads out the advanced user alarm observation settings that have been edited in a CSV file / Unicode text
file to GT Designer2.
Saves the advanced user alarm observation settings that have been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file /
Unicode text file.

8.2.5 Setting items
LAMP, SWITCH
Reset
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Detail No.
8 - 51
ALARM
Detail Type*3*4
Not Display
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No."
*1 Method of setting the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs

A setting example for displaying comments in comment groups as higher alarms, middle alarms, general
alarms, and detail display is provided below.
Register the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs as a comment group.
Comment group No.1

(for higher alarms)
Register a comment group for

each alarm hierarchy.
Comment group No.2
(for middle alarms)
Comment group No.3

(for general alarms)
Comment group No.4

(for detail display)
Set the comments registered at step 1 as follows by the advanced user alarm observation function.
1) Set the comment group No. to be displayed for each hierarchy.
2) Set the comments to be displayed for each hierarchy (general alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detail display) of the alarm.
Comment displayed
for alarm M10
Comment displayed
for alarm M11
Comment displayed
for alarm M12
Set the comment No. of

comment group No.3.

comment group No.2.

comment group No.1.

comment group No.4.
Example) Comment display when alarm M10 occurs

Display of general alarms
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
8 - 52
Check
Display of middle alarms

Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment C error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Display of higher alarms
Detail display
Line1 error
Line2 error
Line1 error
Oil supply
Equipment B error
Equipment C error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

8.2.5 Setting items
Check
Check
When the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs is set as follows, "No Message" is displayed
Comment settings have not been performed (comment No. remains "0.")
No comment has been registered for the comment No.
In addition, when alarms are hierarchized and comments are not set for some hierarchies, it is
recommended to set blank comments (enter space only) so that "No Message" is not displayed.
OVERVIEW
*2 When "No Message" is displayed as comment
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Example 1: When no comment is specified

No comment is set.
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
"No message"
is displayed.
Check
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Line1 error
No message
No message
Equipment A error
No message
No message
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
COMMON SETTING
Example 2: When a blank comment is specified

Set a blank comment
(comment No.2).
"
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
" Enter a space character.
Register a blank comment as shown

above.
A blank comment is displayed.

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Check
LAMP, SWITCH
Check
Line1 error
*3 Detail type settings
All alarms are displayed on the same destination specified on "Detail Type" (not display, comment
window, base screen, or window screen) when "Detail No." is set to "Continuous."
To change the "Detail Type" settings, set "Detail No." to "Random."
In addition, when changing the settings from "Random" to "Continuous," the destinations of all
alarms set on "Detail Type" are changed to the same destination as the top alarm.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy
Equipment A error

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 53
ALARM
Pwr. module error

Drive module error
*4 Method of displaying the comment window

1) Display the detail display screen
by the one-touch operation
Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
2) Display the detail display screen

by the touch switch
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28
Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28
Details
Display on the comment window
Display on the window screen

(overlap window)
Check line 2
Display on the base screen
Check line 2
Check line 2
Alarm historical display
The specified comment is displayed.
Alarm historical display
The specified base screen and window screen are displayed.
(a) Number of characters available for comment window

39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
(b) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
(c) Comment text is displayed as follows
Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse, blink and HQ fonts are not supported, regardless of the comment
registration settings.
(d) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a
new line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line
feed for the comment.
Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

When a comment is registered
8 - 54

8.2.5 Setting items
Comment window display
*5 Import/Export
OVERVIEW
The exported CSV file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software.
The CSV file, after editing, can be imported to and opened by GT Designer2.
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Editing the exported file
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Exported in CSV file
Add the setting using

such as Microsoft Excel.
R
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Importing to GT Designer2
LAMP, SWITCH
The added contents

are displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment.

Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is
used.
8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 55
ALARM
Import/export in multilingual environment
(3) File save tab

Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the memory
card.
(
Basic
Secton8.2.2
Device
Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure)
File Save
Item
Description
Check the box when writing the advanced user alarm history saved in the buffering area to the memory card
Save Alarm Log File*1
as an alarm log file.

The data are written to the memory card as a binary format file (*.G1A).
This item can be checked only when "Historical" or "Cumulative" is selected for "Collection Mode."
Drive Name
The destination drive is displayed (fixed to "A: Standard CF Card").

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.
Folder
File
Name*2
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.

By default, the "Project Folder" from [Common]
Access
[System Environment] is preset.
Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
File Name*2
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.

By default, the file name is set to AAM
Select a timing at which the advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the memory
card.
When "Sampling," "ON Sampling," or "OFF Sampling" is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to 1440
Trigger Type
Store
minutes).
Trigger
Rise
Sampling
Fall
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Specify the store trigger device.

Device
(
8 - 56

8.2.5 Setting items
Basic
Device
File Save
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
Writing Notification Device
(
Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Writing Error Notification
Device
This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
displayed on the GOT utility.)
Ex.: AAM00001.G1A -> AAM00001.G1A.BAK
For the details of *1-*2, refer to the following.
*1 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the
following status, system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
COMMON SETTING
If a backup file is present (check "Auto Backup at Save"), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no
system alarm occurs.)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.2.5 Setting items
8 - 57
ALARM
Auto Backup at Save*1
SPECIFICATIONS
restored.
*2 Folder name and file name

(a) Number of characters set for folder or file name.
GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below.
Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters.
Users only can rename folder or file name.
(Other than folder and file name are automatically added.)
Example: G1A file Path in memory card (for GT15)
A:\
Folder Name
(2 characters)
File Name
(1 character)
Drive name
(1 character)
.G1A
Extension
(4 characters)
Max. 78 characters
Remark
When setting hierarchy to the folder

When setting [folder name], enter \ between folders.
(\ is counted as one character.)
(Setting example)
[Folder name] : Project1 \ abc
Project1
abc
(b) Character strings that cannot be set

The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name. Even small
characters of those cannot be used.
COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
Also, folder and file name as shown below cannot be used.
Folder name starting as G1
Folder and file name starting from . (period) or \
Folder and file name ending at . (period) or \
Folder and file name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)
8 - 58

8.2.5 Setting items
8.2.6
Precautions
OVERVIEW
The following provides the precautions on use of advanced user alarms.

(1) If the same data are in the memory card
SPECIFICATIONS
2
Overwritten!
Save
Ocr.
Ocr.
04/06/01
Oil error
Ocr.
3
AAM00000.G1A
AAM00000.G1A
COMMON SETTING
Temp. error
Fuse error
Save
Touch
Key code: FFBBH

or
store trigger device
The data in the memory card are overwritten. Therefore, if the data needs be kept unchanged,
move the data from the memory card to the PC by either of the following methods.
Upload resource data by GT Designer2.
Read out the CSV file saved in the memory card by PC.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Status
04/06/01
04/06/01
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred Comment
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.2.6 Precautions
8 - 59
ALARM
(2) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file

While saving an alarm log file in the memory card, the observation of the advanced user alarm with
the alarm ID corresponding to the log file is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced user alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Example: When saving advanced user alarm data with alarm ID1
While saving an alarm log file in the memory

card, the observation of the advanced user
alarm with the alarm ID corresponding to
the log file is interrupted temporarily!
Saving...
Alarm ID1
GOT internal memory
Occurred
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Alarm ID2
Buffering area
Save
Alarm ID3
(3) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all the advanced alarms
(advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms) to be saved as an alarm log file (set on the
File Save tab) are saved in the memory card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.
(4) When turning on and off the GOT's CF card access switch
When the memory card is pulled out of GOT, if the CF card access switch is turned on and off, data
are saved forcedly.
Do not pull the memory card out of GOT until the signal turns off or the LED turns off and the file is
saved completely.
The drive A file accessing signal (system signal 2-2.b0) turns off.
GOT's CF card access LED turns off.
Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and
advanced system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set on the File Save tab).
(5) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match with the project in the GOT,
the file cannot be read out of the memory card. (Alarm history before the GOT is powered off
cannot be restored.)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
"Writing Error Notification Device" turns on in the File Save tab.
System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.
8 - 60

8.2.6 Precautions
Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.

Not collect advanced user alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set "Full Notification Signal Device" on the Basic tab, and clear the
Secton8.2.2
Retention and clear of collected
2
SPECIFICATIONS
restored alarm when the device turns on. (

advanced alarm data)
1
OVERVIEW
(6) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed based on settings
made in the "Action When Buffer is Full" on the Basic tab.
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification
signal, operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced user alarm observation
function.
Operation (difference)
Item
Turns on when the number of alarms saved
Device" set by advanced alarm observation
has reached that set in "Stored Number
and drive status notification signal (system
".(when the buffering area reserved for
signal 2-2.b4: drive A full signal)
advanced user alarms is full).
Difference between "Writing Notification

Turns on when advanced user alarm data
are being written in the memory card.
signal 2-2.b0: drive A file accessing signal)
Turns on when the memory card is full.
6
Turns on when data are being written in the
memory card (also when data other than
advanced user alarms are being written.)
Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm

log file in the memory card is accessed
Difference between "Writing Error Notification
signal 2-2.b7: drive A file access error signal)
(for example, the project of the alarm log

file in the memory card does not match
with the project in GOT).
Turns on when the memory card cannot
be accessed (for example, the memory
Turns on when the memory card cannot be

accessed (for example, the memory card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set
to "transfer prohibited").
card is not set, or the CF card access

switch is set to "transfer prohibited").
LAMP, SWITCH
Difference between "Full Notification Signal
Drive status notification signal
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".

The memory card is full.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(7) Error when the alarm log file is saved

If an error occurs when a file is saved, "Writing Error Notification Device" on the File Save tab turns
on.
Confirm the following.
COMMON SETTING
3
Action When Buffer is Full
Full Notification Signal Device

8.2.6 Precautions
8 - 61
ALARM
(9) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to
the following.
(10) Unicode text file converted by the utility
For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
8 - 62

8.2.6 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System

Alarm)
When an error occurs in the GOT, controller or network, the coadvanced system alarmsrresponding error
code and message are displayed.
Before setting advanced system alarms

3
COMMON SETTING
This section explains the advanced system alarms of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced system alarms.
SPECIFICATIONS

System
Advanced
user alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
User
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced
user alarm
Advanced
system alarm
6
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System Alarm)
8 - 63
ALARM
8.3.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced system alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced system alarms) only
Relevant to advance alarm observation (advanced system alarms) only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm observation (advanced system alarms) and others
As GOT may not the display overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
screen data.
Setting items
objects within GOT]
8 - 64

1

OVERVIEW
(Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)
Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error
1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
B 348
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
SPECIFICATIONS
code, GOT error detecting signal).
The system alarm message is cleared.
3
Drive A File Accessing Signal*1
COMMON SETTING
Drive A Full Signal*1
Notifies of the status of access to the drive.
Notifies that the drive is short of capacity.
Drive A
The file is being accessed.
Available capacity is
less than 1KB.
Drive A File Access Error Signal*1*2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Drive A
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Notifies that access to the drive has failed.
Drive A
File access error
*1
The advanced system alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full,
however, operate differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
1-2.b0).
LAMP, SWITCH
The drive A file access error signal is reset by the file access error reset signal (read device: system signals
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 65
ALARM
Section 8.3.6
*2
Section 2.9.1
Buffer Flash Forced Saving Signal (GS520.b0)
Saves the data in the buffering area in a memory card.*1
Buffering area
*3
Alarm data are saved only when "Save Alarm Log File" is check-marked on the File Save tab.
If not checked, the advanced system alarms are not saved.
(
8 - 66
Section 8.3.5
File save tab)

8.3.2
Before setting
OVERVIEW
This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced system alarm.
1 Monitored alarm types and setting

(1) Alarm types
The following alarms can be monitored in the advanced system alarm.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1) CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm.
2) GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm.
3) Network error : A network error is displayed as an alarm.
The types of the system alarms monitored can be selected by the setting.
Because only particular alarm types can be displayed, alarm details can be observed quickly.
3
(
Section 8.3.5
COMMON SETTING
(2) Settings necessary to use advanced system alarms

To use advanced system alarms, check "Use System Alarm" and specify the target.
Basic tab)
1) Check "Use System Alarm."
2) Check the target of monitoring.
In the advanced system alarm (advanced alarm observation), set the types of the alarms collected
and the collection method.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Advanced System Alarms Observation
LAMP, SWITCH
Types of advanced system alarms monitored

Collection mode
Setting for history saving (alarms collected in the User
area)
Setting for the data retention of advanced system alarms
under power failure (saving on the memory card)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display of advanced system alarms

Advanced system alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.

8 - 67
ALARM

System Alarm)
2 Collection flow and collection mode

(1) Collection flow
(a) CPU errors and network errors
CPU errors and network errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive +
add-on memory) in cycles of 3 seconds regardless of the displayed screen. (Watch cycle
cannot be changed.)
In the buffering area, collected advanced system alarm data are temporarily saved as
historical data, and they are displayed on the GOT as alarms.
Alarm data are collected into the buffering area every 3 s,
regardless of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
User area
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 400 Unable to communicate with CPU
04/6/1 13:30:14 9 AC down error
Buffering area
Displays advanced system alarm

data collected into the buffering
area as alarms.
(b) GOT errors

GOT errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory)
Remark
(1) Deletion of data in the buffering area

This section
Deletion of advanced system alarms on GOT
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area

Data to be collected differ depending on the history collection mode.
8 - 68

(2) Alarm collection modes

The history collection mode is selected from two options: historical mode and no alarm collection.
OVERVIEW
(
Section 8.3.5
Basic tab)
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
Example: When displaying data by advanced alarm display
Message
400 Unable to communicate with CPU
9 AC down error
803 Transident error
Status Restore Check
1)
2)
Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.
16:30
18:50
16:20
3)
4)
5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
Description
Info. displayed
No alarm collection
COMMON SETTING
Historical mode
1) Occurred
The date/time of the alarm occurrence is displayed.

An error code and an alarm message are displayed when an alarm occurs.
For error codes and corrective actions, refer to the following.
2) Comment
GT1
User's Manual
Alarm messages registered in GOT in advance are displayed.
4) Restore
Ocr.
: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk.
: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr.
: Alarm has been restored
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The status of the alarm is displayed.

3) Alarm status
----
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display

Message
Restore Check
Check
Message
Restore Check
19:00
(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)
(a) Historical mode

In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm
occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
(b) No alarm collection
In this mode, the latest alarms only are displayed.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
5) Check
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 69
ALARM
(3) Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced alarm display for each collection mode.
Alarm
occurred
Alarm
occurred
"803 Transient error"
Restoration*2
Alarm
occurred
"501 Warning! Built-in battery

is dead".
11:30
1)
12:00
2)
Alarm checked
by user*1
15:30
3)
16:00
18:25
4)
5)
Alarm resetting
by user*2
*1
Alarms are checked with the touch switch for confirmation.
*2
In the advanced system alarm function, the alarm status displayed on the GOT is not changed to "Restored"
even if the cause of the GOT error, CPU error, or network error is eliminated.
(
This section
Deletion of advanced system alarms on GOT)
(a) Historical mode

1) "Transient error" occurs.
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error
Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 501 Warning! Built-in battery is dead Ocr.
2) "Transient error" is checked.

Occurred
Status
Occurrence
Message
Chk.
Restore Check
"transient error"
occurs!
Restore Check
12:00
3) Restored from "Transient error"

Occurred
Message
Status
Chk.
(Key code: FFB4H)
Restore Check
12:00
4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
Status
Chk.
"transient
error" is checked.
Check
Restore Check
16:00
12:00
"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.
"The alarm is
reset".
Reset
(Key code: FFB9H)
5) The restored "Transient error" occurred again

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
8 - 70
Message
803 Transient error
803 Transient error
Status
Ocr.
Chk.
501 Warning! Built-in battery is dead Ocr.
Restore Check
16:00

12:00
The alarm status

is changed to
"Restored" on the
GOT and the
restored time is
displayed.
A new line
is added and
displayed.
1
OVERVIEW
(b) No alarm collection mode

Only the latest alarms of GOT errors, CPU errors, and network errors are displayed.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Not collected in the no
alarm collection mode.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
"transient error"
occurs!
2) "Transient error" is checked.

Occurred
Message
Chk.
12:00
"transient error"
is checked
Occurred
Message
Chk.
12:00
4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
(Key code: FFB4H)
"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.
4
Data are deleted
when the alarm
status is changed
to "Restored."
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3) Restored from "Transient error"
COMMON SETTING
Check
5) The restored "Transient error" occurred again.
5
The generated
alarm is displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
Message
Ocr.
Display of advanced system alarms

Advanced system alarms are displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
System Alarm)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
1) "Transient error" occurs.

Occurred
Message
Ocr.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 71
ALARM
3 Deletion of advanced system alarms on GOT

Delete advanced system alarms on the GOT by the procedure below.
1. Change the alarm status on the GOT from "Occurred" to "Restored."
2. Delete the historical data of advanced system alarms.
(1) Changing alarm status on the GOT from "Occurred" to "Restored"
In the advanced system alarm function, the alarm status on the GOT does not change to
"Restored" even if the error causes on the GOT, controller or network are eliminated.
Perform either of the following operations.
Error
occurred
Cause
eliminated
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Ocr.

04/06/01 9 AC down error
Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error
Ocr.
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.
The display on the GOT shows alarm

occurrences even if the alarm causes
on the GOT, controller and network
are eliminated.
(a) Change the selected alarm status to "Restored."

Change the selected alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored" by the touch switch (key
code: FFB9H). (

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Rstr.
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Ocr.
Ocr.
Reset
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Ocr.
Ocr.
(Key code: FFB9H)
(b) Change all the alarm statuses to "Restored."

Turn on the GOT error reset signal of the system information (system signal 1-1.b13), and
change all the alarm statuses to "Restored." (
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Ocr.
Ocr.

Occurred
Message
Status
Reset
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Rstr.
Rstr.
(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)
8 - 72

(2) Deleting the advanced system alarm history

Delete the "Restored" alarms by any of the following operations.
Basic tab)
Occurred
Occurred
Message
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Status
Delete
Turn on "Buffer Clear"
(b) Clear by touch switch

Using the touch switch allows you to delete one or all of the "Restored" alarm data on the GOT.
(
Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10

Message
9 AC down error
803 Transient error
Ocr.
Status
Rstr.
Rstr.
Ocr.
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Delete
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
(Key code: Clear one FFB6H

Clear all FFB7H)
(c) Powering off or resetting the GOT

Powering off or resetting the GOT deletes the alarm data.
However, if the advanced system alarm data are saved on the memory card, the data can be
retained even if the GOT is powered off. (
system alarm data under power failure)
Section 8.3.3
SPECIFICATIONS
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Message
Retention of advanced
(d) When the following settings are made within utilities
COMMON SETTING
Section 8.3.5
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
OVERVIEW
(a) Clear by device

Turning on "Buffer Clear" deletes all the "Restored" alarm data on the GOT.
5
Description
Display
Operation
GOT setup
Main menu
Self check
[I/O check]
LAMP, SWITCH
(e) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 73
ALARM
Debug & self check
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Item
(1) Before changing alarm status on the GOT from "Occurred" to "Restored"
Eliminate the alarm causes on the GOT, controller and network.
If an alarm status on the GOT is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored" without
eliminating the alarm cause, the same alarm occurs again.
Example: When alarms are reset with "9 AC down error" occurred
Occurred
Message
Status

04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Ocr.
Reset
Occurred
Message
Reset the alarms

(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)
Status

04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
Rstr.
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 12:00 9 AC down error

Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 9 AC down error
All the alarms are

changed to the status
of "Restored."
Rstr.
The same alarm occurs

after resetting.
Displays the date and
time where the alarm is
detected again after it
is reset.
(2) Erasable advanced system alarms on the GOT

Only the advanced system alarms whose statuses are indicated as "Restored"
can be deleted.
To delete the alarm data on the GOT, change the alarm status indicated on the
GOT from "Occurred" to "Restored."
8 - 74

8.3.3
Useful information
If the number of the advanced system alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches
or almost reaches the "Stored Number", the status can be notified using a device.
(1) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored
and confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced system alarms that are currently occurring can also be
confirmed.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Action when buffer is full
OVERVIEW
This section describes some useful functions to know when using the advanced system alarms.
Historical
number:
1254
Occurring
number:
Confirm the historical

number and occurring
number
COMMON SETTING
3
Full
notification:
Occurred
Comment

04/6/1 13:30:14 9 AC down error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Issue the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity"
on the Basic tab.)
Select the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in "Action When Buffer is Full" on the
Basic tab.)
1254
Occurring
number:
Occurred
Full
notification:
Comment

04/6/1 13:30:14 9 AC down error
6
Full
notification
LAMP, SWITCH
Historical
number:
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(2) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
(1) Settings
Section 8.3.5
Basic tab
(2) Buffering area

Section 8.3.2

8 - 75
ALARM
Remark
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(3) Buffering size

The buffering size required for advanced system alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the area in the GOT internal memory applicable for other objects,
decreases. Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the internal memory.
(a) Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode
Historical
No alarm collection
Setting related to buffering area size

Total No. of alarms saved (Stored Number)
----
(b) Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced system alarms
The size can be confirmed at "Buffering Area Size" on the basic tab.
Buffering Area Size
8 - 76

The timing of saving data in the memory card can be set freely.
(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can also be saved by pressing the touch switch.
400 CPU...
9 AC...
400 CPU...
9 AC...
803 Tran...
501 Warn...
The status saved

before power-off
Current status
COMMON SETTING
Data
are
stored
Power on
Power off
The status saved before the power-off

and the current status are displayed.
be monitored using the device. (
Section 8.3.5
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced system alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can
File save tab)
Writing
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
Comment
Writing
Write error
LAMP, SWITCH

04/6/1 13:30:14 9 AC down error
Save
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Status during writing can be monitored.

8 - 77
ALARM
Memory card
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Data retention under power failure

By saving advanced system alarm data in the memory card as alarm log file, the data are retained
even when GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the memory card, the alarm log file is read
out automatically, and the historical status of the advanced system alarm saved before GOT
power-off is restored.
OVERVIEW
2 Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure
(3) File name and saving timing

Any file name can be given. (
Section 8.3.5
File save tab)
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
(4) Method of data retention under power failure

Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the
following methods. The file names and so forth need to be set on the File Save tab in advance.
Save by the store trigger device (
Save by the touch switch (
display)
Section 8.3.5
File save tab)
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm
Save by the buffer flash forced save signal (GS520.b0) (

register (GS))
Section 2.9.1
GOT special
(5) Required memory capacity

The following shows the memory capacity required for retention of advanced user alarm data under
power failure.
197 + (71 + (Averaged number of comment characters
2))
Number of alarms.
(1) Information to be saved

The alarm log file content to be saved in the memory card varies depending on
the collection mode. (
Section 8.3.2
Collection flow and collection mode)
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the memory card
The advanced system alarm data saved in the memory card as an alarm log file
can be utilized as follows by the utility.
(
GT1 Users Manual)
The history of advanced system alarms can be displayed as a historical graph.
The file can be converted into a CSV/text file by the GOT's utility so that it can
be displayed on a PC and so on.
Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file
By checking "Auto Backup at Save" on the File Save tab, the alarm log file just
before saved can be saved as a backup file.
Section 8.3.5
File save tab
3 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
For details, refer to the manual below.
GT1
8 - 78
User's Manual

8.3.4
Select [Common]
Click
OVERVIEW

[Advanced System Alarm].
(Advanced System Alarm Observation.)
When setting from Workspace(Project)
3
COMMON SETTING
in Workspace(Project). The setup dialog box is
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
Double-click
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Double-click
displayed.

8 - 79
ALARM
Remark
Section 8.3.5 Setting items) to

SPECIFICATIONS
2 The setup dialog box is displayed. Refer to the later description (

continue the setting.
8.3.5
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the types of the advanced system alarms monitored, the collection mode, and the buffering details
for saving historical data.
Basic
File Save
Item
Use System Alarm
Description
Set whether to enable the advanced system alarm function or not.
Check "Use System Alarm," and check any of the checkboxes for the target alarms (CPU error, GOT error,
and network error).
Target
Section 8.3.2
Monitored alarm types and setting)
Select a method for handling advanced system alarms. (
Section 8.3.2
Collection flow and
collection mode)
Historical
: Data of advanced system alarms are collected as history. Historical data
No Alarm Collection
: Only the latest alarms of GOT error, CPU error, and network error are
Collection Mode
is added every time an advanced system alarm occurs.

collected. When advanced system alarm statuses are changed to
"Restored" on GOT, they are deleted.
Check this item when storing the total number of advanced system alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of occurrence,
Basic
Device for
Historical Number
check, and restoration.

This item is available only when "Collection Mode" is "Historical."
After checking this item, click the Dev... button to set the device for storing that number.
(
Check the box when storing the number of currently "occurred (Ocr.)" advanced system alarms in a word
Device for
device.
Occurring
After checking the box, click the Dev... button to set up the device to which the number of the currently
Number
occurred alarms.
(

8 - 80

8.3.5 Setting items
Basic
File Save
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Make buffering settings for saving the collected advanced system alarms.
This item can be set only when "Historical" is selected for "Collection Mode".
Buffering
Section 8.3.2
Section 8.3.3
Stored Number
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical."
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation performed when the number of the advanced system alarms stored in the buffering area
reaches the "Stored Number."
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical."
Action When Buffer is Full
Delete Old Data
: The oldest advanced system alarm is deleted from those of in the restored
SPECIFICATIONS
Set the number of advanced system alarms to be saved (512 to 32767).
Stop New Addition
: The collection of advanced system alarms is stopped. Even if a new advanced

system alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Check this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable advanced
system alarms reaches below the number set in "Buffer Full Alert Capacity."
Device

(
button to set the full alert signal device.
Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area becomes small (No. of
storable advanced system alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when the collection mode is "Historical" and a check mark is placed for "Full
Notification Signal Device".
Buffer Full Alert Capacity
When the number of storable advanced system alarms is equal to or less than the number set here, the "Full
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Full Notification Signal
COMMON SETTING
status, and new alarm data are added.
Notification Signal Device" turns on.
The full notification signal device turns on when the number of total saved advanced system
alarms is 990 or more.
Check this time to delete the restored advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area by the device.
(
button to set the Buffer Clear.
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
Signal Device
button to set the buffer clear completed signal device.

LAMP, SWITCH
Buffer Clear Completed
This item can be set only when "Buffer Clear" is check-marked.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.3.5 Setting items
8 - 81
ALARM
Buffer Clear
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Example: Setting "Stored Number" to 1000 and "Buffer Full Alert Capacity" to 10
2 File save tab

The alarm history saved in the buffering area can be stored on the memory card by this tab setting.
(
Basic
Section 8.3.3
Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure)
File Save
Item
Description
Check the box when writing the advanced system alarm history saved in the buffering area to the memory
card as an alarm log file.
Save Alarm Log File*1
The data are written to the memory card as a binary format file ( *.G1A).
This item can be checked only when "Historical" is selected for "Collection Mode."
Drive Name

File Access
Folder Name
*2

By default, the "Project Folder" from [Common]
File Name*2

By default, the file name is set to AAM00000.
Select a timing at which the advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the memory
card.
When "Sampling," "ON Sampling," or "OFF Sampling" is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to 1440
Trigger Type
Store
minutes).
Trigger
Rise
Sampling
Fall
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Specify the store trigger device.

Device
(
8 - 82

8.3.5 Setting items
Basic
File Save
Item
Description
Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
(
OVERVIEW

Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
Device
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
displayed on the GOT utility.)
AAM00000.G1A.BAK
*1 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the
following status, system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file is present (check "Auto Backup at Save"), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no
system alarm occurs.)
COMMON SETTING
For the details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example: AAM00000.G1A
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.3.5 Setting items
8 - 83
ALARM
Auto Backup at Save*1
SPECIFICATIONS
restored.

(1) Number of characters set for folder or file name.
Example: G1A file Path in memory card (for GT15)
A :\
Folder name
(2 characters)
File name
(1 character)
.G1A
Extension
(4 characters)
Drive name
(1 character)
Max. 78 characters
Remark

(Setting example)
Project1
abc
(2) Character strings that cannot be set

COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
8 - 84

8.3.5 Setting items
8.3.6
Precautions
(2) Alarm resetting

The advanced system alarm status on the GOT is not changed to "Restored" even if the alarm
causes on the GOT, controller, or network are eliminated.
Error
occurred
Cause
eliminated
Occurred
Message
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Controllers for which advanced system alarms are not displayed on GOT
Errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the advanced system
alarm of GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
Inverter
3
COMMON SETTING
OVERVIEW
The following are precautions for using advanced system alarms.
Status
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

Ocr.
Ocr.
5
Even if alarm causes on the GOT,
controller, and network are eliminated,
the status of alarm occurrence is still
displayed on the GOT.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.3.6 Precautions
8 - 85
ALARM
Section 8.3.2
(3) If the same data are in the memory card
Overwritten!
Save
Occurred
Comment
Status

Ocr.
AAM00000.G1A
AAM00000.G1A
Ocr.
Save
Touch
Key code: FFBBH
or
Store Trigger device
The data in the memory card are overwritten. Therefore, if the data needs be kept unchanged,
move the data from the memory card to the PC by either of the following methods.
Upload resource data by GT Designer2
Read out the CSV file saved in the memory card by PC.
(4) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file
When an alarm log file is being saved to the memory card, monitoring is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced system alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Saving...
User area
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 13:30:14 9 AC down error
Buffering area
Save
While saving to
memory card, monitoring
is suspended.
(5) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all the advanced alarms
(advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms) to be saved as an alarm log file (set on the
File Save tab) are saved in the memory card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.
8 - 86

8.3.6 Precautions
The drive A file accessing signal (system signal 2-2.b0) turns off.
GOT's CF card access LED turns off.
(8) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed based on settings
made in the "Action When Buffer is Full" on the Basic tab.
Clear restored advanced system alarms and adding new alarms.
Not collect advanced system alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set "Full Notification Signal Device" on the Basic tab, and clear the
Deletion of advanced system
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Section 8.3.2
COMMON SETTING
"Writing Error Notification Device" turns on in the File Save tab.

System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(7) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match with the project in the GOT,
the file cannot be read out of the memory card. (Alarm history before the GOT is powered off
cannot be restored.)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
SPECIFICATIONS
Saving processing may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and
advanced system alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set on the File Save tab).
restored alarm when the device turns on. (

alarms on GOT)
1
OVERVIEW
(6) When turning on and off the GOT's CF card access switch
When the memory card is pulled out of GOT, if the CF card access switch is turned on and off, data
are saved forcedly.
Do not pull the memory card out of GOT until the signal turns off or the LED turns off and the file is
saved completely.
(9) Error when the alarm log file is saved

If an error occurs when a file is saved, "Writing Error Notification Device" on the File Save tab turns
on.
Confirm the following.
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".
The memory card is full.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

Full notification signal device
LAMP, SWITCH

8.3.6 Precautions
8 - 87
ALARM
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification
signal, operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced system alarm observation
function.
Operation (Differences)
Item
Drive status notification signal
Difference between "Full Notification

Signal Device" set by advanced alarm
Turns on when the number of alarms saved has reached
observation and drive status notification
that set in "Stored Number ".(when the buffering area
signal (system signal 2-2.b4: drive A full
reserved for advanced system alarms is full).
Turns on when the memory card is

full.
signal)
Difference between "Writing Notification
Device" set by advanced alarm
signal (system signal 2-2.b0: drive A file
Turns on when data are being

Turns on when advanced system alarm data are being
written in the memory card (also
written in the memory card.
when data other than advanced

system alarms are being written.)
accessing signal)
Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm log file in
Difference between "Writing Error
the memory card is accessed (for example, the project
Turns on when the memory card
Notification Device" set by advanced alarm
of the alarm log file in the memory card does not match
cannot be accessed (for example,
with the project in GOT).
the memory card is not set, or the
signal (system signal 2-2.b7: drive A file

access error signal)
Turns on when the memory card cannot be accessed

(for example, the memory card is not set, or the CF
CF card access switch is set to

"transfer prohibited").
card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited").
(11) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
the following.
(12) Unicode text file converted by the utility
8 - 88

8.3.6 Precautions
1
OVERVIEW
8.4 Advanced Alarm Display

Before setting advanced alarm display

This section explains the advanced alarm display of the advanced alarm function.
Read the section below before setting the advanced alarm display.
3
COMMON SETTING
The status of occurrence of the advanced alarms (advanced user alarm/advanced system alarm), set by
advanced alarm observation, is displayed in a list.
SPECIFICATIONS

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
System
User
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm

User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
User
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
6
LAMP, SWITCH
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.4 Advanced Alarm Display (Advanced User Alarm/Advanced System Alarm)
8 - 89
ALARM
8.4.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced alarm display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display only
Relevant to advanced alarm display only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display and others
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm display and others

As GOT may not the display overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
screen data.
Setting items
objects within GOT]
8 - 90

1
2 System information(
OVERVIEW
(1) Functions relevant to other than advanced alarm display

A 1254
Input disabled
A 1254
B 348 B 348
348 B
SPECIFICATIONS
A 1254 A 1254
B
348

Key Code Input
Key Input Signal
(Write device)
(Write device: System Signal 2-1. b3)
3
COMMON SETTING

switch.
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
A B C
348 B
348
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 91
ALARM
8.4.2
Before setting
This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced alarm display function.
1 Method of displaying alarm

(1) Types of alarm displayed (
Section 8.4.5
Basic tab)
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
All alarm: Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
Occurring alarm: Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Alarm status
(Comment)
(Occurred)
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Light error
(Restored)
(Checked)
--
--
-12:05
-10:14
09:45
12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15
In case of "All alarm"

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58
In case of "Occurring alarm"
Restored Checked
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
12:05
Light error
10:14
09:45
12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15
Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is

displayed.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error
12:25
10:55
The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light

error are deleted because these alarms have been restored.
(2) Comment display methods

The display methods below can be selected.(
Section 8.4.5
Basic tab)
(a) Fixed
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
(b) Float
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left.
If display the comment by flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width
or a comment in multiple lines can be displayed.
Comment contents displayed
1)Comment No.1 (comment group)
Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
Comment
Pwr. module
Check oil pre
Motor error
Restored Checked
Pwr. module temp. error.

12:05
12:25
11:50
Displayed as a flow from right to left.
Check fuse.
Check oil pressure.
Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
Comment Restored Checked

temp. error.
12:25
ssure.
12:05
11:50
error
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
error. Check
Check
Motor

Motor error
Restored Checked
12:05
12:25
11:50
A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.
8 - 92

Comment over
multiple lines
(3) Alarm display order (sort)

Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:
OVERVIEW
1 Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.

The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest
Sort in the descending order of occurrence date/time

Comment
Pwr. module error
Oil pressure error
Drive module error
Motor error
Light error
Status
Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Restored Checked OccurFreq

--1
-2
18:50
16:30
5
16:20
14:10
4
15:00
1
14:30
13:50
Cum.Time Down Time Level

--1
-00:20
1
04:10
2
00:20
01:00
02:30
2
2
01:00
01:00
Group
2
1
1
1
1
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 13:30
3
COMMON SETTING
Setting example) Specify the settings as follows on the attribute tab.
Items displayed by the advanced

alarm display function
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Select a display order

(descending or ascending).
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 93
ALARM
Select an item for sort

(Occurred).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2 By setting the switching device, the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
For the details of the switching device, refer to the following.
Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on "Switching Device"
on "Extended" Tab))
Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency
Change the item for sorting to the occurrence frequency (descending order).
Occurred
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 13:30
Comment
Drive module error
Motor error
Oil pressure error
Pwr. module error
Light error
Status
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time

16:20
16:30
5
04:10
15:00
4
02:30
14:10
-18:50
2
00:20
---1
1
14:30
01:00
13:50
Down Time
00:20
01:00
--01:00
Level
2
2
1
1
2
Group
1
1
1
2
1
Setting example) Set the items as follows on the extended tab.

Switching device
D100
The sort condition can be changed by the value

of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).
(
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)

: Occurrence date/time
: Restoration date/time
: Check date/time
: Comment (displayed comment No.)
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
(Ascending:check
restore occur)
(Descending:occur
restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
11 : Down Time
Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified
at the same time
If both of the "Sort" item on the Attribute tab and the "Priority Level Attribute" of the
"Switching Device" item on the Extended tab are specified, data are displayed in the
order specified by "Priority Level Attribute."
8 - 94

1
Various operations are usable for displayed alarms by the touch switches for advanced alarm display.
These touch switches can be arranged easily by GT Designer2.
OVERVIEW
2 Operations by touch switches
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
3
Touch switches for advanced alarm display
Details of the touch switches for advanced alarm display

4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 95
ALARM
Remark
8.4.3
Useful information
This section describes useful functions to know before using advanced alarm display.
1 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms displayed)

For advanced alarm display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods.
However, the display scope differs depending on the switching method
Touch the advanced alarm display directly or switch the hierarchy by the touch switches
Use the device specified on "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.
Line1
Equipment A
Power
module
Drive
module
"Pwr. module error"

(group 1)
Equipment B
Control
module
Higher Alarm
Line2
Power
module
Drive
module
Equipment A
Control
module
Power
module
Drive
module
Power
module
Control
module
"Control module error"

(group 3)

(group 3)
Middle Alarm
Equipment B
Drive
module
"Pwr. module error"

(group 4)
Control
module
General Alarm

(group 6)
: The alarm is occurring

: No alarm (normal run)
(1) Switch alarm hierarchies by touching the advanced alarm display directly or using the touch
switches.
Display the hierarchies below the selected alarm.
The following is the case that "Initial Display Hierarchy" on the basic tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1)The alarm hierarchy specified for initial display
hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.
Occurred
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
Restored
All higher alarms are displayed
Checked
Line1
Equipment A
Line2
Equipment B
Equipment B
2)Select an alarm to switch to middle alarms.

Occurred
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
Restored
Power
Checked
Control
Control
Display scope
3)The middle alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Occurred
Comment
Restored Checked
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment A
Power
Control
Equipment B
Control
4)Select an alarm to switch to general alarms.

Occurred
Comment
Restored Checked
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Display scope
5)The general alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Comment
Occurred
Restored Checked
12:25
8 - 96
Power
Control

Power
Control
1
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an
alarm belonging to the higher/middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is
not displayed.
OVERVIEW
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a

specified scope is being displayed
2
Display scope
SPECIFICATIONS
A specified scope is being displayed.

Occurred
Comment
Restored
Checked
12:25
Power
Control
COMMON SETTING
3
Display scope
Checked
12:25
Power
The new alarm is not displayed!
Control
An alarm belonging to another

higher/middle hierarchy has occurred!
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
Comment
Restored
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified
hierarchy.(
This section
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device
specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching device" on the Extended tab)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 97
ALARM
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching device" on the
Extended tab
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device.
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms
GD110
Occurred
---
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend
---
Restored Checked
-----
Line1
Equipment A
Power
Control
Line2
Equipment B
Control
Equipment B
Power
Control
Displays all middle alarms

Display scope
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment B error
Occurred
GD110
----
----
Restored Checked
----
----
Equipment A
Power
Control
Equipment B
Control
Equipment B
Power
Control
Power
Control
Displays all general alarms
Display scope
GD110
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
12:10
10:00
09:15
08:35
Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
12:25
11:00
Pwr. module error
10:10
09:55
09:40
Control module error 10:20
Power
Control
Control
(1) Switching method to the upper alarm hierarchy

To switch the hierarchy to the upper alarm hierarchy (general alarms
alarms
middle
higher alarms), operate the touch switches for advanced alarm display.
(
(2) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm
hierarchy as the initial display hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are
displayed with the vertical hierarchies ignored.
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 09:00
04/06/01 08:40
Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
12:25
11:20
09:20
08:50
All the alarms belonging to the general hierarchy are displayed.
(3) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of
the hierarchy being displayed
When the advanced user alarms (alarm ID) to be displayed are switched or
language switching is performed, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified as the
initial display hierarchy are displayed.
8 - 98

1
2 Setting of display colors for each alarm status, level, and group
OVERVIEW
The advanced alarm display function allows visually identifying alarms by setting display colors for each
items shown below.(
Section 8.4.5
Text tab)
Alarm status (occurrence, restore, and check)
Level
Group
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
Comment
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
Identifies alarm
status visually!
3
COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 11:35:52
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 99
ALARM
3 Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely

(1) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)
A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.
Occurred
Setting available for text color,

style, and kanji region!
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Fuel error
(2) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the
language switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
(
Section 3.4 Setting Language Switching Device)

Comment group settings
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
04/6/1 05:22:35
Japanese
Language
switching device
Language switching
is available for the
table title since the
comment specified
in a comment
group can be used
for the table title!
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
English
Japanese
English
The language of the messages of advanced system alarms is set by the utility of the
GOT main unit.
8 - 100

1
4 Display switching by device (Specify on "Switching Device" on "Extended" Tab)
The display shown below is available. (
Section 8.4.5
Extended tab)
(1) Items to which a switching device can be set

Switching device
Display alarm
setting usable
Advanced user alarm
item
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarms only) specified by
users.
Change the comments displayed according to the target user or purpose.
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and so on).
OVERVIEW
Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
Advanced system alarm
Level*1
Alarms at the specified level are displayed.
Group*1
Alarms of the specified group are displayed.
The display order is changed between ascending order and
The display order is changed between ascending
descending order.
order and descending order.
Priority Level
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time,
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration
Attribute
check date/time, comment No., level, group, alarm status
date/time, check date/time, error code, or alarm
(occurred, checked, or restored), occurrence frequency,
status (occurred, checked, or restored) can be
cumulative time, or down time can be selected.
selected
The setting of advanced user alarm observation (alarm ID)
Advanced
displayed by advanced alarm display can be changed.
User Alarm
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
displayed.
COMMON SETTING
All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are
Hierarchy*1
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced
alarm display window.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
General Comment
-
Group
The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be changed
Middle Comment
for each comment group.
Group
The comment displayed can be changed according to the user
Higher Comment
or purpose.
Group
*1 The hierarchy, level, and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 101
ALARM
Observation
(2) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (level) is set to D102 and the switching
device (priority level attribute) to D103.
Assume that the alarms below occurred.
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40
Comment
Status
Temp. error
Ocr.
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
Oil error
Rstr.
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
Rstr.
Fuse error
Select display
All levels
level
Select sort item Occurred
Major
Middle
Level
Alarm
Level
1
3
3
3
3
2
Minor
Switch the display depending on the level.

Displays all alarms (D102: 0)
All levels
Major
Displays alarms at level 1 (D102: 1)
Middle
Displays alarms at level 2 (D102: 2)
Minor
Display alarms at level 3 (D102: 3)
Change items for sorting alarms.

Occurred
Level
Touch switch for switching the alarm display data

Alarm
Minor
Displays alarms in the order of occurrence

date (descending order) (D103: 1)
Displays alarms in the order of level
(descending order) (D103: 5)
Displays alarms in the order of alarm status
(descending order) (D103: 7)
Alarm
"3" is written into D102.
(1)
"7" is written into D103
(2)
Only level 3 alarms are displayed.
Switching device
(level): D102
Switching device
(priority level
attribute): D103
7
Alarm display is sorted
by alarm status.

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40
Comment
Status Level
1
Temp. error
Ocr.
3
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
3
Oil error
Rstr.
3
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
3
Rstr.
Fuse error
2
Comment
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Status Level
3
Ocr.
Chk.
3
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3
Only level 3 alarms are displayed.
Comment
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
10:00
08:10
11:20
Motor error
Fuel error
Oil error
Status Level
3
Ocr.
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3
Chk.
3
Alarm display is sorted in the order of

alarm status (occur
restore
check).
Changing the alarm sorting order by "Priority Level Attribute"

Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot
be changed while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
8 - 102

1
5 Writing alarm data into device
Section 8.4.5
External output tab)
(1) Alarm data written into the device

Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (15 types).
Occurred time
Restored date
Restored time
Checked date
Checked time
Level
Group
Occurred frequency
Cumulative time
Down time
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm ID
Comment group No.
Comment No.
Alarm status
Occurred date
(2) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm display are written.
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10
COMMON SETTING
D200: 0601H
D201: 2004H
Comment
Temp. error
Motor error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4
The occurred date of the selected alarm
(04/06/01) is output to the device.
Touch mode when data are written in the device
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When write alarm data into the device, set "Touch mode" on the Basic tab to
"Selection" or "Operation."
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 103
ALARM
OVERVIEW
The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
8.4.4

Select the [Object]
Alarm] menus.
Click
[Advanced Alarm Display]
(Advanced User Alarm Display) /
[Advanced User Alarm] / [Advanced System
(Advanced System Alarm Display).
2 Click on the position where advanced alarm display to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged advanced alarm display, the setting dialog box is displayed.
Refer to the following description (
Section 8.4.5 Setting items) to perform the setting.
Easy setting method


Remark
D10


Shape

4 Set the touch switch for scrolling up and down the advanced alarm display and for displaying alarm data
in detail.
(
Occurred
Comment
02/03/01 10:25 Error
8 - 104
Up
Detail
Down
Delete

Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed (advanced user alarm / advanced system
alarm), message display method and operations when the screen is touched.
OVERVIEW
8.4.5
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
5
External Output
Item
Description
Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
User Alarm
: Displays the alarms set by the advanced user alarm observation.

After checking it, select an alarm ID of the advanced user alarm to
Section 8.2 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced User
Alarm))
System Alarm
: Displays the alarms set by the advanced system alarm observation.

(
Section 8.3 Advanced Alarm Observation (Advanced System
Alarm))
Select how to display collected alarms.

(
Section 8.4.2
(1) Types of alarm displayed (Section 8.4.5 Basic tab))
All Alarm
: Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is
Occurring Alarm
: Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
displayed.

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 105
ALARM
Display Target Status
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display Alarm
LAMP, SWITCH
display.
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm
(
Section 8.4.2
Fixed
(2) Comment display methods)
: Displays the comment to display when an alarm occurs in a line.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second
Display Type
line and after of the comment is not displayed.

Float
: Displays the comment flowing it from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting "Float," select a speed to display the comment as a flow by
"Flowing Speed."
If setting "Display Type" to "Float," select a speed for flowing display.

High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x
Middle
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7)
Low
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3)
13) per second.

Floating Speed
per second.
per second.
Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed by the advanced alarm display function.
(This item can be set up only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.)
Initial Display Hierarchy
General
: General alarms are initially displayed.
Middle
: Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Higher
: Higher alarms are initially displayed.
Select the operation when the advanced alarm display screen is touched.
None
: No operation even when touched.
Selection
: The touched alarm is selected.
Operation
: Alarm hierarchies are switched or the detailed screen is displayed for the
touched alarm.
Touch Mode
(This item can be selected for advanced user alarms only.)

Operations differ depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When higher/middle alarm is displayed : The alarm hierarchy is switched to
the lower one.
When general alarms are displayed
: The detailed screen is displayed.

Shape
By clicking on the Others button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures
can be
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate color
Plate
Frame color

Category
Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section 12.1.2 Batch
setting and managing objects/figures for each purpose (Category workspace))

Layer
(
8 - 106

8.4.5 Setting items
1
2 Table tab
OVERVIEW
Set the display format for advanced alarm display (font, Number of rows and line).
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Select a font of the characters displayed.
Font
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced system alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the
standard font.
Size
(
Title Format
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Table
Set the format of the characters displayed on the title of advanced alarm display.
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Characters)
Solid
LAMP, SWITCH
Raised).
Style
Section 2.3.1 Fonts)

Japan
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
: Display the characters in Japanese kanji.
China(GB)-Mincho : Display the characters in China(GB) kanji.

KANJI Region
China(Big5)-Gothic : Display the characters in China(Big5) kanji.
Japan
Text
China (GB) -Mincho

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 107
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).
Example: When setting the number of rows to 3
Number of Rows
Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25
Temp. error
11:25
10:45
04/11/05 12:05
Fuel error
12:25
12:28
04/11/06 08:30
Motor error
09:45
09:40
Restored Checked
Number of rows
(not including the title row)
If the number specified on "Display Head Row" is lower than the total number of alarms
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the row number set by "Display Head Row."
Example: When "Display Head Row" is set to 2 and the number of alarms is 5
Alarm occurrence
Display order
of alarms
Display Head
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Fuse error
04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number

specified on "Display Head Row."
Row*1
If the setting number of "Display Head Row" is higher than the total number of alarms
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.
Example: When "Display Head Row" is set to 10 and the number of alarms is 5
Alarm occurrence
Display order
of alarms
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Comment
Oil error
Fuel error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the
characters such as time display.
X
: 0 to 32 dots (Available in 1-dot units)

According to the setting of "Size" (magnification of character
Space
Occurrence date/time
size), the actual horizontal space is as follows:

"Magnification of character size
set value in Space"
Example:
When "Size" is set to 2 and "Space" to 8, space of 16 dots is
ensured.
Check this item when adding ruled lines to the advanced alarm display.
After checking it, select a "Line style," "Width," and "Color."
Draw Ruled Line
When not draw ruled lines

Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 08:10 Motor error
Line Style
Restored
11:25
10:00
When draw ruled lines

Checked
10:45
08:45
Occurred
Comment
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 08:10 Motor error
Select a ruled line type for advanced alarm display.
Width
Select a ruled line width for advanced alarm display (1,2,3,4,5, or 7 dots).
Color
Select a ruled line color for advanced alarm display.
Cursor
Select a color of the cursor for selecting the alarm.
8 - 108

8.4.5 Setting items
Restored
11:25
10:00
Checked
10:45
08:45
*1 Display head row
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
Screen 1
(Display Head Row: 1)
Screen 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm occurred number
OVERVIEW
If different "display head row" are set on plural screens, different advanced alarm display can be displayed
for each screen.
Screen 3
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 109
ALARM
3 Text tab
Set the character format in the column for displaying alarms.
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Alarm Format
Description
Set the format of the character color in the column for displaying alarms.
Raised).
Style
(
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Characters)
Solid
Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
Fixed
: Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Status
: Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occur,
Level
: Select this item when using different colors depending on level.
Group
: Select this item when using different colors depending on group.
Set the color after selecting "Fixed".

Text Color Switching*1
restored, or checked).
This item is displayed only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
This item is displayed only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
Status
Select character colors for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked).
Level
Select character colors for each level number. (enabled only when advanced user alarm)
Group
Select character colors for each group number. (enabled only when advanced user alarm)
For details of *1, refer to next page.
8 - 110

8.4.5 Setting items
2
SPECIFICATIONS
For higher/middle alarm, the character colors specified on "Text Color Switching" are displayed in the
following character colors regardless of alarm status or level/group.
"Fixed"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Fixed."
"Status"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Occurred."
"Level"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Level 1."
"Group"
: Characters are displayed in the color of "Group 1."
OVERVIEW
*1 Display of alarm status, level color, and group color for higher/middle alarms
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 111
ALARM
4 Attribute tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (display items and display order).
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.
Title
Direct
: Select this item when inputting the characters displayed on the title from "Title
Comment
: Select this item when displaying the characters of the title from the comment in
(Direct)."
a comment group. After selecting this item, select the comment group in which
the characters displayed on the title are registered.
8 - 112

8.4.5 Setting items
Attribute
Text
Extended
External Output
Trigger
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Set the number of the items displayed for the alarm (1 to 10).
Select the items displayed for advanced alarm display.
"Occurred"
"Status"
"Comment"
"OccurFreq"
Comment
"Down Time"
"Group"
Status Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time Down Time Level Group
-04/06/01 20:00 Oil pressure error Chk.

Chk.
-04/06/01 18:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:10 Oil pressure error Rstr. 16:30
-18:50
16:20
1
2
2
--00:40
--00:20
Occurred
: Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment
: Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Status
: Select when displaying alarm status.
1
1
2
2
1
1
The alarm status is displayed as follows.

Ocr.
: An alarm is occurring
Rstr.
: The alarm is restored
Chk.
: Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checked
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the
alarm was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is
displayed.
Attribute
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
"Level"
"Cum.Time"
"Checked"
"Restored"
COMMON SETTING
Number of Display Attributes
Section 8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm
Comment Restored
Motor error
Checked
Check
Comment Restored
Motor error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
display)
Checked
12:00
(Key code : FFB4H)
OccurFreq : Select this item when displaying the number of alarm occurrences.
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarm.
Cum.Time : Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm
occurrences in the past (total down time).
Down Time : Select this item when displaying the time from the alarm occurrence to
restoration of it.
Leve
: Select this item when displaying the level specified on the alarm.
Group
: Select this item when displaying the group specified on the alarm.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Table
LAMP, SWITCH
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarms.
This item can be selected only when displaying advanced user alarms.
Input the characters of the title of advanced alarm display directly.
Characters for the number specified by "Width" can be input.
The title can be input directly only when "Direct" is selected for "Title."
Title (Comment)
Set the comment No. (comment group) or content of the comment displayed on the title of
advanced alarm display.
(Contents)
Set the comment group on the "Group No." of "Title."
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Title (Direct)

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 113
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.
Example: When the message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
Comment
Motor error
Restored
11:25
Checked
10:45
Displayed in a width of 12 digits
The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Occurred
: This item is set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" to be set up
Comment
: 10 to 80 digits
later.
Width
Status
: 6 to 80 digits
Restored
Checked
later.
later.
Number of
OccurFreq : 5 to 80 digits
Display Attributes
Cum.Time : 8 to 80 digits
Down Time : 8 to 80 digits
Level
: 3 to 80 digits
Group
: 3 to 80 digits
Select format in which the date/time of alarm occurrence (occurred/restored/checked) is set up.
After selecting this item, select the display formats of date and time.
Contents
Date Format*1
Date/Time : Select when displaying both date and time.

Date
: Select when displaying date only.
Time
: Select when displaying time only.
Set the display format of date by clicking
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Date."
Time Format*2
Set the display format of time by clicking
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Time."

Select an item and method to sort alarm display.
The same items as "Attribute" can be selected as the items sorted.
Select one of the following 2 methods.
Sort
Ascending
: Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending
: Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.
When selecting "Status" for the item sorted, items are sorted as follows.
Ascending
: Checked
Restored
Occurred
Descending
: Occurred
Restored
Checked
For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following.
(
Section 8.4.2
Method of displaying alarm)
For details of *1 and *2, refer to next page.
8 - 114

8.4.5 Setting items
*1 Date settings
OVERVIEW
Set the display type of date.

The display type of date set can be confirmed in the preview area.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Preview area
Item
COMMON SETTING
Description
The result of date setting is displayed as a display example.
(Preview area)
Select a sorting order of year/month/day.

dd/mm/yy: 24/01/04
mm/dd/yy: 01/24/04
Select a display type of date.
Select a display type depending on whether to use upper/lower case for English/alphabetic
expression, presence/absence of day display and a type of Japanese expression.
The display example below shows the case that "Sort" is set to "yy/mm/dd."
: 04/01/24
Type 11
Type 2
: Jan/24
Type 12
: 2004/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 3
: JAN/24
Type 13
: 2004/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 4
: Jan/24(FRI)
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 5
: JAN/24(FRI)
Type 2 (Japanese)
: 2004/JAN/24
Type 6
: 04/Jan/24
Type 3 (Japanese)
Type 7
: 04/JAN/24
Type 4 (Japanese)
Type 8
: 04/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 5 (Japanese)
Type 9
: 04/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 6 (Japanese)
Type 10
: 2004/Jan/24
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Type
Type 1
"Type 1 (Japanese)" to "Type 6 (Japanese)" can be selected only when setting "Sort" to "yy/mm/
dd."
Select a delimiter for year, month, and day.
"/"
: 04/01/24
"-"
: 04-01-24
"."
: 04.01.24
Fill with Zeros
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Check when displaying "0" before month and day.

Example: Jan. 24, 2004
When checked
: 04/01/24
When not checked
: 04/1/24

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 115
ALARM
Delimiter
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
yy/mm/dd: 04/01/24
LAMP, SWITCH
Sort
*2 Time settings
Set a display type of time.
The display type of time set can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
Item
Description
The result of time setting is displayed as a display example.
(Preview area)
Select a display type of time.
Select a display type depending on whether to use English expression, presence/absence of am
and pm and a type of Japanese expression.
Type
Type 1
: 16:28
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 2
: 16:28:28
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 3
: 04:28(PM)
Type 3 (Japanese)
Check when displaying "0" before hour, minute, and second.

Fill with Zeros
Example: 5 past 6
06:05 (When checked)
6:5
8 - 116
(When not checked)

8.4.5 Setting items
1
5 Extended tab
OVERVIEW
Set the switching of the data displayed by advanced alarm display using a device.
This tab is displayed by checking the function list at the bottom of the dialog box.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
Item
External Output
Description
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Table
Check the item whose display is switched by the device.

Switching Device
Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on "Switching Device" on
"Extended" Tab)
Check this item when switching the alarm hierarchy displayed by the value of the device.
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
Hierarchy*1
After checking this item, set the switching device. (
This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.
LAMP, SWITCH
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Level
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Group
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 117
ALARM
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Table
Extended
Attribute
Text
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.
Priority Level Attribute*2

Check this item when displaying the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
Advanced User Alarm
Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Observation
When storing "0" in this device, the alarm with the alarm ID set on the "User Alarm" item of
"Display Alarm" on the Basic tab is displayed.
Switching
If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
Device

Check this item when switching the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarms,
middle alarms, or higher alarms by the value of the device.
General Comment Group /
After checking the item, set the switching device. (
Middle Comment Group /
When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group set by advanced user alarm
Higher Comment Group
observation is displayed.
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.
This item can be selected only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
User ID*3
Set a user ID for advanced user alarm display.

To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).
Display
Set "0" when not setting the security function.

Be sure to set a number for security (Operation) larger than the number for security (Dis-
Security
play).
Operation
(
*1 Hierarchies
Store values in the device to switch hierarchies.
b15
b14 to b2
b1
b0
b1 to b0
: Specifis the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0)
: General alarms
01(1)
: Middle alarms
10(2)
: Higher alarms
b14 to b2
: Not usable
b15
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control
identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, set this bit to "0."
0
: Switching by the switching device
1
: Switching by touching the display area
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
Section 8.4.7
device
8 - 118
(4) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching

8.4.5 Setting items
*2 Priority level attribute

Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b0
OVERVIEW
b1
: Specifies a sort key. ( : Reserved)
b14 to b4
4H
5H
6H
7H
: Comment No.
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
9H
AH
BH
: OccurFreq
: Cum.Time
: Down Time
2
SPECIFICATIONS
: Regular (Occurred)
: Occurred Date/Time
: Restored Date/Time
: Checked Date/Time
: Not usable
0H
1H
2H
3H
b15
b2
: Specifies ascending order or descending order. ( : Reserved)

0
H : Descending order
8
H : Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
Occur Freq, Cum. Time and Down Time are effective only when the collection mode of
advanced alarm observation is "Cumulative."
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
*3 User ID
When user ID setting is required
If advanced alarm display and alarm history display / alarm list display are set on the same screen,
the touch switches set for advanced alarm display may not operate.
To make the touch switches for advanced alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced
alarm display.
Alarm list display
02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error
04/11/05 12:35
Checked
10:45
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error
Occurred
Comment Restored
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25
04/11/05 12:05 Light error
12:28
Oil pressure error
Cursor ON
Up
Check
Cursor OFF
Down
Delete
Touch switch for advanced

alarm display
LAMP, SWITCH
If the same user ID is set for advanced alarm display and touch switches, the operations of
the touch switches for advanced alarm display are effective for advanced alarm display.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 119
ALARM
b3 to b0
b3
COMMON SETTING
b14 to b4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b15
Setting method
Set a user ID for advanced alarm display.
Set the touch switches for advanced alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
(

Setting of touch switch (Action tab)
Set the same user ID as for advanced alarm display
8 - 120

8.4.5 Setting items
1
6 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
Set the condition for displaying an object.

This tab is displayed by checking the item of Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
For the details of the display condition, refer to the following.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Table
Text
Attribute
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Specify the device to set on the display/operation condition.
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger Device
Select a condition to display advanced alarms.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Trigger Type
Description

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 121
ALARM
Basic
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
7 External output tab

Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm selected on advanced alarm display into the
device.
This tab is displayed by checking the item of Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
Basic
Table
Text
Attribute
Trigger
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
Use External Output

Section 8.4.3
Writing alarm data into device
Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary
: Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
ON
: When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are
into the device.
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
written into the device.

When selecting "ON" or "OFF," set the device to be used for trigger.
(
Device
Set the device to which alarm data are written.

Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
Head Device
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)

(
Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Check this item when writing the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
This item can be used only when Advanced User Alarm is displayed.
Check this item when writing the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched
alarm into the device. This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.

8 - 122

8.4.5 Setting items
Table
Attribute
Text
Extended
Trigger
External Output
Item
Description
Check this item when writing the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm
Comment No.
OVERVIEW
Basic
into the device. When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.
Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
The following values are written.
b15 to b3
Alarm
b1
b0
: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
Status*1
b1
1: Occurring
: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.

0: Not checked 1: Checked
b2
2
SPECIFICATIONS
b0
b2
: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or
not.
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
Occurred Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.
Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.
Restored Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.
Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.
Checked Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.
Checked Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.
Level*1
This item can be used only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.
Group*1
Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the
Occurred Frequency
*1
device.
Cumulative Time*1,*2
Down Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.
LAMP, SWITCH

For the details of *2, refer to next page.
*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarm is displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment
group No., and comment No.).
In addition, if the alarm is restored, "0" is written into the down time.
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm
Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Restored
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred

8.4.5 Setting items
8 - 123
ALARM
Device
: Not usable
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
b15 to b3
COMMON SETTING
0: Not effective 1: Effective
*2 Writing format of date and time

Date and time are written in word data of two words.
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
b15
D254
b15
D255
to
b8 b7
Month (1 to 12)
to
to
b0
Day (1 to 31)
b8 b7
to
b0
Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year
(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15
D256
to
b8 b7
to
b0
Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)
b15
D257
to
b8 b7
00H
to
b0
Hour (0 to 23)
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

b15
D254
to
b8 b7
07H
(Month)
b15
to
(Day)
b8 b7
20H
D255
to b0
01H
to
b0
04H
(Dominical year)
b15
D256
to
b8 b7
24H
(Minute)
b15
D257
to
00H
b8 b7
to
56H
b0
(Second)
to
b0
12H
(Hour)
8 - 124

8.4.5 Setting items
Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display
Touch switch for displaying advanced alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced alarm display.
OVERVIEW
8.4.6
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch switch
Key code
COMMON SETTING
Touch switches for advanced alarm display
Description
Show/Hide the Cursor.
FFB0H
Hide cursor
FFB1H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
4
15:10
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Show cursor
14:50
Show the cursor!
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
If the cursor is hidden:

The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Move cursor upward
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
FFB2H
6
Restored Checked
14:00
13:15
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 13:54 Fuel error
Rstr.
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error Chk.
Ocr.
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error
Move to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
14:50
FFB3H
15:10
14:50
Move the cursor!

8.4.6 Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display
8 - 125
ALARM
Function
Key code
Description
The alarm status is changed to "checked."
Display date/time of selected data

(check)
FFB4H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Ocr.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Display date/time of all data

(check all)
FFB5H
14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
FFB6H
Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
17:15
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
15:10
14:50
14:50
The restored alarm is deleted!

If touched while general alarms are displayed, the detailed screen of the selected
alarms is displayed.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Display
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
detail*1
Temp. error on power

module.
Check power module.
15:10
14:50
The detailed screen is displayed!
FFB8H
If touched while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, alarms displayed
are switched to the lower hierarchy.
Occurred
---
Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Status
---
Restored Checked
---
---
Move to the lower hierarchy*1
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Status
Restored Checked
Ocr.
Ocr.
The hierarchy is moved to the lower one!

For the details of *1, refer to next page.
8 - 126

Function
Key code
Description
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
17:11
15:10
OVERVIEW
The selected alarm is reset.
14:50
Reset the selected alarm
FFB9H
15:10
SPECIFICATIONS
2
data*2
14:50
The selected alarm is reset!

Advanced user alarms
The device value is changed to OFF status/reset value specified on the Device
tab.Resetting is performed only for general alarms.
COMMON SETTING
Advanced system alarms

The alarm status on GOT is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored."
Advanced alarm data are saved in the memory card as an alarm log file.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Restored Checked
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
FFBBH
The data are saved in the memory card!

The hierarchy of the alarms displayed is switched.
Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Restored Checked
Comment
Status
-Pwr. module error
-Drive module error
Restored Checked
-----
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
Move to the upper hierarchy*1

FFC2H
Occurred
---
*1 Alarms for which "Display detail," "Move to the lower hierarchy," and "Move to the upper hierarchy" are
available
"Display detail," "Move to the lower hierarchy," and "Move to the upper hierarchy" are available only for
advanced user alarms but not available for advanced system alarms.
*2 Resetting of advanced user alarms
To change the device value to the OFF status/reset value by the touch switches, "YES" the "Reset" on the
Device tab of advanced alarm observation.
(2) Device tab

8 - 127
ALARM
Section 8.2.5
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
For the details of *1 and*2, refer to the following.
LAMP, SWITCH
The hierarchy is moved to the upper one!
Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status

The touch switches for advanced alarm display operate differently depending on the
display status.
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by
page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).
Display detail (FFB8H) / Move to the lower hierarchy (FFB8H)
This switch operates in 2 ways for a key code.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, the display is moved to the
lower hierarchy.
When general alarms are displayed, details are displayed on the comment
window.
Remark
(1) Operation method by directly touching Advanced Alarm Display

By setting "Touch Mode" on the basic tab, the operations below can be used.
(
Section 8.4.5
Basic tab)
Selection of an alarm (Set "Touch mode" to "Selection.")

Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
The touched alarm is selected.

(2) Change of cursor color
The cursor color can be changed by "Cursor"
on the Table tab.
Section 8.4.5
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
The alarm is deselected by touching it

again.
Table tab)
Hierarchy switching and detail display of alarms (Set "Touch mode" to

"Operation")
Alarm hierarchies can be switched and detail screen can be displayed by
touching the advanced alarm display directly. (equivalent operation to
displaying detail or moving to the lower hierarchy)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
Occurredthe fuse ofComment Restored Checked

Change
04/06/01
16:51 Fuse error
the
power supply
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
module.
When the selected alarm is touched again, display is moved

to the lower alarm hierarchy and detail screen is displayed.
(2) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by "Cursor" on the table tab.
(
Section 8.4.5
Table tab)
(3) Setting method of touch switches
Section 6.2.8 Setting items of key code switch
8 - 128

8.4.7
Precaution
OVERVIEW
Precautions for using advanced alarm display are as shown below.

(1) Maximum number of the objects that can be placed (set) on a screen
Only one advanced alarm display object can be placed (set) on a screen.
(3) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device (set on the extended tab) is specified for the objects below,
the objects may not be displayed on the specified initial display hierarchy.
This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching
device when the screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects
above, respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Setting of advanced user alarm display
Setting of advanced alarm popup display
Hierarchy switching device
: GD10
: GD10
Initial display hierarchy
: General
: Higher
Place on base screen 1
Occurred
Comment
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
Occurred
--
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Operations when base screen 1 is displayed
04/6/1 11:35:52
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example: When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)
3
COMMON SETTING
(2) Screen on which the object can be placed (set)

Advanced alarm display can be set on the base screen or window screen.
SPECIFICATIONS
Comment
Line 1 abend
6
-- Line 1 abend
LAMP, SWITCH
-- Line 1 abend
Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)
Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)
2 (higher)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Different values are

written into the same device

8.4.7 Precaution
8 - 129
ALARM
(4) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the extended tab) is
changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Value of hierarchy switching device
Corresponding comment No.
Comments displayed
General alarms being displayed.
Middle alarms being displayed.
Higher alarms being displayed.
(a) When masking is applied
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2
The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.
Higher alarms being displayed
Occurred
-----
Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy
Touch!
Masking
1
AND
Middle alarms being displayed
Occurred
-----
8 - 130
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Mask value (7FFFH)
Value of hierarchy
switching device
1


8.4.7 Precaution
Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Touch!

middle hierarchy
0
Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767
3
COMMON SETTING
(5) Setting for saving advanced alarm data in the memory card
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save advanced
alarm data.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error

(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm
display was specified to save the data.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
-----
The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.
(7) Precautions for setting
(a) Setting number

When object setting exceeds the user area of the GOT in size by the setting in the advanced
recipe setting, the advanced recipe function cannot be used.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method for the setting size of the advanced alarm display, refer to the following.
Section 2.4
LAMP, SWITCH
(6) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the text
color is set to Black with [Text Color Switching] of the Text tab. (Characters will be hidden since the
text color and the cursor color are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to
other than Black.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

Occurred
-----
SPECIFICATIONS
Object specifications

8.4.7 Precaution
8 - 131
ALARM
OVERVIEW
(b) When masking is not applied
For free user area available for GOT, refer to the following manual.
(Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA)
(b) Saving a file

The memory card must be larger than the file to be saved in size.
For the file size, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
8 - 132
Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure

8.4.7 Precaution
advanced user alarm observation (

Section 8.4.3
Display switching by device (Specify on
"Switching Device" on "Extended" Tab)), it may take a few minutes to display the data.
(2) Priority of alarm display
(a) When the alarms displayed have not been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
Comment
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52
(3) Display of the comment window and key window

When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
8
5
2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
When try to open the detail display (comment

window display) while the key window is displayed.
7
4
1
0
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(b) When the alarms displayed have been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.
Key window
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in
OVERVIEW
Precautions for use
9 AC
6 Del
3 +/Enter

LAMP, SWITCH
Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.4.7 Precaution
8 - 133
ALARM
(4) Number of advanced alarm displays to be called

Do not display more than one window of advanced alarm display simultaneously.
If displaying more than one window of advanced alarm display, the second and after advanced
alarm display cannot be displayed correctly.
Example: When displaying overlap window 1 secondarily
Occurred
Comment
Restored
04/06/01 17:24 Fuel error

04/06/01 16:15 Internal pressure error 16:10
Restored
04/06/01 17:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:27 Oil error
15:10
The second and after advanced alarm display is not displayed correctly!
(5) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time

For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
the following.
8 - 134

8.4.7 Precaution
1
OVERVIEW
8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display
Before setting advanced alarm popup display

This section explains the advanced alarm popup display of the advanced alarm
function.
Read the following before setting advanced alarm popup display.
System
Advanced
system alarm
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

User
Advanced user
alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the
screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since the display can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
5
System
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
Advanced user
alarm
User
Advanced user
alarm
Advanced
system alarm
System
Advanced
system alarm
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
User
System
LAMP, SWITCH
User
8 - 135
ALARM
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
8.5.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
Key
window
For advanced alarm popup display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this
section.
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display, (advanced alarm popup display,) only
Relevant to advanced alarm popup display, (advanced alarm popup display) only.
(2) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display (advanced alarm popup display) and others
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display only

Enabling/Disabling advanced alarm popup display
The advanced alarm popup display is enabled or disabled for each screen.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
row.
04/10/10 10:30 Emergency stop
A1254 B 348
A 1254 B 348
Setting items
[Carry out display of advanced alarm
pop up]
The corresponding comment pops up at the top row of the screen

when an alarm occurs
(1) Functions relevant to advanced alarm popup display and others

Turns off the key input signal
A 1254
Input disabled
A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
Key Input Signal
(Write device: System Signal 2-1. b3)
Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error
code, GOT error detecting signal).

1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
B 348
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
The system alarm message is cleared
8 - 136

348 B
348
8.5.2
Before setting
(1) Alarm types

For advanced alarm popup display, advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms can be
displayed.
Advanced alarm popup display is set as follows.
(a) Setting of advanced alarm popup display
Select the alarm type displayed by advanced alarm popup display.
(
Section 8.5.5
Basic tab)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Displayable alarm types and settings
OVERVIEW
This section describes the setting and function needed for using the advanced alarm popup display.
3
COMMON SETTING
Select the alarm type displayed
(b) Auxiliary setting for each screen

Set whether to display popup display and the position of the popup display for each base
screen.
The setting is carried out on the Auxiliary Settings tab of the Base screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2) Check
3) Select a display position
(1) When the display position overlaps other objects

If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display,
the object cannot be operated. Therefore, set the object so that it does not overlap
other objects.
(2) Switching of display position by touch operation
The position of advanced alarm popup display can also be switched by touch
operation.
Section 8.5.3
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1) Click
LAMP, SWITCH
(3) Switching of display position

8 - 137
ALARM
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) Settings required for using advanced alarm popup display

Set the alarm displayed on the advanced alarm observation screen.
(a) To display advanced user alarms
Check "Popup Display" on the advanced user alarm observation screen.
Displays the alarm of the alarm ID on
which "Popup Display" is checked
Purpose of checking "Popup Display"

This setting is to select whether to use popup display when displaying the advanced
user alarms of multiple alarm IDs.
The advanced user alarms can be displayed with one alarm ID refined by using a
device.
Section 8.5.3
Display switching by device
(b) To display advanced system alarms

Check "Target" on the advanced system alarm observation screen.
Displays the advanced system
alarm to which "Target" is checked
8 - 138

1
By advanced alarm popup display, the alarms of which the alarm status on the GOT is "Ocr." (including
"Chk." at alarm occurrence) is displayed.
When the alarm status on the GOT changes to "Rstr." (including the restored alarms checked), the
display disappears.
OVERVIEW
2 Alarms displayed by popup display
2
Alarm status
10:30
Comment
Status
Temp. error
Ocr.
Occurred
04/6/1
10:30
Comment
Status
Temp. error
Rstr.
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
04/6/1
Alarm status
B 348 B 348
Restore
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
The restored alarm is not displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 139
ALARM
A 1254 A 1254
COMMON SETTING
3 Selection of display method

The following display methods are available. (
Section 8.5.5
Basic tab)
(1) Fixed
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed in a fixed line.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms can be switched and displayed automatically. (Set
the "Display Number" on the basic tab to "Plural")
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
The occurring alarms are switched and displayed!

(The cycle for switching display can be set by "Switching Cycle" on the basic tab)
(2) Float
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed as a flow from right to left.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms are displayed in order.
(Set the "Display Number" on the basic tab to "Plural")
When a temp. error and fuse error occur
04/6/1
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254
348
10:30
348
Temp. error
348
348
04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error
348
348
9:45 Fuse error
The occurring errors are displayed as a flow from right to left

(The flow speed can be specified on "Floating Speed" on the basic tab.)
(1) Display priority (display order) when multiple alarms occur

Section 8.5.6
(3) Alarm display priority
(2) When more than one comment rows are specified
Fixed
: Only the comment of the first row is displayed.
Comments on and after the second row cannot be displayed.
Float
: Displays the comment of the second row as a flow after the comment
of the first row.
(The same applies to the third row and after.)
8 - 140

8.5.3
Useful information
OVERVIEW
This section describes some useful functions to know before using advanced alarm popup display.
1 Operations when touching popup display directly

The following operations are available.
touched. (
Section 8.5.5
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Screen switching

Touching the alarm display can switch the screen to the base screen of the specified No. or
overlapping window 1.
This function allows displaying the detailed alarm process screen when the popup display is
Basic tab)
3
Occurred
04/6/1 10:30
04/6/1 9:45
Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/6/1 8:15
Oil error
COMMON SETTING
Alarm details display/process screen
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch!
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Displays the base screen of the specified No.

or overlapping window 1
(2) Stage hierarchy switching/detail display

The display hierarchy of comments can be switched (only when advanced user alarms are
displayed)
Displays middle alarms
Displays general alarms
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348
Touch!
Switches higher
middle hierarchy
- Pwr. module error

Touch!
Switches middle
general hierarchy
04/6/1
B 348
Temp. error
Touch!
Switches general
hierarchy detail
display
Detail display
LAMP, SWITCH
Displays higher alarms
- Line abend
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic tab)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 8.5.5
A 1254 A 1254
B on
348 B 348
Temp. error
power module
Check temperature
04/6/1 Temp. error

8 - 141
ALARM
(1) Hierarchies that can be switched by touch operation

By touch operation, hierarchies can be switched only to the lower ones.
To switch to the upper hierarchy, set "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the
extended tab, and store the hierarchy value in the device.
Section 8.5.5
Extended tab
(2) Difference of display scope depending on the switching hierarchies method
Display scope is different between the case that hierarchies are switched by touch
operation and by switching device. For details, refer to the following.
This section
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user
alarms is displayed)
8 - 142

Displayed on top of the screen

04/6/1
A 1254 A 1254
Displayed on center of the screen
10:30
Temp.
error
A 1254
A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
B 348
B 348
10:30 Temp. error
Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1
Display
position
switching
Display
position
switching

the display area*1

the display area*1
Display position switching
By touching the leftmost of the advanced alarm popup display area, the display position is switched
to the top, center and bottom of the screen in order.
*1 Screen area for switching display position
The touch operation area for switching display position is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
A 1254
A 1254
348
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Leftmost 16 dots
Mesh on the GOT screen
When screen is switched during popup display, the popup is displayed at the
position before switching. (It is not displayed at the position specified by the auxiliary
settings of the screen.)
A 1254 A 1254
38
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Screen
Switching
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display position during screen switching
LAMP, SWITCH
8
Displayed at the position before switching
regardless of the display position setting
The display position set by the Auxiliary Settings of the screen becomes effective
when a new popup is displayed.
8 - 143
ALARM
04/6/1
SPECIFICATIONS
A 1254Temp.
A 1254
error
04/6/1 10:30
COMMON SETTING
Displayed on bottom of the screen
1
OVERVIEW

If any other object is hidden by an advanced alarm popup display, the display position can be
switched by touch operation.
2 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is displayed)

For advanced alarm popup display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods.
However, the display scope differs depending on the switching method.
Touch the popup display directly
Use the device specified on "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.
Line1
Higher Alarm
Line2
Middle Alarm
Equipment A
Equipment B
Equipment A
Equipment B
General Alarm
Power
supply
module
Drive
module
"Pwr. module
error"
Control
module
Power
supply
module
Control
module
Drive
module
"Control
module error"
Power
supply
module
Drive
module
Control
module
"Control
module error"
Power
supply
module
"Pwr. module
error"
Drive
module
Control
module
"Control
module error"
: The alarm is occurring
: No alarm (normal run)
(1) Touch the popup display directly

Displays the lower hierarchy of the touched alarm.
The following is the case that "Initial Display Hierarchy" on the basic tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1) The alarm hierarchy specified for initial
display hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.
All higher alarms are displayed

Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
- Line1 error
Power
Touch!
Switches to middle alarms

2) The middle alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
- Equipment A error
Equipment A
Power
Touch!
Switches to general alarms

3) The general alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Line1
Display scope
Equipment A
04/6/1 Pwr. module error
Power
8 - 144

1
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an
alarm belonging to the higher/middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is
not displayed.
OVERVIEW
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a

specified scope is being displayed
A specified scope is
being displayed
Power
SPECIFICATIONS
Display scope
Control
COMMON SETTING
3
Display scope
Control
An alarm belonging to
another higher/middle
hierarchy has occurred!
Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified
hierarchy. (
This section
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device
specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the extended tab)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Power
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 145
ALARM
The new alarm is

not displayed!
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by "Hierarchy" of "Switching Device" on the
extended tab
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device. (
Section 8.5.5
Extended
tab)
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 2
- Line1 error
Power
Displays all middle alarms

Display scope
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Equipment A
GD110 1
- Equipment A error
Power
Displays all general alarms
Line1
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
GD110
Display scope
Equipment A
0
04/6/1 Pwr. module error
Power
8 - 146

(1) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy

To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm
hierarchy as the initial display hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are
displayed with the vertical hierarchies ignored.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
(2) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of
the hierarchy being displayed
In the following example, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the initial
display hierarchy are displayed.
All the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored.
The advanced user alarm (alarm ID) to be displayed by the device is switched
3
COMMON SETTING
All general alarms are

displayed!
This section
OVERVIEW
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example: When all the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored
When the initial display hierarchy is specified as the middle hierarchy
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
All the alarms of the

displayed hierarchy
are restored.
All the alarms of the

initial display hierarchy
are displayed.
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 147
ALARM
3 Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

Specifying a font, text color and background color can prevent from overlooking popup display.
In addition, although level and group cannot be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display
function, level and group can be identified visually by setting a display color.
(
Section 8.5.5
Text tab)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
By specifying a background color,

oversighting popup display can be prevented.
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
In addition, by specifying a text color for each

level or group, alarm's level and group can be
identified visually.
4 Display switching by device

Display data can be switched by the device value.
The display shown below is available. (
Section 8.5.5
Extended tab)
Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarm only) specified by
users
Change the comment displayed according to the target user or purpose
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and soon)
(1) Items to which a switching device can be set
Display alarm
Available switching
device settings
Hierarchy*1
Advanced user alarm

All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy
are displayed.
Level*1
Alarms at the specified level are displayed.
Group*1
Alarms of the specified group are displayed.
Priority Level Attribute
----
The display order is changed between ascending order
The display order is changed between ascending
and descending order.
order and descending order.
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group
be selected.
can be selected.
The setting of the advanced user alarm observation

Advanced User Alarm
Observation
(alarm ID) displayed by advanced alarm display can be

changed.
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an
advanced alarm display window.
General Comment
----
Group
The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be
Middle Comment
changed for each comment group.
Group
The comment displayed can be changed according to
Higher Comment
the user or purpose.
Group
*1 The hierarchy, level and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
8 - 148

Assume that the alarms below occurred.
16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40
Message
Temp. error
Status
Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Fuse error
Level Group
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Ocr.
Ocr.
Rstr.
1
3
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
"Restored" alarm is not displayed by

advanced alarm popup display.
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device.
This section shows an example that the switching device (level) is set to GD10 and the switching
device (group) to GD11.
3
COMMON SETTING
GD10 3
GD11 0
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Message
Status
Level
Group
04/06/01
04/06/01
14:25
11:20
Motor error
Oil error
Ocr.
Chk.
3
3
1
2
04/06/01
10:00
Fuel error
Ocr.
Occurred
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
04/6/1 14:25 Motor error
GD10 3
GD11 2
5
B 348 B 348
(Alarms to be displayed)
Occurred
04/6/1 11:20 Oil error
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
A 1254 A 1254
04/06/01
04/06/01
11:20
10:00
Message
Oil error
Fuel error
Status
Chk.
Ocr.
Level
Group
3
3
2
2

8 - 149
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ALARM
Section 8.5.6
(2) Changing the alarm sorting order by "Priority Level Attribute"
Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and
cannot be changed while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
(3) Advanced user alarm (alarm ID) displayed
Alarms are displayed even when its alarm ID is not checked on the "Popup
Display" item of the advanced user alarm observation window. (Alarms are
displayed regardless of whether the item is checked or not.)
When specify an alarm ID with the "Popup Display" item checked, displays the
alarm ID only.
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Display priority when not switching the display data by the device
5 Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm popup display can be written into the device (word
device).
Data that cannot be displayed by advanced alarm popup display (down time and others) can also be
written into the device. (
Section 8.5.5
External output tab)
(1) Alarm data written into the device (15 types)

Alarm ID
Occurred time
Comment group No.
Restored date
Comment No.
Restored time
Alarm status
Checked date
Occurred date
Checked time
Level
Group
Occurred frequency
Cumulative time
Down time
(2) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm popup display are written.
D200: 0601H
A 1254 A 1254
D201: 2004H
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!
The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device
Touch mode when data are written into the device

To write alarm data into the device, set "Touch Mode" on the Basic tab to "Screen
Switching" or "Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display".
8 - 150

8.5.4
Select [Common]
Click
OVERVIEW

[Advanced Alarm Popup Display] menu.
(Advanced Alarm Popup Display.)
When setting in Workspace (Project)
3
COMMON SETTING
in Workspace (Project). The setting
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Double-click
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Double-click
dialog box is displayed.

8 - 151
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
2 The setting dialog box is displayed. Refer to the following description to perform the setting.
(
8.5.5
Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the displayed advanced alarm popup display type, display contents and touch modes.
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Setting of Advanced Alarm
Popup Display
Description
Check this item when using advanced alarm popup display.
Select an alarm type to be displayed.
For the display priority when multiple alarms occur, refer to the following.
Section 8.5.6
Display Alarm
User Alarm
: Displays advanced user alarm only.
System Alarm
: Displays advanced system alarm only.
User Alarm + System Alarm
: Displays advanced user alarm or advanced system alarm
Select the number of alarms displayed.

For the alarm display priority, refer to the following.
Display Number
Section 8.5.6
Plural : Displays more than one advanced alarms in order.

Single : Displays the alarm with the highest display priority.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm.
Section 8.5.2
Fixed
Selection of display method
: Displays the comment in a line when an alarm occurs.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and
Display Type
after of the comment over multiple lines is not displayed.

Float
: Displays the comment as a flow from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment including multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting "Float," select a speed to display the comment as a flow by "Floating
Speed."
Switching Cycle
Set a cycle to switch the alarm displayed while more than one alarm has occurred (1 to 60s).
This item can be set only when the "Display Type" item is "Fixed."
If setting "Display Type" to "Float," select a speed for the flowing display.
Floating Speed
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per second.
Middle : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per second.
Low
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per second.

8 - 152

8.5.5 Setting items
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Number of Display Attributes
Description
Set the number of the items displayed on an alarm (1 to 2).
Occurred
: Select this item when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment
: Select this item when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
OVERVIEW
Select the items displayed for advanced alarm display.

Attribute
Select format in which occurred date/time of alarm is specified.
After selecting this item, select the display format of date and time.
Date Format*1
Date/Time : Select when displaying both date and time.

Date
: Select when displaying date only.
Time
: Select when displaying time only.
SPECIFICATIONS
Contents
Set the display format of date by clicking

This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Date."
3
Set the display format of time by clicking
This item can be set when "Contents" is set to "Date/Time" or "Time."
Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed when an advanced user alarm occurs.
Section 8.5.3
Initial Display Hierarchy
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is displayed)
General
: General alarms are initially displayed.
Middle
: Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Higher
: Higher alarms are initially displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Time Format*2
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
This item can be set only when "Display Alarm" is "User Alarm" or "User Alarm + System Alarm."
Section 8.5.3
Operations when touching popup display directly
None
: No operation even if touching the popup display.
Screen Switching
: If touch the advanced alarm popup display, displays the base screen of the No.
specified on "Switching Screen" or overlap window 1.
Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display

: Switches the alarm hierarchy of the touched alarm or displays the detailed screen.
Operations vary depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When displaying higher/middle alarm :The alarm hierarchy is switched to the
lower one.
When displaying general alarm
: The detailed screen is displayed.
Set the screen displayed when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
Switching Screen
Select "Base Screen" or "Overlap Window 1," and set a screen number (1 to 32767).
Only overlap window 1 is usable for advanced alarm popup display.
LAMP, SWITCH
When select "Overlap Window 1," set the number of the window screen.
For the details of *1 and *2, refer to next page.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 153
ALARM
Touch Mode
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select the operation when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
*1 Date settings
The display type of date set can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
Item
Description
(Preview area)
Select a sorting order of year/month/day.
Sort
yy/mm/dd: 04/01/24
dd/mm/yy: 24/01/04
mm/dd/yy: 01/24/04
Select a display type of date.
Select a display type depending on whether to use upper/lower case for English/alphabetic
expression, presence/absence of day display and a type of Japanese expression.
The display example below shows the case that "Sort" is set to "yy/mm/dd."
Type
Type 1
: 04/01/24
Type 11
Type 2
: Jan/24
Type 12
: 2004/JAN/24
: 2004/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 3
: JAN/24
Type 13
: 2004/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 4
: Jan/24(FRI)
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 5
: JAN/24(FRI)
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 6
: 04/Jan/24
Type 3 (Japanese)
Type 7
: 04/JAN/24
Type 4 (Japanese)
Type 8
: 04/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 5 (Japanese)
Type 9
: 04/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 6 (Japanese)
Type 10
: 2004/Jan/24
"Type 1 (Japanese)" to "Type 6 (Japanese)" can be selected only when setting "Sort" to "yy/mm/dd."
Select a delimiter for year, month, and day.
Delimiter
"/"
: 04/01/24
"-"
: 04-01-24
"."
Check when displaying "0" before month and day.

Fill with Zeros
8 - 154
Example: Jan. 24, 2004

When checked
: 04/01/24
When not checked
: 04/1/24

8.5.5 Setting items
: 04.01.24
*2 Time settings
OVERVIEW
Set a display type of time.

The display type of the specified time can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
SPECIFICATIONS
Item

Select a display type of time.
Select a display type depending on whether to use English expression, presence/absence of am
and pm and a type of Japanese expression.
Type 1
: 16:28
Type 1 (Japanese)
Type 2
: 16:28:28
Type 2 (Japanese)
Type 3
: 04:28(PM)
Type 3 (Japanese)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Type
Check when displaying "0" before hour, minute, and second.

Example: 5 past 6
06:05 (When checked)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(When not checked)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
6:5
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Fill with Zeros

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 155
ALARM
(Preview area)
Description
COMMON SETTING
2 Text tab
Set the text format of alarms.
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Select a font of the characters displayed.
Font
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
Size

Style
(
Solid
Regular Bold
Solid Raised
Select the target for applying color-coding.
Section 8.5.3
Fixed
Text Color
Switching*1
Level
Group
Comment Color
Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

: Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Set the color after selecting "Fixed".
: Select this item when using different colors depending on levels.
: Select this item when using different colors depending on groups.
: Select this item to display comment with the color specified for comment group when
displaying advanced user alarm. (The font, size and style are specified at the style
setting on this setting. The setting of the comment group except for "Text" is not
effective.)
For advanced system alarms display, alarms are displayed in the color specified by
"Fixed/Default Color."
When "Fixed" is selected for "Text Color Switching,"

Fixed/Default
Color*1
Select the character color when displaying text in a color only.

When "Comment Color" is selected for "Text Color Switching"
Select a character color to be used when there is no comment for advanced user alarms.
Select a character color of advanced system alarms.
Level*1
Select character colors for each level number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)
Group*1
Select character colors for each group number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)
Display Background
Select a background color of the advanced alarm popup display.

Check the check box to select the background color.
8 - 156

8.5.5 Setting items
*1 Relation between the specified character color and actually displayed character color
Set "Switching"
Comment Color
Displayed in the color
Advanced user alarm

specified on "Fixed/
specified for comment
specified on "Level".
specified on "Group".
group.
Higher alarms and middle
Higher alarms and middle
If there is no comment,
alarms are displayed in
alarms are displayed in
the comment area is
the color specified as
the color specified as
displayed in the color
"Level Color 1."
"Group Color 1."
specified by "Fixed/
Default Color."
Default Color."
specified as "Level Color
specified as "Group Color
specified as "Fixed/
1."
1."
Default Color"
(Level, group and comment are effective only when "User Alarm" or "User Alarm + System Alarm" is
selected on "Display Alarm" of the basic tab.)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Group
3
COMMON SETTING
Level
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 157
ALARM
Fixed
OVERVIEW
Alarms displayed
3 Extended tab
Perform the setting for switching the displayed contents of the advanced alarm popup display by using
a device.
This tab is displayed by checking the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Text
External Output
Item
Description
Check the item whose display is switched by the device.
Switching Device
Section 8.5.3
Check this item when switching the alarm hierarchy displayed using the value of the device.
Hierarchy*1
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.


Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Level
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
Group
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.

However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Priority Level Attribute*2
Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.
8 - 158

8.5.5 Setting items
Basic
Extended
Text
External Output
Item
Description
Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
Advanced User Alarm
The alarm of the stored alarm ID is displayed regardless of the setting of "Popup Display" of
advanced user alarm observation.
Observation
If store "0" in this device, displays only the alarms of which "Popup Display" item of advanced
OVERVIEW
Check this item when displaying the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
Switching
Device

Check this item when switching the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarm,
middle alarm, or higher alarm by the value of the device.
Middle Comment Group /
Higher Comment Group
After checking the item, set the switching device. (
When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group specified for advanced user alarm
observation is displayed.
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.
This item can be selected only when advanced user alarms are displayed.
To set the security function, specify a security level (1 to15).
Display
Specify "0" when not setting the security function.

Be sure to specify a number for security (Operation) that is larger than the number for security
Security
Operation
3
COMMON SETTING
General Comment Group /
SPECIFICATIONS
user alarm observation is checked.

If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
(Display).
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 5.8 Security Function
b14 to b2
b15
b1
b0
: Specify the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0)
: General alarms
01(1)
: Middle alarms
10(2)
: Higher alarms
: Not usable
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control
identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, be sure to set this bit to "0."
0
: Switching by the switching device
1
: Switching by touching the display area
For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the
following.
Section 8.5.6
(2) When switching comment display and others using the
hierarchy switching device
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b1 to b0
b2

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 159
ALARM
b15 to b3
LAMP, SWITCH
Store values in the device as follows to switch hierarchies.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*1 Hierarchies
*2 Priority level attribute

Store values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15
b14 to b4
b3 to b0
b3
b2
b1
: Specifies a sort key. ( : Reserved)

0H
: Regular (Occurred)
1H
: Occurred Data/Time
5H
: Level
6H
: Group
b14 to b4
: Not usable
b15
: Specifies ascending order or descending order. ( : Reserved)
0
H
: Descending order
8
H
: Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
8 - 160

8.5.5 Setting items
b0
1
Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm touched on the advanced alarm popup
display area into the device.
This tab is displayed by checking the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box.
OVERVIEW
4 External output tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Description
Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
Use External Output
Writing alarm data into device
Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary
: When the popup display is touched, alarm data are written into the device.
ON
: When the device is ON and the popup display is touched, alarm data are written
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the popup display is touched, alarm data are written
into the device.
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
into the device.
When selecting "ON" or "OFF," set the device to be used for trigger.
(
Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)
(
Alarm ID
Check this item when writing the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.
Check this item when writing the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched
Comment Group No.
alarm into the device.

This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.
Check this item when writing the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm
Comment No.
into the device.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Head Device
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the device to which alarm data are written.
When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 161
ALARM
Device
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Section 8.5.3
Basic
Text
Extended
External Output
Item
Description
Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
The following values are written.
b15 to b3
b0
Alarm
b1
b1
b0
: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
Status*1
b2
1: Occurring
: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.

0: Not checked 1: Checked
b2
: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or
not.
0: Not effective 1: Effective
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
b15 to b3
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.
Occurred Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.
Restored Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.
Restored Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.
Checked Date*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.
Checked Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.
Occurred Date
Device
: Not usable
*1,*2
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.
Level*1
Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.
Group*1
Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the
Occurred
Frequency*1
device.
Cumulative Time*1,*2
Down Time*1,*2
Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.

*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarm is displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment
group No., and comment No.).
(2) Writable data according to the collection mode
The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm
Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
Section 8.2.2
8 - 162

8.5.5 Setting items
*2 Writing format of date and time
OVERVIEW
Date and time are written in word data of two words.

(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)
(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
b8 b7
to
to
b0
Day (1 to 31)
b8 b7
to
SPECIFICATIONS
b15
D255
to
Month (1 to 12)
b0
Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year
b15
b8 b7
to
b0
Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)
b15
D257
to
b8 b7
00H
to
b0
Hour (0 to 23)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
D256
to
COMMON SETTING
(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

to
b8 b7
07H
(Month)
b15
to
(Day)
b8 b7
20H
D255
to b0
01H
to
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
b15
D254
b0
04H
(Dominical year)
b8 b7
(Minute)
b15
D257
to
00H
b8 b7
to
56H
b0
(Second)
to
b0
12H
LAMP, SWITCH
to
24H
(Hour)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
b15
D256

8.5.5 Setting items
8 - 163
ALARM
b15
D254
8.5.6
Precaution
Precautions for using advanced alarm popup display are as show below.
1 Precaution for Drawing

(1) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device (set on the extended tab) is specified for the objects below,
the objects may not be displayed on the specified initial display hierarchy.
This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching
device when the screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects
above, respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Example: When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)
Setting of advanced user alarm display
Setting of advanced alarm popup display
: GD10
: GD10
: General
: Higher
Place on base screen 1
Operations when base screen 1 is displayed
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
Occurred
--
-- Line 1 abend
-- Line 1 abend
Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)
2 (higher)
Different values are
written into the same device
8 - 164

8.5.6 Precaution
Comment
Line 1 abend
Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
General alarms being displayed.
Middle alarms being displayed.
Higher alarms being displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) When masking is applied
A 1254
A 1254
B
348


B
348
- Line abend

middle hierarchy
Touch!
Masking
1
AND
Middle alarms being displayed

A 1254
A 1254
348
348
Mask value (7FFFH)
Value of hierarchy
switching device
1

-Pwr. module error
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.6 Precaution
8 - 165
ALARM
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Comments displayed
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Corresponding comment No.
LAMP, SWITCH
Value of hierarchy switching device
1
OVERVIEW
(2) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the extended tab) is
changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
(b) When masking is not applied

0
A 1254
A 1254
B
348
348
- Line abend

middle hierarchy
Touch!
A 1254
A 1254
348
348
Value of hierarchy
switching device
2


B
Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767
The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.
-Pwr. module error
(3) Setting for saving advanced alarm data in the memory card
The touch switch for saving alarms cannot be assigned for advanced alarm popup display.
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the store trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the store trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save advanced
alarm data.
(b) When store data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm
display was specified, and store the data.
8 - 166

8.5.6 Precaution
1
(1) When an object is overlapping another object
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot
be operated.
In such a case, change the position of the advanced alarm popup display area.
Section 8.5.3
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
Changes the display position
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
3
COMMON SETTING
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Touch the leftmost

of the display area!

(a) When the displayed contents have not been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
For advanced user alarms, only the alarm of the alarm ID to which "Popup Display" of
advanced user alarm observation was checked is displayed.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Alarms being occurred
04/6/1 11:35 Temp. error
Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52
Temp. error
Displayed first
04/6/1 09:45:30
Fuse error
Displayed second
04/6/1 08:15:45
Oil error
Displayed third
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(b) When the displayed data have been changed by "Switching Device" on the extended tab
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Displayable alarm types and settings

8.5.6 Precaution
8 - 167
ALARM
Section 8.5.2
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(2) When the advanced alarm popup display is not performed

Refer to the following to check the setting.
(c) When "User Alarm + System Alarm" is selected on "Display Alarm" of the basic tab
If an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm have occurred simultaneously, only
the advanced system alarm is displayed.
The advanced user alarm is displayed when all the advanced system alarms are restored.
When an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm occur
simultaneously
Posted advanced user alarms
Occurred
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Comment
04/6/1
11:35:52
Temp. error
04/6/1
09:45:30
Fuse error
04/6/1
08:15:45
Oil error
*1
*1 Not displayed until all the advanced

system alarms are restored.
Posted advanced system alarms
04/6/1 10:46 400 Unable to communicate with CPU
Occurred
Comment
04/6/1 10:46:49
400 Unable to communication with CPU
Displayed first
04/6/1 10:30:30
9 AC down error
Displayed second
04/6/1 07:11:15
803 Transident error
Displayed third
Advanced system alarms are

displayed prior to others.
Restoration method of advanced system alarms

Section 8.3.2
(4) When switching the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device
If switch the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device with "Display Type" on the basic
tab specified to "Fixed", the display is updated at the intervals specified by "Switching Cycle."
Therefore, note that display may not be switched soon after switching the hierarchy.
8 - 168

8.5.6 Precaution
(5) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in
OVERVIEW
Display switching by device) it may take
(6) Display of the comment window and key window

SPECIFICATIONS
When try to open the detail display (comment

window display) while the key window is displayed.
8
5
2
9 AC
A 1254 A 1254
6 Del
3 +/- B 348 B 348
Enter
COMMON SETTING
7
4
1
0
Key window
04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error
Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!
(7) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time

For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
the following.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 8.5.3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.5.6 Precaution
8 - 169
ALARM
advanced user alarm observation (

a few minutes to display the data.
8.6 User Alarm Display
User alarm is a function that displays user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
When multiple devices turn on, the comments are displayed as alarm messages in the set display order.
M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON
M100 Temp. error
M100
M100 Temp. error
M101 Fuse error
Replace the fuse of

M101
error
M10
1 Fuse
the
power
module
with new one.
Detail
Detail
Remark
Comments to be displayed as user alarm

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register the comments that will be displayed on the user alarm as basic comment.
Example:
Start the ladder monitor function from alarm list
Displaying the number of alarms occurred
Set by Touch Switch (Section 6.2.5)
Set on the Device tab

Alarm Status
M999
02/02/01 10:25 Mac. err.

02/02/01 13:25 Lin.1 err.
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Temp. error
Fuse error
Lad. dis.
Alarm event count 6
Displays the ladder monitor

function by touch operation.
8 - 170
Monitor the ladder statusof

device corresponding to the
alarm occurrence causes
M100
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Timing belt error
The number of all alarms occurred is

displayed on the alarm list display.
Auxiliary
setting
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
For user alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Functions relevant to user alarms and others

OVERVIEW
Relevant settings

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
As GOT may not the display overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
COMMON SETTING
8.6.1
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
objects within GOT]
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS

A 1254
6
Input disabled
A 1254
LAMP, SWITCH
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
348 B
348
Key Input Signal
Key Code Input
(Write device)
Notifies the key code that is assigned to the input key when
a value is entered by the ASCII input or touch switch.
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
348 B
348
A B C

8 - 171
ALARM
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
8.6.2
Before setting user alarm
This function displays alarm occurrence time and user-registered comments as alarm messages.
The comments used as alarm messages must be registered as the basic comment in advance.
(
Section 4.1 Comment Registration)
1 Number of displayed alarms

Select whether to display multiple alarm occurrences (with plural comments) or only one (with single
comment).
Number of comment: "Plural"
Display range
Number of comment: "Single"
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 13:52:15
Machine No.1 is ove
Cancel [Supply stops] and restart supply.
One alarm is displayed in one line.

The text out of the line will not be displayed.
If a comment is longer than two lines, only the
first line is displayed.
Remark
Display range
The texts will be continuously displayed in the

second line.
Even if the comment size exceeds two lines, the
texts from the second line can be displayed,
providing it does not exceed the display range.
Display method for multi line comment (
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
Any line of the multi line comment can be specified to display.

Example: Display any line of the 6-line comment that has been registered
Multi line comment contents
Inspection1
Conv. insp.
Method of displaying comment
Inspection2
Proc. prod. insp.
Start line of display

Number of display lines
: 3rd
: 2(only when the number of
comment is set as "one")
Inspection3
Line insp.
04/6/1 13:52:20
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30
Inspection2
Temp. error
Fuse error
Inspection2
04/6/1 13:52:20
Processed products inspection
Only one line can be randomly specified to be displayed. The range of lines to be displayed can be specified.
8 - 172

8.6.2 Before setting user alarm
1
Set the order to display alarm occurrences.
It can be set by the device No. order (ascending/descending) and alarm occurrence order (Oldest /Latest).
Example: Display alarms by "Latest" sort
Alarm Status
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Timing belt error
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35
04/6/1 04:33:12
04/6/1 02:30:16
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
COMMON SETTING
M2
M4
M0
M3
M5
M1
OVERVIEW
2 Sort
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Checking if the alarm comment exceeds the display range is done by scrolling the user alarm with touch
switches
Create the touch switches for user alarm.
Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
3 Scroll on
6
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Scroll down
Scroll up
LAMP, SWITCH
Scroll up

heat
Cancel [Stop Supply] and restart the supply.
Scroll down
Scroll up
Scroll down
Display 1
line by
each
scrolling.
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
Scroll up
Switch to
the next
alarm display.
Scroll down

8 - 173
ALARM
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
4 Details of display (only for [Plural] number of comment)

(1) Applicable screen (
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
To display the cause and corrective action of alarm in details, select a screen from the following
three types.
(a) Comment window
Display the user-registered comment in a comment window.
The comment different from that in user alarm comment can be displayed as a detailed
comment.
Temp. error at the
power supply module
on Line 1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1
Base Screen1+Comment Window
(b) Base screen

Display the specified base screen.
Tank A
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
90
RUN
Base Screen1
STOP
40
RUN
STOP
60
RUN
STOP
Base Screen5
(c) Window Screen

Display the specified window screen (overlap window 1).
Feed material from the feed

opening.
Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1
8 - 174

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1+Window Screen10
(2) Screen that includes user alarm and the corresponding detailed alarm type screen.
Detailed alarm display type screen
Comment window
Base screen
Overlap window 1
Window screen
Base screen
Simultaneous display
Switch
OVERVIEW
Screen that includes user alarm
Switch
Overlap window 2
Superimpose window2
: Switch the screen that includes user alarm to the corresponding detailed alarm display type
screen.
: Display the detailed alarm display type screen keeping the screen that includes user alarm
on the display.
(3) Specifying a comment No. to be displayed or offset value for screen No. (Offset for Datailed No.)
By setting 'Offset for Detailed No.' on the Device Tab, an offset value for details display described
below can be specified: (
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
No. of the basic comment that will be displayed on the comment window
No. of the Base screen and Window screen
While monitoring by the GOT, the comment No. or screen No. can be switched using the device.
Example: When the device for "Offset for Detailed No." is set to "D0", and the following comments
are registered
Comment No. (Basic comment)
Comment
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 1.
Check the power supply module.
Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 1.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 2.
11
12
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
COMMON SETTING
* Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Superimpose window1
Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 2.
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Comment No.1 is displayed
10
LAMP, SWITCH
Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 1.
D0
Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 2.
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Comment No.11 is displayed

8 - 175
ALARM
D0
To match the user alarm display with details screen:

By using "Offset for Detailed No." the comment on the user alarm cannot be
changed.
An offset value for comment No. (basic comment) on the user alarm should be
specified in "Offset for Comment No." on the Extended tab.
(
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
Match display the user alarm with the comment on the details screen by using
"Offset for Detailed No. and "Offset for Comment No.".
(4) Display method

Select the method for details display from the following two types.
(a) One touch (
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
Touch the user alarm directly to display the detailed information.
Temperature error at
the power supply
module on Line 1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:26 Oil error
(b) Touch switch (

Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm)
Create touch switches for user alarm to display the detailed information.
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Cursor ON
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Display the cursor
8 - 176

Cursor ON
Delete
Up
Detail
Down
Move (up/down) the cursor to

the alarm for details display.
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Replace the fuse at

04/6/1
15:51:38
Fuse error
the
power
supply
04/6/1 10:25:16
module
on LineOil
1. error
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Display the detailed information
Example: The following shows differences of the user alarm display according to the "Store memory"
settings (enabled or disabled) when the screen switches and the alarm devices turn ON/
OFF at the timing below.
04/6/1 12:10:15
Display on the screen
including alarm list
display
Display Screen
No.10
Display Screen
No.20
Display Screen
No.10
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
M100 OFF
ON (04/6/1 11:38:08)
M101 OFF
ON (04/6/1 09:00:22)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
M102 OFF
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error
ON (04/6/1 10:15:35)
Alarm
Device
SPECIFICATIONS
With the settings made, the alarm occurrence date/time is displayed as follows:
Store Memory enabled: The alarms are displayed with the date and time when the alarm actually
occurred.
Store Memory disabled: The alarms are displayed with the time and date when the screen is
displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Check "Store Memory" when collecting the information on alarm occurrence date/time even when a
screen including no user alarm is displayed.
The GOT monitors the alarm occurrence status at all times and stores the information in the GOT
internal memory.
This setting item is provided on the Trigger tab.
OVERVIEW
5 Store memory
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error

04/6/1 10:15:35 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:38:08 M101 Fuse error
Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory enabled)
LAMP, SWITCH
Alarm occurrence date and time can be

displayed correctly.
04/6/1 12:10:15 M100 Temp. error

04/6/1 12:10:15 M101 Fuse error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M102 Oil error
Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory disabled)
8
Alarm occurrence time shows date and time
when the screen has changed to Screen No.10
(all alarms show the same date and time)

8 - 177
ALARM
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(1) The timing when the data stored in memory is cleared.

The data stored in memory is cleared when the GOT is reset or powered off.
(2) The timing when the alarm occurrence date/time is cleared with the Store Memory
disabled.
When "Store Memory" is disabled, alarm occurrence time information is not
collected at any of the timings below, causing the collected alarm occurrence time
to be cleared:
The screen including the user alarm is hidden and then displayed again.
The screen is switched to the base screen while the user alarm is on the
superimpose window.
The security switching is made.
The language switching is made.
The machine No. switching is made.
The offset switching is made.
8 - 178

1 Register comments in advance.

Section 4.1.4
Registering comments as basic
2 Carry out either of the following operations:
Click
[Alarm List]
[User Alarm] from the menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
Select the [Object]
(User Alarm).
3 Click on the position where user alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
4 Double click on the arranged user alarm to display the setting dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
5 After setting user alarm, set the touch switch for scrolling user alarm up/down and to display the alarm
detailed information.
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Method of adjusting display range

Adjust the display range as following when the comment cannot be displayed
completely.
Occurrence time
(fixed to 20 digits)
Display with 160 dots
when text size is 1 x 1 times.
Use 16 dots as vertical size in 1 row

when text size is 1 x 1 times.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Temp. error
Comment
Display the longest comment for confirmation in drawing screen.
Set the longest comment No. (basic comment) in "head comment No."
(basic tab) and adjust display range to display all the comments.
After the adjustment, undo the setting of "head comment No."
6
LAMP, SWITCH
13:52:20
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
04/6/1
3
COMMON SETTING
Register alarm messages in a basic comment. (

comment)
OVERVIEW

8 - 179
ALARM
8.6.3
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape
8 - 180

8.6.4
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set the number of monitor devices and view format (number of comments/sort/frame).
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Trigger
Description
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Items
Set the number of monitor devices.
[GT15]
Alarm (Device)
Points
The devices that can be set are different on the settings made in [Device No.] of device tab.
In [Continuous] setting
: 8192 devices
In [Random] setting
: 512 devices
[GT11]
Up to 256 devices can be set.
Set the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs. (Setting range: 1 to 32767)
The comment No. (Basic comment) set here is assigned in head device of device tab.
Continuous comment No. will be set respectively according to the number of monitor devices from the comment No. of
head comment No. (Basic comment)
Head Comment
Example: Head device: M100, head comment No.: 1
No.
Monitor device
View
Comment No.(Basic comment)
M100
1 Temp. error
Head comment No.
M101
2 Fuse error
M102
3 Oil error
The comment of continued

No. is set from head comment No.
LAMP, SWITCH
Format
Select the size of text to be displayed.

When (1 x 1) is set, the font size is 8 x 16 dots.
size to the multiple of even number.
If set to the multiple of odd number, it will not be displayed as high quality font.
1 to 8
1 to 8
Number of
Comment
Set the number of comments to be displayed.

Plural
: Display plural comments in frame.
Single
: Display only one comment in frame.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When displaying comments that is set to high quality font in [Basic comment] as high quality font, set the font
Size
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Device
(Continued to the next page )

8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 181
ALARM
Basic
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Select the position to display the text.
Left:
Alignment
AAAA
BB
CCCC
Center:
Right:
AAAA
BB
CCCC
AAAA
BB
CCCC
Select the sort of comment.

Ascending : display according to the order of the smallest to the biggest.
Descending : display according to the order of the biggest to the smallest
Oldest
: display according to the order of the oldest to the latest
Latest
: display according to the order of the newest to the oldest.
When monitor is set randomly, [Ascending] [Descending] will be based on the setting order of device.
Example: When making following settings in device tab.
Display comment
Sort
View
Temp. error
Fuse error
Format
Oil error
Displayed in [Ascending]
M100 ON
M101 ON
M102 ON
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Displayed in [Decending]
M102 ON
M101 ON
M100 ON
Oil error
Fuse error
Temp. error
Check this item to display date when an alarm occurs.

Date is displayed in the form of "yy/mm/dd: hh: mm: ss"
(Year is displayed with the last 2 digits, and hour is displayed in the 24-hour system.)
Date Display
04/06/01 09:30:40
Space
Space
Temp. error
20 digits
Comment

Shape
selected as shape.
Frame
Format
Frame
Frame
Plate
Plate

Category
Layer
(
8 - 182

8.6.4 Setting items
1
2 Device tab
OVERVIEW
Set the monitor device and the detailed alarm display type when an alarm occurs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic
Device
Extended
COMMON SETTING
Trigger
Items
Description
Select the method of displaying the detailed alarm comment information.
Not Display
: No detailed information to be displayed.
Comment Window *1
: A comment window is displayed to provide detailed information.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
This setting is usable only when [Plural] is selected in [Number of Comment].
A registered comment is used for the window.
Detailed Alarm Display Type
(Register comments as basic comment.)

Base screen
: The detailed information is displayed on a base screen.

The base screen specified by detailed displayed No. of the alarm device is used.
: Display the window screen (Overlap window1) by details display.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Window screen
Display the window screen that is set in the detailed No. of alarm device.
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.
Device No.
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered from the set device.

Random
: Devices are numbered at random.
Select the method of displaying the comment window/base screen/window screen used for providing
detailed information of alarm.

Detailed Display No.
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered starting from the set comment
: Devices are numbered at random.
Setting the screen No. for monitor device and detailed display.
Device
(
Detailed No.
Detailed
Selection
Number the comment (Basic comment)/base screen/window screen used for displaying the detailed
information when an alarm occurs (when the specified device condition is satisfied.)
Select the comment to be displayed in details when selecting [Comment Window] in [Detailed alarm display
type].
The comment can be displayed when confirming the comment contents.
Check this item to store the number of alarms (the number of bit devices that have turned ON) in the word device.
Device for Occurring Number
After checking, set the device to store alarms.

(
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm Device
LAMP, SWITCH
No.(Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No.

Random
Refer to the next P. for details on * 1.

8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 183
ALARM
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Check this item to switch the detailed information on screen according to the value of one device.
The comment No. (Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No. set as the detailed No. of alarm
device is added to the device (offset device) value set here.
Offset for Detailed No.
(The data size of the set device is fixed to 16 bits)

For the details about offset function, refer to the following.
(
One Touch
Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the user alarm.
(This setting is usable in the basic tab when [Plural] is set in [Comment Number])
*1 Display Method of Comment Window

(1) Number of characters available for comment window
GT15
: 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
GT11
: 23 characters 7 lines (161 characters)
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new
line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.

8 - 184

8.6.4 Setting items

1
3 Extended tab
OVERVIEW
Set the security, offset.

Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Trigger
Items
Security
Description
(
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device
Check this item to switch the comment on the user alarm according to the device value.
The device (offset device) value set here is added to the comment No. (Basic comment) that has been set in
"Head Comment No." on the Basic tab.
Offset for Comment No.
(The data size of the device is fixed to 16 bits.)

For details on offset function, refer to the following.
(
Check this item to operate the user alarm by using a touch switch for which key code has been set for user
alarm.
After checking, arrange above touch switch.
Scroll On
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
Section 8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm)

If the data list and alarm history are set to be displayed on the same screen
If multiple user alarms including the one with [Scroll On] checked are placed on a single screen.
Check this item to specify the display start line of the multiple-line comment.
Then, set the number of the line.
: Select this option to set the device value to the start line No.
Then, set the device. (
When comment appears as blank, check if the value set as the start line No. is within the number of created comment
lines.
Specify the number of lines of the multiple-line comment.
This option is available only when "Number of Comments" is set to "Single" (set in the Basic tab).
Then, set the value of each line.
Number of Lines
Fixed
: Set by direct input. (1 to 32767)
Device
: Select this option to set the device value to the number of comment lines.
Then, set the device. (
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
: Set by direct input (1 to 32767)
Device

8.6.4 Setting items
8 - 185
ALARM
Fixed
LAMP, SWITCH
Note that this item is not available in the following cases:
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
For the details about trigger setting, refer to the following.
Basic
Device
Extended
Trigger
Items
Description
Select the trigger for displaying which the object.
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items
Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
Initial Display
Hold Display
Select the data size (16 bits/32 bits) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real)
Real can be selected only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
trigger.After setting, click on the Seting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be displayed
only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
though the trigger is not satisfied.If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
Check this item to collect the alarm occurrence time while the screen where user alarm has not been set is
Store Memory
displayed. (
Section 8.6.2
Store memory)
The alarm occurrence status are always monitored and stored to the GOT internal memory.After checking,
set the cycle to collect data (1 to 3600 s) in [Trigger Type].
8 - 186

8.6.4 Setting items
8.6.5
Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Screen example 1
OVERVIEW
Touch switch for displaying user alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying user alarm.
Screen example 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Touch switch
Key code
COMMON SETTING
3
Description
Scroll the display up/down one line.
This function is available only when the cursor is hidden.
Scroll up by one line
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
04/06/01 13:54:45
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
00F2H
Scroll down by one line

00F3H
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Scroll down by one line!

Show/Hide the cursor.
Show cursor
FFB0H
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
Show the cursor!
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.6.5 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
8 - 187
ALARM
FFB1H
LAMP, SWITCH
6
Hide cursor
Touch switch
Key code
Description
The cursor moves to the previous/next page.(page by page)
Move cursor upward
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 13:54:45
04/06/01 12:23:11
04/06/01 11:11:12
Fuel error
Motor error
FFB2H
Move to the next page!

The cursor moves up/down one line. (line by line)
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
FFB3H
Move the cursor!

Display the screen for providing details on the selected alarm.
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Fuse error
Oil error
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
Display detail
FFB8H
04/06/01
15:20:41
Fuseaterror
Abnormal
temperature
04/06/01
14:25:17
Oil error
the power
supply module.
Check the power supply

module.
Display detail!
Search the alarm device and display on the ladder monitor screen.
(Automatically search the specified device ladder and display it.)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
Enabling the touch switch to be used for displaying user alarm:

Check "Scroll On" on the Extended tab to use the touch switch for displaying user
alarm. (
Section 8.6.4
Extended tab)
8 - 188

1
Move cursor upward (FFB2H)/Move cursor downward (FFB3H) operate differently
depending on the display status:
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page.
If the cursor is displayed, the display is moved up/down one line.
OVERVIEW
Using switches that operate differently depending on the display status
(1) Operating by touching user alarm directly

By setting "One Touch" on the device tab, the screen for providing details on the
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
Section 8.6.4
Device tab)
04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
Replace
fuse at the
04/06/01 the
15:20:41
Fuse error
power supply module.
04/06/01 14:25:17
Oil error
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
3
COMMON SETTING
selected alarm. (
Display detail
(2) Setting touch switch

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 189
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
8.6.6
Precautions
This section provides the precautions to be taken when using user alarm.
1 Drawing precautions
(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on one screen
Up to 24 user alarm objects can be set.
(2) When [Store Memory] is checked

(a) Up to 16 user alarm objects can be set in the whole project when [Store Memory] is set.
(b) Up to 8192 alarm list objects can be set in the whole projects as the devices applicable for
monitoring by [Store Memory]. The preset number of alarm lists is not relevant.
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab is set to White.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen
color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab to other than White.

(1) Display of comment window
Comment
window
Key window
1000
Value input
User alarm
(2) Displaying the alarm occurrence time

To check alarm occurrence time, display the GOT clock data.
For precautions on the clock function that controls GOT time data and relevant restrictions, refer to
the following.
(3) When used with other objects
After checking [Scroll On] in the extended tab (settings to use touch switch for user alarm), the
following objects cannot be set in the same screen.
Data list function object
Alarm history function object
8 - 190

8.6.6 Precautions
(b) Setting only the touch switch on another screen

To set only the touch switch for user alarm on another screen, make the setting by referring to
the following priority order:
Priority order corresponding to the touch switch screen
Screen for which touch switch has been set
Base screen
High
Overlap window2
Low
Superimpose window 1
3
COMMON SETTING
Overlap window1
Priority Order
Call screen 1 to 5
Cursor ON
Down
5
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error
04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error
Occurred
04/6/1 13:25:49
04/6/1 12:15:30
04/6/1 10:45:30
Message
Restore Check
Temp. error
13:30
Fuse error
12:28
Oil error
11:26
11:15
User alarm
(Set in the overlap window1)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Up
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Example: When touch switch has been set for other screens (overlap window2)
Cursor OFF
2
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Setting screen

Make sure to set the touch switch for user alarm and user alarm in the same screen.
If not, the touch switch may operate instead of the user alarm, when both alarm history and
data list are displayed.
OVERVIEW
(4) Touch switch for user alarm
Alarm history
(Set in the base screen)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
As the base screen has higher priority,

operates it as the touch switch of alarm history.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.6.6 Precautions
8 - 191
ALARM
8.7 System Alarm Display
System alarm is a function used to display error codes and error messages when error occurs in the GOT,
controller or the network.
Displaying system alarm allows a user to check how the error occurred and its cause.

9 AC down error
803 Transient error
Error
occurance
Remark
16:40:30
Comments to display
Comments to display in system alarms do not need registration (Registered in
GOT).
8 - 192
Related settings
Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For advanced system alarms, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW
8.7.1
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
COMMON SETTING
Setting items
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

objects within GOT]
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Functions relevant to system alarms and others

Resets the system alarm or system information (GOT error code,
GOT error detecting signal).
B 348
A 1254
A 1254
B 348
B 348
The system alarm message is cleared
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.7.1 Related settings
8 - 193
ALARM
B 348
LAMP, SWITCH
6
1254
420 Communication
A 1254 Atime-out
8.7.2
Before setting system alarm
1 Types of system alarm

System alarm has the following three types:
1) GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm
2) CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm
3) Network error
: A network error is displayed as an alarm
2 Method of collecting data

Even while the screen that does not include system alarm is displayed, data are always collected every
3 seconds and stored into GOT.
3 Displayed information
The error code, error message as well as error time will be displayed in system alarm.
The error code and error message for display are provided by default within GOT. Therefore, they do
not need to be created by user.
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
Error code
Error message
16:40:30
Occured time
(Only for GOT error display)
4 Method of displaying alarm

(1) Maximum number of alarms can be displayed
Each system alarm is displayed in one line type; up to 3 lines can be displayed.
The alarm display is updated when new alarm is detected.
Example: When new alarm (Parameter error) is detected by controller
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
16:40:30

104 Parameter error
803 Transient error
16:40:30
Error display of controller is refreshed.(9
104)
(2) Display priority

When the display range is lower than 2 lines, alarms will be displayed in the following order.
1) GOT error
2) CPU error
3) Network error
When the number of alarm occurrence exceeds the display range, the lower priority alarms will not
be displayed.
The error code, error message and error time beyond a single line will not be displayed.
8 - 194

8.7.2 Before setting system alarm
1
5 Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions for error code
User's Manual
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.7.2 Before setting system alarm
8 - 195
ALARM
GT
OVERVIEW
For the details, refer to the following manuals.
8.7.3

Select the [Object]
Click
[Alarm List]
[System Alarm] from the menu.
(System Alarm).
2 Click on the position where System Alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged system alarm to display the setting dialog box.
4 For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
Display field adjusting method

To prevent an alarm message from being truncated on display, adjust the display
field as follows.
If the GOT screen size is smaller than the value described below, adjust the font
size.
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
16:40:30
Set in 3 rows.
(Use 48 dots as vertical size in 3 rows
when text size is 1 1 times.)
Error message (maximum 64 digits) Occurrence time (fixed to 8 digits)

Display with 576 dots when text size is 1 1 times.
Increase the size to display the occurrence time at the right end.
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape
8 - 196

8.7.4
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set the display format (shape/text size) of system alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic
COMMON SETTING
Extended
Item
Size
Description
Select the text size (0.5 to 8) of the error message to be displayed
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Shape
Plate
Plate

Category
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Layer
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Format

8.7.4 Setting items
8 - 197
ALARM
Shape
Frame
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
2 Extended tab
Set the security.
Check "Extended" at the bottom of this dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Extended
Item
Security
Description
(
8 - 198

8.7.4 Setting items
8.7.5
Precaution
OVERVIEW
This section describes precautions for using system alarm.

Maximum number of system alarms that can be positioned (set) in one screen:
One system alarm can be positioned (set).
(2) Deletion of system alarms on GOT

Even if the alarm factors are cleared, alarm message of GOT will remain in system alarm.
To clear the message, make sure to turn the following device of system information function ON.
GOT error reset message (system signal1-1. b13)
(3) Displaying alarm occurred time

For alarm occurred time, displays the GOT clock data.
For precautions and restrictions for the clock function that manages GOT clock data, refer to the
following.
(4) Text and background color
As the text color for system alarm is fixed to white, set the plate color to non-white.
COMMON SETTING
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(1) Controllers for which system alarms are not displayed on GOT
Errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the system alarm of
GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
Inverter
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
SPECIFICATIONS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.7.5 Precaution
8 - 199
ALARM
8.8 Alarm History Display
The times and comments of the alarms occurred are stored in the GOT incorporated memory and displayed
as a history list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit OFF to ON/word
device range).
Alarm
occurred
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.
X0:OFF
Alarm
detail
display
ON
Supply oil to the

arm of Line 1.
Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.
Up Down Check
The window for detail display is any of the comment window,

base screen, or window screen.
Alarm
checked
time
Up Down Check
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:10
With the touch switch for alarm history

display, the alarm check time is displayed.
To create the touch switch for alarm history display, set a key code to the touch switch.
System Restoration
After
system
restoration
Up Down Check
X0:ON
Remark
OFF
Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:45
12:10
The restoration time

is displayed.
Comments displayed on the alarm history display

Comments displayed on the alarm history display must be registered in advance.
Register comments in Basic Comment.
8 - 200
Examples
L
Display number of alarm that have been historical
Make setting on Option (Common) tab

CSV file
Date
Date
Make setting on Option (Common) tab

OVERVIEW
Display alarm data on PC
Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
Date Time Message
Date Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp.Err.
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.

04/02/01 10:25 Atm Err.
Alarm his. number
Alarm his. number
The number of all alarms historical is displayed in alarm history.

SPECIFICATIONS
The alarm historical data saved to memory card in CSV file

format are read by spreadsheet software.
Start ladder monitor function from alarm history display

Make setting with Touch Switch (Section 6.2.5)
Date
Time Message
02/02/01 10:25 Line Err.
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder status of device

displayed as alarm
history is monitored
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Ladder monitor function is

displayed by touch switch
COMMON SETTING
Ladder
display
8 - 201
ALARM
Memory card
8.8.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
For alarm history, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to alarm history and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error

objects within GOT]

Input disabled
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A 1254 A 1254
B
348 B
348
Key Input Signal
Key Code Input
(Write device)

switch.
D100 0043
ABC
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
A B C
8 - 202

8.8.2
Before setting alarm history display
OVERVIEW
Collected alarms are displayed as history.

Register alarm messages in basic comment in advance.
1 Alarm collection mode

Select either of the two collection modes, historical mode or cumulative mode.
When an alarm occurs, the following information can be collected and displayed.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred
Message
Restore Check Cumulate Count
1
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error
18:50
2
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error 16:30 16:20 00:20
2
6)
3
COMMON SETTING
(In the example above, 3), 4), and 5) indicate time only.)
Description
Info displayed
Historical mode
Cumulative mode
1) Occurred
The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.
2) Message
The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.
3) Restore
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP

(
8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
4) Check
Message
Pwr. module error
Restore Check
Check
Message
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00
Displays the total amount of time for which alarms were

generated in the past.
Cumulative time = t1 + t2 + t3
5) Cumulative
time
----
Status of alarm
occurrence
(X0: OFF ON)
t1
Alarm
occurred
(1st)
t2
Alarm
occurred
(2nd)
t3
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(FFB4H)
Alarm
occurred
(3rd)
The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed.
Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs. (The
data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
GT15: 3072
GT11: 2048
Cumulative mode
In this mode, the latest alarm status and the cumulative count and time of the alarms that occurred in the
past are calculated and displayed for each alarm type.
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
----

8.8.2 Before setting alarm history display
8 - 203
ALARM
6) Count
LAMP, SWITCH
Time
Example: Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of alarm history display for each collection mode.
ON
ON
OFF
"Temp. error"
(M10:OFF ON)
OFF
ON
"Fuse error"
(M20:OFF ON)
11:30
12:00
1)
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user*1
15:30
3)
18:25
4)
19:00
5)
*1 Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.

(
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
(1) Historical mode

Not collected in the historical mode.
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

"Temp. error"
occurs!

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

12:00
"Temp. error" is checked.

Check (FFB4H)

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

15:30 12:00
is displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

15:30
12:00
A new line is added

and displayed.

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
8 - 204
Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

19:00
15:30 12:00

is displayed.
1
OVERVIEW
(2) Cumulative mode

The information on the latest alarm status,the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
00:00
1
00:00
1

12:00 00:00
1
00:00
1
"Temp. error" is checked.
SPECIFICATIONS
2) "Temp. error" is checked

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
Check (FFB4H)
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

15:30 12:00 04:00
1
COMMON SETTING

Restoration time and
cumulative time are
displayed.
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

04:00
2

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

19:00 04:35
2
The occurrence time when

the alarm occurred again
is displayed on the same
line of the alarm frequency is
increased by one.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
Restoration time is
displayed.
The time during which
the alarm has been
generated is added to
the cumulative time.
2 Collecting and holding alarm data
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
No. 25 D1 10
D2 20
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(1) Collecting alarm data

The GOT collects alarm data at any time and saves the data in the GOT internal memory.
Alarm data are constantly collected and updated even while the monitor screen not including alarm
history display is displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error
AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC
7
The alarm data updated while
the other screen was displayed
are shown.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Switch to another screen
(2) Deleting alarm data

Alarm data are deleted at the following timing.
(a) Power-off or reset of the GOT

8 - 205
ALARM
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities

Item
Description
Display
Operation
GOT setup
Debug & self check
Main menu

Self check
[I/O check]
(c) Project data download, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format
(d) Clear trigger device
Turning on the device specified at "History Clear" (on the Option (Common) tab) deletes all the
alarms in the restored status.
(e) Key operations of the switches for alarm history display (touch switches)
Alarms in the restored status can be deleted using the following touch switches.
Delete (FFB6H): Delete the alarms in the restored status one by one.
Delete All (FFB7H): Delete all the alarms in the restored status.
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
(f)
When the number of alarms occurred has exceeded the upper limit (when the collection mode
is "Historical")
In the case where "When number of alarm occurrences exceeds set value, delete oldest alarm
occurrences" was check-marked on the Option (common) tab, if the number of alarms
occurred has exceeded the upper limit, the older alarms are deleted from the oldest one.
[Upper limit in total number of alarms occurred]
GT15: 3072
GT11: 2048
[Operation setting for the case where the maximum number of alarms is exceeded]
Alarm History dialog box (Option (Common tab))
(3) Holding alarm data under power failure

Alarm data can be held even if the GOT is powered off by saving them to the memory card.
8 - 206

1
(1) Usable screens (
Section 8.8.4
Device (Common) tab)
To display alarm causes and corrective actions in details, any of the following 3 screen types can
be selected.
(a) Comment window
Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the
comment window.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature error
of the line 1's
power module
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Base screen 1
Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
COMMON SETTING
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Base screen 1 + Comment window
(b) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
90
40
60
Run Stop
Run Stop
Run Stop
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Tank A
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
OVERVIEW
3 Detail display
Base screen 5
Base screen 1
(c) Window screen

The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
6
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
LAMP, SWITCH
Feed material from the opening.

Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 + Window screen 10

8 - 207
ALARM
Base screen 1
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(2) Display method

Select either of the following 2 methods for detail display.
(a) One touch (
Section 8.8.4
Basic tab)
Display the detail display by touching the alarm history display item directly.
Temperature error of
the line 1's power
module
Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
(b) Touch switch (

Create a touch switch for alarm history to display the detailed data.
Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Display the cursor
8 - 208
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Move the cursor (using Up or Down)

to the target alarm.

Occurrence
Message
Replace
the fuse of
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
line 1's power
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
module.
04/6/1 10:25:16
Oil error
Display
Up
Delete
Down
Detail
Make the details displayed
8.8.3
Select the [Object]

Click
OVERVIEW

[Alarm History] from the menu
(Alarm History).
Project common settings

(Project setting is limited one common setting only.)
As shown in the following example, although monitor devices are set in the same way for all alarm
history displays, different display formats (number of display rows/alarm frame color) can be set for each
display.
X0: ON
X1: ON
X2: ON
X3: ON
X4: ON
X5: ON
X6: ON
X7: ON
X8: ON
Alarm history
Alarm history of X5
Alarm history of X6
Alarm history of X7
Alarm history of X8
Base screen No. 1
Base screen No. 2
Base screen No. 3
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Alarm history
Alarm history of X3
Alarm history of X4
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Alarm history
Alarm history of X0
Alarm history of X1
Alarm history of X2
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
3 Double click on the arranged alarm history display, and make setting in the displayed dialog box with
The settings whose tab names are marked with (Common) in the dialog box are common settings in
project.
Monitor device
(Common settings
for all alarm historial
datas)
Shape
COMMON SETTING

D10
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Different settings for the number of row and frame color are available for each alarm history.

8 - 209
ALARM
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Click on the desired position completes the arrangement of the alarm history display.
Easy setting method


Common settings of alarm history
The common settings of alarm history can be set as follows.
Select [Common]
Select [Project]
[Alarm History] from the menu.

[Common Settings]
[Alarm History] from project workspace
4 Setting touch switches for alarm history

Set the touch switches that are used for alarm history display such as cursor display, movement,
detailed alarm display.
Section 8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Occurred Time
Message
02/03/01 10:25 Temp. Error
8 - 210
Up
Detail...
Down
Erase...

8.8.4
Setting items
OVERVIEW
1 Basic tab
Set the display details (e.g. style, format, order of the display.)
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Set the number of rows displayed for each screen. (Up to 27 rows)
Example: When this is set to 3
Number of Rows
Occurred date Time
Message
Restore Check
04/11/05
10:25
Temp. error
11:25
10:45
04/11/05
12:05
Oil error
12:25
12:28
04/11/06
08:30
Fuel error
09:45
09:40
Display rows
(not including the title line)
Set the alarm row No. from which alarm display starts in the order of occurrence (1 to 1024) when the
conditions of more than one specified device are met.
If the number of generated alarms is smaller than the value set in "Display Head Row", the display is left
blank.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Message
M3 ON
M4 ON
Restore
11:25
12:25
Order of alarm
occurrence
Alarms of the No.4 and later are displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurrence
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Alarms occurred
1) M0 is ON
2) M1 is ON
Check
3) M2 is ON
10:45
4) M3 is ON
12:28
5) M4 is ON

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 211
ALARM
Display Head
LAMP, SWITCH
Example: When 4 is set

Row*1
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and
the characters such as time display.
X

According to the setting of "Size" (magnification of
Space
character size), the actual horizontal space is as follows:

"Magnification of character size
set value in Space"
Example:
When "Size" is set to 2 and "Space" to 8, space of 16 dots
is ensured.
Select a size of the character displayed on the alarm history display (magnification of horizontal size (X)
Size
vertical size (Y) (1 to 8).

When X
Y is 1
1, the character size is 8
16 dots (X
Y).
Check the checkbox when displaying characters in the high-quality font.

(Only when the character size is set to 2
Use High Quality Font
2, 4
4, 6
6, or 8
8 (horizontal
vertical))
Check this item when displaying characters in the 16-dot HQ Mincho font.
If not checked, characters are displayed in the 16-dot standard font.
To display HQ font characters, set the HQ font in the Basic Comment setting.
Select the display order of alarm items.
Sort Setting
Title
Oldest
: Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the oldest data.
Latest
: Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the latest data.

Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the alarm history.
Display Alarm Details by One
Touch a row you want to view the details

Occurred
Message
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error
Touch
Restore
11:25
12:25
The details of the touched row are displayed.
Check
10:45
12:28
Check Line 1
Check the items to be displayed on the alarm history display.

Occurred
Display style
Occurred
02/11/05 10:25
02/11/05 12:05
Occurrences
Restorations
Restorations
Cumulative Time
Checks
Occur. Frequency
Message
Restore
Conveyer 1 error 11:25
Conveyer 2 error 12:25
Check
10:45
12:28
Cumulate
01:00
00:20
Count
1
5
The date and time of the alarm occurred and the comment associated with the alarm are displayed.
(This item is always check-marked.)
Check the checkbox when displaying the date and time of restoration from an alarm (when the specified
device condition is changed from "met" to "not met").
8 - 212

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
1
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Check the checkbox to display the time at which alarm occurrence was confirmed.
The time at which the Check switch was touched after alarm occurrence is displayed.
(
Checks
Message
Oil error
Display
Restore Check
Check
Message
Oil error
Restore Check
12:00
SPECIFICATIONS
style
Check the checkbox when displaying the time that elapsed from alarm occurrence until restoration in
Cumulative Time
minutes.
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
Occur Frequency
View Format
Check the checkbox when displaying how many times alarms were generated.
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
Set the view format of the items set in [Display style].

Input the title name for each view item.
COMMON SETTING
Title
Set the number of digits (column width) for each item.

Example: When message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
Message
Oil error
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
Displayed with a width of 12 digits
Width
Occurred
: Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
Message
: 1 to 80 digits
Restored/Checks
: Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
Cum. Time
: Fixed to 8 digits
OccurFreq
: Fixed to 8 digits
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if "Content" is "String.")
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if the "Contents" is "String.")
Color
Select the title color for each view item.

Date/Time
: Displays data and time.
Date
: Displays date only.
Time
: Displays time only.
String
: Displays the specified character string.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Select this item to set the view format for date and time of alarm occurrence.
(After selection, select the view format for data and time)
Contents*2
(After selection, select the view format for date)
(After selection, select the view format for time)
satisfied) as a specified character string.

Select [String] in [Contents] to set this item.
Maximum 20 characters can be input.
Category
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

When not superimposing an object with another, set it by default (back).
Layer
When superimposing an object with another, the object must be set to Front or Back.
(
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the next page.

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 213
ALARM
Text
LAMP, SWITCH
(After selection, input the character string to the [Text] below.)

Input characters to display the date and time of the alarm occurred (when triggers of specified device are
*1 Display head row

If different line No. of display start are set on plural screens, different alarm history can be displayed for
each screen.
Alarm occurred number
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Item No. 1
Screen 1
(Line No. of display start: 1)
Item No. 2
Item No. 3
Item No. 4
Screen 2
Item No. 5
Item No. 6
Item No. 7
Screen 3
Item No. 8
Item No. 9
*2 View format of alarm date/time

View format of date
Year is displayed by the last 2 digits of the year.
Example: Nov. 25, 2004
[yy/mm/dd]
: 02/11/25 (8 digits)
[mm/dd/yy]
: 11/25/02 (8 digits)
[dd/mm/yy]
: 25/11/02 (8 digits)
[mm/dd]
: 11/25 (5 digits)
View format of time
Time is displayed by 24-hour format.
Example: 9: 50: 48a.m.
[hh: mm: ss] : 09: 50: 48 (8 digits)
[hh: mm]
: 09: 50 (5 digits)
Display format of date/time
A one-digit space is inserted between the date and time.
04/11/25_09:50:48 (17 digits)
Space (1 digit)
8 - 214

8.8.4 Setting items
1
2 Frame tab
OVERVIEW
Set the frame, ruled line/ vertical line for alarm history.
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Shape
selected as shape.
Format
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Frame
Plate
Frame
15963
Plate
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Basic
Frame
Check this item to draw ruled lines for alarm history.
Occurred date
Time
Restore
Check
04/11/05
10:25
Message
11:25
10:45
04/11/05
10:25
11:25
10:45
LAMP, SWITCH
After checking, select a color for the ruled line.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 215
ALARM
Draw Ruled Line
3 Device (Common) tab

Set the collecting method of alarm data and the device.
The setting on this tab is reflected for display of all the alarm historical data.
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
Select a collection mode of the alarm history display function.

Historical
: Corrects alarm data as history.
If an alarm in the restored status occurs again, the alarm data is collected as a new
alarm.
Cumulative
: The latest alarm status, the cumulative period of time the alarm has been
generated, and the cumulative number of times of the alarm occurrences are
calculated.
If any alarm in the restored status occurs again, the occurrence frequency
increases, and the previous alarm information (occurrence date/time, restored
time, and checked time) is updated to the latest one.
For differences in the collection modes, refer to the following.
Mode
Section 8.8.2
Alarm collection mode
Number of alarms to monitor
Set the points of the device to be monitored.

GT15
The number of the device points you can specify differs depending on the type of the device monitored.
Bit device or bit specification of word device: 1 to 3072 points
Word device (16 bits)
: 1 to 1024 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Word device (32 bits)
: 1 to 512 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
GT11
Up to 256 points can be specified regardless of the type of the device monitored.
Watch Cycle
Set the cycle in which the GOT monitors the specified devices of the controller.
Cycle can be set from 600ms to 80s in the units of 100ms.
Detailed alarm display type
Select a method for displaying alarm details.

Set the comment No. (Basic Comment), base screen No., and window screen No. in the "Detail No." column
of the monitoring device list below "Detailed alarm display type."
No Display
: No details are displayed.
Comment Window*1 : Created comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on the base screen.
Window Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on the window screen (Overlap window 1).

8 - 216

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
Data Type
: Select this when monitoring a bit device by the ON/OFF change.
Bit Of Word
: Select this when monitoring a word device by ON/OFF of specified bits.
Signed BIN16
: The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN16
: The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32
: The word device value is handled as a signed 32-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN32
: The word device value is handled as an unsigned 32-bit binary.
BCD16
: The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
BCD32
: The word device value is handled as a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
Real
: The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.
After selecting any of the above, specify the devices monitored in the Device column of the alarm setting list
below.
When setting a device as a word device, click the Exp. button to set the range of the word device values for
the alarm data display.
Set a comment No. (Basic Comment) used for the device specified.
Message
Temp. error
Oil error
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:25 12:28
Set a comment No. of the message to be displayed in this area.

Comment
Selection
Detail
The comment corresponding to the "Cmnt. No." is displayed.

Any comment registered can be selected. If a comment is selected here, the "Cmnt. No." is switched
automatically.
Set the comment No. (Basic Comment), window screen No., and base screen No. for displaying detailed
data when an alarm occurs (when specified device conditions are met).
Select whether or not to enable the alarm resetting (turning off or resetting the specified device by the touch
RST
switch for resetting).

After checking this item, set up a reset value if the device is a word device.
(
RSTValue
Set a value written into the word device (reset value) when the GOT is reset by the touch switch for alarm
history display.
No
: No mails are sent.
Occur
: The occurred date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an alarm occurs
Restore
: The restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an alarm is
Both
: The occurred or restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
(when the conditions of the device are met).

restored (when the conditions of the device are not met).
alarm occurs or an alarm is restored.
Select a device setting method.

Continuous :Set devices continuously starting from the device specified.
Device No.
Random
:Set devices one by one.
Fixed
:Set more than one alarm range with the same word device when the word device is set.
When "Random" is selected, it is not allowed to set a bit device and the word device bits together as
monitoring devices.
Select how to set the comment No. (Basic Comment).
Comment No.
Select a mail-sending mode.
Mail
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Cmnt. No.
COMMON SETTING
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
Alarm Range*2
Continuous :Set comment numbers continuously starting from the comment No. (Basic Comment)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device
Set the devices specified for alarms, conditions for alarm occurrences, and operation when an alarm occurs.
specified.
Random
:Set comment numbers (Basic Comment) one by one.

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 217
ALARM
Alarm setting list
SPECIFICATIONS
Bit
OVERVIEW
Select a data type of the device monitored.
Basic
Frame
Device (Common)
Option (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
Select how to set the comment window, window screen, or base screen for detail display.
Detailed Display No.
Continuous :Set numbers continuously starting from the comment No. (Basic Comment), window screen
No., or base screen No.
Random
Copy*3
:Set numbers one by one.
When copying the set data to another field, click the Copy button.
(Import)*4
Reads out the alarm history settings that have been edited in a CSV file to GT Designer2.
(Export)*4
Saves the alarm history settings that have been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file.
For details of *1 to *4, refer to the next page.
8 - 218

8.8.4 Setting items
*1 Displaying the comment window
Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
2) Display the detail display screen by

key input from the touch switch
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35
Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error
Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
OVERVIEW
1) Display the detail display screen by

one touch operation
Details
Window screen is displayed

(Overlap window).
SPECIFICATIONS
Comment window is displayed

(Window screen for alarm history).
Base screen is displayed.
3
Check Line 2
The specified comment is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
Check Line 2
The specified base screen or window screen is displayed.
(1) Number of characters available for comment window

GT15: 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
7 lines (161 characters)
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
GT11: 23 characters
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Check the power module
Check the power module
6
LAMP, SWITCH
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new
line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Check Line 2

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 219
ALARM
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*2 Alarm range
Edit Alarm Range dialog box
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms.
Item
Description
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms using a conditional expression.
Select any of the following conditional expressions.
Set a conditional expression by a combination of a device value ($V) and constants.
Constant
Alarm Range
Device value for alarm display ($V)

Relational operator
To set an expression other than the above 3 patterns, select "Other Range" and then click the "Exp..."
button.
When the Edit Range Expression dialog box appears, set any conditional expression.
In a conditional expression set by a user, the value of another word device can be set as a condition.
(Constant)
Enter a value in decimal.

Set a relational operator for the conditional expression.
(Relational
operator)
$V
<
: The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
==
: The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<=
: The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!=
: The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
Indicates the value of the device used for alarm display.

*1
Clicking this displays the edit range expression dialog box.
8 - 220

8.8.4 Setting items
1
OVERVIEW
*1 Edit Range Expression dialog box
Description
Select a format of the conditional expression.
Style
A B (2 Terms)
: Sets a range of the condition using 2 terms.
A B C (3 Terms)
: Sets a range of the condition using 3 terms.
By clicking the A , B , or C button, set a constant or variable of the term in "Input Each Term (A-C)."
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.
<
: The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
==
: The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<=
: The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!=
: The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
COMMON SETTING
Item
SPECIFICATIONS
Set each of the terms of the conditional expression.

PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
:Set a constant.
Select this item, enter a value and click the Input button.
Select the data type of the numerical value by the Hex , Dec , or Oct
Input Each
button.
$V (Device Value)
:Set the word device by which an alarm is displayed.
Other Device
:Set s value of device other than the word device set for alarm display as a term
of the conditional expression.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Term (A-C)

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 221
ALARM
Fixed Value
*3 Copy
This section explains how to copy the set alarm history items to other place.
Item
Description
Source No.
Set the alarm history No. that will be copied.
Destination No.
Set the alarm history No. that will be a copy destination.
Number of Copy
Set the number of copies.
Copy Item
Check the relevant items.
8 - 222
Comment No.
Copies comment No. (Basic comment) of the source.
Detail No.
Copies the detailed display No. of the source.
Device Reset
Copies the device reset settings of the source.
Alarm Range
Copies the range setting of the source.
Send Mail
Copies the send mail settings of the source.

8.8.4 Setting items
*4 Import/Export
OVERVIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
4

5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
The added contents

are displayed.
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 223
ALARM
4 Option (Common) tab

Set the history retention (history clear, saved to memory card) for alarm history.
The settings on this tab will be reflected in all alarm history display.
Basic
Frame
Option (Common)
Device (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
Check this item to store the number of alarms currently occurred and restored to a word device.
After checking, click on Dev... button and set the device.
Number of Alarms Occurred
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the Device
(Common) tab.
Check the checkbox when forcibly deleting the restored-state alarm data by changing the specified device
status from OFF to ON.
After checking the box, click on the Dev...
(
History Clear
button to set the device to be used as a history clear trigger.
The cycle in which the GOT monitors the history clear trigger device is the same as "Watch Cycle" set on the
Device (Common) tab.
Alarm data can be cleared by the touch switch (the switch for history clearance) as well.
(
Check this item to save alarm historical data to PC card.

After checking, select the storage cycle in one-minute unit within a range from 1 minute to maximum 60
*2
Store to Memory Card
minutes.
Data can be stored to memory card using the alarm history switch.
(
Store to CSV File
Check the checkbox when saving alarm data to the memory card in the CSV file format.
Format*1
This is selectable only when "Store to Memory Card" is check-marked.
Drive Name
The destination drive name is displayed. (Fixed to "A: Standard CF Card.")

Enter the name of the folder in which the CSV file is stored. (Up to 62 characters)
Folder
Name*3
The default folder name can be changed by the following procedure.

1) Select [Common]
2) Set a project name on "Project Folder" of "System Setting."

The file name is displayed.
File Name
Using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.CSV

Not using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.DAT

8 - 224

8.8.4 Setting items
Basic
Frame
Option (Common)
Device (Common)
Item
Extended
Description
OVERVIEW
Set the device to be ON while alarm data are written to the memory card.
(
Set the device by which an error is notified when alarm data writing to the memory card fails.
Device
Check the checkbox so that the oldest alarm history data will be deleted and new alarm data will be added
When number of alarm
when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds the upper limit (GT15: 3072, GT11: 2048) and
occurrences exceed set value,
conditions for the specified device are met.
delete oldest alarm
occurrences
If unchecked, new alarm data are not added when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds the
Section 8.8.6 Precautions)
upper limit.
3
COMMON SETTING
SPECIFICATIONS
restored.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 225
ALARM
*1 Saving data in the CSV format

(1) Data stored
Alarm data are converted into a CSV file data as follows.
The CSV file can be read and displayed on a PC by spreadsheet software.
Not collected in
historical mode
Number of alarms occurred

Number of restored-state alarms
Number of checked alarms
Comment Restoration Check
Cumulative Occurrence
(may be displayed differently
date/time date/time time
frequency
(e.g. "2004/5/29") depending
on the spreadsheet software
setting.)
(2) Updating stored data

Data collected on the alarm history display are overwritten to the CSV file at the user-specified
cycles (1 to 60min).
Because the alarm data deleted on the alarm history display are deleted in the CSV file as well, do
not delete the alarm to be kept in the CSV file.
Remark
When all of alarm history data are deleted

If the alarm history is stored to a CSV file after all data have been deleted with the
touch switch Delete all (FFB7H) or "History Clear," the CSV file is left blank.
Stored to a CSV file with alarm history deleted
8 - 226

8.8.4 Setting items
Nothing is stored.
If the memory card is faulty or the files are different from those in the memory card, the GOT
internal device (error detection common information: GS252.b0) turns ON to disable the alarm
information to be stored (Device data collection is continued).
If the storage operation is done in this situation, the system alarm will occur.
If GS252.b0 turns ON, replace the memory card or check the data within the card.
OVERVIEW
*2 Storing erroneous alarm information data
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Turning ON the GOT internal device (error detection common control: GS452.b0) will turn
GS252.b0 OFF. This allows the file storage to be resumed.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
Reading alarm
information files
Alarm information
storage
COMMON SETTING
Alarm information
storage
GOT operation
Alarm information
is stored.
Normal status

information (GS252.b0)
ON
OFF
ON

control (GS452.b0)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm information
status
Alarm information
is not stored.
Error status
4
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Power ON.
Monitoring
start
Turn GS452.b0 ON using

touch switch or similar,
Alarm information
as this causes GS252.
after monitoring
starts is stored.
b0 to turn OFF.
While GS252.b0 is ON,

the alarm information
file is not stored.
OFF
Application of error detection common information

An overlap window (for file error detection) can be displayed by detecting GS252.b0
with script function.
LAMP, SWITCH
*3 Folder name
A folder name as shown below cannot be used.

Folder name starting from . (period) or \
Folder name ending at . (period) or \
Folder name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Project1
abc

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 227
ALARM
If an alarm information
file is faulty,
GS252.b0 turns ON..
Remark

When setting [Folder Name], enter \ between folders.
(Setting example)
[Folder name] : Project1\abc
Project1
abc
8 - 228

8.8.4 Setting items
1
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
5 Extended tab
SPECIFICATIONS
COMMON SETTING
4
Option (Common)
Extended
Item
Description
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Security
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
Device (Common)
7
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Frame

8.8.4 Setting items
8 - 229
ALARM
Basic
8.8.5
Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch for displaying alarm history can be read from the library for GT Designer2.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying alarm history.
Touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch
Key code
Description
Show/Hide the cursor
Show cursor
FFB0H
Hide cursor
FFB1H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Show the cursor!

The cursor moves to the previous/next page. (page by page)
Move cursor upward
Occurrend
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore Check
Occurred
04/06/01 13:54
04/06/01 12:23
04/06/01 11:11
Message
Fuse error
Motor error
Restore Check
14:00
13:15
15:10
14:50
FFB2H
Moved to the next page!

The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
FFB3H
Move the cursor!
8 - 230

8.8.5 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Touch switch
Key code
Description
The alarm status is changed to "checked."
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Check
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
FFB5H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Display date/time of all data (check all)
OVERVIEW
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Restore
FFB4H
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Display date/time of selected data (check)
14:50
The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
FFB6H
Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
17:15
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
3
COMMON SETTING
Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
The restored alarm is deleted!
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
Temp.15:20
error
04/06/01
module.
04/06/01
14:25
Message
Temp. error
at
power
Fuse
error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
The detailed screen of the selected alarms is displayed.
Display detail
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
FFB8H
Check power module.

The detailed screen is displayed!
Resets the selected alarm data. (Changes the device value to off or the reset
Reset the selected alarm data*1
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
17:15
Check
15:10
14:50
6
LAMP, SWITCH
value according to the setting on the device tab)
FFB9H
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The selected alarm is reset!


8 - 231
ALARM
Touch switch
Key code
Description
Stores alarm data to the memory card.
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Save alarm contents to memory card
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
FFBBH
The data are saved to the memory card!

Search the alarm device and display on the ladder monitor screen.
(Automatically search the specified device ladder and display it.)
Occurrence
Message
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore
Check
15:10
14:50
Display ladder
FFBCH
M999
K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2
Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
*1 Resetting user alarms

To change the device value to the OFF status or the reset value by a touch switch, set "ON" in "RST" on the
Device (Common) tab.
Section 8.8.4
Device (Common) tab
Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status

Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function
differently depending on the display status.
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per
page basis).
If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).
8 - 232

Section 8.8.4
Basic
tab)
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Restore Check
15:10
14:50
Occurrence
Message
Replace
fuseTemp.
on error
04/06/01 the
16:51
the
power15:20
module.
04/06/01
Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25
Oil error
Restore Check
15:10
14:50
The detailed screen is displayed.
(2) Touch switch setting method

SPECIFICATIONS
screen of the selected alarm can be displayed. (
OVERVIEW
(1) Directly touching alarm history display data

By setting "Display Alarm Details by One Touch" on the Basic tab, the detailed
3
COMMON SETTING
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8 - 233
ALARM
Remark
8.8.6
Precautions
This section describes precautions to be taken when using alarm history display.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on one screen
Only one object can be set for the alarm history display.
(2) Usable comments
For the alarm history display, comments created by Basic Comment are used.
Any comment created by Comment Group cannot be used.
(3) Usable screen
The alarm history display can be set on the base screen only.
(4) Devices to be set
Only one set device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but set devices
have to be the same.
(5) The comment window cannot be displayed while the key window is displayed.
Erase the key window to display the comment window.
Window screen
for alarm history
Key window
1000
Numerical input Alarm history display
(6) When using other objects at the same time

(a) The following objects cannot be set on the screen where the alarm history function has been
set.
Data list function object
Alarm list (user alarm) display function object with the up/down scroll function setting
(b) Precautions for the case when the alarm history and alarm list are displayed simultaneously
If the touch switches for alarm list (user alarm) are set for any other screen, they can function
for the alarm history.
Example: When the touch switches for alarm list are set for the other screen (overlap
window2)
Delete
Up
Cursor ON
Down
04/12/01 10:25 Internal pressure error
04/12/01 13:25 Oil pressure error
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
04/11/05 12:35
Oil error
Rest. Check
11:25 10:45
12:28
As the base screen has higher precedence,

the touch switches function for alarm history.
8 - 234

8.8.6 Precautions
Alarm list display

(set to overlap window 1)

(set to base screen)
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab is set to White.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen
color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab to other than White.
(9) The timing when a new Alarm History file is created
The alarm history in the file will be cleared when downloading the project data after opening the
Alarm History setting screen and then closing it with the [OK] button (regardless of whether any
setting change is made or not). (A new file will be created.)
To save the history of alarms occurred, save the alarm history in a CSV file and back up the CSV
file before operating the above.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
(7) Display of occurred time, checked time, and restored time

For the occurred time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions on the clock function that is controlling GOT's clock data, refer
to the following.
PREPARATORY
OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETUP
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
LAMP, SWITCH
NUMERICAL/
CHARACTER DISPLAY

8.8.6 Precautions
8 - 235
ALARM
9.
PARTS
9.1 Parts Display
This function displays the registered parts and base screen/window screen according to the device status.
Remark
Parts displayed by Parts Display

There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts Display. The parts
to be displayed by Parts Display needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by the GT Designer2 (registered parts)
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
1 Applicable parts types

Type
Description
Remarks
Parts must have been
The figures registered as parts are displayed.
registered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts

Registration
Parts
Section 4.3
Registering
BMP/JPEG Files
Figures
Text
BMP/JPEG file
for Parts in the

Memory Card
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the
device value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.
White
Mark
BMP/JPEG format parts

cannot be used.
Draw the color-changed
Blue
Red
area in white.
During parts movement
(fixed), color change
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
D100 = 0
D100 = 50
D100 = 100
Only one color is used.
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
9-1
9.1 Parts Display
Type
Description
Remarks
The figures on any base screens and window screens are displayed.
Line A operation
PARTS
Base screen
Line A operation
The objects set on the

base screens and window
Base Screen 1
screens are not displayed.
Base Screen 20
10
GRAPH, METER
Screen display
Window screen
The figure on Base Screen 20

is overlaid on Base Screen 1.
Application example
(Parts display (bit/word)
(Parts display (fixed))
Basic tab (Bit) / Basic tab (Word) Setting
Basic tab (Fixed) Setting

X10=OFF
X30=OFF
ON
12
Part No. 3 is displayed
RECIPE
Part No. 1 is displayed
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Only the white part of parts changes.
Three parts are

arranged in
cascaded way.
ON
(X10)
(X20)
(X30)
16
9.1 Parts Display
9-2
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Part No. 1
Part No. 2
Part No. 3
TRIGGER
Cascade multiple parts.
ACTIONS
11
Display different images of the same part
9.1.1
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
Key
window
For Parts display, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to parts display only
Relevant to parts display only.

Inverting the grouped parts (XOR display)
Setting for
each project
When the drawing mode of parts display is set to XOR, the grouped parts can be inverted
Setting for
each screen
(XOR display) at once.
Setting items
[While display mode of part
Inverting the grouped

figures (XOR display)
at once
display is XOR, grouped figures
Inverting each of the

grouped figures (XOR
display)
(The figures are inverted
one by one in the
overlapping order.)
are displayed by XOR]
Using/Not using the image files in the memory card
Setting for
each project
Whether to use the image files stored in the memory card for the objects of Parts Display/
Setting for
each screen
Parts Movement can be specified.
<Not checked>
<Checked>
Setting items
[The image file in a memory
card is used for the Parts Image
of Parts Display/Movement]
Displays the parts

Displays the BMP/JPEG file

parts in the memory card.

Memory card image file display setting signal
The image files in the memory card can be used for the objects of Parts Display/Parts
Movement.

9-3
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.2
Parts displaying method
This section describes the parts displaying method of Parts Display.
(1) Bit parts display
PARTS
1 Parts switching method

(
Section 9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display)
X10 OFF
10
GRAPH, METER
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to bit device
ON/OFF.
X10 ON
Parts corresponding
to bit device OFF are
displayed.
Parts corresponding
to bit device ON are
displayed.
TRIGGER
(2) Word parts display
ACTIONS
11
Section 9.1.5 Setting items of word parts display)
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word device
value.
D100 10
D100 100
RECIPE
D100 1
12
13
No. 100 part is displayed.
Section 9.1.6 Setting items of fixed parts display)
This function displays the parts/base screen/window screen at rising/falling edge of a bit device.
Only one type of part can be displayed, but the part can be overlaid on the other parts display.
Part of parts display A
Part of parts display B
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(3) Fixed parts display
14
Rising edge
X1
ON
Parts display B is overlaid

on parts display A.
15
OTHERS
Parts display B is
displayed at rising
edge of X1.
DEBUG
OFF
16
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.2 Parts displaying method
9-4
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card

The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a number from
9001 to 9999 for the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the
setting in the following procedure.
(1) To ordinarily select a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card
The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed ordinarily when a parts No. of 9001
to 9999 is specified.
1 Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the memory card.
2 Check [The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/
Movement] of the Auxiliary Setting, and then download the setting to the GOT.
Check!
3 The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed when the parts displaying
condition (Parts No.: 9001 to 9999) is met on Parts Display/Parts Movement.
9-5
9.1 Parts Display

Parts No.
9001 to 9999
When GS450.b8 is ON
When GS450.b8 is OFF
The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is
The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is
displayed.
displayed.
PARTS
(2) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card by using the GS450.b8
The displaying of the parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be switched to displaying of the
BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card when a parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.
10
GRAPH, METER

2 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
TRIGGER
(3) Display example

The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the memory card
is shown below.
ACTIONS
11
12
IMG0001.BMP
IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
9000
D100
9001
D100
9500
D100
13
9999
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D100
RECIPE
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display: D100
BMP file part

(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.
14
DEBUG
BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.
15
OTHERS
BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed
16
9.1 Parts Display

9-6
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999

When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, the parts registered by the GT
Designer2 will be displayed even if the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
parts in the memory card has been made.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
corresponding parts No. in the memory card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display the BMP/JPEG file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the memory
card while displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT
Designer2, operate as follows.
2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card to be
displayed.
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card from
the beginning when using the GS450.b8.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device:
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].
*1
At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP/JPEG image
parts. (Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
9-7
9.1 Parts Display

9
3 Parts No.
When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
parts in the memory card has not been made.
Parts registered by the
BMP/JPEG file parts in
GT Designer2
the memory card
GT Designer2
the memory card
Parts No.
*1
*1
1 to 8999
*1
9000
*2
: Displayable
: Not displayable
: Hidden
When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
(
Section 9.2.8
12
Basic tab (Word))
The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
The part registered by the GT Designer2

(parts No.9123) is displayed.
RECIPE
The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.
memory card has been made.
When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
memory card has not been made.
14
DEBUG

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
15
OTHERS
*2
16
9.1 Parts Display

9-8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
ACTIONS
11
10000 to 32767
TRIGGER
9001 to 9999
10
GRAPH, METER
*1
PARTS
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
9.1.3
1 Carry out either of the following operations

Click on
[Bit Parts Display]/
Select [Object]
[Parts Display]
[Word Parts Display]/
[Fixed Parts Display]
[Bit Parts]/[Word Parts]/[Fixed Parts] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged part to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference to
the following explanation.
Easy setting method


4
Remark
Part image displayed when the part is arranged.

(1) When parts are displayed
In the case of bit parts display
Parts of which status is set in ON/OFF attribute are displayed.
(
Basic
tab [ON/OFF Attribute])
In the case of word parts display

Parts of which part No. is set in [Preview No.] are displayed.
(
Basic
tab [Preview Parts]
(2) When base screen and window screen are displayed as parts
"X" mark indicating position is displayed.
9-9
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.4
Setting items of bit parts display
PARTS
1 Basic tab (Bit)

In basic tab, the [Parts Type] and [Parts No.] during ON/OFF are set.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
Extended
Trigger
RECIPE
12
Object Script
Items
Description
13

Device
Parts Type
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Select the type of part to be displayed.

Parts Data
The registered part is displayed.

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device change.
After selecting this item, set the [Parts No.].
Mark Data
14
The type of registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.

Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
Base Screen
Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen
Displays the registered window screen as part.
DEBUG
OTHERS
15
16
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
9 - 10
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.
XOR
:Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping

portion of the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
(
Display
parts
Shape (Blue)
Replace
Switch
parts
Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2
:The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.

Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base Screen] or
[Window Screen].
Display Mode
Tab [Parts Type])
Basic
Display
parts
View
Switch
parts
Format
Shape
Overwrite
Parts
New parts
:Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display
parts
Shape
Switch
parts
Parts
New parts
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left
:Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center
:Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Top-Left
Center
Set display position
Positioning Point
9 - 11
9.1 Parts Display

Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
ON
Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns ON.
OFF
Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns OFF.
PARTS
Basic
Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.

The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Parts No.
10
Set zero in "Parts No." to erase the part.

device bit is ON.
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts Type].
Mark Color
Basic
Tab [Parts Type])
Select the blinking pattern of the parts.
11
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
ACTIONS
Blink

Category
12
RECIPE
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
15
OTHERS
Layer
TRIGGER
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 12
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Attribute
GRAPH, METER
Set the [Parts No.] condition when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
ON/OFF
2 Extended tab (Bit)

This tab will be displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
(
Offset
9 - 13

9.1 Parts Display

9
dialog box.
PARTS
3 Trigger tab (Bit)
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Extended
Trigger
13
Object Script
Items
Trigger Type
Description
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Trigger Device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
14
Multi Bit
Trigger
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
Data Size
Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Data Type

Range
DEBUG
Word
Range
Trigger
trigger.
Bit Number
Trigger
15
tab [Trigger Type])
(
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
Hold Display
Trigger
tab [Trigger Type])
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 14
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Initial Display
OTHERS
4 Object script tab (Bit)

Secton16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Setting item
Extended
*1
Property name
Read
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
9 - 15
Write*1
active
-
Basic
Object property
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.5
Setting items of word parts display
PARTS
1 Basic tab (Word)

Here the parts type and parts No. displayed corresponding to word device value is set.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
13
Description
Set the device to be monitored. (
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Extended
The default of a written data format is signed BIN.
Device
To write by the other data format, change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab.
(
Parts Type
Extended
tab [Data Type])
14

Parts Data

DEBUG
Mark Data

(
Base Screen
Window Screen
15
OTHERS
16
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.5 Setting items of word parts display
9 - 16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
XOR
:Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping

portion of the parts.
(
Display
parts
Shape (Blue)
Replace
Switch
parts
Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2
:The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.

Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base Screen] or
[Window Screen].
Display Mode
Basic
tab [Parts Type])
Display
parts
View
Switch
parts
Format
Shape
Overwrite
Parts
New parts
:Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.
Display
parts
Shape
Switch
parts
Parts
New parts

Top-Left
Center
Top-Left
Center
Positioning Point
9 - 17
9.1 Parts Display

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the display attribute of parts.
Indirect (Device value)
:Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to the

word device value.
10
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.

:Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/window
GRAPH, METER
screen by specifying it.

Attribute (Normal Case)*1
Click the Browse button to check the registered parts/base screen/

window screen.
Mark Color
:At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the displayed color to
change in the white area of the registered part.
(
Hold
Basic
tab [Parts Type])
:Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base screen/window
11
ACTIONS
Parts No.
PARTS
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
TRIGGER
screen.
No
Blink
Preview Parts
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
12
Displays the part of specified No. on the GT Designer2 screen.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Layer
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 18
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Category
RECIPE
*1 Parts switching method

Set on State (Case tab) except "Indirect (Device value)" in "Attribute (Normal case)" category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
State setting
"Attribute (Normal
case)" type
Set
Not set
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition
Set the state if required.
set to the state.
The displayed part is changed depending on the
[Indirect
monitored device value.
The part set to the state is displayed.
(Device Value)]
Set the state to change the part except the above
condition.
The displayed part is changed depending on the

monitored device value.
[Parts No.]
Set the state at any time.
set to the state.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate
settings.
The part set at the state is displayed.

[Mark Color]
It cannot be switched to any other part.

The part set at "Attribute (Normal case)" is displayed.
set to the state.
Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
[Hold]

The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When "Attribute (Normal case)" is set to "Parts No."

Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab
Range Setting tab
[Device]: D10
State 1
State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]
[Range] : 1<= D10 <= 100
[Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1]
[Attribute] : Parts No.2
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1
D10 = 0
D10 = 40
D10 = 150
Part set at "Attribute"

is displayed (Part No. 1).
Part set at State 1 is

displayed (Part No. 2).

Refer to the following section for details of the state.

9 - 19
Part No. 3
9.1 Parts Display

9
2 Extended tab (Word)
PARTS
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.

This tab is displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
Extended
RECIPE
12
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
13
Description
Data Type
Security
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
BCD16
: Treats the word device value as a 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(
14
(
15
OTHERS
DEBUG
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 20
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
3 Case tab (Word)

This tab will be displayed when the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Select the condition to change the display according to the state.
Bit
(
Device
Word
: Select it when changing the display according to the vlaue of word device. After selecting,
(
Range
Case
tab [Range])
9 - 21
9.1 Parts Display

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the display method of parts.
:Display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word
PARTS
Indirect (Device value)
device value.
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.
Parts No.
:Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/window

screen by specifying it.
Attribute
Mark Color
:When [Mark] selecting in [Parts Type], select this item to switch the white of
Hold
:Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base screen/window
the parts to other color.

screen.
11
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
TRIGGER
No
ACTIONS
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 22
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Blink
GRAPH, METER
After selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.

State*1
10
*1 State
Example:
Monitor device
Data view format
: D100
: Signed decimal, 16-bit signed decimal
Registered parts
Part No.1
Part No.10
1 set
10 sets
Part No.100 Part No.101

Over 100 sets Complete
Action priority for

setting overlap
State No.
Display range
Display parts
conditions
High
Low
$V<=0
No.0
1<=$V<=100
Indirect
101<=$V<=199
Hold
Normal case (State 0)
No.101
*$V indicates monitor device value
State 1
When monitor device value is equal to or less than 0 ($V
0),
the parts will not be displayed.
When monitor device value is between 1 and 100

State 2
(1
$V
100), the parts corresponding to device value will be
displayed.
1 set
Over 100 sets
When monitor device value is between 101 and 199

State 3
(101
Normal case
(State 0)
9 - 23
$V
199), parts display will not be switched.
Over 100 sets
In the case when other than the conditions of state 1 to 3, part

No. 101 will be displayed.
9.1 Parts Display

Complete
9
4 Trigger tab (Word)
PARTS
The setting items of the trigger tab are the same with bit parts display.
For details of setting items, refer to the following.
Section 9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 24
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
5 Data Operation tab (Word)

dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
9 - 25
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
9.1 Parts Display

9
6 Object script tab (Word)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Setting item
Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)
14
15

OTHERS
Section 16.3.2
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 26
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Tab name
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
13
9.1.6
Setting items of fixed parts display
1 Basic tab (Fixed)

Directly specify and set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Parts Type
Description
Parts Data

Mark Data

Refer to the following for the displayed parts by Mark.
(
Base Screen
Window Screen
9 - 27
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.6 Setting items of fixed parts display
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
:The parts/base screen/window screen by XOR combination is overlaid on a figure or other
PARTS
XOR
part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is erased at the disabled display condition.
(
10
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR )
When display condition

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)
GRAPH, METER
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)
Shape (Blue)
Display Mode
Overlapped part
changes to yellow.
Part No. 1
(White)
ACTIONS
11
Part is erased.
Overwrite
TRIGGER
XOR combination of figure

+ part No. 1 colors
:The parts/base screen/window screen is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
View
The parts/base screen/window screen is kept displaying without regarding to the display
Format
condition.
12
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)
RECIPE

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)
13
Parts
Part is kept displayed.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Shape

Top-Left
Center
Top-Left
Center
14
Positioning Point
DEBUG

Parts No.
:Select this item to display the parts/base screen/window screen and screen during
15
registration.
After the selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.
Attribute
Mark Color :When the registered parts are [Mark] selected in [Parts Type], select the color to which the
Basic
tab [Parts Type])
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.

Blink
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
16
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 28
SCRIPT FUNCTION
OTHERS
white part of the parts will be switched.
Basic
Extended
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the trigger by which data is displayed.
Trigger Type
Display

Rise
Fall
Trigger
Device
Click on Dev... button to specify the device to be set as trigger.

(

Category
Layer
(
9 - 29
9.1 Parts Display

9
2 Extended tab (Fixed)
PARTS
The setting items of option tab are the same with bit parts display.
Section 9.1.4 Setting items of bit parts display
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9 - 30
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
3 Object script tab (Fixed)

Secton16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Extended
*1
Read
1)
4)
4)
Display mode
draw_mode
3)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
9 - 31
Write*1
active
-
Basic
Property name
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7
Precautions
The following provides the precautions when using parts display function.
PARTS

(1) Maximum number of objects that may be set on one screen
1000 objects can be set for the clock display.
10
GRAPH, METER
(2) Precautions for registering parts

Refer to the following for the precautions for registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
(b) When using BMP/JPEG file parts
(4) Setting of Parts Display/Parts Movement

Do not set the display position with which any part of the BMP/JPEG file part will be out of the
screen.
If such a display position is set, the part is displayed as follows.
Check the display position on the Preview.
(a) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the GOT
The part is not displayed.
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(3) Precautions for setting the parts to be inverted (XOR display)

(a) Inverting the parts to a figure
Set the parts on the back layer.
(b) Inverting overlapped parts
Only the parts of the "fixed" attribute can be overlapped.
Place all parts on the same layer.
If the parts are placed on the front layer, the area that are not overlapped will be inverted to
the "transparent color" of the screen.
(c) Inverting parts including characters
If the parts include the text with "bold," "solid" or "raised" text style set, the text may be chipped
or displayed in the incorrect color.
ACTIONS
11
14
DEBUG
The BMP/JPEG file part is not displayed.
(b) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the memory card
Only displayable portion is displayed.
OTHERS
15
The result of inverse (XOR display) can be viewed by using the preview function of GT Designer2.
For details of the layer, refer to the following.
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
9 - 32
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Only displayable portion is displayed.
(5) Precautions when parts overlap with other objects

Make sure to place parts so that they will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped objects may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, place the parts on the layer different from the other objects.
Also, note that the following cases may cause a similar problem.
When the "Parts type" is "Base screen"
When the "Parts type" is "Part"
Display area
The objects overlap

with parts display.
Display area
Part (Part No. 1 is displayed.)
Part (Base screen 10 is displayed.)
Part No. 1
Base screen 10
The objects overlap

with parts display.
(6) Precautions when screen is set as parts type and "XOR" is set as display mode
(a) If the base screen or window screen is set as a parts type of parts display (bit/word) and XOR
is set as display mode, this will delete the parts on the screen and display a new screen.
(b) The area to be deleted ranges from the drawing point (screen (center, upper left)) of the parts
display to the base/window screen.
(c) If the base/window screen area including objects is deleted, the objects are hidden.
To display the objects, change the parts type from screen to part and adjust the position to
avoid overlap with other objects, or leave the screen parts type and change the display mode
to "Overwrite."
However, if "Overwrite" is set, the previously displayed parts remain. Therefore, make sure to
adjust the parts so that they will be the same in size.
(d) If the target base screen or window screen includes objects with "bold," "solid" or "raised" text
style set, characters of the displayed part may be chipped or the character color may be
incorrect.

(1) Erasing parts
To erase the part, use "Parts" or "Mark" setting in "Parts Type" category.
The part set to "Base Screen" or "Window Screen" in "Parts Type" category is not erased even if
setting to zero.
(The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after switching to another screen.)
(
Basic
tab [Parts Type])
(2) Reading the BMP/JPEG file

The monitor screen pauses during a file reading.
(3) The partway-displayed BMP/JPEG file parts
In the process of a file displaying, the display may be paused with the image partway-displayed.
In such a case, display the parts again or check the BMP/JPEG file.
(4) While displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card
Do not remove the memory card from the GOT while displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
memory card.
9 - 33
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
11
TRIGGER
(6) The validating priority of settings between GT Designer2 and GS450.b8

The BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card will be displayed regardless of the GS450.b8 if the
[The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/Movement] is
checked.
ACTIONS
(5) Discontinuing to use the BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card
Perform either of the following operations.
Change the Auxiliary Setting of the GT Designer2 and then download the project data.
Turn the GOT internal device (GS450.b8) off.
The BMP/JPEG file parts of the memory card can be displayed even if the memory card is removed
without the operation above. The reason is the below.
The BMP/JPEG file part displayed on the GOT is retained in the GOT built-in memory. (Only one
BMP/JPEG file part can be retained.)
If the BMP/JPEG file part of the same parts No. is specified subsequently, the BMP/JPEG file part
retained in the GOT built-in memory will be displayed. Accordingly, the part registered by the GT
Designer2 is not displayed.
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.1 Parts Display

9.1.7 Precautions
9 - 34
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
9.2 Parts Movement
It is the function to change parts position and display (movement) according to the value of word device.
The parts to be displayed can be switched in movement.
Parts movement can be displayed by the following 2 types of devices.
Position device
: The device storing parts move destination.
Parts switching device : The device to switch the types of parts to be displayed.
Remark
Parts displayed by Parts movement

There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts movement. The
parts to be displayed by Parts movement needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by the GT Designer2 (registered parts)
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the memory card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
1 Applicable parts types

Type
Description
Remarks
Parts must have been
The figures registered as parts are displayed.
registered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts

Registration
Parts
Section 4.3
Registering BMP/
Figures
Text
JPEG Files for Parts
BMP/JPEG file
in the Memory Card

The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the device
value.
cannot be used.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.
White
BMP/JPEG format parts

Draw the color-changed area
in white.
Blue
Red
During parts movement

(fixed), color change
Mark
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
Only one color is used.
D100 = 0
D100 = 50
D100 = 100
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
9 - 35
9.2 Parts Movement
Relevant settings
Auxiliary
setting
GOT
internal
devices
System
information
Key
window
For Parts movement, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to parts movement only

Relevant to parts movement only.
PARTS
9.2.1
(2) Functions relevant to parts movement and others

11
ACTIONS
(1) Functions relevant to parts movement only

Using/Not using the image files in the memory card
Setting for
each project
Whether to use the image files stored in the memory card for the objects of Parts Display/
Setting for
each screen
TRIGGER
Parts Movement can be specified.
<Not checked>
12
<Checked>
Setting items
card is used for the Parts Image
of Parts Display/Movement]
Displays the parts

13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

RECIPE
[The image file in a memory
(2) Functions relevant to parts movement and others

Memory card image file display setting signal
14
The image files in the memory card can be used for the objects of Parts Display/Parts
DEBUG
Movement.
15
OTHERS

9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 36
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
9.2.2
Moving and displaying parts
1 Move way of parts (control with position device)

The following three types of move ways can be selected.
(1) Position
Display parts at the position (dot notation).
Specify the display position using 2 points indicated by the word device values in X/Y axis,
respectively.
The display position can be changed in dot unit by changing the value of position device.
2) (200, 16)
1) (30, 90)
3) (130, 170)
Position device (X coordinate): D100
1)
30
2)
200
3)
130
Position device (Y coordinate): D101
90
16
170
(a) Datum position

A part displayed on the overlap window has the datum position at the upper left corner of the
overlap window.
Example: Overlap window
Datum position
(origin)
In other cases (base screen, superimpose window, etc.), the upper left corner of the displayed
base screen is taken as the datum position.
Example: Base screen
Example: Set overlay screen, superimpose window, etc.
Datum position
(origin)
9 - 37
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.2 Moving and displaying parts
Datum position
(origin)
<Movement image>
80%
10
D100: 100
Starting point (minimum: 0)
GRAPH, METER
20%
D100: 20
D100: 0
Position device: D100
(3) Point
Display parts at preset display position (point).
Point setting is made by registering a line connecting multiple points (parts move route).
Parts are displayed at the place indicated by the point No. that is the same as the value of position
device.
<Setting image>
1
<Movement image>
12
11
ACTIONS
Destination (maximum: 100)
TRIGGER
<Setting image>
PARTS
(2) Line
Move parts along lines between starting point and destination point that have been set.
Set the start point as minimum value, and the maximum value for the destination position, in order
to display the parts using this method.
Parts move route

Point
Position device: D100
RECIPE
13
Parts movement A
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Up to 30 Parts move routes can be set in one screen. This setting is made for each screen.
The parts move route can be used for moving multiple parts.
Route No. 1------For parts movement A
Parts movement B
Route No. 2------For parts movement B
14
Parts movement C
Parts movement D
Locus
15
Movement locus that keeps the locus can be set in each move way.
OTHERS
The setting of parts movement setting dialog box (basic tab)
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 38
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
DEBUG
Route No. 3------For parts movement C, D
2 Parts switching method (control with parts switching device)

The following 3 switching methods can be selected.
(1) Bit parts movement
Section 9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement)
Switches to display 2 types of parts.

(a) Switch different parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON
M10: OFF
(b) Displays/hides parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON
(2) Word parts movement
M10: OFF
Section 9.2.6 Setting items of word parts movement)
Switches to display more than 3 types of parts.

(a) Switch to display parts of which parts No. is the same as the word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
D10
D10
D10
D10
(b) Switch parts type according to the range and condition of word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
[Display condition]
1) 50 D10 100
Part No.1
2) D10 < 100
Part No.2
1) D10
2) D10 250
3) D10
3) Parts No.0 (not displayed) at

normal case (other than above
conditions)
(3) Fixed part movement
Section 9.2.7 Setting items of fixed parts movement)
Only one type of parts is displayed.

Parts switching device is not set.
[Parts switching
word device]
: need not to be set
9 - 39
9.2 Parts Movement

9
3 Parts movement example
Execute parts movement display by position device and parts switching device.
Point1
2) [Parts switching device] : D15

[Switching way] : Parts movement
Point2
Part No. 50
Point3
PARTS
1) [Position device] : D10

[Move way] : [Point]
10
Part No. 100 :
Move to point2
Changes into the parts

of part No. 100
GRAPH, METER
Part No. 150 :

Changes into the parts
of part No. 150
Move to point3
1) [Position device]
: D10
2) [Parts switching
device] : D15
50
50
100
150
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
4 The setting order of parts movement

RECIPE
When setting the object of parts movement, select parts switching way, then parts move way.
1 Select parts switching way
Section 9.2.4 Arrangement and setting)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
The switching method cannot be changed after setting the object of parts movement.
2 Select parts move way
Set in the dialog box that is displayed after selecting parts switching way.
The move method can be changed even after setting the object of parts movement.
When "Point" is specified to the type for the parts movement (

Basic
tab)
Make sure to set parts move route in advance before setting object of parts
movement.
Section 9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
15
OTHERS
14
DEBUG
on
"Movement Type"
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 40
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Select from the menu. (
Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the memory card

The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the memory card can be displayed by specifying a number from
9001 to 9999 for the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the
setting in the following procedure.
(1) To ordinarily select a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card
The BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card will be displayed ordinarily when a parts No. of 9001
to 9999 is specified.
2 Check [The image file in a memory card is used for the Parts Image of Parts Display/
Movement] of the Auxiliary Setting, and then download the setting to the GOT.
Check!
9 - 41
9.2 Parts Movement

Parts No.
9001 to 9999
When GS450.b8 is ON
When GS450.b8 is OFF
The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is
The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is
displayed.
displayed.
PARTS
(2) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card by using the GS450.b8
The displaying of the parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be switched to displaying of the
BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card when a parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.
10
GRAPH, METER

TRIGGER
(3) Display example

The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the memory card
is shown below.
ACTIONS
11
12
IMG0001.BMP
IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
9000
D100
9001
D100
9500
D100
13
9999
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D100
RECIPE
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display: D100
BMP file part

(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.
14
DEBUG
BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.
15
OTHERS
BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 42
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999

When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, the parts registered by the GT
Designer2 will be displayed even if the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP/JPEG file parts of the
corresponding parts No. in the memory card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display the BMP/JPEG file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the memory
card while displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT
Designer2, operate as follows.
2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card to be
displayed.
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card from
the beginning when using the GS450.b8.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device:
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].
*1
At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP/JPEG image
parts. (Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
9 - 43
9.2 Parts Movement

9
6 Parts No.
parts in the memory card has not been made.
GT Designer2
the memory card
GT Designer2
the memory card
Parts No.
*1
*1
1 to 8999
*1
9000
*2
: Displayable
: Not displayable
: Hidden
When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
(
Section 9.2.6
12
Basic tab (word))
The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
The part registered by the GT Designer2

(parts No.9123) is displayed.
RECIPE
The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.

memory card has not been made.
14
DEBUG

memory card has been made.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
15
OTHERS
*2
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 44
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
ACTIONS
11
10000 to 32767
TRIGGER
9001 to 9999
10
GRAPH, METER
*1
PARTS
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
9.2.3
Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
When "Point" is specified the type for the parts movement (

"Movement Type" on
Parts Move Route for positions where parts are to be displayed.
Up to 30 parts move routes can be set in one screen
The parts move route can be used for multiple parts movement.
1 Select [Object]
[Parts Movement]
Basic
tab), set the
[Parts Move Route] from the menu.
2 After parts move route dialog box appears, make the following settings and click on the OK button.
Items
Description
Route No.
Set route No. (0 to 29) of parts move route to be created.
Points
Set points (1 to 100) movement position (position to display parts).

Check this item to move parts in a line.
When arranging in a line, points proportion set in [Points] will be arranged automatically according to the
setting of starting point and destination.
Example: Points: Set to 5

Arrange in a line
Set the start point and destination point

(2 to 4: automatic arrangement)
9 - 45
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
3 As the mark (+) will appear on drawing screen, click on the mark to arrange Point 1.
Click on the positions as many as the number of set points for arrangement.
PARTS
Click
Click
GRAPH, METER
10
4 Point No. will appear at the set position after setting.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE
The correction of parts move route

(1) Change the point position
Click to select parts move route, right click on the route to [Edit Point]
The route is now in "Edit Vertex" mode. Drag a point of the selected route to
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
the destination position. Thus, the point position can be changed.

Vertex mode.
13
14
Edit vertex mode
Drag to change point position
DEBUG
(2) Change the [Points] and [Route No.]

Double click on the parts move route to display the setting dialog box.
Then change the [Points] and [Route No.] in the corresponding items.
OTHERS
15
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
9 - 46
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
9.2.4
Arrangement and setting
1 Carry out any of the following operations

Click on
[Bit Parts Movement] /
Select [Object]
[Parts Movement]
[Word Parts Movement] /
[Fixed Parts Movement.].
[Bit Parts] / [Word Parts] / [Fixed Parts] from menu.
When changing the settings of parts movement

Parts movement cannot be arranged on screen when movement type is [Position],
[Point].
[Movement Type] within
Basic
tab.
Carry out the following method when changing the settings of the preset parts
movement.
(1) Edit using data view
Double click on the parts movement displayed in data view to display the setting
dialog box.
9 - 47
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.4 Arrangement and setting
9.2.5
Setting items of bit parts movement
PARTS
1 Basic tab (bit)

Set the parts move way and the parts to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
RECIPE
Basic
Description
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.
13
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
X10: ON
X10: OFF
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Display part No.1
Display part No.10
14
Example:
Parts Switching Device
Select the part to be moved.

Parts Data : Displays the registered part
switching device change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark. The registered part can be
checked by clicking on Browse button.
15


OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement
9 - 48
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Parts Type
DEBUG
Mark Data : Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.
Movement : Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Locus
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:
When selecting [Movement]
Display Mode
Erase the previous display
The previous display
When selecting [Locus]
Select the base point to display the part.

Top-left
: Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
View
Example:
Format
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)
Device for X coordinate
Device
for Y
coordinate
Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left
Positioning Point
Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Destination
Starting
point
Destination
Starting
point
Top-left
Center
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
Top-left
Center
9 - 49
9.2 Parts Movement

Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
ON
Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns ON
OFF
Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns OFF
Parts No.
Set the pat No. to be displayed.

The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
(Set the part No. when the device is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the device is ON.)
ON/OFF
PARTS
Extended
10
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts Type].
Mark Color
[Parts Type] within
Basic
tab
Select the move way.

Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y coordinate
points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage. (The
set device is for X storage)
(
Move Way
Line *2
11
ACTIONS
No
Blink
GRAPH, METER
Attribute
TRIGGER
Basic
12
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end point
have been set.
: Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Type
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
*1
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
(
13
Section 9.2.3 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen))
After selecting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
(
The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position
: Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
Device

Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and ending
Point
: Sets the device to store the display position (point).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Point
Movement
RECIPE
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
14
Data Type
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device (signed BIN16/unsigned BIN16).
(Fixed to unsigned BIN16 when selecting [Position], [Point])
Category
DEBUG
point.
15
(
16
Refer to the next page for the details of *1 to *2.
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 50
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Layer
OTHERS
*1 Movement Type
Select the movement type when moving parts.
Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
Section 9.2.2
Move way of parts (control with position device)
*2 Line
Set the line as the parts move range when the move way is set as [Line].
Execute the following operations after making settings in the setting dialog box.
1 Click on the start position in drawing screen.
2 Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.
9 - 51
9.2 Parts Movement

9
2 Extended tab (bit)
PARTS
It is to set the security and offset.

Check the "Extended Function" at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Security
Description
RECIPE
Basic
(
13

DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 52
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
3 Trigger tab (bit)

dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
Ordinary
NO
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger
Select the [Data Type] of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as trigger.
Bit Number
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers
[Trigger Type] within
Trigger
tab
Initial Display
Trigger
tab
Hold Display

Trigger
tab
9 - 53
9.2 Parts Movement

9
4 Object script tab (Bit)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)
14
15

Section 16.3.2
OTHERS
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 54
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
13
9.2.6
Setting items of word parts movement
1 Basic tab (word)

Set move way of parts, the parts type and Parts No. to be displayed according to word device value.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed. (
Section 5.1)
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
The default of a written data format is signed BIN. To write by the other data format, change the setting in
"Data Form" on the Extended tab.
Extended
[ Data Type] within

Parts Switching Device
tab
Example:
D10: 1
D10: 2
D10: 3
Display part No.1
Display part No.2
Display part No.3

Mark Data : Changes the white part of the part into the different color
according to the parts switching device change.
Parts Type
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark.

The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
(
9 - 55
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.6 Setting items of word parts movement
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Locus
Example:
10
GRAPH, METER
Display Mode
PARTS
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

Top-left
: Displays the part with the reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with the reference to the center of that part.
View
Example:
Format
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)
Device
for Y
coordinate
RECIPE
12
Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Center

Positioning Point
Destination
Starting
point
Destination
Starting
point
Top-left
14
Center
Top-left
DEBUG
15
Center

OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 56
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
Indirect [Device Value]
: Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to the

word device value.
The current display is hold at setting 0 (setting 0 or 9000 when specifying
the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card) in the parts switching device.
When clearing parts, make the following settings (
case tab) :
Set "$V==0" in [Rande] within case tab.

Set "Parts No.: 0" in [Attribute]
Example:
*3
Attribute (Normal Case)
D200: 100
Display the parts
with parts No. 100
Parts No.
Monitor device value
: Select this time to specify and display the registered part.

After this, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Set 0 in Parts No. to erase the part.
Mark Color
: At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the displayed color to

change in the white area of the registered part.
[Parts Type] within
Hold
Basic
tab
: Select this item to hold current parts display.

Blink
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the move way.

Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word devicevalues as X/Y coordinate
points respectively.
(
Move Way
Line *2
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end point
have been set.
Point
Movement
Type *1
(

The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position
Device

Line
Point
point.
Data Type
Refer to the next page for the details about *1 to *3.

9 - 57
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Category
10
(
GRAPH, METER
Layer
PARTS
*1 Movement Type
11
Section 9.2
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
*2 Line
12
RECIPE
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 58
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
*3 Parts switching method

Set on State (Case tab) except "Indirect (Device value)" in "Attribute (Normal case)" category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
"Attribute
State setting
(Normal case)"
Set
type
[Indirect
(Device Value)]
Not set
Set the state if required.
set to the state.
The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
switching device value.
The part set to the state is displayed.
Set the state to change the part except the above condition.

The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
switching device value.
[Parts No.]
set to the state.
Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate settings.
It cannot be switched to any other part.

[Mark Color]

The part set at "Attribute (Normal case)" is displayed.
set to the state.
Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
[Hold]

The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When "Attribute (Normal case)" is set to "Parts No."

Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab
Range Setting tab
[Parts Switcing Device]: D10
State 1
State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]
[Range] : 1 <= D10 <= 100
[Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1]
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1
D10 = 0
Part set at "Attribute"

is displayed (Part No. 1).
D10 = 40

Refer to the following section for details of the state.

9 - 59
9.2 Parts Movement

Part No. 3
D10 = 150

9
2 Extended tab (word)
PARTS
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.

Check "Extended Function" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
RECIPE
Basic
Select the data type of the parts switching dvice.

Unsigned BIN
BCD 16
: Treats word device value as 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Data Type
Signed BIN
This setting item is not available for the following devices.

Position device
Device set in ,
([Movement Type] within

Basic
Trigger
tab)
tab
([Trigger Type] within Trigger tab)
Security
14
(
DEBUG

15
OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 60
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
3 Case tab (word)

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Bit
Device
(
Word
: Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device. After selecting,
Range
9 - 61
9.2 Parts Movement

Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the method of displaying parts.
: Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding to the
word device value.
The current display is hold at setting zero in the parts switching device.
The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after switching to
another screen.
: Select this time to specify and display the registered part.
Attribute
After selection, set the displayed parts No.

Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
Mark Color
: Select this item to change the white part of the registered part into the
different color when the part is set to [Mark Data] in [Parts Type].
(
Basic
tab)
11
: Select this item to hold current parts
ACTIONS
Hold
[Parts Type] within
display even though state condition is satisfied.

: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
TRIGGER
No
Blink
12
RECIPE
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 62
SCRIPT FUNCTION
State*1
10
GRAPH, METER
Parts No.
PARTS
Indirect (Device Value)
*1 State
Example: Parts switching device
Data view format
: D100
: Signed decimal 16-bit signed decimal
Parts No. 1
Registered parts
Parts No. 10 Parts No. 11 Parts No. 12
The operation
priority for setting
State No.
Display range
Display parts
M10 ON
No.11
1<=$V<=9
Indirect
10<=$V
Hold
--------
No.12
overlap conditions.
High
Normal Case
Low
(State 0)
*$V indicates the value of monitor device.
State 1
Display parts No.11 when M10 is ON.
Display the parts corresponding to parts switching

State 2
device value when the value is between 1 and 9

(1<=$V<=9).
State 3
Normal Case
(State 0)
9 - 63
Do not switch parts display when parts switching

device value is 10 or greater (10<=$V).
Display parts No.12 in the condition other than state

1 to 3.
9.2 Parts Movement

9
4 Trigger tab (word)
PARTS
The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Section 9.2.5 Setting items of bit parts movement
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 64
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
5 Data Operation tab (word)

dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
9 - 65
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
9.2 Parts Movement

9
6 Object script tab (Word)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Extended
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)
14
15

Section 16.3.2
OTHERS
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 66
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
13
9.2.7
Setting items of fixed parts movement
1 Basic tab (fixed)

Directly specify and set the parts move way as well as the parts to be display.
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Parts Type

Mark Data : Changes the white part of the part into the color set in [Mark Color].
9 - 67
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.7 Setting items of fixed parts movement
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Locus
Example:
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
Display Mode
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

Top-left
: Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center
: Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
View
Example:
Format
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)

RECIPE
12
Device
for Y
coordinate
Device
for Y
coordinate
13
Center
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Top-left
Positioning Point
Destination
Starting
point
Destination
Starting
point
14
Center
Top-left
4
DEBUG
Top-left
15
Center

OTHERS
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 68
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Parts No.
: Select this item to display parts in registration.

Set the parts No. to be displayed after the selection.
Click on Browse button to specify the registered parts.
Attribute
Mark Color : Select the color to change from white color of the registered part when the part is set to
[Mark Data] in [Parts Type].
mark-selecting registered parts in [Parts Type].
(
[ Parts Type] within
Basic
tab)

Blink
No
: Not blink.
Low
Middle
High
Select the movement type.

Position
: Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinator points respectively.
(
Move Way
Line
*2
: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which\ starting point and end point
have been set.
Point
Movement
Type*1
(
The setting items differ according to the setting made in [Move Way].
Position
Device

Line
Point
point.
Data Type
Category
Layer
(
Refer to the next page for the details about *1 to *2.
9 - 69
9.2 Parts Movement

*1 Movement Type
PARTS
Section 9.2.2
*2 Line
10
GRAPH, METER
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 70
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2 Extended tab (fixed)

The setting items of extended tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
3 Trigger tab (fixed)

The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
9 - 71
9.2 Parts Movement

9
4 Object script tab (Fixed)
PARTS
Secton16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

12

Extended
1)
4)
4)
Parts No.
part_no
3)
Blink
blink
3)
Mark Color
mark_color
3)
Security
security
4)
14

Section 16.3.2
15
OTHERS
*1
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
Write*1
16
9.2 Parts Movement

9 - 72
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
13
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
RECIPE
9.2.8
Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using parts movement function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on a screen
Up to 100 parts movement objects can be placed (set).
(2) Display position of parts

If the display position of parts out of screen is set in Designer2, parts will not be movementdisplayed. The previous display will be held.
Example: In the case of movement type [Point]
Parts out of the screen will not be displayed.
(3) Registering parts

Refer to the following for the cautions for registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
(b) When using BMP/JPEG file parts
(4) Precautions when parts overlap with other objects

Make the settings so that the part destination position will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped object may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, set the moving part on a layer different from the other object.
When the "Move way" is "Point"
Display area
The object overlap with
the part destination position.
Part movement (Part No. 1 is displayed.)

Part No.1

(1) The value stored in position device
If the value stored in position device exceeding the display range (position, out of the range of
maximum to minimum, point No.), parts will not be movement-displayed. The previous display will
be held.
9 - 73
9.2 Parts Movement

9.2.8 Precautions
PARTS
10. GRAPH, METER
10
GRAPH, METER
10.1 Panelmeter
D100 = 2000
10
0
Ammeter
D100 = 3000
10
10
20
TRIGGER
D100 = 1000
20
Ammeter
11
ACTIONS
This function enables meter display (needle display) of the word device value relative to the preset upper/
lower limit value.
Ammeter
20
12
RECIPE

System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For panelmeter, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to panelmeter and others
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Auxiliary
setting
14
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
DEBUG
(1) Functions relevant to panelmeter and others
15
Setting items
objects within GOT]
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 1
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Coordinates error
OTHERS
data.
10.1.2 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting

Panelmeter setting method
Basic functions of the panelmeter are set on the following tabs of
to
.
The following example is used to explain the general procedure for the panelmeter setting.
Example: Panelmeter that indicates analog/digital conversion value for 12mA
Current input range : 0 to 20mA
Digital output range : 0 to 4000
Conversion value : D10
Conversion value
Monitors the value of D10.
10
Ammeter
20
Scale value
Indicates current input range.
4000
Upper/lower limit
Sets digital output range.
1 Basic tab
Set the meter type, needle color, shape, i.e., frame and upper/lower limit.
Figure frame
Monitored device (D10)
Direction (Clockwise)
Needle color
Meter frame (top)
0
4000
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 4000, Lower limit: 0)
Remark
Display of value exceeding upper/lower limit

If the monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit value, the graph shows it
as the upper/lower limit value.
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 4000
D10: -50
10 - 2
D10: 4200
10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.2 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting
2 Scale/Text tab
Sets the scale and name plate (text) for the panelmeter.
0
Ammeter
100
4000
PARTS
Scale display (Scale points: 3)

: Default value displayed.
10
Text (Inputs directly)

GRAPH, METER
-100
Scale (Scale points: 5)
3 Extended tab
Changes the scale values and the data type of the monitored device.
11
10
Ammeter
20
The value of scale value

(Lower limit: 0, Upper limit: 20)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Data type of monitored device
4000
12

Select [Object]
RECIPE
[Panelmeter].
[Panelmeter] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the panelmeter is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged panelmeter to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Click on
14
Easy setting method


DEBUG
15
Shape frame
OTHERS
D10

16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark

1 Basic tab
Set the type and view format (upper/lower limit value, display frame) for the panelmeter.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the device to be monitored. (
Device
Device
The device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary value)" as a default.
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.
Data Size

Select the panelmeter type.
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Top-left
Top-right
Bottom
Left
Right
Full circle
Type
Bottom-left Bottom-right Top

View
Format
When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position where device
lower limit value is displayed) for the meter needle.
90
Base Point
0
180
270
10 - 4
10.1 Panelmeter
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the direction of the needle will move according to the monitor device value.
: Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise
: Counterclockwise rotation
PARTS
Clockwise
Meter frame
Check this item to display the meter frame.

Meter Frame
10
Select the needle color of the panelmeter. (The thickness of needle is fixed to 3 dots.)
GRAPH, METER
Needle Color
The base point of the panelmeter changes depending on the direction.
Line width of the frame is fixed to 1 dot, and the color fixed to
white.
Format
Meter panel
Check this item to color the meter panel face.
View
Meter Panel
11
After checking, select the panel color.

This item can be set only with "Meter Frame".
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by fixed values
or specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values.
Device
: Sets the device values.

(
Lower Limit
TRIGGER
Upper Limit
ACTIONS
Direction
12
The setting range of the upper and lower limit is specified by the data type of the monitored device. (
Section 5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT)
Preset the data type of the device. (
Extended
Option tab)
RECIPE

Shape
selected as shape.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(
Frame
Format
Frame
Plate
Frame
Needle color
Plate
13
14

Category

DEBUG
15
OTHERS
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Layer
2 Scale/Text tab
Set the details of the panelmeter (scale upper/lower limit) and the text to be displayed at the center or
on the top, bottom, left or right.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Object Script
Data Operation
Items
Description
Set the scale and scale value to the panelmeter.
0
Scale Style
-100
100
Scale value
(Value number: 3)
Scale
(Scale points: 5)
-100
100
Scale in combination
scale value
Check this item to display the scale.

Scale
After checking, set the number of scale points (2 to11) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (2 to 11) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
The default numeric values are set within the range -100 to 100.
The applicable numeric size depends on the selected font.
Scale Value
6 x 8dot font
: 1 1(Fixed)
: 1 1 to 8 8
: 0.5 0.5 to 8 8
(
When changing the numeric value, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the extended
tab.
10 - 6
10.1 Panelmeter
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Text
Object Script
Description
Font
TrueType Mincho
TrueType Gothic
Windows
10
font
(
GRAPH, METER
Size
6 x 8dot font
PARTS
Select a font.

Effects
Script
Select Position to
Edit Text
Standard Italic Underline Both
Select a character set available for the specified font. (
Section 2.2
Selectable attributes)
This selects the display position of text.

Five patterns of text can be displayed simultaneously.
The following positions (A to E) can be set by the combined use of Select Position to Edit Text (Center/Top/
Horizontal
Bottom/Left/Right) and Horizontal/Vertical Alignment.
Alignment

A: Center
B: Up
C: Bottom
D: Left
E: Right
B
DA
DA
DA
C
B
A
A
A
C
B
AE
AE
AE
C
12
RECIPE
Vertical Alignment
11
Text
Text
Frame
Text
Distance from
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Text
Input the text to be displayed on the panelmeter. (Up to 32 characters)

Text
key to input a new line at the end of the first line.
14
DEBUG
Press the Enter
15
OTHERS
Text
2.3 Specifications of Applicable Characters)
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Scale/Text
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
3 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset values, data type of the monitor device and upper/lower limit of scale value.
(Setting screen for GT15)

Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.

Example: Change the lower limit value.
Upper
Changes automatically
50
Scale
Value
-100
100
100
Lower
Lower limit change of scale value

-100 0
Security
(
10 - 8
10.1 Panelmeter
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Japan
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER

KANJI Region
Japan
China (GB) -Mincho

16-dot standard
12-dot standard
Scale/Text
11
ACTIONS
12-dot standard
Font)

RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
TRIGGER
4 Case tab
Set the change properties of the panelmeter needle color according to the device state.
For details of state, refer to the following.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Range
Needle Color
Select the needle color that is displayed corresponding to the set condition.
10 - 10
10.1 Panelmeter
*1 State
PARTS
10
Example: Monitored Device: D100

State No.
Display range
Needle Color
21<=$V<=60
Yellow
$V<=20
Red
GRAPH, METER
Operation priority
for setting overlap
condition
Normal case
Low
11
ACTIONS
High
Blue
(State 0)
TRIGGER
* $V indicates the monitored device value.

When the device value is between 21 and 60
(21 $V 60), the needle color will be yellow.
25
50
75
State 1
12
100
When the device value is 20 or below

($V 20), the needle color will be red.
25
50
75
RECIPE
State 2
100
When the condition is other than state 1,2 the needle

color will be blue.
25
Normal case
0
75
100
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.1 Panelmeter
10 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(State 0)
50
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

dialog box.
Basic
Scale/Text
Extended
Case
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 12
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.1 Panelmeter
9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Extended
*1
Write*1
1)
4)
4)
Needle Color
graph_color
3)
Meter Panel
back_color
4)
Frame
frame_color
Plate
plate_color
4)
Security
security
4)
Upper
scale_max[0]
4)
Lower
scale_min[0]
4)
14
15

Section 16.3.2
10.1 Panelmeter
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
DEBUG
Setting item
OTHERS
Tab name
13
Object property
16
10 - 13
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Setting dialog box
10.1.5 Precautions
The following is the precautions for using the panelmeter function.

1000 objects can be set for the panelmeter.
10 - 14
10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.2 Level
This function is used to fill the specified range (level) equivalent to the device value, corresponding to the to
the percentage of the difference between the upper/lower limit values.
With this function, the device value can be shown as a level in any closed figure.
11
ACTIONS
100
75
50
25
0
TRIGGER
100
75
50
25
0
D100=100
Example:
When combined with the comment display function

Numerical
display
Comment
display
Decrease
Level
Level
D100=25
D100=50
Text of comment display is changed according to
level, and displayed in XOR-combined color.
Refer to the following for setting details.
Section 10.2.4
State*1
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
D100=25
D100=50
Numeric value is displayed in the XOR-combined color.
12
Section 7.5 Comment Display
RECIPE
When combined with the numerical display function
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
100
75
50
25
0
D100=50
16
10.2 Level
10 - 15
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D100=0
GRAPH, METER
10

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For Level, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to Level and others
(1) Functions relevant to Level and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error

objects within GOT]
10 - 16
10.2 Level
A level object can be overlapped with figures and numerical/comment display objects.
The following example explains how to make the settings for overlapping a level object with figures and
numerical display objects.
Example: Level for tank Injection volume
Tank capacity : 0 to 500 liter
Injection volume: D10
Injection rate : 0 to 100%
Numerical display
50
100
50
50
Displayed in XOR-combined
color according to level.
11
Figure, scale
100
Level is displayed within

figure frame.
Draw scale if required.
50
GRAPH, METER
500
10
ACTIONS
Set by combining multiple

objects and figures.
PARTS
10.2.2 Required knowledge for level setting
TRIGGER
Level
Set level range according
to figure frame.
12
RECIPE
Injection volume
D10 value is monitored.
Upper/lower limit
Set tank capacity.
13
1 Setting figure, scale and numerical display
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Make the settings for figure, scale and numerical display before arranging the "level" object.
Scale
14
Figure
Draw the figure that overlaps with level object as shown below.
Use the boundary color (
Section 10.2.4
Basic tab)
Draw the figure in enclosed shape.
Example} Figure drawn for level display
Drawn by vertex,
circular or oval figure
DEBUG
Drawn by line
The figure in
different color from
the boundary color
is filled.
Level frame
If the figure is
of the enclosed
type, the level
display is used.
15
Level frame
OTHERS
50
Numerical display
Set the numerical value to be XOR-reversed.
16
10.2 Level
10 - 17
SCRIPT FUNCTION
100
2 Level and figure overlapped

100
Figure
Numerical display
50
Level
Figure and numerical object must be enclosed within the "level" frame.
Arrange level frame and figure to the same length.
If the length of level and figure are different, the value different with actual one is displayed.
[When length is the same]

Level frame
[When length is different]

Upper limit: 100
Level frame
D10: 80
Upper limit: 100

D10: 80
Direction
Lower limit: 0
Direction
Lower limit: 0
Completely filled.
80% filled.
3 Basic Tab
Set the direction, boundary color and upper/lower limit of level.
500 100
50
0
Direction (Up)
Monitor device (D10)
Boundary color (set to the same color as shape)
Upper/Lower limit (upper limit: 500, lower limit: 0)
Remark
Display the value out of the upper/lower limit

When the monitor device value exceeds upper limit, it will be displayed as the new
upper limit. When falling below lower limit, it will not be displayed.
Upper limit: 500
Lower limit: 0
D10:-100
10 - 18
10.2 Level
D10:600
PARTS
1 To enable level display inside a figure, draw a figure for the level display.
10
[Level Graph].
[Level] from the menu.
3 Click on the level arrangement position to arrange the level.

4 To display the level within a figure, adjust the dotted frame in order that it will fit the figure.
If the internal position mark (
display has been arranged.
GRAPH, METER
Select [Object]
11
)is overlapped with the figure and then reversed, this means the level
ACTIONS
Click on
TRIGGER
Level
Inter. pos.
mark data
12
Figure
RECIPE
5 Adjust the dotted line of level display in order that it will fit the outline of the figure.
6 Double click on the arranged level object to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Easy setting method
15
OTHERS

16
10.2 Level
10 - 19
SCRIPT FUNCTION
DEBUG
Remark
When internal position mark (
) are not overlapped with the figure
When internal position marks are not overlapped with the figure, move the internal
position mark according to the following procedure.
The level display is not applicable to the figure that is not overlapped with internal
position mark.
When level display is valid
When level display is invalid
Figure of
level
Frame for
level display
area
1 Right click on the frame for level display, and click on [Enable Two Tracker
Mode]
Internal position mark data change from
2 Drag the internal position mark in order it will overlap with the figure.
Figure is reversed and
level display is valid.
10 - 20
10.2 Level
to
PARTS
1 Basic tab
Set the upper/lower limit and display attribute (color, direction) for monitor device and level.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Basic
RECIPE
12
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
13
Description
Device
Device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Set the device to be monitored.

The device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary value)" as a default.
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.
Data Size
14
Set the frame line color of the figure for level display.
Boundary Color
The level without the frame line is not displayed inside of the figure.
Example 1: When the boundary color isExample 2) When the boundary color differs
the same as the figure frame line colorfrom the figure frame line color
15
Format
Shape of level object
Figure
Shape of level object
OTHERS
Figure
Level display is validLevel display is invalid

Level Color
Select filling color for level display.
10.2 Level
10 - 21
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
View
DEBUG
Line of figure
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Level Pattern
Description
Select the pattern and background color for level display.
The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color

Example: Pattern Background :
Pattern
Level Pattern
Background Color
Level color
Pattern Background
Select the direction the color changes when the monitor device value increases.
View
Format
[Right]
[Left]
[Up]
[Down]
Direction
Select whether the device value range (upper/lower limit) for level display is displayed based on the setting
Upper Limit
by fixed values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.

(
Lower Limit
The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set the data
format in advance.
Category
Layer
(
10 - 22
10.2 Level
9
2 Extended tab
PARTS

Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
13
Description
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Extended
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real
14
Security
(

(
15
OTHERS
Offset
DEBUG
16
10.2 Level
10 - 23
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
3 Case tab
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous
/Next
Up/Down
Select State

Range
Level Color
Select the filling color for level.
Level Pattern
Select the pattern and background color for level display.

The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color

Pattern
Example: Pattern Background :
Background
Color
Level Pattern
Level color
10 - 24
10.2 Level
Pattern Background
*1 State
PARTS
Example: evel object and comment are combined.
Set the same condition (display range) to the level display and comment display, and
change the level color and display comment simultaneously.
Level display setting
Comment display setting
Display result
GRAPH, METER
10
11
Monitor device
Direction
Upper limit
Lower limit
: D100
: Up
: 100
:0
display
Monitor device
Display mode
Register comment
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Comment
: D100
: Transparent
: Comment No. 1
Comment No. 2
Comment No. 3
Operation priority
for setting overlap
State No.
Display range
condition
High
Level
Comment display
Level color
Display comment
71<=$V
Red
Increase
$V<=30
Yellow
Decrease
Light blue
Proper
Normal case
Low
Increase
Decrease
Proper
(State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value

When the device value is 71 or greater (71 $V), the level color will
12
RECIPE
Level
Increase
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Increase
14
appear as red and the text, "Increase", will be displayed.

State 1
DEBUG
Increase
When the device value is 20 or less ($V 20), the level color will appear
15
as yellow and the text, "Decrease" will be displayed.
OTHERS
Decrease
State 2
Under the condition other than the range of state 1, 2, the level color will
appear as light blue and the text, "Proper", will be displayed as text.
Normal case
Proper
10.2 Level
10 - 25
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(State 0)
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Trigger Type
Trigger Device
Ordinary
OFF
Fal
Range
ON
Rise
Sampling
Bit Trigger

Word
Range
Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
Initial Display
trigger.
Hold Display

10 - 26
10.2 Level
9
dialog box.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Extended
Case
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Bit Mask
14
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
15
OTHERS
Data Operation
16
10.2 Level
10 - 27
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Shift
DEBUG
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
*1
4)
4)
Level Color
graph_color
3)
Level Pattern
pattern
3)
Pattern Background Color
back_color
3)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 28
10.2 Level
Write*1
1)
Extended
Read
active
-
Basic
Property name
10.2.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the level function.
PARTS
1 Maximum number of objects that can be arranged (set) for one screen
1000 objects can be set for the level display.
2 Precautions when numerical/comment display object is arranged on a level object
GRAPH, METER
(1) Precautions for arrangement

The displayed screen varies depending on whether the layer is used or not.
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings
(a) To display XOR-combined level display and numerical display/comment display
Description
11
Display example
ACTIONS
Layer
Level display is not displayed correctly

if the numerical display or comment
Numerical display
display is arranged on the back layer

and the level display is arranged on
Level
the front layer.

Used
If the numerical display or comment
12
display is arranged on the front layer
Impossible
TRIGGER
Result
10
Numerical display
the back layer, the numerical display

or comment display will not be
Level
RECIPE
inverted (XOR display not possible).

The XOR-combined numerical display
and comment display is displayed with
Numerical display
XOR display mode.
Possible
The numerical display and comment
display extended off the level range
Numerical display
are not XOR-combined.
Impossible
Level
: Cannot be displayed as expected
14
DEBUG
: Can be displayed as expected,
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Level
Not
OTHERS
15
16
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
10 - 29
SCRIPT FUNCTION
used
13
(b) To display numerical value/comment unaffected by level

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
Level display is not displayed correctly

if the numerical display or comment
Numerical display
display is arranged on the back layer

Impossible
Level
the front layer.

Used
The numeric display or comment

display is free from effects of the level
display if the numeric display or
comment display is arranged on the
Possible
front layer and the level display is

arranged on the back layer.
50
The numerical display/comment

Not
used
Numerical display
Level
display is unaffected by the level with

transparent mode.
Possible
(c) To display multiple numerical displays/comment displays over level

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
More than one numerical display or
Used
comment display are displayed if they
123
are arranged on the front layer and the
Injection
level display is arranged on the back
Comment display
:Not displayed.
layer.
Possible
Numerical display
:Displayed.
Level
Only one numerical display/comment
display is displayed.
Not
used
45
The second or later numerical

displays/comment displays are not
displayed.
Impossible
Numerical display
:Displayed.
Level
Comment display
:Not displayed.
(d) With figure frame to numerical display/comment display

Result
Layer
Description
Display example
The shape is free from effects of the

level display if it is specified in the
Used
Possible
numerical display or comment display
50
Numerical display
and arranged on the front layer and if
Level
the level display is arranged on the

back layer.
Normal display may not be displayed
Not
normally.
50
Numerical display
used
Impossible
Level
10 - 30
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
(a) The numerical/comment display will be updated when the level is updated.
The settings (trigger) to update the display for numerical display/comment display is not
relevant.
To update the numerical display or comment display at the timing different from the level
display, arrange each of them on separate layers.
PARTS
(2) Precautions for use
10
(b) Numerical display/Comment display is not blinked or reversed.
GRAPH, METER
3 Display on the drawing screen

If internal position mark is not displayed on the drawing screen, the level will not be filled.
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
Internal
position
mark
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10.2 Level
10.2.5 Precautions
10 - 31
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.3 Trend Graph
This function is used to collect word device data continuously and display it in trend graph.
D10 = 100
D11 = 50
D10 = 200
D11 = 100
D10 = 150
D11 = 100
200
200
200
100
100
100
Graph1 (
): D10
Graph2 (------): D11
Displays to the end of

graph display range in
order.
Continues to collect data

when the following graph
is displayed by scrolling.
About historical trend graph

Differing from the trend graph function described in this section, historical trend
graph accumulates the collected data and displays them in time sequence. Since it
displays the accumulated data, both the current and past information can be
displayed as graphs.
Section 10.8 Historical Trend Graph

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For trend graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to trend graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
10 - 32
10.3 Trend Graph

10.3.2 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
PARTS
1 Setting method of trend graph

to
tab.
The basic functions of trend graph are set on the following
The following example explains the general procedures for setting trend graph.
10
100
ACTIONS
Scale value
X: Represents productivity.
Y: Represents elapsed time.
12
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
RECIPE
-1
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
-2
14
DEBUG
-3
15
OTHERS
TRIGGER
Actual
Plan
50
11
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 33
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1000
GRAPH, METER
Example: Trend graph for the comparison between Plan and Actual
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Plan (Graph 1)
: D10
Actual (Graph 2) : D11
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, upper/lower limit, number of points and figure.
Number of graphs (2)
1000
Points (6)
Direction (Right)
Shape
0
Upper/Lower limit
(Upper limit: 1000, Lower limit: 0)
Remark
Displaying the value exceeding upper/lower limit

When the monitor device value exceeds upper/lower limit, it will be displayed as new
upper/lower limit on the graph.
D10: 1500
Upper limit: 1000
Lower limit:
0
D10: -50
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the device to be monitored, line attribute and scale.
1000
Monitored device (D10, D11)

100
Line attribute (Graph color, line type, line width)

Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
50
50
100
Scale value: Displays default value.

X (Scale points: 3)
Y (Scale points: 3)
3 Extended tab
Change the numeric value used as scale.
1000
100
50
-1
-2
-3
Scale value
X (Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 100)
Y (Lower limit: -3, upper limit: 0)
4 Trigger tab
Set the timing of collecting data.
The default timing of collecting data is set in 1 second (1000ms) cycle.
10 - 34
10.3 Trend Graph

9
2 Store memory
Item
When Store Memory is not set
PARTS
Executing following operations will clear the graph on screen or collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, enable "Store memory" so that the collected data will be held.
"Store memory" is provided on the Extended tab.
When Store Memory is set
10
Switching screens or switching to utility
Switching the base screen when a trend graph is displayed on the

superimpose window
Display is cleared. The device
Display is retained. The device
value is reset to zero.
value is retained.
Switching the security level*1

Switching the station No. device
*1 If the security level is changed on the security password screen or the device value set for a level device is switched
11
ACTIONS
without the Store Memory setting, the display is cleared and the device value is reset to zero.
GRAPH, METER
Switching language switching device
Example: Operations when switching screens
TRIGGER
Monitored device: D10, D11

Base screen 1
Device value
100
50
D10
D11
25
12
50
0
0
60
120
Switch display screen
RECIPE
Change device value
Base screen 5
D10
50
D11
25
D10
25
D11
50
D10
75
D11
90
13
Produce menu
Line 1
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Line 2
Display base screen 1 again
100
50
50
120
Display the device value

before switching to other
screen, as well as the one
displayed on other screen
on the graph.
0
0
60
120
Display current device value

only after collecting and displaying
new data.
(The trend graph is displayed when
the conditions are met again and the
device value is monitored.)
15
OTHERS
60
DEBUG
100
0
0
14
Do not store memory
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory

The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
When the project is downloaded
When the drive information is displayed
Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility
10.3 Trend Graph
16
10 - 35
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Store memory

Click on
[Trend Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Trend Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged trend graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


4
Remark

10 - 36
10.3 Trend Graph

D10

Shape
PARTS
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanation about setting trend graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper/lower limit and object shape.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
Description
Select the graph to be set (line graph/trend graph/bar graph).
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for trend graph.

Number of Pens
14
Set the number of graphs to be displayed (1 to 8).

Set the points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
up to 100 (2 to 100) points can be set.
The space between each point is automatically specified by the set points and display range of X.
Points
15
X 100 dots
OTHERS
Space between points = 20 dots
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 37
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Format
DEBUG
Example:
Points: 5
View
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the direction for graph.
Right
Direction
Left
Monitored
device
value
Monitored
device
value
Elapsed time
Elapsed time
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for trend graph is displayed based on the setting by fixed
Upper Limit
values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values
Device

(
View
Lower Limit
Format
format in advance.
Base Value
Not available for trend graph.

Check this item to continually collect data when the screen in which trend graph is not set is displayed.
The data as many as the number of points for the graph are stored in the GOT internal memory.
Select the timing to erase the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
No Clear Trigger
: Does not clear the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
Clear ON Trigger Rise
: Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device
Clear ON Trigger Falls
: Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device
Store Memory
rises (turns ON).*1

falls (turns OFF).*1
When [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall] is selected, set the bit device for the clear trigger.
(

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format

Frame
Plate
Plate
Frame
Category

Layer
(
*1 Timing for recognizing clear trigger

The timing of recognizing clear trigger in GOT is same as that set on [Trigger Type] (trigger tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set
for clear trigger must be retained longer that the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
10 - 38
10.3 Trend Graph

100
100
50
50
The previously displayed

graph is deleted.
11
ACTIONS
Touch the touch switch

where a clear trigger
is set.
TRIGGER
The graph is
deleted.
RECIPE
OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Sampling (3 s)
12
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 39
SCRIPT FUNCTION
10
GRAPH, METER
The "sampling (3 s)" trigger type condition is met during the time from pressing the touch switch until the
clear trigger (M10) is turned off by the OFF delay (4 s), and the graph is deleted.
PARTS
Example of data retention for a period longer than that specified for "Trigger Type"
Clear trigger
:Set the timing to "Rise" and the device to "M10".
Trigger type
:Set "Sampling (3 s)."
Touch switch
:Set the device to "M10", and the action to "bit momentary" and "OFF Delay (4 s)."
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type/scale) of graph and monitor device.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Data Size
Object Script
Description

Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
Device Settings
Continue
: The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
Random
: One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Device
Set the graph attributes.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Then, make the settings as follows:
Display Attribute
Device
: Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and select a word device
from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.(
View
Section 5.1 Device
Setting)
Graph
: Select the graph color.
Style
: Select the graph style.
Width
: Select the graph width (1 to 7 dots).
10 - 40
10.3 Trend Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the scale and scale value to the trend graph.
100
50
50
10
Scale Style
0
50 100
Scale is displayed in
combination with scale
value.
GRAPH, METER
Scale
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)
0 50 100
Scale value
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to 11) and the scale color.
Scale
11
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be displayed in
the horizontal or vertical direction only.
ACTIONS
100
PARTS
Example:
TRIGGER

Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
The applicable numeric size depends on the selected font.
: 1x1(Fixed)
: 1x1 to 8x8
: 0.5x0.5 to 8x8
12
RECIPE
The default numeric values for both height and width are set to any of 0 to 100.
When changing the numeric value, set a scale value.
Extended
13
"Scale Value")
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be displayed in
the horizontal or vertical direction only.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 41
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale Value
6 x 8dot font
3 Extended tab
Set the security and offset and the upper/lower limit of scale value.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Data Operation
Trigger
Object Script
Items
Description
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame

Set the scale value for height (Y axis) and width (X axis).
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit of the scale value on Y
Upper
100
Changed
automatically
Scale
Value
50
Lower
Lower
500
250
50
100
50
100
Change scale value on Y

Upper: "100" "500"
Security
(
10 - 42
10.3 Trend Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

(
10
GRAPH, METER
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Basic tab)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.3 Trend Graph

10 - 43
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
PARTS
4 Trigger tab
dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Trigger Type*1
Set sampling (0.1 to 3600 s) with 100ms as unit when selecting [Sampling] [ON Sampling] [OFF Sampling].
Rise
Trigger Device
Initial Display
Fall
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling

10 - 44
Sampling
10.3 Trend Graph

(1) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"

When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], there are cases that the graph is not updated at
the set sampling cycle.
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
GRAPH, METER
10
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling to one second)
one
second
one
second
one
second
Sampling set using "Trigger Type"

ON
11
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
The sampling set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on the status of the device. (The
sampling is not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1 Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2 Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.
(2) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF
Sampling"
When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], graph updating timing differs
depending on whether or not stored memory is used.
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At station No. switching
At language switching
At security level change
10.3 Trend Graph

13
14
15
OTHERS
(b) With setting store memory

At starting GOT
At project download
12
RECIPE
2)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1)
DEBUG
3)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
OFF
16
10 - 45
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Status of device set using "Trigger Device"
PARTS
*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle
5 Data operation
dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
Bit
Operation
AND
OR
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 46
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
10.3 Trend Graph

9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Basic
Extended
*1
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame Color
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)
14
15

Section 16.3.2
16
10.3 Trend Graph

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Property name
DEBUG
Setting item
OTHERS
Tab name
Object property
10 - 47
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Setting dialog box
13
10.3.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the trend graph function.

24 objects can be set for the trend graph.
(2) When using store memory
For the trend graph with store memory set, up to 16 objects can be set on the whole project.
10 - 48
10.3 Trend Graph

10.3.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.4 Line Graph
10
400
400
200
200
GRAPH, METER
This function enables multiple word device data to be collected in batch and displayed in a line graph.
D10 = 100
D11 = 50
D12 = 200
D13 = 150
11
D10 = 150
D11 = 100
D12 = 250
D13 = 350
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Example:
Compare the data with the ones previously collected. (Display the locus)
Set on Extended tab
12
400
400
400
200
200
200
200
Every time cascade

the collected data with
the new graph.
0
1
Clears the displaying graph by

clearing the trigger. Displays the
graph with the new collected
data.
13
14
DEBUG
0
1
15
OTHERS
0
1
16
10.4 Line Graph
10 - 49
SCRIPT FUNCTION
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
400
RECIPE
Updated line

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
Key
window
GOT
internal
devices
For line graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to line graph and others
(1) Functions relevant to line graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Coordinates error
Setting items
objects within GOT]
10.4.2 Required knowledge for line graph setting

Method for line graph setting
Set the basic function of the line graph on the following tabs,
to
.
The following line graph example explains the general procedure for the line graph setting.
Example: Line graph for displaying production quantity of multi production line.
Achievement ratio: 0 to 100%
Production quantity: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (line 1): D10
(line 2)
: D11
(line 3)
: D12
(line 4)
: D13
(line 5)
: D14
6000
100
50
10 - 50
10.4 Line Graph

Production quantity (D10 to 14)

of each production line(1 to 5).
Scale value
Vertical : Indicates the completion ratio.
Horizontal: Indicates the No. of the production
line whose production quantity is
monitored.
Upper /lower limit
Set the production quantity.
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, the upper and lower limit values, the number of points and the shape.
PARTS
Graph number (1)
6000
Points (5)
Direction (to right)
: The setting procedure of device.
10
Figure frame
Remark
GRAPH, METER
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 6000, lower limit: 0)
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit.

When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it is
displayed numerically on the graph.
ACTIONS
D10: 7
TRIGGER
Upper limit : 6000
11
Lower limit :
12
0
D10: -1000
RECIPE
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the monitored devices and the scale.
Scale
Vertical (scale points: 5)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
50
13
Monitored device
(D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)
100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
6000
25
50
75
100
Scale value: Display the default value

Vertical (scale points: 3)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
14
3 Extended tab
100
Scale value
Vertical (upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
Horizontal (upper limit: 5,
lower limit: 1)
15
OTHERS
50
16
10.4 Line Graph

10.4.2 Required knowledge for line graph setting
10 - 51
SCRIPT FUNCTION
6000
DEBUG
Scale values can be changed on this tab.

Click on
[Line Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Line Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the line graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged line graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
Easy setting method


Remark

D10

Shape frame
10 - 52
10.4 Line Graph

PARTS
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar).
This section provides the explanation about setting a line graph.
1 Basic tab
10
GRAPH, METER
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper and lower limit and object shape.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
13
Object Script
Items
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
Description
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for line graph.

Number of Pens
Set the number of graphs (1 to 8) to be displayed.
14
Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 500 points can be set.
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.
Example:
Points
15
Space between
points = 20 dots
OTHERS
X 100 dots
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 53
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Format
DEBUG
Points : 5
View
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Select the setting direction for the graph.
To right
Direction
To left
Value of the
monitored device
Value of the
monitored device
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Direction of the set

monitored device
Direction of the set

monitored device
View
Format
Upper Limit
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for line graph is displayed based on the setting by
fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device
Lower Limit
format in advance.
Base Value
Not available for line graph.
Store Memory

Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
5.3.2 Object shape setting )

Frame
Plate
Plate
Flame
Category
Layer
(
10 - 54
10.4 Line Graph

Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings )
9
2 Device/Scale tab
PARTS
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type, scale) and devices to be monitored.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Device/Scale
Extended
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Data Size
Object Script
Description
13
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Device Settings
14

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
View
Device
: Click on the Dev. button and set a word device to be monitored. *1
Graph
Style
: Select the graph style.
Width
: Select the graph width.
DEBUG
Then, make the settings as follows:

Display Attribute
15
OTHERS
Device
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 55
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Data Operation
Trigger
Items
Object Script
Description
Set the scale and scale value to the line graph.

Example:
Scale Style
100
100
50
50
0 50 100
Scale value display
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)
Scale display
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)
0
50 100
Combine the scale display
and scale value display

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to11) and the scale color.
Scale
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.
Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number], the color in [Color] and numeric size (0.5 to
8) in [Size].
For Font, the following items can be selected.
And, the setting enabled value for [Size] varies depending on the [Font] selected.
6 x 8dot
Scale Value
:1 x 1 (Fix)
12dot Standard
:1 x 1 to 3 x 3
16dot Standard
:0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.

(
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity )
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set to any of 0 to 100.
When change value, set [Scale Value].
(
Extended
"Scale Value"
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.

Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Refer to the following for the details of *1
10 - 56
10.4 Line Graph

*1 Edit device dialog box
PARTS
Set the devices to be monitored in the Edit Device dialog box.
GRAPH, METER
10
Description
Select the setting method in [Device List] described below.
Device Settings
Continue
: The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head device,
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.
and any other device will be consecutively assigned to the second and later points.
12
Check this item to display a point using 2 devices.
2 devices/point
Click on the desired item in the list to set the monitor device by direct input or clicking on the Dev.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
button.
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 57
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 device/point
RECIPE
Display 2
devices by
one point.
2 Device/point
Device List
TRIGGER
Items
ACTIONS
11
3 Extended tab
Set the security, offset, graph display method (locus, not-displayed value setting) and upper and lower
limit scale values.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Items
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
10 - 58
10.4 Line Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Object Script
Data Operation
Items
Description
PARTS
Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X axis) lines.
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y
100
Value
50
Lower limit
Lower
10
100
Changed
automatically
250
0
0
50
100
50
GRAPH, METER
Upper limit
Scale
100
Change the scale value of Y.

Upper limit : "100"
"500"
11
ACTIONS
Security
TRIGGER
Offset
12

This setting cannot be set with "Locus"
Check this item when cascading the updated line graph and the previous graph.
Display at the first time

100
100
50
50
Display at the second time
Display at the third time

100
RECIPE
The previous graph is stored in the GOT internal memory.
13
Display the cascaded 1, 2, 3 data contents.
14
Select the timing of clearing locus after the check.

No clear trigger
: Does not erase the locus.
Clear trigger rise
: Erases the locus with the rise (turns ON) of bit device.*1
Clear trigger fall
: Erases the locus with the fall (turns OFF) of bit device.*1
When selecting [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall], set the bit device to be used for the clear trigger.
(
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Check this item when setting the value without line connection.
DEBUG
Locus
50
15
After checking, set the not-displayed value.

Example:
When setting not-displayed valueSet "300" to the not-displayed value.
300
200
100
00
3 4
300
200
100
0
OTHERS
Not-Displayed Value
300
0 1
3 4
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 59
SCRIPT FUNCTION
The line connecting 1 to 3 is not displayed.
*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger Type] or longer
Clear Trigger
:Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type :Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
:Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear
trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
100
100
50
50
Touch the touch switch

set for the clear trigger
10 - 60
10.4 Line Graph

The graph displayed

previously is erased.
Erases
the graph
Sampling
(3 s)
OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
9
dialog box.
PARTS
4 Trigger tab
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
13
Description
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Type
The trigger is displayed as follows, when [Locus] is set on the Extended tab.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600 seconds)
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON sampling
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
Initial Display
OFF sampling
DEBUG
by
15

When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for the trigger.
Hold Display
14
second.*1
OTHERS
Device/Scale
16

This setting cannot be set with "Locus".
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 61
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
RECIPE
12

(a) Causes
one
second
one
second
one
second

ON
OFF
3)
1)
2)
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
sequence program.
Sampling"
depending on whether or not locus setting is used.
(a) Without setting locus
At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
(b) With setting locus
At starting GOT
At project download
10 - 62
10.4 Line Graph

9
PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14

: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
DEBUG
Left
15
OTHERS
Data Operation
16
10.4 Line Graph

10 - 63
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Shift
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Basic
Extended
*1
Property name
Read
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame Color
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 64
10.4 Line Graph

Write*1
10.4.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using line graph function.
PARTS

For line graph, up to 32 objects can be arranged (set) for one screen.
(1) Only one object can be set for the whole project.
When the base screen arranged with line graph is multi-displayed in other base screen with the Set
overlay screen function, only the first line graph can be displayed and the second and later will not
be displayed.
(2) The setting is available for the base screen only.
(3) The overlap window 2 and test window cannot be displayed on the base screen arranged with line
Section 15.2 Test Function)
TRIGGER
graph. (
11
ACTIONS
2 Precautions for the line graph which locus has been set.
GRAPH, METER
10
(4) The offset function and the station number switching function are not available.
(5) When [Vertical] is set for [Format] in [System Environment] (for GT11 only), the line graph cannot
be used. (Not displayed on the GOT even when arranged on the screen.)
12
(6) Pay attention to the following when a line graph is overlaid on a shape.
RECIPE
(a) The BMP/JPEG file pasted to the screen cannot exceed the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the area that is not overlapped in the line graph frame will not be displayed.
Example:
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Line graph frame BMP/JPEG files

for shape
BMP/JPEG files exceed

the line graph frame.
14
(b) When using shapes filled with color, arrange the frame of the shape (the boundary line of paint
area) within the line graph frame. Otherwise, the shape will not be painted normally
(c) Since the shape set in the overlay screen is not displayed, it must be directly placed over and
as the background for the line graph.
(d) Do not use the superimpose window because shapes within the superimpose window will not
be displayed as background.
DEBUG
Arrange BMP/JPEG files

in the line graph frame
15
OTHERS
Example:
Base screen
Window screen
Set locus display
Do not set locus display
10.4 Line Graph

10.4.5 Precautions
10 - 65
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.5 Bar Graph
This section explains the function for collecting word device data and displaying them as a bar graph.
D10
D20
D30
100
400
200
D10
D20
D30
-200
200
400
Example:
Change bar display
Extended Tab
Bar display can be sorted in ascending/descending

order based on the device values
Sort bar display in deseending order.

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
For bar graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to bar graph and others
10 - 66
10.5 Bar Graph

Key
window
9
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
10
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error
objects within GOT]
GRAPH, METER
PARTS
(1) Functions relevant to bar graph and others
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
10.5.2 Required knowledge for bar graph setting

Set the basic function of the bar graph on the following tab,
to
.
The following example explains the general procedures for setting a bar graph.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
The production of each line

(1 to 5)(D10 to 14)
Scale value
X: Indicates achievement ratio.
Y: Indicates line No.
14
Draws with figure and text.
DEBUG
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
OTHERS
15
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 67
SCRIPT FUNCTION
6000
RECIPE
Example: Bar graph displaying production quantity of multiple lines

Achievement ratio
: 0 to 100%
Production quantity
: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (Line 1) : D10
(Line 2) : D11
(Line 3) : D12
(Line 4) : D13
(Line 5) : D14
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, figure frame (object shape), base value and upper and lower limit values.
6000
Figure frame
Base value
Upper/Lower limit
Remark
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit

When a monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit, it will be displayed
numerically on the graph.
D13 = 7000
Upper limit: 6000
Lower limit:
0
D11 = 1000
2 Device/Scale tab
Set monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
6000
Monitor device (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)

0
Graph color
Scale (Scale points: 5)
Scale value (Numerical value number: 3)
3 Extended tab
Scale values can be changed on this tab.
6000
Scale value (Upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
10 - 68
10.5 Bar Graph

[Bar Graph].
[Bar Graph] from the menu.
3 Double click on the arranged bar graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
11
ACTIONS
Easy setting method


12

D10


Shape frame
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
GRAPH, METER
10
2 Click on the position where the bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or use ESC key.)
TRIGGER
[Graph]
RECIPE
Select [Object]
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 69
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Click on
PARTS

This dialog box is used in common among three types of graph (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanations of setting of bar graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper limit/lower limit/base value and
object shape, i.e., frame.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for bar graph.

Number of Pens
Set the number of graphs (1 to 8) to be displayed.
Points
Not available for a bar graph.

Select the setting method of monitor device.
Select either of X direction or Y direction.
View
Y direction:
Format
Direction
Monitor
device value
X direction:
In the set
order of
the device
In the set order of the device
Monitor device value
10 - 70
10.5 Bar Graph

9
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Upper Limit
View
Description
Select whether the device value range (Base value, Lower/Upper limit) for the bar graph is displayed based
on the setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Lower Limit
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values
Device
: Sets the device values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values.

(
Format
Base Value
Store Memory
PARTS
Device/Scale
10
GRAPH, METER
Basic
format in advance (on the Device/Scale tab).

Not available for bar graph.
selected as shape.
(
Frame

Frame
TRIGGER
Format
11
ACTIONS
Shape
Plate
12
Plate
Frame
13
14
DEBUG
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
15
OTHERS
Layer
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 71
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Category
RECIPE
2 Device/Scale tab
Set graph display attribute (graph color/scale) and monitor device.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Data Size
Object Script
Description

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value
Real

Device Settings
When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
Continue
: The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random
Device
: One device to be monitored is set for each graph.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings as follows:
: Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and select a word
Device
device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.
(
Display Attribute
View
Graph Color
Pattern
: Select the filling pattern of the graph.
Background
: Select the background color of the graph.
Pattern + Graph
Example:
BG
Pattern :
Graph
BG

10 - 72
10.5 Bar Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
9
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Set the scale and scale values to the bar graph.
50
50
0
Scale value = 3
10
GRAPH, METER
Scale points = 5
100
Scale is displayed in combination

with scale value

After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (0, 2 to11) and the scale color.
11
Setting the scale to "0" hides the scale.

Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number], the color of numeric display in [Color] and
TRIGGER
the numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].

Scale Value
6 x 8dot
: 1 x 1 (Fix)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
12
RECIPE
The default value for both X and Y axes are set to "-100 to 100".
When change the value, set [Scale Value].
(
Extended
13
tab [Scale Value])
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
When set the Scale Value to "0", the scale will not be displayed.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 73
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale
ACTIONS
Scale Style
100
PARTS
Example:
3 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset and upper/lower limit of the scale values.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame

Upper
Example: Changes lower limit of scale value.

Upper
100
100
Sets lower limit of the
scale value to "0"
Scale Value
0
Lower
Changes
automatically
Lower
Security
50
-100
(
(
Offset

(

10 - 74
10.5 Bar Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
9
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description
The graph width includes the 1 dot on the boundary line (Vertical bar: Left side, Horizontal bar: Upper side)
PARTS
Set the graph width (1 to 500 dots) of the bar graph to be displayed.
Boundary line (1 dot)
Boundary line (1 dot)
Graph width: including the boundary line
Set the space between graph OP and the selected position to edit text in bar graph that is near the OP (1 to
100 dots).
GRAPH, METER
10
Graph Width
ACTIONS
11
Distance from Graph Frame

(Offset)
TRIGGER
Distance from
graph frame
Distance from graph frame
Set the space between bar graphs (including graph width) (1 to 500 dots).
Vertical graph
12
Horizontal graph
Width + Space
RECIPE
Space (including graph width)
Sorting the bars.

Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None
13
: Sort is invalid. (Bars are displayed in the device setting order.)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.

Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
[Ascending]
Y direction
X direction
Sort
14
[Descending]
DEBUG
X direction
OTHERS
15
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 75
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Y direction
4 Trigger tab
Basic
Device/Scale
Trigger
Extended
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Trigger Type
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Trigger Device
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range

Select the data type of the word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Multi Bit
Trigger
Bit Number
triggers.
Initial Display
Hold Display

10 - 76
10.5 Bar Graph

9
PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
DEBUG
Bit Mask
Data Operation
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
15
OTHERS
Bit Shift
14
16
10.5 Bar Graph

10 - 77
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
6 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Basic
Extended
*1
Property name
Read
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame Color
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 78
10.5 Bar Graph

Write*1
10.5.5 Precautions
PARTS
This section provides the precautions when using the bar graph function.
10
GRAPH, METER
For bar graph, up to 1000 objects can be arranged (set) for one screen.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
10.5 Bar Graph

10.5.5 Precautions
10 - 79
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.6 Statistics Graph
The statistics pie/bar graph shows the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total data value.
1 Statistics pie graph
D10
D20
D30
33
33
34
D10
D20
D30
12
76
12
2 Statistics bar graph
D10
D20
D30
D10
D20
D30
33
33
34
12
76
12
Application example
Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen
Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to

device values
Set in Extended tab
Section 7.2 Data List

No.
Ma. name
Target vol.
Prod. vol.
2000
Ma. 1
5000
Ma. 2
5000
1200
Ma. 3
5000
1000
Device status can be displayed more effectively by

including the line graph legend.
10 - 80
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending

order of device values.

System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
PARTS
Auxiliary
setting
For statistics graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
Make the settings by referring the following description, if necessary.
10
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
(1) Functions relevant to statistics graph and others
12
Setting items
RECIPE
objects within GOT]
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 81
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to statistics graph and others

10.6.2 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting

The following
to
tabs can be used for setting statistics graph basic function.
The procedure for setting the statistics graph is shown as follows.
Example: Statistics pie graph displaying the production ratio by model
Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model
75
25
Scale value
Display scale value
50
1 Basic tab
It is to set the graph type, division number (number of divided sections) and shape.
Graph type, division number
66.7
33.3
Shape
2 Device/Scale tab
It is to set the monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
Device (D10, D11, D12)
Graph color
25
75
50
10 - 82
Scale (scale number: 4)
Scale value (value number: 4)

10.6.2 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
[Statistics Pie Graph/Statistics Bar Graph].
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Statistics Pie Graph]/[Statistics Bar Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the statistics graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged statistics graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
11


12

RECIPE
D10

Shape frame
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 83
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Easy setting method
GRAPH, METER
Click on
PARTS

1 Basic tab
It is to set the graph type (statistics bar graph, statistics pie graph), division number (number of divided
sections) and shape.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Graph Type
Select the statistics graph type (statistics bar graph/statistics pie graph).
Division Number
Set the number of word devices to be monitored (2 to 32).

Select the setting direction of device to be set in [Statistics Bar Graph].
Up
Direction
Down
D12
D10
D11
D11
D10
D12
Right
Left
D10 D11 D12 D12 D11 D10

Frame
Format
Shape
selected as shape.
(
10 - 84

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
PARTS
Frame
Plate
Frame
10
Plate

Category
11
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
ACTIONS
15
OTHERS
Layer
GRAPH, METER
Format
16

10 - 85
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Frame
2 Device/Scale tab
It is to set monitor device and graph display attribute (graph color, scale).
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Data Size
Object Script
Description

Signed BIN
Data Type
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real
: Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
Device Settings
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.

Continuous
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings as follows:
Device
: Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and select a word
Device
device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.
(
Graph
Display Attribute
Pattern
: Select the filling pattern of the graph.
List
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.
Pattern + Graph color

Example: BG
Pattern :
Graph
BG color

10 - 86

Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Object Script
Items
Description
Set the scale and scale value of statistics graph.
0
75
25
75
50
50
Scale points: 8
Scale value: 4
10
25
GRAPH, METER
Scale Style
PARTS
Example:
Combined display of
scale and scale value

Scale
After checking, set the number of scale points (0, 2 to11) and the scale color.
11
ACTIONS
Entering "0" to Scale Points hides the scale.

Check this item to display the scale numerically.
For the Font, the following options are selectable. Note that values available for the Size vary depending on
the selected font.
6x8dot
Scale Value
: 1 x 1 (Fixed)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
TRIGGER
After checking it, set the Value Number (0, 2 to 11), Color, Font and Size (0.5 to 8).
12
RECIPE
Entering "0" to Scale Points hides the scale
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 87
SCRIPT FUNCTION
3 Extended tab
Set the security, offset and the order displaying graphs (sort).
Check the [Extended Function] at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Security
Object Script
Description
(
(
Offset

(

Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None
: Sort is invalid. (Graph sections are displayed in the device setting order.)
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
[Ascending]
Bar graph
Pie graph
[Descending]
Bar graph
Pie graph
Sort
10 - 88

9
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding [Extended Function] at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
4 Trigger tab
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Basic
Device/Scale
Trigger
Extended
Data Operation
Items
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Object Script
Description
Select trigger for displaying the object.
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Word Range Trigger
Data Size
Data Type
Range
15

Bit Number
Initial Display
trigger.
OTHERS
Trigger
DEBUG
Ordinary
Trigger Device
Multi Bit
14
Trigger Type
16

If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied

10 - 89
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Hold Display

dialog box.
Basic
Device/Scale
Extended
Trigger
Data Operation
Items
Object Script
Description

Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit Operation
OR
XOR

Bit Shift
Data Operation
10 - 90
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

9
6 Object script tab
PARTS
Section 16.3.6
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
RECIPE

Basic
Option
Read
Write*1
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame Color
plate_color
Plate Color
scale_max[0]
4)
Security
plate_color
4)
14
15
Section 16.3.2
OTHERS
*1
Property name
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting item
16

10 - 91
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Tab name
13
Object property
DEBUG
Setting dialog box
10.6.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using statistics graph function.

For the statistics graph function, up to 32 objects can be set.

(1) When device values are negative
For statistic graph, the absolute value is displayed when monitor device value is a negative
number.
Example: When D101 is "
30"
D100=20 D101=-30
20
40
D102=50
60
80
100
Display "30"
(2) Filling
When handling extremely small data in a statistics pie graph, the start point may coincide with the
end point.
If this occurs, no filling is performed.
10 - 92

10.6.5 Precautions
PARTS
10.7 Scatter Graph
By taking the values of 2 word devices as X and Y coordinates, a corresponding point is displayed on the
graph.
1 Sample
11
(200, 100)
400
400
400
300
300
300
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
300
TRIGGER
X device: D100
Y device: D200
(300, 200)
ACTIONS
Two word device values are collected, and then displayed as a point on the graph.
This graph is updated to the new one with the previously displayed point(s) remained. (Locus)
(50, 300)
GRAPH, METER
10
100
0
100
200
300
100
200
12
300
Multiple data of 2 word device values are collected together and displayed as corresponding points.
When refreshing the data, the previously displayed point(s) can be either kept or erased depending on
the setting selection.
RECIPE
2 Batch
13
400
400
400
300
300
300
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
300
100
0
100
200
300
100
200
300
D209
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.7 Scatter Graph
10 - 93
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D109
Y device: D200
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
X device: D100

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For scatter graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to scatter graph and others
(1) Functions relevant to scatter graph and others

Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
data.
Setting items
Coordinates error

objects within GOT]
10 - 94
10.7 Scatter Graph

10.7.2 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
Set basic function of the scatter graph on the following tabs

to`
The following example explains the general setting procedure.
PARTS
1 Setting method of scatter graph

.
10
Monitor conversion value

X: D100 (temperature digital output value)
Y: D200 (power consumption digital output value)
Display attribute
Switch according to operation mode.
Operation mode A: , operation mode B:
5000
2500
0
-10
11
20
50
600
TRIGGER
10000
: -10 to 50
: D100
: D200
ACTIONS
Temperature variation range

Conversion value (Digital output value of temperature)
Conversion value (Digital output value of power consumption)
GRAPH, METER
Example: A scatter graph to display power consumption and temperature during line operation
Digital output range for temperature
: 0 to 600
Digital output range for power consumption
: 0 to 10000
Power consumption variation range
: 0 to 5000W
12
Scale value
Vertical : Indicates power consumption
Horizontal: Indicates temperature
RECIPE
Upper limit/lower limit

X: Indicates temperature digital output range
Y: Indicates power consumption digital output range
1 Basic tab
13
Set the graph type, upper/lower limit values and object shapes.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Graph type (sample)
10000
Points
(Fixed to 1 when graph type is sample)
Object shape, i.e., frame
14
600
Upper/lower limit for X
Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit
15
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it will be
displayed numerically on the graph.
(800, 11000)
Lower limit:
OTHERS
Upper limit: 10000
16
0
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 600
(-1000, -1500)
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 95
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
DEBUG
Upper/lower limit for Y

2 Device/Scale tab
Set the monitor devices, scale, and scale values.
10000
100
Monitor device (X: D10, Y: D11)

0
-100
-100
Scale
(Scale points Horizontal: 7, Vertical: 5)
0
100
600
Scale value
(Value number Horizontal: 3, Vertical: 3)
: Default value (Upper limit: 100, Lower limit: -100)
is displayed
Can be changed in extended tab.
3 Attribute tab
Set the type (point/line) of graph display attribute.
10000
Display attribute (point)

: Select either of point or line.
Point
100
Straight line
0
-100
-100
100
600
4 Trigger tab
Set the graph display method.
Switch display attribute
: Make setting on this to change the display attribute set in
Data collection timing
according to the condition of a specified switching device.

: Set the sampling of data to 600 seconds in this case.
The default value is set to 1 second.
Attribute switch (bit, switching device: M10)
: Switch between 2 types of display attributes
Set display attribute in the following [ON/OFF attribute].
10000
ON/OFF attribute (ON: OFF: )

: Set display attribute when M10 is ON or OFF.
0
0
600
Point is displayed as
when M10 is ON.
Point is displayed as
when M10 is OFF.
5 Extended tab
Change the scale values.
10000
5000
2500
0
-10
10 - 96
20
50
600
Scale value
Upper limit (Horizontal: 50, Vertical: 5000)
Lower limit (Horizontal: -10, Vertical: 1)
10.7 Scatter Graph

2 Store memory
Item
When Store Memory not set
When Store Memory set
Stores the device value
Stores the device value
Screen with scatter graph set
Screen with scatter graph not set

Screen with scatter graph set
Use Language Switching

Switching base screen when scatter graph is displayed on a
Erases the display.
Stores the display.
Changes the device value to 0.
Stores the device value.
superimpose window
GRAPH, METER
the utility
10
Screen with scatter graph not set
11
Switching security level

Switching station No. switching device
*1 If switch the security level on the Security-Password screen or switch the device value set for the level device when
TRIGGER
Store Memory is not set, the display is erased or the device value is changed to 0.
ACTIONS
Screen switching/Switching to
PARTS
Executing following operations will clear the graph on screen or collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, enable "Store memory" so that the collected data will be held.
"Store memory" is provided on the Extended tab.
Example: Screen switching operation

Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101
12
Store memory
100
Device value
D101
50
50
Device value changes
100
D100
50
100
D101
50
25
100
50
50
100
Base screen 1
Switch to
and display
base screen 5.
Display base
screen 1 again.
50
RECIPE
50
100
Base screen 1
Display both the device value (before being
switched to other screen) and the device val
in the display of other screen.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D100
Do not store memory

100
50
Production menu
50
14
100
Line 1
Base screen 5
Base screen 1
Only graph display current device value
after collecting and displaying new data.
15
OTHERS
(1) The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory
Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph (sample, batch).
DEBUG
Line 2
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 97
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2000 times
Sample
2000
Points
Batch
times (Round off the part after decimal point)
For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for [Operation at
frequency over time] on the Extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts data collection
Initialize and continue . . . Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter graph display and
collects data again.
Displaying an error message when the sampling number reaches the maximum
An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has
reached the maximum.
(
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display)
(2) Conditions for when the stored memory data is erased

(a) When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
(b) When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the maximum
(Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
(c) When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF
(d) When the project is downloaded
(e) When the drive information is displayed
(f) Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility
10 - 98
10.7 Scatter Graph

9
3 Accumulate/Average
PARTS
The accumulation frequency and the average/maximum/minimum of the data collected in the scatter
graph can be written to devices.
Example: X-device: D100, Y-device: D200
400
300
300
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
D100
D200
100
200
300
50
250
100
200
300
200
300
100
200
200
100
300
Contents to be written
100
200
Accumulation
300
Frequency
250
200
X
Remark
Value that has been
10
written
4
Average Value
200
Maximum
300
Minimum
50
Average Value
187
Maximum
250
Minimum
100
GRAPH, METER
400
300
200
11
ACTIONS
400
300
(1) Average value

(a) The fractions below the decimal point of the average value are rounded off.
If the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device is real,
however, fractions below the decimal point will be written.
TRIGGER
400
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(1) Upper limit of sampling number available for accumulation frequency/average value
The upper limit of the sampling number that can be counted as accumulation frequency/average
value varies according to the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device.
[Data Type of Monitor Device]
Unsigned BIN, Signed BIN, Real, BCD (32 bit) : 65535
BCD (16 bit)
: 9999
When the accumulation frequency exceeds the upper limit, please set the operation in [Operation at
frequency over time] of the extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts the sampling of data.
Initialize and continue . . . . Initializes the value of the accumulation frequency, and then recollects
data.
13
14
DEBUG
(2) Maximum and minimum values

When the value of the monitor device exceeds the upper or lower limit of the
scatter graph, the upper or lower limit value will be written as the maximum or
minimum accordingly.
RECIPE
(b) Since the average value is calculated on the basis of the average values of
every sampling, it is probable to have an error.
15
When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit, an error message
can be displayed in the alarm list (system alarm).
16
Section 8.7 System Alarm Display)
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 99
SCRIPT FUNCTION
OTHERS
Displaying an error message when the accumulation frequency value exceeds the
upper limit
(2) Initialization timing of accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum

Value "0" is written to the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum in the
following timing.
(a) When the conditions for the clear trigger (set in the Trigger tab) are satisfied
(b) When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit
(Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
(c) When switching the screen
When switching the screen (base screen, window screen) with scatter graph arranged
When switching the screen with scatter graph arranged to other screens, the current
accumulation frequency/average value will be held. However, when the screen is switched
back to the previous screen, the data will be initialized.
When switching the base screen
The scatter graph arranged in superimpose window will be initialized when the base screen
is switched over.
(d) When the security level is changed
(e) When the station number is changed
Remark
Executing "the accumulation frequency/average value write" and the "store memory"
simultaneously
If the "accumulation frequency/average value" and "store memory" are used
simultaneously, the data of accumulation frequency/average value will still be
collected even when the screen is switched to others.
However, accumulation frequency/average value can be written until the time that
the sampling number for store memory reaches the maximum.
Refer to the following for the maximum sampling number of store memory.
This section
10 - 100
Store memory
10.7 Scatter Graph


Select [Object]
[Graph]
PARTS
[Scatter Graph].
[Scatter Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the scatter graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged scatter graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
GRAPH, METER
Click on
11


D10

Shape frame
RECIPE
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
12
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 101
SCRIPT FUNCTION
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Easy setting method

1 Basic tab
Set the graph type, upper limit/lower limit and shape.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Graph Type
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Select the graph type (sample/batch).
Points
Set the points (2 to 500) to be displayed in the graph of [Batch].

Select how to update the graph display of [Batch].
Mode
: Only displays the graph of the latest data.
Locus
: Displays the latest data with the previous displayed graph overlapped.
Select whether to set the range (upper limit/lower limit of X/Y) of device displayed in scatter graph in fixed
View
Format
Replacement
value or in the value of the specified device.

X: Upper Limit/
Lower Limit
Fixed
: Set a fixed value to the upper limit/lower limit.
Device
: Set a device value as the upper limit /lower limit.
Y: Upper Limit/
(
Lower Limit
The range of the upper limit/lower limit that can be set depends on the data type of the monitor device.
Set the data type (set in the Device/Scale tab) in advance.
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change)

Frame Color
Format
Plate color
Plate Color
Frame color

10 - 102
10.7 Scatter Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
15
OTHERS
Layer
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 103
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS

Category
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the devices to be monitored and the scale displayed in the graph.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Items
Data Size
Extended
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

Device
Select the setting method for monitoring devices when [Batch] is used.
Device Settings
Continue
: The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.
device.
X-Device/
Input the device directly for each of X and Y axes, or click on the
Y-Device
button to set the monitor word device.
10 - 104
10.7 Scatter Graph

Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Set the scale and scale values for the scatter graph.
100
50
50
0
Scale display
(X:5, Y:5)
0
50
100
Scale value display
(X:3, Y:3)
10
0
50
100
Combine the scale display
and scale value display
GRAPH, METER
Scale Style
100
PARTS
Example:

After checking, set the number of scale points (i.e. tick marks) (2 to11) and the scale color.
11
ACTIONS

After checking, set [Value Number] (2 to 11), [Font] and [Size] (0.5 to 8).
Scale Value
6 x 8dot
: 1 x 1 (Fix)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
TRIGGER
12
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set within the range from -100 to 100.
When changing the numeric values, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the extended
RECIPE
tab.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 105
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Scale
3 Attribute tab
Set the display attribute (type of point/line) of scatter graph.
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Display Attribute
Select the display attribute (point/line) of scatter graph.
Fixed Attribute
Set display attribute for the case that [Fixed] is selected for [Attribute Switching] on the Trigger tab.
Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
Type of point :
Type
Type of line
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.
10 - 106
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small)/line (1 to 7).
Color
Select the display color of the point/line.
10.7 Scatter Graph

9
4 Case/Trigger tab
PARTS
Set the display attribute switching of scatter graph, updating of graph display and timing of erasure.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
RECIPE
Device/Scale
Select the switching display attributes for the scatter graph (type, size and color of point/line)
Fixed
: The display attribute is not switched.
Bit
: The display attribute is switched depending on the bit device conditions ON/OFF.
Signed BIN16
: The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word
BCD16
: The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word
13
The display attribute set on the Attribute tab is used.
device value (16-bit binary value).

device (16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)).
When [Bit] is selected, set the display attribute in [ON/OFF Attribute] of this tab.
When [Signed BIN16] or [BCD16] is selected, set it on the Case tab.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
14
Example1: Attribute switching: [Bit], Switching device: M10
M10: OFF
Points are
displayed as
15
D10 = 1
Points are
displayed as
D10 = 10
Points are
displayed as
D10 < 100

Points are
displayed as
OTHERS
Example2: Attribute switching: [Signed BIN16], Switching device: D10
Set the device for display switching.
16
Switching Device
(
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 107
SCRIPT FUNCTION
M10: ON
Points are
displayed as
DEBUG
Attribute Switching
Basic
Device/Scale
Case/Trigger
Attribute
Case
Extended
Items
ON/OFF Attribute
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Set the display attribute for ON/OFF statuses of the display-switching bit device.
Type of point :
Type
Type of line
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is positioned close
to other point/line.
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color

Display Trigger
Type*1
Display Trigger
Device
Initial Display
Trigger

(

Sampling
Fall
Rise
ON sampling
OFF sampling

Check this item to set the trigger for erasing the display of graphs.
After checking, select the timing of erasing graph display.
Clear Trigger*2
Rise
: Erases the graph at rise (turns ON) of bit device.
Fall
: Erases the graph at fall (turns OFF) of bit device.
The clear trigger will clear graph display stored in memory and the accumulation frequency/average value.
Assigning a device to function as a clear trigger.
Clear Trigger
Device
When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], make sure to hold the clear
trigger device status for more than the sampling cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Refer to the next page for the details about *1 and *2 .
10 - 108
10.7 Scatter Graph


(a) Causes
GRAPH, METER
10
one
second
one
second
one
second

ON
11
4)
5)
At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.

At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
(b) Countermeasures
sequence program.
Sampling"
depending on whether or not stored memory is used.
(a) Without setting store memory
At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
10.7 Scatter Graph

13
14
15
OTHERS
(b) With setting store memory

At starting GOT
At project download
12
RECIPE
2)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1)
DEBUG
3)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
OFF
16
10 - 109
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS
*2 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger Type] or longer
Clear Trigger
: Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type : Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear
trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
400
400
300
300
200
200
100
100
0
100
200
300
Touch the switch set for

the clear trigger
100
10 - 110
10.7 Scatter Graph

300
The graph displaed previously

erased.
Erase
the graph
Sampling
(3 s)
200
OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
9
Set the attributes according to the state of device state condition.
This tab will be displayed only when [Attribute Switching] of the Trigger tab is set to [Signed BIN16] or
[BCD16].
Refer to the following for details of state.
PARTS
5 Case tab
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Attribute
Case
Case/Trigger
Extended
Items
Data Operation
13
Object Script
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Device/Scale
Description
State*1

New State
Delete State
Previous/Next
Up/Down
Range
DEBUG
Select State
14
15
Type of point :
Type of line
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is positioned close
to other point/line.
Size
Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color
OTHERS
Type
16
* For the details of *1, refer to the next page.
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 111
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
*1 State
Example: Graph type
: Sample,
Switching device : D10
Operation priority
for setting overlap
State No.
Display range
1
2
Type
Size
Color
8<=$V<=12
Big
White
13<=$V<=18
Small
Black
Big
Black
condition.
High
Normal case
Low
(State 0)
*$V indicates the value of the monitor device.

When the value of the switching device is between 8 and
12 (8<=$V<=12), it will appear as big white quadrangle
(
40
30
).
20
State 1
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
40
When the value of the switching device is between 13 and

18, it will appear as small black triangle (
).
40
30
20
State 2
10
0
When other conditions except for the conditions of state 1

to 3 happen, it will appear as big black circle (
Normal case
(State 0)
).
40
30
20
10
0
10 - 112
10.7 Scatter Graph

9
6 Extended tab
PARTS
This tab allows the following attributes to be set:

Scale values, security, offset, and the write of collection data's accumulation data.
When the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked, the tab is displayed.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Extended
Case
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
RECIPE
Basic
Description
13
Graph frame
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Rectangle Frame
When changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.

Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and/or horizontal (X axis) line.
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Upper limit
100
100
0
Change the scale value
of the horizontal axis
Upper limit: "100" to "200"
-100
14
Value
Lower limit
-100
-100
Lower limit
100
-100
50
200
Upper limit
Changed automatically
Security
15
(
(
Offset
OTHERS

(
16
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Extended tab).
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 113
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Lower
DEBUG
Scale
Basic
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
Object Script
Description
Check this item to enable data collection during display of the screen without a scatter graph.
Store Memory
Data of the points displayed in the graph are stored in the internal memory of GOT.
Check this item when setting the not-displayed value for X and/or Y of the scatter graph.
Example: [0] is set as not-displayed value for X and Y
Not-displayed
value
400
Value not displayed
400
(0, 400)
(50, 0)
300
200
(0, 400)
(50, 0)
300
200
100
100
0
Not-displayed
value
100
200
300
Graph of [Point]
100
200
300
Graph of [Line]
Select the operation when the following functions exceed the maximum sampling number.
Store memory
: When exceeding the maximum display points (2000 points).
Accumulation frequency
: When accumulation frequency exceeds 65535/average value/maximum/
Operation at frequency over

time
minimum (9999).
Interrupt
: Interrupts the data collection, and does not update the graph display.
Initialize and Continue
: After erasing the graph display and initializing the memory and
accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum, continues
data collection.
Check this item when writing the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum of collected
data into devices.
Then, set the interval of writing the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum into devices
by specifying the number of update times.
Accumulate/Average
The value set as "Value not displayed" in the scatter graph display is not included.
When writing of the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum is enabled, "Store Memory"
is enabled and trigger (sampling) is set to short, this may cause the object to refresh the display
considerably slower.
In this case, set the writing interval to longer.
Set the head bit device to which the accumulation frequency/average value is written.
According to the data size (16bit/32bit) of the monitor device, the device range varies as follows.
Example: The device that has been set: n
Write contents
Accumulation frequency
Device
10 - 114
10.7 Scatter Graph

When setting 16 bit

(using 7 word)
When setting 32 bit

(using 14 word)
n,
n+1
Average value
n+1
n + 2,
n+3
Maximum
n+2
n + 4,
n+5
Minimum
n+3
n + 6,
n+7
Average value
n+4
n + 8,
n+9
Maximum
n+5
n + 10, n + 11
Minimum
n+6
n + 12, n + 13
9
dialog box.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Device/Scale
Attribute
Case/Trigger
Case
Extended
Items
Data Operation
13
Object Script
Description
Bit Mask
[Mask Pattern].
AND
Bit
OR
Operation
XOR
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
14

: Left shift
Right
: Right shift
DEBUG
Left
15
OTHERS
Data Operation
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10 - 115
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Shift
8 Object script tab

Section 16.3.6

Setting dialog box
Tab name
Object property
Setting item
Basic
Attribute
Extended
*1
Property name
Read
active
1)
4)
4)
Frame Color
frame_color
Plate Color
plate_color
4)
Color
graph_color
3)
Upper (X)
scale_max[0]
4)
Upper (Y)
scale_max[1]
4)
Lower (X)
scale_min[0]
4)
Lower (Y)
scale_min[1]
4)
Security
security
4)

Section 16.3.2
10 - 116
10.7 Scatter Graph

Write*1
10.7.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the scatter graph function.
PARTS

Up to 24 objects can be set for one screen.
(2) When using store memory
For the scatter graph with [Store Memory] set, up to 16 graph objects can be set in a whole project.
(3) Cautions when displaying superimpose window
Set the superimpose window not to overlap with a scatter graph.
The scatter graph area where the superimpose window is overlapped is not displayed.
Setting [Store Memory] enables full display of the scatter graph in such a case.
GRAPH, METER
10
12
RECIPE
The area overlapping with

superimpose window is also
displayed when [Store Memory] is set.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
Scatter graph is not

displayed fully when
[Store Memory] is not set.
15
OTHERS
Base screen
16
10.7 Scatter Graph

10.7.5 Precautions
10 - 117
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Superimpose
window
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
10.8 Historical Trend Graph
This function displays the device data collected by the logging function in trend graph in time sequence.
Usually, the collected data
is displayed in trend graph.
Display of the past data
Graph Update
Graph Update
Graph display range
Graph display range
Display of the latest data
Graph Update
Graph display range
Data collected by
the logging function
About historical trend graph

To use a historical trend graph, the logging function must be set in advance.
For the setting of the logging function, refer to the following.
Section 11.3 Logging Function
10 - 118

10.7.5 Precautions

System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For historical trend graph, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
11

As GOT may not display the overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen
Setting for
each project
Setting for
each screen
ACTIONS
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to the functions other than historical trend graph
PARTS
Auxiliary
setting
TRIGGER
data.
Coordinates error
Setting item
12
RECIPE
objects within GOT]
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

10 - 119
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
10.8.2 Required knowledge for historical trend graph setting

1 Relationships with logging function
(1) Contents displayed in historical trend graph
The historical trend graph displays the data collected by the logging function and stored in the
buffering area and/or memory card in graph.
To use the stored data, the present and past information can be displayed in graph.
Logging data
Displaying the stored data in graph
(2) The data collected by the logging function and displayed in historical trend graph
A historical trend graph can display the data set at only one logging ID.
To display multiple logging IDs, it is necessary to set multiple historical trend graphs.
2 Setting method of historical trend graph

The basic functions of historical trend graph are set on the following
to
tabs.
The following example explains the general procedure for setting historical trend graph.
Example: Historical trend graph for comparison between the planned and actual quantity
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Planned quantity (Graph 1)
: D10
Actual quantity (Graph 2)
: D11
Actual quantity
Planned quantity
Scale value
Vertical: Represents productivity.
Horizontal: Represents elapsed time.
Upper/lower limit
Sets the number of production.
10 - 120

1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, the upper and lower limit values, the number of points and the shape.
PARTS

1000
Points (6)
10
Direction (Right)
Shape
0
Displaying values that exceed the upper or lower limit value

When the value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit value, such
a value is displayed in the upper or lower limit value on the graph.
Lower limit value:
D10:1500
TRIGGER
Upper limit value: 1000
11
ACTIONS
Remark
GRAPH, METER
Upper/lower limit value

(Upper limit value: 1000, Lower limit value: 0)
12
0
D10:-50
2 Device tab
RECIPE
Set the device to be monitored and the line attribute.

Devices to be monitored (D10, D11)
13
1000
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Line attribute
(Graph color, line type, line width)
3 Scale tab
14
Set the scale and scale values of a graph.

100
50
DEBUG
0
3
Scale value
X (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 100)
Y (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 3)
15
OTHERS
Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
16

10 - 121
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1000
3 Useful information
The following explains the useful functions for using the historical trend graph.
(These functions are provided only for historical trend graph and setting them is not possible for trend
graph.)
(1) Displaying the cursor (
Section 10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation)
It is possible to display and move the cursor on the graph using the touch switch for which a key
code is assigned.
It is also possible to output the value of the device on which the cursor is displayed to other device.
(
Section 10.8.4
Device tab)
Graph display is stopped while the cursor is displayed.
D100
D120
D100 258
D120 231
(2) Displaying the grid (

Section 10.8.4
Scale tab)
It is possible to display the grid on the graph.
Without grid
With grid
(3) Displaying the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line (
Section 10.8.4
Extended
tab)
It is possible to display the lines that are used as reference, such as the upper limit and lower limit,
on the graph.
Without
With
Upper limit line
Reference line
Lower limit line
(4) Expanding / contracting the time axis (

Section 10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend
graph operation)
It is possible to expand or contract the time axis using the touch switch for which a key code is
assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the graph is expanded/contracted.
Expansion
10 - 122
10 15 20 25 30
Contraction
15
20
25
30

PARTS
(5) Outputting the time data to a device (

Section 10.8.4
Extended tab)
It is possible to output the beginning and end day/time of graph display and the day/time the cursor
is displayed using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the time data is output to a device.
10
GRAPH, METER
23:00
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
21:00
16

10 - 123
SCRIPT FUNCTION
19:00

Click
(Historical Trend Graph).
Select [Object]
[Graph]
[Historical Trend Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the historical trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 (After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using the ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged historical trend graph to display the setting dialog box.
3 Set with reference to the following explanation.
Easy setting method

Remark

D10

Shape
10 - 124

PARTS
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, display method and shape.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Number
of Pens
RECIPE
Basic
Description
Set the number of graphs to be displayed (1 to 32).
13
Set the number of points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Up to 1024 (3 to 1024) points can be set.

The space between point is automatically determined by the set number of points and the display range of X.
Example:
Points: 5
Points
14
View
Space between points = 20 dots
Format
DEBUG
X 100 dots
Select the direction for graph.
Elapsed time
Up
Elapsed
time
Elapsed time
Down
15
Elapsed
time
Monitored device value
Monitored device value
OTHERS
Direction
Left
Monitored
device
value
16

10 - 125
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Right
Monitored
device
value
Basic
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
Select the graph drawing mode (Pen Record / One by One).
Pen Record
: The present value is displayed at the opposite side of display direction.

When the graph moves beyond the display range, data is deleted from the older
one and the graph displays the latest data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
Direction
Drawing Mode
Present value
One by One
Present value
Present value
: The present value is displayed in the same side as the display direction.
When the graph moves beyond the display range, the graph presently displayed is
cleared and the graph is drawn starting from the succeeding data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]
Direction
Present value
Present value
Present value
Select the point type (Line / Point / Line+Point)
View Format
Point Type
(Line)
Data Size
(Point)
(Line+Point)
Select the data size (16 bits / 32 bits) of the word device.
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats word device value as a BCD (binary coded decimal) value.
Real
: Treats word device value as a floating point type real number. (Only when
selecting [32 bits] for [Data Size].
Select whether the device value range (Upper limit / Lower limit) for historical trend graph is set by fixed
Upper Limit
values or specified device values.

Fixed
: Set the fixed values as the upper and lower limit values.
Device
: Set the device values as the upper and lower limit values.
(
Lower Limit
The range that can be set by upper and lower limit values depends on [Data Size] and [Data Type] of the
device to be monitored.
Shape
selected as shape.
(
Frame
Format
Select the frame color / plate color of the shape.

Frame
Plate
Plate
Frame
10 - 126

Basic
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description

10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
15
OTHERS
Layer
16

10 - 127
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS

Category
2 Device tab
Set the device to be monitored and displayed in graph and the attribute (color / type) of graph.
Basic
Device
Scale Extended
Item
Description
Select the logging ID to be displayed in historical trend graph.
Logging ID
Selection is possible from logging ID and logging name.

Device
Select the setting method for [No. Logging Device]
Settings
Continuous
: The set continuous device points are set from head device automatically.
Random
: Set the devices one by one for the specified number of points.
Click on the item and the Device List dialog box is displayed.
In the device list dialog box, select the device to be displayed in graph from among the devices set for the
selected logging ID.
On a cell, the selected device and setting order of the logging device are displayed.
No. Logging
Device *1
Device
Setting order of the logging device
Represents the order the device is displayed in the
device list dialog box.
This allows the confirmation of the order number of
the device being set in the device list dialog box.
The number is conveniently used for confirming
the setting change.
Device
Select [Yes] / [No] for data operation.

Data Operation
When the selection is [Yes], click the right column and set the calculation expression.
(
Click on the item and the Line Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Line Attribute*2
Setting for the line attribute is allowed only when the setting for [Point Type] on the Basic tab is [Line] or
[Line+Point].
10 - 128

Device
Scale Extended
Item
Description
Click on the item and the Point Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Point
*2
Attribute
Graph
Information*3
Setting for the line attribute is allowed only when the setting for [Point Type] on the Basic tab is [Point] or
[Line+Point].
Click on the item and the Graph Information dialog box is displayed.
The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value, minimum
PARTS
Basic
10
value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
Device
GRAPH, METER
Check this item to display the graph in the step mode.
Step Mode
Graph display without Graph display with

Step Mode checked Step Mode checked
ACTIONS
11
Refer to the following for the details about *1 to *3.
TRIGGER
*1 No. Logging device

Displays the list of devices set for the selected logging ID.
Select the device to be used for historical trend graph.
A "*" symbol is displayed for the selected device.
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

10 - 129
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
*2 Line Attribute / Point Attribute

Displays the dialog box used for setting the line attribute / point attribute.
(1) Line attribute
Item
Description
Style
Select the line style of graph.
Width
Select the line width (1 to 7 dots) of graph.
Color
Select the line color of graph.
(2) Point attribute
Item
Type
10 - 130
Description
Select the point type of graph.
Size
Select the point size (Large / Medium / Small / Minimum / Point) of graph.
Color
Select the point color of graph.

*3 Graph information
PARTS
(1) About Graph Information dialog box

The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum
value, minimum value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
GRAPH, METER
10
When a device is set, the devices are automatically set for the following items consecutively.
Select the data type of the device value that stores the graph information.
: Treats device value as an unsigned 16-bit binary value.
Signed BIN32
: Treats device value as a signed 32-bit binary value.
Unsigned BIN32
: Treats device value as an unsigned 32-bit binary value.
BCD16
: Treats device value as a 16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value.
BC326
: Treats device value as a 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value.
Real
: Treats device value as a floating point type real number.
Cursor Position Data
Stores the device value where the cursor is displayed.
Maximum Data
Stores the maximum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Minimum Data
Stores the minimum value of the device displayed in the display range.
Average Data
Stores the average value of the device displayed in the display range.
RECIPE
: Treats device value as a signed 16-bit binary value.
Unsigned BIN16
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Data Type
12
Signed BIN16
Type to be selected for [Data Type]

Select the same type as the device type of the logging device. When the data type of
the logging device is bit, select any of signed BIN16, unsigned BIN16 and BCD16.
When the selected type differs from the device type of the logging device, system
alarm "307 Monitor device is not set" occurs and the graph information is not stored
in the device.
14
DEBUG
Device Data Storage
TRIGGER
Description
OTHERS
15
16

10 - 131
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Item
ACTIONS
11
(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

(a) Value storing timing
A value is stored in a device when the historical trend graph is operated by the touch switch for
the historical trend graph. (With exceptions of the timing at which the cursor is deleted or the
latest data is displayed.)
(b) The value to be stored
When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
Example: When storing the cursor displayed position value to a device
Displaying the cursor
Moving the cursor
100
75
100
75
50
50
25
0
25
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
This value is stored.
10 - 132

10 15 20 25 30
The data of the graph when the graph

drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.
This value is stored.
9
3 Scale tab
PARTS
Set the graph scale, graph frame and grid.
GRAPH, METER
10
Basic Device
Scale
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Extended
Item
Description
12
Set the scale and scale values to the historical trend graph.
Example:
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
50 500
400
50
300
25 300
25
200
0
200
0
0
0
Display of scales
10 15 20 25 30
Display of scale values
RECIPE
Scale
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0
0
13
10 15 20 25 30
Display by combining scales

and scale values
Up
0 3
Select the position at which the [Main Scale] and/or [Scale Value] setting
Axis Position
should be changed. (Left / Right / Up / Down)
Left
Different setting is possible for each axis position.
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
300
25
200
0
0
0
Right
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
0 3
500
400
10 15 20 25 30
14
Down

After checking, set at [Scale Points] (2 to 12) and [Color].
If the [Sub Scale] item is checked, sub scales are displayed between the set scales.
DEBUG
After checking, set at [Scale Points] (1 to 9) and [Color] for sub scale.
The scale intervals are automatically set according to the setting for [Scale Points].
Main Scale
15
Example: [Scale Points]: 4, [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale]: 5
OTHERS
With sub scales
16

10 - 133
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Without sub scales
Basic Device
Scale
Extended
Item
Description
After checking, set at [Value Number] (2 to 11), [Color], [Upper], [Lower], [Font] and [Size] (0.5 to 8).
For [Font], selection of the following items is possible.
The value that can be set for [Size] varis depending on the selected [Font].
Scale
Scale Value
6 x 8 dot
: 1 x 1 (fixed)
12dot Standard
: 1 x 1 to 8 x 8
16dot Standard
: 0.5 x 0.5 to 8 x 8
For details of each font and size, refer to the following.

(
Check these items to display the vertical/horizontal grid.

After checking, select the grid color.
Vertical Grid
Grid is displayed according to the setting of [Main Scale] and [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale].
When the setting is made for [Top] / [Bottom], and [Left] / [Right], the setting for [Bottom] and [Left] has priority.
Vertical grid
Horizontal grid
Horizontal Grid
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
10 - 134

9
4 Extended tab
PARTS
Set the security, graph assistance line, time device and cursor attribute.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display the Extended tab.
GRAPH, METER
10
Device
Scale
Extended
Item
12
Description
(
User ID*1
Set the user ID (1 to 65535) of historical trend graph.
Graph Assistance Line
Check the items to display the corresponding lines (reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line) on the
graph.
After checking an item, select whether the display position is set by a fixed value or a value of the specified
device.
Fixed
: A constant is displayed as the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line.
Device
: A value of the device is displayed as the reference line / upper limit line / lower limit line.
Reference Line
Upper Line
(
After that, set [Type], [Size] and [Color].
Each of the reference line, upper limit line and lower limit line is displayed according to the values set in
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] on the Basic tab.
Upper limit value 100
Upper limit line (80)
RECIPE
Security
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
14
Reference line (50)

Lower Line
Lower limit line (20)

0
DEBUG
Lower limit value

Time Device*2
(
Four points (Y/M, D/H, M/S, Day of week) of devices are set consecutively starting from the set device.
End Position Time

Cursor Attribute
15
OTHERS
Beginning
Position Time
Check the items to write the time of the cursor displayed position and the display range beginning/end
position time to a device. (The values are stored in BCD data.)
After checking an item, set the device where the time is stored.
Set the cursor attribute.
Type
Select the cursor line type.
Size
Select the cursor line width (1 to 7 dots).
Color
Select the cursor line color.
16
For details of *1 and *2, refer to the next page.

10 - 135
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Cursor Position
Time
*1 User ID
(1) When user ID setting is required
If more than one object that is operated using the switch of the same key code exists on the screen,
touching the switch may fail to call the intended operation.
In such a case, it is possible to assign an ID (user ID) to individual objects by setting the user ID so
that the ID (object) to be operated by the touch switch can be specified. Thus, intended switch
operation can be called by touching the touch switch.
When user ID is not set
When user ID is set
Historical
trend graph A
Historical
trend graph B
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
50
300
25
200
0
0
5
10 15 20 25 30
Historical
trend graph B
(User ID: 1)
(User ID: 2)
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
500
400
Historical
trend graph A
100
500
400
50
300
25
200
0
0
5
10
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
100
0
5
10
Display cursor
Display cursor
Display cursor
Display cursor
Hide cursor
Hide cursor
Hide cursor
Check Delete
Latest graph
Latest graph
Latest graph
Hide cursor
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A
(User ID: 1)
Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B
(User ID: 2)
Up
The touch switch that should be used for

historical trend graph A acts for historical
trend graph B.
Down
Even if the same key code is used, the target

of operation is specified by an ID, making it
possible to call the intended operation.
(2) Touch switch setting

Input the user ID, which has been set in this step, to the [User ID for a key input] item in the Key
Code Switch dialog box.
For details of key code switch, refer to the following.
(
Touch switch setting (Action tab)
Set the user ID that has been set for an object.
10 - 136

*2 Time devices
D103
(Year)
(Month)
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Day)
(Hour)
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Minute)
(Second)
B15 to b8
B7 to b0
(Not used)
(Day of week)
10
GRAPH, METER
D102
B7 to b0
(0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)
To monitor the devices above by numerical display.

To monitor the devices above by numerical display, conduct mask processing as shown below
using the data operation function. (
For the data type of Numerical Display (Extended tab), set [BCD] since a value is stored in BCD
data.
11
ACTIONS
D101
B15 to b8
TRIGGER
D100
PARTS
(1) How the data is stored in the time devices

Time data is stored in upper and lower 8 bits of the set devices.
Example: When D100 is set.
12
Example: Setting example of numerical display (Data Operation tab)
RECIPE
Displaying "year" (upper 8 bits)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for lower 8 bits
(b7 to b0) of D100.
14
DEBUG
Displaying "month" (lower 8 bits)
15
OTHERS
In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for upper 8 bits
(b15 to b8) of D100.

10 - 137
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

(a) Value storing timing
A value is stored to a device at the timing indicated below.
When the cursor is displayed on the graph.
When the displayed cursor is moved.
During the display of the cursor, when the historical trend graph is operated using a touch
switch.
(b) The value to be stored
When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
Example: When storing the time to a device
Displaying the cursor
100
75
100
75
50
50
25
0
25
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.
10 - 138
Moving the cursor

The data of the graph when the graph

drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.
0
10 15 20 25 30
The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.
10
GRAPH, METER
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation may be read out from the library of GT
Designer2.
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be created by the user by setting a key
code to a touch switch.
PARTS
10.8.5 Touch switches for historical trend graph operation
ACTIONS
11
Description
Shows / hides the cursor.
Show Cursor
12
The cursor is displayed at the center of the graph.

FFF0H
FFF1H
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
RECIPE
Hide cursor
Show
Cursor
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Displays the cursor.

Moves the cursor in the direction toward the new / past data.
Cursor
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
Cursor Next
FFF2H
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
14
10 15 20 25 30
Moves the cursor

toward the new data.
New data side
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
Cursor Previous
FFF3H
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
DEBUG
Cursor
15
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Moves the cursor toward

the old data.
Old data side
OTHERS
Key code
16

10 - 139
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Touch switch
TRIGGER
Touch switches used for historical trend graph operation
Touch switch
Key code
Description
Moves the graph right and left
Graph Next
Graph
FFF4H
0 3
Graph Previous
FFF5H
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph

Graph Next Page
New data side
Graph
Scroll
FFF6H
0 3
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Page Scroll
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
Graph Previous
0 3
500
400
FFF7H
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Scrolls the graph

New data side
Displays the latest data.

Latest Data
FFEFH
0 3
Latest
Data
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
0 3
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Displays the latest data.
Time Axis
Expands (2 times) or reduces (1/2 times) the time axis of the graph taking the axis of the new data
Expansion
FFF8H
as the reference.
0 3
Time Axis
Reduction
FFF9H
Zoom
In
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
12
15
18
21
24
500
400
50
500
400
50
300
25
300
25
200
0
200
0
0
10 15 20 25 30
Reference
10 - 140
6 9 12 15 18 21 24
500
400
0
15
Zoom
Out

20
25
30
10.8.6 Precautions
PARTS

(1) Maximum number of historical trend graphs that can set for one project
Setting is possible for up to 32 points.
Upper limit line
Lower limit line

Upper limit line
Reference line
Reference line
ACTIONS
(4) Setting [Graph Assistance Line] by a device

Since the graph assistance lines are displayed only for reference, abnormal state such that the
lower limit value exceeds the upper limit value or the upper limit value becomes smaller than the
lower limit value does not cause an error.
11
TRIGGER
(3) Changing the set logging device or using the data of other project
If the set logging device is changed or the data of other project data is used after setting the
historical trend graph, consistency between the device set for logging and the device in historical
trend graph may be lost.
In such a case, it is necessary to set the device for historical trend graph again.
The historical trend graph is not displayed unless the device type agrees with each other.
GRAPH, METER
10
(2) Maximum number of historical trend graphs that can be arranged (set) for one screen
Arrangement (setting) is possible for up to 8 points.
12
RECIPE
Lower limit line
(5) Devices set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information]

For devices to be set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information], use GOT internal devices.
If a device of a controller is specified, monitoring speed may be lowered.
(6) Logging setting when historical trend graph is used
When historical trend graph is used, setting for [Number of Logs a File] (
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab) in logging setting must be larger than a value set for [Points] (
Section 10.8.4
Basic tab) of historical trend graph.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
When historical trend graph is used, install the Option OS (Logging) to the GOT.

When historical trend graph is used, mount the option function board to the GOT.
15

10.8.6 Precautions
10 - 141
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(1) Differences in display speed from trend graph

The historical trend graph monitors the data collected by the logging function via the buffering area
/ memory card.
Accordingly, the data display speed is reduced from that of trend graph which directly monitors the
controller devices.
OTHERS
(2) Actions during logging data processing

While the logging data is being stored to a memory card, display of historical trend graph stops until
the storing processing finishes.
(3) Operation using a touch switch
If any of the operations below is performed using a touch switch, graph drawing is stopped.
Show cursor, Hide cursor and Cursor Next, Cursor Previous
Graph Previous, Graph Next, Graph Previous Page Scroll, Graph Next Page Scroll
Time Axis Expansion, Time Axis Reduction
The graph, for which drawing has been stopped, is drawn again when the Latest Data (FFEFH)
switch is touched.
(4) About logging files
(a) Do not delete a logging file in the midst from the logging files stored with serial numbers assigned.
The data in the midst will be lost.
(b) When displaying the past information, it may take much time.
(5) When using the security function
Pay attention to the following when using the security function.
(a) When setting to store the status of the cusor position to a device
If the historical trend graph becomes to be hidden due to changing of the security level, the
device value at the cursor position is retained as it is. (only when the cursor is displayed.)
(b) When the historical trend graph becomes to be displayed due to changing of the secarity level
If the status of the historical trend graph is changed from hide to display due to security level
change, "0" is stored to the device.
To store the cursor position status to the device, display the cursor again.
(6) When the set overlay screen function or a window screen is used
When multiple historical trend graphs, having the same setting, are displayed due to the set overlay
screen function or the display of a window screen, the displayed contents may not be
synchronized.
It is recommend not to display multiple historical trend graphs having the same setting by using the
security function above.
10 - 142

10.8.6 Precautions
ACTIONS
PARTS
11. TRIGGER
10
GRAPH, METER
11.1 Status Observation Function
TRIGGER
Condition
satisfied
11
ACTIONS
This function enables operations such as turning a device ON/OFF and writing a value when the specified
conditions are satisfied.
Write
RECIPE
12
13
1 Settable conditions
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Up to 2 settings are available for the following conditions.

Bit device ON/OFF
The range specification of word device values
2 Write or other operations allowed when conditions are satisfied

Turning ON a bit device when the condition is satisfied
Turning ON/OFF a bit device
Reversing a bit device status
Writing a value into a word device
DEBUG
14
3 Types of status observation functions

The status observation functions can be set with the following two types of monitoring methods
Status observation common to the entire project
As the specified condition is satisfied, devices are always monitored.
Status monitor for each screen
As the specified condition is satisfied, devices are monitored only when GOT displays the
corresponding screen
OTHERS
15
16
11 - 1
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For status observation function, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this
section.
(1) Functions relevant to status observation function only
Relevant to status observation function only.
(1) Functions relevant to status observation function only

Base Screen Initial Scan Complete Signal
Keeps ON during one cycle from the switching of the
Keeps ON during a cycle from the switching of the base
base/window screen to the completion of object
screen to the completion of object processing for status
processing for status monitoring on the screen.
monitoring on the screen.
A 1254 A 1254
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
B 348 B 348
Turns ON/OFF repeatedly for each communication cycle
11 - 2
Base Screen Initial Scan Complete Signal

11.1.2 Settings
PARTS
[Status Observation] from the menu.
2 The setting dialog box will appear. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on

space.
on the project work
GRAPH, METER
10
When making the setting on the project work space
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
16

11.1.2 Settings
11 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

Project tab.....Setting the status observation function common to the entire project
Screen tab.....Setting the status observation function for each screen
Items
Description
Select a screen for setting the status observation function.
Screen Type
Then select a screen No.
(for Screen tab only)
Base Screen
:Select this when setting the status observation function on a base screen.
Window Screen
:Select this when setting the status observation on a window screen.
Screen No.
Set the screen No. where the status observation function is set.
(for Screen tab only)
Click on the Browse button to confirm the screen image.
List of Status Observation

Function data
Displays status observation function data (Trigger/Action)

Adds new status observation function data.
Setting of up to 512 data is available
Click on this button, and a dialog box for setting trigger/action appears.
Add
(
This section
Trigger/Action dialog box
The device NW No. and station No. set in trigger must be set as the same when setting plural status
observation function data.
Changes the selected status observation function data.
Edit
Click on the button, and a dialog box for setting trigger/ action appears.
(
Copy
This section
Trigger/Action dialog box
Copies the selected status observation function data.
Paste
Pastes the copied status observation function data to the end of the list.
Delete
Deletes the selected status observation function data.

Select the observation cycle for the status observation function.
Ordinary
: The status of the device set from the Trigger tab is monitored when END processing is
Sampling
: The status of the device set from the Trigger tab is monitored at the set sampling cycle
Observe Cycle
completed of the sequence program scan time/link scan time.

(1 to 60 s).
11 - 4

9
1 Trigger/Action dialog box
PARTS
(1) Trigger tab

Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Action
Description
Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.
Up to 2 triggers can be set. (Setting 1 trigger only is allowed)
In the case of 2 triggers, when both of triggers are satisfied, the status observation function is executed.
Trigger1/Trigger2
ON
: Operation is executed when bit device turns ON.
OFF
: Operation is executed when bit device turns OFF.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Word range : Operation is executed when the word device value is within the set range.
After setting the trigger, assign the device that is used as a trigger.
In the case of a word device, set the data size, data type and specified range of values.
Data Size
14
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats the word device value as a BCD value.
Real
: Treats the word device value as real number.

DEBUG

Set the word device value range for trigger conditions.
of Word Device
Value
To the word device value, set the [operator] in the left, and the [fixed value] in the right.
Example:
[<],
[100]......
15
Executes operation when the word device value is less than 100.
[==], [100]......
Executes operation when the word device value is equal to 100.
[! =], [100]......
Executes operation when the word device value is not equal to 100.

OTHERS
Specified Range
RECIPE
Items
16

11 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Trigger
Trigger
Action
Items
Delete
(Only for Trigger2)
Offset
Trigger1/
(Only allowed in
Trigger2
setting of status
observation
11 - 6
Description
Deletes the set data of Trigger2.
(
function for each
screen)
Data size is fixed as 16 bits.

PARTS
(2) Action tab

Setting the action data for the status observation function
GRAPH, METER
10
Trigger
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Action
Items
12
Description
Storing Device
: Momentary triggers the bit device ON for an instance.
SET
: The bit device is turned ON
RST
: The bit device is turned OFF
ALT
: The current bit device status is inverted (OFF
Data SET (16bit)
: Writes a value into the word device (16bit).
Data SET (32bit)
: Writes a value into the word device (32bit).
ON).
13
Set the target device that will result from the action type when the status observation function trigger is
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Action
Momentary
RECIPE
Type of action settings for the status observation function.
satisfied.
Set the number of action devices (Points) when the trigger is satisfied.
The maximum points of devices depend on the setting of [Action].
Points
Momentary, SET, RST, ALT : 40 points

DataSET(16bit)
: 20 points.
DataSET(32bit)
: 10 points.
14
Select the data type in which data are written into devices when [DataSET (16bit)]/[DataSET (32bit)] is set in
[Action].
Unsigned BIN
BCD
: Treats the word device value as a BCD value.
Real
DEBUG
Signed BIN
15
OTHERS
16

11 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Data
Trigger
Action
Items
Description
Select the device setting methods
Device Settings
Continuous : Select this item to set the specified number of devices continuously and starting from the
set device automatically
Random
: Select this item to randomly set the specified number of devices.
Check this item to enable writing other word device value into this word device when the trigger is satisfied.
Storing
Indirect *1
When 2 or more points are set in [Points], select the action (FMOV/BMOV) of the word device to which the
current value is written.
Device
Set the target device for when the trigger is satisfied.

Device
Setting of the head devices will automatically set the subsequent devices when [Continuous] is set in
[Device Settings] and [Indirect].
When [Random] is set, click on each column to set the device.
Fixed *1
Check this item to enable writing a fixed value into the word device when the trigger is satisfied.
For details about *1, refer to the following.
* 1 Fixed and Indirect

If [Fixed] and [Indirect] are set, the fixed value or other word device value can be written into the preset
device.
Both of the [Fixed] and [Indirect] settings can be set concurrently.
(1) Fixed
(2) Indirect
Write fixed value(50) into D100 when trigger is satisfied.
11 - 8

Write value of D200 into D100 when trigger is satisfied.
(3)Fixed + Indirect
PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
When 2 or more setting device points are set under the indirect setting (as shown in above (2), (3)), select
the write action to the device. (When [Fixed] is set, the fixed value is added to the written value.)
FMOV :When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current value of the word device specified in [Indirect] to
the set device.
BMOV :When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current values of multiple word devices specified in
[Indirect] to the set device.
(2) BMOV
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(1) FMOV
12
RECIPE
Write value of D200 + fixed (50) into D100

when trigger is satisfied.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
When trigger is satisfied, writes values of D200

to D204 into D100 to D104 respectively.
16

11 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When trigger is satisfied, writes D200 value

into D100 to D104.
11.1.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using status observation function.

(1) Maximum number of objects that may be set on one project 512 objects can be set for the status
observation function.
(2) Maximum number of objects that may be set on one project 512 objects can be set for the status
observation function.
(3) The maximum number of write action data
Momentary, RST, SET, ALT
: 40
DataSET (16bit)
: 20
DataSET (32bit)
: 10
(4) Cautions for setting

When data size exceeds 64 k bytes, even if number of status observation is smaller than 512, no
more status observation can be set.
Change the settings to make the data size less than 64k bytes.
(5) When the setting of the observe cycle is not correct, (e.g. incomplete data collection owing to timing
delay)
And the object with the offset function specified is set on the screen, trigger device monitored in the
status observation function will be delayed.
If this happens, the observe cycle setting may not function normally owing to data collection
omission resulting form timing delay.
Set the observe cycle to [Ordinary] to execute normal data collection.
(6) Trigger device

The status of the device executing the status observation function (trigger device) must be held for
the time of the status observation cycle or longer.
11 - 10

11.1.4 Precautions
PARTS
11.2 Time Action Function
GRAPH, METER
10
This function performs any of the following actions
to
when the set day of week/time of day is
reached.
The operations are based on the day of the week and time of the GOT.
1 Turns bit device ON/OFF.

Start time
End time
ON
OFF
ON
TRIGGER
OFF
ACTIONS
11
12
2 Writes value to word device.

End time
Write the set value
Write the set value
100
RECIPE
Start time
Designated bit device is turned ON on Monday
Values are written on word devices at the designated
mornings and turned OFF on Friday evenings.
time every day.
Make settings on Time tab, Action tab.

Monday Mornings
Friday Evenings
M10
M10 is turned ON.
M10 is turned OFF.
10:00
15:00
D10
100
"100" is written to D10.
14
D10
200
"200" is written to D10.
DEBUG
M10
Make settings on Time tab, Action tab.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
11.2.1 Settings
15
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark
16

space.
OTHERS
[Time Action] from the menu.
in the project work

11.2.1 Settings
11 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

Set the action, start time and end time for the time action.
Items
Delete
Delete All
Edit *1
Description
Time action setting will be deleted by clicking on the Delete button after selecting the time action to be
deleted on the list.
All the time action settings will be deleted by clicking the Delete All button.
Time action setting is available by clicking on the Edit button after clicking (selecting) the No. of the row to
be set/edited on the list.
For details about *1, refer to the next page.
11 - 12

*1 Edit settings
PARTS
Time tab
Set the day-of the-week and time when the time action function is to be used.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Items
Description
Daily
: Time action is executed only on the specified day-of-the-week/time.
Through
: Time action is executed continuously for the specified number of days.
RECIPE
Set the mode type for the time action function.
Select the day-of-the-week and time when the time action function starts/ends.
Start
: Set the day/time when the time action starts.
End
: Set the day/time when the time action ends.
Start/End
13
When the mode is set as [Daily], multiple days can be set.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Only when the mode is set as [Through], the day-of-the-week setting is available.
Setting the same time action twice a week

When Through is set, a single action only can be executed once in a week.
To set a single action executed twice a week by Through, please set the time
function with different start/end time twice ( Mode of [Time] tab: set in Day).
14
Turn M0 ON in AM of Monday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Tuesday (Set this in

time action1)
No action on Wednesday
Turn M0 ON in AM of Thursday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Friday (Set this in time
action2)
Monday
Wednesday Thursday
M0 OFF
M0 ON
15
Friday
M0 OFF
OTHERS
M0 ON
Tuesday
DEBUG
Mode
When actual day-of-the-week does not match the date controlled by controller
Even if the day-of-the-week data of the PLC CPU is incorrect, GOT will calculate the
correct day of the week from the date data of the PLC CPU and execute the time
action function on the day.

11 - 13
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
Action tab
Set the condition trigger executing the time action function.
Items
Description
Check this item to turn bit device ON/OFF at the start/end time.
Bit
Set the bit device to be turned ON/OFF.

Check this item to write the specified value to word device.
Word
Set the word device to which the value is written.

Select the data type of the word device for value write.
Data Type
Signed BIN
Unsigned BIN
BCD
Real

11 - 14
Data Size
Start Write Value
Set the value to be written to the specified word device at the start time.
End Write Value
Set the value to be written to the specified word device the at end time.

11.2.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the time action function.
PARTS

(1) Number of time actions that can be set in one project
Up to 32 time actions can be set in the time action function.
(2) Precautions for multiple time action function settings
Do not set different time actions to the same day-of-the-week and time. Otherwise GOT may work
abnormally.
GRAPH, METER
10
11

(2) During operation of time action function
Note that changing the GOT's built-in clock time or any preset device status may affect the time
action behavior.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
(1) Clock function

For the precautions and restrictions about the clock function, refer to the following
12
Example1: When the set bit device (M0) is turned ON before the time action is executed
The action is not executed at the time set by the time action function
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
RECIPE
9:00
ON
M0 device status
OFF
Action set by time action function
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
ON
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OFF
16

11.2.3 Precautions
11 - 15
SCRIPT FUNCTION
8:00
Example2: When the GOT's built-in clock time is changed

The action is executed at the next start time.
It will not be executed if the change is made after the start/end action time.
The probable causes of why times set by the clock are changed are described below.
Times may be changed with "clock setting" of Utilities function (Time Notification
setting).
Time of the GOT clock synchronizes with that of controller when "Clock data GOT is
matched to clock data External" is checked on Clock Settings of GT Designer2.
Times may be changed by GOT's internal devices from GS513 to GS516.
Start action : 8:00 D0=100
End action : 17:00 D0=200
GOT's clock time is
changed from 10:00 to 7:00.
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
8:00
7:00
Writes 100 to D0.
GOT's clock time is

changed from 10:00 to 20:00.
9:00
10:00
21:00
20:00
Writes 100 to D0
Since 17:00 is not identified,
200 is not written to D0.
11 - 16

11.2.3 Precautions
PARTS
11.3 Logging Function
The logging function collects and stores device values of a controller at an arbitrary timing or in specified
intervals.
The collected data can be displayed in either of the methods shown below.
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Displaying the collected data using the historical trend graph (

Section 10.8 Historical Trend Graph)
Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in a CSV file / Unicode text file
GRAPH, METER
10
12
Logging data
RECIPE
250
260
270
280
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
100
98
95
92
14
DEBUG
150
152
158
170
LINE 2
15
OTHERS
2005/07/01 10:30:00
2005/07/01 10:30:10
2005/07/01 10:30:20
2005/07/01 10:30:30
LINE 1 LINE 2
16
11 - 17
SCRIPT FUNCTION
DAY / TIME

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For the logging function, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to the functions other than the logging function
Confirm the relevant functions when setting.
Section 2.9.1
(1) Functions relevant to the functions other than the logging function
Buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)
Saves the data in the buffering area to a memory card. *1
Buffering
area
*1
When setting to not save the data to memory card (setting for [Buffer Save] in the logging setting is [No]), the
logging data in the buffering area is not saved to a memory card.
11 - 18

11.3.2 Before setting logging

Settings to use the logging function and the details of the function are explained below.
PARTS
1 Logging mode
There are two logging modes as below.
10
Logging mode
Item
High speed operated logging and high speed
Saves large-quantity logging data.
operated display of historical trend graph
Saves the data in the buffering area temporarily

Save location of the collected
and then saves it to a memory card.
data
For a file name, a number (in the range of 0001
11
temporarily. *2
ACTIONS
*1
To be selected from the following.

memory card.
Further logging data is not taken into the

buffering area.
TRIGGER
*3
Logging data is deleted from older data.

File format for saving
Application of logging data
saved in a memory card
Binary format file (*.G1L) *4

To display the collected data
Binary format file (*.G1L) *4

To be used as the backup data of the buffering
*1
When the number of logs being stored in a file exceeds the set value, a new file is automatically created.
*2
It is possible to save the logging data to a memory card as the backup of the buffering area in the event of power
It is set at [Number of Logs a File] in the logging setting. (
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)
failure.
(
This section
(2) (b) Saving the collected data)
*3
The allowable maximum number of logs that can be temporarily saved in the buffering area is set at [Log Storage
*4
The logging data may also be saved in a CSV file / Unicode text file to be displayed on a personal computer.
Number] in the logging setting. (
This section
Section 11.3.4
12
area in the event of power failure
(1) Basic tab)
(2) Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in a CSV
file / Unicode text file)
13
14
15
OTHERS
(1) File save mode

The file save mode is used for saving the collected logging data in a memory card.
When a file becomes full, another file is automatically created to save large quantity of logging
data.
The file save mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
To save large quantity of logging data
To save the logging data in multiple files. The number of logs to be stored in a file is set and when
the number of stored logs exceeds the set value and new file is created. (Example: Creating a
file after collecting the data for a day)
RECIPE
area is full
Saves the logging data in the buffering area to a
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Processing when the buffering
DEBUG
to 9999) is automatically appended.
Saves the data in the buffering area only
16

11 - 19
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Application
Buffer historical mode

GRAPH, METER
File save mode
(a) Data collection flow

When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value
of a controller is colleted and taken into the buffering area.
User area
(C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
100
50
Logging
data
0
0
-1
-2
-3
Displayed in the historical trend graph.
Saved in a memory card.

LOG00001_0002.G1L
LOG00001_0001.G1L
No. of Logs
1
2
3
65500
Time
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00
Line 1 Line 2
150
174
196
300
312
305
2005/7/1 22:09:00 215
320
No. of Logs
1
2
3
Time
2005/7/2 9:00:00
2005/7/2 9:01:10
2005/7/2 9:02:00
Line 1 Line 2
140
145
150
302
317
307
One file can store up to 65500 logs.

If the number of logs in a file exceeds the value set for [Number of Logs a File], a new file is
automatically created to save the data.
Up to 9999 files can be created.
1 When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is collected and
taken into the buffering area.
2 Logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area is saved to a memory card.
3 Using the collected logging data, displays as indicated below are possible.
Display by historical trend graph
Display on a personal computer by saving the data in a CSV file / Unicode text file
11 - 20

Number] of the logging setting. (
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)
When [Log Storage Number] setting is "10"
Buffering area
Logging
data
10
Time
No. of Logs
Line 1 Line 2
1
2
3
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:00
2005/7/1 9:02:00
150
174
196
350
348
353
10
2005/7/1 9:09:00
215
349
GRAPH, METER
User area
PARTS
(b) Saving the collected data

When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data having been saved in the buffering
area is automatically saved to a memory card.
The number of logs that are temporarily saved in the buffering area is set for [Log Storage
If the buffering area becomes full, the logging data having been
saved in the buffering area is automatically saved to a memory card.
After the logging data is saved in a memory card, the logging data in the buffering area is automatically
cleared and logging restarts.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
User area
No. of Logs
Time
Line 1
Line 2
RECIPE
Buffering area
Logging
data
(1) To save the logging data at desired timing

Use either of the following setting.
After saved, the logging data is cleared from the buffering area.
Section 11.3.2
14
(1)(d) File
[Store Trigger] in the logging setting (

Section 11.3.4
(3) File save tab)
(2) When the logging data is already stored in the file
The logging data to be saved is appended to the logging data already stored in
the file.
15
Device for notifying processing
This section
OTHERS
File saving processing can be notified using a device.

(3) Writing notification device)
16

11 - 21
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
DEBUG
[File Terminal Trigger] in the logging setting (

creation timing (File Terminal Trigger))
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Logging data in the buffering area is
automatically cleared and logging restarts.
(c) File creation timing (when the buffering area is full)

When the number of collected logs reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File] in the
logging setting, a file is created automatically to save the successive data. (
11.3.4
Section
(1) Basic tab)
Example: When [Number of Logs a File] setting is "30"

(Temporary file)
LOG00001_0000.G1L
Time
No. of Logs
1
2
3
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00
Line 1
Line 2
150
174
196
256
255
254
Logging
data
20
2005/7/1 9:19:00
215
Appended
to the existing data
250
Time
No. of Logs
Buffering area is full.
Line 1
Line 2
1
2
2005/7/1 9:20:00
2005/7/1 9:21:00
205
211
216
217
10
11
2005/7/1 9:29:00
2005/7/1 9:30:00
230
231
217
220
20
2005/7/1 9:39:00
250
210
When the number of logs in the temporary file

reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File],
the data is saved in a file (No. 0001 to No. 9999).
File to be created
LOG00001_0001.G1L
(Temporary file)
LOG00001_0000.G1L
No. of Logs
Time
Line 1
Line 2
2005/7/1 9:30:00
231
220
10
2005/7/1 9:39:00
250
210
No. of Logs
Time
Line 1
Line 2
1
2
3
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00
150
174
196
256
255
254
20
21
22
2005/7/1 9:19:00
2005/7/1 9:20:00
2005/7/1 9:21:00
215
205
211
250
216
217
30
2005/7/1 9:29:00
230
217
1 When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data in the buffering area is
automatically saved to a memory card (appended to the existing data).
2 The data is saved in a temporary file (file No. 0000).
3 When the number of logs saved in the temporary file reaches the value set for [Number
of Logs a File], the data in the temporary file is saved in a file (file No. 0001 to 9999).
When setting to save a CSV file / Unicode file at the same time
A CSV file / Unicode text file is created at the timing of
The file is not created at the timing of
above.
above.
For a CSV file / Unicode text file, refer to the following.

This section
memory card
11 - 22

(2) (a) Creating a file when saving the logging data to a
(d) File creation timing (File Terminal Trigger)

Use [File Terminal Trigger] in the logging setting to save the data at a desired timing by
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic
PARTS
creating a file independent of the saved number of logs. (

tab)
Time
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00
Line 1
Line 2
150
174
196
256
255
254
Not appended
Logging
data
2005/7/1 9:19:00
215
250
Line 1
Line 2
1
2
2005/7/1 9:20:00
2005/7/1 9:21:00
205
211
216
217
10
11
2005/7/1 9:29:00
2005/7/1 9:30:00
230
231
217
220
20
2005/7/1 9:39:00
250
210
11
ON
ACTIONS
[File Terminal Trigger]: OFF
1
2
3
Time
2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00
Line 1
Line 2
150
174
196
256
255
254
TRIGGER
(File to be created)
LOG00001_0001.G1L
No. of Logs
10
12
2005/7/1 9:19:00
215
250
1 The logging data in the temporary file (file No. 0000) is saved in a file (file No. 0001 to
9999) when [File Terminal Trigger] is turned ON independent of the number of logs
saved in the buffering area.
RECIPE
20
13
The file number returns to "0001".
The logging data to be saved overwrites the data in the file (file No. 0001) and the
existing data in the file is deleted.
If the file must not be overwritten, save the file in the memory card to other location.
14
If [Number of Files] is "12"

LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L
LOG00001_0012.G1L
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
When the number of files exceeds the set number of files
Creation
of a file
File contents are overwritten.

LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L
LOG00001_0012.G1L
15
OTHERS
20
Time
No. of Logs
Buffering area
DEBUG
1
2
3
16

11 - 23
SCRIPT FUNCTION
No. of Logs
GRAPH, METER
(Temporary file)
LOG00001_0000.G1L
(2) Buffer historical mode

The buffer historical mode retains the logging data only in the buffering area to display the data in
historical trend graph on GOT at high speed.
The buffer historical mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
To execute high speed logging and high speed display of historical trend graph
Cases where saving of large quantity of data is not necessary
(a) Data collection flow
When the logging trigger condition is
established, the device value of a controller
is colleted and taken into the buffering area.
User area
Buffering area
Logging
data
Displayed in the historical trend graph.
1 When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is
colleted and temporarily taken into the buffering area.
2 The logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area is displayed in historical trend
graph.
3
(b) Saving the collected data
If the logging data is saved in a memory card, the logging data is read out from the memory
card to be restored when the GOT is turned on. (Restoration is automatically executed.)
The buffer historical mode is used to retain the logging data even when power failure occurs.
Memory card
Saves
data.
The timing to save the data to memory card can be set as desired.
(Rising / Falling / None / Sampling / ON Sampling / OFF Sampling)
The data can be saved using the touch switches.
AAABBBCC
AAABBBCC
AAABBBCC
AAABBBCC
DDDEEEFF
DDDEEEFF
Power turned OFF
Status saved before

turning the power OFF
Present status
Power turned ON
Displays the status before turning the power OFF
and also the status after turning the power ON.
It is also used to save the data in a memory card due to filled capacity of the buffering area.
It is set at [Buffer Save] of the logging setting. (
11 - 24

Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)
Device]. (
Section 11.3.4
(4) Extended tab)
Other setting items are provided to enable the operations as below.
To give notification before the buffering area becomes full using [Buffer Full Alert Capacity]
Section 11.3.4
11
TRIGGER
(
Section 11.3.4
(3) File save tab)
To select the processing when the buffering area is full using [Action When Buffer is Full]
GRAPH, METER
(c) When the buffering area becomes full

When the number of logging data saved in the buffering area reaches the value set for [Log
Storage Number] of the logging setting, this state can be notified using [Full Notification Signal
10
ACTIONS
When restore the logging data by reading it out from a memory card, insert the
memory card to the GOT before turning ON for the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned ON, the logging data can not be restored by reading out the
data from the memory card.
Also when the memory card is inserted after turning ON, the logging data in the
memory card is overwritten at saving its data to memory card.
PARTS
Precautions for starting up the GOT
(1) Basic tab)
Buffering
area full
notification:
ON
13
Delete
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Save
Buffering area full notification OFF
If the buffering area full notification signal turns ON,

the logging data in the buffering area is saved to memory card. *1
The trigger for saving the logging data is set for [Store Trigger] in the logging setting. (
Section 11.3.4
14
(3) File save tab)
Clearing the buffering area without saving the logging data
Section 11.3.4
(4) Extended tab)
15
Buffering
area full
notification:
Save
Buffering area full notification OFF
ON
OTHERS
DEBUG
Use [Buffer Historical Data Clear] to clear the logging data in the buffering area.
Delete
16
Clears the logging data in the buffering area.

11 - 25
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
RECIPE
12
2 Setting the devices for data collection structurally

The logging function can manage multiple logging in one logging setting by using in units of logging IDs
and blocks.
32767
Max. 32 IDs
No. 100
Logging ID 1No. 10
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Max. 250 blocks

Max. number of device points
is 250 (total of all blocks)
(total of all blocks)
The following explains logging ID and block

(1) About logging IDs
Logging ID indicates a number that distinguishes the logging setting.
It is also used to specify the data that is displayed in historical trend graph.
(a) Setting example
Logging ID is set in the Basic tab of [Logging Setting].
(
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)

Logging ID
(b) Setting of logging IDs

Setting range of logging ID is 1 to 32767.
Note that the number of allowable logging settings is 32.
11 - 26

PARTS
(2) For the block

The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block enables to perform the following settings.
Setting that multiple device types (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting
(a) Setting example
The following explains an example of setting that bit devices and word devices (singed BIN16
Section 11.3.4
(2) Device tab)

GRAPH, METER
and signed BIN32) exist in one logging setting. (
10
Set [Device], [Device Type], [Point] and

[File Output Attribute] for each block.
Specify the number of blocks.
11
ACTIONS
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
TRIGGER
Block 4
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
(1) For max. No. of device points

For each logging setting, the allowable maximum number of device points is 250
points in total.
One device is counted as 1 point, regardless of word device or bit device.
For 32-bit devices, however, 1 device is counted as 2 points.
(2) Number of device points in multiple block setting
When multiple blocks are set, it is a total for device points of all blocks.
Example)
In the case of block 1: 30 points, block 2: 70 points and block 3: 120 points
The number of device points in this setting is counted as 220 points (30 + 70 +
120).
(3) When setting random device numbers
One point of device number can be set in one block.
Therefore, setting must be made in different blocks to set random device
numbers.
(4) When the device type is bit
The device that can be set in a block is 1 point (fixed).
RECIPE
12
(b) Max. number of block

Max. 250 block settings can be set in one logging setting.

11 - 27
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
3 Controlling the logging by device or sampling

Execution of logging can be controlled by device or sampling (Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, OFF
Sampling).
It is set at [Logging Trigger] in the logging setting. (
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)
4 Outputting the logging status to a device

The status of logging can be output to a device.
This feature can prevent problems in logging such as missing of logging data.
Since a device can be set for each logging ID, outputting the process status by logging ID is possible.
(1) File terminal notification device (file save mode only)
[File Terminal Trigger] notifies that collection of device values is interrupted.
When the signal is ON, device value collection is interrupted.
Have the logging trigger established when the signal is OFF.
ON
Logging trigger
OFF
Collecting the device

value to the buffering
area
Collecting
Saving the logging data

to memory card
Collecting
Collecting
Saving
ON
[File Terminal Trigger]
OFF
ON
[File Terminal Notification

Device]
OFF
*1
Device value collection is not executed while the logging data is being saved.
The established trigger condition is ignored.
(2) Logging notification device

The device notifies that device values of a controller are being collected to the buffering area.
While this signal is ON, device value collection is not executed even if the logging trigger is
established.
Have the logging trigger established when the signal is OFF.
When [Trigger Type] of [Logging Trigger] is [Rising]
Logging trigger
OFF
Collecting the device

value to the buffering
area
Collecting
Collecting
Collecting
ON
[Logging Notification
Device]
OFF
The logging notification device goes OFF in the state the logging
trigger is not established and the device value collection processing
has completed.
11 - 28

10
GRAPH, METER
(4) Writing error notification device

The device notifies that an error occurred while the logging data was written to a memory card.
The writing error notification device is not automatically turned OFF even if the error state is
released. Therefore the device must be turned OFF by the user.
If the signal turns ON, check the following.
Is the CF card access switch of GOT main unit is ON?
Is the memory card free of errors?
PARTS
(3) Writing notification device

The device notifies that the logging data is being saved to a memory card.
When this signal ON, file saving is not executed even if the file save trigger is established.
Have the file save trigger established when this signal is OFF.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
(5) Logging count device
The device notifies the number of times the device value collection has been executed since the
start up of GOT. (This is not the number of logs stored in the buffering area.)
Using this count value, it is possible to check if the logging is executed correctly.
Counting range is 0 to 65535 and when the count value reaches 65535, it cycles back to 0. (In the
case of unsigned BIN16)
The count value is cleared when the GOT is turned OFF, or when it is reset or restarted.
12
This section
(2) Buffer historical mode)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(7) Buffer historical data clear alert (buffer historical mode only)
[Buffer Historical Data Clear] notifies that buffering area has been cleared.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

11 - 29
SCRIPT FUNCTION
RECIPE
(6) Full notification signal device (buffer historical mode only)

This device notifies that the buffering area has become full.
5 Using the logging data

Using the collected logging data, the display and operations as shown below are possible.
(1) Displaying in the historical trend graph
The collected logging data can be displayed in the historical trend graph.
The displayed data is specified using the logging ID. (
Section 10.8 Historical Trend Graph)
(a) Display target in the file save mode

The logging data in the buffering area (for the logging function) and the data in the memory
card can be displayed.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
(For historical trend graph)
Buffering area
(For logging function)
Logging
data
Logging
data
(b) Display target in the buffer historical mode

Only the logging data in the buffering area (for the logging function) can be displayed.
The logging data saved in a memory card is not displayed.
To display the older logging data, use the file save mode.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
(For historical trend graph)
Logging
data
Buffering area
(For logging function)
Logging
data
Logging data in memory data cannot

be displayed.
11 - 30

PARTS
(2) Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in a CSV file / Unicode
text file
The collected logging data is saved in a binary format file (*.G1L).
The collected logging data can be displayed on a personal computer by creating a CSV file /
Unicode text file from the binary format file (*.G1L).
Logging
data
GRAPH, METER
10
CSV file / Unicode
text file
A CSV file / Unicode text file can be created using any of the methods indicated below.
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
(a) Creating a file when saving the logging data to a memory card
A CSV file / Unicode text file is saved when saving the logging data to a memory card.
This method does not require special operation since a CSV file / Unicode text file is
automatically created.
1 Make setting for [Additional File Type] in the File Save tab of the logging setting
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Setting of [Additional File Type]
(2) CSV file / Unicode text file creation timing

A CSV file / Unicode text file is created when the logging data is saved to a
memory card (at the time a binary format file (*G1L) is created).
Note that a CSV file / Unicode text file is not created at the timing the temporary
file is created.
This section
16
(1)(c) File creation timing (when the buffering area is full))

11 - 31
SCRIPT FUNCTION
15
OTHERS
(1) Interruption of logging processing due to file saving operation

Logging processing is interrupted during data saving to a file.
To shorten the interruption time, set [None] for [Additional File Type] and convert a
binary format file (*.G1L) into a CSV file / Unicode text file using GT Designer2 or
utility.
DEBUG
14
2 File save operation automatically creates a CSV file / Unicode text file.
(b) Creating a CSV file / Unicode text file using GT Designer2

In this method, a binary format file (*.G1L) saved in a memory card is converted into a CSV file
/ Unicode text file by GT Designer2.
Since the conversion is executed by GT Designer2, no load is imposed to GOT when creating
a CSV file / Unicode text file.
1 Store a binary format file (*.G1L) to a personal computer using either of the methods
below.
Transferring by GT Designer2
Select [Communication]
[To/From GOT ...]
[Resource Upload], and execute
transfer using the Computer tab.
Storage with a memory card
Save the logging data in a memory card and read out the memory card data in
personal computer.
Logging data
Memory card
Memory card
Logging data
2 At GT Designer2, select [Common]

[Logging]
[Logging File Convert] menu, and
then open the convert dialog box. After that, convert a binary format file (*.G1L) into a
CSV file / Unicode text file.
(c) Creating a CSV file / Unicode text file using utility
In this method, a binary format file (*.G1L) saved in memory card is converted into a CSV file /
Unicode text file by utility.
A CSV file / Unicode text file can be created without using GT Designer2.
1 In the [Logging Information] of the utility, select G1L file and touch the
button.
or
button
11 - 32

PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
2 Store the converted CSV file / Unicode text file in the personal computer using either of
the methods below.
Transferring by GT Designer2
Select [Communication]
[To/From GOT ...], and transfer the files on the Resource
Upload
Computer tab.
Storage with a memory card
Save the logging data in memory card and read out the memory card data in personal
computer.
Memory card
Memory card
Logging data
TRIGGER
Logging data
ACTIONS
11
About operation in utility
12
RECIPE
GT15 User's Manual (Section 13.8 Logging Information)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

11 - 33
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
6 Operation in utility
The logging function can perform the following operation in utility.
Creating folder
Deleting folder
Copying file
Deleting file
Renaming file
Moving file
G1L
CSV/Unicode text conversion
Management of logging files is possible on GOT, without using a personal computer.
Remark

GT15 User's Manual (Section 13.8Logging Information)
Logging file operations as indicated below are possible.

File operation is possible on GOT without reading out a file to a personal computer.
Item
Description
Creates the folder that stores logging files.
This enables management of logging files by creating a folder for each line or line of products.
Folder for
storing line 1
logging files
Creating folder
Folder for
storing line 2
logging files
Folder for
storing line 3
logging files
Manages logging files by creating folders for

lines or line of products
Deletes the folder that stores logging files.
Deletion
Deleting folder
Folder for
storing line 1
logging files
Folder for
storing line 2
logging files
Folder for
storing line 3
logging files
Copies a logging file.

This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.
Copying
Copying file
Logging file
Folder for storing

logging files
Deletes a logging file.

Deletion
Deleting file
Logging file
11 - 34

Item
Description
Renames a logging file.
Renaming a logging file
PARTS
Renaming file
10
Moves a logging file to other folder.
GRAPH, METER
This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.

Moving
Moving file
ACTIONS
(2) (c) Creating a CSV file / Unicode text file using utility)
TRIGGER
This section
12
RECIPE
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
conversion
11
Converts a binary format file (*.G1L) into a CSV file / Unicode text file.
14
DEBUG
CSV/Unicode text
15
OTHERS
G1L
Folder for storing

logging files
16

11 - 35
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Logging file
11.3.3 Settings
Select the menu of the logging.
[Common]
[Logging]
[Logging Setting]
[Logging File Convert]
Click the logging icon.
(Logging Setting)
(Logging File Convert)
2 The setting dialog box is displayed. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark
When making settings at the Workspace (Project).

(1) Logging setting
In the project workspace, right click
setting dialog box.
and select [New]. This displays the
Right click
(2) Logging file conversion

Logging file conversion is not possible from the project workspace.
Open the convert screen using the menu.
11 - 36

11.3.3 Settings
10
GRAPH, METER
The list of logging settings is displayed for the purpose of management of logging settings.
Setting is possible for up to 32 loggings.
This screen is displayed only by the selection of [Common]
[Logging]
[Logging Setting] menu.
When the logging setting is attempted from the project workspace, this screen is not displayed.
PARTS
1 Logging setting (list)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Item
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Description
Click this button when setting a new logging, and the setting dialog box will appear.
New
(
This section
Logging setting)
Click this button when editing the selected logging setting, and the setting dialog box will appear.
Edit
(
Click this button to copy the selected logging setting.

Click this button to paste the copied logging setting to the logging setting list.
Set the copy destination after clicking this button.
DEBUG
Paste
14
Logging setting)
Click this button to delete the selected logging setting.
Delete All
Click this button to delete all logging settings.
Close
Click this button to close the setting dialog box of the logging setting (list).
15
OTHERS
Delete
16

11 - 37
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Copy
This section
2 Logging setting
(1) Basic tab
Logging mode, logging trigger and buffering area are set.
Basic
Device
File Save
Option
Item
Description
Set the logging ID (1 to 32767) of the logging to be set.
Logging ID
(
Section 11.3.2
(1) About logging IDs)
Set the name of logging.

Logging Name
For a logging name, up to 32 characters can be entered.

The set logging name is displayed in such as a CSV file / Unicode text file.
Logging Mode
Select the logging mode from [File Save] and [Buffer Historical], explained below.
Select this when executing logging in the file save mode.
File Save
(
Number of Files
Number of Logs a file
Section 11.3.2
(1) File save mode)
Set the number of files (1 to 9999) that can be saved in a memory card.
Set the number of logs (1 to 65500) that can be stored in a file.
The value to be set for this item must be larger than the value set for [Log Storage Number].
Check this item to save the logging data by creating a file at desired timing.
File Terminal Trigger
After checking this item, set the file terminal trigger device.
(
Check this item to enable notifying of interrupted device value collection by [File Terminal Trigger]. After
File Terminal
checking this item, set the file terminal notification device.
Notification Device
This setting is allowed only when [File Terminal Trigger] is set.
11 - 38

Basic
Device
File Save
Option
Item
Description
Select this when executing logging in the buffer historical mode.
(
Section 11.3.2
PARTS
Buffer Historical
(2) Buffer historical mode)
Set whether the logging data in the buffering area is saved to memory card or not.
No
: Select [No] when the logging data in the buffering area should not be
saved in a memory card.
10
Buffer Save
in a memory card.
By saving the logging data in a memory card, the logging data is read out
from the memory card and restored when the GOT is turned on.
Yes (Auto Backup at Save)
: The logging data immediately before saving to memory card is saved as a

backup file.
When the logging data is broken, the data is read out from the backup file
if available.
This selects the processing to be taken if the number of logs stored in the buffering area reaches the value set
Action when Buffer is
for [Log Storage Number].
Full
Delete Old Data
: New logging data is added by clearing the oldest data.
Stop New Addition
: Device values are not collected even if the logging trigger condition is established
newly.
Logging Trigger
11
ACTIONS
: Select [Yes] when the logging data in the buffering area should be saved
TRIGGER
processing is not interrupted due to file saving.

Yes
GRAPH, METER
This selection enables high speed operated logging since logging
12
Set the trigger for collecting a device value.

Select the type of trigger for activating device value collection.
(
RECIPE
Trigger Type
If the selection is [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], set the sampling (1 to 36000).
Rise
Device
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
13

Set the device that notifies device values of a controller are being collected into the buffering area.
(
Section 11.3.2
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Logging Notification Device

(2) Logging notification device)
Set the number of logs that are temporarily saved in the buffering area.
Buffering
(
Set the number of logs (1 to 32767) that are temporarily saved in the buffering area.
14
The size of the buffering area used as temporary storage of the logging data is displayed.
DEBUG
The buffering area size increases according to the value set for [Log Storage Number].
15
OTHERS
Buffering Area Size
(2) Buffering area size)
16

11 - 39
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Log Storage Number
Section 11.3.5
(2) Device tab

Target devices of logging data collection are set.
Basic
Device
File Save
Option
Item
Description
Set the number of blocks (1 to 250) in logging setting.
Block Number
(
Section 11.3.2
(2) For the block)
Check this item when changing the format of device values to be output to a CSV file / Unicode text file.
File Output Attribute
After checking this item, set the [File Output Attribute] displayed at the right of the [Device Comment] column.
Setting for [File Output Attribute] is possible only when [File Save] is selected for [Logging Mode].
(Insert Block)*1 : Inserts a block. Select a line when inserting a block.
(Cut) *1
: Cuts the selected item.
(Copy) *1
: Copies the selected item.
(Paste) *1
: Pastes the contents that have been cur or copied.
(Clear) *1
: Clears a device comment if [Device Comment] is selected.
Logging edit buttons
If [Digits] is selected, the digit value is reset to the default value.

(Delete)
*1
(Import) *2
: Deletes the selected setting. Select a line when executing deletion.

: Reads out the settings having been edited in a CSV file / Unicode text file to GT
Designre2.
(Export)
*2
: Saves the logging setting (settings made in Device tab) made by GT Designer2 as
a CSV file / Unicode text file.
11 - 40

Device
File Save
Option
Item
Description
Device List
Displays the target of device value collection in a list.

PARTS
Basic
Set the device for which the values are collected when the logging function is executed.
Device
Device Type
10
Bit
: Select this item when collecting the ON/OFF value of a bit device.
Signed BIN16
: Select this item when collecting signed 16-bit binary values.
Unsigned BIN16
: Select this item when collecting unsigned 16-bit binary values.
Signed BIN32
: Select this item when collecting signed 32-bit binary values.
Unsigned BIN32
: Select this item when collecting unsigned 32-bit binary values.
BCD16
: Select this item when collecting 16-bit BCD (binary coded decimal) values.
BCD32
: Select this item when collecting 32-bit BCD (binary coded decimal) values.
Real
: Select this item when collecting real (floating point type real) values.
GRAPH, METER
Select the data type of a device. (
11
ACTIONS
Set the number of points of devices for which data is collected in block units.
The set continuous device points are set from head device.
Bit
: 1 point
Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16/BCD16
: 1 to 250 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real
: 1 to 125 points
TRIGGER
The allowable number of points varies depending on [Device Type].
Point
12
Set a device comment.

Device Comment
*3
For a device comment, up to 32 characters can be entered.

The set device comment is displayed in a CSV file / Unicode text file.
Display Type
Digits
Set the format of device values to be output to a CSV file / Unicode text file.
For setting the format, check [File Output Attribute] to the right of [Block Number].
RECIPE
File Output Attribute
Displays the data display type.
13
Set the number of digits (1 to 32) to be displayed.

Check this item for displaying "0" preceding a device value.
Example:
When a collected device value is "125" with "6" set for [Digits]
If this item is checked
: 000125
If this item is not checked
: 125
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Fill with Zeros
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
14
*1 Operation with right click
DEBUG
[Insert], [Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Clear] and [Delete] operations are possible using the menu displayed by
right click a mouse.
OTHERS
15

11 - 41
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
*2 About import and export

It is possible to edit an exported CSV file / Unicode text file using such as spreadsheet software.
After editing, the CSV file / Unicode text file can be read out to GT Designer2 by importing the file.
Example: Import/export of a CSV file
Exporting to a CSV format file

Adding the setting using
Microsoft R Excel, etc.
The addition is displayed.

used.
11 - 42

*3 Adjusting the column width

When the set device comment is displayed only a part of it, the column width can be adjusted so that the
entire comment is visible.
PARTS
Expand the column width.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

11 - 43
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(3) File save tab

These settings are for saving the logging data saved in the buffering area to a memory card.
This tab is not displayed if [No] is set for [Buffer Save] in the buffer historical mode because a file is
not saved in this setting.
Basic
Device
File Save
Option
Item
File Access
Description
Set the file where the logging data is saved.
Drive Name
The drive name of the destination is displayed.

Set the folder name where the file is saved.
Folder Name*1
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}~\) can be used.

Default is the name that is set for [Project Folder].
(
Enter the file name.

File Name*1
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}~) can be used.

Default is the name set for [LOG ] ( : Logging ID).
Date Information is
Check this item to add the file saving date (year/month/day) and time (hour/minute/second) to the file name.
Added to File Name
(This setting is valid only when [File Save] is selected for [Logging Mode].)
Store Trigger
Set the timing for saving the logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area to a memory card.
Select the timing for saving the logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area to a memory card.
(
Trigger Type
If [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling (1 to 1440 minutes (1 day)) in 1
minute units.
Rising
Falling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
None*2
Sampling
Specify the save trigger device.

Device
(
11 - 44

Basic
File Save
Device
Option
Item
Description
File Output Time Information
Date Type*3
Time Type*4
(2) Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in
None
: Saves only the binary format data (*.G1L).
CSV File
: Saves a CSV file together with the binary format data (*.G1L).
Unicode Text File
: Saves a Unicode text file together with the binary format data (*.G1L).
10
Check this item when setting the format of date and time, which is displayed in a CSV file / Unicode text file.
Set the date display format by clicking
Set the time display format by clicking
11
ACTIONS
Additional File Type
Format
Section 11.3.2
a CSV file / Unicode text file)
Set the device used for notifying that logging data is being saved.
Section 11.3.2
(3) Writing notification device)
Set the device that notifies an error if saving of the logging data is faulty.
Device
Section 11.3.2
TRIGGER
GRAPH, METER
PARTS
Set this item when saving a CSV file / Unicode text file at the same time the logging data is saved.
(4) Writing error notification device)
12
For details of *1 to *4, refer to the following.
(2 characters)
File name
(1 character)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Folder name
RECIPE
(1) Number of characters set for folder and file name

GOT recognizes file location according to the path explained below.
Set a folder or file name within 78 characters as a whole description of path.
A user can set only the folder and file names.
(Other expressions are automatically set.)
Example: Path of a G1L file saved in memory card
.G1L
Extension
(4 characters)
14
Drive name
(1 character)
DEBUG
Max. 78 characters

11 - 45
OTHERS
15
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(1) File name in the file save mode

In the file save mode, a number is appended to the set file name.
File without a number in the file name
: Management data
File with 0000 appended to the file name
: Temporary file
File with a number (0001 to 9999) appended to the file name: Logging data
Do not delete the management data and the temporary file.
If deleted, correct logging is disabled.
(2) File name in the buffer historical mode
In the buffer historical mode, a file is saved in the set file name.
Remark

When setting [Folder Name], enter \ between folder names.
(Setting example)
[Folder Name]: Project1\abc
Project1
abc

In a folder or file name, character strings indicated below cannot be used. (Lower case
expressions are not allowed, either.)
COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
Folder or file names indicated below cannot be used.
Folder name beginning with G1
Folder or file name beginning with . (period) or \
Folder or file name ending with . (period) or \
Folder or file name with only . (one period) or .. (two periods)
11 - 46

*2 Processing when [None] is selected for [Trigger Type]
PARTS
When [None] is selected for [Trigger Type], logging data is automatically saved to a memory card when
the buffering area becomes full.
*3 Date Settings
The set date display type can be confirmed in the preview area.
GRAPH, METER
10
Preview area
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Item

RECIPE
(Preview area)
Description
Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

Sort
yy/mm/dd: 04/01/24
dd/mm/yy: 24/01/04
mm/dd/yy: 01/24/04
13
Select asorting type of date.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Select the desired display type depending on upper/lower case characters, display of the day of a
week and a type of Japanese/English expression.
The display examples below assume the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort].
: 04/01/24
Type 11
: 2004/JAN/24
Type 2
: Jan/24
Type 12
: 2004/Jan/24(FRI)
: 2004/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 3
: JAN/24
Type 13
Type 4
: Jan/24(FRI)
Type 1 (Japanese):
Type 5
: JAN/24(FRI)
Type 2 (Japanese):
Type 6
: 04/Jan/24
Type 3 (Japanese):
Type 7
: 04/JAN/24
Type 4 (Japanese):
Type 8
: 04/Jan/24(FRI)
Type 5 (Japanese):
Type 9
: 04/JAN/24(FRI)
Type 6 (Japanese):
Type 10
: 2004/Jan/24
14
DEBUG
Type
Type 1
15
Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
Delimiter
"/" : 04/01/24
"." : 04.01.24
"-" : 04-01-24
Check this item for displaying "0" preceding month and day.
To display Jan. 24, 2004
When checked
: 04/01/24
When not checked
: 04/1/24
OTHERS
Example:
16

11 - 47
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Fill with Zeros
*4 Time Settings
Set the display type of time.
The display type of set time can be confirmed in the preview area.
Preview area
Item
(Preview area)
Description
Select the display type of time.
Select the desired display type depending on whether to use, presence/absence of am and pm
and a type of Japanese/English expression.
Type
Type 1
: 16:28
Type 1 (Japanese):
Type 2
: 16:28:28
Type 2 (Japanese):
Type 3
: 04:28(PM)
Type 3 (Japanese):
Check when displaying "0" preceding hour, minute and second.

Example:
Fill with Zeros
11 - 48

5 past 6
When checked
: 06:05
When not checked
: 6:5
PARTS
(4) Extended tab

Set the devices where logging status is output.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Extended
File Save
Item
Description
Check this item when setting the device that notifies the number of times device values have been collected
Logging Count Device
13
after start up of GOT. After checking this item, set the logging count device.
(
Section 11.3.2
(5) Logging count device)
Check this item when notifying the status the remaining number of logs that can be saved in the buffering
area is reduced to the value set for [Buffer Full Alert Capacity] by turning ON the specified device.
Full Notification Signal Device
After checking this item, set the full notification signal device.
(
Section 11.3.2
RECIPE
Device
(2) (c) When the buffering area becomes full)
Setting is possible only when [Buffer Historical] is selected for [Logging Mode].
Set the timing (remaining number of logs that can be saved: 0 to 255) for outputting the notification signal
Buffer Full Alert
when the available capacity of the buffering area has been reduced.
Capacity
When the remaining number of logs that can be saved in the buffering area has been reduced to the number
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic
14
Check this item when clearing the logging data, temporarily saved in the buffering area, using the specified
device.
Buffer Historical Data Clear
After checking this item, set the buffer historical data clear.
(
Section 11.3.2
DEBUG
set for this item, [Full Notification Signal Device] turns ON.
15
(2) (c) When the buffering area becomes full)
Clear].
Alert
After checking this item, set the buffer historical data clear finish signal.
OTHERS
Check this item when giving notification for the completion of buffering area clear by [Buffer Historical Data
Buffer Historical Data Clear

11 - 49
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
11.3.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the logging function.

(1) Setting number of logging functions in a project file
Setting of up to 32 logging functions is allowed.
(2) Buffering area size
The size of the buffering area varies according to the setting for [Log Storage Number] of the
logging setting. (
Section 11.3.4
(1) Basic tab)
To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], referr to the following.
(a) When a large number is set for [Log Storage Number]
The size of user area (C drive + Extension memory) is reduced.
Adjust the setting for [Log Storage Number] taking into consideration the size of user area (C
drive + Extension memory).
(b) When a small number is set for [Log Storage Number]
In the file save mode, file saving frequency increases.
Since device value collection is interrupted while the data is saved to a file, device value
collection may be disabled. (Especially when device values are collected in short intervals.)
To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], referr to the following.
Example: Relationships among logging trigger log storage number and saving frequency
[Log Storage Number]
[Logging Trigger]
10 (
100ms intervals)
1000(
100ms intervals)
100
10000
Saving in 1 second
Saving in 100 second
intervals
intervals
intervals
intervals
intervals
intervals
Setting of [Log Storage Number] in the file save mode

To collect device values in short intervals, increase a value set for [Log Storage
Number].
11 - 50

11.3.5 Precautions
PARTS
(3) Mixed use of file save mode and buffer historical mode
Do not overlap the folder name and file name between the two modes.
If there is an overlap, logging cannot be executed correctly.
Check of overlapped designation is possible by selecting [Tools]
[Data Check..] menu.
Example: Example of overlapped designation of folder and file names
In the file save mode
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
In the file save mode, management file "LOG00001.G1L****"

is saved at the same timing the "LOG00001_****.G1L" file
(*: number) is saved. Since this overlaps with the file name
"LOG00001.G1L" used in the buffer historical mode, correct
logging is disabled.
For computing method for the setting size of logging function, refer to the following.
Section 2.4
12
RECIPE
(a) Setting number

When the object setting exceeds the user area of the GOT in size by the setting in the
advanced recipe setting, the advanced recipe function cannot be used.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Make the setting within the free user area available for GOT.
TRIGGER
In the buffer historical mode
Overlapped designation of folder

and file names is not allowed.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
(b) Saving a file
The memory card must be larger than the file to be saved in size.
(c) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size
The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the
device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.
DEBUG
Section 2.4
14
15
OTHERS
To use the logging function, install the extension function OS (Logging) to GOT.

To use the logging function, install the option function board to GOT.

11.3.5 Precautions
11 - 51
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16

(1) If device value collection is impossible in set intervals or even if the trigger device condition is
satisfied
(a) Cause
Collection of device values may be impossible in the cases shown below.
A large number of device points is set for collection, taking a long communication time
between GOT and a controller.
Logging trigger interval is short (trigger conditions is established during the collection of
device value).
Example: When logging trigger interval is short
ON
Logging trigger
OFF
Device value is
being collected to
buffering area.
During
collection
During collection
(b) Countermeasures
Take any of the measures indicated below.
Reduce the device points in a single logging setting.
Plant A logging setting (logging ID 1)
Data collection devices
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107
D108
D109
Divide the setting into

two logging setting
Plant A logging setting 1 (logging ID 1)
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
Plant A logging setting 2 (logging ID 2)

D105
D106
D107
D108
D109
Have the trigger condition established while the logging notification device is OFF.
(
Section 11.3.2
If the baud rate can be changed, increase the baud rate in the Communication detail
settings.
If device value collection is impossible
A device value is collected when the trigger device is established next.
The device value to be collected is the value at the time the trigger condition is
established next.
11 - 52

11.3.5 Precautions
(2) Integrity of the device values between the controller device values and the collected device values
When the number of device points set for device value collection is large, integrity of device values
may not be secured between the device values of a controller and the collected data values.
D0
D1
D2
120
140
160
D0
D1
D2
120
140
160
D100
200
D100
200
PARTS
Device values at controller

Device value reading
processing by GOT
10
GRAPH, METER
Logging data at GOT
D0
D1
D2
120
145
160
Device value changed

during reading processing
TRIGGER
140
Remains
12
Device value reading

processing by GOT
D100
200
D100
200
If such a problem occurs, set an interlock at the controller so that the device value will not change
until the logging by GOT finishes.
Logging status can be checked by the logging notification device.
(
Section 11.3.2
13
(3) Timing at which processing stops or is suspended

(a) Timing at which device value collection stops or is not executed
In the cases shown below, device value collection is not executed even if the trigger condition
is established.
Device value collection also stops temporarily.
There are cases a device value cannot be collected correctly. (Particularly when device value
collection is executed in short intervals.)
Item
card
Countermeasure
In the file save mode, increase the value set for [Log Store Number].
Use the writing notification device appropriately so that the trigger condition is not
established during writing.
During the access of the historical trend

graph to the logging data
Have the trigger condition established only after [Buffer Historical Data Clear Alert] is
turned ON.
Decrease the device points to be monitored by the historical trend graph.
(b) Timing at which file saving and buffering area clear are suspended
In the case shown below, file saving and buffering area clear are not executed.
Item
During the access of the historical trend
graph to the logging data
15
OTHERS
When clearing the buffering area
14
DEBUG
When saving the logging data to memory
RECIPE
120
140
160
16
Countermeasure
Decrease the device points to be monitored by the historical trend graph.

11.3.5 Precautions
11 - 53
SCRIPT FUNCTION
D0
D1
D2
Device values at controller
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Logging data at GOT
ACTIONS
11
(4) To maintain the access performance

(a) Before starting logging
It is recommended to format the memory card before starting logging.
(b) Number of files stored in a folder
The number of files to be stored in a folder should be less than 500.
If 500 or more files are stored in a folder, file access performance may be lowered.
(c) Repeated write/delete of memory card
If write/delete of memory card has been done many times, it can deteriorate file access
performance independent of the set number of files.
If this is the cause of lowered file access performance, format the memory card.
(5) If no memory card is installed when saving a file

At the occurrence of failure in saving the logging data to a memory card, [Writing Error Notification
Device] turns ON and device value collection is not executed. (Device value collection is executed
even if a memory card is not installed until saving failure occurs.)
Device values are not collected until saving succeeds.
File saving and logging restarts restarts by inserting a memory card.
When using logging function, insert a memory card to the GOT.
(6) When using the historical trend graph
While the logging data is being stored to a memory card, display of historical trend graph stops until
the storing processing finishes.
(7) Deletion prohibited file (only in the file save mode)
In the file save mode, a number is appended to the set file name.
Do not delete the management data and the temporary file indicated below.
If deleted, correct logging is disabled.
File without a number in the file name
: Management data*1
File with 0000 appended to the file name
: Temporary file*1
File with a number (0001 to 9999) appended to the file name : Logging data
*1 Deletion prohibited file
(8) When turning off GOT power, restarting or resetting GOT

The logging data in the buffering area is cleared.
If the logging data must not be cleared, save the data using [File Terminal Trigger] or [Store
Trigger].
(9) Using a Unicode text file
For the precautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
11 - 54

11.3.5 Precautions
(1) When not using the recipe file

The values preset with GT Designer2 are stored in the GOT internal memory (user area). And
then, the set values is written to the devices of the controller depending on the status of the device
(ON/OFF).
This method is used in the following cases.
11
TRIGGER
When only writing the values to the device of controller

When it is not necessary to display or edit the values for writing in PC
GRAPH, METER
1 Procedure for reading/writing the device value used recipe.
10
ACTIONS
Recipe is the function that the conditions required for production or other purpose can be set/changed easily.
Writing the preset value to the device of controller performs the set/change.
Also, the value can be read from the specified device.
The read values are stored in a file.
And then, it can be displayed or edited in PC.
PARTS
12. RECIPE
12
RECIPE
GT Designer2 setting
D10
D11
D12
150
250
350
Download the set data

to GOT
Write trigger : OFF
ON
(Write the set data to the device)
D10 150
D11 250
D12 350
1 Perform the recipe setting in GT Designer2.

In this case, set for without the recipe file.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Device Device value
14
2 Download the set data to GOT.

3 Write the values set in GT Designer2 to the device of controller with write trigger.
DEBUG
To read the value from the device of controller

To read the value from the device, use the recipe file.
15
OTHERS
(
This section
(2) When using the recipe file)
When not using the recipe file, only writing depending on the status of the device
(ON/OFF) is allowed.
12 - 1
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) When using the recipe file

Use the recipe file when reading/writing the device values.
Use read/write of the device values with the recipe file when performing project management and
production management in PC.
The device values read from controller can be stored in recipe file.
Also, the data of recipe file can be written to the device.
Device Device value
D10
D11
D12
150
250
350
Download the set data to GOT
Read trigger : OFF
ON
Recipe
file
(Read the device value)
D10 50
D11 100
D12 150
Device Device value

D10
D11
D12
150
250
350
50
100
150
The device values read to recipe file are stored.

The recipe file is stored in PC.
Recipe
file
Recipe file is displayed or edited in PC.

Device
D10
D11
D12
Device value
50
100
150
500
600
700
Transfer the edited recipe file

to GOT.
Write trigger : OFF
ON
Device Device value

D10
D11
D12
(Write the set values to the device.)
500
600
700
1 Perform the recipe setting in GT Designer2.

In this case, set for using the recipe file.
3 The device values of controller are read with the read trigger.
4 The read values are stored in recipe file.
5 Store the recipe file in PC.
6 Display or edit the file stored at the above
in PC.
7 Store the edited recipe file in GOT.

8 The values are written to the device of controller with write trigger.
12 - 2
D10 500
D11 600
D12 700
9
2 Recipe type
Recipe function
Section 12.2 Recipe Function
Section 12.3 Advanced Recipe Function
PARTS
Recipe type is shown as follows.

For overview and details of each function, refer to the following.
10
GRAPH, METER
When using GT11

The advanced recipe function is applicable to GT15 only.
Therefore, use the recipe function instead, when using GT11.
Differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function
TRIGGER
Section 12.1 Differences Between the Recipe Function and the

ACTIONS
11
For difference between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function, refer
to the following.
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
12 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
12.1 Differences Between the Recipe Function and the

The differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function are shown below.
Select the recipe to use based on the followings.
Item
Recipe function
GT15
Applicable GOT

GT15
GT11
Reference
Section 12.3.5
Required option function board,
option OS
Option OS (Recipe)
Option OS (Advanced recipe)

This section
Max. No. of recipes
Max. No. of device points
Max. 256 recipes
Max. 2048 recipes
Max. 8192 points*1
Max. 32767 points for each setting
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2
points for 1 device.)
points for 1 device.)
Max. 240
Max. No. of values in one
This section
This section
device
(For each setting)
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Applicable device type
This section
Bit
Only one device type for each setting
Allowed to set multiple device types for each

setting.
Device name for each setting
Only one device name for each setting
Allowed to set multiple device names for each
Set the trigger device for each setting
Trigger device for reading/
Set trigger device for each setting
writing device value
This section
setting.
This section
Allowed to read/write all advanced recipes

in common trigger device
This section
Operation in utility
Not allowed
Allowed
Reading/Writing being executed
Notifying the process status to

the device of controller
Reading/Writing being completed

Reading/writing being executed
This section
Recipe process error

Displaying the advanced recipe information
in utility
CSV file (For GT15)
Stored file type
Binary format file (For GT11)
Required memory area
This section
Binary format file*2
Change depending on the setting
*1
is applicable to each setting for GT15, to total points in each project for GT11.
*2
Can be converted to CSV file or Unicode text file in GT Designer2.
Section 2.4
And then, it can be displayed or edited in PC.
For compatibility of recipe function and advanced recipe function

Setting for Recipe Function and advanced recipe function cannot be utilized.
Select between recipe function and advanced recipe function before using the
recipe.
12 - 4
12.1 Differences Between the Recipe Function and the Advanced Recipe Function
9
For details of functions
This section explains differences between recipe function and advanced recipe
function.
For details of functions, refer to the following.
Section 12.2 Recipe Function
Section 12.3 Advanced Recipe Function
10
GRAPH, METER
Recipe function
PARTS
Remark
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
12 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
1 Max. No. of recipes

Multiple recipes can be set for each setting.
Also, the setting can be managed separately for each line or line of products.
Max. No. of recipes and device points are shown as the following table.
Recipe function
Max. 256
recipes
Max. 2048
recipes
Max. 8192 points can be set*1.

(When device type is 32 bit,
calculate as 2 points for 1 device.)
*1
Max. 32767 points can be set for each setting.

(When device type is 32 bit,
calculate as 2 points for 1 device.)
is applicable to each setting for GT15, to total points in each project for GT11.
Remark
Precautions for max. No. of device points in advanced recipe function

Section 12.3.1
(2) For the block
2 Max. No. of values in one device (For each setting)

Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple values in one
device are shown below.
Example : When setting 3 values in D11 to D13 of device,
Device name
Device value 1
Device value 2
D11
100
150
Device value 3
500
D12
200
250
600
D13
300
350
700
When setting the above values, the functions will be as the following table.
Recipe function
One value can be set in one device.
Multiple values can be set in one device.
When setting multiple values in one device, separate the setting for
Multiple recipe information can be managed in one setting.
each device value.
Device value 1 setting

Device value 1 to 3 can be set in one device!
Multiple values
(max. 240 records)
can be set in one device.
12 - 6
9
3 Applicable device name and device type
PARTS
Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple device names
and device types are shown below.
(1) Example for setting multiple device names
(a) Settings
It is explained as example for setting that is shown below.
Correspondence to the following setting (b)
Device type
Device value
D11
Signed BIN16
100
D12
Signed BIN16
200
R0
Signed BIN16
400
R1
Signed BIN16
500
Recipe function
Advanced recipe
function
1)
3)
11
2)
ACTIONS
Device name
Recipe function
TRIGGER

When setting above (a), GT Designer2 setting will be as the following table.
Multiple device names cannot be set in one setting.
12
Multiple device names can be set in one setting.
Separate the setting for each device name.
2)
3)
RECIPE
1)
GRAPH, METER
10
13
R device setting
D and R device setting can be set in one setting!

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D device setting
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
12 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) Example for setting multiple device types

(a) Settings
Correspondence to the following setting (b)
Device name
Device type
Device value
D11
Signed BIN16
100
D12
Signed BIN16
200
D13
Unsigned BIN32
300
D15
Unsigned BIN32
400
Recipe function
Advanced recipe
function
1)
3)
2)

Recipe Function
Multiple device types can be set in one setting.
Separate the setting for each device type.
The setting can be put together for each line or line of products.
1)
2)
Signed BIN16 setting
12 - 8
Multiple device types cannot be set in one setting.
Unsigned BIN32 setting
3)
The setting of signed BIN16 and unsigned BIN32

can be set in one setting!
(3) Example for setting multiple device numbers
Correspondence to the following (b) setting
D11
D
Device type
Device value
Signed BIN16
100
D12
Signed BIN16
200
D1000
Signed BIN16
1000
D1001
Signed BIN16
2000
Recipe function
Advanced recipe
function
10
1)
3)
GRAPH, METER
Device name
2)

Only continuous device number can be set.
11
ACTIONS
Recipe Function
The random device type can be set in one setting.
When the device number is not continuous, separate the setting.
2)
3)
TRIGGER
1)
PARTS
(a) Settings
12
Setting of D1000 to D1001
The random device number can be set in one setting!

RECIPE
Setting of D10 to D11
BCD16, BCD32 and Bit device (Bit specification of word device) cannot be set in
recipe function.
When setting them, use the advanced recipe function.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
When setting BCD16, BCD32 and bit device in device type
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
12 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
4 Trigger device for reading/writing device value

The recipe performs read/write of the device value depending on status of the trigger device (ON/OFF).
When reading/writing device value, differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function
at the trigger device setting are shown below.
Example : When four settings exist
Recipe Function
Set the trigger device for each setting.
1)
Trigger device can be set for each setting as recipe function.

Also, all advanced recipes can be read/written in common trigger
2)
device.
For this, it is not necessary to newly set trigger device even if
increasing settings.
3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
Trigger device setting
1)
Trigger
device
setting
1) 2) 3) 4)
2)
1)
3)
Or
4)
2)
Set the trigger device

for each setting. *1
3)
Set the common

trigger device. *2
4)
Set the trigger device for each setting
*1
It is necessary to specify additional record No. when reading/writing device value.
Section 12.3.1
(2) When executing with specifying condition of writing/reading device value for each
advanced recipe setting)

*2
It is necessary to specify additional recipe No. and record No. when reading/writing device value.
Section 12.3.1
(1) When executing read/write of the device value with specifying common trigger
device)
12 - 10
Recipe Function
10
GRAPH, METER
Remark
PARTS
Advanced recipe function can perform the following operation in utility.

Advanced recipe file operation
Recipe execution
G1P
CSV file/Unicode text file conversion
Recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading the file to PC.
For details, refer to below.
11
Operation in utility
ACTIONS
Section 12.3.2
6 Notifying the process status to the device of controller

Recipe function
TRIGGER
Recipe can notify the status for read/write of device value with storing to the device of controller.
12
Reading/writing being completed

Recipe process error
Displaying advanced recipe function information in utility
Section 12.2.1 Relevant settings)

(
Section 12.3.2
Output the executing status of advanced

RECIPE
recipe function to device)
13
7 Storing file type
Recipe function
CSV
file*1
(For GT15)
Binary format file (For GT11)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Recipe can read the device value of controller and store in recipe file.
Also, the data of recipe file can write to device.
Recipe can use the file type as shown below.
Binary format file*2
*1
The stored CSV file can be displayed or edited in PC.
*2
The binary format file converts to CSV file or Unicode text file.
14
DEBUG
And then, it can be displayed or edited.
OTHERS
15
16
12 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
12.2 Recipe Function
This function enables reading/writing of a value from/to the specified device according to the operation status
of the device.
For read/write procedure, refer to below.
Chapter 12
12 - 12
Procedure for reading/writing the device value used recipe.
9
Read/write procedure for GT11
PARTS
The value read from the controller is stored on D drive as a G1R file.
You cannot edit the stored G1R file on the PC.
The data on D drive can be written to the controller.
GRAPH, METER
10
D Drive
D10 100
D11 200
D12 300
X20 (Writing trigger) OFF

ON
Value on D drive is written.
(1) CSV file saved on Memory card (only with GT15)

Every time the recipe is set, the CSV file will be created inside the Memory card.
Recipe name
File name (can be randomly changed)
Recipe operation 1
RECIP001.CSV
Recipe operation 2
RECIP002.CSV
Recipe operation 3
RECIP003.CSV
12
RECIPE
Remark
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
(2) G1R file stored on D drive (only with GT11)

The G1R file is created on D drive for each recipe.
Recipe name
File name (can be randomly changed)
Recipe operation 1
RECIP001.G1R
Recipe operation 2
RECIP002.G1R
Recipe operation 3
RECIP003.G1R
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
(3) Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function

For differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function, refer to
below.
Section 12.1 Differences Between the Recipe Function and the Advanced
Recipe Function
Example
14
DEBUG
X10 (Reading trigger) OFF ON

Device values of the controller are read.
D10 100
D11 200
D12 300
15
Change the quantity of used materials according to the products

Make setting in the recipe setting dialog box
a
b
c
d
20
42
22
65
51
52
94
16
OTHERS
Switch the
production of A to B
During product
A production
D100: 20
D101: 42
D102: 22
D103: 65
16
Pr. A
Pr. B
12 - 13
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Product A
D100: 20
D101: 42
D102: 22
D103: 65
Product B
D100: 51
D101: 52
D102: 94
D103: 16

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
For recipe, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to recipe only
Relevant to recipe only.
(1) Functions relevant to recipe only

Notifies the recipe processing progress.
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Recipe in process
12 - 14

Key
window
12.2.2 Settings

work space.
in the project
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
PARTS
[Recipe] from the menu.
16

12.2.2 Settings
12 - 15
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

Set the operation details of each recipe function.
Items
Description
Displays the list of the preset recipe function data.
If plural recipe functions are set, a recipe function data can be selected by clicking on the No. on the
left.
The preset recipe function data can be edited using the following icons.
Recipe operation View
(Edit) *1
: Edits the operation details of the selected recipe function data
(Cut)
: Cuts the selected recipe function data
(Copy)
: Copies the selected recipe function data
(Paste)
: Pastes the cut/copied recipe function data in the end of the view display
(Delete)
: Deletes the selected recipe function data
(Delete all)
: Deletes all the set recipe functions data
For details about *1, refer to the next page.
12 - 16

*1 Recipe setting
PARTS
Set the operation details of the recipe function.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
OTHERS
15

12 - 17
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Items
Description
Set a recipe name.
Recipe Name
Points
Set data type and points of the device to be read and written when executing the recipe function.
Set the points of device to be read and written.
Set the specified number of devices consecutively starting from the head device.
Device Points
The points that can be set depend on the data types of devices as follows:
16bit (signed/unsigned)
: Up to 8192 points*1
32bit (signed/unsigned)
: Up to 4096 points*1
Select the data type of the devices.

Signed BIN16
Data Type
: Process the word device value of 16bit in signed way
Unsigned BIN16 : Process the word device value of 16bit in unsigned way
Signed BIN32
: Process the word device value of 32bit in signed way
Unsigned BIN32 : Process the word device value of 32bit in unsigned way
Recipe Edit Button
(erase)
: Click this button to erase the column of the selected No.
(copy)
: Click this button to copy the selected recipe function.
(paste)
: Click this button to paste the cut or copied column to the end of the list.
(import)
: Click this button to read out the recipe setting that has been edited in a CSV file to GT
Designer2.
(export)
: Click this button to save the recipe setting that has been set by GT Designer2 in a CSV
file.
Device View
A list of the devices that are set to read or write the recipe function data is displayed.
Set the head device that executes read/write the recipe function data.
Start Device
Input the device value to be written to the PLC when the condition is satisfied.
Value
Click on the column of No. and then the set values can be edited using each icon (
(copy),
(erase),
(paste)).
Set a device that will execute data write and its trigger condition (ON/OFF) for the recipe function.
Write Trigger1
Check this item to enable data write when both of two conditions are satisfied.
Set the device and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF)
Write Trigger2
With Write Trigger 1 and 2 set, data write is executed only when the both device conditions are satisfied.
Set a device that will execute data read and its trigger condition (ON/OFF) for the recipe function.
Read Trigger1
Check this item to enable data read when both of two conditions are satisfied.Set the device and its trigger
conditions (ON/OFF).
Read Trigger2
With Read Trigger 1 and 2 set, data read is executed only when the both device conditions are satisfied.
12 - 18

Items
Description
Select to use or not use a Memory card for the recipe function.
PARTS
: Writes the value saved in the built-in Memory of GOT (the value set in GT Designer2) into
the device.
1) Write value
Saved value in
build in Memory
GOT
Write
device
10
controller
Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be created with the recipe device).
: Create a recipe file with the value setting in GT Designer2 when there is not any recipe file
11
TRIGGER
Write
device
12
GOT
controller
Use (Not set recipe device value)

: Does not create any recipe file if there is no recipe files in Memory card when starting
RECIPE
GOT. Because the value setting in GT Designer2 is not needed, data volume transferred
to GOT can be decreased and the download time can be shortened.
Memory card 1) Read device value
controller
14
DEBUG
GOT
13
Write
device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
2) Write Memory card value
15
OTHERS
1) User created
recipe file
16

12 - 19
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Memory Card
1) Write value when starting GOT

2) Read the
Memory card
value of Memory card
Value set by
GT Designer2
3) Read the device value
ACTIONS
in the Memory card at starting up.Initially, writing by the set value can be executed.
GRAPH, METER
Not Used
Items
Description
Select to use or not use a D drive for the recipe function.
Not Used
: Writes the value saved in the built-in Memory of GOT (the value set in GT Designer2) into
the device.
1) Write value
Saved value in
build in Memory
GOT
Write
device
controller
Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be created with the recipe device)
: Create a recipe file with the value setting in GT Designer when there is not any recipe file
in the D drive at starting up.
Initially, writing by the set value can be executed.
1) Write value when starting GOT

2) Read the value of D drive
Value set by
GT Designer2
D Drive
3) Read the device value
Write
device
controller
GOT
Use (Not set recipe device value)
: Does not create any recipe file if there is no recipe files in D drive when starting GOT.
Because the value setting in GT Designer2 is not needed, data volume transferred to GOT
can be decreased and the download time can be shortened.
1) Read device value

2) Write D drive value
GOT
File Setting
Write
device
controller
Specify file when memory card or D drive is used.

Drive
Target drive is specified

Specify the name of folder where the file is stored.
Use single-byte alphanumeric characters including some symbols.
Folder Name *3
Default folder name is [Project Folder].

(
Specify the name of file.

File Name
*3
Use single-byte alphanumeric characters including some symbols.

Default file name is "RECIP ." ( : Recipe number)
12 - 20

Items
Description
Check this item to specify a file register name when a device executing read/write is set in the file register (R,
ER, ZR).
When no file register has been specified, the file register with the file name specified by QCPU in the "END"
process.
Drive
Select the drive No. of the controller.
File Name
PARTS
(Only when the controller type is set as [MELSEC-QnA/Q]/[MELSEC-Q (multi.)/Q Motion] in GT Designer2)
10
Set a file name.

(Up to 8 characters can be input.)
GRAPH, METER
*1 For GT15, this indicates the allowable number of setting points for each recipe setting.
For GT11, this indicates the total number of points for a project.
11
ACTIONS
*2 Import/Export
TRIGGER
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14

R
OTHERS
15
16
( continued to next page )

12 - 21
SCRIPT FUNCTION
File register
( From previous page )
The added contents
are displayed.

Example: CSV file Path in memory card (for GT15)
A :\
Folder name
(2 characters)
.CSV
File name
(1 character)
Extension
(4 characters)
Drive name
(1 character)
Max. 78 characters
Remark

(Setting example)
Project1
abc
12 - 22

PARTS

COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
GRAPH, METER
10
(1) Setting items of Memory card/D drive

Available operation of the recipe function depends on the selected item.
Select the item corresponding to a desired operation of the recipe function.
: N/A
Recipe function operation to be used

Items
Write only
Read only
Read/Write
Not used
12
Use
Memory card/
D drive
(In the case of a file not being
ACTIONS
: Applicable
TRIGGER
<Operation of recipe function according to the selected items>
11
*2
*1*2
*2
*3
*3
*3
used, a file will be created with
Use
(Not set recipe device value)
*1: It is advisable to select [Use (not set recipe device value)] when executing read operation only.
RECIPE
the recipe device)
13
*2: Since value setting is necessary, GOT memory capacity for the set values is required.
GOT.)
(2) Memory card/D drive check when using recipe function

GOT executes the following operation according to the status of the Memory card/
D drive.
(a) When recipe file is not valid or corrupted
A system alarm "351:Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file." occurs
and recipe operation is stopped.
(b) When no Memory card is installed in the GOT
A system alarm "352:Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting
memory card." occurs.
15
OTHERS
(c) If the capacity of D drive is insufficient

A system alarm, "571: Capacity shortage of user memory (RAM)" appears.
14
DEBUG
(After initially reading the controller device, reuse the recipe file created in Memory card/D drive in
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
*3: It is necessary for the user to create a recipe file.

12 - 23
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Precautions when executing recipe function

(1) When many read/write devices are set
Other processing such as monitoring of other object function or key input will not
be executed until the completion of the recipe function.
<Confirming the recipe function execution>
Set such as a lamp, which monitors the recipe in-processing signal of system
signal 2-1, on the GOT screen, and it is possible to confirm whether the recipe
function is executed or not.
System signal 2-1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Recipe in-processing signal
The lamp is lit while the recipe

function is executed.
12 - 24

The lamp goes off at the completion

of the recipe function.
12.2.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the recipe function.
PARTS

(1) Setting number of recipes in a project
Up to 256 recipes can be set in the recipe function.
10
GRAPH, METER
Be sure to install the extended function OS (recipe) to GOT when using the recipe function.
11
(1) Recipe file saved in Memory card/D drive

Only one recipe file can be stored in Memory card/D drive for one recipe function.
For the recipe file data, only the read data are saved and historical data are not saved.
(Old data will be overwritten.)
When historical data are necessary, save data in the computer every time the recipe function is
executed.
(Data saving is possible for G15 only)
(2) File data size
Refer to the following for the data size stored into a memory card/D drive when the recipe function
is used.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
12
RECIPE
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
When using the recipe function, install the option function board to the GOT.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

12.2.4 Precautions
12 - 25
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
12.3 Advanced Recipe Function
The following explains advanced recipe function.
Remark
Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function

For differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function, refer to
below.
Section 12.1 Differences Between the Recipe Function and the
12 - 26

The following explains the required settings and functions for using advanced recipe function.
PARTS
1 Procedure for reading/writing device value with advanced recipe function

The following two methods to read/write device value of controller are shown.
Read/write depending on status of device (ON/OFF)
Read/write in utility
10
GRAPH, METER
The following explains operation procedure for each method.

(1) Read/write of device value depending on status of device (ON/OFF)
Perform read/write of device value depending on status of device (ON/OFF).
Use the device to control the recipe.
11
TRIGGER
(1) When not using the recipe file
To read the value from the device of controller
(
Chapter 12
(2) When using the recipe file)
When not using the advanced recipe file, only writing depending on the status of the
device (ON/OFF) is allowed.
For overview and details for each procedure
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

(1) For setting in GT Designer2
(2) For read/write of device value
Condition and target of reading/writing device value
14
DEBUG
This section
15
OTHERS
Remark
RECIPE
12
To read the value from the device, use the advanced recipe file.
16

12 - 27
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Chapter 12
ACTIONS
(a) When not using advanced recipe file

(b) When using advanced recipe file

Chapter 12
(2) When using the recipe file
(1) When displaying or editing advanced recipe file in PC

Advanced recipe file is stored in binary format file (*. G1P).
After converting this file to CSV file or Unicode text file, edit it in PC.
(2) When editing the file in PC and using it in the advanced recipe function
Edit the file in PC and convert it to binary format file (*. G1P).
(
Remark
This section
(2) Conversion, storage, edit of advanced recipe file)
For overview and details for each procedure

This section
(3) For advanced recipe file

This section
12 - 28

Use of advanced recipe file
PARTS
(2) Read/write of device value in utility

Operation in utility reads/writes the device value.
The advanced recipe function can be used without designing screen for this function.
10
GRAPH, METER
Device Device value
150
250
350
Advanced recipe file
Download the set data to GOT
11
Save record
PLC GOT
Touch the
the utility.
ACTIONS
( Create (Binary format file (*. G1P)).

button on
Advanced
recipe file
(Read the device value)
D10 50
D11 100
D12 150
12
Device Device value

D10
D11
D12
150
250
350
50
100
150
RECIPE
Device value read to advanced

recipe file (binary format
file (*.G1P)) is stored.
Convert binary format file (*.G1P)
to CSV file or Unicode text file. *1
Store the converted file and binary
format file (*.G1P) into PC.
CSV file or Unicode text file

is displayed or edited in PC.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Advanced
recipe file
Device Device value

50
100
150
500
600
700
14
Convert the edited file to binary format

file (*.G1P) in GT Designer2. *2
Transfer binary format
file (*.G1P) to GOT.
Touch the
the utility.
Load record
GOT PLC
button on
Device Device value

D10
D11
D12
*1
(Write the set values

to the device.)
D10 500
D11 600
D12 700
DEBUG
D10
D11
D12
TRIGGER
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
15
File can be converted in GT Designer2 or utility.

For conversion method, select depending on application of use.
(2) Conversion, storage, edit of advanced recipe file)
When G1P file does not exist, store binary format file (*.G1P) in the same hierarchy as that of CSV file/Unicode
text file.
OTHERS
This section
At conversion, binary format file (*.G1P) is required.
16

12 - 29
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(
*2
1 Set in GT Designer2.
Create
3 Touch the
G1P button on the utility to create the advanced recipe file.
4 Touch the Save record PLC
GOT button on the utility to read device value of controller.
5 The read value is stored in the advanced recipe file (binary format file (*.G1P)).
6 Convert binary format file (*.G1P) to CSV file or Unicode text file.
Store the converted file and the binary format file (*.G1P) in PC.
7 Display or edit the file stored at the above
in PC.
8 Convert the edited file to the binary format file (*.G1P) in the GT Designer2.
9 Store the binary format file (*.G1P) in the GOT.
10 Touch the Load record GOT PLC button in the utility to write the set value to the device of controller.
Remark
Details for each procedure

Regarding overview and details for each procedure of
following.
to
, refer to the

This section

This section
12 - 30

GRAPH, METER
11
TRIGGER
Match the advanced recipe file with the project of the advanced recipe setting with
either of the following operations.
Download the advanced recipe setting that matches with the advanced recipe
file to the GOT.
Create the advanced recipe file again.
10
ACTIONS
is required.(
This section
Use of advanced recipe file)
(2) When the advanced recipe file does not match with the project of the advanced
recipe setting
When the advanced recipe file does not match with the project of the advanced
recipe setting, the copying file, the saving/loading record, etc. cannot be operated.
([The file is invalid] is displayed in the utility.)
PARTS
(1) Necessity of the advanced recipe file

When reading/writing device value of controller in utility, the advanced recipe file
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

12 - 31
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
2 Structurally setting recipe

The advanced recipe function can manage multiple recipe information in one advanced recipe setting
with setting in recipe No./block/record.
No.32767
Max. 2048
recipes
No.
10 100
Recipe No. No.
1
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Max. 2048 blocks

No. of device points
is 32767 points.(A total of all blocks)
Max. 240 records
The following explains recipe No./block/record.
(1) For recipe No.

Recipe No. is to identify advanced recipe setting that will be a target of reading/writing the device
value.
(a) Setting example
Set the recipe No. in basic tab of [Advanced Recipe Setting].
(
Section 12.3
(2) (b) Device tab)

Recipe No.
(b) Applicable recipe No.

Recipe No. can be set in range of 1 to 32767.
However, max. No. of advanced recipe setting is 2048 settings.
12 - 32

Section 12.3
10
GRAPH, METER
(a) Setting example

The following explains as example of setting that bit device and word device (signed BIN16
and signed BIN32) exist in one advanced recipe setting.
PARTS
(2) For the block

The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block can perform the following setting.
Setting that multiple device type (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting
(2) (b) Device tab)

2) Set [Device], [Device Type] or [Points] for each block.
11
ACTIONS
1) Specify block number
TRIGGER
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
12
RECIPE
Block 4
(b) Max. No. of block

Max. 2048 block settings can be set in one advanced recipe setting.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

12 - 33
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(1) For max. No. of device points

Max. No. of device points is 32767 points in total for each advanced recipe
setting.
Calculate as 1 point for 1 device regardless of word device or bit device.
However, when device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points for 1 device.
(2) For No. of device points at the multiple blocks setting
In the case of multiple blocks, it is a total for device points of all blocks.
Example:
In the case of block 1: 500 points, block 2: 2000 points, block 3: 30000 points, a
total for No. of device points will be 32500 points. (500 + 2000 + 30000 = 32500
points.)
(3) When setting random device number
Device number can be set in one block is one point.
When setting random device number, set separating block.
(4) When the device type is bit
Device can be set in one block is one point (fixed).
(5) For No. of device points when No. of device points for each block is one point
When setting one point for each block as follows, max. No. of device points will be
2048 points.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)
Example: When all device type is bit
Max. 2048 blocks can be set in

one advanced recipe setting.
When device type is bit, one device can be set in one block.
For this, when all device type is bit, 2048 devices can be set.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)
12 - 34

(a) Setting example

The following shows as example of setting two values (two records) in one device.
(
Section 12.3
PARTS
(3) For the record

The record is setting unit for identifying a groups of device value to read/write.
Setting device value for writing to controller in record unit can set multiple values to the same
device.
10
(2) (b) Device tab)
GRAPH, METER
Specify record number
ACTIONS
11
Record 2
TRIGGER
Record 1
(b) Max. No. of record number

Max. 240 records can be set in one advanced recipe setting.
(1) For specifying method for target of reading/writing device value
(2) For record attribute setting

The attribute can be set to record.
When setting the record attribute, it is available to not set the device value for
each record, and to not change the device value in recipe file.
Record attribute setting)
14
DEBUG
Section 12.3
15
OTHERS
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
This section
RECIPE
16

12 - 35
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
12
3 Condition and target of reading/writing device value

Select the condition of device value reading/writing corresponding to application of use from the
following.
(1) When executing read/write of the device value with specifying common trigger device
Set the trigger device to control all advanced recipe settings.
Use the trigger device to read/write device value.
No.
3
2
No.1
Recipe No.
Specify conditions of recipe No., record No. and trigger conditions

to read/write device value in common trigger device.
(a) Details for device

Device
Bit No.
Signal name
Reading/writing device value of recipe that is specifying in [Recipe No. Storage
External Control Device*1
b0
b1
b2 to
b14
Device] and [Record No. Storage Device] is controlled.

Loading record
ON :
Values are loaded to the device of controller.
trigger signal
OFF :
Saving record
ON :
Device values of controller are saved.
trigger signal
OFF :
Must not be used

Advanced recipe
b15
process error clear

signal
Recipe No.
-
Storage Device*1
Record No.
Storage Device*1
*1
Description
ON :
Advanced recipe process error is cleared.
OFF :
Recipe No. when reading/ writing the device value in [External Control Device] is set.
(Setting range: 1 to 32767)
When setting [External Control Device], [External Control Device], [Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No.
Storage Device] is set with continuous number.
12 - 36

(b) Specification for target of reading/writing device value

Use the device that is shown in previous page (a) to specify target of reading/writing device
value.
PARTS
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
D100. b0 Loading record trigger signal
(External Control Device.b0)
: OFF
D101 [Recipe No. Storage Device]
:2
D102 [Record No. Storage Device] : 1
10
ON
GRAPH, METER
Read/write of device value is

controlled in common trigger device!
<Recipe No.1>
Device
Record 1
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
550
650
750
Device
Record 1
D10
D11
D12
100
200
300
Record 2
150
250
350
(Writing)
D10 100
D11 200
D12 300
12
RECIPE
For settings
Advanced Recipe Common Setting
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Section 12.3
16

12 - 37
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
Record 2
<Recipe No.2>
TRIGGER
: D100
[External Control Device]
[Recipe No. Storage Device] : D101
[Record No. Storage Device] : D102
ACTIONS
11
(2) When executing with specifying condition of writing/reading device value for each advanced recipe
setting
Set the trigger device to read/write device value and targeted record No. in [Trigger Device] of
[Advanced Recipe Setting].
To specify the trigger device for each advanced recipe setting, use the setting as follows.
No. 120
Recipe No. No.
1 100
Set the trigger device for each advanced recipe setting.
(a) Details for device

Write trigger 1, 2
Set a trigger device that will execute data write and its trigger condition (ON/OFF) for the
advanced recipe function.
To execute write at the satisfied of two conditions (AND condition), set the two write trigger
devices.
Read trigger 1, 2
Set a trigger device that will execute data read and its trigger condition (ON/OFF) for the
advanced recipe function.
To execute read at the satisfied of two conditions (AND condition), set the two read trigger
devices.
Record No. device
Set the device stores record No. for target of reading/writing device value.
12 - 38

(b) Specification for target of reading/writing device value

Use the device that is shown in previous page (a) to specify target of reading/writing device
value.
PARTS
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
ON
ON
10
GRAPH, METER
X20 ([Write Trigger 1])

: OFF
X20 ([Write Trigger 2])
: OFF
D100([Record No. Device]) : 1
(Write)
Device
Record 1
Record 2
Device
Record 1
Record 2
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
550
650
750
D10
D11
D12
100
200
300
150
250
350
12
For settings
(2) (a) Basic tab
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Section 12.3
RECIPE
16

12 - 39
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
D10 100
D11 200
D12 300
TRIGGER
<Recipe No.2>
[Write Trigger 1]
: X20
[Write Trigger 2]
: X21
[Record No. Device] : D10
ACTIONS
11
<Recipe No.1>
[Write Trigger 1]
: X10
[Write Trigger 2]
: X11
[Record No. Device] : D0
(3) When executing read/write of device value in utility

Specify advanced recipe file and target record No. in utility to read/write device value of controller.
Write/read the device value without designing dedicated screen.
Touch the record

to read/write.
Touch the
Remark
Load record or Save record

PLC GOT
GOT PLC
For operation in utility

GT15 Users Manual (Section 13.7 Advanced Recipe Information)
12 - 40

9
When storing value read from the device in advanced recipe file, use the file for process management
and production management in PC.
The device value read from controller can be stored in advanced recipe file.
Also, the value in advanced recipe file can be written to device of controller.
PARTS
4 Use of advanced recipe file
10
Remark
Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file

GRAPH, METER

This section
Procedure for reading/writing device value with
advanced recipe function
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
(1) Creating advanced recipe file and storage area

Advanced recipe file is created based on the [Advanced Recipe Setting].
Firstly, perform the [Advanced Recipe Setting].
(a) Automatically creating when reading/writing the device value depending on the status of the
device (ON/OFF)
When the advanced recipe file does not exist at the read/write of the device value, the
advanced recipe file is automatically created.
As the advanced recipe file is automatically created, creating operation for the advanced
recipe file is unnecessary.
12
RECIPE
(
Section 12.3
Advanced recipe setting)
Storage area of advanced recipe file is set in the [Advanced Recipe Setting].
For creating, use in either of the following methods.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1 Set [Recipe File] to [Use] on the basic tab of [Advanced Recipe Setting] in the GT
1Designer2.
DEBUG
14
2 When reading/writing the device value of controller, advanced recipe file is automatically
2created.
Timing of which advanced recipe file is automatically created

The advanced recipe file is automatically created only when the advanced recipe file
setting in the [Recipe File] does not exist.

16
(6) For
12 - 41
SCRIPT FUNCTION
The existing advanced recipe file is not overwritten.(

Section 12.3
setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already)
15
OTHERS
[Recipe File] setting
(b) Creating in utility

The following explains the procedure for previously creating the advanced recipe file when
performing the Advanced Recipe Setting in GT Designer2 and reading/writing device value of
controller in utility only.
1 Touch the Create button on the Advanced Recipe Information in utility.
G1P
1
2 Select the Advanced Recipe Setting.
2
3 Touch the Next button to create the advanced recipe file.
3
Touch the Create button.

G1P
Select the Advanced Recipe Setting.
Touch the Next button.
12 - 42

9
To create the advanced recipe file in utility, use the Advanced Recipe Setting in the
GOT.
Previously perform the Advanced Recipe Setting in GT Designer2 and download to
the GOT.
PARTS
To create the advanced recipe file in utility
GRAPH, METER
10
Project data of Advanced

Recipe Setting
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

12 - 43
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) Conversion, storage, edit of advanced recipe file

The advanced recipe file created in the advanced recipe function is binary format file (*.G1P).
Convert to CSV file or Unicode text file for displaying or editing in PC.
The following explains procedure for conversion, storage, edit of advanced recipe file.
(a) When converting the advanced recipe file in GT Designer2
Use this method for the following case.
When displaying or editing the CSV file/Unicode text file in PC, and then using them in the
GOT
When performing the conversion of advanced recipe file in GT Designer2
1 Store the binary format file (*.G1P) in PC with either of the following methods.
1
Transferring in GT Designer2
Transfer with Resource Upload -> Computer tab of [Communication] [To/From GOT...]
menu.
Storage with memory card
Store the advanced recipe file in memory card and read the data of memory card in PC.
Advanced
recipe file
Memory
card
Memory
card
Advanced
recipe file
[Advanced Recipe]
[Advanced
2 Open the conversion dialog box from the [Common]
2Recipe File Convert...] menu in the GT Designer2 and convert binary format file (*.G1P) to
CSV file/Unicode text file.
12 - 44

1)
PARTS
3 The converted CSV file/Unicode text file are displayed or edited in PC.
3A part of which is applicable to edit in the converted CSV file/Unicode text file is only
record attribute, record name and device value.
2) 3) 4)
GRAPH, METER
10
10)
11)
12)
13)
11
8)
TRIGGER
7)
9)
Applicability of
edit
Description
Recipe No.
Recipe No. is displayed.
2)
Recipe name
Recipe name is displayed.
3)
Setting device
number
Device number is displayed.
4)
Record number
Record number is displayed.
5)
Line number
Line number is displayed.
6)
Device comment
Device comment is displayed.
7)
Device type
Device type is displayed.

BIT
: Bit
BIN16 : Signed BIN16 or unsigned BIN16
BIN32 : Signed BIN32 or unsigned BIN32
BCD16 : BCD16
BCD32 : BCD32
8)
Display type
Display type is displayed.

BIN
: Binary
DEC
: Signed decimal
UNSIGNED_DEC : Unsigned decimal
9)
Device size
Device size is displayed. (Unit: byte)

Bit device or word device (16 bit)
word device (32 bit)
10)
Record No.
Record No. is displayed.
11)
Record comment
13
14
:2
:4
Record comments are displayed, and then edit record comment.
Record attribute
Blank
: Applicable to edit device value*1*3
: Not applicable to edit device value*1*3
: No device value*2*3
DEBUG
Record attribute is displayed, and then edit record attribute.

12)
15
13)
Record update time
Updated time is displayed.
14)
Device value
Device values are displayed, and then edit device value.
: Applicable
*1
: Not applicable
Make sure to set the value into the device value area of the above 14).
(Blank is not allowed.)
When not setting the value, error will occur at converting CSV file/Unicode text file to binary format file (*. G1P).
*2
16
Do not set the value into the device area of the above 14).
(Make the blank.)
Even if setting the value, it is cleared when converting CSV file/Unicode text file to binary format file (*. G1P).
*3
Correspondence to record attribute that is set in GT Designer2 and displayed in CSV file/Unicode text file.
Section 12.3
12
RECIPE
1)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Item
Record attribute setting

OTHERS
No.
6)
12 - 45
SCRIPT FUNCTION
5)
ACTIONS
14)
When using the advanced recipe file edited in PC again, convert the CSV file/Unicode text
file to the binary format file (*.G1P). (
To previous page
4 Store the binary format file (*.G1P) in the memory card and attach the memory card to the
4GOT.
Advanced
recipe file
Memory
card
Memory
card
Advanced
recipe file
(1) Converting CSV file/Unicode text file to the binary format file (*.G1P) in GT
Designer2
When converting, the binary format file (*.G1P) is required.
When the G1P file does not exist, store the binary format file (*.G1P) in the same
hierarchy as that of CSV file/Unicode text file.
(2) For downloading advanced recipe file (PC
GOT)
The advanced recipe file cannot be downloaded in the GT Designer2.
When transferring the advanced recipe from PC to GOT, use the memory card.
12 - 46

PARTS
(e) When converting the advanced recipe file in the utility

Use this method for the following case.
When creating the CSV file/Unicode text file without the GT Designer2, and then displaying
or editing it on PC
1 Select the G1P file in the [Advanced Recipe Information] of the utility and touch the
1GIP CSV or GIP TXT button to convert.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
CSV , G1P
TXT Button
RECIPE
2 Store the converted CSV file/Unicode text file with either of the following methods.
2
Transferring in GT Designer2
Transfer with Resource Upload -> Computer tab of [Communication] [To/From GOT...]
menu.
Storage with memory card
Store the advanced recipe file in the memory card and read the memory card data in PC.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
G1P
Memory
card
Memory
card
Advanced
recipe file
15
OTHERS
3 The converted CSV file/Unicode text file are displayed or edited in PC.
3
16

12 - 47
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Advanced
recipe file
DEBUG
14
Converting the CSV file/Unicode text file to the binary format file (*.G1P) in utility
The file cannot be converted in utility.
When editing the CSV file/Unicode text file in PC and then using it in GOT, refer to
the following.
This section
Designer2
Remark
(2) (a) When converting the advanced recipe file in GT

12 - 48

9
5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error
The presence/absence of error in the advanced recipe function can be checked with the [External
Output the
PARTS
Output Device] of the [Advanced Recipe Common Setting]. (

Section 12.3
executing status of advanced recipe function to device)
When error occurs, the device value of controller cannot be read/written.
10
1 When error occurs, the advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device.
b15) turns on, and the system alarm occurs.
Check the message of system alarm.
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
(Display example)
2 Eliminate the causes of error according to the message of system alarm.
Deletion of advanced system alarms
For the system alarm display
(2) Deletion of system alarms on
: Section 8.7
GOT
4 Turn on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15) to perform
error reset.
When turning on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15),
the advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device. b15) is turned off.
ON
OFF
14
Error occurs!
ON
OFF
DEBUG
Advanced recipe process

error clear signal
(External control device. b15)
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
For the advanced system alarm : Section 8.3

on GOT
RECIPE
12
3 Reset the system alarm.
Advanced recipe process

error notification signal
(External output device. b15)
GRAPH, METER
Eliminate the advanced recipe process error with the following procedure.
15
For read/write while the advanced recipe process error notification signal is ON
OTHERS
When the causes of the advanced recipe process error are eliminated even if the
advanced recipe process error notification signal is ON, device value can be read/
written.

12 - 49
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16

The following explains useful functions for using the advanced recipe function.
1 Record attribute setting

In the advanced recipe function, the presence/absence of device value setting for each record or device
value in the advanced recipe file can be changed.
(1) When device values are not set ([Device Values are not set])
When previously setting this attribute to the record of which device values are not set, file capacity
can be saved.
(a) For reading
(Reading to record 2)
Device
Record 1
Record 2
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
150
250
350
Previously setting when not

setting the device value.
When read the device value,
the read value is stored.
(b) For writing
(Writing to record 2)
12 - 50
Device
Record 1
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
Record 2

Not setting of device value

For not device value setting,
write can be performed.
D10 :
D11 :
D12 :
9
When storing the read value in the record of which the device values are not set
PARTS
The record that is stored the values with reading the device values will be the status
of device value setting, and write will be allowed.
Record 1
Record 2
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
150
250
350
Not setting
Setting
GRAPH, METER
Device
10
D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350
ACTIONS
11
Device value setting
D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350
12
RECIPE
Write is allowed!
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
150
250
350
14
DEBUG
Record 2
500
600
700
15
OTHERS
Record 1
D10
D11
D12
16

12 - 51
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device
TRIGGER
(2) When not overwriting the device value ([Device Values are not overwritten in Recipe file])
Use particular record for being dedicated to store the value for writing to controller device.
(a) For reading
Device
Record 1
Record 2
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
100
200
300
For not allowed to overwrite,

read is not allowed.
D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350
(b) For writing

Device
Record 1
Record 2
D10
D11
D12
500
600
700
100
200
300
Write is allowed!
D10 : 100
D11 : 200
D12 : 300
(1) For check method of record attribute

Record attribute can be checked in the advanced recipe information of the utility.

12 - 52

Setting for record attribute of GT
Record attribute displayed in
Record attribute displayed in CSV
Designer2
utility
file/Unicode text file
(Blank)
(Blank)
VP
Device Values are not overwritten

in Recipe file.
10
GRAPH, METER
Device Values are not set.
Device Values are not set +

Device Values are not overwritten
in Recipe file.
11
TRIGGER
(3) When setting two record attribute simultaneously

Device values cannot be read/written to the record set two record attributes
simultaneously.
When the record will be use is not used presently, set as reserved record.
ACTIONS
(Not setting)
PARTS
(2) Corresponding to setting of record attribute, utility and record attribute displayed
in the CSV file/Unicode text, etc.
The following explains the correspondence.
RECIPE
12
13
For setting method of record attribute
(2) (b) Device tab
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Section 12.3
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
16

12 - 53
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
2 Output the executing status of advanced recipe function to device

Storing the executing status into controller device can check the executing status of advanced recipe
function.
(1) Details for device
Device
Bit No.
Signal name
External Notification Device*1
Set the device to store information regarding to the advanced recipe function.
Record loading
b0
notification
signal
Record saving
b1
notification
signal
b2 to b3
b4
b5
b6 to b13
ON
ON
: Reading the device value of controller
OFF : Completion of reading, or advanced recipe process error occurs.

-
Record load
ON
: Completion of writing the value to controller device
complete signal
OFF
: At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.
Record save
ON
: Completion of reading the device value of controller
complete signal
OFF : At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.
Must not be used
information
displaying signal
ON
Advanced recipe
process error
notification
signal
: Displaying advanced recipe information in utility
OFF : Completion of advanced recipe information of utility

ON
b15
: Writing the value to controller device
OFF : Completion of writing, or advanced recipe process error occurs.
Must not be used
Advanced recipe
b14
Description
: Advanced recipe process error is occurring.
OFF : Advanced recipe process error is not occurring.

Or, eliminate the causes of error and turn on the advanced recipe process error
clear signal (external control device. b15).
(
This section
Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe
process error)
Recipe No.
Notification
Device*1
Notify the recipe No. (1 to 32767).

The stored Recipe No. is updated at read/write of device value.
Record No.
Notification
Device*1
*1
Notify the recipe No. (1 to 240).

The stored Recipe No. is updated at read/write of device value.
When setting [External notification Device], [External Control Device], [Recipe No. Notification Device] and
[Record No. Notification Device] is set with continuous number.
12 - 54

(2) Timing of ON/OFF

Timing of ON/OFF for each signal is shown.
(a) At being normally completed
PARTS
Next read/write is started.
ON
OFF
Read/Write trigger
10
Record saving/loading notification signal

(External notification device. b0/b1)
OFF
Record save/load complete signal

OFF
GRAPH, METER
ON
ON
Advanced recipe process error notification

OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)
ACTIONS
11
(b) At being faulty completed
TRIGGER
ON
OFF
Read/write trigger
ON
Record saving/loading notification signal
When error occurs,

read/write is not allowed. *1
OFF
12
Error occurs!
OFF
When the causes of the advanced recipe process error is eliminated even if the advanced recipe process error
notification signal turns on, read/write of device value is allowed.
13
Device value reading/writing when advanced recipe information displaying signal turns
on
Section 12.3
(2) When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied
14
simultaneously
For setting method
Section 12.3
DEBUG

Advanced Recipe Common Setting
15
OTHERS
Remark
16
Setting device to store executing status of recipe

12 - 55
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
RECIPE
ON
Advanced recipe process error notification

OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Record save/load complete signal

The advanced recipe function can perform the following operation in utility.
Creating folder
Deleting folder
Copying file
Deleting file
Renaming file
Moving file
Creating file
Saving record
Loading record
Matching record
Delete device value Converting G1P
CSV/Unicode text
The recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading the file to PC.
Remark

(1) Advanced recipe file operation

The following operation of advanced recipe file is allowed.
The file can be operated on GOT without reading the file to PC.
Item
Description
The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is created.
The folder is created for each line or line of products, and the advanced recipe file can be managed.
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 1
Creating folder
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 2
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 3
Management with creating folder for each line or line of products!

The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is deleted.
Delete!
Deleting folder
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 1
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 2
Advanced recipe ]
file storage
folder for line 3
The advanced recipe file is copied.

Use it when the advanced recipe file is backed up.
Copy!
Copying file
Advanced
recipe file

storage folder.
The advanced recipe file is deleted.

Delete!
Deleting file
Advanced
recipe file
12 - 56

Item
Description
The advanced recipe file is renamed.
ARP00001.G1P
PARTS
Renaming file!
Renaming file
ARP00002.G1P
10
The advanced recipe file is moved to other folder.
GRAPH, METER
Use it when the advanced recipe file is made backup.

Moving!
Moving file
Advanced
recipe file
11
ACTIONS

storage folder.
The advanced recipe file is newly created.

Creating file
TRIGGER
(1) Creating advanced recipe file and storage area)
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Section 12.3
16

12 - 57
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(2) Operation for executing the recipe

The following operation for executing the advanced recipe is allowed.
The operation for the advanced recipe can be executed without designing dedicated screen.
Item
Load record
GOT
PLC
Save record
PLC
GOT
Description
The device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value) is written to controller
device.(
Section 12.3
Condition and target of reading/writing device value)
The device value of controller is read and stored in the specified record.
(
Section 12.3
Condition and target of reading/writing device value)
This operation checks whether the device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value)
matches with the device value of controller.
Use it to check whether the read value is reflected to the advanced recipe file.
Device
D10
D11
D12
Match records
GOT
Record 1 Record 2
500
600
700
Check whether
they are matched!
100
200
300
D10 500
D11 600
D12 700
PLC
Touch !
The device value (selected record value) in the advanced recipe file is deleted.
When the device value is deleted, the record attribute will be status for not setting device value.
(
Delete device value
This section
Device
D10
D11
D12
(1)When device values are not set ([Device Values are not set]))
Record 1 Record 2
500
600
700
100
200
300
Delete the selected record device value!
(3) Operation for converting G1P

CSV file/Unicode text file
Convert the advanced recipe file (binary format file (*.G1P) to CSV file or Unicode text file.
As the advanced recipe file created in the advanced recipe file is binary format, convert the file
when it is displayed or edited.
Remark
(1) For operation in utility

Section 12.3
12 - 58

12.3.3 Settings
1 Perform either of the following operations
GRAPH, METER
10
(Advanced Recipe Setting)
(Advanced Recipe File Convert)
When setting in Workspace(Project)

(1) Advanced recipe common
in Workspace (Project). The setting
12
RECIPE
Double-click
dialog box is displayed.
Double-click
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
(2) Advanced recipe setting
14
DEBUG
Right-click
in Workspace(Project) to select [New], and the
setting dialog box will appear.
15
OTHERS
Right-click
(3) Advanced recipe file convert

The advanced recipe file convert cannot be performed in the project workspace.
And so, open the conversion screen from the menu.

12.3.3 Settings
12 - 59
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
(Advanced Recipe Common)
PARTS
Select the menu of the advanced recipe

[Common]
[Advanced Recipe]
[Advanced Recipe Common]
[Advanced Recipe Setting]
[Advanced Recipe File Convert...]
Click the icon of the advanced recipe

1 Advanced Recipe Common Setting
Set the device to control the advanced recipe function.
Item
Description
Specify common trigger device, and then set the device to read/write the device value.
When setting [External Control Device], item device that follow is automatically set in continuous.
External Control Information

(
Section 12.3
(1) When executing read/write of the device value with specifying common trigger
device)
External Control
Set the device to control read/write of the recipe or device value specified in [Recipe No. Storage Device] and
Device
[Record No. Storage Device].
Recipe No.
Storage Device
Record No.
Storage Device

Set the device that outputs the executing status for advanced recipe.
External Notification
When set [External Notification Device], item device that follow is automatically set in continuous.
Information
(
Section 12.3
Output the executing status of advanced recipe function to device)
External
Notification
Set the device to store information regarding to the advanced recipe function.
Information
Recipe No.
Notification Device
Record No.
Notification Device
Delete
12 - 60
Set the device on writing device value and for storing recipe No. (1 to 32767).
Set the device on writing device value and for storing recipe No. (1 to 240).
Click the Delete button to delete settings of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe Setting].

10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Advanced recipe setting (List)

Display a list of the advanced recipe setting to manage it.
Max. 2048 advanced recipe setting can be set.
This screen is displayed only when [Common]
[Advanced Recipe]
menu is selected.
When the setting is attempted from the project workspace, it is not displayed.
PARTS
2 Advanced recipe setting
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
Description
13
Click this button when setting a new advanced recipe, and the setting dialog box will appear.
(
This section
(2) Advanced recipe setting)
Click this button to when editing the selected advanced recipe setting, and the setting dialog box will appear.
Copy
Paste
This section
(2) Advanced recipe setting)
Click this button to copy the selected advanced recipe setting.
14
Click this button when pasting the copied advanced recipe setting to the advanced recipe setting list.
The destination of the advanced recipe setting can be set.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected advanced recipe setting.
Delete All
Click this button to delete all advanced recipe setting.
Close
Click this button to close the setting dialog box of advanced recipe setting (list).
DEBUG
Edit
OTHERS
15
16

12 - 61
SCRIPT FUNCTION
New
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Item
(2) Advanced recipe setting

(a) Basic tab
Set the use/not used of advanced recipe file, and trigger device.
Basic
Device
Item
Description
Set the recipe No. (1 to 32767) of advanced recipe to set.
Recipe No.
(
Section 12.3
(1) For recipe No.)
Set a recipe name.

Recipe Name

The set recipe name is displayed at creating the advanced recipe file in the utility.
Recipe File
Set the advanced recipe file setting. (
Section 12.3
Use of advanced recipe file)
Use/Not Used
Select the use/not used of advanced recipe file.
Drive Name

Folder
Name*1

By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common]
File
Name*1
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-) can be used.

By default, the file name is set to ARP
.(
is recipe No..)
Set the trigger conditions to read/write.
Section 5.1 Device Setting

Trigger Device
Section 12.3
(2) When executing with specifying condition of writing/reading device value for each
advanced recipe setting

Write Trigger 1
Write Trigger 2
Read Trigger 1
Read Trigger 2
When setting the trigger conditions to write for each advanced recipe setting, check them.
Set the device for executing write and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF) after checking them.
Check this item to enable data write when both of two conditions are satisfied.
Set the device and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF)
When setting the trigger conditions to read for each advanced recipe setting, check the device and its trigger
conditions (ON/OFF) after checking.
Check this item to enable data read when both of two conditions are satisfied.
Set the device and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF).
Set the device to store record No. of write/read target.
Record No.
Device
(
*1
12 - 62
Section 12.3
(3) For the record)

PARTS

10
File name
Folder name
(2 characters)
(1 character)
GRAPH, METER
Example: G1P file Path in memory card (for GT15)
.G1L
Extension
(4 characters)
11
ACTIONS
Drive name
(1 character)
TRIGGER
Max. 78 characters
12

RECIPE
(Setting example)
Project1
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
abc

COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

12 - 63
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
(b) Device tab

Set the device setting.
Basic
Device
Item
Description
Set the block number in the advanced recipe setting.
Block Number
Section 12.3
(2) For the block)
Set the record number in the advanced recipe setting.

Record Number
Section 12.3
(Insert Block)
(3) For the record)

: Insert block.
When inserting, select the line.
(Insert Record) : Insert record.

When inserting, select the line of record.
Advanced recipe edit button
(Cut)
: Cut the selected item.
(Copy)
: Copy the selected item.
(Paste)
: Paste the cut/copied.
(Clear)
: Make all the selected device values of record to 0.
(Delete)
: Delete the selected record.

When deleting, select the column of record.
(Import) *1
: Reads out the advanced recipe setting that has been edited in a CSV file / Unicode text
file to GT Designer2.
(Export) *1
: Saves the advanced recipe setting that has been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file /
Unicode text file.
Record Attr*1
Click the Record Attr button to change record attribute.

When changing, select the column of record.
12 - 64

Device
Item
Description
Device List
A list of the devices that are set to read or write the advanced recipe function data is displayed.
PARTS
Set the device that executes read/write the advanced recipe function data.
Device
Select the data type of the devices.(

Bit
Device Type
10
: When reading/writing ON/OFF of bit device, select it.
Signed BIN16
: When reading/writing the signed 16-bit binary value, select it.
Unsigned BIN16
: When reading/writing the unsigned 16-bit binary value, select it.
Signed BIN32
: When reading/writing the signed 32-bit binary value, select it.
Unsigned BIN32
: When reading/writing the unsigned 32-bit binary value, select it.
BCD16
: When reading/writing 16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value, select it.
BCD32
: When reading/writing 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value, select it.
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Set the device points to read/write in block unit.

The set the continuous device points from head device are set.
Display Type
Bit
: 1 point
Signed BIN16/unsigned BIN16/BCD16
: 1 to 32767 points
Signed BIN32/unsigned BIN32/BCD32
: 1 to 16383 points
TRIGGER
Applicable points differ depending on [Device Type].
Points
Display type of data to read/write is displayed.
12
Set the device comment.

Device Comment
Device comment can be input max. 32 characters in spite of 1 byte or 2 byte characters.
The set device comment is displayed in the CSV file/Unicode text file.
Set the value to read/write.
RECIPE
The record number can be changed in [Record Number].
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Record
16

12 - 65
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic
*1 About import and export

It is possible to edit an exported CSV file / Unicode file using such as spreadsheet software.
After editing, the CSV file / Unicode file can be read out to GT Designer2 by importing the file.
Example: Import/export of a CSV file

Microsoft R Excel, etc.
Addition is displayed.

used.
12 - 66

*2 Record Attribute
Section 12.3
Record attribute setting)
PARTS
Change the selected record attribute. (
Item
Description
The selecting record No. is displayed.
11
ACTIONS
Set the record comment.

The record comment can be input max. 32 characters regardless of 1 byte or 2 byte characters.
The record comment is displayed in utility at saving/loading record.
TRIGGER
Use particular record for being dedicated to store the value for writing to controller device.
12
Differences between [Clear], [Delete] and [Device Values are not set]
[Clear] makes all device values in record to 0 without deleting the record.
[Delete] deletes the selected record itself.
[Device Values are not set] makes the device value of the selected record to blank.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
overwritten in Recipe file
14
DEBUG
Device Values are not
When previously setting this attribute to the record of which device values are not set, file capacity can be saved.
15
OTHERS
Device Values are not set
RECIPE
Record Comment
16

12 - 67
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Record No.
GRAPH, METER
10
12.3.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the advanced recipe function.

(1) Setting number of advanced recipes in a project
Up to 2048 recipes can be set in the advanced recipe function.
(2) For the device to set in [Advanced Recipe Common Setting]
[External Control Information] and [External Notification Information] cannot be set the same
device.
Also, they cannot be overlapped with the following devices.
Switching screen device Switching station No. device Device of system information
(3) Estimate of processing time
It takes processing time depending on block numbers of advanced recipe setting.
To reduce processing, decrease the block number.
(Reference value)
QCPU and CPU directly connection (device points: 32767 points setting, transmission speed:
115200bps)
For 1 block setting
: Approximately 17 seconds
For 2048 block settings
: Approximately 4 minutes
(4) Folder to store the recipe file
Do not overlap the file of other functions (advanced alarm function or other functions) with folder to
store.
When performing the overlapped setting, the recipe file and the file of other functions are stored
together in folder.
The file of other functions is not displayed in utility.
For it, as the file in folder cannot be deleted, deleting folder in utility will not be allowed.
(5) For using utility
When operating advanced recipe in utility, set the [Recipe Name].
When not setting the [Recipe Name], only recipe No. is displayed at creating advanced recipe file in
utility.
(a) Setting number
The advanced recipe function cannot be used when the object setting exceeds the user area
of the GOT in size by the setting in the advanced recipe setting.
Therefore, any of the settings (device number, record number, etc.) may not be set at the
maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method of the setting size, refer to the following.
Section 2.4
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
12 - 68

12.3.5 Precautions
(b) Saving a file

The memory card must be larger in size than the file to be saved.
(d) The relationship between the record number and the setting size
When treating many data groups in the recipe, using the record to reduce the setting size is
better than increasing the setting number of the advanced recipe function.
11
12
RECIPE
(e) Recipe device value setting

When not setting the default value of the recipe, the setting size of the advanced recipe
function can be made smaller by checking [Device Values are not set] on GT Designer2. (The
file size does not change.)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Example: Setting size when 200 data groups are treated

(1 record 200 setting) size > (200 records 1 setting) size
10
GRAPH, METER
(c) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size
The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the
device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.
PARTS
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

12.3.5 Precautions
12 - 69
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Section 2.4
Be sure to install the extended function OS (Advanced recipe) to GOT when using the Advanced recipe
function.

When using the Advanced recipe function, install the option function board to the GOT.

(1) Record number applicable to read/write
Record number applicable to read/write in one setting is one record.
Multiple records cannot be read/written simultaneously.
Read/write is performed
in record unit.
(2) When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously

(a) When other trigger conditions are satisfied while reading/writing, the satisfied trigger conditions
are ignored.
ON
*1
Write trigger
(Example: Recipe No.1 trigger
of advanced recipe setting)
OFF
Write trigger*1
(Example: Recipe No.2 trigger
of advanced recipe setting)
OFF
ON
Ignored!
Executed!
Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device. b0)
*1
Correspond to trigger are shown below.
Read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe Common Setting]

Read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe Setting]
12 - 70

12.3.5 Precautions
(b) When trigger conditions of different recipe No. are satisfied simultaneously
Execute reading/writing prior to recipe of small number.
Write trigger of advanced

recipe setting (recipe No.1)
OFF

OFF

OFF
PARTS
ON
ON
10
GRAPH, METER
ON
ON
(External notification device.b0)
Processing for Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1
recipe No.2
recipe No.3
11
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
(c) When trigger conditions of read/write are satisfied simultaneously

Execute prior to read.
Execute write after completion of reading.
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced
Recipe Setting] (recipe No.1)
OFF
Read trigger of [Advanced

OFF
ON
12
Record saving notification signal

OFF
Record loading notification signal

OFF
RECIPE
ON
ON
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(d) When trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe
Setting] are satisfied simultaneously
Execute with prior to trigger conditions of advanced recipe setting.
ON
Recipe Common Setting]
OFF
Write trigger of
OFF
14
ON
DEBUG
ON
OTHERS
15

12.3.5 Precautions
12 - 71
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(e) When trigger conditions are not satisfied before processing turn has come
When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously, the processing is executed
because they are not satisfied before processing turn has come.
ON

OFF

OFF

OFF
ON
ON
When conditions of recipe

No.3 are not satisfied at
the processing, the processing
is not executed.
ON

(f)
Processing
for recipe No.1
Processing for
recipe No.2
When the trigger conditions are satisfied while displaying advanced recipe information in utility
The trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] or [Advanced Recipe Setting]
are ignored.
The presence/absence of utility operation can be checked in [External Notification Device] of
[Advanced Recipe Common Setting].
ON
Recipe Common Setting]
OFF

Recipe Setting]
OFF
All kinds of trigger are ignored

while the advanced recipe
information displaying signal
turns on.
ON
Advanced recipe information
OFF
displaying signal
(3) For executing multiple recipes in order

Make the status of the trigger conditions satisfied until executing the processing.
When performing the process again after completion of the process, make the status of the trigger
conditions to not satisfied, and then satisfied again.
Do not execute the
process until trigger
conditions will be status
of not satisfied once.
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
ON

12 - 72

12.3.5 Precautions
Processing for
recipe No.1
Processing for
recipe No.2
Processing for
recipe No.1
9
Useful method for executing multiple recipes in order
OFF) in
OFF at
10
GRAPH, METER
ON
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe Setting] OFF

(recipe No.2)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
ON
Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1
recipe No.2
When setting the same devices to multiple trigger devices, multiple recipes can be
executed depending on the status of one device (OFF
ON
OFF) in order.
(4) When changing read/write target
Change read/write target (recipe No., record No.) after record load/save complete signal turns on.
When changing before record load/save complete signal turns on, next read/write may not be
normally performed.
(5) When read/write cannot be performed
When binary format file (*.G1P) of the same file name created in different project exist, device
value cannot be read/written.
Read/write it after deleting binary format file (*.G1P).
(6) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already
When the advanced recipe file setting in [Recipe File] exists already, the change is not reflected to
the advanced recipe file even if changing the setting (device value, record number, etc.) in GT
Designer2.
For it, device value cannot be read/written in the changed settings.
When reading/writing device value in the changed settings, create the advanced recipe file with the
following procedure again.
12
13
14
DEBUG
1 Perform either of the following operations in utility.

Delete the advanced recipe file.
Change the file name of the advanced recipe file.
Move the existing advanced recipe file to other area.
TRIGGER
Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1
recipe No.2
ACTIONS
11
OFF
RECIPE
Record loading notification signal

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe Setting] OFF

(recipe No.1)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
PARTS
Turn off satisfied trigger conditions (trigger conditions are satisfied at ON

the advanced recipe setting.
Set the trigger device to OFF
ON (trigger conditions are not satisfied)
the status.
15
2 Download the changed advanced recipe setting into GOT.
16
12 - 73
SCRIPT FUNCTION

12.3.5 Precautions
OTHERS
3 Create the advanced recipe file.

When reading/writing device value depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
As reading/writing device value, the file is automatically create.
When reading/writing device value in utility
The advanced recipe file is created in utility.
(7) For setting change when error occurs

When error occurs, recipe file may be created.
When changing the setting in GT Designer2 and reading/writing device value with the changed
settings, create the advanced recipe file again.
(
This section
(6) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already)
(8) When reading/writing the device value in advanced recipe file moved or renamed
Match the [Recipe File] of the advanced recipe setting to the file of moved or renamed.
Download the advanced recipe setting into GOT after setting change.
(9) For Unicode text file converted in utility or GT Designer2
12 - 74

12.3.5 Precautions
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
13.1 Hard Copy
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
This function is used to save the currently displayed GOT monitor screen to memory card in BMP/JPG file
format.
This function can be executed by bit device's ON/OFF or touching the touch switch (extension: Hard copy).
The BMP/JPEG files saved in memory card can be used for various documents on the computer.
GOT
Line A pro. situ.
12
Screen oper. meth.
Line A pro. situ.
RECIPE
Save in
BMP/JPEG
format
Printer
Monitor screen can be used

in various document.
13
GOT status during execution of hard copy function
14
DEBUG
When the hard copy function is executed, GOT will interrupt the monitor screen
display.
As the monitor display reappears after completion of the hard copy, please wait for a
while.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
PC
(Edit)
OTHERS
15
16
13.1 Hard Copy
13 - 1
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Memory card

Auxiliary
setting
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
For hard copy, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
(1) Functions relevant to hard copy and others
(1) Functions relevant to hard copy and others

Hardcopy Sub-signal
Notifies that the number of files in the memory card is
close to the upper limit (9999).
A1254 A1254
B 348 B 348
Number of files saved in

memory card is 9900 to 9999.
13 - 2
13.1 Hard Copy

Key
window
13.1.2 Settings
PARTS
[Hard Copy] from the menu.

project work space.
on the
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
16
13.1 Hard Copy

13.1.2 Settings
13 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

Set the output target and the style of the hard copy.
Items
Drive Name
Description
The drive name of the destination is displayed.
Folder Name*1

The current project folder name is displayed by default.
(
Enter the file name.

File Name*1
Style
Select the format (BMP/JPEG) of the saved file.
SNAP is displayed by default.
Select the processing method for the case that memory card capacity is insufficient or the number of saved
files exceeds the maximum (file No.: 9999).
Not checked
: New monitor screen will not be saved in memory card when memory card
Checked
: Execute the following operation according to the memory card status.
capacity is insufficient or the more than the max. number files (9999) exists.
The minimum number's file is

deleted when capacity is
exceeded and make initial
With spare capacity in the
No spare capacity in the
memory card
memory card
state when the maximum is
Less than 9998
Creates the file with he number
Deletes the file of the smallest
filled
files in the memory
next to the exiting largest file
No. and creates a file with the
card
number in the memory card
number next to the largest one.
9999 files in the

memory card
Deletes all the data in memory card and create a new No.1 file.
(Data-deletion timing can be confirmed in the system information
(system signal 2-1. b12).)
13 - 4
13.1 Hard Copy

Items
Description
Start Trigger
Set the device to start the hard copy.

Set the watch cycle of start trigger in the unit of second within a range from 2 to 60 seconds.
Trigger Watch Cycle

Writing Notification Device*2
PARTS
Set the bit device of the start trigger to remain on or off for the set trigger watch cycle or more.
Set a device by which file writing is notified.
10
Set a device by which a file writing error is notified.
Device*3
File name
No. of screens stored on
JPEG file
1st screen
SNAP0001.BMP
SNAP0001.JPG
2nd screen
SNAP0002.BMP
SNAP0002.JPG
3rd screen
SNAP0003.BMP
SNAP0003.JPG
9999th screen
SNAP9999.BMP
SNAP9999.JPG
12
RECIPE
BMP file
13
A :\
Folder name
(2 characters)
File name
(1 character)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Example: BMP file Path in memory card
14
.BMP
Extension
(4 characters)
DEBUG
Drive name
(1 character)
15
OTHERS
Max. 78 characters
16
13.1 Hard Copy

13 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
memory card
11
TRIGGER
(1) Serial No. in file name

When a BMP/JPEG file is output to the memory card, a serial No. is appended to the set file name.
The BMP/JPEG files stored on the memory card can be read out to a PC using image processing
software.
Example: Storing data with the default file name (SNAP)
ACTIONS
*1 Folder Name, File Name
GRAPH, METER
Refer to the following for the details about *1 to *3.
Remark

(Setting example)
Project1
abc

COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
*2 Writing Notification Device
While file writing is being executed, the specified bit device is turned ON.
If this device is ON, writing of any other file cannot be executed. In this case, execute the writing after the
device turns OFF.
*3 Writing Error Notification Device
When an error occurs in file writing, the specified bit device is turned ON.
Since this device does not automatically turn OFF even if the system is recovered from the error, turn it off
manually.
13 - 6
13.1 Hard Copy

13.1.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the hard copy function.
PARTS

(1) Number of hard copy function settings for one project
Only one hard copy function setting is available.
12
RECIPE
(2) Hard copy during touch operation

If the memory card is set as the drive for saving, hard copy cannot be executed by [Start Trigger]
during screen touch operation or OFF delay action caused by touch operation.
In this case, hard copy is executed at the next [Watch Cycle].
11
ACTIONS
(1) Bit device for start trigger

Be sure to turn on or off the bit device for start trigger, which is set in [Trigger Watch Cycle], for the
set trigger watch cycle or more.
When turning it on by a touch switch, set the touch switch operation to Bit SET/Bit ALT and keep
the ON state for the set trigger watch cycle or more.
The hard copy is not executed even if it turns ON for 2 seconds or more with bit momentary setting.
TRIGGER
GRAPH, METER
10
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
13.1 Hard Copy

13.1.4 Precautions
13 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
13.2 Bar Code Function
This function is to connect the bar code reader to GOT and write the data read by the bar code reader into
controller.
The bar code reader is connected to RS-232 interface of GOT.
Read data
"123456789"
D0
D1
D2
Bar code
D3
D4
123456789
D5
<GOT>
9
(00 H)
2
(32 H)
4
(34 H)
6
(36 H)
8
(38 H)
SP
(20 H)
(09 H)
1
(31 H)
3
(33 H)
5
( 35H)
7
(37 H)
9
(39 H)
Read byte
number
Storage
data
< QCPU Q (mode) >
Read data
Terminator
CR
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
38H
39H
0DH
Remark
Method for connecting bar code reader to GOT

For system configuration and communication setting to connect bar code reader to
GOT, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Chapter 25 Bar Code Reader
Connection)
13 - 8
System
information
GOT
internal
devices
Key
window
For bar code function, relevant settings are available in addition to the settings described in this section.
1 System information(
GRAPH, METER
(1) Functions relevant to bar code function only

Relevant to bar code function only.
(1) Functions relevant to bar code function only
11
Bar code input read complete signal
(Read device: System signal 1-1.b5)
(Read device: System signal 1-1.b6)
Switch enabled/disabled of bar code function.
Bar code input signal can be turned OFF.
ACTIONS
Bar code input disable signal
Bar code
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
enable
10
disable
TRIGGER
Auxiliary
setting
PARTS
12
RECIPE
Bar code input signal turns OFF.
Bar code input signal

(Write device: System signal 2-1.b6)
Storing the data read with bar code reader into the
13
The data read is stored

into the device with bar
code reader.
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

13 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
bar code
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
specified device can be notified.
13.2.2 Required knowledge for setting

The following explains the required setting and function for using bar code function.
1 Data storage and device points read by bar code reader

(1) Device that data can be stored
The data can be stored into word device.
Word of bit device cannot be specified.
(2) Max. No. of device points
Max. 32 points can be set.
(The data read by bar code reader can be stored in max. 31 points of device.)
(3) Data stored in the device
Data read by the bar code reader is written into controller devices as ASCII data.
Example: Read data
:F123456789
Order of writing data :low
high
(a) When the number of read data is less than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 8)
Write device
Stored data
ASCII data
D0
0009H
D1
3231H
21
D2
3433H
43
D3
3635H
65
D4
3837H
87
D5
2039H
D6
2020H
D7
2020H
Writes the bytes that have been read

Writes the read data in the order of increasing bytes
When byte number of the read data is odd, the space

(20H) is written to higher byte of the last data.
Also, 20H is written to the device exceed the read data.
The set device points of data are written.
Space
(b) When the number of the read data is more than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 4)
Write device
Stored data
ASCII data
D0
0009H
D1
3231H
21
D2
3433H
43
D3
3635H
65
Writes the bytes that have been read

Writes the read data in order of increasing bytes
Discard the data beyond the set device points
13 - 10

9
2 Order of writing data to controller
(1) Low
High
Write the data to controller device in order of lower 8 bits
PARTS
When writing the data read by bar code reader to controller, set the order of writing.
higher 8 bits.
Storage in order of lower 8 bits
higher 8 bits.
10
Read data
"12345"
(00 H)
2
D1
(32 H)
4
D2
(34 H)
12345
D3
<GOT>
(20 H)
(05 H)
1
(31 H)
3
(33 H)
5
(35 H)
Read byte
number
GRAPH, METER
D0
Bar code
Storage
data
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Terminator
Read data
1
CR
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
0DH
12
(2) High
Low
Write the data to controller device in order of higher 8 bits
RECIPE
(For header: none, terminator: CR)
lower 8 bits.
Storage in order of higher 8 bits
13
lower 8 bits.
D0
Bar code
12345
(00 H)
1
D1
(31 H)
3
D2
(33 H)
5
D3
(35 H)
(05 H)
2
(32 H)
4
(34 H)
Read byte
number
Storage
data
14
(20 H)
DEBUG
<GOT>
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Read data
"12345"
Read data
15
Terminator
CR
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
0DH
OTHERS
(For header: none, terminator: CR)

13 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
3 Header/terminator
The header/terminator of the bar code read by bar code reader can be set.
The following shows applicable header/terminator.
Items
Description
Header
None (Default), STX
Terminator
ETX, LF, CR (Default), CR+LF
The following explains header/terminator as example of reading "12345" by bar code reader.
(1) Header
(a) None (Default)
Set when not adding the header to the head of data.
Read data
1
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
(b) STX
Set when adding the STX to the head of data.
Header
Read data
STX
02H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
(2) Terminator
(a) ETX
Set when adding the ETX to the end of data.
Terminator
Read data
ETX
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
03H
(b) LF
Set when adding the LF to the end of data.
Read data
Terminator
LF
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
0AH
(c) CR (Default)
Set when adding the CR to the end of data.
Read data
Terminator
CR
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
0DH
(d) CR+LF
Set when adding the CR+LF to the end of data.
Read data
13 - 12
Terminator
CR
LF
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
0DH
0AH

13.2.3 Settings
PARTS
[Bar Code] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make settings with reference to the following explanations.
in the
project workspace.
GRAPH, METER
10
When making the setting in the project workspace
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
16

13.2.3 Settings
13 - 13
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

Set the device in which the data read by the bar code reader is stored.
Items
Description
Set the head device of those used for storing the data read by the bar code reader.
Device
Device Points
Set the points of device used for storing the read data (2 to 32)
Set the header of bar code read by bar code reader.
Header
None
: No header
STX
: Add the STX to the header.
Set the terminator of bar code read by bar code reader.

ETX
Terminator
: Is added to the terminator.
LF
CR
CR+LF : Is added to the terminator.

Set the order of writing data to controller device.
Writing Byte Order
Delete
13 - 14
Low
High : The data is written to controller device in order of lower 8 bits
higher 8 bits.
High
Low : The data is written to controller device in order of higher 8 bits
lower 8 bits.
Click the Delete button to delete the settings.

13.2.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using bar code function.
PARTS

(1) Number of settable bar code function
Only one bar code function can be set for each project.
10
GRAPH, METER
(2) Usage of bar code function based on GOT connection type

The bar code function is available when not using GOT internal RS-232 interface.
(3) Bar code that can be read
GOT is not available to two-dimensional code.
For the code that can be read, refer to the following technical news.
11
12
RECIPE
For the operation-checked models, refer to List of valid devices applicable for
GOT1000 Series (T10-0039) separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for
Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page.
(MELFANSweb home page:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric. co. jp/melfansweb/
english/index_e. htm)
TRIGGER
For the operation-checked models
(4) System information setting

(a) System information
Be sure to set the system information (System Signal 1-1, System Signal 2-1).
Without setting it, the bar code function cannot be used.
Refer to the following for details of the system information.
13

(b) The status of System Signal and the action of the bar code reader function
If the following system signals are ON, the data read by the bar code reader is not written to
controller.
Note that the Barcode input signal and Barcode input read complete signal can be turned off
automatically by using the sequence program etc. (Refer to the following (c).)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Remark
ACTIONS
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series
14
b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
DEBUG
System signal 1-1

b0
Bar code input invalid signal

Bar code input read complete signal
15
System signal 2-1

b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
OTHERS
b14
Bar code input signal
16

13.2.5 Precautions
13 - 15
SCRIPT FUNCTION
b15
(c) Execution timing of the Barcode input signal and Barcode input read complete signal and a
sequence program example
Bar code input signal (system signal 2-1. b6)
When the data read by the bar code reader are stored in the specified device,
this signal is turned ON.
To turn it OFF, turn the bar code input read complete signal ON.
Bar code input read complete signal (system signal1-1. b6)
Turning ON this signal turns OFF the bar code input signal.
This signal is to be turned OFF by users.
<Relation between bar code input and signals>
Data read by
bar code reader
1234567890123ET
Store the read

data to the
specified device
"1234567890123ET"
ON
Bar code
input signal
Bar code input
read complete
signal
OFF
ON
*1
OFF
*1 Turn the bar code input signal and the bar code input complete signal OFF after reading bar codes.
Otherwise, the bar code reader will not read data next time.
<Sequence program example (For QCPU)>

It is advisable to create a sequence program so that the bar code input read complete signal
will turn OFF when the bar code input signal is turned OFF.
System signal 1-1D10 DeviceD100
System signal 2-1D12 Device points20
Signal for using in sequence program
Bar code input read complete signalM106
Bar code input signalM126
After RUN, OFF for 1 scan onlySM403
Transfer the value of D10 to M100 to M115

Store bar code input complete signal in M106
Transfer value of D12 to M120 to M135
Store bar code input signal in M126
After standby until bar code data is stored in D100, transfer
the value of D100 to D119 to W100 to W119
Turn M106 ON GOT turns M126
OFF after M106 is turned ON.
Standby until M126 is OFF, turn M106 OFF
Transfer the value of M100 to M115 to D10
13 - 16

13.2.5 Precautions
9
2 Precaution for OS
To use the bar code function, install the extended function OS (bar code) in GOT.
PARTS
3 Precaution for hardware

(1) System configuration
Refer to the following manuals for the system configuration for using the bar code reader.
10
GRAPH, METER
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15

13.2.5 Precautions
13 - 17
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
14. DEBUG
14.1 System Monitoring Function
The device of a PLC CPU and buffer memory of an intelligent function module can be monitored or tested
with a dedicated screen.
Users do not have to prepare a debugging screen for checking devices.
DEVICE MONITOR TEST
MENU FORM
SET
ChNo.[1]NetNo.[ 0]ST [FF]
Precautions on the system monitoring function

This section describes operations for setting the system monitoring function. For
precautions on using the system monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual
1 How to activate system monitor

Refer to arrangement and setting of touch switches.
Section 6.2.5 Setting items of special function switch
Remark
Activating System Monitor by other than touch switches

This function can be activated by the utility without setting a touch switch.
GT15 User's Manual (Chapter 14 GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG & SELF CHECK))
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the system monitoring function.
For the precautions other than those below, refer to the precautions for touch switches.
(1) Precautions on OS
When using the system monitoring function, install Extended function OS (System monitor) to the
GOT.
14 - 1
14.1 System Monitoring Function
PARTS
14.2 Ladder Monitoring Function
10
GRAPH, METER
The sequence program of a PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format with a dedicated screen.
By using the ladder monitoring function, error causes can be investigated on a GOT.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

This section describes operations for setting the ladder monitoring function. For
precautions on using the ladder monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
12
RECIPE
1 How to activate Ladder Monitor
13
Activating Ladder Monitor by other than touch switches

GT15 User's Manual (Chapter 14 GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG & SELF
CHECK))
DEBUG
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the ladder monitoring function.
When using the ladder monitoring function, install Option OS (Ladder monitor for MELSEC-Q/QnA/
A/FX) to the GOT.
(2) Precautions on hardware
When using the ladder monitoring function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
The option function board type differs depending on the type of the PLC CPU connected to the GOT.
For the type of the option function board you use, refer to the following manual.
14 - 2
OTHERS
15
14.2 Ladder Monitoring Function
14
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
14.3 List Editor for A
The sequence program of the ACPU can be edited in list format.

Program changes at worksite can be performed on a GOT easily.
Precautions on the List editor for MELSEC-A

This section describes operations for setting the List editor for MELSEC-A. For
precautions on using the List editor for MELSEC-A, refer to the following manual.
1 How to activate the list editor for MELSEC-A

Remark
Activating the List editor for MELSEC-A by other than touch switches
CHECK))
CHECK))
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the List editor for MELSEC-A.
When using the List editor for MELSEC-A, install Option OS (List editor for MELSEC-A) to the GOT.
When using the List editor for MELSEC-A, mount the option function board to the GOT.
14 - 3
14.3 List Editor for A
14.4 List Editor for FX
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
The sequence program of the FXCPU can be edited in list format.

Program changes at worksite can be performed on a GOT easily.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Precautions on the List editor for MELSEC-FX

This section describes operations for setting the List editor for MELSEC-FX. For
precautions on using the List editor for MELSEC-FX, refer to the following manual.
12
RECIPE
1 How to activate the list editor for MELSEC-FX
13
Remark
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Activating the List editor for MELSEC-FX by other than touch switches
CHECK))
14
DEBUG
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the List editor for MELSEC-FX.
When using the List editor for MELSEC-FX, install Option OS (List editor for MELSEC-FX) to the
GOT.
When using the List editor for MELSEC-FX, mount the option function board to the GOT.
16
14 - 4
SCRIPT FUNCTION
14.4 List Editor for FX
OTHERS
15
14.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Function
Buffer memory of an intelligent function module can be monitored with a dedicated screen. Changing the
data is also possible.
Signal status of I/O modules can be monitored as well.
Precautions on the intelligent module monitor function

This section describes operations for setting the intelligent module monitor function.
For precautions on using the intelligent module monitor function, refer to the
following manual.
1 How to activate Intelligent module monitor

Remark
Activating Intelligent module monitor by other than touch switches

2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the intelligent module monitor function.
When using the intelligent module monitor function, install option OS (intelligent module monitor) to
the GOT.
When using the intelligent module monitor function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
14 - 5
14.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Function
PARTS
14.6 Network Monitor Function
10
GRAPH, METER
The network status of MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) and MELSECNET/B can be

monitored with a dedicated screen.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Precautions on the network monitor function

This section describes operations for setting the network monitor function. For
precautions on using the network monitor function, refer to the following manual.
12
RECIPE
1 How to activate Network monitor
13
Remark
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Activating Network monitor by other than touch switches

CHECK))
14
DEBUG
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the network monitor function.
15
OTHERS
When using the network monitor function, install option OS (Network monitor) to the GOT.
When using the network monitor function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
14.6 Network Monitor Function
14 - 6
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
14.7 Q Motion Monitor Function
Servo monitoring and parameter setting of motion controller CPU (Q series) are possible with a dedicated
screen.
Precautions on the Q motion monitor function

This section describes operations for setting the Q motion monitor function. For
precautions on using the Q motion monitor function, refer to the following manual.
1 How to activate Q motion monitor

Remark
Activating Q motion monitor by other than touch switches

CHECK))
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the Q motion monitor function.
When using the Q motion monitor function, install optoin OS (Q motion monitor) to the GOT.
When using the Q motion monitor function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
14 - 7
14.7 Q Motion Monitor Function
PARTS
14.8 Servo Amplifier Monitor Function
10
GRAPH, METER
Monitoring, parameter changing and testing of a servo amplifier are possible with a dedicated screen.
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
Precautions on the servo amplifier monitor function

This section describes operations for setting the servo amplifier monitor function.
For precautions on using the List editor for servo amplifier monitor function, refer to
the following manual.
RECIPE
12
1 How to activate Servo amplifier monitor function
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Remark
Activating Servo amplifier monitor function by other than touch switches
14
DEBUG
CHECK))
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the servo amplifier monitor function.
15

OTHERS
When using the servo amplifier monitor function, install Option OS (Servo amplifier monitor
function) to the GOT.
14.8 Servo Amplifier Monitor Function
14 - 8
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16

When using the servo amplifier monitor function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
14.9 CNC Monitor Function
With a dedicated screen, position display monitor, alarm diagnosis monitor, tool offset/parameter monitor
and program data monitor are as at the same level as possible with the MELDAS dedicated display unit.
Precautions on the CNC monitor function

This section describes operations for setting the CNC monitor function. For
precautions on using the CNC monitor function, refer to the following manual.
1 How to activate CNC monitor

Remark
Activating CNC monitor by other than touch switches

CHECK))
2 Precautions
The following describes precautions on using the CNC monitor function.
When using the CNC monitor function, install Option OS (CNC monitor) to the GOT.
When using the CNC monitor function, mount the option function board to the GOT.
(3) Precautions on use
Only the models indicated below can use The CNC monitor function.
GT1595-XTBA, GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD, GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
14 - 9
14.9 CNC Monitor Function
PARTS
15. OTHERS
10
GRAPH, METER
15.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
<When not using the set overlay screen function>
<When using set overlay screen function>
Set four touch switches. (2 on production status screen1 and
Set two touch switches. (2 on the set overlay screen)Touch switch
2 on production status screen2)
setting is not required for production status screen1 and 2 because

these touch switches have already been registered on the called
screen.
Production
status screen1
ACTIONS
Production
status screen1
RUN
ST.
RECIPE
ST.
Base screen1
Base screen1
(Base screen1)
RUN
Production
status screen2
RUN
12
Production
status screen2
ST.
RUN
Base screen2
13
ST.
Called screen
(B-10: Base screen10)
ST.
Base screen2
(Base screen2)
Create touch switch dedicated screen

called from each screen
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
RUN
11
TRIGGER
Other base screens or window screens can be called on the base screen and displayed as a single screen
by using this function.
Setting the same objects onto multiple screens can save memory capacity.
14
1 Multiple called screens can be displayed
DEBUG
Multiple called screens can be displayed on one basic screen.
15
Called screen
(B2: Base screen2)
OTHERS
Basic screen
(Base screen1)
Called screen
(B3: Base screen)
16
15 - 1
SCRIPT FUNCTION
A FE D
B CDE
2 Up to the 16th nesting can be called

As up to the 16th nesting can be set, screen setting with high flexibility can be realized.
A1254
B 348
Production status screen1

A1254
B 348
Called screen
(W-3: Window screen3)
Basic screen
(Base screen1)
Called screen
(B-10: Base screen10)
Called screen
(B-6: Base screen6)
A1254
B 348
A1254
B 348
Called screen
(W-1: Window screen1)
Basic screen
(Base screen2)
First
Second
Third

1 Activate the basic screen.
2 Select [Object]
[Set Overlay Screen] from the menu.
3 In the Set Overlay Screen dialog box, select the screens to call up and click on the OK button.
(Click on the Image button to display the Screen Image List dialog box.)
Set Overlay List
Screen Image List
4 Arrange the called screen on the basic screen.
Click on the start

position for call.
15 - 2

Display the
called screen.
15.1.2 Check of the settings
PARTS
The setting details of the call function can be checked in the project work space.
Check
A1254
B 348
10
A1254
B 348
W-3: Window screen3

Production
status screen1
(Base screen1)
B-10: Base screen10
B-6: Base screen6

A1254
B 348
W-1: Window screen1
GRAPH, METER
Items
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Description
Check this item to display the setting of the display overlay screen.
When this is set, the called screen names will be displayed in a tree structure.
Click on
or
12
to display or hide the called screen of the lower level.
Right click on the called screen name to display the right-click menu*1.
Display Overlay Screen
RECIPE
When the screen name is enclosed with "<>", the display overlay screen is set as a functional loop; therefore
any screens after this point will not be called.
1) Screen calling
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1 base screen
13
W-1 window screen1
2) Screen calling
Refer to the following for the details of *1.
14
*1 Right-click menu
DEBUG
The following table explains the menu items displayed when right clicking the called screen name.
Description
Edit
The setting of display overlay screen can be changed in the Display Overlay Screen dialog box.
Remove Overlay
Deletes the setting of the Display Overlay Screen.
Open
Opens the screen.

15.1.2 Check of the settings
16
15 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Items
OTHERS
15
15.1.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the set overlay screen function.
1 Precaution for drawing

(1) Screen that can be called
Base screen, window screen
(2) Maximum number of called screens (The number of screens that can be called and displayed on
the basic screen)
GT15 : 2047 screens
GT11 : 5 screens
(3) Maximum nesting number (nesting of further call to the called screen)
16 (Not including the basic screen)
(4) Edit of called screen
(a) The called screen cannot be edited on the basic screen.
Edit must be done on the called screen.
(b) Once the called screen is edited, it will be reflected to all of the basic screens where the edited
screen is called.
Base screen1
Base screen4
15 - 4
Base screen5

15.1.3 Precautions
Base screen1
Base screen4
Base screen5
(5) When cascading shapes and objects

The following are examples of cascading on the same layer.
For cascading of shapes and objects, read the descriptions below.
PARTS
Section 2.6 Superimposition Settings

(a) Figure data
The figure of called screen is
10
Among the objects of basic screen
11
Called screen
Basic screen
Screen
(b) Object data
12345
000001
12345
and called screen, the one whose
000001
value is changed will be displayed in
Basic screen
TRIGGER
the front.
ACTIONS
GRAPH, METER
displayed in the front.
Called screen
Screen
(c) Touch switch
12
Initially, the touch switch

corresponding to the latest screen will
be displayed in the front.After, the
screen where touch switch trigger has
RECIPE
changed will be displayed.
Basic screen
Called screen
Screen display
13
Overlapping touch switches
Without using the screen calling, multiple operations can be set to one touch switch.
(d) Screen background
The background color of the called screen will be displayed in the front.
When the background color and the basic screen shape color are overlapped, the shape will
not be displayed.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Remark
14
The shape of basic screen will not be
Basic screen
DEBUG
displayed.
15
Called screen
Screen display
OTHERS
If no background color is set for the called screen or if "No pattern" is set in "Pattern" of the
background color, that of the basic screen is displayed.
Basic screen
Screen display
Called screen
No background color setting or "No pattern"
set in "Pattern" of the background color

15.1.3 Precautions
15 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
When the figure is filled with paint

If the paint has been set to the figure on the basic screen and when the figure is
overlapped with another on the called screen, the colors may not be displayed
correctly.
If this occurs, fill in the figure on the basic screen.
Basic screen
Screen
Basic screen
Screen
15 - 6

15.1.3 Precautions
Called screen
Filled with paint
Called screen
PARTS
(6) When exclusive objects (which only one setting is allowed per each screen) are overlapped
Do not cascade such objects created by the data list function and the alarm history function.
Otherwise, the set numbers of objects are displayed, however, they cannot be displayed correctly
because of the function restrictions.
(7) Display/hide called screen according to the security level and nesting of called screen
The security level set in each called screen is valid.
The cautions for security setting in each called screen are as follows.
(a) The called screen will not be displayed when the security level of the called screen is higher
than that of the password input on the basic screen.
(b) The screen display using the nesting structure cannot be called from the screen with security
settings enabled.
(c) The status observation function and the script function set to the called screen that is not
displayed cannot be executed.
GRAPH, METER
10
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
Example: Called screens that can be displayed by password of security level2

Basic screen
Security level0
12
Called screen6
Security level1
Called screen7
Security level2
Called screen3
Security level1
Screen not displayed
RECIPE
Called screen4
Security level2
Called screen8
Security level1
Called screen9
Security level2
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Called screen2
Security level3
Called screen5
Security level4
Called
screen10
Security level3
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

15.1.3 Precautions
15 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Called screen1
Security level1
(8) Displaying order for calling multiple screens

When multiple called screens have been set on one screen, they are displayed in the order of
setting in GT Designer2 or called screen nesting.
Since the current screen is displayed on the previous screen, the screen with the lowest order will
be displayed in the front most.
Precedence for display priority
1. When multiple called screens are set, they are displayed in the order set in GT Designer2.
2. For called screens that have been nested, the screen with deeper nesting will be displayed in
the front most.
3. If the above conditions 1 and 2 are both applied, priority is given to the nested called screen.
Example: When setting multiple called screens including nested called screens ( 1) to 11): Display order)
The setting order of called screen in GT Designer2
1) Basic screen
2002/3/25
2)
6)
9)
First
Nesting
of called
screens
3)
5)
7)
Sec.
8)
10)
A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348
4)
11)
Third
(1) Security function, status observation function and script function of called screen
The security function, status observation function and script function set for each
called screen are processed in the same order as the called screen display.
(2) Check methods of nesting and setting order
Nesting can be checked in the project workspace.
Section 15.1.2 Check of the settings
The set order can be checked in the data view. (Data are displayed in the order of
setting in the data view.)
Refer to the following manual for the data view.
GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual (Section
12 USEFUL FUNCTIONS)
15 - 8

15.1.3 Precautions
PARTS
15.2 Test Function
Change the word device

Change the buffer memory
11
ACTIONS
Bit device ON/OFF

Change the set value of timer/counter
10
GRAPH, METER
This section explains the test function that displays test window on monitor screen and changes device
value.
This function is applicable for maintenance and inspection using monitor screen, providing the following
functions.
Test function provides following operations.
TRIGGER
Arrange touch switch (special function switch) to set the test function.
ChNo.[1]NetNo.[ 0]ST [FF]CPUNo.[0]

DEVICE[ ] [
]RST:0 SET:1[0]
12
Enter
Del AC
RECIPE
13
The test window can be displayed to change the device value, as well when the
ladder monitor function or system monitor function is used.
Refer to the following manuals for the test methods of various functions.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Test except when the monitor screen is displayed
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
15.2 Test Function
15 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Remark
1 Method of operating test window

This section explains how to operate the test window.
Touch the touch switch to display the test window.
DEVICE[ ] [
]RST:0 SET:1[0]
SET/RST
VALUE16
BM VAL16
SET VAL
VALUE32
BM VAL32
Select the device type to be changed

DEVICE[ ] [
]RST:0 SET:1[0]
SET/RST
VALUE16
BM VAL16
SET VAL
VALUE32
BM VAL32
SET/RST
: Set/reset the bit device.
Current value 16/Current value 32
: Change the current value of
Set value
: Change the set value of T.C.
BIN Value 16/BIN Value 32
: Change the current value of
word device.
buffer memory.
Specify the network No., device and value of the device of which value
is to be changed.
DEVICE[ ] [
]RST:0 SET:1[0]
Change the input area by
keys.
In the case of data link system

Enter
Del AC
Ch No.
: Set the channel No.of the GOT interface.
Net No.
:0
ST
: FF (host), 0 (master station)

1 to 64 (local station)
In the case of network system
Change keys according to input area.
Ch No.
: Set the channel No.of the GOT interface.
Net No.
: 0 (self loop), 1 to 255 (specified loop)
ST
: FF (host), 0 (control station),

1 to 64 (normal station)
Define the value change by the definition key

Refer to the following section for arrangement and settings of the touch switch.
Section 6.2.2 Arrangement and settings

Refer to the following section for setting items of the touch switch.
15 - 10
15.2 Test Function

15.2.3 Precautions
PARTS
This section provides the precautions for using test function.

Refer to the following section for the precautions other than described in this section.
(1) When setting line graph

When locus type line graph has been set on base screen, the test window cannot be displayed.
(2) Windows that cannot be displayed on the same screen
The test window and overlap window 2 cannot be displayed on the same screen.
GRAPH, METER
10
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
(1) Control of the controller control

Executing test function may affect the control of the controller.
Make sure to fully confirm the security before executing the test function.
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
15.2 Test Function

15.2.3 Precautions
15 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
15.3 Gateway Function
Various makers' controllers can be monitored on a GOT or a personal computer, or alarms that occurred in
the GOT can be sent by e-mail.
Remote watching and remote maintenance of a production site from an office is supported.
Example: When using the server function
Previously
When the server function is used
Server
RS-422
commu
nication
RS-232
communication
MITSUBISHI
PLC
RS-422
communication
Company A PLC
RS-232
commu
nication
RS-422
commu
nication
Microcomputer
board
Server
MITSUBISHI
PLC
Company A PLC
Server
RS-422
commu
nication
Microcomputer
board
Ethernet
Communication method
is standardized to Ethernet.
Communicates with the PC

using the communication
method of each company.
Each controller's software
for peripheral devices has
to be installed.
Necessary software is
MX Component only.
Client
MITSUBISHI
Company A
Microcomputer
board
MX Component
<The process of writing from a PC to the device of a controller>
Execute the user program created by the MX Component to

write data to the gateway device in the GOT (Server).
The data is written to the device of the controller assigned on

the gateway device.
For the details of the gateway function, refer to the following manual.
(1) The description and setting of the function, and precautions for use
(2) Connecting devices to the GOT and preparing for monitoring a controller
GOT1000 Connection Manual
15 - 12
15.3 Gateway Function

15.2.3 Precautions
PARTS
16. SCRIPT FUNCTION
The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (hereafter
abbreviated to "script").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script drastically reduces the load on the system side (e.g.
controller, microcomputer) display.
In addition, the specifications, GT Designer2 settings, program example and troubleshooting of the script
functions are explained in this chapter.
10
GRAPH, METER
16.1 Overview
11
1 Ease of system maintenance

As the necessary programs can be created and assigned to GOT with the script functions in advance,
the system side handles only machine control programs, facilitating system maintenance.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
16.1.1 Features
12
2 Various screen controls by GOT alone

Using the script functions enables the following operations that could not be achieved by GOT alone.
RECIPE
(1) Various object functions are available

(b) A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is ON, and is erased if they are all OFF.
(c) At the same time as a numeric value is input, a part indicating "Already input" is pasted to the
place adjacent to the input value display frame.
(d) A single touch switch can make multiple operations corresponding to multiple statuses.
(e) At the same time as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error (*1), the
corresponding troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
*1
If an error occurs in the alarm list (system alarm), error contents are stored to [GOT Error Code] of [System
Information].
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(a) A single lamp represents multiple bit device statuses.
14
(a) A polynomial operation can be more simply represented on a single line as compared with
ladder program.
Ladder program
Script
DEBUG
(2) Processing of complicated arithmetic
15
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Features
16 - 1
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(b) Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions, such as
trigonometric and exponential functions, can be used optionally.
OTHERS
[w:D5] = ([w:D1] - [w:D2])/100+[w:D3]-[w:D4])-100;
(3) Expanded applicable fields

(a) The date is calculated by entering the start date (month, day and year) and the duration
(number of days) after that date.
What is the date 345 days after May 20, 2000?
April 30, 2001
(b) The day of the week is calculated by entering the corresponding date (month, day and year).
Which day of the week falls on February 21, 1961?
Tuesday
3 Easy programming language

Script can be created with entry-level programming knowledge, as it is C language-like program.
4 Compatibility with commercially-available programming editors

Commercially-available text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windows
applicable for programming to improve program productivity.
-standard memo pad, Wordpad) are
5 Execution condition selectable for each script

Any of various conditions (ordinary, periodic, bit Rise/Fall, during bit ON/OFF, periodic during bit ON/
OFF) can be selected as a trigger to execute each script, which enables script execution scheduling.
In addition to the above conditions, an object script can be executed in synchronization with object input
/ display and touching of a touch switch.
6 Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g.
Microsoft Visual C++) can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections. This is effective for
debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using GOT.
The test and device monitor functions are available to check conditional branching in a script. By
monitoring the GOT special registers (GS), error information and a script in execution can be easily
confirmed.
7 Check the validity of the syntax for the created scripts

The validity of the syntax for the created scripts can be checked using GT Designer2 before executing
on GOT, which increases the programming efficiency.
8 The script language created on digital package is convertible

It is possible to convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital package in order
to operate it on GOT.
16 - 2
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Features
Remark
(1) Execution condition setting and syntax validity check

Make "execution condition setting" and "syntax validity check" on GT Designer2 at
the time of monitor screen creation.
Project script and screen script ........................................16.2.5 Settings
PARTS
10
(2) Converting script language created on Digital package

Convert the script language created on Digital package using GT Converter2.
Refer to the following for details of convertible data and conversion method.
GT Converter2 Version
Operating Manual
GRAPH, METER
Object script ............................................................. 16.3.6 Setting items
ACTIONS
11
9 Script functions types
TRIGGER
There are three types of script functions as below.

(1) Project script
(a) Target of setting/action
Project script means the script function that is set / operated for the project as a whole.
12
(b) GOT status that enables execution of a project script

A project script can be executed any time while the GOT is online.
RECIPE
(c) Script execution condition

A script is executed when the condition is established.
(d) Allowable number of scripts
Up to 256 scripts can be set for a project.
Application of project scripts
Since a project script operates for a project as a whole, it can be conveniently used
in such as the case shown below.
Example: To call up the troubleshooting screen automatically at the same time that
the alarm list (system alarm) detects an error
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
Devices monitored by project scripts are always operating.

Therefore, if monitor target devices increase, display on the monitor screen will be
delayed.
DEBUG
Precautions for setting a project script
OTHERS
15
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Features
16 - 3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(2) Screen script

Screen script means the script function that is set / operated for the screens indicated below.
Base screen *1 *2
Window screen *1 *2
(Superimpose window 1, Superimpose window 2, Overlap window 1, Overlap window 2)
*1
The called screen by the set overlay screen function is also the target of a screen script.
*2
The screen displayed by the parts display function is not the target of a screen script.
(b) GOT status that enables execution of a screen script

A screen script can be executed when two conditions below are satisfied.
GOT is online.
The target screen is displayed.
(c) Script execution condition
A script is executed when the condition is established.
(d) Allowable number of scripts
Up to 256 scripts can be set in a screen (including the called screens by the set overlay screen
function)
Precautions for setting a screen script

If the number of monitor devices of screen scripts increase, display on the monitor
screen will be delayed.
(3) Object script (GT15 only)

Object script means the script function that is set / operated for the objects indicated below.
Setting/Operation Target of Object Script Function
Lamp display,
Touch switch (multi-action switch only),
Numerical display,
Numerical input,
ASCII input,
Clock display (date display, time

display),
ASCII display,
Comment display,
Parts display,
Parts movement,
Panelmeter display,
Level display,
Trend graph,
Line graph,
Bar graph,
Statistics graph,
Scatter graph
(b) GOT status that enables execution of an object script

An object script function can be executed when four conditions below are all satisfied.
GOT is online.
The screen where arranged target object is displayed.
The target object is displayed/operating.
Target object operating is not restricted by the security function.
16 - 4
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Features
10
GRAPH, METER
(d) Allowable number of script function

Numerical input and ASCII input allows the setting of input object script and display object
script for one object.
For objects other than numerical input and ASCII input, one script can be set for one object.
PARTS
(c) Execution condition for script function

A script is executed when the condition is established. Execution of a script is also triggered
by object input / display and touch operation of a touch switch.
Precautions for setting an object script

If number of monitor devices on object scripts increase, display on the monitor
screen will be delayed.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Features
16 - 5
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
16.1.2 Precautions for use

This section provides the cautions required for using script function.
1 Applicable range of the script functions

Since script functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them for machine control that
requires the severe timing for execution.
When changing the data within PLC from GOT, create an interlock circuit in a sequence program to
ensure that the whole system will operate safely.
2 Stop of the script processing

Any of the following cases disables the corresponding script to be processed, resulting in an error.
A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as
a script data format.
Example: [D0]=[D1]: Current value of D1 is "0x991A"
An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a
script data format.
Example:
16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999
32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
As the write target device of the while statement, a temporary device area (TMP) is not used but the
PLC CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) is used.
Applicable data range
Section 16.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
Details of while statement
Section 16.2.2 Control structure
Corrective actions to be taken when script processing has stopped
Section 16.4 Troubleshooting
3 Differences in processing result between data formats

Note that any of the following cases will result in an unintended processing.
When other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit BCD" has been selected as script data format, the constant
is described that is outside the selected format range.
When "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit unsigned BIN" has been selected as the script data format, the
negative constant is described.
When other than "real number" has been selected as script data format, the constant with a decimal
point is described.
For details on data format, refer to the following.
16 - 6
16.1 Overview
9
Some controller includes the monitor devices of which Nos. have to be described in the specific number
of digits.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction.
For details on describing method, refer to the following.
When a script function writes the operation result to a device at the end of script execution, writing to a
device (assignment) can be delayed with some devices.
The table below shows if such assignment delay occurs for each kind of devices.
Synchronized: Operation result is written to a device in synchronization with script.
Delay: Assignment delay occurs.
Script
Project Script
Screen Script
Controller's devices
Object Script
TRIGGER
Device and
Delay
GB
Delay*1
GD
GS
11
ACTIONS
5 Instructions for assignment delay
GRAPH, METER
10
Temporary Device Area
PARTS
4 Instructions for monitor device description
12
Synchronized
Delay
Synchronized
It is possible to write the operation result to a device in synchronization with the execution of script by setting
[Disable Internal Device (GD/GB) Assignment Delay] at GT Designer2.
For the setting at GT Designer2, refer to the following.
13
Option tab
Therefore, performing assignment processing as "Example 1" causes a write delay.

Describe a script as "Example 2" and "Example 3" to reduce the frequency of communications with the
PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing.
Example 1: Assignment processing using PLC CPU devices
//substitutes D0 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:D1];
//substitutes D1 into D2.
D0
100
100
D1
200
100
D2
300
200
15
Script end
OTHERS
Script start
14
DEBUG
[w:D1] = [w:D0];
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
16.2.6
In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately, causing a write delay.
This status persists until this script is processed.
16
16.1 Overview
16 - 7
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
RECIPE
TMP
Example 2: Assignment processing using temporary device areas

[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0];
//substitutes D0 into TMP0001.
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001];
//substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001];
D0
100
100
D1
200
100
D2
300
100
Script start
Script end
Using the temporary device areas designed for script functions prevents a write delay.
For details on temporary device areas, refer to the following.
Example 3: Assignment processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)
[w:GD1] = [w:D0];
//substitutes D0 into GD1.
[w:D1] = [w:GD1];
//substitutes GD1 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:GD1];
//substitutes GD1 into D2.
Using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) enables the same processing timing as temporary device
areas and prevents a write delay.
With project scripts and screen scripts, setting of [Disable Internal Device (GD/GB) Assignment
Delay] is necessary at GT Designer2.
For the setting at GT Designer2, refer to the following.
16.2.6
Option tab
When GOT internal device is used.

When GOT internal device (GD, GB) assignment delay is cancelled, a link scan will
be made on each line including the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GOT internal devices
(GD, GB) are used in many places.
6 Precautions for converting script language created using digital package

The LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package are designed
to be free from an assignment delay.
Therefore, when Digital-based script language including LS devices as shown in "Example 1" in (5) is
converted, this may result in different operation on GOT.
As shown in "Example 2" in (5), use temporary device areas in Digital-based script language including
LS devices to prevent an assignment delay.
16 - 8
16.1 Overview
9
Project scripts and screen scripts share the same temporary device area, while object scripts use the
independent temporary device area.
Accordingly, data exchange between an object script and a project script / screen script using the
temporary device area is not possible.
10
Object script
Temporary device area
GRAPH, METER
(b)
(a)
(An image showing the case where the access is made to the temporary device area of the same number)
11
TRIGGER
To exchange the data between a project script / screen script and an object script, use GOT internal
devices GD or GB.
ACTIONS
Screen script
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
16.1 Overview
16 - 9
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Project script
PARTS
7 Precautions for exchanging data between scripts using the temporary device area
16.2 Project Script, Screen Script

This section explains how to execute the Project script, Screen script.
1 Execution conditions
When an execution condition is satisfied, the Project script, Screen script executes the corresponding
script and writes the result to the PLC CPU.
Execution condition is set when the monitor screen is created using GT Designer2.
There are following execution conditions.
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
ON/OFF Sampling
Sampling (1s increments)
2 Execution unit
Project script, Screen script executes scripts one by one.
If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are satisfied, they are not processed concurrently.
16 - 10

9
3 Execution sequence
Screen Calling Function
Script Executing Order Set with
Laying Order
GT Designer2
Max.
Execution
Count
Script A
----
----
Script B
1)
256
Script A
Base
2)
Script B
11
First called screen
ACTIONS
Script A
Script B
256
TRIGGER
Base
Script A
16th called screen
Script B
12
Script A
3)
Script B
RECIPE
Script A
First called screen
13
Script B
256
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Script A
16th called screen
Script B
Script A
4)
Script B
Script A
First called screen
14
DEBUG
Screen script
10
GRAPH, METER
Project script
Execution
Sequence
Script B
256
15
Script A
16th called screen
Script B
OTHERS
executing Order
Screen Setting Order
16

16 - 11
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Function
PARTS
The project script and screen script are executed in the following order.
Function
executing Order
Screen Setting Order
Screen Calling Function
Script Executing Order Set on
Laying Order
GT Designer2
Max.
Execution
Count
Execution
Sequence
Script A
5)
Script B
Overlap window 1
Script A
Script B
First called screen

Overlap window 1
256
Script A
Script B
16th called screen

Screen script
Script A
6)
Script B
Overlap window 2
Script A
Script B
First called screen

Overlap window 2
256
Script A
Script B
16th called screen
4 Execution status
The following table describes the script statuses and the corresponding processings to be performed.
Script Status
Waiting for turn
Processing
A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".
Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.
Waiting for execution
Enabled
: The corresponding script is "executed".
Disabled
: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next script "waits for execution".
When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU and the corresponding script "waits
its turn".
Execution
And, the next script "waits for execution".

If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next script "waits for execution".
If a screen is changed when the screen script is used, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all
"executed" and then the next script "waits for execution".
Stop
16 - 12
The script is kept "stopped" until the error history is cleared.

16.2.2 Control structure
Function
Others
GRAPH, METER
Variables
1 Control statement
if to else
Description
Statement example
if (conditional expression) {set of expressions}
Function
Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than
0), executes the {set of expressions}.
Point
An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
given value or to change a program sequence.
Statement example
if (conditional expression) {set of expressions 1} else {set of expressions 2}
Function
Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than
0), executes the {set of expressions 1}, or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.
Point
An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
given value or to change a program sequence.
Statement example
while (continuous conditional expression) {set of expressions}
Function
while
break
Point
Statement example
switch
case
default
break
Function
Point
12
13
Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0), repeats
execution of the {set of expressions}.
Processing exits the "while" statement, in the following cases:
If the evaluation result of "continuous condition" is false (0).
If a "break" statement exists in the "set of expressions".
A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a specific purpose.
(For example, the statement is repeated until the device value becomes "0".)
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0) results in an infinite loop.
A temporary device area must be used as the write target device.
switch (term)
{
case constant: set of expressions;break;
case constant: set of expressions; break;
default: set of expressions;
}
14
DEBUG
if
ACTIONS
Control statement
11
TRIGGER
10
RECIPE
Operator
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case, break and default.
In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions" following the case and default
statements.
The (term) value matches the "constant"
It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
In either of the following cases, escapes from { } of switch without execution.
There is a break statement within a script
There are no case statements including the "constants" corresponding to the (term) and no default
statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement.
The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings to be
performed.

16 - 13
15
OTHERS
Control statement
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
PARTS
This section explains the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.
Control statement
return
Description
Statement example
return;
Function
Ends a script.
Point
A single script can have multiple returns.
Statement example
;
Function
Represents the end of a single statement.

This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement.
2 Operator
(1) Logic
Operator
Description
Statement example
&&
Function
if ((relational operation expression) && (relational operation expression)) {.....}

If two (relational operation expressions) are both true, resulting in 1; if either is false, resulting in 0.
(Logical AND operator)
Statement example
||
Function
if ((relational operation expression) || (relational operation expression)) {.....}

If either of relational operation expressions is true, resulting in 1; if both are false, resulting in 0.
(Logical OR operator)
Statement example
!
Function
if (!(relational operation expression)) {.....}

If the relational operation expression is 0, resulting in 1; otherwise, resulting in 0.
(Logical NOT operator)
(2) Relation
Operator
Description
Statement example
<Term 1> < <term 2>
Function
<Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)
Statement example
<Term 1> <= <term 2>
<
<=
Function
<Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>.

(Equivalence left inequality operator)
Statement example
<Term 1> > <term 2>
Function
<Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)
Statement example
<Term 1> >= <term 2>
>
>=
Function
<Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>.

(Equivalence right inequality operator)
Statement example
<Term 1> != <term 2>
Function
<Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)
Statement example
<Term 1> == <term 2>
Function
<Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)
!=
==
16 - 14

(3) Arithmetic
Operator
Description
Statement example
<Term> + <factor>
Function
Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)
Statement example
<Term> ---- <factor>
Function
Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)
Statement example
<Term> * <factor>
Function
Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)
Statement example
<Term> / <factor>
Function
Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)
Point
If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
Statement example
<Term> % <factor>
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
----
Function
ACTIONS
11
TRIGGER
Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.

(Remainder operator)
Point
12
If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
(4) Bit device

Description
Statement example
&
Function
RECIPE
Operator
<Term> & <factor>
13
Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>.
Statement example
|
Function
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(Bit accumulation operator)

<Term> | <factor>
Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit addition operator)
Statement example
~ <bit>
Function
Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)
Statement example
<Term> ^ <factor>
^
Function
14
Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>.

DEBUG
(Bit difference operator)

Statement example
<Term> << <factor>
Function
Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)
Statement example
<Term> >> <factor>
Function
Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)
<<
15
OTHERS
>>
(5) Assignment
16
Description
Statement example
<Device> = <term>
Function
Stores <term> into <device>. (Assignment operator)

16 - 15
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Operator
3 Variables
Variable
Description
Statement example
[w : GD150]
Device and
temporary device
Function
Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary device area.
Refer to the following for details of the devices and temporary device areas.
area
4 Function
(1) Device operation
Function
Description
Statement example
set (<bit device>)
Function
SETs <bit device>.
Statement example
rst (<bit device>)
Function
RSTs <bit device>.
Statement example
alt (<bit device>)
Function
Inverts <bit device>.
set
rst
alt
(2) Continuous device operation

Function
Description
Statement example
bmov
Function
bmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 1>, to the
number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 2>.
Statement example
fmov
Function
fmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word
device 2>.
(3) Application arithmetic operation

Function
Description
Statement example
sin
Function
sin (<word device or constant>)

Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)
Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.
Statement example
cos
Function
cos (<word device or constant>)

Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Cosine)
Statement example
tan
Function
tan (<word device or constant>)

Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>. (Tangent)
Statement example
asin
Function
asin (<word device or constant>)

Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)
16 - 16

Function
Description
Statement example
acos
Function
acos (<word device or constant>)

Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)
Statement example
atan
Function
PARTS

atan (<word device or constant>)
Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)
10
abs
Function
abs (<word device or constant>)

GRAPH, METER
Statement example
Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.

(Absolute value)
Statement example
log (<word device or constant>)
Function
Calculates the power (base e) of <word device or constant>. (Natural logarithm)
Statement example
log10 (<word device or constant>)
log
Function
ACTIONS
log10
11
Calculates the logarithm (base 10) of <word device or constant>.
TRIGGER
(Common logarithm)
Statement example
exp (<word device or constant>)
Function
Calculates the power (base e) of<word device or constant>. (Exponent)
Statement example
1dexp (<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)
exp
1dexp
Function
12
Multiplies <word device 1 or constant 1> by 2 to the power of <word device 2 or constant 2> .
Statement example
sqrt (<word device or constant>)
Function
Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)
RECIPE
(Exponential product)
sqrt
13
Item
Description
Statement example
Constant
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
5 Others
Function
1234
Represents a constant (decimal / hexadecimal / BCD / real number / character strings).
14
Refer to the following for details of constants.

Statement example
// (comment)
Function
A comment for a script can be described in (comment).
DEBUG
Comment
OTHERS
15

16 - 17
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
16.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods

1 Script data formats
Any of the following seven different data formats can be selected for the script functions.
Note that the selected data format is fixed for each script.
Select the data format using GT Designer2 when the monitor screen is created.
16-bit, signed BIN
16-bit, unsigned BIN
32-bit, signed BIN
16-bit BCD
32-bit BCD
32-bit real number
To operate different types of data
Device value of integral number can be calculated as real number by using integral
number
real number conversion function for each script.
This section
16 - 18
Integer

Real number conversion function
9
2 Applicable constants and representation methods
Representation Method
124
Hexadecimal number
0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1
Real number
32.124, 3.2124e + 10
BCD
344
10
Note that the data format of each script determines the applicable constants and data ranges as shown
below.
Usable Constant
Applicable Data Range
Decimal number
-32768 to 32767
Hexadecimal number
0 to FFFF
Decimal number
0 to 65535
11
ACTIONS
Data Format
TRIGGER
16-bit, signed BIN

Hexadecimal number
0 to FFFF
Decimal number
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Hexadecimal number
0 to FFFFFFFF
Decimal number
0 to 4294967295
Hexadecimal number
0 to FFFFFFFF
BCD
0 to 9999
Hexadecimal number
0 to 270F
BCD
0 to 99999999
GRAPH, METER
Constant
Decimal number
PARTS
The following four different constants are applicable for the script functions.
32-bit, signed BIN
12
RECIPE
16-bit BCD
32-bit BCD
Real number
32-bit real number
Hexadecimal number
(Representation with a decimal point only)

0 to FFFFFFFF
The real number precision is given below dicimal point to the 6th digit. The 7th and later digits are illegal.
For examples of display of a number having 7th and later digits, refer to the following.
Section 5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

16 - 19
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
13
0 to 5F5E0FF
Signed 13-digit representation
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Hexadecimal number
3 Applicable devices and representation methods

The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions.
The following table shows the device representations by device type; a station No.-specified device is
represented differently from others.
Device Type
Statement Example
Representation Example
Word device
[w: device No. *2]
[w: D100]
Bit device
[b: device No. *2]
[b: X100]
Specified bit of word
[b: device No.*2. bit position]
device
Specified word of bit
[b: D100.01]
[w: device No. *2]
device
Station No.-specified
[w: X100]
[Network No.-station No.: w: device No. *2]
device *1
[0-FF: w: D100]
Channel No.-specified
device *3 *4
[@Channel.:w:device No.]
[@3:w:D100]
*1: When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network No. and station No. monitors the devices of the
host station (0-FF).
*2: Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device No. must be described in the following number of digits.
*3: When specifying both channel No. and station No., specify the channel No. first.
(Example: [@3:0-FF:w:D100])
*4: When specifying a device at channel No. 1, designation of a channel No. ("@Channel.:) can be omitted. (In the
case of [@1:w:D100], representation of [w:D100] is allowed by omitting "@1:".)
Number of Described
Digits (Digits)
PLC CPU
Representation
Device Name
Word
specified
Example
Bit specified
..
--
[b:..2303]
LR, AR, HR, WR
--
[b: HR207]
OMRON PLC
[w: B000003]
[b: MB02343]
Allen-Bradley
PLC
N, TP, TA, CP, CA
Remarks
--
[w: N007255]
--
[b: TT004255]
--
[w: D000100000]
As the channel + relay format is used, the

relay part is described in 2 digits.
The file No. is described in 3 digits, the
element No. in 3 digits, and the bit
position in 1 digit.
The file No. is described in 3 digits, and
TT, TN, CU, CD,

CN
SIEMENS PLC
Remark
the element No. in 3 digits.

The data block (DB) is described in 4
digits, and the data word (DW) in 5 digits.
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT

Devices that can be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor target PLC CPU.
16 - 20

9
For temporary device area, 1024 points of from TMP0 to TMP1023 are applicable.
One variable is handled as 32 bits, and stores 0 at power-on of the GOT.
Read/write of the temporary device area is possible from multiple scripts created by the project script
and screen script.
The temporary device area representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below.
Statement Example
Bit device
[b: temporary device area No. bit position]
Representation Example
[w:TMP0001]
GRAPH, METER
[w: temporary device area No.]
[b:TMP1023.01]
temporary device areas are used in the following cases.

Section
16.1.2 Precautions for use)
TRIGGER
Section 16.2.2 Control structure)
Example 3: Variable for operation

When assigning a D0 + 1 value to D1 and assigning a D1 + 1 value to D2
12
//substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.

[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001]+1;
//substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.
RECIPE
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001];
A value is read in the script represented (as word device/bit device) differently
from the script used to write the value to the temporary device area.
Example: Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w: TMP0000] = 0x3;
if( [b: TMP0000.b0] == ON) {
Make sure to write and read a value to and from one temporary device area in the
same data format and representation.
14
DEBUG
A value is read in the script of which data format is different from that of the script
used to write the value to the temporary device area.
Example: Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w: TMP0000] = 0x1234;
Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)
[w: GD0000] = [w: TMP0000];
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
The temporary device area is a 32-bit global variable.

Note that a correct value cannot be read in either of the following cases.
15
OTHERS
[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]+1;
11
ACTIONS
Example 1: Prevention of a write delay in assignment processing of the PLC CPU (
Example 2: Write target device of while statement (
10
16

16 - 21
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device Type
Word device
PARTS
4 Applicable temporary device areas and representation methods
5 Representing bit device (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.
(1) When performing relational operation of bit device
A device value, which is normally represented as "1" or "0", can also be represented as "ON" or
"OFF".
if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;}
//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;}
//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
(2) When performing assignment processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented by assigning "1" or "0", can be also represented by
assigning "ON" or "OFF".
set([b:X100]);
//X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=1;
//X100 turns ON.
[b:X100]=ON;
//X100 turns ON.
6 Replacing devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced with any character string.
Make user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer2.
For details of the setting method, refer to the following.
Section 16.2.6
Script symbol tab
Example: When replacing "b:X100" with "LS1_ERROR" using GT Designer2

if(LS1_ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100;}
16 - 22
//if X100(LS1_ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.

9
7 Device offset
PARTS
The device offset can be specified.

This specification is allowed only in screen script.
(1) Format
Example: When D200 is 5, store 48 in D105.
10
GRAPH, METER
[ w:D100[ w:D200] ] = 48;
(a) Base device

The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be
specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is not applicable)
(b) Offset device
The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be
specified.
11
ACTIONS
(2) Applicable device
TRIGGER
Offset device
Base device
12
*1
(3) Example
Switch the parameter according to operation mode.
D10
: for switching operation mode
D100 to D900
GD500 : base device
TMP100
RECIPE
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is applicable )

*1 Please set device as the multiple of 16.
: for storing parameter value

: offset device
[w:GD500]=10;
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(a) Script 1 (specify parameter value)

//parameter value of operation mode1
[w:GD501]=11;
[w:GD502]=12;
:
[w:GD600]=20;
13
14
[w:GD601]=21;
[w:GD602]=22;
:
[w:GD700]=30;

DEBUG
[w:GD701]=31;
[w:GD702]=32;
:
15
(b) Script 2 (offset value is determined by the device value for switching operation mode)
case1:[w:TMP100]=0;break;
//when D10 is 0, offset value is 0.
//when D10 is 2, offset value is 100
//when D10 is 3, offset value is 200
OTHERS
switch( [w: D10] ){

16 - 23
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
(c) Script 3 (write parameter according to offset value)

bmov([w:GD500[w:TMP100]],[w:D100],10); //write the device value of (GD500+TEM100) to D100 to D109.
When script (b) and script (c) are executed simultaneously or in a single script, the
offset switching is delayed, causing the system to operate abnormally.
(4) Cautions
When PLC CPU device is used as base device, even if offset device value is changed, the
processing will be delayed, causing the system to operate abnormally.
When offset cannot be performed normally, use temporary device area or GOT internal device.
When GOT internal device is used, check [Enable internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
Section 16.2.6
16 - 24
Option tab

9
8 Integer
In script function, the data type is selected for each script. Once it is set, it cannot be changed (fixed).
real number
PARTS
However, the integer device value can be calculated as real number by using integer
conversion function.
Integer
real number conversion can be executed by specifying the following devices.
Maximum 4096 devices can be converted once.
For details about GOT internal device, refer to the following.
real number conversion
Integer real number conversion can only be executed by GOT internal devices (GD).
To convert the device value of controller, transmit the device value of controller to
GOT internal device (GD) by script (bmov instruction).
(a) Read device
Function
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Device that can be the target of integer
Device
10
GRAPH, METER
(1) Conversion method

Integer
real number conversion is executed by taking GOT internal device (GD) as conversion
target.
12
Description
GS462
GS463
GS464
32 bit real number
: 16 bit unsigned BIN
32 bit real number
Conversion start
b2 to b3
: Disabled
instruction
b4
: 32 bit real number
16 bit unsigned BIN
b5
: 32 bit real number
16 bit singed BIN
b6 to b14
: Disabled
b15
: Execute conversion when it is turned ON.
Number of conversion
devices
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
GS461
: 16 bit unsigned BIN
b1
Number of devices
Conversion source
Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value before
head device No.
conversion.
Conversion destination
Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value after
head device No.
conversion.
Storage error value
When error occurs, specify the device value to be stored in the conversion source
device. (Useful for error recognition)
(b) Write device

Device
14
DEBUG
GS460
b0
RECIPE
Specify the conversion start and conversion method by each bit.
15
Function
Description
Store the conversion completion notification and error occurrence status into each bit.
Status
b0 to b13
: Disabled
b14
: It is turned ON when error occurs during conversion
b15
: It is turned ON when conversion is completed by GOT.
processing by GOT. (Store error code in GS261)
GS261
Error code *1
16
Store the error during conversion.

Store 0 when the conversion is completed normally.
Refer to the next page for *1.

16 - 25
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GS260
OTHERS
When conversion start instruction (GS460.b15) is turned OFF (0), each bit becomes 0.
*1 Error code
Error codes stored in GS261 and the error information are as follows:
Error code
Description
Remark
Conversion start instruction is not initialized
Conversion start instruction is not set correctly.
Number of devices is set out of the range.
Device is out of range.
Conversion source overlaps with conversion destination.
Not used
Conversion error (overflow, ect.)
Conversion processing is not

executed.
--Conversion processing
continues.
(2) Example
Display the average value of the data (16 bit signed BIN) stored in controller device as real number
on GOT.
(a) Operate when GB50 (trigger) turns ON
Transmit the value to GOT internal device
D100
50
D109
139
GD100 50
(b) Integer
real number
conversion GD109 139
(c) Store average

value in GD300
GD300
68.25
GD300 68.25
Display on GOT
(a) Script 1 (conversion start processing)

Transmit the devices (D100 to D109) value of controller to GOT internal devices (GD100 to
GD109) and execute integer
real number conversion.
After conversion is started, script 2 starts.
Data type: 16 bit signed BIN
Trigger: GB50 is ON
bmov ([w: D100], [w: GD100], 10;
[w: GS461]=10;
16 - 26
//Number of object devices to be converted
[w:GS462]=100;
//Conversion source head device No.
[w: GS463]=200;
//Conversion destination head device No.
[w: GS460]=0X8002;
//Conversion starts
set ([b: GB1001];
//Script 2 starts

if ([b: GS260.15]=1)
{
PARTS
(b) Script 2 (conversion completion monitor processing)

Wait the completion of integer
real number conversion.
If error does not occur after conversion is completed, clear the conversion start instruction
device simultaneously when starting script 3.
Data type: 16 bit singed BIN
Trigger: GB100 is ON
10
//Conversion completed.
if ([b: GS260.14]=0)
set([b: GB101]):
GRAPH, METER
[
//Conversion is completed normally (script 3 starts).
}
[w: GS460]=0;
//Clear conversion start.
rst([b:GB100]);
//Clear the start of script 2.
TRIGGER
(c) Script 3 (Average calculating processing)

After converting to real number, calculate the average value of GOT internal device and store
in GD300.
Data type: 32 bit real number Trigger: GB101 is ON
ACTIONS
11
12
[w: TMP001]=0
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD200];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD202];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD204];
RECIPE
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD206];

[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD208];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD210];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD212];
13
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD214];
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD216];

[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD218];
[w: GD300]=[w:TMP001]/10;
//Store the average in GD300 (real number)
rst([b: GB101]);
//Clear start of script 3.
(3) Precautions
14
15
OTHERS
(b) During integer

real number conversion, figures after the decimal point will be rounded off.
(1.53
1)
(When it is out of the real number range, error code will be displayed during operation and the
conversion cannot be executed.)
DEBUG
(a) Turn the conversion start instruction (GS460) OFF after conversion completion.
When the device is ON, the conversion cannot be executed even if conversion start instruction
is executed.

16 - 27
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
16.2.4 Settings and procedure for execution

This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script.
Start
Create/edit scripts using a commercially-available text editor
For a complicated script including many control statements,

the operation has to be simulated using general Compiler as
necessary.
Read the script created in project data using GT Designer2

and set the data format and trigger type,etc.
Make syntax check on the scripts read using GT Designer2.
No
......
......
......
......
Section 16.3.6
Section 16.4.1
Section 16.2.6
Section 16.2.6
Valid?
Yes
Download the project data from the personal computer to the
GOT using GT Designer2
......
Basic Operation/Data Transfer
Manual
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the
system monitor.
......
GOT 1000 Series Extended/

Option Functions Manual
(Chapter2 SYSTEM MONITOR
FUNCTION)
No
Normally operating?
Yes
End
16 - 28

16.2.5 Settings
PARTS
[Script] from the menu.
[Script] on the
project work space.
GRAPH, METER
10
When making the setting on the project work space.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Remark
16

16.2.5 Settings
16 - 29
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 Select [Common]

1 Project tab
Set the Project script applicable for the whole projects.
Project
Screen
Script Symbol
Option
Items
Script setting list
Description
Display the set script settings in list format.
The script for the selected script setting is shown below the script setting list.
Adds a new script setting.
Add *1
Click on this item to display [the Script Edit] dialog box.

The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit *1
Edits the selected script setting.
Copy
Copies the selected script setting.
Paste
Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list.
Delete
Deletes the selected script setting.
Up
Changes the order of executing selected script settings.
Down
Edit Script
This is used to open the selected script file by text editor, and then edit the script.
Select the text editor type in [Select Script Editor] on the extended tab.
Displays the registered script files in list format.
Script List
Script files can be added, registered and edited on the list.

(
This section
Script list)
Refer to the next page for the details of *1.
16 - 30

PARTS
*1 Script Edit
GRAPH, METER
10
Items
11
ACTIONS
Display the order of the script under editing.

Register the script No. for the current script which is being edited.
Click on the View button to confirm the registration No. of other script files.
(
This section
TRIGGER
Script No.
Script list)
Display the drive and folder that include the script file to be executed.
Script File Name
12
If the script file is not registered, click on the Browse button to specify the script file to be executed.
Edit Script
File Comment
This is used to open the script file selected in [File Name] by text editor, and then edit the script.
Input the comment of the script being edited.
Syntax Check
RECIPE
Checks the validity of the syntax for the script selected in [Script File Name].
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
(
Section 16.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check)
13
Select the data type of script to be executed.

: Treats script data as 16/32 bits signed binary value.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Signed BIN 16/32

Data Type
Unsigned BIN 16/32 : Treats script data as 16/32 bits unsigned binary value.
BCD 16/32
: Treats script data as 16/32 bits BCD (binary coded decimal) value.
Real
: Treats script data as floating decimal point real number.
Select the trigger for operating the script.

When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 s) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
button to
DEBUG
When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, click on the Dev...
set the device to be used for the trigger.
(
15
OTHERS
Trigger Device
14
16

16 - 31
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Order
Description
2 Screen tab
Set the Screen script to be executed for each screen.
Project
Screen
Script Symbol
Option
Items
Screen Type
Description
Set the screen (Base/Window) on which the script function will operate and the screen No.
Script setting list
Displays the set script settings in list format.

The script for the selected script setting list is shown below the script setting list.
Adds a new script setting.
Add *1
Click on this item to display [the Script Edit] dialog box.

The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit *1
Edits the selected script setting.
Copy
Copies the selected script setting.
Paste
Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list.
Delete
Deletes the selected script setting.
Up
Changes the order of executing selected script settings.
Down
Edit Script
Script List

(
This section
Script list)

This section
16 - 32
*1 Script Edit

9
A script file (text file) can be described using the character string, instead of the device or fixed value.
This method is available by setting a device or fixed value to each character string in this tab screen.
(Even when a script file is described using character strings, the scrip operates on GOT.)
This setting is made for Project script and Screen script.
PARTS
3 Script symbol tab
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
Option
Items
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Script Symbol
Description
Input the character string to be described in script files (Up to 32 characters).
Symbol Name
Up to 100 words can be set.

"#" cannot be used.
Device or Fixed Value
14
Input the device or character string for the symbol name, i.e., character string (Up to 32 characters).
(Import)*1
Reads out the script symbol settings that have been edited in a CSV file / Unicode text file to GT Designer2.
(Export)*1
Saves the script symbol settings that have been set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file / Unicode text file.
(
This section
15
Script list)

OTHERS
Script List
DEBUG
Screen
16

16 - 33
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Project
*1 Import/Export

R
The added contents

are displayed.
16 - 34

9
4 Option tab
PARTS
Set the text editor for editing script file and the processing when internal device is used.
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Project
Screen
Script Symbol
RECIPE
12
Option
Items
13
Description
Check this item to avoid substitution delay, which occurs when Project script or Screen script is used, by
(GD/GB) assignment delay
using the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Disable internal device
Refer to the following for cautions about substitution delay.
Section 16.1.2
Instructions for assignment delay)
Select the text editor to be started for editing script file in GT Designer2.
Select Script Editor
Specify the text editor (Windows
NOTEPAD.EXE) and word pad (WORDPAD.EXE etc.) to be started by
[Program Path].
14
The text editors that require startup options can be registered in [Option].
Update the script data that is read by GT Designer2.
DEBUG
and Screen)

(
This section
15
Script list)
OTHERS
Script List
16

16 - 35
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Update Script Data (Project
5 Script list
The registered script files to be executed are displayed in list format.
They can be added, registered and edited on this list.
Items
Description
Displays the registered script files in list format (path name, modification date/time, and comment).
The files specified in [Script Edit] dialog box can be displayed in this dialog box.
Script File List
Comment can be directly input in the list.

The details of script file contents are shown below this list.
Browse
Registers the selected script.
Convert Path 1
Syntax Check
Changes the path name of the selected script file.

Click on Convert Path button to specify the path name to be changed.
Checks the validity of the syntax for the selected script file or all the registered script files.
When an error occurs, the error line No. and its details are displayed.
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
All Check
Delete
Edit Script
Jump
Deletes the selected script file

Makes the script set in [Script No.] selectable.
16 - 36

PARTS
*1 Convert File Path
Description
Display the old path name of the script file.
After
Clicking on the Browse button to specify the path name of the script file after the conversion.
Convert the same path
Check this item to convert all the files that have the same path name except for the file to be changed.
11
Registered script path name
12
RECIPE
Register script file into the project data folder of GT Designer2. This will update the
script path name automatically when the project data folder is moved to other drive/
path, which eliminates the necessity to modify the path name.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Before
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

16 - 37
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Items
GRAPH, METER
10
16.2.7 Program examples

This section explains script program with examples.
1 Touch switches with interlock function

(1) Operation
When the Ready and Run/Stop keys turn ON, the Running lamp is lit.
The system operation is controlled synchronously with the Running lamp.
Screen Image
Part Operation Definition

Running lamp
: Indicates the operating status of the system.
Ready key
: Acts as an interlock for the Run/Stop key.
Run/Stop
key
: Used to switch the operating status (run/stop)

of the system.
(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name
Object Type
Ready key
Run/Stop
Setting Item
Setting
Monitor device
M0001
Operation setting
Bit ALT
Monitor device
M0002
Operation setting
Bit ALT
Touch key function (bit)
key
Running lamp
Lamp indication function (bit)
Monitor device
M0003
(System operation controlling device)
(3) Program example

Item
Description
Data format
16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type
Ordinary
if ([b: M0001]&[b: M0002]==1){

set([b: M0003]);
Script
}
else{
rst([b: M0003]);
}
16 - 38
//if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON

//the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.

//if not
//the running lamp turns off and the system is stopped.
9
(1) Operation
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control statuses of three lines are
represented by one lamp.
Screen Image

Control status lamp
: The lamp color and comment are changed
Line 1 key
: Used to control the operation of line 1.
Line 2 key
PARTS
2 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions
10
Line 3 key
Stop all lines key
: Used to stop all lines.
GRAPH, METER
according to the operating statuses of the lines.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11

Setting Item
Setting
Line 1 key
Line 2 key
Line 3
key
Stop all lines key
Lamp display function (word)
Display range
Text
: $V==0 Lamp color: 182

: All lines stop
Display range
Text

: Line 1 running
Display range
Text

: Line 2 running
Display range
Text

: Line 3 running
Display range
Text

: Lines 1, 2 running
Display range
Text

14
Display range
Text

Display range
Text

: Lines 1, 2, 3 running
13
Monitor device
X1
Operation setting
Bit ALT
Monitor device
X2
Operation setting
Bit ALT
Monitor device
X3
Operation setting
Bit ALT
Monitor device
X0
Operation setting
Bit SET
DEBUG
Display method (word)
15
OTHERS
Control status lamp
D10
RECIPE
Monitor device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Object Type

16
16 - 39
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Part Name
12
(3) Program example

Item
Description
Data format
16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type
Ordinary
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=0;
//if line 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF

//stores 0 into D10.
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=1;
//if line 1 is ON and line 2 and 3 are OFF.

//stores 1 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=2;

//stores 2 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=3;

//stores 3 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=4;
Script
//if line 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.

//stores 4 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=5;

//stores 5 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=6;

//stores 6 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=7;
//if line 1, 2 and 3 are ON.

//stores 7 into D10
}
if ([b:X0]==ON){
//turns OFF line 1.
rst([b:X2]);
//turns OFF line 2.
rst([b:X3]);
//turns OFF line 3.
rst([b:X0]);
//turns OFF all lines stop.
16 - 40
//if all lines stop turns ON
rst([b:X1]);

9
(1) Operation
The password enter screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered
within 10 seconds after it appeared.
Screen Image

Manager
Returns in 10 seconds
screen 4).
Password enter
: Password entered with 1 to 0 keys appears.
1 to 0 keys
: Used to enter a value.
Clear key
: Used to clear the entered value.
Confirm key
: Used to confirm the entered value.
11
TRIGGER
Screen change
key (base screen 3)
10
GRAPH, METER
Manager
: Used to shift to the password enter screen (base
ACTIONS
Screen with
button
PARTS
3 Password input screen with time limit function
12
RECIPE
Password match
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.

Setting
Manager
button
Touch key function
Operation setting
Switching to base screen 4
Password
enter
Numerical input function
Monitor device
D10
1 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0031H]
2 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0032H]
3 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0033H]
4 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0034H]
5 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0035H]
6 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0036H]
7 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0037H]
8 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0038H]
9 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0039H]
0 key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0030H]
Clear key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [0088H]
Confirm key
Touch key function
Operation setting
Key code [000DH]

14
DEBUG
Setting Item
15
OTHERS
Object Type
16
16 - 41
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Part Name
(3) Program example

Item
Description
Data format
16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type
Ordinary
if([b: GS1.01]==ON){
//only when the password input screen has appeared
[w: TMP0001]=[w:GS7];
//assigns GS7 to TMP0001.
}
if([w: D10]==3238){
Script
//when the correct password is entered
[w:D0]=5;
//switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
[w: D10]=0;
//clears the password.
}
if([w: GS7]-[w: TMP0001]>=10){
//if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password enter screen
had appeared
[w: D0]=3;
//returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).
About this program example.

This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers (GS) store the GOT's internal data, communication
status, script error data and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by correctly using the GOT special
registers (GS) together with the script functions.
For details on GOT special registers (GS), refer to the following.
16 - 42

16.2.8 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using Project script or Screen script.
PARTS

(1) Number of script functions that can be set in one project/on one screen
Up to 256 script functions can be set.
Edit Script button from the setting dialog box.
Even if GT Designer2 seems to be in freeze status, it can be operated once the text editor is exited.
(4) Automatically creation of script file
If the project, in which script function has been set, is used and there is no script file in the set path,
GT Designer2 will create the script file automatically.
The auto-created script file can be confirmed from the project tab and [Edit Script] dialog box within
the screen tab.
To change path, select the copied script file in [Edit Script] dialog box after the script is copied to the
intended path.
For details of [Edit Script] dialog box, refer to the following.
RECIPE
*1 Script Edit
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16

16.2.8 Precautions
16 - 43
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Section 16.2.6
11
ACTIONS
(3) When editing script file

GT Designer2 cannot be operated when editing the script file from the text editor by clicking on the
TRIGGER
(2) Number of script file that can be registered

Up to 32767 script files can be registered.
GRAPH, METER
10
16.2.9 Precautions for using BMOV

If using the BMOV instruction (many times) in Project script or Screen script to read device values from the
controller into the GOT internal devices, this may cause the performance of the GOT display refresh and
screen change by use of the touch switch to slow down considerably.
This Section provides guidelines for using the GOT in order to improve the monitoring performance by
reducing the number of times to communicate with the controller using the BMOV instruction.
1 Reducing the communication time when using BMOV instruction

With Project script or Screen script, the GOT only reads*2 a batch of device values from the controller
direct address*1, regardless of script execution condition, or conditional 'if' or 'switch' statements.
Also, when using the BMOV instruction to read devices from the controller, communication with the
controller from the GOT is done one or more times for each instruction*2, depending on the amount of
data.
Therefore, in order to reduce the communication time, it is recommend to read a batch of values from
the source devices into a TMP (Temporary device area) area before transferring the data to the GOT
internal devices.
*1
When device offset is specified, the offset device becomes the direct device address.
*2
The Screen script applies only to the currently displayed screen on the GOT.
The following counter measures should be taken into consideration.

(1) The batch of divided blocks are read from the controller to the GOT internal memory during one
communication processing. The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices into
separate blocks and transferred to the temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices,
such as GD.
This section
(1) Reading a batch of device values into temporary device area
(2) The batch of divided blocks (for each 'if' and 'switch' statement) are read from the controller to the
GOT internal memory during one communication processing.
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices according to the 'if' and 'switch'
statements and transferred to the temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices,
such as GD.
This section
(2) Reading BMOV in a batch of steps within a script
(3) When reading a batch of devices from the controller to the temporary device area, make sure the
devices fall within the specified range, as shown in the table below.
If the number of words is greater than the specified reference, the number will be automatically
divided and then transferred.
Connected controller
Number of words transferred by BMOV for each

communication processing
QCPU (bus connection only)

960 words
Motion controller CPU (Q mode)
QCPU (other than bus connection)
QnACPU
480 words
Motion controller CPU (A mode)

ACPU
64 words
FXCPU
16 - 44

9
(1) Reading a batch of device values into temporary device area
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal
memory and the controller down to just once, where it took 3 times to do the same processing
before.
(When transferring from the temporary device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal
does not communicate with the controller.)
GOT
Internal
memory
GD
R1000 to R1004
GD360 to GD364
R1010 to R1014
GD370 to GD374
R1020 to R1024
GD380 to GD384
3 times
: Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing
[Solution applied]
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1024 into TMP0 to TMP24 within GOT at once.
Then they are transferred from TMP0 to TMP24 into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and
GD380 to GD384, respectively, as shown below.
GOT
controller internal
device
Internal
memory
GD
TMP0 to TMP4
GD360 to GD364
TMP5 to TMP9
TMP10 to TMP14
R1000 to R1024
13
14
GD370 to GD374
TMP15 to TMP19
TMP20 to TMP24
1 time
GD380 to GD384

15
OTHERS
(b) Script description

bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],25);
bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5);
bmov([w:TMP10],[w:GD370],5);
bmov([w:TMP20],[w:GD380],5);
12
RECIPE
controller internal
device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5);
bmov([w:R1010],[w:GD370],5);
bmov([w:R1020],[w:GD380],5);
11
ACTIONS

Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, R1010 to R1014 and R1020 to R1024
into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to GD384, respectively.
TRIGGER
[Normal process]
GRAPH, METER
System area used for communication processing. The user is not permitted access to this area.
DEBUG
*1
10
16

16 - 45
SCRIPT FUNCTION
memory
*1
PARTS
2 Script solution examples
(2) Reading BMOV in a batch of steps within a script

This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal
memory and the controller to just once, where it took 10 times to do the same processing before.
(When reading internal devices within the controller in 'if' or 'switch' statement, the internal memory
communicates with the controller regardless of the execution condition. When transferring from the
temporary device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory does not
communicate with the controller.)
[Normal process]
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, ... and R1900 to R1904 into GD360 to
GD364 depending on the amount of data.
controller internal
Internal
switch([w:D1000]){
device
case
memory
case 1:bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5); 1 R1000 to R1004
break;
2 R1100 to R1104
:
:
:
case 2:bmov([w:R1100],[w:GD360],5); :
:
:
9 R1800 to R1804
break;
:
10 R1900 to R1904
case 9:bmov([w:R1800],[w:GD360],5);
10 times
break;
case 10:bmov([w:R1900],[w:GD360],5);
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);
GOT
GD
GD360 to GD364

[Solution applied]
A batch of device values is transferred from R1000 to R1904 into TMP0 to TMP904 within
GOT once, and then it is transferred from TMP0 to TMP904 into GD360 to GD364 depending
on the amount of data.
controller internal
bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],905);
device
switch([w:D1000]){
case 1:bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5);
R1000 to R1904
break;
break;
:
break;
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);
16 - 46

GOT
Internal
memory
TMP
case
TMP0 to TMP4 1
TMP5 to TMP99
TMP100 to TMP104 2
:
:
:
:
GD
GD360 to GD364
TMP800 to TMP804 9
TMP805 to TMP899
TMP900 to TMP904 10
1 time

PARTS
16.3 Object Script
10
This section describes object script that operates for each object.
GRAPH, METER

1 Object script types
11
ACTIONS
Three types of object script are available as shown in (1) to (3) below.
TRIGGER
(1) Input object script

Input object script is executed for objects where input numerical, etc.
(a) Target objects
Objects for which an input object script can be executed are shown below.
12
Target objects
Numerical input*1,
RECIPE
Numerical input and ASCII input allow the execution of both input object scripts and display object scripts.
(b) Application examples

The value to be written to a device is changed according to the input value.
13
Data calculation by numerical input script)

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Section 16.3.7
14
When "456" is written.
DEBUG
When "-145" is written.
15
OTHERS
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 47
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1
ASCII input*1
(2) Display object script

Display object script is executed for objects where display characters, lamps, etc.
(a) Target objects
Objects for which a display object script can be executed are shown below.
Target objects
Lamp display,
input*1,
Numerical display,
Numerical input*1,
ASCII display,
Clock display (Date display / Time display),
Comment display,
Parts display,
Parts movement,
Panelmeter,
Level display,
Trend graph,
Line graph,
Bar graph,
Statistics graph,
ASCII
Scatter graph
*1
Numerical input and ASCII input allow the execution of both input object scripts and display object scripts.

To notify that device value update is stopped, the script changes numerical value display color
and makes it blink when a numerical value has not been updated for 5 seconds.
(
Section 16.3.7
To start blinking after the elapse of set time)
(3) Switch object script

Switch object script is executed for touch switch (multi-action switch only).
(a) Target object
Object for which a switch object script can be executed is shown below.
Target object
Touch switch (multi-action switch only)

The script shows or hides a touch switch so that a switch can be touched only when the
operation is necessary.
(
16 - 48
Section 16.3.7
16.3 Object Script

Showing / hiding the input / touch operation object)
9
(1) Object internal variables
Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Using an object internal variable, it is possible to calculate a monitored device value of an object
and display the results of calculation in the object.
Use of object internal variables . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16.3.3
Object internal variables
11
TRIGGER
(2) Object properties

For object properties, the settings of objects drawn by GT Designer2 can be read / changed
(written).
It is possible to change object setting dynamically on the screen by changing object properties
during monitoring.
ACTIONS
Object internal variable kinds . . . . . . . . . . Section 16.3.2
GRAPH, METER
10
For details of object internal variables, refer to the following.
For details of object properties, refer to the following.

Reading / writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object script tab of each object
Object properties
(3) Free figure drawing function

Figures (line, rectangle, circle, character, etc.), comments and others can be drawn on an object.
For the settings of free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
(1) Free figure drawing
Execution condition for the free figure drawing function not to execute drawing
To use the free figure drawing function, execute an object script with execution
conditions other than those indicated below.
When executed the free figure drawing function using the execution conditions
shown in the below, a figure is not drawn and any errors do not cause.
RECIPE
Representation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16.3.3
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16.3.2
Section 16.3.2
PARTS
2 Object script functions
14
Execution condition that do not invoke the free figure drawing function
Input fixation
Device write
DEBUG
Key code input
(4) Screen control function

The screen control function controls redrawing / erasing of screens and objects.
For the available kinds of screen control function, refer to the following.
(5) Script user ID

A script user ID means an arbitrary number that is set to an object script.
If an error occurs with an object script, the script user ID of that object script is stored to a GOT
special register (GS).
16.3 Object Script

16 - 49
OTHERS
(2) Screen control
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Section 16.3.2
15
Setting a script user ID

By setting a unique value for script user ID of respective object scripts, it is possible
to identify an object script involved with an error.
(6) Execution condition of scripts
An object script can be executed in response to object input / display or touching of a touch switch,
according to the object script kind.
It is also possible to execute an object script using a trigger other than input/display of object or
touch switch operation.
For the execution conditions of object scripts, refer to the following.
3 Execution conditions
An object script is executed when all of the triggers (1) to (4) below are satisfied.
It is not executed if any of these triggers is not satisfied.
(1) On GOT, the screen arranged a target object is displayed.
The screen arranged a target object must be displayed with a controller connected to GOT.
(2) The object is displayed / operating.
The target object must be displayed / operating.
(3) The object is not restricted by the security function of GOT.
When the security function is used, the object with an object script set in higher security level must
not be restricted during display / operation.
(4) The execution condition of the script is established.
An object script can be executed when the execution condition set for it is established.
For details of execution conditions of scripts, refer to the following.
4 Execution units
Object scripts are executed in order in script units.
If the condition of multiple scripts are established, scripts are not executed simultaneously.
5 Execution sequence
Object scripts are executed in the order of object IDs.
16 - 50
16.3 Object Script

9
6 Execution status
Object scripts execute the processing as indicated below depending on the script status.
PARTS
Waiting for turn
Processing
A script waits for its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
When its turn has come, the script enters the "waiting for execution" status.
10
Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.

Waiting for execution
Enabled
: The target script enters the "execution" status.
Disabled
: The target script enters the "waiting for run" status and the next script enters the
"waiting for execution" status.
When the execution of a script finishes, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU, and it enters
the "waiting for run" status.
GRAPH, METER
Script status
At the same time, the next script enters the "waiting for execution" status.
Execution
11
If a fatal error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enters the "stop" status. *1
ACTIONS
If an execution error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enter the "waiting for run"
status. *1
TRIGGER
For details of fatal errors and execution errors, refer to the following.
Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
14
DEBUG
Section 16.4.3
15
OTHERS
*1
The script retains the "stop" status until the error history is cleared.
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 51
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Stop

An object script can use the control structure of project scripts / screen scripts (with exceptions of the following function) as well as the control structure explained in this section.
Project script / screen script functions that cannot be used by object scripts
Classification
Name
bmov
Successive device operation function

fmov
For the control structure of project scripts / screen scripts, refer to the following.
Section 16.2.2 Control structure
For the control structure of object scripts, refer to the following.
This section
Variables and properties
This section
Functions
1 Variables and properties

(a) Input object script
Variable
Description
Statement example
[w:D100] = $$
Function
References when processing a monitor device value by a script.

Substitution is not possible.
$$
Data format
Point
Data type set at the script setting

Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor
device value. (This does not cause an error.)
If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is
executed, "$$" is read out.
Statement example
[w:D100] = $K
Function
References when processing the latest key code input from a touch key by a script.
Substitutes when writing a key code to an object.
$K
Data format
Hint
Gets 0xFFFF if referenced when a key code has not been input.
Statement example
[w:D100] = $W
Function
References when processing the value input with a fix touch key by a script.
Substitutes when writing a value to an object.
$W
Data format
Hint
16 - 52
16-bit unsigned BIN
16.3 Object Script


Gets 0 if referenced when an input has not been made using the Enter key.
Some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of object script / object /
trigger type.
Usability of object internal variables is indicated below.
$$
$K
$W
$V
Key code input
RW
Input fixation
RW
Key code input
RW
Input fixation
Ordinary, ON / OFF, Rise / Fall, Sampling, ON

Sampling / OFF Sampling
Numerical input

ASCII input
Variable
11
TRIGGER
(b) Display object script
10
GRAPH, METER
Trigger Type
ACTIONS
Variable
Object
PARTS
RW: Reference/substitution possible, R: Reference possible, W: Substitution possible, -: Cannot be used
Description
Statement example
[w:D100] = $$
Function
References when processing a monitor device value by a script.
12
Substitution is not possible.

Data format
Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor
Point
RECIPE
$$
device value. (This does not cause an error.)

If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is
executed, "$$" is read out.
$V = [w:D100]
Function
Reference is not possible.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
$V
Statement example
Substitutes when changing a value to be displayed by an object.

Data format
trigger type.
14

Trigger Type
Numerical display, numerical
input, comment display, parts
$$
$K
$W
$V
DEBUG
Variable
Object
15
View change, synchronize display trigger

Lamp display, panel meter display

View change
ASCII display, ASCII input, clock

display (date display, time display),
Ordinary, ON / OFF, rise / fall, sampling, ON

sampling / OFF sampling, view change, synchronize
trend graph, line graph, bar graph,

statistics graph, scatter graph
display trigger
16
*1
*1 For a clock display (date display, time display), [Synchronize Display Trigger] cannot be set for [Trigger Type].
16.3 Object Script

16 - 53
SCRIPT FUNCTION
display, level display
OTHERS
display, parts movement, lamp
(c) Switch object script

Variable
Description
Statement example
$W = [w:D100]
Function
Reference is not possible.
$W
Substitutes when a value processed by a script is used as the value to be written

using a touch switch.
Data format
Data type set using the script setting
trigger type.
Variable
Object
Trigger Type
Touch switch
Ordinary, ON / OFF, Rise / Fall, sampling, ON
(multi-action switch only)
sampling / OFF sampling, device write
$$
$K
$W
$V
Using object internal variables that cannot be confirmed by syntax check

Syntax check cannot check the use of internal variables indicated below
Referencing an object internal variable that cannot be referenced
Substituting an object internal variable that cannot be substituted
When creating a script, use an object internal variable correctly.
16 - 54
16.3 Object Script


For the read / write correspondence of object properties, refer to the following.
For the timing that the set object property is reflected to screen display, refer to the following.
This section
(2) (a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
PARTS
Object script tab of respective objects
10
Object property list is indicated below.
my.active = 1
Function
Specifies whether or not the object itself is updated.

"1"
: Updates the object itself.
"0"
: Does not update the object itself.

Object is not updated even if the display condition is established.
Point
When "0" is specified before the object is displayed on the screen had been switched,
the object itself is not displayed.
Statement example
my.x = 0
Function
Specifies the X coordinate of object itself move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767")
"0": Left end of the screen
x
Point
For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for
[Move Way] of [Movement Type] by GT Designer2.
Hint
12
When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.
Statement example
my.y = 0
Function
Specifies the Y coordinate of object move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767")
"0": Upper end of the screen
Y
Point
11
For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for
RECIPE
active
ACTIONS
Statement example
GRAPH, METER
Description
TRIGGER
Property
13
When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.
Statement example
my.blink = 0
Function
Specifies the blink interval and target.
blink
"0"
: Does not blink.
"1"
: Blinks numerical values / characters (1 second intervals).
"2"
: Blinks numerical values / characters (0.5 second intervals).
"3"
: Blinks numerical values / characters (0.2 second intervals).
"128"
: Does not blink.
"129"
: Blinks numerical values / characters and a plate (1 second
14
intervals).
"130"
: Blinks numerical values / characters and a plate (0.5 second
"131"
: Blinks numerical values / characters and a plate (0.2 second
intervals).
DEBUG
Hint
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
[Move Way] of [Movement Type] by GT Designer2.
15
intervals).
(Designation of a number, "129" or later, is allowed only for numerical display /
highlight
Reading out my.blink after writing "128" causes the script to get "0".
Statement example
my.highlight = 0
Function
Specifies highlighting of the object itself.

"0"
: Does not highlight the object.
"1"
: Highlights the object.
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 55
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Hint
OTHERS
numerical input / ASCII display / ASCII input /comment display.)
Property
Description
Statement example
my.part_no = 1
Function
Specifies the part number of the part to be displayed.
part_no
(Range: "0" to "32767")
mark_color
Statement example
my.mark_color = 255
Function
Specifies the color, to be changed from white, when a part is displayed as a mark.
(Range: "0" to "255")
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in
the designation of figure colors by GT Designer2.
frame_color
Statement example
[w:D100] = my.frame_color
Function
Gets the frame color. (Range: "0" to "255")

plate_color
Statement example
my.plate_color = 255
Function
Specifies the plate color of a shape.

(Range: "0" to "255")
graph_color
Statement example
my.graph_color = 255
Function
Specifies the color for pointer / level. (Range: "0" to "255")

back_color
Statement example
my.back_color = 0
Function
Specifies the color for meter panel display / background. (Range: "0" to "255")
Statement example
my.pattern = 1
Function
Specifies the pattern.
pattern
text_color
"0"
: Does not use a pattern.
"1"
"2"
"3"
"4"
"5"
"6"
"7"
"8"
"9"
"10"
"11"
"12"
"13"
"14"
"15"
"16"
"17"
"18"
"19"
"20"
"21"
"22"
"23"
"24"
"25"
"26"
"27"
"28"
"29"
"30"
"31"
"32"
"33"
"34"
"35"
"36"
"37"
Statement example
my.text_color = 255
Function
Specifies the color of numbers / characters to be displayed.

(Range: "0" to "255")
16 - 56
16.3 Object Script

Property
Description
Statement example
my.text_width = 1
Function
Specifies the scaling factor (width) of numbers and characters the object itself
: 0.5 times
"1" to "8"
: 1 to 8 times
my.text_height = 1
Function
Specifies the scaling factor (height) of numbers and characters the object itself
GRAPH, METER
Statement example
displays.
Hint
"0"
: 0.5 times
"1" to "8"
: 1 to 8 times
For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", 6" and "8" is possible.
Statement example
my.arrange = 1
Function
Selects the arranging type of character strings in multiple lines.
arrange
"0"
: Left flush
"1"
: Right flush
"2"
: Centering
Left flush
Statement example
my.scale_max[0] = 255
Function
Specifies the upper limit value of scale.
11
ACTIONS
text_height
scale_max[0],
10
For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", 6" and "8" is possible.
Right flush
Centering
scale_max[1]
TRIGGER
Hint
"0"
PARTS
displays.
text_width
12
scale_max[0] and scale_max[1] specify the upper
scale_max[1]*1
limit value in the horizontal direction and that in the
scale_max[0]
(Range: Range of the monitor devices)

my.scale_min[0] = 0
Function
Specifies the lower limit value of scale.
scale_min[1]
13
scale_min[0] and scale_min[1] specify the lower
scale_min[1]*1
limit value in the horizontal direction and that in the
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
scale_min[0],
Statement example
vertical direction, respectively.

(Range: Range of the monitor devices)
security
Statement example
my.security = 0
Function
Sets the security level of an object.
scale_min[0]
(Range: "0" to "15")

Hint
RECIPE
vertical direction, respectively.
For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this
14
input_security
Statement example
my.input_security = 0
Function
For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this
sets the security level for input. (Range: "0" to "15")
Statement example
my.draw_mode = 0
Function
Specifies the drawing mode
DEBUG
sets the security level for display.
15
For numerical and comment display

: Transparent
"1"
: XOR
"0"
: Replace
"1"
: XOR
"2"
: Overwrite
OTHERS
For parts display
Setting for the draw mode is the same as with the setting at the setting dialog box of
GT Designer2.
16.3 Object Script

16 - 57
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
draw_mode
"0"
Property
delay
Description
Statement example
my.delay = 5
Function
Specifies the delay time in unit of second, for the object itself takes an action after the
touch.
(Range: "0" to "5")
If "0" is set, the object itself takes an action immediately after the touch.
Statement example
my.beep = 0
Function
Specifies beep length and timing.
beep
"0"
: One shot
"1"
: One short (only when the execution condition is established)
"2"
: No beeps
"128"
: While a key is pressed
"129"
: While a key is pressed (only when the execution condition is

established)
*1
For the object indicated below, only scale_max[0]/scale_min[0] can be specified.

Designation of scale_max[1]/scale_min[1] is not allowed.
Panelmeter
Valid duration of changed object property

Changes of the object property are retained until executing the operation below.
Turning ON/OFF or resetting of GOT
Downloading of project data
(a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
After the setting of an object property, the setting is reflected to the screen display in any of the
timings 1 to 5 indicated below.
1. The display changes to the specified one at the same time changed the object property.
2. The specified action is executed at the next action after changing the object property.
3. The display/action changes to the specified one at any of the timing indicated below.
The timing when redraw_object() is executed (
This section
(2) Screen control)
The timing when the display condition / execution condition of the object itself is
established
The timing when redraw_screen() is executed (
The timing when switching screen is executed
This section
(2) Screen control)
The timing when redraw_object() / redraw_screen() is executed
(
This section
(2) Screen control)
The timing when switching screen is executed
The timing (1 to 5) when changing the object script is reflected to the screen display varies
depending on the object and object property kind.
For the correspondence between the object and object property kind, and the reflection timing,
refer to the following.
Object property tab of respective objects
16 - 58
16.3 Object Script

(1) Use of redraw_object()

To reflect the setting of multiple object properties to the screen by specifying
redraw_object(), use one redraw_object() for multiple object properties to reduce
the number of times the objects are redrawn.
my.text_height=2;
(2) Display / action until the setting is reflected to the screen display
An object may not be displayed or fail to act correctly until the setting is reflected
to the screen.
GRAPH, METER
10
my.arrange=1;
redraw_object();
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 59
SCRIPT FUNCTION
my.text_height=2;
redraw_object();
my.arrange=1;
redraw_object();
PARTS
2 Functions
(1) Free figure drawing
For the arguments of the free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
This section
(1) (a) Argument
Functions
Description
Statement example
d_line(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)
d_line
Function
Hint
Draws a line.
Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).
Statement example
d_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
d_rectangle
Function
Hint
Draws a rectangle.
<Y coordinate 2>).
Statement example
d_circle(<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>,

<Line color>)
d_circle
Function
Draws a circle.
Statement example
d_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
d_ellipse
Function
Hint
Draws an ellipse.
<Y coordinate 2>).
Statement example p_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern
background color>)
p_rectangle
Function
Hint
Draws a rectangle (fill).

<Y coordinate 2>).
Statement example
p_circle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>,
<Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)
p_circle
Function
Draws a circle (fill).
Statement example
p_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern
background color>)
p_ellipse
Function
Hint
Draws an ellipse (fill).

<Y coordinate 2>).
Statement example
d_textout(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Character X scaling factor>, <Character Y scaling factor>,
<Character attribute>, <Character color>, <Character shadow color>, <Characters>)
d_textout
Function
Hint
Draws characters.
<Y coordinate 2>).
16 - 60
16.3 Object Script

Functions
Description
Statement example
d_commentout(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>,

<Y coordinate 2>, <Character X scaling factor>, <Character Y scaling factor>,
<Character attribute>, <Comment group No.>, <Comment No.>)
PARTS
Hint
Displays a comment in a comment group.

<Y coordinate 2>).
10
Statement example
screen_draw(<screen draw flag>)
Function
Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
screen_draw
If the drawing area is not specified by screen_draw, drawing is executed in the object
area.
Object drawing area is the same as the data list of GT Designer2.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
Hint
GRAPH, METER
Function
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 61
SCRIPT FUNCTION
d_commentout
(a) Argument
Argument
Description
Specifies the area (the area defined by two points of (<X coordinate 1>,<Y coordinate 1>)
and (<X coordinate 2>,<Y coordinate 2>) in which a figure is drawn in dots. (Range: "32768" to "32767")
(0, 0) indicates the coordinates of the upper left position of an object.
<X coordinate 1>,<Y coordinate 1>
Example: Ellipse (d_ellipse())
<X coordinate 2>,<Y coordinate 2>

(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>)
(<X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>)
<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate>
Specifies the coordinates of the center of a figure in dots. (Range: "-32768" to "32767")
<Radius>
Specifies the radius of a circle in dots. (Range: "1" to "32767")

Selects the line type from those shown below.
"0"
"1"
"2"
"3"
"4"
<Line type>
<Line width>
<Line color>, <Character color>,
<Pattern color>,
<Pattern background color>,
<Character shadow color>
Specifies the line width in dots. (Range: "1" to "5" and "7")
Specifies the color of line / character / pattern / background of pattern / background of
character by a code number.
(Range: "0" to "255")
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
designation of figure colors by GT Designer2.
Select the fill pattern from the following.
<Pattern>
"1"
"2"
"3"
"4"
"5"
"6"
"7"
"8"
"9"
"10"
"11"
"12"
"13"
"14"
"15"
"16"
"17"
"18"
"19"
"20"
"21"
"22"
"23"
"24"
"25"
"26"
"27"
"28"
"29"
"30"
"31"
"32"
"33"
"34"
"35"
"36"
"37"
The patterns above indicate the case where white and black are specified for the
pattern color and pattern background color, respectively.
Specifies the scaling factor of characters.
Specify "2", "4", "6" or "8" when HQ characters are set
<Character X scaling factor >,
<Character attribute>.
<Character Y scaling factor >
Designation of "0" and "1" to "8" is allowed when HQ characters

are not set.
Character Y
scaling factor
Character X
scaling factor
If "0" is specified, scaling factor is 0.5.
16 - 62
16.3 Object Script

Argument
Description
Specifies the display attribute of characters.
The explanation below assumes binary notation. When specifying in a script, change the
PARTS
representation meeting the applicable notation of the script, such as hexadecimal

number.
b12
b1 to b0
b11 to 10
b9
b8
b7
b6 to 5
b4 to 3
b2
b1 to 0
10
: Select the display type of characters.

Specify "00" (fixed) for other functions.
"00": Standard
"01": Bold
"10": Shadow
Standard Gothic Shadow Engraving
"11": Engraving
GRAPH, METER
These bits can be used only for d_textout().
: "0" (fixed)
b4 to b3
: Select the arranging type of character strings of multiple lines.
ACTIONS
11
b2
"00": Left flush

"02": Centering
"11": Reserved
<Character attribute>
Left flush
Right flush
Centering
TRIGGER
"01": Right flush
12
b6 to b5
: "0" (fixed)
b7
: Select whether or not HQ characters are used.

This bit can be used only for d_commentout().
Specify "0" (fixed) for other functions.
RECIPE
"0": Does not use HQ characters.

"1": Uses HQ characters.
b8
: "0" (fixed)
b9
: Specify font size.
13
"0": 16 dots
"1": 12 dots
: Specify Kanji region.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
b11 to b10
"00": Japanese
"01": Chinese (GB)
"10": Chinese (Big5)
"11": Reserved
b12
: Specify the face.

This bit can be used only when the use of HQ characters is specified
14
(b7=1).
Specify "0" (fixed) when HQ characters are not used.
"0": Mincho
<Character>
Specify character sting in up to 256 characters.
<Comment group No.>
Specify a comment group No. (Range: 1 to 255)
<Comment No.>
Specify a comment No.
DEBUG
"1": Gothic
15
Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
"0"
: After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the object area.

the data list of GT Designer2.
: After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the entire screen
size.
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 63
SCRIPT FUNCTION
"1"
OTHERS
Object area is the same as the area defined by the coordinates shown in
<Screen draw flag>
Remark
Drawing results of circle / ellipse

To use the circle / ellipse drawing function (d_circle(), d_ellipse(), p_circle(),
p_ellipse()), set solid line for line type and 1 dot for line width.
If designation is other than the combination of solid and 1 dot, a circle / ellipse is
drawn as shown below.
Drawing example) The figure below shows the results of ellipse drawn by setting
dashed line and 4 dots for line type and line width, respectively.
(2) Screen control

Functions
redraw_object
Description
Statement example
redraw_object()
Function
Executes processing as indicated below for the object itself.

Clears the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function.
Re-draws the object itself.
Statement example
clear_object()
Function
Clears the items indicated below.

Data (number/character, etc.) displayed by the object itself
clear_object
Figure drawn by the free figure drawing function of the object script of the object
itself
If a state is set, display changes to the ordinary state (state 0).
redraw_screen
Statement example
redraw_screen()
Function
Executes processing as indicated below for the entire screen.

Clears all figures drawn by the free figure drawing function.
Re-draws all objects.
16 - 64
16.3 Object Script

For details of data and representation methods with project scripts / screen scripts, refer to the following.
With object scripts, constants explained below can be used in addition to the constants that can be used
for project scripts / screen projects.
"To be enclosed by double quotations"
11
Real conversion function
With an object script, an integer device value can be easily calculated as a real by the integer
real
conversion function when the data type conversion function is used.
For details of the integer
real conversion function and the data type conversion function, refer to the
following.
12
real conversion function .......

Section 16.2.3
Integer
Data type conversion function . . . . . . . . . .This section

Data type conversion function
RECIPE
Integer
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
Text
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 65
SCRIPT FUNCTION
2 Integer
GRAPH, METER
10
1 Applicable constants and representation methods
Constant
PARTS
With object scripts, the data and representation methods explained below can be used in addition to the data
and representation methods applicable to project scripts / screen scripts.
3 Data type conversion function

The function allows reading / writing of a word device value after converting the value into the specified
data type.
The data type to which a device value should be converted is specified when reading / writing the
device value.
The table below shows the list of the data types that can be specified by the data type conversion
function.
Data type after
Expression
conversion
example
[s16:D0]=[w:GD0];
16-bit signed BIN
[s16:device]
// Referencing GD0 as the data type of "data type",

// converts the device value into 16-bit signed BIN,
// and substitutes it to D0.
[w:GD0]=[u16:D0];
16-bit unsigned BIN
[u16:device]
// Referencing the value of D0 as 16-bit unsigned BIN,

// coverts the value into the type specifed by "data
// type", and substitutes it to GD0..
32-bit signed BIN
[s32:device]
if([s32:TMP0]<0){
[u32:GD10]=[w:GD0]*[w:GD1];
32-bit unsigned BIN
//Referencing the value in TMP0 to TMP1 as 32-bit

// signed BIN, compares it with "0".
// Referencing the value in GD0 and GD1 in the data
// type of "data type", executes calculation,
[u32:device]
// converts the result of calculation into 32-bit

// unsigned BIN, and substitutes it to GD10 and GD11.
[d16:GD0]=[w:D0]&0x000F;
16-bit BCD
// Referencing the value in D in the data type of "data

// type", executes calculation and converts the result
[d16:device]
// of calculation into 16-bit BCD, and substitutes it to

// GD0.
[w:GD0]=[d32:D0];
32-bit BCD
// Referencing the value in D0 and D1 as the 32-bit

// BCD data, converts it into the data type of "data
[d32:device]
// type", and substitutes the result of conversion to

// GD0.
[flt:D100]=log([w:D200]);
32-bit real
[flt:device]
// Referencing the value in D200 in the data type of

// "data type", executes calculation and converts the
// result of calculation into 32-bit real, and substitutes
// it to D100 and D101.
Example 1: Substituting the average of device values when 16-bit signed BIN is set as the data type
[flt:D10]=([w:D20]+[w:D30]+[w:D40]+[w:D50]+[w:D60])/5;
Example 2: Writing a real device value in 32-bit signed BIN after dropping the fractional portion of the
device value
[s32:D100]=[flt:D200];
Example 3: Writing a real device value in 32-bit signed BIN after rounding off the device value
[s32:D100]=[flt:D200]+0.5;
16 - 66
16.3 Object Script

9
4 Object internal variables
PARTS
Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Processing as shown below is possible by using object internal variables.
Can process the monitor device value by referencing it. ($$)
Can change the object display to the processing result of the script. ($V)
Can substitute the processing result of the script by the operation of a touch switch. ($W)
GRAPH, METER
10
Example: To add the device value (GD0) to the monitor device value ($$) and display ($V) the result at
an object in numerical display
TRIGGER
$V=$$+[w:GD0];
11
Example: When adjust decimal point range is used by setting "2" for [Decimal Point
Range]
When "$V=1;" is executed, the substituted value is divided by 102 and
"0.01" is displayed in Numerical Input.
13
14
DEBUG
When "$W=1;" is executed, the substituted value is multiplied by 102

and "100" is written to the monitor device.
12
RECIPE
When using automatic adjustment of decimel point, the processing as below is

executed.
When a value is substituted to $V
The decimal point of the value substituted to $V is shifted right by the value set for
[Decimal Point Range] and substituted to the object.
When a value is substituted to $W
The decimal point of the value substituted to $W is shifted left by the value set for
[Decimal Point Range] and substituted to a monitor device.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Automatic adjustment of decimal point
OTHERS
15
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 67
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Section 16.3.2
ACTIONS
For reading / writing of an object internal variable, refer to the following.
5 Object properties
For object properties, settings of the objects drawn by GT Designer2 can be referenced / changed
(substituted).
For details of object properties, refer to the following.
Reference / Substitution . . . . . . . . . Object script tab of each object
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16.3.2
(1) Format
When describing an object property in a script, specify "my." preceding the object property name.
Example: For changing text colors and blink display corresponding to the object security level
if(5<=my.security){
// If object security level is 5 or higher
my.text_color=224;
// changes text color to red (224).
my.blink=1;
// blinks the object display at a low speed.
}else{
// If object security level is lower than 5
my.text_color=255;
// changes text color to white (255).
my.blink=0;
// does not blink the object display.
16 - 68
16.3 Object Script


Settings and the procedure before executing object scripts are explained below.
PARTS
Start
Create / edit the script in the Edit Script dialog box of GT

Designer2.
Section 16.3.6
For a complicated script including many control statements,

the operation must be simulated using general C compiler as
necessary.
Section 16.4.1 Simulation using
10
GRAPH, METER
Editing scripts
general C language compiler or
11
Make syntax check on the scripts read using GT Designer2.
Section 16.3.6
Editing scripts
TRIGGER
Set Data Type, Trigger Type, etc. for the object script by
GT Designer2.
ACTIONS
debugger
12
No
Valid?
RECIPE
Yes
Install the option function board to GOT.
GT15 User's Manual
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Download the option OS and the project data from the personal
computer to the GOT by GT Designer2.
Basic Operation/Data
Transfer Manual
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the
system monitor function.
DEBUG
Normally operating?
Yes
15
OTHERS
End
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 69
SCRIPT FUNCTION
No
14
GOT1000 Series Extended/

Option Functions Manual
(CHAPTER2 SYSTEM
MONITOR FUNCTION)
16.3.5 Settings
1 Double click an object arranged on the screen created by GT Designer2, and the Setting dialog box is
displayed.
Double click
2 Check the Script check box to display the Object Script tab and set by following the explanation below.
Check

1 Object script tab
Set for using object scripts.
The items to be set in the Object Script tab vary depending on the object kind.
For details of setting items displayed in the Object Script tab, refer to the following.
Object Script
Input object script
Object
Numerical input*1,
ASCII input*1
Lamp display,
Numerical display,
Numerical input*2,
ASCII display,
ASCII input
Display object script
Switch object script
*2,
Parts display,
Parts movement,
Panel meter,
Level display,
Trend graph,
Line graph,
Bar graph,
Statistics graph,
Scatter graph
Touch switch (multi-action switch only)
*2 When specifying display object scripts
16 - 70
16.3 Object Script

16.3.5 Settings
This section
(1)
This section
(2)
This section
(3)
Clock display (Date display, time display),
Comment display,
*1 When setting input object scripts
Refer to
PARTS
(1) Object script tab of input object scripts
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
(Screen for input object script setting in Numerical Input)

Item
12
Description
Click the Display button to set display object scripts.
When clicking the Display button, the tab changes to the object script tab of display object scripts.
(
This section
(2) Object Script tab of display object scripts)
RECIPE
Display
This button is displayed only for the following objects.

Numerical input
Use Object Script
ASCII input
13
Check this item when using object scripts.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Set a script user ID No.

Script User ID
The script user ID No. must be unique.

By setting unique numbers, it is possible to identify the object script that caused an error.
Select the device data type to be used by a script.
Data Type
Signed BIN 16 / 32
: Device data is treated as 16/32-bit signed binary.
Unsigned BIN 16 / 32
: Device data is treated as 16/32-bit unsigned binary.
BCD 16 / 32
: Device data is treated as 16/32-bit BCD (binary coded decimal).
Real
: Device data is treated as 32-bit floating point type real.
14
Select the execution condition of a script.

When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) by
Trigger
DEBUG
the second.
Type*1

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling OFF Sampling
Rise
Key Code Input
Input Fixation
15
Set the trigger device by clicking the Dev... button when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF
(
Script Preview
OTHERS
Sampling] is selected for [Trigger Type].

Allows confirmation of the script contents.
16
Opens the script editor dialog box.

Edit Script
This section
Editing scripts)
16.3 Object Script

16 - 71
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Trigger Device
*1 When an object script cannot be executed correctly at the set sampling cycles
(1) Execution timing when sampling cycle is set in [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling]
(a) Execution timing
Device status is checked in sampling cycles set for [Trigger Type]
If the condition is not established when checked, the object script is not executed.
(When sampling cycle is set at 1 second, with [ON Sampling] set for [Trigger Type])
1 sec.
1 sec.
1 sec.
Sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type]

ON
Status of the device set for [Device]
OFF
3.
1.
2.
4.
5.
The object script is executed at the timing of "1.".

At the timing of "3.", the object script is not executed since the timing is not the condition check
sampling cycle.
At the timing of "4.", the object script is not executed since the device condition is not
established.
(b) To start counting of a sampling cycle when the device condition is established
The sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type] does not depend on the device status. (Sampling
cycle does not change when the device is turned ON/OFF.)
To start counting of a sampling cycle, make settings as below.
1 Set [Rise] or [Fall] for [Trigger Type]
2 Make a sequence program so that the device turns ON / OFF at the timing when an object
script should be executed.
(2) About execution timing when sampling cycle is set in [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling]
Counting of a sampling cycle starts and is reset at the timing indicated below.
The object itself is displayed (display in response to switching of the screen, changing of the
security level, etc.).
At security level changing
After the execution of any of the events above, the object script is executed at the time that the set
sampling cycle is reached.
16 - 72
16.3 Object Script

PARTS
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
(Screen for display object script setting in Numerical Input)

Item
12
Description
Click the Input button to set input object scripts.
When clicking the Input button, the tab changes to the object script tab of input object scripts.
(
This section
(1) Object script tab of input object scripts)
RECIPE
Input
This button is displayed only for the following objects.

Numerical input
Use Object Script
ASCII input
13

EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Script User ID
Data Type
Signed BIN 16 / 32
BCD 16 / 32
Real
14


Ordinary,
ON,
OFF
Fall,
Sampling,
ON Sampling, OFF Sampling
View Change,
Synchronize Display Trigger*2
Set the trigger device by clicking the Dev...

Trigger Device
15
button when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF

(
Script Preview
Rise
OTHERS
Trigger Type*1
DEBUG
the second.

(
This section
For details of *1, refer to *1 of
Editing scripts)
(1) Object script tab of input object scripts in this section.
*2 Cannot be used for lamp, clock display and panel meter.
16.3 Object Script

16 - 73
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Edit Script
(3) Object Script tab of switch object scripts
Item
Use Object Script
Description
Script User ID

Signed BIN 16 / 32
Data Type
BCD 16 / 32
Real

second.
*1
Trigger Type

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling OFF Sampling
Rise
Device writing
Set the trigger device by clicking the Dev... button when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF
Trigger Device

(
$W (Writing Device)
When substituting the value processed by the script to a device in response to the operation of a touch switch,
set the target device.
Select the data type of object internal variable $W (write device).
Data Type
Bit
: Data is treated as a bit device.
Signed BIN 16 / 32
: Data is treated as 16/32-bit signed binary.
: Data is treated as 16/32-bit unsigned binary.
BCD 16 / 32
: Data is treated as 16/32-bit BCD (binary coded decimal) value.
Real
: Data is treated as 32-bit floating point type real.
Set the object internal variable $W (write device).

Device
(
Script Preview

Edit Script
This section
For details of *1, refer to *1 of
16 - 74
16.3 Object Script

Editing scripts)
(1) Object script tab of input object scripts in this section.
9
2 Editing scripts
PARTS
The Edit Script tab is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.
10
GRAPH, METER
Script edit area
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
12
Description
RECIPE
Item
Scripts can be edited directly.
Script edit area
: Returns the script edit operation one step.
(Redo)
: Redoes returned operation.
(Cut)
: Cuts the selected character string.
(Copy)
: Copies the selected character string.
(Paste)
: Pastes the copied or cut character string.
(Delete)
: Deletes the selected character string.
(Import)
: Reads out the edited text file / Unicode text file to GT Designer2. *1
(Export)
: Saves the script edited by GT Designer2 as a text file / Unicode text file. *1
(Search)
: The search dialog box is displayed.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(Undo)
14
DEBUG
Input the search target text and click the Search Next button after selecting the
search direction (upward/downward), and the input text is searched for.
(Symbol)
: Set object script symbols.

(
This section
15
Object script symbol)
Input Navigation
: Check this item to display [Input Navigation] in the [Edit Script] dialog box.
Line No.
: Check this item to display the line numbers of the script.
An example of how to use [Input Navigation] is shown below.

This section
(1) Use example of input navigation
16
Checks script syntax. Device type and device range are also checked.
Syntax Check
16.3 Object Script

16 - 75
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Input Navigation
OTHERS
Function / device/ property, etc. that is inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
*1 About import / export

For the exported text file / Unicode text file, operation simulation is possible using general C compiler. It is
also possible to edit scripts using general text editor.
The edited text file / Unicode text file can be read out to GT Designer2 by importing.
Example: Editing a script by text editor
Exporting to a text file / Unicode text file

Edit the script using
the text editor.
Edited contents
are reflected.
Remark
About Unicode text file

Unicode text file is used for importing / exporting in the multilanguage environment.
For multilanguage input, refer to the following manual.
16 - 76
16.3 Object Script

(1) Use example of input navigation

How the input navigation is used is explained below using the operation to insert the line drawing
function (d_line()) to a script as an example.
[Drawing]
[Line] in the tree.
PARTS
1 Select [Items]
2 Edit the arguments of d_line() referring to [Description].
10
GRAPH, METER
3 Click the Insert button and "d_line()" is inserted to the cursor position in the script edit area.
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(1) Setting colors

Check a color code number in explained below and set it to a script.
1 Close the [Edit Script] dialog box and the object setting dialog box.
2 Draw an appropriate figure on the screen and open the setting dialog box.
14
DEBUG
3 Open the color setting dialog box and check the code number of the color to
be used.
5 Open the object setting dialog box and the [Edit Script] dialog box, and then
set the color code number checked in
.
(2) Setting Line Type / Pattern
For the setting values of Line Type / Pattern, refer to the following.
Section 16.3.2
(1) (a) Argument

16.3 Object Script
16 - 77
16
SCRIPT FUNCTION
4 Close the color setting dialog box and then the figure setting dialog box. After
that clear the figure drawn in
.
OTHERS
15
3 Object script symbol

Devices, constants, etc. to be described in a script may be an arbitrary character string.
To use an arbitrary character string in a script, set a device or constant that corresponds to the
character string in this setting. (The script operates on GOT even if a character string is described in a
script.)
The object script symbol setting is valid only to object scripts.
Item
Description
(Import) *1
Reads out the object script symbol setting, edited in a CSV file / Unicode text file, to GT Designer2.
(Export)*1
Saves the object script symbol setting, made by GT Designer2, in a CSV file / Unicode text file.
Input an arbitrary character string to be described in script files. (Up to 32 characters)
Symbol Name

In a symbol name, "#", control statements, operators, etc. cannot be used.
Device of Fixed Value
Input the device or constant that corresponds to symbol name. (Up to 32 characters)
Displaying the Object Script Symbol screen

The Object Script Symbol screen is displayed when any of the operations below is
performed.
Clicking the
button in the [Edit Script] dialog box.
Selecting [Common]
[Object Script Symbol] menu.
Double clicking
16 - 78
16.3 Object Script

(object script symbol) in the project workspace.
*1 About import / export
PARTS
It is possible to edit an exported CSV file / Unicode file using such as spreadsheet software.
After editing, the CSV file / Unicode file can be read out to GT Designer2 by importing the file.
Example: Import/export to a CSV file
GRAPH, METER
10
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT

Microsoft Excel, etc.
14
DEBUG
The addition is displayed.
OTHERS
15
16.3 Object Script

16 - 79
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16

This section explains program examples of object script program.
1 Data calculation by numerical input script

(1) Operation
Data calculation is executed when a device value is written.
Screen image
Parts operation
Numerical input : When the write value is "0" or larger, the
write value is multiplied by 10.
When the write value is smaller than "0", the
write value is set as "5000".
(2) Program examples

Item
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN16
Trigger Type
Input fixation
Script
[w:TMP0] = $W;
// Stores the write value to the temporary area.
if([w:TMP0] >= 0) {
// If the write value is "0" or larger,
$W = [w:TMP0] * 10;
}else{
$W = 5000;
}
16 - 80
16.3 Object Script

// the write value is multiplied by 10.

// If the write value is less than "0",
// the write value is set as "5000".
9
(1) Operation
The displayed value (monitored device value) blinks when it does not change for the set time.
This feature can be used to give a caution after the elapse of a set time.
Screen image
Parts operation
PARTS
2 To start blinking after the elapse of set time
10
value) does not change for 5 seconds, the

characters blink in red.
Data Type
Signed BIN16
Trigger Type
Sampling (1 second)
if([w:TMP0002] != $$){
// When the displayed value changes,
[w:TMP0001] = 5;
// counting starts (sets time (seconds) for staring blinking).
[w:TMP0002] = $$;
// saves the displayed value.
my.blink = 0;
// sets "does not blink".
my.text_color = 0xFF;
// changes the character color to white.
if([w:TMP0001] > 0){

[w:TMP0001] = [w:TMP0001] - 1;
Script
12
// When the displayed value does not change,

// If the count is not "0",
// reduces the count value.
if([w:TMP0001] == 0){
// When the count value reaches "0",
my.text_color = 0xE0;
// changes the character color to red.
my.blink = 3;
// starts high-speed blinking.
RECIPE
}else{
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
}else{
[w:TMP0001] = 5;
}
}
// reflects property.
DEBUG
14
15
OTHERS
redraw_object();
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
Description
16
16.3 Object Script

16 - 81
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Item
GRAPH, METER
Numerical Display: If the displayed value (monitored device
3 Showing / hiding the input / touch operation object

(1) Operation
The script controls "show / hide" of the specific objects for input / touch operation corresponding the
execution condition at switching screen.
Since an object used for input / touch operation is displayed only when necessary, this feature can
be used to avoid inputting error.
Screen image
Parts operation
Numerical Input
: Numerical input is displayed when M0

turns ON.
Numerical Input is hidden when M0
turns OFF.
Switch 1 Switch
: The touch switch is displayed when M1

turns ON.
The touch switch is hidden when M1
turns OFF.

Part Name
Numerical input
Object Type
Numerical input
Touch switch
Switch 1
(Multi-action switch)
Setting item
Trigger Type
ON
Device
M0
Trigger Type
ON
Device
M1
Display / Trigger
Trigger

(a) Numerical input
Item
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN16
Trigger Type
Ordinary
if([b:M0] == ON){
Script
my.active = 1;
// Euables update.
redraw_object();
// Updates the object.
my.active = 0;
// Disables update.
clear_object();
// Clears the object.
}else{
(b)
Switch 1 switch
Item
Data Type
Trigger Type
Description
Signed BIN16
Ordinary
if([b:M1] == ON){
Script
my.active = 1;
// Euables update.
redraw_object();
// Updates the object.
my.active = 0;
// Disables update.
clear_object();
// Clears the object.
}else{
16 - 82
16.3 Object Script

Setting
9
4 Drawing responding to a device value
Parts operation
Operation 1 lamp
: Turns ON when D500 is "1" and a

circle is drawn around the lamp.
Operation 2 lamp
Operation 3 lamp

Reset
switch
: Resets Operation 1 to Operation 3.
Operation 1 lamp switch: Starts Operation 1.
11
ACTIONS

Operation 1 lamp
Object Type
Word lamp
Setting item
Setting
Device
D500
Text
Operation 1
State 0
TRIGGER

Part Name
Lamp color
Red
Device range
$V < 1
10
GRAPH, METER
Screen image
PARTS
(1) Details of operation

A figure is drawn on the screen corresponding to the device value.
12
State 1
Operation lamp 2
Word lamp
Text
Operation 2
State 0
Lamp color
RECIPE
Black
D500
13
Red
Device range
$V < 2
Lamp color
Black
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Lamp color
Device
State 1
Operation 3 lamp
Word lamp
Device
D500
Text
Operation 2
State 0
Lamp color
Red
Device range
$V < 3
Lamp color
Black
14
Reset
switch
Operation 1 lamp
Data write switch
Data write switch
Device
D500
Set value (fixed value)
Text
Reset
Device
D500
DEBUG
State 1
15
Data write switch
Operation 1
Device
D500
Text
Operation 2
switch
Operation 3 lamp
Data write switch
Device
D500
Text
Operation 3
16
switch
16.3 Object Script

16 - 83
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Operation 2 lamp
Text
OTHERS
switch

(a) Operation 1 lamp
Item
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN16
Trigger Type
Ordinary
if ([w:D500] == 1){
Script
// When D500 is "1",
screen_draw(1);
// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
// draws a circle.
}else{
// When D500 is not "1",
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
// clears a circle. (draws a circle in the same color as the
// background color)
(b) Operation lamp 2

Item
Data Type
Trigger Type
Description
Signed BIN16
Ordinary
if ([w:D500] == 2){
Script
// When D500 is "2",
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
// draws a circle.
}else{
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
(c) Operation 3 lamp

Item
Description
Data Type
Signed BIN16
Trigger Type
Ordinary
if ([w:D500] == 3){
Script
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
// draws a circle.
}else{
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
16 - 84
// When D500 is "3",
screen_draw(1);
16.3 Object Script

16.3.8 Precautions
PARTS
Install the option OS (object script) to GOT to use object scripts.
10
GRAPH, METER
Install the option function board to use object scripts.
(1) Changing from Numerical Input / ASCII Input to Numerical Display / ASCII Display
When the setting dialog box is closed by clicking the OK button after changing from Numerical
Input / ASCII Input to Numerical Display / ASCII Display, the input object script settings are cleared.
Display object settings are not cleared.
TRIGGER
4 Precautions for the object script execution condition
11
ACTIONS
3 Precautions for objects
(1) Functions that cannot be set simultaneously

Object scripts cannot be used when any of the functions below is set.
To use object scripts, do not set the functions indicated below.
Data Operation
Store memory
Locus display (line graph only)
RECIPE
12
13
(3) Execution of object scripts on the same screen

When a multiple display of the same screen is given due to overlap window / superimpose window
/ screen overlay, only the object script in the screen displayed first is executed.
While the object script on the screen displayed first is executed, the object scripts on the same
screens displayed later are not executed.
The object script displayed in the same screen is executed when the object script displayed in the
first screen has been executed.
14
DEBUG
(4) When "device write" is set for the execution condition

Set the write device to the object for which a script is set.
The script is not executed if a write device is not set.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(2) Object status

Object script cannot be executed when the object is in the status indicated below.
The object is not displayed / operating since it is out of the screen.
The object is not displayed / operating since a monitor device has not been set.
OTHERS
15
16.3 Object Script

16.3.8 Precautions
16 - 85
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
5 Precautions for devices

(1) The number of write enabled devices in a controller
When writing data to a device in a controller, writing is possible only for one device with one script.
To execute writing to multiple devices in controllers, use multiple object scripts.
(2) Operation programmed by object script during write device
Execution of an object script is interrupted.
Interrupted operation restarts after the completion of write device.
Object display is not updated.
Object display is updated after the completion of write device.
Input is disabled even when touch an object on the screen.
Input is enabled after the completion of write device.
6 Precautions for object property

(1) Movements of numerical display / comment display whose level display are superimposed
When drawing with level display superimposed on GT Designer2, numerical display / comment
display can move only in the area inside of level display.
When numerical display / comment display moves to out of the level display area, numerical
display / comment display is not displayed correctly.
When drawing without superimposing on GT Designer2, superimposing processing is not executed
even when numerical display / comment display is moved to the inside of the level display area.
(2) Properties that are valid only when set on GT Designer2
Among the setting items of objects, those which are valid only when they are set on GT Designer2
(such as the settings which are not valid unless a certain item is checked), cannot be referenced /
changed by object property.
7 Precautions for free figure drawing function

(1) Drawing while an object is blinking
While an object is blinking, the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function blinks together
with the object.
(2) Superimposing of drawing figure and an object
If a figure drawn using the free figure drawing function is superimpose to an object, the figure in the
superimposed area may disappear.
(3) Drawing when execution condition other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger] is
set when the execution condition is other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger],
the object itself overwrites the figure drawn by the free figure drawing function. Therefore, the
figure drawn by the free figure drawing function may be cleared.
(4) When [Key Code Input], [Input Fixation] or [Device Write] is set for action trigger
Drawing is not executed.
In this case, any errors do not occured.
When using the free figure drawing function, set the execution condition other than [Key Code
Input], [Input Fixation] and [Device Write].
16 - 86
16.3 Object Script

16.3.8 Precautions
(6) Drawing area

With the upper left corner of GOT screen set as (0, 0), it is not possible to draw a figure outside of
the area from (-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).
Specify the coordinates to draw inside of the area from (-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).
10
GRAPH, METER
Drawing is not possible outside the frame.

(0,0)
In the area inside the frame, drawing is allowed.

(4799,4799)
TRIGGER
ACTIONS
11
RECIPE
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
OTHERS
15
16
16.3 Object Script

16.3.8 Precautions
16 - 87
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(-2400,-2400)
PARTS
(5) Maximum number of settings

Concerning figures to be drawn by the free figure drawing function, the drawing is possible for up to
40 points by a single object.
16.4 Troubleshooting
The script function does not display an error message at the time of error.
It stops the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping.
Therefore, each script must be debugged without fail by reference to the followings.
16.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger

Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft
Visual C++) can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
Observe the following procedure to perform simulation using the general C language compiler or debugger.
1 Project script, Screen script

Changing file extension
text1.txt
text1.c
Additional description of main and include

Additional
description
#include<stdio.h>
Additional
description
main(){
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
1 Change the script file (extension ".txt")

created for the GOT into a C language
source file (extension ".c").
2 Open the C language source file with a

commercially-available text editor and
create a frame with "main(){}". Also,
describe "#include<stdio.h>" at the
beginning.
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
Additional
description
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
}
Changing device (variable) describing method

#include<stdio.h>
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
main(){
_wTMP0001__=0;
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
3 Change the device (variable) describing

method from that for script function to
that for C language.
Changing the variables into for C
language based on the following
definition enables smooth restoration to
the GOT script.
......(Omitted)......
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
_ w T M P 0 0 1 0 _ _= _ wT M P 0 00 2 _ _ + _ wT M P 0 0 0 3 _ _
+_wTMP0004__-1;
_wD200__=_wTMP0010__%7;
Definition 1 "[w:"
"_w"
Definition 2 "[b:"
"_b"
Definition 3 "]"
"_ _"
(To the next page)
16 - 88
Using the batch replacement function of

the commercially available text editor is
convenient to make changes.
#include<stdio.h>
void main(void){
Addition
unsigned short _wTMP0000__;
Addition
Addition
Addition
unsigned short _wD100__;

......(Omitted)......
Script Data Format
_wTMP0001__=0;
Signed BIN16
while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__){
Unsigned BIN16
Variable Type
short
unsigned short
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
long
unsigned long
......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
BCD32/BCD16*1
float
TRIGGER
Real
----
+_wTMP0004__-1;
_wD200__ = _wTMP0010__%7;
*1 Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data

format disables simulation with the general C language
11
ACTIONS
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
10
12
5 Perform simulation with the general C

language compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
6 The step run, variable watch and other
functions specific to debugger are usable.
7
14
DEBUG
On completion of debugging, execute the

steps
to
in reverse order to restore
the GOT script file.
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Execution of simulation
RECIPE
compiler or debugger.
OTHERS
15
16
16 - 89
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Description
change
4 For C language, the variables must be

defined prior to use.
As only one data format can be selected
for one script, the variable types of the C
language must be set all the same.
Being conscious of the script data format,
assign the variables as indicated below.
GRAPH, METER
Variable definition (auto variable declaration)
PARTS
(From the preceding page)
2 Object script
Changing file extension
text1.txt
text1.c
Additional description of main and include

Additional
description
#include<stdio.h>
Additional
description
main(){
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
1 Exports the object script, created by GT

Designer2, to text file / Unicode text file
(extension ".txt") and change exported
script file into a C language source file
(extension ".c").
2 Open the C language source file with a
commercially-available text editor and
create a frame with "main(){}". Also,
describe "#include<stdio.h>" at the
beginning.
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
my.x = 200;
my.scale_max[0] = 500;
......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
$W = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional
description
Changing device (variable) describing method
#include<stdio.h>
main(){
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
_wTMP0001__=0;
Description
change
Description
change
Description
change
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
my_x = 200;
my_scale_max_0__ = 500;
......(Omitted)......
+_wTMP0004__-1;
device_write = _wTMP0010__%7;
3 Change the device (variable / property)

describing method from that for script
function to that for C language.
Changing the variables into those for C
language, based on the following
definition, enables smooth restoration
to the GOT script.
Definition 1
Definition 2
Definition 3
Definition 4
Definition 5
Definition 6
Definition 7
Definition 8
Definition 9
"[w:"
"_w"
"[b:"
"_b"
"]"
"__"
"my."
"my_"
"$W"
"device_write"
"$V"
"device_value"
"$$"
"monitor_ device"
"$K"
"key_input"
"["
"_"
Using the global replacement function

of the commercially-available text editor
is convenient to make changes.
(To the next page)
16 - 90
Addition
Addition
Addition
Addition
unsigned short _wD100__;
Addition
short
Addition
unsigned sort my_scale_max_0__;
Addition
unsigned sort device_write;
Script Data Format
Variable Type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
short
unsigned short
Signed BIN32
11
long
Unsigned BIN32
_wTMP0001__=0;
Real
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
BCD32/BCD16*1
ACTIONS
......(Omitted)......
unsigned long
float
----
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
*1 Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data
format disables simulation with the general C language
my_x = 200;
my_scale_max_0__ = 500;
......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004__-1;
device_write = _wTMP0010__%7;
12
compiler or debugger.
(2) Property
Select the data format according to
the property range.
(3) Internal variable
Assign the same variable type as the
script data type.
Execution of simulation
PARTS
(1) Device
my_c;
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
10
GRAPH, METER
void main(void){
TRIGGER
#include<stdio.h>
5 Perform simulation with the general C

language compiler or debugger. (The
example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
13
14
DEBUG
6 The step run, variable watch and other

functions specific to debugger are usable.
OTHERS
15
16
16 - 91
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Description
change
RECIPE
Variable definition (auto variable declaration)
4 For C language, the variables must be

defined prior to use.
As only one data format can be selected for
one script, the variable types of the C
language must be set all the same.
Being conscious of the script data format,
assign the variables as indicated below.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(From the preceding page)
(1) Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation
with the general C language compiler or debugger.
(2) As dedicated for the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov statements
cannot be simulated with the general C language compiler or debugger.Use
assignment of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
(3) When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged,
the define must be added to the C language source file.
(4) The assignment delay does not occur during simulation with the general C
language compiler or debugger, although it occurs when a script is executed on
GOT. Therefore, take the possibility of assignment delay occurrence into
consideration when performing simulation.
(5) By applying the above, a new program created using C language can be used as
a GOT script after being debugged.
(6) Offset designation of a device cannot be used in the above debugging.
If debugging of the offset designated device is required, it is necessary to set the
corresponding device in advance.
16.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
1 The dialog box displayed during syntax check

The following dialog box will be displayed during syntax check.
If there is an error in script, the error code will be displayed in the dialog box.
When the error code is displayed, refer to
Error code list for the troubleshooting.
Error code
About errors that cannot be checked by syntax check

There are errors that cannot be checked by syntax check.
If a script includes an error that cannot be checked by syntax check, an error occurs
when a script is executed on GOT.
For the errors detected during script execution on GOT and the corrective action,
refer to the following.
Section 16.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
16 - 92
9
2 Error code list
The following list provides the error codes that may be displayed in the script error dialog box.
Extended file register (ER) setting error. (inter-block settings)
The bit device made word access.
*2
Out of the range of device No. (displayed in HEX. number)
*2
Out of the range of device No. (displayed in DEC. number)
Out of the range of device No. (displayed in OCT. number address)
The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.
The setting is not within the range of 0 to 15 when specifying word device bit.
The set device is out of the range or does not exist.
11
Out of the range of device No.
14
Access to the device disabling word accessibility by using bit.
15
Access to the device disabling bit accessibility by using bit.
16
Octal device are set with odd number.
17
The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.
20
The specified CPU does not exist.
21
The specified Word type does not exist.
22
A CPU not included with network settings has been specified.
25
No expression exit between {and}.
26
The operator type of expressions table flow.
27
The control type table overflew.
28
The switch statement includes no "case".
29
"Default" exist although there is no switch statement.
30
There are multiple "default" settings in switch statements.
31
There are too many switch "case" statements.
32
There are too many "switch break" statements.
33
Switch nest is deep.
34
System memory is insufficient.
35
Parenthesis nest is deep.
36
Regarded as invalid statement.
37
No semicolon.
10
GRAPH, METER
The address of device is not an even number.
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
The configuration error of script.
PARTS
Causes of error occurrence
12
RECIPE
Error code
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
DEBUG
14
38
There are invalid characters.
39
File input is not specified.
40
The specified input file does not exist.
41
The nest of if/while is deep.
45
The CPU incompatible with multi-CPU is specified as multi-CPU.
46
The multi-specified station No. is incorrect.
47
Network specification or station No. specification is incorrect.
48
Set network in GOT internal devices.
101
No closed parenthesis.
111
The bit device is specified for the device with indirect specification.
OTHERS
15

16 - 93
SCRIPT FUNCTION
16
Error code*1
Causes of error occurrence
112
The type of a controller connected to channel (1 to 4) is not specified.
113
Channel number is illegal.
114
Channel designation is not allowed for a common device.
115
Write is attempted for a read-only internal variable.
116
Read is attempted for a write-only internal variable.
117
Write is attempted for a read-only property.
118
Read is attempted for a write-only property.
119
A character string does not end with '"'.
120
EOF is used in a character string.
121
A character string includes too many characters.
122
Unicode conversion error of a character string.
123
EG device cannot be used in an object script.
124
Data type conversion function cannot be used.
125
An unusable internal variable is used.
126
An unusable property is used.
127
An unusable function is used.
*1
The same error code may be displayed twice when station No. setting of a device is incorrect.
*2
For devices (such as coil (MB) of YASKAWA PLC CP-9200SH) that have mixed representation (decimal and
hexadecimal) of a device number, error code "4" occurs when a number outside the address range is specified.
16 - 94
16.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
PARTS
1 Error checking method

The error data of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers (GS).
Check the stored data using the system monitor function and various object functions (numerical
display, lam indication and others) of the GOT.
10
GRAPH, METER
Details of GOT special registers

Details of system monitor function
Address
Item Name
TRIGGER
(1) The following types of GOT special register (GS) are provided for Project script/Screen script.
Description
Stores the data of error occurrence.
GS14
Script common information (read only)
ACTIONS
11
12
GS14.00
:Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS14.07
:Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS14.08
:Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12
:Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access
Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.

The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS16
to GS47).
13
The value at GS15 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
"18"
.......
"46" (cycles back to "16".)
are shown below.

Script error pointer
GS15
Area where the latest error code is stored
16
GS16 to GS17
18
GS18 to GS19
...
...
46
GS46 to GS47
14
Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due
order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
Script error data
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a
history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.
15

OTHERS
GS16 to 47*1
16
16 - 95
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GS15
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
"16"
The relationships between the GS15 value and the latest error code storing area
DEBUG
"-1"
RECIPE
to out-of-range device).
Address
Item Name
Description
Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script
execution numbers (GS49 to GS79).
The value at GS48 cycles as shown below each time a project script/screen script
is executed.
"-1"
"49"
"50"
.......
The relationships between the GS48 value and the latest script execution number
GS48
GS49 to 79
GS384
storing area are shown below.
Script execution pointer
Script execution number
GS48
49
GS49
50
GS50
...
...
79
GS79
Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.
Script common control (write only)
GS384.0
:When ON, clears Script error data (GS16 to 47).
GS384.1
:Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error

when turned ON.
Sets the monitor time of one script in second unit.

If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped.
(Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
GS385
Script monitoring time
Setting Example
Monitor Time
0 (default)
10 seconds
1 seconds
10
10 seconds
11
11 seconds
Sets whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following
conditions is satisfied.
The screen script is used.
The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
Switched to the screen including scripts.
Security switching
Language switching
Switching station No.
GS386
Offset switching
Setting
Trigger Type
Bit Value of Trigger
Rise
ON
Fall
OFF
Other
Rise
ON
than 0
Fall
OFF
Example
0
Performed
Not performed
*1 According to the error, script No. may be "0".

For the script function error, refer to the following.
This section
16 - 96
Initial Operation
Error code list
(2) The following types of GOT special register (GS) are provide for Object script.
Address
Item Name
Description
Stores the data of error occurrence.
GS80
:Turns ON at error occurrence.
PARTS
GS80.00
Object script common information (read
GS80.07
:Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
only)
GS80.08
:Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS80.12
:Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access
10
Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.

The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS82
to GS113).
The value at GS81 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
"-1"
"82"
"84"
.......
The relationships between the GS81 value and the latest error code storing area
Object script error pointer
GS81
82
GS82 to GS83
84
GS84 to GS85
...
...
112
GS112 to GS113
TRIGGER
GS81
11
ACTIONS
are shown below.
GRAPH, METER
to out-of-range device).
12
Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due
order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
Object script error data
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a
history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.
Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script
RECIPE
GS82 to 113*1
13
The value at GS114 cycles as shown below each time an object script is executed.
"-1"
"115"
"116"
.......
The relationships between the GS114 value and the latest script execution
number storing area are shown below.
GS387
Object script execution number
Object script common control (write only)
115
GS115
116
GS116
...
...
145
GS145
14
DEBUG
GS114
Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.
15
GS384.0
:When ON, clears Script error data (GS82 to 113).
GS387.1
:Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error

when turned ON.

OTHERS
GS115 to 145
Object script execution pointer
16
16 - 97
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GS114
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
execution numbers (GS115 to GS145).
Address
Item Name
Description
Sets the monitor time of one object script in unit of second.
If an object script does not end after elapsing the preset time, object script
processing is stopped. (Error code: 1015)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
GS388
Setting Example
Monitor Time
0 (default)
10 seconds
1 seconds
10
10 seconds
11
11 seconds
Sets the contents of initial operation to be performed when the following conditions
are satisfied.
The object script is used.
The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise / Fall".
The screen is switched to the one that includes object scripts.
Switching security
Switching language
Switching station No.
Set the contents of initial operation to be performed at the start up of the GOT.
GS389
Object for which store memory is set

Line graph for which locus display is set
Setting
Trigger Type
Bit Value of Trigger
Rise
ON
Fall
OFF
Other
Rise
ON
than 0
Fall
OFF
Example
0
Initial Operation
Performed
Not performed
*1 According to errors, script user ID may be "0".

For the script function error, refer to the following.
This section
16 - 98
9
2 Error code list
(1) Project script, Screen script
PARTS
Reduce the number of times to execute the project script.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and base screens.
Reduce the number of times to execute screen script (base).
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and superimpose
3*1
Initialization of screen script (superimpose window)

failed.
screens.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (superimpose
window) .
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap window
4*1
Initialization of screen script (overlap window 1)

failed.
screens 1.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap window
1) .
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap window
5*1
Initialization of screen script (overlap window 2)

failed.
screens 2.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap window
2) .
7*1
The operation result is a value outside the usable

data range specified by the data format of the script.
The number of times to execute scripts exceeded
the limit. And some scripts were left unexecuted.
11*1
12
13
Change the number of times to execute scripts on one screen to 256 or

less.
Check whether the device to be monitored is correct.
Check the processing of the device which could not be handled as BCD,
and correct the script and sequence program.
the script data format, the operation result was

outside the BCD data range.
10
of the corresponding script, and correct the script.
the script data format, the monitor device value
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as
The numerator was divided by the denominator of 0.

Write to a device failed.
failed.
The while statement includes the description of a
device other than a temporary device area.
14
An expression was too complicated to process.
15
A script did not end within the script monitoring time.

Access to GOT internal device failed, resulting in
error (BCD conversion out of device range)
occurrence.
Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the BCD data
range.
Check the factor that caused zero division in the corresponding script, and
correct the script.
Check the device description of the corresponding script.
Reservation of an internal area for device write
12
Change the number of times to execute scripts in one project to 256 or less.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as

could not be handled as BCD.
Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the data range
11
RECIPE
10
GRAPH, METER
Initialization of screen script (base) failed.
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts.
ACTIONS
Initialization of project script failed.
TRIGGER
2*1
Corrective Action
13
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1*1
Error Definition
14
Reduce the number of write device points in the corresponding script.

Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary device
area.
Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script.
DEBUG
Error Code
Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop.
15
Increase the value of script monitoring time (GS385).

Check the corresponding processing to GOT internal device and check the
script and PLC program.
Check the object script description.
Check whether Extended Function OS of gateway function is installed in
GOT.
Check the cable.
19
Failed to initialize screen script

(superimposed window 2)
Reduce scripts and the number of monitor devices on the Superimposed
16
Window 2.
Reduce the number of scripts to be executed (Superimposed Window 2).
*1 Script No. "0" is stored to GOT special register (GS).
16 - 99
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Access to gateway device failed.
OTHERS
16
(2) Object script

Error Code
Error Category*1
1000
Fatal error
1002
Fatal error
1006
1011*2
Fatal error
Execution error
1014
Fatal error
1015
Fatal error
Error Definition
Object script cannot be executed since the
option function board is not recognized.
Initialization of objects related to the object
scripts failed when switching the screen.
Corrective Action
Mount the option function board correctly.
Reduce the number of object scripts and the monitor
device points of the base screen.
Reduce the number of object scripts presently executed.
An error occurred in writing the data from the
Correct the description of the device, taken as the out of
ordinarily collected devices.
the range device.
Writing to a device failed.
Check the description of the target script.
The expression is too complicate to be
Simplify the script operation expression by dividing it or by
processed.
using other appropriate method.
Execution of object script does not finish
Check the script if it constitutes endless loop.
although the object script monitor time has
Increase the value set for object script monitoring time
elapsed.
(GS388).
Check the access operation to a GOT internal device
1016
Fatal error
Access to a GOT internal device failed.
and also the script and sequence program.

Check the description of the target script.
The script that caused an error in syntax check
Check and correct the script that caused an error in syntax
by GT Designer2 was executed.
check by GT Designer2.
1017
Fatal error
1018
Fatal error
1020
Fatal error
1021
Fatal error
Illegal device type was detected.
1031
Fatal error
Reference of an internal variable was impossible.
1032
Fatal error
1039
Fatal error
1045
Fatal error
Access failed since temporary device outside the

range is specified.
Specify the temporary device within the range.
Write to multiple devices was attempted in a
Correct the specified number of write devices to the
single script.
allowable number.
Correct the device to the one that can be used by the
script.
Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows
referencing of the corresponding internal variable.
Substitution to an interval variable was
Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows
impossible.
substitution to the corresponding internal variable.
Setting that is not in the object was referenced or
Refer to or change the property that can be set by the
changed.
object itself.
1057
1060
Fatal error
1070
16 - 100
1109
Execution error
1110
The result of operation cannot be treated by BCD

data.
Corrective Action
Check the device setting for monitoring.
Check the device operation that the BCD data could not
process.
The result of operation falls outside the BCD data
Check the operation of the device that caused the BCD
range.
data to be outside the range.
Execution error
Zero division was executed.
Check the zero division of the script.
1131
Execution error
Reference of an internal variable was impossible.
Cheek the internal variable to be referenced.
1141
Execution error
A value outside the property range was set.
Check the value to be substituted in property.
1142
Execution error
For the element number of the property that

specifies an array, a value outside the range was
set.
10
Check the element number of the property that specifies

an array.
Object font was not the standard font.

Execution error
For the object font other than 16-dot standard,
11
Check the substituted value of property.
ACTIONS
1143
"0" (display in 0.5 times) was set.

1144
Execution error
1251
Warning
1252
Warning
1253
Warning
A scale ratio causing the figure to exceed the

shape was set.
There is an error in coordinates or radius.
There is an error in line style, line width or line
color.
There is an error in pattern, pattern color or
pattern background color.
PARTS
Execution error
Error Definition
GRAPH, METER
1108
Error Category*1
Check the substituted value of property.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.
TRIGGER
Error Code
12
Warning
color, character shade color, character scale

ratio, character string code or character string
length.
There is no comment assigned to the specified
1255
Warning
comment No. of the specified comment group
*1
The stored amount of drawing data exceeded the

allowable capacity.
For details of error category, refer to the following.

This section
*2
Reduce the number of functions.
14
Script user ID "0" is stored to GOT special register (GS).
DEBUG
Warning
15
OTHERS
1256
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
No.
13
16
16 - 101
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1254
RECIPE
There is an error in character attribute, character
3 Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

(1) Error category
Object script errors are classified into the categories shown below.
Script operation at the occurrence of error is also indicated.
Error Category
Fatal error
Object Script Operation at the Occurrence of Error

Object script stops.
Object script does not operate even if the trigger condition is established again.
Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped. *2
Execution error
Warning
*2
Object script stops.

Object script operates when the trigger condition is established again.
Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped. *2
If the error occurs repeatedly, the occurrence of error in the second time and later is not written to GS82 to GS113.
Object script does not stop.
Operation of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, differs depending on the action and
execution trigger set.
Trigger Executed to Act for Object Script
Monitor Function of Object
Write Function of Object
Operates
Stops
View change
Synchronize display trigger
Stops
Operates
Other than above
Stops
Stops
Key code input

Input fixation
Device writing
(2) Script executed before the occurrence of an error

Reflection of the written value and execution of a function differ depending on the write target
device and the function to be executed.
(a) Writing to a device
If writing to a device was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the
error, the written value is reflected as indicated below.
Write Target Device
Operation at the Occurrence of Error
GOT internal device (GB/ GD)

GOT internal device (Other than GB/ GD)
Controller device
: Written value is reflected.
: Written value is not reflected.
(b) Execution of function

If a function was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the error,
execution of the function is processed as indicated below.
Execution Target of Write and Function
Operation at the Occurrence of Error
Free figure drawing

Object update function
Object display clear function
Screen update function
Internal variable
Property
: Function is executed.
16 - 102
: Function is not executed.
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
(1) List of key code for numerical and ASCII input
Key code (H)
Key
Key code (H)
Key
Key code (H)
SP
0020H
0040H
0060H
0081H
0021H
0041H
0061H
0082H
0022H
0042H
0062H
0083H
0023H
0043H
0063H
0024H
0044H
0064H
0025H
0045H
0065H
&
0026H
0046H
0066H
0027H
0047H
0067H
0028H
0048H
0068H
0029H
0049H
0069H
002AH
004AH
006AH
002BH
004BH
006BH
002CH
004CH
006CH
002DH
004DH
006DH
002EH
004EH
006EH
002FH
004FH
006FH
0030H
0050H
0070H
0031H
0051H
0071H
0032H
0052H
0072H
0033H
0053H
0073H
0034H
0054H
0074H
0035H
0055H
0075H
0036H
0056H
0076H
0037H
0057H
0077H
0038H
0058H
0078H
0039H
0059H
0079H
003AH
005AH
007AH
003BH
005BH
007BH
<
003CH
005CH
003DH
005DH
>
003EH
005EH
007EH
003FH
005FH
0080H
Key
(Clear)
Key code (H)
0088H
007CH
}
007DH
App - 1
Index
Key
(2) List of key code for objects

(a) Key code for numerical input
Key code (H)
0008H
Application
Deletes the least signification digit and shifts the entire digits to the
right by one.
000DH
001BH
Cancel
002DH
" " (sign inversion)
002EH
"."
0030H to 0046H
Input value
0090H
Move cursor to right within object
0091H
Move cursor to left within object
FFFAH
Increment
FFFBH
Decrement
(b) Key code for ASCII input

Key code (H)
0008H
Application
Deletes the first character and shifts the entire characters to the
right by one character.
000DH
001BH
Cancel
ASCII code
Input characters
0084H
Kanji conversion
0085H
Previous choice
0086H
Next choice
0087H
Select / No conversion
0090H
Move cursor to right within object
0091H
Move cursor to left within object
(c) Key code for data list display function

Key code (H)
App - 2
Application
00F2H
00F3H
(d) Key code for alarm list display function

Key code (H)
Application
00F3H
FFB0H
Show cursor
FFB1H
Hide cursor
FFB2H
Move cursor upward (Move to previous page when cursor is hidden.)
FFB3H
Move cursor downward (Move to next page when cursor is hidden.)
FFB8H
Display detail information
FFBCH
Display ladder
Index
APPENDICES
00F2H
(e) Key code for alarm history function

Key code (H)
Application
FFB0H
Show cursor
FFB1H
Hide cursor
FFB2H
Move cursor upward (Move to previous page when cursor is

hidden.)
FFB3H
Move cursor downward (Move to next page when cursor is hidden.)
FFB4H
FFB5H
FFB6H
Clear the selected alarm data
FFB7H
Clear all alarm data
FFB8H
Display detail /Move to the lower hierarchy
FFB9H
FFBBH
FFBCH
Display ladder
App - 3
(f)
Key coder for advanced alarm display function

Key code (H)
Application
FFB0H
Show cursor
FFB1H
Hide cursor
FFB2H
Move cursor up
FFB3H
Move cursor down
FFB4H
FFB5H
FFB6H
Clear the selected alarm data
FFB7H
Clear all alarm data
FFB8H
Move to the lower hierarchy (Display detail)
FFB9H
Reset the specified device
FFBBH
FFC2H
Move to the upper hierarchy
(g) Key code for historical trend graph display function

Key code (H)
App - 4
Application
FFF0H
Show cursor
FFF1H
Hide cursor
FFF2H
Cursor next
FFF3H
Cursor previous
FFF4H
Graph next
FFF5H
Graph previous
FFF6H
Graph next page scroll
FFF7H
Graph previous page scroll
FFF8H
Time axis expansion
FFF9H
Time axis contraction
FFEFH
Latest data
Appendix2 Drawing Sheet
599
592
576
560
544
528
512
496
480
479
464
448
432
416
400
384
368
352
336
320
304
288
272
256
240
224
208
192
176
160
144
128
112
96
80
64
48
32
16
16
32
48
64
80
For GT11
For GT15
Index
(1) For GT15/GT11

APPENDICES
96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752 768 784 799
App - 5
Appendix2 Drawing sheet back
App - 6
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
blue
red
purple
green
cyan
yellow
white
black
160
162
20
22
180
182
109
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
blue
red
purple
green
cyan
yellow
white
black
160
162
20
22
180
182
109
Black
Blue
Red
Purple
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
224
227
28
31
252
255
Black
Black
Blue
Red
Purple
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
224
227
28
31
252
255
Blue
Blue
Black
Purple
Red
Cyan
Green
White
Yellow
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
227
224
31
28
255
252
163
161
23
21
183
181
110
Red
Red
Purple
Black
Blue
Yellow
White
Green
Cyan
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
224
224
227
252
255
28
31
226
64
66
244
246
84
86
141
Purple
Purple
Red
Blue
Black
White
Yellow
Cyan
Green
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
227
227
224
255
252
31
28
225
67
65
247
245
87
85
142
Green
Green
Cyan
Yellow
White
Black
Blue
Red
Purple
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
28
28
31
252
255
224
227
30
188
190
10
168
170
113
Cyan
Cyan
Green
White
Yellow
Blue
Black
Purple
Red
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
31
31
28
255
252
227
224
29
191
189
11
171
169
114
Yellow
Yellow
White
Green
Cyan
Red
Purple
Black
Blue
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
252
252
255
28
31
224
227
254
92
94
232
234
72
74
145
White
White
Yellow
Cyan
Green
Purple
Red
Blue
Black
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
255
255
252
31
28
227
224
253
95
93
235
233
75
73
146
Dark
Dark
blue
blue
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Black
226
225
30
29
254
253
Dark
Dark
red
red
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
160
160
163
64
67
188
191
92
95
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
161
66
65
190
189
94
93
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
23
244
247
11
232
235
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
21
246
245
10
234
233
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
183
84
87
168
171
72
75
Dark
Dark
purple
purple
162
162
Dark
Dark
green
green
20
20
Dark
Dark
cyan
cyan
22
22
Dark
Dark
yellow
yellow
180
180
Dark
Dark
white
white
182
182
Dark
Dark
black
black
109
109
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
181
86
85
170
169
74
73
Dark
purple
162
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
purple
red
cyan
green
white
yellow
162
160
22
20
182
180
Black
0
Dark
Dark
red
blue
160
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
blue
yellow
white
green
cyan
180
182
20
22
Black
0
Dark
Dark
Dark
cyan
yellow
white
22
180
182
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
white
yellow
cyan
green
182
180
22
20
Dark
Dark
Dark
blue
red
purple
160
162
Black
0
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
green
white
yellow
blue
20
182
180
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
white
green
cyan
red
purple
Black
0
Dark
Dark
purple
red
162
160
Black
0
182
20
22
160
162
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
Dark
yellow
cyan
green
purple
red
blue
180
22
20
162
160
Dark
blue
2
--111
--205
--207
--121
--123
--217
Black
---
219
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Black
110
141
142
113
114
145
146
111
205
207
121
123
217
219
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
App - 7
Index
The following table indicates the colors and corresponding numbers available when using the parts display
function XOR drawing mode
When using the XOR for any colors other than the following, preview them in the preview of GT Designer.
APPENDICES
Appendix3 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
Appendix4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2

Version Upgrade (For GOT1000 Series)
The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2.18U.
For using the following functions, use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later.
1 Added GOT main unit

Version of GT
Target Models
Version of OS
Designer2
GT1595-XTBA
2.18U
Standard monitor OS [02.02.**]
GT1585-STBD
2.18U
GT1575-STBD
2.18U
GT1575-VTBD
2.18U
GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD, GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD
2.18U
GT1565-VTBD
2.18U
GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD
2.18U
GT1155-HS-QSBD to GT1150-HS-QLBD
2.18U
2 Added connection types

Item
Bus connection
Description
Supporting connection to Q172HCPU,
Q173HCPU
Direct connection to
Q173HCPU
Version of GT
2.09K
2.09K
CPU
Supporting connection to FX3U series
Computer link
connection
Q173HCPU
Version of OS
Designer2
2.18U
2.09K
GT
GT
15
11
Communication driver
Bus(Q) [01.02.**]
A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24 [01.02.**]
MELSEC-FX[02.02.**]
A/QnA/QCPU,QJ71C24 [01.02.**]
Supporting connection to MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/10
PLC to PLC connection)
connection (PLC to
PLC network)
2.09K
MELSECNET/10 [01.02.**]
Q173HCPU
Supporting connection to CC-Link (Intelligence
CC-Link connection
device station)
(Intelligent device
station)
2.09K
CC-LINK(ID) [01.02.**]
Q173HCPU
App - 8
Appendix4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade

Item
Description
Version of GT
Version of OS
Designer2
GT
GT
15
11
(Via G4)
2.09K
APPENDICES
Supporting connection to CC-Link (Via G4)

CC-Link connection
CC-LINK(G4) [01.02.**]
Q173HCPU
Supporting connection to the Ethernet
2.09K
[01.02.**]
Q173HCPU
OMRON PLC
Extended device range monitored
connection
(The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095, etc.)
KEYENCE PLC
connection
SHARP PLC
connection
TOSHIBA PLC
connection
QJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC
2.09K
OMRON SYSMAC
[01.02.**]
2.18U
Supporting connection to SHARP PLC
2.09K
Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC
2.09K
Index
Ethernet connection
KEYENCE KV700/1000 [02.02.**]
SHARP JW [01.02.**]
TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
[01.02.**]
HITACHI PLC
connection
Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC
2.09K
HITACHI HIDIC H [01.02.**]

HITACHI HIDIC H (Protocol 2)
[01.02.**]
Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC
2.09K
[01.02.**]
MATSUSHITA PLC
connection
Supporting connection to FP-
2.18U
[02.02.**]
Allen-Bradley PLC
Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000/1200/
connection
1500 series
SIEMENS PLC
Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7-200
connection
series
OMRON temperature
Supporting connection to OMRON temperature
controller connection
controller
YAMATAKE
temperature
2.18U
2.18U
AB MicroLogix [02.02.**]
SIEMENS S7-200 [02.02.**]
2.18U
OMRON THERMAC / INPANEL

NEO [02.02.**]
Supporting connection to YAMATAKE

temperature controller
RKC temperature
Supporting connection to RKC temperature
controller
Inverter connection
Supporting connection to inverter
2.18U
YAMATAKE SDC/DMC [02.02.**]
2.18U
RKC SR Mini HG(MODBUS)

[02.02.**]
2.18U
FREQROL 500/700 [02.02.**]
A/QnA/QCPU, QJ71C24, MELDAS
C6* [02.02.**]
CNC connection
Supporting connection to CNC
2.18U
A/QnAQJ71E71/AJ71(Q)E71
[02.02.**]
MELSECNET/10 [02.02.**]
CC-Link(ID) [02.02.**]

App - 9
Item
Description
Supporting connection to servo amplifier
Version of GT
2.09K
Servo amplifier
connection
Supporting connection to MELSERVO-J3

series
Bar code reader

connection
Supporting connection to barcode reader
Version of OS
Designer2
2.18U
2.09K
GT
GT
15
11
GT
GT
15
11
MELSERVO-J2S/M [01.02.**]
MELSERVO-J3,J2S/M [02.02.**]
Extended function OS
Barcode [01.02.**]
GT15
FA transparent
Supporting the FA transparent function via USB
2.09K
GT11
Boot OS [01.02.**.C]
Multiple-GT11
connection
Connection with multiple GT11s
2.09K
3 Added GT Designer2 functions

Item
Description
Ethernet download
Downloading the project data via Ethernet
Basic comment,
Copying comments in column unit on Basic
comment group
Comment or Comment Group, etc.

Improved library structure and added import
function
Version of GT
Version of OS
Designer2
2.09K
2.09K
2.09K
Improved user library structure, expanded the

Library workspace
user library registration capacity, copying the
2.18U
figure data to the user library, etc.

Addition of fixed frame figure
Project data
Matching project data stored in GOT and
matching
project data opened on GT Designer2
Copy ON
OFF
Enables copying of only characters in lamp
Copy OFF
ON
display, touch switch and comment display.
2.18U
2.09K
2.18U
Enables editing of the settings for advanced

alarm observation (advanced user alarm),
Import, Export
alarm history, advanced recipe function and
2.18U
recipe function in the CSV file format and other

format.
Print
Data View
Batch Edit
Screen Preview
Enables printing of header and footer

Enables changing of the settings for the
respective objects in grouped objects
Enables global replacement of channel No.
Enables checking for security level switching
and language switching in image after switching
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U
Wizard for setting the GOT type, controller type

Wizard
and communication settings when creating a
2.18U
new project
App - 10

Item
Description
Version of GT
Version of OS
Designer2
Figure
JPEG file reading enabled
2.09K
Text
Windows
2.09K
fonts applicable
GT
GT
15
11
APPENDICES
4 Added common settings/object functions

KANJI Region
Supporting Chinese (Traditional)
2.18U
Option OS
Standard font (Chinese: Traditional)
GOT Type
Supporting vertical installation type display
Station No. Switching
Designation of the channel No. for which station
Function
No. is switched is possible.
Language Switching
Device
Password Setting
Password can be set for the connection of

motion controller and servo amplifier.
broadcast can be set.

Data save device of MELSEC-Q / QnA ladder
monitor data can be set at GT Designer2.
Time setting for call key ON until the start up of
utility can be set (for 1-point pressing).
Clock Setting
Startup Logo
2.18U
2.00A
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U
Language switching device can be used.
In clock management, both adjust and
GOT Setup
2.18U
Index
[02.02.**]
Designation of the channel No. used for

adjusting and broadcasting is possible.
Function for setting any screen for the GOT
startup screen
Handy GOT Setting
Setting of the grip switch LED of handy GOT
Comment
Comment group can be used.
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U
2.09K

Boot OS [01.02.**.C]
2.18U
2.00A
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U
User defined key window display can be

switched in synchronization with the language
switching device.
Key Window
In the user defined key window, input range
(maximum value) and input range (minimum
value) are displayed.
Lamp
Windows
fonts applicable
2.09K
Touch switch
Windows
fonts applicable
2.09K
2.18U
Function to store NULL (0x00) at the end of

input characters
ASCII Display /
ASCII Input
Function to convert characters input in Kana

into Kanji
Advanced Alarm

2.18U
Option OS
KANA KANJI (JP) [02.02.**]
Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of

bit device with Advanced User Alarm
2.09K

App - 11
Item
Parts Display
Parts Movement
Description
Function for using BMP/JPEG data in memory

card as parts
Panelmeter
Windows
Historical Trend
Function to display the data collected by the
Graph
logging function in trend graph format
Logging Function
Advanced Recipe
Barcode
Test function
Project Script
Screen Script
Object Script
fonts applicable
Function to collect and accumulate device

values
The extended function of the existing recipe

function
Function for loading the data read with bar cord
reader to PLC CPU
Function for changing device value with
displaying test window.
2.09K
2.09K
2.09K
2.18U

2.18U
Option OS
Logging [02.02.**]
2.09K
Option OS
Advanced recipe [01.02.**]
2.09K
2.09K
2.00A
2.18U
2.00A
2.18U
Function to execute scripts in unit of screen
Function to execute scripts in unit of object
key are added.

Key code for historical trend graph is added.
Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion is
added.
App - 12
Version of OS
Designer2
Function to execute scripts in unit of project file
Key codes for increment key and decrement
Key Code
Version of GT
2.18U
Option OS
Object Script [02.02.**]
2.18U
2.18U
2.18U

GT
GT
15
11
Description
Unlimited installation
Extended function OS and option OS can be
of extended function
installed unlimitedly.
OSs and option OSs
(Conventionally, the limit was 10.)
System monitoring
function
Version of GT
2.18U
Function for monitoring/testing device of PLC

CPU or buffer memory of intelligent function
2.09K
module
Network monitor
Function to monitor the network status of
function
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, etc.
Version of OS
Designer2
2.18U
GT
GT
15
11
BootOS [02.02.**.E]
Extended function OS
System monitor [01.02.**]
Option OS
Network monitor [02.02.**]
Index
Item
Option OS
Ladder monitor for MELSEC-A
Ladder monitoring
Function for displaying sequence program
function
loaded to CPU on GOT
[01.02.**]
2.09K
Ladder monitor for MELSEC-Q/QnA

[01.02.**]
Ladder monitor for MELSEC-FX
[01.02.**]
Intelligent module
monitor function
Function to monitor and change the data of

intelligent function module buffer memory using
a dedicated screen
List editor for
Function for displaying/editing sequence
MELSEC-A
program saved from ACPU with list mode
List editor for
Function to display / edit the sequence program
MELSEC-FX
read out from the FXCPU in the list mode
Servo amplifier
Function to monitor the servo amplifier and also
monitor function
to change parameters, execute test run, etc.
Q motion monitor
function
2.18U
2.09K
Intelligent module monitor [02.02.**]

Option OS
List editor for MELSEC-A [01.02.**]
List editor for MELSEC-FX

[02.02.**]
2.18U
Function to execute servo monitor and

parameter setting for motion controller CPU (Q
Option OS
Option OS
2.18U
2.18U
series)
Option OS
Servo amplifier monitor [02.02.**]
Option OS
Q motion monitor [02.02.**]
Function to monitor position display, alarm

CNC monitor function
diagnosis and program and to check tool offset

data at the same level as with the dedicated
2.18U
Option OS
CNC monitor [02.02.**]
MELDAS display unit.

Multi-channel
Function to monitor multiple controllers with a
function
single unit of GOT
2.18U
Use the communication driver,

[02.02.**] or later for each
connection.
Option OS
Function for monitoring each controller from

one GOT/PC or sending a mail from GOT
Gateway function (Mail)

2.09K
[01.02.**]
Gateway function (Server, Client)
Gateway function
[01.02.**]
Supporting the FTP server function
2.18U
APPENDICES
5 Other functions added
Option OS
Gateway functionFTP [02.02.**]

App - 13
INDEX
[A]
Adjust................................................................... 2-43
Advanced alarm display ...................................... 8-89
Advanced alarm function ..................................... 8-19
Advanced alarm observation (Advanced system
alarm)
Before setting ................................................... 8-67
Advanced alarm observation (Advanced user alarm)
Before setting ................................................... 8-28
Advanced alarm popup display ......................... 8-135
Before setting ................................................. 8-137
Setting items .................................................. 8-152
Basic tab ................................................. 8-152
Text tab ................................................... 8-156
Extended tab........................................... 8-158
External output tab.................................. 8-161
Switching of display position .......................... 8-143
Advanced recipe function .................................. 12-26
Before setting ................................................. 12-27
Setting items .................................................. 12-60
Advanced system alarm observation
Setting items .................................................... 8-80
Basic tab ................................................... 8-80
File save tab.............................................. 8-82
Advanced user alarm observation
Setting items .................................................... 8-47
Device tab ................................................. 8-50
File save tab.............................................. 8-56
Basic tab ................................................... 8-48
Alarm classification according to the group ......... 8-42
Alarm classification according to the level ........... 8-42
Alarm function...................................................... 8-15
Alarm history display ................................. 8-17,8-200
Before setting for alarm history display .......... 8-203
Setting items .................................................. 8-211
Basic tab ................................................. 8-211
Frame tab................................................ 8-215
Device (Common) tab ............................. 8-216
Option (Common) tab ............................. 8-224
Extended tab........................................... 8-229
Alarm ID............................................................... 8-28
Alarm list display.................................................. 8-15
Arrangement ........................................................ 5-30
ASCII display ....................................................... 7-56
Before setting for ASCII display ....................... 7-62
Index - 1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-73

Setting items .................................................... 7-64
Basic tab ................................................... 7-64
Extended tab ............................................. 7-66
Trigger tab................................................. 7-69
ASCII input........................................................... 7-56
Before setting for ASCII input........................... 7-62
Precautions ...................................................... 7-73
Setting items .................................................... 7-64
Basic tab ................................................... 7-64
Extended tab ............................................. 7-66
Trigger tab................................................. 7-69
Attributes................................................................ 2-9
Automatic screen saver disable signal ........ 3-35,3-55
Auxiliary settings .................................................. 4-58
[B]
Backlight OFF output signal................................. 3-36
Backlight shutoff detection signal ........................ 3-41
Bar code function ................................................. 13-8
Required knowledge for setting...................... 13-10
Setting items .................................................. 13-14
Bar graph ........................................................... 10-66
Precautions .................................................... 10-79
Required knowledge for bar graph setting ..... 10-67
Setting items .................................................. 10-70
Basic tab ................................................. 10-70
Device/scale tab...................................... 10-72
Extended tab ........................................... 10-74
Trigger tab............................................... 10-76
Base screen ........................................................... 2-1
Basic comment ...................................................... 4-2
Block .................................................................. 12-33
BMP/JPEG file parts ............................................ 4-53
BMP/JPEG/DXF file ............................................. 2-13
Broadcast............................................................. 2-43
Buffering area .............................................. 8-29,8-68
Buffering area size ............................................... 8-45
Buffering size ....................................................... 8-76
Built-in battery voltage drop signal....................... 3-40
Buzzer one-shot output signal ............................. 3-37
Buzzer output signal ............................................ 3-37
Buzzer three-shot output signal ........................... 3-36
[C]
Centering ............................................................. 5-37
Chinese characters .............................................. 2-15
[D]
Data list................................................................ 7-39
Precautions ...................................................... 7-55
Required knowledge for data list...................... 7-41
Setting items .................................................... 7-44
Basic tab ................................................... 7-44
List tab ...................................................... 7-46
Extended tab............................................. 7-51
Case tab ................................................... 7-52
Trigger tab ................................................ 7-54
Data operation function ....................................... 5-55
Default key window.............................................. 4-78
Deletion of advanced system alarms................... 8-72
Description on touch switches for alarm
history display.................................................... 8-230
Device.................................................................... 5-1
Device types for screen switching ......................... 3-6
Drive A empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive A file access error signal ............................ 3-40
APPENDICES
Drive A file accessing signal ................................ 3-40

Drive A full signal ................................................. 3-40
Drive C empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive C file accessing signal................................ 3-40
Drive D empty capacity information ..................... 3-41
Drive D file access error signal ............................ 3-40
Drive D file accessing signal................................ 3-40
Drive D full signal................................................. 3-40
DXF file ................................................................ 2-13
[E]
Error codes .......................................................... 8-78
[F]
Figures................................................................... 2-9
File access error reset signal............................... 3-37
Font...................................................................... 2-15
Forced screen saver enable signal...................... 3-35
Forced screen saver touch-cancel signal ............ 3-35
[G]
Gateway function ............................................... 15-12
GB...................................................................... 2-145
GD ..................................................................... 2-145
GOT bit register ................................................. 2-145
GOT data register .............................................. 2-145
GOT error ............................................................ 8-67
GOT error code.................................................... 3-39
GOT error detection signal .................................. 3-38
GOT error reset signal ......................................... 3-37
GOT ready signal................................................. 3-38
GOT setup ........................................................... 3-86
GOT special register.......................................... 2-145
GOT type ............................................................... 3-1
GS...................................................................... 2-145
[H]
Hard copy ............................................................ 13-1
Precautions ...................................................... 13-7
Setting items .................................................... 13-4
Settings ............................................................ 13-3
Hardcopy sub-signal ............................................ 3-38
Hierarchical alarm................................................ 8-39
Historical mode ............................................ 8-31,8-69
Historical trend graph....................................... 10-118
Precautions .................................................. 10-141
Relevant settings.......................................... 10-119
Required knowledge for historical trend graph
setting........................................................... 10-120
Setting items ................................................ 10-125
Basic tab ............................................... 10-125
Device tab ............................................. 10-128
Extended tab......................................... 10-135
Scale tab ............................................... 10-133
Touch switches for historical trend graph
operation ...................................................... 10-139
Index - 2
INDEXARTS
Clock display ....................................................... 7-75

Precautions ...................................................... 7-81
Setting items .................................................... 7-78
Basic tab ................................................... 7-78
Extended tab............................................. 7-79
Clock function ...................................................... 2-40
Clock setting ........................................................ 3-90
CNC monitor........................................................ 14-9
Collection mode........................................... 8-29,8-68
Comment display................................................. 7-82
Precautions .................................................... 7-105
Setting items of bit comment............................ 7-85
Basic tab ................................................... 7-85
Comment tab ............................................ 7-88
Extended tab............................................. 7-90
Trigger tab ................................................ 7-92
Setting items of word comment........................ 7-94
Basic tab ................................................... 7-94
Comment tab ............................................ 7-95
Extended tab............................................. 7-97
Case tab ................................................... 7-99
Trigger tab .............................................. 7-102
Comment group..................................................... 4-2
Communication Settings...................................... 3-59
CPU error ............................................................ 8-67
Cumulative mode................................................. 8-31
Current cursor display user ID............................. 3-40
Current numeric display object ID ....................... 3-39
Current numeric value input ................................ 3-39
Cursor displaying signal ...................................... 3-40
HQ font ................................................................ 2-15

Human sensor detection signal ........................... 3-38
[I]
Intelligent module monitor ................................... 14-5
[J]
JPEG file.............................................................. 2-13
[K]
KANJI region ....................................................... 2-15
Key code input ..................................................... 3-39
Key code list ...................................................... App-1
Key code read complete signal ........................... 3-35
Key input signal ................................................... 3-38
Key window ......................................................... 4-78
Key window output signal .................................... 3-38
Key-in disable signal............................................ 3-36
[L]
Ladder monitor .................................................... 14-2
Lamp display ......................................................... 6-1
Arrangement and settings .................................. 6-3
Precautions ...................................................... 6-17
Setting items of bit lamp..................................... 6-4
Basic tab ..................................................... 6-4
Text tab ....................................................... 6-5
Extended tab............................................... 6-7
Setting items of word lamp................................. 6-9
Basic tab ..................................................... 6-9
Text tab ..................................................... 6-12
Extended tab............................................. 6-14
Object script tab .......................................... 6-8
Language switching device ................................. 3-21
Layer.................................................................... 2-53
Level .................................................................. 10-15
Precautions .................................................... 10-29
Required knowledge for level setting ............. 10-17
Setting items .................................................. 10-21
Basic tab ................................................. 10-21
Extended tab........................................... 10-23
Case tab.................................................. 10-24
Trigger tab............................................... 10-26
Level device......................................................... 3-29
Line graph.......................................................... 10-49
Precautions .................................................... 10-65
Required knowledge for line graph setting..... 10-50
Setting items .................................................. 10-53
Basic tab ................................................. 10-53
Index - 3
Device/Scale tab ..................................... 10-55

Extended tab ........................................... 10-58
Trigger tab............................................... 10-61
List editor for A..................................................... 14-3
List editor for FX .................................................. 14-4
List editor for MELSEC-A..................................... 14-3
List editor for MELSEC-FX .................................. 14-4
Logging function ................................................ 11-17
Before setting logging .................................... 11-19
Precautions .................................................... 11-50
Setting items of logging setting ...................... 11-38
Basic tab ................................................. 11-38
Device tab ............................................... 11-40
Extended tab ........................................... 11-49
File save tab............................................ 11-44
Setting items of logging setting (List) ............. 11-37
Settings .......................................................... 11-36
[M]
Monitorable PLC CPUs........................................ 2-72
Multi-channel function ........................................ 2-120
[N]
Network error ....................................................... 8-67
Network monitor................................................... 14-6
No alarm collection ...................................... 8-31,8-69
No. switching device ............................................ 3-13
Numeric value error detection signal ................... 3-38
Numeric value Input number................................ 3-39
Numeric value input read complete signal ........... 3-36
Numeric value input signal................................... 3-38
Numerical display .................................................. 7-1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-35
Setting items of numerical display.................... 7-11
Basic tab ................................................... 7-11
Extended tab ............................................. 7-14
Case tab.................................................... 7-16
Trigger tab................................................. 7-18
Numerical input ...................................................... 7-1
Precautions ...................................................... 7-35
Setting items of numerical input ....................... 7-21
Basic tab ................................................... 7-21
Extended Tab............................................ 7-24
Case tab.................................................... 7-28
Trigger tab................................................. 7-31
[O]
Object script ....................................................... 16-47
[P]
Panelmeter .......................................................... 10-1
Precautions .................................................... 10-14
Required knowledge for panelmeter setting .... 10-2
Setting items .................................................... 10-4
Basic tab ................................................... 10-4
Scale/Text tab ........................................... 10-6
Extended tab............................................. 10-8
Case tab ................................................. 10-10
Parts .................................................................... 4-41
Parts display .......................................................... 9-1
Arrangement and settings.................................. 9-9
Precautions ...................................................... 9-32
Relevant settings ....................................... 9-3,9-36
Setting items of bit parts display ...................... 9-10
Basic tab ................................................... 9-10
Extended tab............................................. 9-13
Trigger tab ................................................ 9-14
Setting items of fixed parts display .................. 9-27
Basic tab ................................................... 9-27
Extended tab............................................. 9-30
Setting items of word parts display .................. 9-16
Basic tab ................................................... 9-16
Extended tab............................................. 9-20
Case tab ................................................... 9-21
Trigger tab ................................................ 9-24
Parts movement .................................................. 9-35
Arrangement and setting.................................. 9-47
Precautions ...................................................... 9-73
Setting items of bit parts movement................. 9-48
Basic tab ................................................... 9-48
Extended tab............................................. 9-52
[Q]
Q motion monitor ................................................. 14-7
[R]
Read device......................................................... 3-34
Recipe function .................................................. 12-12
Precautions .......................................... 12-25,12-68
Setting items .................................................. 12-16
Settings .......................................................... 12-15
Recipe processing signal..................................... 3-38
Record ............................................................... 12-35
[S]
Scatter graph ..................................................... 10-93
Precautions .................................................. 10-117
Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
....................................................................... 10-95
Setting items ................................................ 10-102
Index - 4
APPENDICES
Trigger tab................................................. 9-53

Setting items of fixed parts movement ............. 9-67
Basic tab ................................................... 9-67
Extended tab............................................. 9-71
Trigger tab................................................. 9-71
Setting items of word parts movement............. 9-55
Basic tab ................................................... 9-55
Extended tab............................................. 9-60
Case tab.................................................... 9-61
Trigger tab................................................. 9-64
Setting of parts move route .............................. 9-45
Password ............................................................. 3-26
Previous cursor display user ID ........................... 3-40
Previous numeric display object ID...................... 3-39
Previous numeric value input............................... 3-39
Project folder.......................................................... 3-2
Project script ...................................................... 16-10
....................................................................... 16-18
Before setting ................................................. 16-10
Control structure............................................. 16-13
Precautions .................................................... 16-43
Precautions for using BMOV.......................... 16-44
Program example........................................... 16-38
Setting items .................................................. 16-30
Option tab ............................................... 16-35
Project tab ............................................... 16-30
Screen tab............................................... 16-32
Script list ................................................. 16-36
Script symbol tab .................................... 16-33
Settings .......................................................... 16-29
INDEXARTS

....................................................................... 16-65
Before setting................................................. 16-47
Control structure ............................................ 16-52
Precautions .................................................... 16-85
Program examples......................................... 16-80
Setting items .................................................. 16-70
Editing scripts ......................................... 16-75
Object script symbol ............................... 16-78
Settings .......................................................... 16-70
Object shape ....................................................... 5-32
Offset function ..................................................... 5-61
On-screen base screen number .......................... 3-39
Overlap window ..................................................... 2-3
Basic tab ............................................... 10-102

Device/Scale tab ................................... 10-104
Attribute tab........................................... 10-106
Case/Trigger tab ................................... 10-107
Case tab................................................ 10-111
Extended tab......................................... 10-113
Data operation tab ................................ 10-115
Object script tab .................................... 10-116
Screen saving signal ........................................... 3-38
Screen script...................................................... 16-10
Screens ................................................................. 2-1
Security function .................................................. 5-66
Security level ....................................................... 5-66
Servo amplifier monitor........................................ 14-8
Set overlay screen function ................................. 15-1
Check of the settings........................................ 15-3
Precautions ...................................................... 15-4
Standard font ....................................................... 2-15
Startup logo ......................................................... 3-91
State .................................................................... 5-38
Statistics graph .................................................. 10-80
Precautions .................................................... 10-92
Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
....................................................................... 10-82
Setting items .................................................. 10-84
Basic tab ................................................. 10-84
Device/Scale tab ..................................... 10-86
Extended tab........................................... 10-88
Trigger tab............................................... 10-89
Status observation ............................................... 11-1
Precautions .................................................... 11-10
Setting items .................................................... 11-4
Settings ............................................................ 11-3
Superimposed window .......................................... 2-3
Switching device ...................................... 8-101,8-148
Switching of alarm hierarchies................... 8-96,8-144
System alarm......................................................... 8-1
System alarm display ........................................ 8-192
Before setting system alarm........................... 8-194
Related settings ............................................. 8-193
Setting items .................................................. 8-197
Basic tab ................................................. 8-197
Extended tab........................................... 8-198
System information .............................................. 3-34
System monitor.................................... 14-1,14-6,14-7
System signal 1-1 ................................................ 3-35
System signal 1-2 ................................................ 3-37
System signal 2-1 ................................................ 3-38
System signal 2-2 ................................................ 3-40
[T]
Test function ........................................................ 15-9
Index - 5

Setting items .................................................. 15-10
Time action function........................................... 11-11
Precautions .................................................... 11-15
Setting items .................................................. 11-12
Settings .......................................................... 11-11
Touch switch ........................................................ 6-18
Precautions ...................................................... 6-83
Setting items of bit switch................................. 6-24
Basic tab ................................................... 6-24
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-26
Extended tab ............................................. 6-29
Action tab .................................................. 6-33
Trigger tab................................................. 6-43
Setting items of change station No. switch ...... 6-67
Basic tab ................................................... 6-67
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-71
Extended tab ............................................. 6-71
Action tab .................................................. 6-72
Trigger tab................................................. 6-72
Setting items of data set switch........................ 6-44
Basic tab ................................................... 6-44
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-46
Extended tab ............................................. 6-46
Action tab .................................................. 6-47
Trigger tab................................................. 6-47
Setting items of go to screen switch................. 6-56
Basic tab ................................................... 6-56
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-65
Extended tab ............................................. 6-65
Action tab .................................................. 6-66
Trigger tab................................................. 6-66
Setting items of key code switch ...................... 6-73
Basic tab ................................................... 6-73
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-75
Extended tab ............................................. 6-75
Action tab .................................................. 6-76
Trigger tab................................................. 6-76
Setting items of multi action switch .................. 6-77
Basic tab ................................................... 6-77
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-79
Extended tab ............................................. 6-79
Indirect text tab.......................................... 6-80
Trigger tab................................................. 6-81
Setting items of special function switch............ 6-48
Basic tab ................................................... 6-48
Text/Lamp tab ........................................... 6-50
Extended tab ............................................. 6-51
Trigger tab................................................. 6-55
Touch switch for displaying user alarm.............. 8-187
Touch switches for advanced alarm display ...... 8-125
Transparent color................................................. 2-57
Trend graph ....................................................... 10-32
INDEXARTS
APPENDICES
Required knowledge for trend graph setting

....................................................................... 10-33
Setting items .................................................. 10-37
Basic tab ................................................. 10-37
Device/scale tab ..................................... 10-40
Extended tab........................................... 10-42
Trigger tab .............................................. 10-44
Trigger (for display) ............................................. 5-45
Trigger (for write) ................................................. 5-45
TrueType font ...................................................... 2-15
Two tracker mode................................................ 5-37
[U]
User alarm ............................................................. 8-1
User alarm display............................................. 8-170
Before setting user alarm............................... 8-172
Details of display............................................ 8-174
Offset for comment No................................... 8-176
Offset for datailed No. .................................... 8-175
Relevant settings ........................................... 8-171
Setting items .................................................. 8-181
Basic tab ................................................. 8-181
Device tab ............................................... 8-183
Extended tab........................................... 8-185
Trigger tab .............................................. 8-186
Store memory ................................................ 8-177
User-created key window .................................... 4-78
[W]
Window screen ...................................................... 2-2
Windows font ....................................................... 2-15
Write device......................................................... 3-34
Index - 6
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Pentium and celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
VS-FlexGrid ProLEADTOOLS
Copyright 2000 VideoSoft CorporationCopyright (C) 2001 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
Version 2
2/2
Version 2
2/2
MODEL
SW2-GT1000-R-E
MODEL
CODE
1D7M25
SH(NA)-080531ENG-D(0510)MEE

2/2
SW2D5C-GTWK2-E
SW2D5C-GTD2-E

sw2 gt1000 R e

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

sw2 gt1000 R e

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

R

Screen Design Manual

GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual

Screen Design Manual

(For GOT1000 Series)

HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

Note that failure to observe the

[Test operation precautions]

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

(c) Start position for filling patterns

Display magnification: 100%

Position of Paint mark may be shifted and the

Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.09K.

Section 9.1.3 to 9.1.7

Section 9.2.1 to 9.2.6

Section 9.2.3 to 9.2.8

Section 4.4 to 4.5

Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version2.11M.

Section 2.9 to 2.10

Section 15.1 to 15.2

Japanese Manual Version SH-080509-F

Screen Design Manual 1/2

Type/Number of Creatable Screens

Figures and Data Capacity

Specifications of Applicable Characters

Specifications of Available Object Functions

Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU ..................................................... 2 - 43

Base screen specifications ................................................................................................... 2 - 1

Superimposition using layers.............................................................................................. 2 - 53

Controller that can be monitored and the accessible range

Controller that allows monitoring ........................................................................................ 2 - 69

About multi-channel function ............................................................................................ 2 - 120

GOT internal devices ........................................................................................................ 2 - 145

2.10 Cautions for Object Setting

2.11 Precautions for Using Unicode text file

GOT/PLC Type Setting

System Information Setting

Methods of switching station No. ........................................................................................ 3 - 13

Setting Language Switching Device

Switching Station No. Device Setting

Switching Screen Device Setting

List of relevant object items ................................................................................................ 3 - 42

Communication Interface Setting

Setting of GOT Display and Operations

Setting GOT Clock Data (Clock Setting)

3.10 Setting the GOT Startup Logo

4. PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR OBJECT SETUP

Before using BMP/JPEG file parts...................................................................................... 4 - 55

Required knowledge for parts registration .......................................................................... 4 - 41

Registering BMP/JPEG Files for Parts in the Memory Card

Required knowledge for comment registration ..................................................................... 4 - 1

List of relevant object items ................................................................................................ 4 - 63

Key window type................................................................................................................. 4 - 78

Screen Design Manual 2/2

Device setting ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 1

Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT

Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting

Security function setting ..................................................................................................... 5 - 72

Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 63

Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 58